韦兰若篇注释显示巴利原文
Verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā
“Seyyathidaṃ”的意思是“那是什么”或“那如何说”。所谓“非限定指示词”:因为没有限定,故为“非限定”;以此指示义理,故为“指示”;以此言说,故为“词”;指示本身就是词,故为“指示词”;非限定的指示词,即“非限定指示词”,意思是“对最初未限定之时的指示词”。也有人这样说:“因为不说‘yena’而说‘tena’,所以是不作限定而指示的词,即非限定指示词。”由于“yaṃ”“taṃ”等词有恒常关联,所以说“虽未以其自身形式说出”等。其中,“其”指“tena”这个词。“虽未以其自身形式说出”,即虽未在经文中以“yena”这样的形式说出。所谓“以义理成立”,是指以后来舍利弗长老生起的思惟这一义理而成立。因为当思惟成立时,“于何时生起思惟”这一义理便自然成立。因此说:“后来,成为请求制戒之因的具寿舍利弗的思惟已成立”等。说了“tena”之后,由于从义理上说的正是其义,即“yena”,所以这个“yena”就成了“tena”的“复注”。“复注”的意思就是详细注释。显示巴利原文
.Seyyathidanti taṃ katamaṃ, taṃ kathanti vā attho. Aniyamaniddesavacananti natthi etassa niyamoti aniyamo, niddisīyati attho etenāti niddeso, vuccati etenāti vacanaṃ, niddesoyeva vacanaṃ niddesavacanaṃ, aniyamassa niddesavacanaṃ aniyamaniddesavacanaṃ, paṭhamaṃ aniyamitassa samayassa niddesavacananti attho. ‘‘Yenāti avatvā tenāti vuttattā aniyamaṃ katvā niddiṭṭhavacanaṃ aniyamaniddesavacana’’ntipi vadanti. Yaṃtaṃsaddānaṃ niccasambandhabhāvato āha ‘‘tassa sarūpena avuttenapī’’tiādi. Tattha tassāti ‘‘tenā’’ti etassa. Sarūpena avuttenapīti ‘‘yenā’’ti evaṃ sarūpato pāḷiyaṃ avuttenapi. Atthato siddhenāti parabhāge sāriputtattherassa uppajjanakaparivitakkasaṅkhātaatthato siddhena. Parivitakke hi siddhe yena samayena parivitakko udapādīti idaṃ atthato siddhameva hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘aparabhāge hi vinayapaññattiyācanahetubhūto āyasmato sāriputtassa parivitakko siddho’’tiādi. ‘‘Tenā’’ti vatvā tato tadatthameva ‘‘yenā’’ti atthato vuccamānattā ‘‘yenā’’ti ayaṃ ‘‘tenā’’ti etassa paṭiniddeso nāma jāto. Paṭiniddesoti ca vitthāraniddesoti attho.
“后来”中的“hi”字表原因,意思是“因为”。所谓“成为请求制戒之因”,意思是成为这样生起的制戒请求之因:“世尊,时机已到,善逝,时机已到,愿世尊为弟子们制定学处,诵出巴帝摩卡,令此梵行得以久住、长存。”所谓“思惟”,是指这样生起的思惟:“哪些佛陀、世尊的梵行不久住?哪些佛陀、世尊的梵行久住?”由于“yaṃ”“taṃ”等词有恒常关联,所以说“因此,于其时”等。所谓“以前或以后以义理成立”,是指以前或以后生起的义理而成立。所谓“应作复注”,与此“yadidaṃ”相关联。“应作复注”即“yadidaṃ”——此方法,此理趣,在一切律中皆适用,这是意思。或者,“应作复注”即“yadidaṃ”——此理趣,在一切律中皆适用,这是意思。显示巴利原文
Aparabhāge hīti ettha hi-saddo hetumhi, yasmāti attho. Vinayapaññattiyācanahetubhūtoti ‘‘etassa bhagavā kālo, etassa sugata kālo, yaṃ bhagavā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeyya, uddiseyya pātimokkhaṃ. Yathayidaṃ brahmacariyaṃ addhaniyaṃ assa ciraṭṭhitika’’nti evaṃ pavattassa vinayapaññattiyācanassa kāraṇabhūtoti attho. Parivitakkoti ‘‘katamesānaṃ kho buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ brahmacariyaṃ na ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosi, katamesānaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ brahmacariyaṃ ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosī’’ti evaṃ pavatto parivitakko. Yaṃtaṃsaddānaṃ niccasambandhoti āha ‘‘tasmā yena samayenā’’tiādi. Pubbe vā pacchā vā atthato siddhenāti pubbe vā pacchā vā uppannaatthato siddhena. Paṭiniddeso kattabboti etassa ‘‘yadida’’nti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Paṭiniddeso kattabbo’’ti yadidaṃ yaṃ idaṃ vidhānaṃ, ayaṃ sabbasmiṃ vinaye yuttīti attho. Atha vā ‘‘paṭiniddeso kattabbo’’ti yadidaṃ yā ayaṃ yutti, ayaṃ sabbasmiṃ vinaye yuttīti attho.
“此中,此是略示门径”,意即为阐明前述之理,此仅是略示门径,是仅标示方便之意。“门”、“入口”与“方便”,于义理上本为一事。在引出“诸比丘,我将为比丘们制定学处”的经文后,于此作复注云:“以彼苏定那”等。“以彼”乃表原因之具格,其复注亦然,故言“因为其行”等。所谓“前以义理成立”,是指由先前发生之行淫法这一义理而成立。所谓“后以义理成立”,则指由后来发生之未得国王许可而取用木料这一义理而成立。“时”之一词,与“被见到”相关联。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃmukhamattanidassananti tassā yathāvuttayuttiyā paridīpane idaṃ mukhamattanidassanaṃ, upāyamattanidassananti attho. Mukhaṃ dvāraṃ upāyoti hi atthato ekaṃ. ‘‘Tena hi bhikkhave bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāmī’’ti pāḷiṃ dassetvā tattha paṭiniddesamāha ‘‘yena sudinno’’tiādinā. Tenāti hetuatthe karaṇavacanattā tassa paṭiniddesopi tādisoyevāti āha ‘‘yasmā paṭisevī’’ti. Pubbe atthato siddhenāti pubbe uppannamethunadhammapaṭisevanasaṅkhātaatthato siddhena. Pacchā atthato siddhenāti raññā adinnaṃ dārūnaṃ ādiyanasaṅkhātapacchāuppannaatthato siddhena. Samayasaddoti etassa ‘‘dissatī’’ti iminā sambandho.
“和合”指诸缘之集会,意为诸因缘的和合。“刹那”指机会。对此时之词而言,和合是其义,此为关联。“或许我们明日亦能前往,考量了时间与时机”——此处,“时间”乃指前往之合宜时刻。“时机”则指此行之缘的集合,义理上即与此相应之体力,以及他们因缘之无有危难。“考量了”意指以智慧把握、觉察它们,因此,“考量了时间与时机”的意思是:以智慧把握、审察了时间与时机。所说之意为:若我们明日有适合前往的合宜时间,身体具备足够力量,且无其他因前往之缘所导致的不适与障碍,那么,审察了此时间与这称为前往因缘和合之时机后,或许我们明日能来。显示巴利原文
Samavāyeti paccayasāmaggiyaṃ, kāraṇasamavāyeti attho. Khaṇeti okāse. Assāti assa samayasaddassa samavāyo atthoti sambandho. Appeva nāma svepi upasaṅkameyyāma kālañca samayañca upādāyāti ettha kālo nāma upasaṅkamanassa yuttapayuttakālo. Samayo nāma tasseva paccayasāmaggī, atthato tadanurūpaṃ sarīrabalañceva tappaccayaparissayābhāvo ca. Upādānaṃ nāma ñāṇena tesaṃ gahaṇaṃ sallakkhaṇaṃ, tasmā kālañca samayañca paññāya gahetvā upadhāretvāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sace amhākaṃ sve gamanassa yuttakālo bhavissati, kāye balamattā ceva pharissati, gamanapaccayā ca añño aphāsuvihāro na bhavissati, athetaṃ kālañca gamanakāraṇasamavāyasaṅkhātaṃ samayañca upadhāretvā api eva nāma sve āgaccheyyāmāti.
“刹那”指机会。因为诸如来出世等,乃是道与梵行的机会,是获得其缘之因,故刹那即是时。所谓“刹那”与“时”,二者实为同一含义。“大时”意指大集会。“增广之林”即是“林”,于彼林中,即是指树林。“跋陀利,那时你亦未曾通达”——此处,“时”是指圆满学处之因。“跋陀利”是那位比丘之名。其所说之意为:跋陀利,有汝所应通达之理,而汝却未曾通达,未曾觉察。那究竟是何道理呢?曰:“世尊”等。显示巴利原文
Khaṇoti okāso. Tathāgatuppādādiko hi maggabrahmacariyassa okāso tappaccayapaṭilābhahetuttā, khaṇo eva ca samayo. Yo khaṇoti ca samayoti ca vuccati, so ekovāti hi attho. Mahāsamayoti mahāsamūho. Pavuddhaṃ vanaṃ pavanaṃ, tasmiṃ pavanasmiṃ, vanasaṇḍeti attho. Samayopi kho te bhaddāli appaṭividdho ahosīti ettha samayoti sikkhāpadapūraṇassa hetu. Bhaddālīti tassa bhikkhuno nāmaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bhaddāli tayā paṭivijjhitabbayuttakaṃ etaṃ kāraṇaṃ atthi, tampi te na paṭividdhaṃ na sallakkhitanti. Kiṃ taṃ kāraṇanti āha ‘‘bhagavā kho’’tiādi.
在“Uggāhamāno”等词中,“Māno”是那位游方者的本名。由于他能够学习种种事物,人们便以“Uggāhamāno”(能学者)来称呼他,因此被称为“Uggāhamāno”。Samaṇamuṇḍikā之子,即Samaṇamuṇḍikāputto。据说他是提婆达多的侍者。在那里,人们宣说各自的教义和见解,因此那个地方被称为“Samayappavādako”(教义宣说处),即“见解宣说处”。据说,以Caṅkī、Tārukkha、Pokkharasāti等为首的婆罗门,以及尼乾子、裸形外道、游方者等,都聚集于此,宣说、谈论、阐明各自的教义和见解,因此那座园林也被称为“Samayappavādako”。而正是那座园林,因为被一排名为Tindukācīra的柿子树所环绕,所以称为“Tindukācīra”。那里有一间讲堂,因此称为“Ekasālako”(一讲堂)。然而,因为那里最初只建了一间讲堂,后来依靠大福德的Poṭṭhapāda游方者建造了许多讲堂,所以依据最初那一间讲堂而得名。显示巴利原文
Uggāhamāno tiādīsu mānoti tassa paribbājakassa pakatināmaṃ, kiñci kiñci pana uggahetuṃ samatthatāya ‘‘uggāhamāno’’ti naṃ sañjānanti, tasmā ‘‘uggāhamāno’’ti vuccati . Samaṇamuṇḍikāya putto samaṇamuṇḍikāputto. So kira devadattassa upaṭṭhāko. Samayaṃ diṭṭhiṃ pavadanti etthāti samayappavādako, tasmiṃ samayappavādake, diṭṭhippavādaketi attho. Tasmiṃ kira ṭhāne caṅkītārukkhapokkharasātipabhutayo brāhmaṇā nigaṇṭhācelakaparibbājakādayo ca paribbājakā sannipatitvā attano attano samayaṃ diṭṭhiṃ pavadanti kathenti dīpenti, tasmā so ārāmo ‘‘samayappavādako’’ti vuccati, sveva tindukācīrasaṅkhātāya timbarurukkhapantiyā parikkhittattā ‘‘tindukācīra’’nti vuccati. Ekā sālā etthāti ekasālako. Yasmā panettha paṭhamaṃ ekā sālā katā ahosi, pacchā mahāpuññaṃ poṭṭhapādaparibbājakaṃ nissāya bahū sālā katā, tasmā tameva ekaṃ sālamupādāya laddhanāmavasena ‘‘ekasālako’’ti vuccati. Mallikāya pana pasenadirañño deviyā uyyānabhūto so pupphaphalasañchanno ārāmoti katvā ‘‘mallikāya ārāmo’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gato. Tasmiṃ samayappavādake tindukācīre ekasālake mallikāya ārāme. Paṭivasatīti tasmiṃ vāsaphāsutāya vasati.
“Diṭṭhe dhamme”意为现世,即当前的生命体。“Attho”是增长、利益。“Samparāyiko”意指由于业和烦恼而应被趋向、应被到达的来世,即他方世界;与此相关的,就是“Samparāyiko”,即来世的利益。“Atthābhisamayā”是指如前所述两种利益——现世与来世利益的获得。因为来世的利益也是由因缘成就而获得,所以将此二利合称为“Atthābhisamayā”(利益的通达)。以智慧(dhiyā)而把握(rāti)者,名为“Dhīro”(智者);或以拥有智慧(dhī)而称为“Dhīro”。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhe dhammeti paccakkhe attabhāve. Atthoti vuḍḍhi. Samparāyikoti kammakilesavasena samparetabbato sampāpuṇitabbato samparāyo, paraloko. Tattha niyutto samparāyiko, paralokattho. Atthābhisamayāti yathāvuttaubhayatthasaṅkhātahitapaṭilābhā. Samparāyikopi hi attho kāraṇassa nipphannattā paṭiladdho nāma hotīti tamatthadvayaṃ ekato katvā ‘‘atthābhisamayā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dhiyā paññāya rāti gaṇhātīti dhīro. Atha vā dhī paññā etassa atthīti dhīro.
“Sammā mānābhisamayā”意为通过正断除慢。“Sammā”一词在此说明以最上道智彻底断除慢。在“苦的逼迫义”等表述中,苦圣谛的逼迫,即对具苦者的伤害、令其不得自在,逼迫本身就是“逼迫义”,这是将语基“tthakāra”转作“ṭṭhakāra”来说的。其余诸义亦同此理。由诸缘和合而成的状态,是“有为义”。热恼,即依苦苦等而起的烧灼、燃烧。变易,即由于老与死而有两种方式的变异性。应被通达、应被证悟者,即是“abhisamayo”(通达),通达本身就是“abhisamayaṭṭho”(通达义),即逼迫等。因为它们以应被通达的状态而归为一类,故称“通达义”;或者,作为通达、证悟的对象领域之义,即是“通达义”,因此逼迫等本身,由于同属通达的对象领域这一共性,而统一称为“通达义”。显示巴利原文
Sammā mānābhisamayāti mānassa sammā pahānena. Sammāti iminā mānassa aggamaggañāṇena samucchedappahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭhotiādīsu dukkhasaccassa pīḷanaṃ taṃsamaṅgino hiṃsanaṃ avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ, pīḷanameva attho pīḷanaṭṭho, tthakārassa ṭṭhakāraṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi. Samecca paccayehi katabhāvo saṅkhataṭṭho. Santāpo dukkhadukkhatādivasena santāpanaṃ paridahanaṃ. Vipariṇāmo jarāya maraṇena cāti dvidhā vipariṇāmetabbatā. Abhisametabbo paṭivijjhitabboti abhisamayo, abhisamayova attho abhisamayaṭṭho, pīḷanādīni. Tāni hi abhisametabbabhāvena ekībhāvaṃ upanetvā ‘‘abhisamayaṭṭho’’ti vuttāni, abhisamayassa vā paṭivedhassa visayabhūto attho abhisamayaṭṭhoti tāneva pīḷanādīni abhisamayassa visayabhāvūpagamanasāmaññato ekattena vuttāni.
在此,由于前缀仅起显明作用,而“samaya”一词本身才是表达各个意义的词语,故在解释“samaya”的词义时,也提起了带有前缀的“abhisamaya”。其中,“samaya”指:伴随因缘的和合而集合、会合,即“聚集”。道与梵行在此会合、聚集于作为其所依的有情中,故“samaya”指“刹那”。诸法在此中,或借此,与俱生法等在生起等方面一同集合,故“samaya”指“时间”。因为时间从真实义上并非实有,仅是法的转起,但它作为法转起的所依、如同原因一样,以假立的方式被言说。各部分平等地、一同地运行、转起、安住,故“samaya”指“集合”,如同“samudāya”(集合)一词。因为集合正是各部分一同安住。当其他缘相遇时,果从此中生起、转起,故“samaya”指“因”,如同“samudaya”(集)一词。它结合、连结,以结缚的状态,或因牢固执取的状态,那些与之相应的有情便依其执著而运行、转起,故“samaya”指“见”。因为以见结,有情被极度地束缚。聚集、会合、和合,因显示巴利原文
Ettha ca upasaggānaṃ jotakamattattā tassa tassa atthassa vācako samayasaddo evāti samayasaddassa atthuddhārepi saupasaggo abhisamayasaddo vutto. Tattha sahakārīkāraṇasannijjhaṃ sameti samavetīti samayo, samavāyo. Sameti samāgacchati maggabrahmacariyaṃ ettha tadādhārapuggalehīti samayo, khaṇo. Samenti ettha, etena vā saṃgacchanti dhammā sahajātadhammehi uppādādīhi vāti samayo, kālo. Dhammappavattimattatāya atthato abhūtopi hi kālo dhammappavattiyā adhikaraṇaṃ kāraṇaṃ viya ca parikappanāmattasiddhena rūpena voharīyati. Samaṃ, saha vā avayavānaṃ ayanaṃ pavatti avaṭṭhānanti samayo, samūho yathā ‘‘samudāyo’’ti. Avayavena sahāvaṭṭhānameva hi samūho. Paccayantarasamāgame eti phalaṃ etasmā uppajjati pavattati cāti samayo, hetu yathā ‘‘samudayo’’ti. Sameti saṃyojanabhāvato sambandho eti attano visaye pavattati, daḷhaggahaṇabhāvato vā taṃsaṃyuttā ayanti pavattanti sattā yathābhinivesaṃ etenāti samayo, diṭṭhi. Diṭṭhisaṃyojanena hi sattā ativiya bajjhanti. Samiti saṅgati samodhānanti samayo, paṭilābho. Samassa nirodhassa yānaṃ, sammā vā yānaṃ apagamo appavattīti samayo, pahānaṃ. Ñāṇena abhimukhaṃ sammā etabbo adhigantabboti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ aviparīto sabhāvo. Abhimukhabhāvena sammā eti gacchati bujjhatīti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvāvabodho. Evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe samayasaddassa pavatti veditabbā.
难道不是词语依据单一意义而确立,一个词不能表达多个意义吗?的确如此,当考虑到特定词语时。因为就特定词语而言,一个词表达多个意义是不可能的。表达时间意义的“samaya”一词,并不表达聚集等意义。然而在此,由于那些种种意义都具有被“samaya”一词所称说的共通性,而说“samaya”一词有多义性。在一切解释词义之处,都应如此理解其意趣。而在此处,它的意义是“时间”。因为在此处,“samaya”一词的意义是时间,聚集等意义于此并不适用,而且如同地点、说法者等一样,时间应作为因缘被指出。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca atthamattaṃ paṭicca saddā abhinivisanti, na ekena saddena aneke atthā abhidhīyantīti? Saccametaṃ saddavisese apekkhite. Saddavisese hi apekkhiyamāne ekena saddena anekatthābhidhānaṃ na sambhavati. Na hi yo kālattho samayasaddo, soyeva samūhādiatthaṃ vadati. Ettha pana tesaṃ tesaṃ atthānaṃ samayasaddavacanīyatāsāmaññamupādāya anekatthatā samayasaddassa vuttā. Evaṃ sabbattha atthuddhāre adhippāyo veditabbo. Idha panassa kālo atthoti assa samayasaddassa idha kālo attho samavāyādīnaṃ atthānaṃ idha asambhavato desadesakādīnaṃ viya nidānabhāvena kālassa apadisitabbato ca.
不用受格与处格来说明,却在此处以具格来说明,是为了确定其用意,于是以反问的方式提出诘问:“此处说”等。这里“于彼时”在此处是指诡辩者所说,这是其义。“然后”表示欲进行诘问,“不然”与此同义。为何以具格来说明?这是连结。应以处格来说明,这是应连结的。此处也应引“如同”一词来连接。“于彼处”是指在那些经与阿毗达摩中。“如此”是指以受格与处格。“此处”是指在此律中。“别法”是指以具格。“完全”是指从开始直到说法结束为止,完全而无间断,这是其义。“以悲住”是指以利益他人的修行所称为的悲住。正因如此,由于悲是说法之因,此处将利益他人的修行称为“悲住”,而非悲与等至之住。因为在说法时,以法为所缘的说法智与以众生为所缘的大悲不可能同时生起,所缘不同故。因此应知,此处“悲住”是指依于悲而转起、称为利益他人修行的住。为了阐明其义,即为了显示完全结合之义,而作了受格说明,如同“他学习一个月”一样。显示巴利原文
Upayogavacanena bhummavacanena ca niddesamakatvā idha karaṇavacanena niddese payojanaṃ niddhāretukāmo parammukhena codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti ‘‘etthāhā’’tiādi. Ettha ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti imasmiṃ ṭhāne vitaṇḍavādī āhāti attho. Athāti codanāya kattukāmataṃ dīpeti, nanūti iminā samānattho. Kasmā karaṇavacanena niddeso katoti sambandho. Bhummavacanena niddeso katoti yojetabbaṃ. Etthāpi ‘‘yathā’’ti idaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tatthāti tesu suttābhidhammesu. Tathāti upayogabhummavacanehi. Idhāti imasmiṃ vinaye. Aññathāti karaṇavacanena. Accantamevāti ārambhato paṭṭhāya yāva desanāniṭṭhānaṃ, tāva accantameva, nirantaramevāti attho. Karuṇāvihārenāti parahitapaṭipattisaṅkhātena karuṇāvihārena. Tathā hi karuṇānidānattā desanāya idha parahitapaṭipatti ‘‘karuṇāvihāro’’ti vuttā, na pana karuṇāsamaāpattivihāro. Na hi desanākāle desetabbadhammavisayassa desanāñāṇassa sattavisayāya mahākaruṇāya sahuppatti sambhavati bhinnavisayattā, tasmā karuṇāvasena pavatto parahitapaapattisaṅkhāto vihāro idha karuṇāvihāroti veditabbo. Tadatthajotanatthanti accantasaṃyogatthadīpanatthaṃ upayoganiddeso kato yathā ‘‘māsaṃ ajjhetī’’ti.
‘依处义’即所依之义。‘有’是指作用;以作用显示另一作用的特征,便是以‘有’来显示‘有’的特征,此义即是以有显示有之特征义。然而,在阿毗达摩中,如何能具有上述两种含义呢?因此指出:依处即是时间义与集合义。其中,称为时间的意义是时间义,称为集合的意义是集合义;或者,时间一词的意义即时间义,集合一词的意义即集合义。那便是‘等起’。其意为:时间义与集合义所构成的等起,乃是阿毗达摩中所说触等诸法的依处、所依;当在任何时间、任何法聚中,欲界善心生起时,就在那一时间、那一个聚中,触等诸法亦存在,这便是此处所说的含义。显示巴利原文
Adhikaraṇatthoti ādhārattho. Bhāvo nāma kiriyā, kiriyāya kiriyantaralakkhaṇaṃ bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ, soyevattho bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇattho. Kathaṃ pana abhidhamme yathāvuttaatthadvayasambhavoti āha ‘‘adhikaraṇañhī’’tiādi. Tattha kālasaṅkhāto attho kālattho, samūhasaṅkhāto attho samūhattho. Atha vā kālasaddassa attho kālattho, samūhasaddassa attho samūhattho. Ko so? Samayo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kālattho samūhattho ca samayo tattha abhidhamme vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ ādhāroti yasmiṃ kāle dhammapuñje vā kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva kāle puñje ca phassādayopi hontīti ayañhi tattha attho.
若问:这所谓的时间与集合,本身只是依于概念施设的世俗假名,如何能成为那里所说诸法的所依呢?此无过失。正如时间虽由自性法所限定,于胜义上并不存在,却被施设为所依,因为在它之前及之后都不存在——如在‘上午出生,傍晚去世’等说法中那样;同样,集合虽离其部分而并不存在,唯是假立而成,却被施设为诸部分的所依——如在‘树上有枝’、‘从麦堆中长出’等说法中那样。此处也应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Nanu cāyaṃ upādāya paññatto kālo samūho ca vohāramattako, so kathaṃ ādhāro tattha vuttadhammānanti? Nāyaṃ doso. Yathā hi kālo sabhāvadhammaparicchinno sayaṃ paramatthato avijjamānopi ādhārabhāvena paññatto taṅkhaṇappavattānaṃ tato pubbe parato ca abhāvato ‘‘pubbaṇhe jāto sāyanhe gacchatī’’tiādīsu, samūho ca avayavavinimutto avijjamānopi kappanāmattasiddho avayavānaṃ ādhārabhāvena paññapīyati ‘‘rukkhe sākhā, yavarāsimhi sambhūto’’tiādīsu, evamidhāpīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
说明了阿毗达摩中依处义的存在之后,现在为说明以有显示有之特征义的存在,而说:‘称为刹那、合会、因的……’等。其中,‘刹那’并非通常的八刹那,而是指第九种——即名为佛出世之刹那;或者,也可将之理解为此处的空间义,即如《增支部》4.31中所说:‘诸比丘,有此四轮,具足它们的天与人能令四轮运转。’这四轮即:住于适宜之地、亲近善士、自身的正直志向,以及过去所积的福德。将这四种轮合起来,从善法生起的空间这一意义来说,便可知为‘刹那’,因为它们确实是善法生起的空间。所谓‘合会’,是指如‘缘于眼与色而生起眼识’(中部、相应部等处)所指示的那样,以产生眼识等共同果的方式而安立的眼、色等诸缘的集合,因为眼与色等诸缘有眼识等共同的果。所谓‘因’,即能生之因。对于称为如前所述的刹那、称为合会、称为因的等起,以‘有’——即存在——来显示其中触等诸法的‘有’,从而使它被了知,这是此处的含义。也就是说,如同‘在母牛被挤奶时去了,在挤完奶时回来了’——以挤奶的作用来显示去、来的作用;同样地,在此处,当说‘在任何等起时,在那个等起时’时,‘存在’这一含义便自然被了知,因为没有那等起时,就没有那些法。显示巴利原文
Abhidhamme ādhāratthasambhavaṃ dassetvā idāni bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇatthasambhavaṃ dassento āha ‘‘khaṇasamavāyahetusaṅkhātassā’’tiādi. Tattha khaṇo nāma aṭṭhakkhaṇavinimutto navamo buddhuppādasaṅkhāto khaṇo, yāni vā panetāni ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, cakkāni yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussānaṃ catucakkaṃ pavattatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.31) ettha patirūpadesavāso, sappurisūpanissayo, attasammāpaṇidhi, pubbe ca katapuññatāti cattāri cakkāni vuttāni, tāni ekajjhaṃ katvā okāsaṭṭhena khaṇoti veditabbo. Tāni hi kusaluppattiyā okāsabhūtāni. Samavāyo nāma ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa’’nti (ma. ni. 1.204; 3.421; saṃ. ni. 4.60) evamādinā niddiṭṭhā cakkhuviññāṇādisaṅkhātasādhāraṇaphalanipphādakattena saṇṭhitā cakkhurūpādipaccayasāmaggī. Cakkhurūpādīnañhi cakkhuviññāṇādisādhāraṇaphalaṃ. Hetūti janakahetu. Yathāvuttakhaṇasaṅkhaātassa samavāyasaṅkhātassa hetusaṅkhātassa ca samayassa bhāvena sattāya tesaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ bhāvo sattā lakkhīyati viññāyatīti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā ‘‘gāvīsu duyhamānāsu gato, duddhāsu āgato’’ti dohanakiriyāya gamanakiriyā lakkhīyati, evamidhāpi ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, tasmiṃ samaye’’ti ca vutte ‘‘satī’’ti ayamattho viññāyamāno eva hoti aññakiriyāya sambandhābhāve padatthassa sattāvirahābhāvatoti samayassa sattākiriyāya cittassa uppādakiriyā phassādibhavanakiriyā ca lakkhīyatīti. Ayañhi tattha attho yasmiṃ yathāvutte khaṇe paccayasamavāye hetumhi ca sati kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva khaṇe paccayasamavāye hetumhi ca sati phassādayopi hontīti . Tadatthajotanatthanti adhikaraṇatthassa bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇatthassa ca dīpanatthaṃ.
此处“idha panā”意为“在此律中”。因义与作义二者皆有可能:如“以食物而住,以明而住”等,可有因义;如“以斧砍,以锄掘”等,可有作义。为说明如何有此可能,故说“yo hi so”等。在“以彼时为因、为作”这句中,诸所缘境之违犯本身即是制戒之因,亦即是作。世尊为制戒故,最初于各处观察他们成制戒因之违犯而住时,由于观察他们违犯并以此为因而住,违犯的因义便得成立,正如“以食物而住,即观察食物并以此为因而住”等。及至制戒时,世尊正是依先前已发生之违犯而制定学处,因此违犯成为完成制戒的手段,其作义亦得成立,正如“以剑砍”等。复次,世尊观察违犯时亦一并观察与违犯相关之时节而住,故此中时节亦具因义;而于制定学处时,世尊不超越诸违犯之时节,即以彼时作为手段而制戒,故作为违犯所依的时节亦具作义。由此理路,时节亦获得因义与作义,故说“以彼时为因、为作”。若依非理路而言,则唯违犯本身是因、是作。因其于违犯刹那为因,后又于制戒时成为作。显示巴利原文
Idha panāti imasmiṃ vinaye. Hetuattho karaṇattho ca sambhavatīti ‘‘annena vasati, vijjāya vasatī’’tiādīsu viya hetuattho ‘‘pharasunā chindati, kudālena khaṇatī’’tiādīsu viya karaṇattho ca sambhavati. Kathaṃ sambhavatīti āha ‘‘yo hi so’’tiādi. Tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtenāti ettha pana taṃtaṃvatthuvītikkamova sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hetu ceva karaṇañca. Tathā hi yadā bhagavā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā paṭhamameva tesaṃ tesaṃ tattha tattha taṃtaṃsikkhāpadapaññattihetubhūtaṃ vītikkamaṃ apekkhamāno viharati, tadā taṃ taṃ vītikkamaṃ apekkhitvā tadatthaṃ vasatīti siddho vatthuvītikkamassa hetubhāvo ‘‘annena vasati, annaṃ apekkhitvā tadatthāya vasatī’’tiādīsu viya. Sikkhāpadapaññattikāle pana teneva pubbasiddhena vītikkamena sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetīti sikkhāpadapaññattiyā sādhakatamattā karaṇabhāvopi vītikkamasseva siddho ‘‘asinā chindatī’’tiādīsu viya. Vītikkamaṃ pana apekkhamāno teneva saddhiṃ tannissayakālampi apekkhitvā viharatīti kālassapi idha hetubhāvo vutto, sikkhāpadaṃ paññapento ca taṃ taṃ vītikkamakālaṃ anatikkamitvā teneva kālena sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetīti vītikkamanissayassa kālassapi karaṇabhāvo vutto, tasmā iminā pariyāyena kālassapi hetubhāvo karaṇabhāvo ca labbhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtenā’’ti. Nippariyāyato pana vītikkamoyeva hetubhūto karaṇabhūto ca. So hi vītikkamakkhaṇe hetu hutvā pacchā sikkhāpadapaññāpane karaṇampi hotīti.
“制定诸学处”是指:于询问违犯后,集合比丘僧团,审问犯事之人并加以呵责,进而未超越事发之时,即以彼时为作而制定诸学处。“且观察制戒之因”是指:如同第三波罗夷等,观察他们成为制戒之因的诸所缘境于违犯时之情形,以彼时为因而世尊住于各处,此即其义。由于有“制定诸学处且观察制戒之因”之言,故虽本应说“以彼时为作、为因”,此处先说“为因”,意在强调因义。实则,世尊住于毘兰若时,观察长老心中生起请佛制戒之念的那个时分,以彼时为因而住,此于三部《甘提帕达》中均有说明。然而,此事又何必以理推论?须知阿阇梨于此原无次第上的固定意趣,应如是解。故《长部注》中亦言“以彼时为因、为作”等,正用此次第。彼处先说“为因”,并非为表明在“以彼时住于毘兰若”句中意在因义。亦有言:“制定诸学处时,以具因、具作之时而住;观察制戒之因时,以具因之时而住,应如此建立文脉联系。”“为了阐明彼义”指为阐明因义或作义。“此处”即此律中。“于此有偈”是说为总摄前义而于此有偈。“于他处”则指他处。显示巴利原文
Sikkhāpadānipaññāpayantoti vītikkamaṃ pucchitvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātāpetvā otiṇṇavatthukaṃ puggalaṃ paṭipucchitvā vigarahitvā ca taṃ taṃ vatthuṃ otiṇṇakālaṃ anatikkamitvā teneva kālena karaṇabhūtena sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto. Sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamānoti tatiyapārājikādīsu viya sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hetubhūtaṃ taṃ taṃ vatthuṃ vītikkamasamayaṃ apekkhamāno tena samayena hetubhūtena bhagavā tattha tattha vihāsīti attho. ‘‘Sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno’’ti vacanato ‘‘tena samayena karaṇabhūtena hetubhūtenā’’ti evaṃ vattabbepi paṭhamaṃ ‘‘hetubhūtenā’’ti vacanaṃ idha hetuatthassa adhippetattā vuttaṃ. Bhagavā hi verañjāyaṃ viharanto therassa sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanahetubhūtaṃ parivitakkasamayaṃ apekkhamāno tena samayena hetubhūtena vihāsīti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Kiṃ panettha yutticintāya, ācariyassa idha kamavacanicchā natthīti evametaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Teneva dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyampi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paribbājakakathāvaṇṇanā) ‘‘tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtenā’’tiādinā ayameva anukkamo vutto. Na hi tattha paṭhamaṃ ‘‘hetubhūtenā’’ti vacanaṃ idha ‘‘tena samayena verañjāyaṃ viharatī’’ti ettha hetuatthassa adhippetabhāvadīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtena samayena vihāsi, sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno hetubhūtena samayena vihāsīti evamettha sambandho kātabbo’’tipi vadanti. Tadatthajotanatthanti hetuatthassa karaṇatthassa vā dīpanatthaṃ. Idhāti imasmiṃ vinaye. Hoti cetthāti ettha imasmiṃ padese yathāvuttatthasaṅgahavasena ayaṃ gāthā hoti. Aññatrāti suttābhidhammesu.
“古师”指注释师。所谓“唯说法的差别”,即仅在言辞上有别,由此表明于经与律中,有格位变化的情形。“我们将在后文解释其义”是说于后文出现“itipi so bhagavā”等处时再作解释。关于“Verañjā”一词,有种种释说,如:“因不以强力征税,人民无有压迫、无有过失,故离尘垢,名为毘兰若”;“如《塞利商贾本生》中,因建于提婆达多生起怨恨之处,故此处生起怨恨,名为毘兰若”;“因对进入者以舞乐集会、嚼食啖食及庄严具等种种资具令其欢喜,故以种种方式令欢喜,名为毘兰若”;“因战胜敌对而建立,故战胜怨恨而生,名为毘兰若”;“因建于名为毘兰若的仙人的隐居处,故名为毘兰若”。为明这些并非要点,仅是彼城之名,故说:“Verañjā 是某座城的别名”。“近处义用依格”,如“在恒河,牛行走;在井中,有嘎嘎族”等。“无差别”是指无特殊限定,如同“以巴帝摩卡律仪防护而住”“成就初禅而住”“以与慈俱行之心遍满一方而住”“由不作意一切相,成就无相心定而住”等,仅由相邻词语的关联而显。显示巴利原文
Porāṇāti aṭṭhakathācariyā. Abhilāpamattabhedoti vacanamattena viseso. Tena suttavinayesu vibhattivipariṇāmo katoti dasseti. Parato atthaṃ vaṇṇayissāmāti parato ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā āgataṭṭhāne vaṇṇayissāma. Verañjāyanti ettha ‘‘balikaraggahaṇena janassa pīḷābhāvato niddosattā vigato rajo assāti verañjā, serivāṇijajātake devadattassa veruppannapadese katattā veraṃ ettha jātanti verañjā, paviṭṭhapaviṭṭhe naṭasamajjādīhi khādanīyabhojanīyālaṅkārādīhi ca vividhehi upakaraṇehi rañjanato vividhehi rañjayatīti verañjā, paṭipakkhe abhibhavitvā katabhāvato veraṃ abhibhavitvā jātāti verañjā, verañjassa nāma isino assamaṭṭhāne katattā verañjā’’ti evamādinā keci vaṇṇayanti. Kiṃ iminā, nāmamattametaṃ tassa nagarassāti dassento āha ‘‘verañjāti aññatarassa nagarassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Samīpatthe bhummavacananti ‘‘gaṅgāyaṃ gāvo caranti, kūpe gaggakula’’ntiādīsu viya. Avisesenāti ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharati. Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharati. Sabbanimittānaṃ amanasikārā animittaṃ cetosamādhiṃ samāpajjitvā viharatī’’tiādīsu viya saddantarasannidhānasiddhena visesaparāmasanena vinā. Atha vā avisesenāti na visesena, vihārabhāvasāmaññenāti attho.
“威仪……住”:指威仪住、天住、梵住、圣住这四种住。其中,“行”指活动、运行,是身业、身体的行为。由于它是此活动借以进行的途径,故称“威仪路”,即站立、坐等姿态。若无站立、坐等姿态,任何身业都无法进行,因为有的人具足站立,以身体做某件事;有的人则具足行走等。“住”即居住,或依之而住,因此威仪本身即是住,称为威仪住。从义理上说,它是由站立、坐等姿态所生起的四相续色聚之相续。生于天者为天,此处指因多住于彼处而生于梵众天等天界的意思。或者,能成就天威神力者为天,或因具神通、转向而有大行境者为天。既是天又是住,故为天住;或能带来天界状态的住为天住,即广大禅那。无色等至也包含在此中。但在《导论》中说“四无色等至为不动住”,那是如同慈心禅那等被称为梵住一样,是就其修习的特殊状态而说。而在注释书中,由于同样能带来天界状态,它们也被称为“天住”。梵天们的住为梵住,或者说梵天们即是住,故为梵住。其意为:通过施与利益等方式活动,成为如同梵天般最殊胜的住,即慈心禅那等四梵住。圣者们的最胜住为圣住,或不与其他共通,因此圣者们的住即为圣住。显示巴利原文
Iriyāpatha…pe… vihāresūti iriyāpathavihāro dibbavihāro brahmavihāro ariyavihāroti etesu catūsu vihāresu. Tattha iriyanaṃ pavattanaṃ iriyā, kāyappayogo kāyikakiriyā. Tassā pavattanupāyabhāvato iriyāya pathoti iriyāpatho, ṭhānanisajjādi. Na hi ṭhānanisajjādīhi avatthāhi vinā kañci kāyikakiriyaṃ pavattetuṃ sakkā. Ṭhānasamaṅgī vā hi kāyena kiñci kareyya gamanādīsu aññatarasamaṅgī vāti. Viharaṇaṃ, viharati etenāti vā vihāro, iriyāpathova vihāro iriyāpathavihāro, so ca atthato ṭhānanisajjādiākārappavatto catusantatirūpappabandhova. Divi bhavo dibbo, tattha bahulappavattiyā brahmapārisajjādidevalokabhavoti attho. Tattha yo dibbānubhāvo tadatthāya saṃvattatīti vā dibbo, abhiññābhinīhāravasena mahāgatikattā vā dibbo, dibbo ca so vihāro cāti dibbavihāro, dibbabhāvāvaho vā vihāro dibbavihāro, mahaggatajjhānāni. Āruppasamāpattiyopi hi ettheva saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Nettiyaṃ pana ‘‘catasso āruppasamāpattiyo āneñjavihāro’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ mettājhānādīnaṃ brahmavihāratā viya tāsaṃ bhāvanāvisesabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana dibbabhāvāvahasāmaññato tāpi ‘‘dibbavihārā’’tveva vuttā. Brahmānaṃ vihārā brahmavihārā, brahmāno vā vihārā brahmavihārā, hitūpasaṃharādivasena pavattiyā brahmabhūtā seṭṭhabhūtā vihārāti attho, mettājhānādikā catasso appamaññāyo. Ariyā uttamā vihārāti ariyavihārā, anaññasādhāraṇattā ariyānaṃ vā vihārā ariyavihārā, catasso phalasamāpattiyo. Visesato pana rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānaṃ catasso appamaññāyo catutthajjhānikaphalasamāpatti ca bhagavato dibbabrahmaariyavihārā.
“具足某一种住之阐明”:指对前述诸住中,具足某一种住的状态的阐明。当世间贪、嗔、痴增盛时,世尊为了以自身的行持调伏它们,而具足天住、梵住、圣住而住。确实如此:当有情在欲乐中邪行时,世尊即以天住而住,为令他们生起无贪善根,心想:“或许他们见此行持而生欢喜,由此离染于欲。”当有情为了权势而邪行时,世尊即以梵住而住,为令他们生起无嗔善根,心想:“或许他们见此行持而生欢喜,以无嗔止息嗔恚。”当出家众因法事而生起争论时,世尊即以圣住而住,为令他们生起无痴善根,心想:“或许他们见此行持而生欢喜,以无痴止息愚痴。”如此,世尊通过这些天住、梵住、圣住,为有情带来、施与、引导、产生、令生起种种利益安乐,故说为“住”。显示巴利原文
Aññataravihārasamaṅgīparidīpananti yathāvuttavihāresu aññataravihārasamaṅgībhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Bhagavā hi lobhadosamohussannakāle loke tassa sakāya paṭipattiyā vinayanatthaṃ dibbabrahmaaayavihāre upasampajja viharati. Tathā hi yadā sattā kāmesu vippaṭipajjanti, tadā kira bhagavā dibbena vihārena viharati tesaṃ alobhakusalamūluppādanatthaṃ ‘‘appeva nāma imaṃ paṭipattiṃ disvā ettha ruciṃ uppādentā kāmesu virajjeyyu’’nti. Yadā pana issariyatthaṃ sattesu vippaṭipajjanti, tadā pana brahmavihārena viharati tesaṃ adosakusalamūluppādanatthaṃ ‘‘appeva nāma imaṃ paṭipattiṃ disvā ettha ruciṃ uppādetvā adosena dosaṃ vūpasameyyu’’nti. Yadā pana pabbajitā dhammādhikaraṇaṃ vivadanti, tadā ariyavihārena viharati tesaṃ amohakusalamūluppādanatthaṃ ‘‘appeva nāma imaṃ paṭipattiṃ disvā tattha ruciṃ uppādetvā amohena mohaṃ vūpasameyyu’’nti. Evañca katvā imehi dibbabrahmaariyavihārehi sattānaṃ vividhaṃ hitasukhaṃ harati upaharati upaneti janeti uppādetīti ‘‘viharatī’’ti vuccati.
然而,世尊从未不以威仪住而住,因为离此则无法维持身体。正因如此,威仪住也是天住等共同的住,故说“但在此处”等。“威仪结合之阐明”:由于没有对其他住结合阐明的特别说明,且威仪结合阐明的意义已经成就,故如此说。而在这一解释中,“viharati”的“vi-”表示分离之义,“harati”意为引导、进行,故说为“分离后引导”。对此,针对内在的诘问:“谁以什么分离?如何对谁进行?”而说“因为他……”等。“他”指世尊。虽然世尊即使仅以一种威仪也能较长时间地维持身体,但为了显示所执受身体的本质,而说“一种威仪的障碍”等。“不坠落”即不倒下。然而,因世尊无论住在何处,都为所化者说法,并以各种等至度时,从而为有情及自己带来、施与种种利益安乐,故“带来种种”即是“住”,此处应如此理解其义。显示巴利原文
Iriyāpathavihārena pana na kadāci na viharati taṃ vinā attabhāvapariharaṇābhāvato, tatoyeva ca dibbavihārādīnampi sādhāraṇo iriyāpathavihāroti āha ‘‘idha panā’’tiādi. Iriyāpathasamāyogaparidīpananti itaravihārasamāyogaparidīpanassa visesavacanassa abhāvato iriyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanassa ca atthasiddhattā vuttaṃ. Asmiṃ pana pakkhe viharatīti ettha vi-saddo vicchedatthajotano, haratīti neti pavattetīti attho, vicchinditvā haratīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha kassa kena vicchindanaṃ, kathaṃ kassa pavattananti antolīnacodanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘so hī’’tiādi. Soti bhagavā. Yadipi bhagavā ekenapi iriyāpathena cirataraṃ kālaṃ attabhāvaṃ pavattetuṃ sakkoti, tathāpi upādinnakasarīrassa nāma ayaṃ sabhāvoti dassetuṃ ‘‘ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhana’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Aparipatantanti apatantaṃ. Yasmā pana bhagavā yattha katthaci vasanto vineyyānaṃ dhammaṃ desento nānāsamāpattīhi ca kālaṃ vītināmento vasatīti sattānaṃ attano ca vividhaṃ hitasukhaṃ harati upaneti, tasmā vividhaṃ haratīti viharatīti evampettha attho veditabbo.
“在那勒噜蒲钦曼达树下”:此处注释如下——那勒噜,是栖住于此树的夜叉之名,因此,由他所栖住的蒲钦曼达树,便称为“那勒噜的蒲钦曼达”,即“那勒噜蒲钦曼达”。又因生于管状物而得名那勒噜:这里以“那勒”指称空洞,所以,因生于树洞之中,既是那勒噜又是蒲钦曼达,合称“那勒噜蒲钦曼达”。或因生于那勒林而得名那勒噜:据说这蒲钦曼达树生长在那勒林中。有巨大空洞的蒲钦曼达树,即为那勒噜蒲钦曼达。此处“噜”是“大”的同义词,“那勒”是“空洞”的同义词,因此,具有大空洞的蒲钦曼达树便称作“那勒噜蒲钦曼达”。然而,阿阇梨说:“此处何必赘言?”仅以“那勒噜是一夜叉名”等点明一义。显示巴利原文
Naḷerupucimandamūleti ettha vaṇṇayanti – naḷerūti tasmiṃ rukkhe adhivatthayakkhassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tasmā tena adhivattho pucimando ‘‘naḷerussa pucimando naḷerupucimando’’ti vuccati. Atha vā naḷe ruhattā jātattā naḷeru. Susiramettha naḷasaddena vuccati, tasmā rukkhasusire jātattā naḷeru ca so pucimando cāti naḷerupucimandoti vuccati. Naḷavane ruhattā jātattā vā naḷeru. Naḷavane kira so pucimandarukkho jāto. Urunaḷo pucimando naḷerupucimando. Urusaddo cettha mahantapariyāyo, naḷasaddo susirapariyāyo, tasmā mahantena susirena samannāgato pucimando naḷerupucimandoti vuccatīti. Ācariyo pana kimettha bahubhāsitenāti ekamevatthaṃ dassento ‘‘naḷeru nāma yakkho’’tiādimāha.
“根”一词在这里取其“近旁”之义,并非在“根之根本”等意义上使用,为了说明这一点,才说“根即近旁”等。从严格意义上说,“根”这个词,是用来指称那些使具有枝干等的聚合体得以善立的部分;但由于惯用,它也会通过转喻的方式,用于与根相似的事物或依存于根的地方。因此,在“应拔出根”这样的话中,严格来说就是指根本身。所以,用一个“根”字来限定,说“在根之根本中可见”,如同说“苦苦”、“色色”一样。在不共因中,即在不共通的因中。由于贪只是贪俱不善心生起的因,所以是不共的;因此,对于贪俱心的生起来说,它特为资助,从成就它们善立的角度,以“根”的意义起资助作用的缘法中最为殊胜者,这就是它的含义。或者,如无贪等是善与无记所共通的,而贪等则不如此,它们只是不善所共通的,所以是不共因。再者,“等”字中,通过“等”也应理解包含了无贪等善与无记之根。因为在那些根中,无贪等善根由于不与不善、无记共通,所以是不共因;同样,无贪等无记根也由于不与其余二者共通,所以是不共因。在无风处,即在无风的地方,或……显示巴利原文
Mūla-saddo ettha samīpavacano adhippeto, na mūlamūlādīsu vattamānoti dassento āha ‘‘mūlanti samīpa’’ntiādi. Nippariyāyena sākhādimato saṅghātassa suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhane avayavavisese pavattamāno mūlasaddo yasmā taṃsadisesu tannissaye padese ca ruḷhīvasena pariyāyato pavattati, tasmā ‘‘mūlāni uddhareyyā’’ti ettha nippariyāyato mūlaṃ adhippetanti ekena mūlasaddena visesetvā āha ‘‘mūlamūle dissatī’’ti yathā ‘‘dukkhadukkhaṃ, rūparūpa’’nti ca. Asādhāraṇahetumhīti asādhāraṇakāraṇe. Lobho hi lobhasahagataakusalacittuppādasseva hetuttā asādhāraṇo, tasmā lobhasahagatacittuppādānameva āveṇike nesaṃ suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanato mūlaṭṭhena upakārake paccayadhammaviseseti attho. Atha vā yathā alobhādayo kusalābyākatasādhāraṇā, lobhādayo pana tathā na honti akusalasseva sādhāraṇattāti asādhāraṇakāraṇaṃ. Atha vā ādīsūti ettha ādi-saddena alobhādīnampi kusalābyākatamūlānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tesupi hi alobhādikusalamūlaṃ akusalābyākatehi asādhāraṇattā asādhāraṇakāraṇaṃ, tathā alobhādiabyākatamūlampi itaradvayehi asādhāraṇattāti. Nivāteti vātarahite padese, vātassa abhāve vā. Patantīti nipatanti, ayameva vā pāṭho. Ramaṇīyoti manuñño. Pāsādikoti pasādāvaho, pasādajanakoti attho. Ādhipaccaṃ kurumāno viyāti sambandho.
在此,即针对“那时,世尊住在韦兰若城的那勒噜蒲钦曼达树下”这句话所说的。可能会有——意思是,有人可能会生起这样的思虑,或者根据将要说明的方式,有时可能会提出诘难。如果这位诘难者首先对“世尊”等处的意图是这样:正如“住在华氏城的宫殿中”等例子,处所与处所之间是包含关系,“住在韦兰若城的那勒噜蒲钦曼达树下”这样两个处所的表达才合理;但由于这是不同的地点,因此两个处所的表达便不合理。那么,如果说“住在那里”就是指住在那勒噜蒲钦曼达树下,则不应说——因为韦兰若城与那勒噜蒲钦曼达树下是不同的地点,而且说了“那时”,所以不应如此表达,这是他的意图。现在,诘难者通过“因为不可能”等,阐明了这一意图。正是因为韦兰若城与那勒噜蒲钦曼达树下由于地域的不同而相异,所以不可能在同一时间住于两处;而且,因为说了“于两处,在同一时间”,应知在不同时间的居住并未被排除。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā verañjāyaṃ viharati naḷerupucimandamūle’’ti yaṃ vuttaṃ, tattha. Siyāti kassaci evaṃ parivitakko siyā, vakkhamānākārena kadāci codeyya vāti attho. Yadi tāva bhagavātiādīsu codakassāyamadhippāyo – ‘‘pāṭaliputte pāsāde vasatī’’tiādīsu viya adhikaraṇādhikaraṇaṃ yadi bhaveyya, tadā ‘‘verañjāyaṃ viharati naḷerupucimandamūle’’ti adhikaraṇadvayaniddeso yutto siyā, imesaṃ pana bhinnadesattā na yutto ubhayaniddesoti. Atha tattha viharatīti yadi naḷerupucimandamūle viharati. Na vattabbanti nānāṭhānabhūtattā verañjānaḷerupucimandamūlānaṃ ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti ca vuttattāti adhippāyo. Idāni codako tameva attano adhippāyaṃ ‘‘na hi sakkā’’tiādinā vivarati. Verañjānaḷerupucimandamūlānaṃ bhūmibhāgavasena bhinnattāyeva hi na sakkā ubhayattha teneva samayena viharituṃ, ‘‘ubhayattha teneva samayenā’’ti ca vuttattā nānāsamaye vihāro avāritoti veditabbo.
对方为了指出“这一切都是因为你未能理解正确含义而说”,便说道“然而,不应这样看待”等。其中,“此”是指“住在韦兰若城的那勒鲁蒲七曼达树下”这句话。“这样”,即您以“如果首先,对于世尊”等所提出的诘难,从含义上说确实不应如此看待,意思并不是为了显示在两处有非前非后的居住。现在,为了阐明自己所主张的正确含义,并说明此含义早已被宣说而对方未能通达,他说道:“我们不是已经说过,处格可用于近处之义吗?”等。“牛群”,即牛群。即便如此,也应当说“住在那勒鲁蒲七曼达树下”,而不应说“在韦兰若城”。因此,他将“处格用于近处之义,又以两种方式说明缘起,有什么必要?”这一诘难记在心中,说道:“为了指示行境村落”等。“他的”,即世尊的。显示巴利原文
Itaro sabbametaṃ aviparītamatthaṃ ajānantena tayā vuttanti dassento ‘‘na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabba’’ntiādimāha. Tattha etanti ‘‘verañjāyaṃ viharati naḷerupucimandamūle’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ. Evanti ‘‘yadi tāva bhagavā’’tiādinā yaṃ taṃ bhavatā coditaṃ, taṃ atthato evaṃ na kho pana daṭṭhabbaṃ, na ubhayattha apubbaṃ acarimaṃ vihāradassanatthanti attho. Idāni attanā yathādhippetaṃ aviparītamatthaṃ tassa ca paṭikacceva vuttabhāvaṃ tena ca appaṭividdhataṃ pakāsento ‘‘nanu avocumha samīpatthe bhummavacana’’ntiādimāha. Goyūthānīti gomaṇḍalāni. Evampi naḷerupucimandamūle viharaticceva vattabbaṃ, na verañjāyanti, tasmā samīpādhikaraṇatthavasena ubhayathā nidānakittane kiṃ payojananti codanaṃ manasi nidhāyāha ‘‘gocaragāmanidassanattha’’ntiādi. Assāti bhagavato.
而且,此处必然要说明行境村落。正如说明那勒鲁蒲七曼达树下有摄受出家者等多种利益,同样,说明行境村落也有摄受在家者等多种利益。为了显示这一点,他说:“通过说明韦兰若城”等。其中,摄受在家者:即通过让在家众在那里获取资具、提供亲近承事等方便,通过说法令他们安住皈依与戒中,以及随其根器引导他们证得更高殊胜,从而摄受在家者。摄受出家者:即通过在此处确定适宜学习、遍问及修习业处的住所,从而摄受出家者。显示巴利原文
Avassañcettha gocaragāmakittanaṃ kattabbaṃ. Yathā hi naḷerupucimandamūlakittanaṃ pabbajitānuggahakaraṇādianekappayojanaṃ, evaṃ gocaragāmakittanampi gahaṭṭhānuggahakaraṇādivividhappayojananti dassento ‘‘verañjākittanenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha gahaṭṭhānuggahakaraṇanti tesaṃ tattha paccayaggahaṇena upasaṅkamanapayirupāsanādīnaṃ okāsadānena dhammadesanāya saraṇesu sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpanena yathūpanissayaṃ uparivisesādhigamāvahanena ca gahaṭṭhānaṃ anuggahakaraṇaṃ. Pabbajitānuggahakaraṇanti uggahaparipucchānaṃ kammaṭṭhānānuyogassa ca anurūpavasanaṭṭhānapariggahenettha pabbajitānaṃ anuggahakaraṇaṃ.
由于仅凭获取资具便能成就资具的受用,因此他说:“同样,由前者……而远离”。其中,“前者”,即由“韦兰若城”一词。“我慢安立于此者”即指“我”,也就是有身。它的疲劳,即疲劳的状态,被称为自我疲劳;自我折磨、自我痛苦,即此所说之义。从事于此,即造作,称为自我疲劳的修习;通过禁食、荆棘床、卧席等,为自己带来痛苦,这是其义。远离于此,即远离自我疲劳的修习。因为住在村内的人,即使不愿,也会遇到不合意色等所缘;而住在村外适宜处者,则无此患。因此他说:“由后者,因为舍弃了事欲”等。其中,“后者”,即由“那勒鲁蒲七曼达树下”一词。色等五种欲乐,因为是烦恼欲的所依,故称事欲;舍弃它,即舍弃事欲。显示远离欲乐修习的方法:即对于与事欲相关的烦恼欲乐之结合、修习、享受,显示远离它的方法。显示巴利原文
Paccayaggahaṇeneva paccayaparibhogasiddhito āha ‘‘tathā purimena…pe… vivajjananti. Tattha purimenāti verañjāvacanena. Āhito ahaṃmāno etthāti attā, attabhāvo. Tassa kilamatho kilantabhāvo attakilamatho, attapīḷā attadukkhanti vuttaṃ hoti, tassa anuyogo karaṇaṃ attakilamathānuyogo, upavāsakaṇṭakāpassayaseyyādinā attano dukkhuppādananti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassa vivajjanaṃ attakilamathānuyogavivajjanaṃ. Antogāme vasantānaṃ anicchantānampi visabhāgarūpādiārammaṇadassanādisambhavato bahigāme patirūpaṭṭhāne vasantānaṃ tadabhāvato āha ‘‘pacchimena vatthukāmappahānato’’tiādi. Tattha pacchimenāti naḷerupucimandamūlavacanena. Kilesakāmassa vatthubhūtattā rūpādayo pañca kāmaguṇā vatthukāmo, tassa pahānaṃ vatthukāmappahānaṃ. Kāmasukhallikānuyogavivajjanupāyadassananti vatthukāmesu kilesakāmasaṃyuttassa sukhassa yogo anuyogo anubhavo, tassa parivajjane upāyadassanaṃ.
自己进入行境村落后,因见到适合听闻其说法、堪能受法之人,便知说法时机已到,由此可知其说法精勤,故说“前句为说法精勤”。于说法有热忱,即是说法精勤。至于住在村外空闲处者,因无杂居之住,其对身远离等的胜解与倾向便得以了知,故说“后句为远离胜解”。显示巴利原文
Sayameva gocaragāmaṃ upasaṅkamitvā attano dhammassavanānurūpabhabbapuggalānaṃ dassanato dhammadesanāya kālo sampatto nāma hotīti dhammadesanāya abhiyogo viññāyatīti āha ‘‘purimena ca dhammadesanābhiyoga’’nti. Dhammadesanāya saussāhabhāvo dhammadesanābhiyogo. Bahigāme vivittokāse vasantassa ākiṇṇavihārābhāvato kāyavivekādīsu adhimutti tappoṇatā viññāyatīti āha ‘‘pacchimena vivekādhimutti’’nti.
说法精勤与远离胜解的根本因——悲与慧,正是前往说法与从彼处离开的原因,故说“前句以悲前往”等。因为悲与慧正是此无间二法的因。由此应知:以悲前往并非为了利养等动机,以慧离开并非出于怨恨等动机,这显示了前往与离开的无杂染性。“胜解”意谓倾向于彼处。“无杂染”意谓不沾染、不黏着。显示巴利原文
Dhammadesanābhiyogavivekādhimuttīnaṃ hetubhūtā eva karuṇāpaññā dhammadesanāya upagamanassa tato apagamanassa kāraṇabhūtā hontīti āha ‘‘purimena karuṇāya upagamana’’ntiādi. Karuṇāpaññāyeva hi anantaradukassa hetū honti. Etena ca karuṇāya upagamanaṃ na lābhādinimittaṃ , paññāya apagamanaṃ na virodhādinimittanti upagamanāpagamanānaṃ nirupakkilesataṃ vibhāvibhanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Adhimuttatanti tanninnabhāvaṃ. Nirupalepananti anupalepanaṃ anallīyanaṃ.
在“法乐舍弃之因”中,所谓法乐,即是无过失之乐。因其依如法的利得而生起,故称“法乐”。与“增上人法精勤之因”相连,意为安稳住。“对众人多所饶益”,指通过接受资具、说法等方式多作饶益。“对诸天多所饶益”,是由于远离人群,因为诸天认为人迹罕至之处是应前往的地方。“世间增长”指以物质受用而增长的状态。显示巴利原文
Dhammikasukhāpariccāganimittanti ettha dhammikasukhaṃ nāma anavajjasukhaṃ. Tañhi dhammikaṃ lābhaṃ paṭicca uppannattā ‘‘dhammikasukha’’nti vuccati. Uttarimanussadhammābhiyoganimittaṃ phāsuvihāranti sambandho. Manussānaṃ upakārabahulatanti paccayapaṭiggahaṇadhammadesanādivasena upakārabahulataṃ. Devatānaṃ upakārabahulataṃ janavivittatāya. Pacurajanavivittañhi ṭhānaṃ devā upasaṅkamitabbaṃ maññanti. Loke saṃvaḍḍhabhāvanti āmisopabhogena saṃvaḍḍhitabhāvaṃ.
“一人”中,“一”为遮遣第二等之义,是数量的限定。“人”是随俗言说,非胜义说。因为世尊有两种说法:随俗说与胜义说。此义前已广说,故此处不述。既是“一”又是“人”,故名“一人”。以何义而称“一人”?以无有相似之义、功德殊胜之义、与无等者相等之义。他从对十波罗蜜次第的作意开始,以菩提资粮功德及佛陀功德,与其余大众无有相似,故以无相似义为“一人”。他的那些功德,亦较其他有情的功德殊胜,故以功德殊胜义为“一人”。过去的正自觉者与一切有情不相等,而唯有他与那些佛在色身功德与名身功德上相等,故以与无等者相等义为“一人”。“世间”指有情世间。显示巴利原文
Ekapuggaloti ettha (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.170) ekoti dutiyādipaṭikkhepattho gaṇanaparicchedo. Puggaloti sammutikathā, na paramatthakathā. Buddhassa hi bhagavato duvidhā desanā sammutidesanā paramatthadesanā cāti. Ayamattho pana heṭṭhā vitthāritovāti idha na vuccati. Eko ca so puggalo cāti ekapuggalo. Kenaṭṭhena ekapuggalo? Asadisaṭṭhena guṇavisiṭṭhaṭṭhena asamasamaṭṭhena. So hi dasannaṃ pāramīnaṃ paṭipāṭiyā āvajjanaṃ ādiṃ katvā bodhisambhāraguṇehi ceva buddhaguṇehi ca sesamahājanena asadisoti asadisaṭṭhenapi ekapuggalo. Ye cassa te guṇā, tepi aññasattānaṃ guṇehi visiṭṭhāti guṇavisiṭṭhaṭṭhenapi ekapuggalo. Purimakā sammāsambuddhā sabbasattehi asamā, tehi saddhiṃ ayameva eko rūpakāyaguṇehi ceva nāmakāyaguṇehi ca samoti asamasamaṭṭhenapi ekapuggalo. Loketi sattaloke.
“Uppajjamāno uppajjatī”这两个词都只是未完成语态。应知此处义为:正在生起者是为了大众的利益而生起,而非由于其他原因。而且,此处的这种特征无法以其他词义特征来否定。再者,应知此处有“正在生起”、“生起”、“已生起”的区别。从燃灯佛足下获得授记后,寻求成佛之法,见到十波罗蜜而决意“我当圆满这些法”,即使正在圆满布施巴拉密,也名为“正在生起”。圆满持戒巴拉密……乃至舍巴拉密,圆满这十波罗蜜、圆满十种近波罗蜜,也名为“正在生起”。圆满十种最上波罗蜜,也名为“正在生起”。作五大舍弃时,也名为“正在生起”。圆满亲戚利益行、世间利益行、佛利益行时,也名为“正在生起”。历经四阿僧祇又十万劫,将成佛之法修至究竟时,也名为“正在生起”。舍弃维山达拉身,在兜率天结生,住五十七俱胝又六十万百千年时,也名为“正在生起”。被诸天劝请,观察五大观察,在摩耶夫人胎中结生时,在母胎中住满十个月时,也名为“正在生起”。在家中度二十九年时,也名为“正在生起”。见欲乐之过患与出离之功德,于罗睺罗贤出生之日,与车匿为伴,骑上犍陟良马出离时,也名为“正在生起”。越过三王国,于阿诺玛河畔出家时,也名为“正在生起”。六年行大精进时,也名为“正在生起”。于智成熟时,取粗食时,也名为“正在生起”。于傍晚时分,在毗舍佉月圆日,登上大菩提座,摧破魔军,初夜忆念宿住,中夜净化天眼,后夜无间,顺逆思惟十二支缘起,证入入流道时,也名为“正在生起”。在须陀洹果刹那、斯陀含果刹那、阿那含果刹那,也名为“正在生起”。然而,在阿罗汉道刹那,名为“生起”。在阿罗汉果刹那,名为“已生起”。因为诸佛不像声闻那样次第生起神变智等,而是与阿罗汉道一起,一切智等全部功德聚即已到来,故因所作已办,在阿罗汉果刹那名为“已生起”。在此经中,正是就阿罗汉果刹那而说“生起”。此处义为“已生起”。显示巴利原文
Uppajjamāno uppajjatīti idaṃ pana ubhayampi vippakatavacanameva. Uppajjanto bahujanahitatthāya uppajjati, na aññena kāraṇenāti evaṃ panettha attho veditabbo. Evarūpañcettha lakkhaṇaṃ na sakkā etaṃ aññena saddalakkhaṇena paṭibāhituṃ. Apica uppajjamāno nāma, uppajjati nāma, uppanno nāmāti ayamettha bhedo veditabbo. Esa hi dīpaṅkarapādamūlato laddhabyākaraṇo buddhakārakadhamme pariyesanto dasa pāramiyo disvā ‘‘ime dhammā mayā pūretabbā’’ti katasanniṭṭhāno dānapāramiṃ pūrentopi uppajjamāno nāma. Sīlapāramiṃ…pe… upekkhāpāraminti imā dasa pāramiyo pūrentopi, dasa upapāramiyo pūrentopi uppajjamāno nāma. Dasa paramatthapāramiyo pūrentopi uppajjamāno nāma. Pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Ñātatthacariyaṃ lokatthacariyaṃ buddhatthacariyaṃ pūrayamānopi uppajjamāno nāma. Kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni buddhakārake dhamme matthakaṃ pāpentopi uppajjamāno nāma. Vessantarattabhāvaṃ pahāya tusitapure paṭisandhiṃ gahetvā saṭṭhivassasatasahassādhikā sattapaṇṇāsa vassakoṭiyo tiṭṭhantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Devatāhi yācito pañca mahāvilokanāni viloketvā māyādeviyā kucchismiṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhantopi, anūnādhike dasa māse gabbhavāsaṃ vasantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Ekūnatiṃsa vassāni agāramajjhe tiṭṭhantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Kāmesu ādīnavaṃ nekkhamme ca ānisaṃsaṃ disvā rāhulabhaddassa jātadivase channasahāyo kaṇḍakaṃ assavaramāruyha nikkhamantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Tīṇi rajjāni atikkamanto anomanaditīre pabbajantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Chabbassāni mahāpadhānaṃ karontopi uppajjamāno nāma. Paripākagate ñāṇe oḷārikaṃ āhāraṃ āharantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Sāyanhasamaye visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ mahābodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha mārabalaṃ vidhametvā paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussaritvā majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ parisodhetvā pacchimayāmasamanantare dvādasaṅgaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ anulomapaṭilomato sammasitvā sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭivijjhantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Sotāpattiphalakkhaṇepi sakadāgāmiphalakkhaṇepi anāgāmiphalakkhaṇepi uppajjamāno nāma. Arahattamaggakkhaṇe pana uppajjati nāma. Arahattaphalakkhaṇe uppanno nāma. Buddhānañhi sāvakānaṃ viya na paṭipāṭiyā iddhividhañāṇādīni uppajjanti, saheva pana arahattamaggena sakalopi sabbaññutaññāṇādi guṇarāsi āgatova nāma hoti, tasmā nibbattasabbakiccattā arahattaphalakkhaṇe uppanno nāma hoti. Imasmimpi sutte arahattaphalakkhaṇaṃyeva sandhāya ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Uppanno hotīti ayañhettha attho.
“Bahujanahitāya”意为为了大众的利益而生起,“Bahujanasukhāya”意为为了大众的安乐而生起,“Lokānukampāya”意为出于对有情世间的悲悯而生起。是哪个有情世间呢?即那些听闻如来说法、饮下不死甘露、证悟佛法者。世尊在大菩提树下度过七七四十九日后,从菩提树下前往仙人堕处,在《转法轮经》中开示“比丘们,此二边乃出家者不应亲近”时,尊者阿若憍陈如长老与十八亿梵天共饮不死甘露,世尊即出于对此有情世间的悲悯而生起。第五日,在《无我相经》结束时,五比丘长老安住于阿罗汉果,世尊亦出于对此有情世间的悲悯而生起。此后,以耶舍长者子为首的五十位男子安住于阿罗汉果;随后,在棉布林,三十位贤众青年证得三果与四果,世尊亦出于对此有情世间的悲悯而生起。在象头山,《燃烧法门》结束时,一千位结发外道安住于阿罗汉果;随后,在杖林,以频婆娑罗王为首的十一那由他婆罗门居士听闻大师说法后,安住于须陀洹果,一那由他安住于三皈依。在《墙外随喜偈》结束时,八万四千众生饮下不死甘露。在须摩那花鬘匠集会中,八万四千众生;在财护集会中,一万众生;在《佉陀罗炭火本生》集会中,八万四千众生;在豺狼邪命外道集会中,八万四千众生;在阿难陀长者集会中,八万四千众生饮下不死甘露。在石寺讲说《彼岸道经》之日,十四俱胝众生饮下不死甘露。在双神变日,二十俱胝众生;在三十三天,坐于黄毛毯石上,以母为身证而开示七论阿毗达摩时,八十俱胝众生;在从天降下时,三十俱胝众生;在《帝释问经》中,八万天神饮下不死甘露。在《大集会经》、《吉祥经》、《小罗睺罗教诫经》、《平等心行道经》此四处,得通达的众生数量不可计量,世尊亦出于对此有情世间的悲悯而生起。乃至今日,未来亦复如是,凡依此教法而安住于天界与解脱道者,亦应以此义理解。显示巴利原文
Bahujanahitāyāti mahājanassa hitatthāya uppajjati. Bahujanasukhāyāti mahājanassa sukhatthāya uppajjati. Lokānukampāyāti sattalokassa anukampaṃ paṭicca uppajjati. Katarasattalokassāti? Yo tathāgatassa dhammadesanaṃ sutvā amatapānaṃ pivi, dhammaṃ paṭivijjhi, tassa. Bhagavatā hi mahābodhimaṇḍe sattasattāhaṃ vītināmetvā bodhimaṇḍā isipatanaṃ āgamma ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, antā pabbajitena na sevitabbā’’ti dhammacakkappavattanasuttante (saṃ. ni. 3.5; mahāva. 13) desite āyasmatā aññāsikoṇḍaññattherena saddhiṃ aṭṭhārasakoṭisaṅkhā brahmāno amatapānaṃ piviṃsu, etassa sattalokassa anukampāya uppanno. Pañcamadivase anattalakkhaṇasuttantapariyosāne pañcavaggiyattherā arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsu, etassapi sattalokassa anukampāya uppanno. Tato yasadārakappamukhe pañcapaṇṇāsa purise arahatte patiṭṭhāpesi, tato kappāsikavanasaṇḍe tiṃsa bhaddavaggiye tayo magge ca phalāni ca sampāpesi, etassapi sattalokassa anukampāya uppanno. Gayāsīse ādittapariyāyapariyosāne (saṃ. ni. 4.28; mahāva. 54) jaṭilasahassaṃ arahatte patiṭṭhāpesi, tato laṭṭhivane bimbisārappamukhā ekādasa nahutā brāhmaṇagahapatikā satthu dhammadesanaṃ sutvā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahiṃsu, ekaṃ nahutaṃ saraṇesu patiṭṭhitaṃ. Tirokuṭṭaanumodanāvasāne (khu. pā. 7. 1 ādayo) caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassehi amatapānaṃ pītaṃ. Sumanamālākārasamāgame caturāsītiyā, dhanapālasamāgame dasahi pāṇasahassehi, khadiraṅgārajātakasamāgame caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassehi, jambukaājīvakasamāgame caturāsītiyāva, ānandaseṭṭhisamāgame caturāsītiyāva pāṇasahassehi amatapānaṃ pītaṃ. Pāsāṇakacetiye pārāyanasuttakathādivase (su. ni. 982 ādayo) cuddasa koṭiyo amatapānaṃ piviṃsu. Yamakapāṭihāriyadivase vīsati pāṇakoṭiyo, tāvatiṃsabhavane paṇḍukambalasilāyaṃ nisīditvā mātaraṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā sattappakaraṇaṃ abhidhammaṃ desentassa asīti pāṇakoṭiyo, devorohaṇe tiṃsa pāṇakoṭiyo, sakkapañhasuttante (dī. ni. 2.344 ādayo) asīti devasahassāni amatapānaṃ piviṃsu. Mahāsamayasuttante (dī. ni. 2.331 ādayo) maṅgalasutte (khu. pā. 5.1 ādayo; su. ni. maṅgalasutta) cūḷarāhulovāde (ma. ni. 3.416 ādayo) samacittapaṭipadāyāti (a. ni. 2.33) imesu catūsu ṭhānesu abhisamayappattasattānaṃ paricchedo natthi, etassapi sattalokassa anukampāya uppannoti. Yāvajjadivasā ito parampi anāgate imaṃ sāsanaṃ nissāya saggamokkhamagge patiṭṭhahantānaṃ vasenapi ayamattho veditabbo.
“devamanussāna”并不单指天与人,也包括龙、金翅鸟等,也是为他们的利益、福祉与安乐而生起。然而,这是为了指明那些有因结生、堪能证悟道果的补特伽罗,故如此说。因此,应知世尊也正是为这些众生的利益、福祉与安乐而生起。显示巴利原文
Devamanussānanti na kevalaṃ devamanussānaṃyeva, avasesānaṃ nāgasupaṇṇādīnampi atthāya hitāya sukhāyeva uppanno. Sahetukapaṭisandhike pana maggaphalasacchikiriyāya bhabbe puggale dassetuṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā etesampi atthatthāya hitatthāya sukhatthāyeva uppannoti veditabbo.
“Katamo ekapuggalo”是为发起解说而提问。现在,为阐明所问的“一补特伽罗”,而说“如来、阿罗汉、正自觉者”。“Tadatthaparinipphādananti”意指成就世间利益,即完成佛陀事业之义。第一次在蓝毗尼园,第二次在菩提树下:即在蓝毗尼园以色身诞生,在菩提树下以法身诞生。以“evamādinā”中的“ādi”一词,通过提及毗兰若而显示对色身的摄受,通过提及那利蓟罗果与蒲桃树根而显示对法身的摄受。同样,前者显示依他而作的行为,后者显示自主而作的行为;或者,前者为悲悯之业,后者为智慧之业;再者,前者显示具足最上悲悯,后者显示具足最上舍心。如是等义皆含摄其中。显示巴利原文
Katamo ekapuggaloti kathetukamyatāpucchā. Idāni tāya pucchāya puṭṭhaṃ ekapuggalaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti āha. Tadatthaparinipphādananti lokatthanipphādanaṃ, buddhakiccasampādananti attho. Paṭhamaṃ lumbinīvane dutiyaṃ bodhimaṇḍeti lumbinīvane rūpakāyena jāto, bodhimaṇḍe dhammakāyena. Evamādināti ādi-saddena verañjākittanato rūpakāyassa anuggaṇhanaṃ dasseti, naḷerupucimandamūlakittanato dhammakāyassa. Tathā purimena parādhīnakiriyākaraṇaṃ, dutiyena attādhīnakiriyākaraṇaṃ. Purimena vā karuṇākiccaṃ, itarena paññākiccaṃ , purimena cassa paramāya anukampāya samannāgamaṃ, pacchimena paramāya upekkhāya samannāgamanti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“Pacchimako”指在功德上为最后者。这是针对阿难长老而说。“Saṅkhyāyapīti”即从计数上而言。为了阐明“以见与戒的共住而和合,故为僧伽”这一含义,而说“以称为见与戒共住的集合,即沙门众”。在此,所谓“凡此见是圣、出离、能令奉行者正尽苦边,于如是见,以见共住而住”,以及“凡这些戒是无缺、无穿、无斑点、无杂色、自在、为智者所赞、无执取、能引生定,于如是戒,以戒共住而住”,以如是所说的见与戒的共住而集合、和合、一致,即称为见与戒共住的集合,即沙门众。也就是说,以见与戒的共住而和合。诚然,如“比丘们,这是不可能的,无有是处,即具足见的人会故意夺取有情生命,此事不存在”等语所说,由于见与戒具有决定性的本质,即使须陀洹也彼此以见与戒的共住而和合,更何况斯陀含等。因为圣者无论身处多远,皆以其功德之集合而和合。根据“于如是见,以见共住而住;于如是戒,以戒共住而住”的说法,凡夫亦得以见与戒的共住而和合,但此处唯指圣僧伽,因有“其中最后者,即是须陀洹”之说。以“Etenāti”即指“以约五百比丘”此语。“Assāti”指约五百比丘的。“Nirabbudoti”等词的含义将在后文显现。显示巴利原文
Pacchimakoti guṇena pacchimako. Ānandattheraṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Saṅkhyāyapīti gaṇanatopi. Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatattā saṅghoti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅkhātasaṅghātena samaṇagaṇenā’’ti. Ettha pana ‘‘yāyaṃ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356, ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54) evaṃ vuttāya diṭṭhiyā, ‘‘yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññuppasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṃvattanikāni, tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324; 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54) evaṃ vuttānañca sīlānaṃ sāmaññasaṅkhātena saṅghato saṅghaṭito sametoti diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅkhātasaṅghāto, samaṇagaṇo. Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo sañcicca pāṇaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti ādivacanato diṭṭhisīlānaṃ niyatasabhāvattā sotāpannāpi aññamaññaṃ diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatā, pageva sakadāgāmiādayo. Ariyapuggalā hi yattha katthaci dūre ṭhitāpi attano guṇasāmaggiyā saṃhatāyeva. ‘‘Tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharati (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54), tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54) vacanato puthujjanānampi diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatabhāvo labbhatiyeva, idha pana ariyasaṅghoyeva adhippeto ‘‘yo tattha pacchimako, so sotāpanno’’ti vacanato. Etenāti ‘‘pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehī’’ti etena vacanena. Assāti pañcamattassa bhikkhusatassa. Nirabbudotiādīnaṃ vacanattho parato eva āvi bhavissati.
“Assosī”于此有“听”被觉知的意思,因此说“‘assosī’即‘听’与‘觉知’”,意指“了知”。而这种觉知唯是依于听闻而生,为了阐明此义,说“依循经由耳门传入的语声而了知”。由于“kho”这个虚词具有限定的作用,所以整个句子都内含限定之意,故说“‘kho’仅是作为填充音节的虚词”。而又说“在限定义中”,这是为了说明即使整个句子已内含限定,使用“kho”字仍是为了表达所期望的限定。为了指出这所期望的限定,说“于此处以限定义”等。那么,以填充音节为义的“kho”字,其作用是什么呢?答:“为填充音节,只是为了使文句流畅而已。”因为“assosī”一词,若配合上“kho”字,便如同被装点、修饰、庄严了一般,变得圆满;由此,前后词语得以连贯顺畅,若不如此,则难连贯。因此,填充音节的作用,唯独在于令文句流畅。此处的“matta”一词有遮遣差别之义,藉此显示它不表达其他含义;而“eva”字则使“文句流畅”成为确定之义。显示巴利原文
Assosīti ettha savanamupalabbhoti āha ‘‘assosīti suṇi upalabhī’’ti, aññāsīti attho. So cāyamupalabbho savanavasenevāti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sotadvārasampattavacananigghosānusārena aññāsī’’ti. Avadhāraṇaphalattā saddappayogassa sabbampi vākyaṃ antogadhāvadhāraṇanti āha ‘‘khoti padapūraṇamatte nipāto’’ti. Avadhāraṇattheti pana iminā antogadhāvadhāraṇepi sabbasmiṃ vākye iṭṭhatovadhāraṇatthaṃ khosaddaggahaṇanti dasseti. Tameva iṭṭhatovadhāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tattha avadhāraṇatthenā’’tiādi. Atha padapūraṇatthena khosaddena kiṃpayojananti āha ‘‘padapūraṇena pana byañjanasiliṭṭhatāmattamevā’’ti. ‘‘Assosī’’ti hi padaṃ khosadde gahite tena phullitamaṇḍitavibhūsitaṃ viya hontaṃ pūritaṃ nāma hoti, tena ca purimapacchimapadāni siliṭṭhāni honti, na tasmiṃ aggahite, tasmā padapūraṇena byañjanasiliṭṭhatāmattameva payojanaṃ. Matta-saddo cettha visesanivattiattho, tenassa anatthantaradīpanataṃ dasseti, eva-saddena pana byañjanasiliṭṭhatāya ekantikataṃ.
为了遵循音韵规则显示“Verañja”一词的含义,说“生于Verañjā”等。“Brahmaṃ aṇatī”中,“Brahma”指的是吠陀,而吠陀依据咒语、梵书、仪轨分为三种。其中,咒语因是根本,故由阿闼婆等人所宣说;其余二者则依彼咒语而生,因此这里只取其根本。讽诵咒语,即是讽诵《梨俱吠陀》等咒语典籍。因为《梨俱吠陀》等需要被守护,故得名为“咒语”。用“即此”一词来限定,排除了诸如“从梵天生”等其他词源学解释。说“生来的婆罗门”,是为了显示还有其他的婆罗门。婆罗门有两种:生来的婆罗门与清净的婆罗门。现在,为了显示其中清净婆罗门的词源,说“然而圣者……”等。显示巴利原文
Verañjoti ettha saddalakkhaṇānusārena atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘verañjāyaṃ jāto’’tiādi. Brahmaṃ aṇatīti ettha brahmanti vedo vuccati, so pana mantabrahmakappavasena tividho. Tattha mantā padhānamūlabhāvatoyeva aṭṭhakādīhi pavuttā, itare pana tannissayena jātā, tena padhānasseva gahaṇaṃ. Mante sajjhāyatīti iruvedādike mantasatthe sajjhāyatīti attho. Iruvedādayo hi guttabhāsitabbatāya ‘‘mantā’’ti vuccanti. Idameva hīti avadhāraṇena brahmato jātotiādikaṃ niruttiṃ paṭikkhipati. Jātibrāhmaṇānanti iminā aññepi brāhmaṇā atthīti dasseti. Duvidhā hi brāhmaṇā jātibrāhmaṇā visuddhibrāhmaṇā cāti. Idāni tattha visuddhibrāhmaṇānaṃ niruttiṃ dassento āha ‘‘ariyā panā’’tiādi.
“Samitapāpattā”意为彻底、毫无残余、连同习气一并止息了诸恶。如此便将世尊的止息诸恶,与外道未离欲者、有学、无学的止息诸恶区别开来。为了引证阐发前义,说“即如所说”等。在此,有人说:“‘已除诸恶者为婆罗门,因已止息诸恶故名为沙门’——这是将分属不同偈颂的两句合为一处而说的。”此语在三部《结文》中亦说:“取‘因已止息诸恶,故称之为沙门’此句,而说‘因已止息故,称为沙门’。‘已除诸恶者为婆罗门’则是另一偈颂中所说。”因虚词有多义,此处取“传闻”之义,故说“‘khalu’是传闻义的虚词”。“Jātisamudāgataṃ”即是由出生而来、依出生而成。“Ālapanamattaṃ”即仅是亲昵的称呼。因为“bho”、“āvuso”、“devānampiya”等皆是亲昵的称呼。若有人于称呼等时,常以“bho bho”称呼而行,彼即名为“bhovā显示巴利原文
Samitapāpattāti accantaṃ anavasesato savāsanaṃ samitapāpattā. Evañhi bāhirakaavītarāgasekkhāsekkhapāpasamaṇato bhagavato pāpasamaṇaṃ visesitaṃ hoti. Vuttamevatthaṃ udāharaṇena vibhāvento āha ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi. Ettha pana ‘‘bāhitapāpoti brāhmaṇo, samitapāpattā samaṇoti vuccatīti idaṃ bhinnagāthāsannissitapadadvayaṃ ekato gahetvā vutta’’nti vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu ‘‘samitattā hi pāpānaṃ, samaṇoti pavuccatīti idaṃ vacanaṃ gahetvā ‘samitattā samaṇoti vuccatī’ti vuttaṃ. Bāhitapāpoti brāhmaṇoti idaṃ pana aññasmiṃ gāthābandhe vuttavacana’’nti. Anekatthattā nipātānaṃ idha anussavanatthe adhippetoti āha ‘‘khalūti anussavanatthe nipāto’’ti. Jātisamudāgatanti jātiyā āgataṃ, jātisiddhanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ālapanamattanti piyālāpavacanamattaṃ. Piyasamudāhārā hete bhoti vā āvusoti vā devānampiyāti vā. Bhovādī nāma so hotīti yo āmantanādīsu ‘‘bho bho’’ti vadanto vicarati, so bhovādī nāma hotīti attho. Sakiñcanoti rāgādīhi kiñcanehi sakiñcano. Rāgādayo hi satte kiñcenti maddanti palibundhantīti ‘‘kiñcanānī’’ti vuccanti. Manussā kira goṇehi khalaṃ maddāpentā ‘‘kiñcehi kapila, kiñcehi kāḷakā’’ti vadanti, tasmā maddanaṭṭho kiñcanaṭṭhoti veditabbo.
关于“依种姓”:此处“种姓”(gotta)意为“守护(tāyati)其族(gaṃ)”。此中,“go”音既表称名,亦表觉知,故应如此理解其义:就“Gotama(乔达摩)”这一现行的称名与觉知而言,因其决定一境而守护之,故为种姓。恰如觉知不能离开作为所缘的义而存在,称名亦不能离开所诠的义;如此,被称为“种姓”的义便守护了那些觉知与称名。当知此“种姓”即是:与他族谱系无涉,由彼族始祖所成,为彼族属所共通的形态。在此,以“沙门(samaṇa)”一词称扬其止恶,显示世尊为同类所尊重;以“乔达摩(Gotama)”一词,则显示其出生于高贵种姓,为世间所知。释迦王净饭大王之子,即释迦子。由此显示其出身于显赫广大的刹帝利族,故说“此乃显示世尊出身高贵种姓”。何以故?自一切刹帝利之祖大选出王以来,释迦王族相续不绝,最为尊贵。“不为任何衰败所胜”,即不为亲族衰败、财富衰败等任何衰败所覆、所胜。实际上,于世尊降生之际,彼族无有衰败,唯有增盛;及其出家,由此而成就的更大圆满,亦为世间共知。是故,“从释迦族出家”一语,是为显示世尊出于信心。显示巴利原文
Gottavasenāti ettha gaṃ tāyatīti gottaṃ. Gosaddena cettha abhidhānaṃ buddhi ca vuccati, tasmā evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Gotamoti pavattamānaṃ abhidhānaṃ buddhiñca ekaṃsikavisayatāya tāyati rakkhatīti gottaṃ. Yathā hi buddhi ārammaṇabhūtena atthena vinā na vattati, evaṃ abhidhānaṃ abhidheyyabhūtena, tasmā so gottasaṅkhāto attho tāni buddhiabhidhānāni tāyati rakkhatīti vuccati. So pana aññakulaparamparāya asādhāraṇaṃ tassa kulassa ādipurisasamudāgataṃ taṃkulapariyāpannasādhāraṇaṃ sāmaññarūpanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ettha ca samaṇoti iminā sarikkhakajanehi bhagavato bahumatabhāvo dassito samitapāpatākittanato, gotamoti iminā lokiyajanehi uḷārakulasambhūtatādīpanato. Sakyassa suddhodanamahārājassa putto sakyaputto. Iminā ca uditoditavipulakhattiyakulavibhāvanato vuttaṃ ‘‘idaṃ pana bhagavato uccākulapaadīpana’’nti. Sabbakhattiyānañhi ādibhūtamahāsammatamahārājato paṭṭhāya asambhinnaṃ uḷāratamaṃ sakyarājakulaṃ. Kenaci pārijuññena anabhibhūtoti ñātipārijuññabhogapārijuññādinā kenaci pārijuññena parihāniyā anabhibhūto anajjhotthaṭo. Tathā hi lokanāthassa abhijātiyaṃ tassa kulassa na kiñci pārijuññaṃ, atha kho vaḍḍhiyeva. Abhinikkhamane ca tato samiddhatamabhāvo loke pākaṭo paññāto. Tena ‘‘sakyakulā pabbajito’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ bhagavato saddhāpabbajitabhāvaparidīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ mahantaṃ ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ mahantañca bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya pabbajitabhāvasiddhito. Tato paranti ‘‘verañjāyaṃ viharatī’’tiādi.
于“如此状态之表述”的意义上,使用业格。所谓“如此状态者”(itthambhūta),即“成为如此状态者”——已臻此境者;对其的表述,即是“如此状态之表述”;此意义本身,即是“如此状态之表述的意义”。或可说,“如此状态者”即已生起如此状态者,故“如此状态之表述的意义”,即是这样表述的意义;在此意义上而用业格,此为其义。此中,“abbhuggato(已超然腾起)”一词里的“abhi”前缀,因彰显了超越之后再腾起的方式,故成为“如此状态之表述意义”的指示者。因此关联,尽管“taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ(那位乔达摩尊)”这一业格形式,在属格意义上亦可解,然因其彰显了“如此状态之表述”,故说“于如此状态之表述的意义上”。因此,他说:“其义为‘那位乔达摩尊的’”。这里所要表明的是:恰如于“sādhu devadatto mātaram abhi(善哉,提婆达多,超越其母)”这一句中,因与“abhi”一词的关联,而在此意义上使用了业格。显示巴利原文
Itthambhūtākhyānatthe upayogavacananti itthaṃ imaṃ pakāraṃ bhūto āpannoti ittambhūto, tassa ākhyānaṃ itthambhūtākhyānaṃ, soyeva attho itthambhūtākhyānattho. Atha vā itthaṃ evaṃ pakāro bhūto jātoti evaṃ kathanattho itthambhūtākhyānattho, tasmiṃ upayogavacananti attho. Ettha ca abbhuggatoti ettha abhi-saddo itthambhūtākhyānatthajotako abhibhavitvā uggamanappakārassa dīpanato. Tena yogato ‘‘taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotama’’nti idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ sāmiatthepi samānaṃ itthambhūtākhyānadīpanato ‘‘itthambhūtākhyānatthe’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘tassa kho pana bhoto gotamassāti attho’’ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā ‘‘sādhu devadatto mātaramabhī’’ti ettha abhisaddayogato itthambhūtākhyāne upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ, evamidhāpi taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ abhi evaṃ kalyāṇo kittisaddo uggatoti abhisaddayogato itthambhūtākhyāne upayogavacananti. ‘‘Sādhu devadatto mātaramabhī’’ti ettha hi ‘‘devadatto mātaramabhi mātari visaye mātuyā vā sādhū’’ti evaṃ adhikaraṇatthe sāmiatthe vā bhummavacanassa vā sāmivacanassa vā pasaṅge itthambhūtākhyānatthajotakena abhisaddena yoge upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Yathā cettha ‘‘devadatto mātu visaye mātusambandhī vā sādhuttappakārappatto’’ti ayamattho viññāyati , evamidhāpi ‘‘bhoto gotamassa sambandhī kittisaddo abbhuggato abhibhavitvā uggamanappakārappatto’’ti ayamattho viññāyati. Tattha hi devadattaggahaṇaṃ viya idha kittisaddaggahaṇaṃ, tathā tattha ‘‘mātara’’nti vacanaṃ viya idha ‘‘taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotama’’nti vacanaṃ, tattha sādhusaddaggahaṇaṃ viya idha uggatasaddaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“Kalyāṇo”(善好的),即“bhaddako”(贤善的)。其所以为善好,在于以善好功德为所缘,故说“具足善好功德者”,意即:由善好功德所具足,因以彼为所缘而相应——此为其义。在这里,“具足”意指以彼为所缘,因以善好功德为所缘故而依止于彼,此是其意旨所在。对于“seṭṭho(最胜)”一词,亦同此理。诚然,称誉之声所以最胜,正因以最胜功德为所缘;如于“bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhaṃ(‘世尊’一词最胜)”等表述中所见。由于“bhagavā arahaṃ(世尊、阿罗汉)”等内容是对功德的称扬,且为可听闻者,故此称誉之声即是“vaṇṇo(称赞)”。因此,他说:“kittisaddo ti kitti eva(称誉之声,即是称誉本身)”。因称赞本身,既应被称扬,又是可听闻的称誉之声,故亦被称为“saddo(声)”。实则,“saddo(声)”字在此为“kitti(称誉)”的同义词,如说:“诸仙有洪大之声(uḷārasaddā isayo),具德而修苦行(guṇavanto tapassino)”。显示巴利原文
Kalyāṇoti bhaddako. Kalyāṇabhāvo cassa kalyāṇaguṇavisayatāyāti āha ‘‘kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgato’’ti, kalyāṇehi guṇehi samannāgato taṃvisayatāya yuttoti attho. Taṃvisayatā hettha samannāgamo kalyāṇaguṇavisayatāya tannissitoti adhippāyo. Seṭṭhoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Seṭṭhaguṇavisayatāya eva hi kittisaddassa seṭṭhatā ‘‘bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭha’’ntiādīsu viya. ‘‘Bhagavā araha’’ntiādinā guṇānaṃ saṃkittanato saddanīyato ca kittisaddo vaṇṇoti āha ‘‘kittisaddoti kitti evā’’ti. Vaṇṇoyeva hi kittetabbato kittisaddanīyato saddoti ca vuccati. Kittipariyāyo hi saddasaddo yathā ‘‘uḷārasaddā isayo, guṇavanto tapassino’’ti. Abhitthavanavasena pavatto saddo thutighoso, abhitthavudāhāro.
然而,“abbhuggato”(已升腾)一词的义理,注疏中未曾明示,故应如此了知:“abbhuggato”意为超越之后升腾而起,因其依止于不与外道共的功德而发起,故说为“遍覆含摄天界的世间而转起”。为阐明“abbhuggato”所指为何,他说:“itipi so bhagavā…”(彼世尊即是如此…)等。此后,凡于类似处,若有需解释巴利文句意义之处,我将一一说明:“然于巴利文中…”,而后显示其义。今为显示其义,先以词句连缀为前提,他说:“itipi so bhagavātiādīsu pana ayaṃ tāva yojanā”(然于“itipi so bhagavā”等句中,此是其连缀方式)等。“So bhagavā”(彼世尊):即那位圆满了三十种波罗蜜、摧破一切烦恼、证悟无上正自觉、为诸天中之最胜天、诸帝释中之最胜帝释、诸梵天中之最胜梵天、世间之怙主、因具足吉祥等理趣而得“世尊”之称誉者,彼即是世尊。因为“bhagavā”(世尊)一词,是对导师名号的称扬。因此,法显示巴利原文
‘‘Abbhuggato’’ti pana etassa attho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ na dassito, tasmā tassattho evaṃ veditabbo – abbhuggatoti abhibhavitvā uggato, anaññasādhāraṇaguṇe ārabbha pavattattā sadevakaṃ lokaṃ ajjhottharitvā pavattoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kinti saddo abbhuggatoti āha ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādi. Ito paraṃ pana īdisesu ṭhānesu yattha yattha pāḷipāṭhassa attho vattabbo siyā, tattha tattha ‘‘pāḷiyaṃ panā’’ti vatvā atthaṃ dassayissāma, idāni tattha padayojanāpubbakaṃ atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘itipi so bhagavātiādīsu panaayaṃ tāva yojanā’’tiādi. So bhagavāti yo so samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbakilese bhañjitvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho devānaṃ atidevo sakkānaṃ atisakko brahmānaṃ atibrahmā lokanātho bhāgyavantatādīhi kāraṇehi bhagavāti laddhanāmo, so bhagavā. Bhagavāti hi idaṃ satthu nāmakittanaṃ. Tenāha āyasmā dhammasenāpati ‘‘bhagavāti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kata’’ntiādi (mahāni. 84). Parato pana bhagavāti guṇakittanameva. Yathā kammaṭṭhānikena ‘‘araha’’ntiādīsu navasu ṭhānesu paccekaṃ itipisaddaṃ yojetvā buddhaguṇā anussarīyanti, evaṃ buddhaguṇasaṃkittakenapīti dassento ‘‘itipi arahaṃ itipi sammāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavā’’ti āha. Evañhi sati ‘‘araha’’ntiādīhi navahi padehi ye sadevake loke ativiya pākaṭā paññātā buddhaguṇā, te nānappakārato vibhāvitā honti. ‘‘Itipetaṃ bhūtaṃ, itipetaṃ taccha’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.6) viya hi idha iti-saddo āsannapaccakkhakāraṇattho , pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho, tena ca tesaṃ guṇānaṃ bahubhāvo dīpito, tāni ca guṇasallakkhaṇakāraṇāni saddhāsampannānaṃ viññujātikānaṃ paccakkhāni hontīti tāni saṃkittentena viññunā cittassa sammukhībhūtāneva katvā saṃkittetabbānīti dassento ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti āha.
由于前文已述“阐明经师语句之义,令其与经典相符”,故虽于《清净道论》(清净道论1.125-128)中已从一切方面作了注释,但今欲于此处也详细开示其义,因此他说了其目的:“idāni vinayadharānaṃ…”(今为持律者…)等。其中,“cittasampahaṃsanatthaṃ”(令心喜悦之义)即令心满足之意,也就是令净信心生起之意。于“ārakattā”(因远离故)等句中,“ārakattā”,即极为远离故;“arīnaṃ”,即烦恼敌故;“arānaṃ”,即轮回轮之辐条故;“hatattā”,即已摧毁故;“paccayādīnaṃ”,即衣等资具及种种供养故。显示巴利原文
‘‘Suttantikānaṃ vacanānamatthaṃ, suttānurūpaṃ paridīpayantī’’ti heṭṭhā vuttattā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.125-128) sabbākārato saṃvaṇṇitampi atthaṃ idhāpi vitthāretvā dassetukāmo tattha payojanamāha ‘‘idāni vinayadharāna’’ntiādi. Tattha cittasampahaṃsanatthanti cittasantosanatthaṃ, cittappasādajananatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Ārakattā’’tiādīsu ārakattāti suvidūrattā. Arīnanti kilesārīnaṃ. Arānanti saṃsāracakkassa arānaṃ. Hatattāti viddhaṃsitattā. Paccayādīnanti cīvarādipaccayānañceva pūjāvisesānañca.
今为阐明如上所说之义,故说“ārakā hi so”等。所谓“远”,如同“近”一样,是依相对而说的。为显示至极究竟的远,故说“suvidūravidūre ṭhito”,意思是“以极远之远而住于远处”。然而,他(世尊)之住于远处,是就远离烦恼而言,并非依于方位处所,而是因为那些烦恼已被彻底断除。为显示此义,故说“maggena kilesānaṃ viddhaṃsitattā”(因以道摧毁了烦恼)。难道其他漏尽者不是也断除了那些烦恼吗?——心中忆及此诘问,故说“savāsanānaṃ”(连同习气)。因为除世尊外,他人不能将烦恼连同习气一并断除。由此显示世尊的阿罗汉果与其他阿罗汉不共。那么,此“习气”是什么?即如同具寿毕陵达瓦差(Pilindavaccha)唤人为“贱民”的现行之因那样,是烦恼虽已断除,却表现为如同烦恼未断者的行为之因的、依止于烦恼的某种特殊潜能。然而,当说“ārakā”(远)时,如何能得出“从烦恼(远)”这一义理?因为以共称提问时,可确立于别义,且别义不能显示巴利原文
Idāni yathāvuttamevatthaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘ārakā hi so’’tiādi. Dūratā nāma āsannatā viya upādāyupādāya vuccatīti paramukkaṃsagataṃ dūrabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘suvidūravidūre ṭhito’’ti āha, suṭṭhu vidūrabhāveneva vidūre ṭhitoti attho. So panassa kilesehi dūre ṭhitabhāvo, na padesavasena, atha kho tesaṃ sabbaso pahīnattāti dassento āha ‘‘maggena kilesānaṃ viddhaṃsitattā’’ti. Nanu aññesampi khīṇāsavānaṃ te pahīnā evāti anuyogaṃ manasi katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘savāsanāna’’nti. Na hi ṭhapetvā bhagavantaṃ aññe saha vāsanāya kilese pahātuṃ sakkonti. Etena aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ bhagavato arahattanti dassitaṃ hoti. Kā panāyaṃ vāsanā nāma? Pahīnakilesassapi appahīnakilesassa payogasadisapayogahetubhūto kilesanissito sāmatthiyaviseso āyasmato pilindavacchassa vasalasamudācāranimittaṃ viya. Kathaṃ pana ‘‘ārakā’’ti vutte ‘‘kilesehī’’ti ayamattho labbhatīti sāmaññacodanāya visese avaṭṭhānato visesatthinā ca visesassa anupayujjitabbato ‘‘ārakāssa honti pāpakā akusalā dhammā’’tiādīni (ma. ni. 1.434) suttapadānettha udāharitabbāni. Ārakāti cettha ā-kārassa rassattaṃ, ka-kārassa ca hakāraṃ sānusāraṃ katvā niruttinayena ‘‘araha’’nti padasiddhi veditabbā. Yathāvuttassevatthassa sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ idamettha vuccati –
因此,他名为“远离”,即与彼不相应者;
而导师已断诸过患,故被尊为阿罗汉。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘So tato ārakā nāma, yassa yenāsamaṅgitā; Asamaṅgī ca dosehi, nātho tenārahaṃ mato’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.125);
以行无益故,烦恼即是“敌”(arayo),故称“烦恼敌”。由于已杀灭诸敌,应说“arihā”,依语法规则则说为“araha”。在此,为了便于理解前述义理,应知此偈:显示巴利原文
Anatthacaraṇena kilesā eva arayoti kilesārayo. Arīnaṃ hatattā arihāti vattabbe niruttinayena ‘‘araha’’nti vuttaṃ. Etthāpi yathāvuttassatthassa sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ idaṃ veditabbaṃ –
因一切名为贪等的怨敌,
皆已被以般若为武器的导师所灭除,故亦称为阿罗汉。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yasmā rāgādisaṅkhātā, sabbepi arayo hatā; Paññāsatthena nāthena, tasmāpi arahaṃ mato’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.126);
此处所谓的“轮回轮”,是承接语。如同车毂是车轮的根本部分,无明、有、渴爱此二即如车毂,于内于外平等而住,故说“以无明、有、渴爱为毂”。如同连接毂与辋的辐,福行、非福行、不动行由作为缘与果的无明、渴爱、老死所连接,故说“以福等诸行为辐”。在诸有之中,老死作为边际而明显,故以之为辋,说“以老死为辋”。犹如车轴是车轮转动的主因,轮回轮的转动亦以漏集为因,故说“以漏集所成之轴贯穿”。漏本身即无明等之因,故称漏集,如所说“以漏集故有无明集”。依异熟、业、色等差别而有的欲有等三有,即是车;于此三有车中,由各自的缘平等地,或从最初完全地连结,故名“等连结”。由于无始以来相续运转,故说“无始时来运转”。显示巴利原文
Yañcetaṃ saṃsāracakkanti sambandho. Rathacakkassa nābhi viya mūlāvayavabhūtaṃ anto bahi ca samavaṭṭhitaṃ avijjābhavataṇhādvayanti vuttaṃ ‘‘avijjābhavataṇhāmayanābhī’’ti. Nābhiyā nemiyā ca sambaddhaarasadisā paccayaphalabhūtehi avijjātaṇhājarāmaraṇehi sambaddhā puññābhisaṅkhāraapuññābhisaṅkhāraāneñjābhisaṅkhārāti vuttaṃ ‘‘puññādiabhisaṅkhārāra’’nti. Tattha tattha bhave pariyantabhāvena pākaṭaṃ jarāmaraṇanti taṃ nemiṭṭhāniyaṃ katvā āha ‘‘jarāmaraṇanemī’’ti. Yathā rathacakkappavattiyā padhānakāraṇaṃ akkho, evaṃ saṃsāracakkappavattiyā āsavasamudayoti āha ‘‘āsavasamudayamayena akkhena vijjhitvā’’ti. Āsavā eva avijjādīnaṃ kāraṇattā āsavasamudayo. Yathāha ‘‘āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.103). Vipākakaṭattārūpappabhedo kāmabhavādiko tibhavo eva ratho, tasmiṃ tibhavarathe. Attano paccayehi samaṃ, sabbaso vā ādito paṭṭhāya yojitanti samāyojitaṃ. Ādirahitaṃ kālaṃ pavattatīti katvā anādikālappavattaṃ.
诸蕴的序列,以及界、处,
相续不断地转起,这便称为轮回。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, saṃsāroti pavuccatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.619; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.95 apasādanāvaṇṇanā; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.60; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.199) –
如是所说的轮回即是轮回轮,此即世尊所说。于菩提场:即于成为菩提之智的清净处的处所或时间。“菩提”即智慧,它于此清净明净,故为“菩提场”。以精进足:由于在杂染分与清净分中,它起着策励与安立的作用,故以两种方式转起,这就是称为精进的足。于戒地:戒即是地,以安立为义,故安立于戒地。安立:以成就之义而安立。以信手:信即是手,以执取无过失法为义,故以信为手。业灭尽者:由于能灭尽身业等一切种类的业,故为业灭尽者。智斧:于定石上善加磨砺的道智之斧,已执持。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttasaṃsārova saṃsāracakkaṃ. Anenāti bhagavatā. Bodhimaṇḍeti bodhisaṅkhātassa ñāṇassa maṇḍabhāvappatte ṭhāne kāle vā. Bodhīti paññā, sā ettha maṇḍā pasannā jātāti bodhimaṇḍo. Vīriyapādehīti saṃkilesavodānapakkhiyesu sannirumbhanasannikkhipanakiccatāya dvidhā pavatteti attano vīriyasaṅkhātehi pādehi. Sīlapathaviyanti patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena sīlameva pathavī, tassaṃ. Patiṭṭhāyāti sampādanavasena patiṭṭhahitvā. Saddhāhatthenāti anavajjadhammādānasādhanato saddhāva hattho, tena. Kammakkhayakaranti kāyakammādibhedassa sabbassapi kammassa khayakaraṇato kammakkhayakaraṃ. Ñāṇapharasunti samādhisilāyaṃ sunisitaṃ maggañāṇapharasuṃ gahetvā.
如是,在“arānaṃ hatattā”(由于已杀灭诸辐)这一句中,将名为“辐”的轮回执取为如同车轮之后,建立了义理上的连结;现在为了也从缘起教法的次第来显示此义,而说“atha vā”(或者)等。其中,“无始轮回轮”,是指随逐辗转、无有端际、不知前际的轮回之圈。“其余十法”,即从行开始、以生为终的十法。为何说这些行等法具有“辐”的性质?答:“以无明为根本,以老死为边际故。”此中,无明是根本、主要之因,那些行等法皆以无明为根本,它们这种状态被称为“以无明为根本性”。老死是边际、终结,这些行等十法以老死为边际,它们这种状态被称为“以老死为边际性”。意思是,从行开始、以生为终的十法,以无明为根本,以老死为终结。其要旨是:以作为毂的无明为根本,以作为辋的老死为边际,行等诸辐与之连结。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ‘‘arānaṃ hatattā’’ti ettha vuttaṃ arasaṅkhātaṃ saṃsāraṃ cakkaṃ viya cakkanti gahetvā atthayojanaṃ katvā idāni paṭiccasamuppādadesanākkamenapi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha anamataggasaṃsāravaṭṭanti anu anu amataggaṃ aviññātapubbakoṭikaṃ saṃsāramaṇḍalaṃ. Sesā dasa dhammāti saṅkhārādayo jātipariyosānā dasa dhammā. Kathaṃ tesaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ arabhāvoti āha ‘‘avijjāmūlakattā jarāmaraṇapariyantattā cā’’ti. Tattha avijjā mūlaṃ padhānakāraṇaṃ yesaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ te avijjāmūlakā, tesaṃ bhāvo avijjāmūlakattaṃ. Jarāmaraṇaṃ pariyantaṃ pariyosānabhūtaṃ etesanti jarāmaraṇapariyantā, saṅkhārādayo dasa dhammā. Tesaṃ bhāvo jarāmaraṇapariyantattaṃ. Saṅkhārādijātipariyosānānaṃ dasadhammānaṃ avijjāmūlakattā jarāmaraṇapariyosānattā cāti attho, nābhibhūtāya avijjāya mūlato nemibhūtena jarāmaraṇena antato saṅkhārādīnaṃ sambandhattāti adhippāyo.
“苦等”,即苦、集、灭、道。无明,因为是智的对立面,故称为无明,并非指与智相异的事物,也并非仅仅是智的缺席。其中,对于苦等的无明,正是因为它障碍了对真实自性的通达,而以覆蔽为其作用。在此,虽然除了出世间二谛之外,于其余诸处,无明也可依所缘的方式生起,但即便如此,此处仍是以覆蔽的作用来指称它。因为当它生起时,便覆蔽苦谛而安住,不令通达真实本质的相状;同样地,也覆蔽集、灭、道。显示巴利原文
Dukkhādīsūti dukkhasamudayanirodhamaggesu. Aññāṇanti ñāṇappaṭipakkhattā moho aññāṇaṃ, na pana ñāṇato aññaṃ, napi ñāṇassa abhāvamattaṃ. Tattha dukkhādīsu aññāṇaṃ yathāsabhāvappaṭivedhāppadānato tappaṭicchādanavaseneva. Ettha hi kiñcāpi ṭhapetvā lokuttarasaccadvayaṃ sesaṭṭhānesu ārammaṇavasenapi avijjā uppajjati, evaṃ santepi paṭicchādanavaseneva idha adhippetā. Sā hi uppannā dukkhasaccaṃ paṭicchādetvā tiṭṭhati, yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na deti, tathā samudayaṃ nirodhaṃ magganti.
此处,“苦”意指苦圣谛。将彼苦依欲有、色有、无色有而分为三种后,同样地将覆蔽彼苦的无明也分为三种,为了显示以无明等为缘,在三有中依次生起行等,而说“于欲有中,无明……”等。其中,“于欲有中,无明”是指覆蔽欲有过患的无明。“于色有中、于无色有中,无明”于此也是同样的道理。“于欲有中,行”是指属于欲地范畴的福行、非福行,或者是指那些应在欲有中成就的福行、非福行,即能引生欲有转生之行。此处,“行”应理解为世间的善思及不善思。“成为缘”:对福行而言,首先以所缘缘和亲依止缘两种方式成为缘;对非福行来说,若是俱生者,则以俱生缘等方式;若非俱生者,则以无间缘、等无间缘等方式;若非无间者,则以所缘缘和亲依止缘的方式成为缘。“于无色有中,行”是指不动行。“成为缘”是仅以亲依止缘的方式。然而,若就此义展开,则过于冗长,故此处不作详述。“于其余”,即指色有、无色有中的情形。显示巴利原文
Dukkhanti cettha dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ adhippetanti taṃ kāmabhavādivasena tidhā bhinditvā tathā tappaṭicchādikañca avijjaṃ tidhā katvā avijjādipaccaye tīsu bhavesu saṅkhārādike paṭipāṭiyā dassento ‘‘kāmabhave ca avijjā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kāmabhave ca avijjāti kāmabhave ādīnavapaṭicchādikā avijjā. Rūpabhave avijjā arūpabhave avijjāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Kāmabhave saṅkhārānanti kāmabhūmipariyāpannānaṃ puññāpuññasaṅkhārānaṃ, kāmabhave vā nipphādetabbā ye puññāpuññasaṅkhārā, tesaṃ kāmabhavūpapattinibbattakasaṅkhārānanti attho. Saṅkhārāti cettha lokiyakusalākusalacetanā veditabbā. Paccayo hotīti puññābhisaṅkhārānaṃ tāva ārammaṇapaccayena ceva upanissayapaccayena cāti dvidhā paccayo hoti, apuññābhisaṅkhāresu sahajātassa sahajātādivasena, asahajātassa anantarasamanantarādivasena, anānantarassa pana ārammaṇavasena ceva upanissayavasena ca paccayo hoti. Arūpabhave saṅkhārānanti āneñjābhisaṅkhārānaṃ. Paccayo hotīti upanissayapaccayavaseneva. Imasmiñca panatthe ettha vitthāriyamāne atippapañco hoti, tasmā taṃ nayidha vitthārayissāma. Itaresūti rūpārūpabhavesu.
“三处”指眼处、耳处、意处,因为鼻等三处在无色有中并不存在。“一处”指意处,因为其余诸处在此中并不存在。依此类推,“三种触”等的含义也当如此了知。“六种触”即眼触、耳触、鼻触、舌触、身触、意触这六种触。“六种受”即眼触所生受、耳触所生受、鼻触所生受、舌触所生受、身触所生受、意触所生受,这六种受。“六种渴爱身”即色渴爱、声渴爱、香渴爱、味渴爱、触渴爱、法渴爱,这六种渴爱身。所谓“于彼彼处,彼彼渴爱”,是指依色渴爱等的差别,在彼彼欲有等处生起的渴爱。显示巴利原文
Tiṇṇaṃāyatanānanti cakkhusotamanāyatanānaṃ ghānādittayassa tattha asambhavato. Ekassāti manāyatanassa itaresaṃ tattha asambhavato. Iminā nayena tiṇṇaṃ phassānantiādīsupi attho veditabbo. Chabbidhassa phassassāti cakkhusamphassasotasamphassaghānasamphassajivhāsamphassakāyasamphassamanosamphassānaṃ vasena chabbidhassa phassassa. Channaṃ vedanānanti cakkhusamphassajā vedanā, tathā sotasamphassajā ghānasamphassajā jivhāsamphassajā kāyasamphassajā manosamphassajā vedanāti imāsaṃ channaṃ vedanānaṃ. Channaṃ taṇhākāyānanti rūpataṇhā saddataṇhā gandhataṇhā rasataṇhā phoṭṭhabbataṇhā dhammataṇhāti imesaṃ channaṃ taṇhākāyānaṃ. Tattha tattha sā sā taṇhāti rūpataṇhādibhedā tattha tattha kāmabhavādīsu uppajjanakataṇhā.
以渴爱为根本的说法过于简略,因此为了将取与有等分别开示,详细说明,而说“如何”等。其中,“我将享受诸欲”说明了欲渴爱的生起;同样地,“我将享受天界成就”等也是如此。然而,当此渴爱以强力执取的方式生起时,便名为欲取,因此说“以欲取为缘”,“同样地”也是以欲取为缘。“梵天界成就”是指色界梵天中的成就。由于“一切三地之法,依可意之义而称为欲”,所以有爱也属欲取,因此说“即以欲取为缘,修习慈”等。其中,“修习慈”:慈即柔和、滋润,修习是增长之义。或者,具有慈者,称为慈,即心,或与慈相应的禅那,修习、增长、令生起之义。“修习悲”等,也应同样了知。显示巴利原文
Sā taṇhādimūlikā kathā atisaṃkhittāti taṃ upādānabhave ca vibhajitvā vitthāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kāme paribhuñjissāmīti iminā kāmataṇhāpavattimāha, tathā saggasampattiṃ anubhavissāmītiādīhi. Sā pana taṇhā yasmā bhusamādānavasena pavattamānā kāmupādānaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāmupādānapaccayā’’ti. Tathevāti kāmupādānapaccayā eva. Brahmalokasampattinti rūpībrahmaloke sampattiṃ. ‘‘Sabbepi tebhūmakā dhammā kāmanīyaṭṭhena kāmā’’ti vacanato bhavarāgopi kāmupādānamevāti katvā ‘‘kāmupādānapaccayā eva mettaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha mettaṃ bhāvetīti mijjati siniyhatīti mettā, taṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti attho. Atha vā mettā etassa atthīti mettaṃ, cittaṃ, taṃsampayuttaṃ jhānaṃ vā, taṃ bhāveti vaḍḍheti uppādeti vāti attho. Karuṇaṃ bhāvetītiādīsupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo.
“其余以取为根本的”,是指以见取、戒禁取、我语取为根本的连结中,也是同样的道理。此处的连结如下:在此,有一类人执持“无有他世”的断灭见,他以见取为缘,以身行恶行等,应当以所说的方法进行连结。另一类人执持“在某某成就之中,自我断灭”的断灭见,他为了往生彼处,以身行善行等,也应以所说的方法进行连结。另一类人执持这样的见解:“成为有色、意所成之后,自我断灭”,便为了往生色界而修习其道,圆满修习。凡此种种,皆应以所说的方法了知。另一类人执持“往生无色有之后,自我断灭”的见解,为了往生无色界而修习其道,圆满修习。凡此种种,皆应以所说的方法了知。应当了知,仅以上述这些,也已说明了以我语取为根本的连结。同样地,也应以现法涅槃论的方式来了解其连结。又一类人执取“依戒得清净、依禁得清净”的说法,将不清净之道执取为“清净道”。他以戒禁取为缘,以身行恶行等,这一切也应以所说的方法进行连结。显示巴利原文
Sesupādānamūlikāsupīti diṭṭhupādānasīlabbatupādānaattavādupādānamūlikāsupi yojanāsu eseva nayoti attho. Tatthāyaṃ yojanā – idhekacco ‘‘natthi paraloko’’ti natthikadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, so diṭṭhupādānapaccayā kāyena duccaritaṃ caratītiādi vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ. Aparo ‘‘asukasmiṃ sampattibhave attā ucchijjatī’’ti ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, so tatrūpapattiyā kāyena sucaritaṃ caratītiādi vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Aparo ‘‘rūpī manomayo hutvā attā ucchijjatī’’ti rūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāveti bhāvanāpāripūriyāti sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Aparopi ‘‘arūpabhave uppajjitvā attā ucchijjatī’’ti arūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāveti bhāvanāpāripūriyāti sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Etāhiyeva attavādupādānamūlikāpi yojanā saṃvaṇṇitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādavasenapi yojanā veditabbā. Aparo ‘‘sīlena suddhi, vatena suddhī’’ti asuddhimaggaṃ ‘‘suddhimaggo’’ti parāmasanto sīlabbatupādānapaccayā kāyena duccaritaṃ caratītiādi sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.
如今,那位开示轮回之轮的大师以“在欲界有中,无明是欲界有中诸行的缘”等语,显示了无明等作为缘、诸行等作为缘生法的状态。接着,他为了总结其义而引用《无碍解道》的经文,说道:“如此,这……”等。其中,正如诸行由因而生,无明也以欲漏等为因,因此说“这两者都是由因所生起的”。在“缘的把握”中,指的是将名色的诸缘——即无明等——加以限定后的把握。于“应被完成”处使用了处格。“慧”是指从各方面了知的智慧,即所谓度疑清净。“法住智”:果法依于它而住,故它为“住”,即是因;诸法的住,为“法住”;对于法住的智,称为“法住智”,意思是缘智,也就是对缘起的通达。虽然在此缘的把握中,慧本身就是法住智,然而在尚未见到诸行时,不可能见到无明作为诸行的缘的状态,因此应当理解为也把握了“诸行由因而生起”这一缘生法。而“这两者都是由因所生起的”这一句,是出于想显示两者皆为缘生法而说。又,此法住智是以去除过去、未来、现在三时的疑网的方式而转起的,因此说“过去时……”等。“应以此方法详细解释一切”显示巴利原文
Idāni yvāyaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ dassentena ‘‘kāmabhave avijjā kāmabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo hotī’’tiādinā avijjādīnaṃ paccayabhāvo saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayuppannabhāvo ca dassito, tameva paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiṃ ānetvā nigamanavasena dassento ‘‘evamaya’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yathā saṅkhārā hetunibbattā, evaṃ avijjāpi kāmāsavādinā sahetukā evāti āha ‘‘ubhopete hetusamuppannā’’ti. Paccayapariggaheti nāmarūpassa paccayānaṃ avijjādīnaṃ paricchijja gahaṇe. Nipphādetabbe bhummaṃ. Paññāti kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhisaṅkhātā pakārato jānanā. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti tiṭṭhanti ettha phaladhammā tadāyattavuttitāyāti ṭhiti, kāraṇaṃ, dhammānaṃ ṭhiti dhammaṭṭhiti, dhammaṭṭhitiyā ñāṇaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ, paccayañāṇanti attho, paṭiccasamuppādāvabodhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kāmañcettha paccayapariggahe paññāyeva dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ, saṅkhāresu pana adiṭṭhesu avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayabhāvo na sakkā daṭṭhunti ‘‘saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā’’ti paccayuppannadhammānampi gahaṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Ubhopete hetusamuppannāti idaṃ pana ubhinnampi paccayuppannabhāvaṃ dassetukāmatāya vuttaṃ. Idañca dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ yasmā addhattaye kaṅkhāmalavitaraṇavasena pavattati, tasmā ‘‘atītampi addhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Etena nayena sabbapadāni vitthāretabbānīti etena nayena ‘‘avijjā hetū’’tiādinā avijjāyaṃ vuttanayena ‘‘saṅkhārā hetu, viññāṇaṃ hetusamuppanna’’ntiādinā sabbapadāni vitthāretabbāni.
“简略”:在这里,无明等与识等是简略,即因与果。或者说,“因与果”被简略地称为“简略”,也就是无明等与识等。应知,因为简略状态的共通性而使用了单数。那些简略依时间而分为四种:过去时的因、现在的果、现在的因、未来的果。因此说“在此,第一个简略是过去时”等。“现在时”是关联词。“渴爱、取、有已被包含”:在此,由于烦恼状态的共通性,通过把握无明就包含了渴爱与取;由于业状态的共通性,通过把握行就包含了有;而且因为没有它们,无明与行便不能完成各自的作用,所以渴爱、取、有实已包括在内。或者,无知者会渴求,渴求者会执取,以执取为缘而有有,因此渴爱、取、有亦被包含。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Saṃkhippanti ettha avijjādayo viññāṇādayo cāti saṅkhepo, hetu vipāko ca. Atha vā hetuvipākoti saṃkhippatīti saṅkhepo, avijjādayo viññāṇādayo ca. Saṅkhepabhāvasāmaññena pana ekavacanaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ . Te pana saṅkhepā atīte hetu, etarahi vipāko, etarahi hetu, āyatiṃ vipākoti evaṃ kālavibhāgena cattāro jātā, tenāha ‘‘purimasaṅkhepo cettha atīto addhā’’tiādi. Paccuppanno addhāti sambandho. Taṇhupādānabhavā gahitāva hontīti ettha avijjāgahaṇena kilesabhāvasāmaññato taṇhupādānā gahitā, saṅkhāraggahaṇena kammabhāvasāmaññato bhavo gahito, avijjāsaṅkhārānaṃ tehi vinā sakiccākaraṇato ca taṇhupādānabhavā gahitāva honti. Atha vā avidvā paritassati, paritasito upādiyati, tassupādānapaccayā bhavo, tasmā taṇhupādānabhavāpi gahitā honti. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
“在前世的业有中,痴是无明,造作是诸行。欲求是渴爱,接近是取,思是业有。如此,这五种法在前世的业有中,是此处结生的缘。”(《无碍解道》1.47)显示巴利原文
‘‘Purimakammabhavasmiṃ moho avijjā, āyūhanā saṅkhārā. Nikanti taṇhā, upagamanaṃ upādānaṃ, cetanā bhavo, iti ime pañca dhammā purimakammabhavasmiṃ idha paṭisandhiyā paccayā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.47).
于此(《分别论注》242;《无碍解道注》1.1.47),‘在前世的业有中’:意指在前世的业有,即过去生中,正在造作业有之时。‘痴是无明’:那时,对于苦等事理的痴惑,由于被其蒙蔽而造业,这即是无明。‘造作是诸行’:对于正在造业者而言,那些前行的思,例如,一个人生起‘我将布施’的心之后,为筹备布施之物奔波一月乃至一年,期间所生起的前行思;而将施物放入受施者手中那一刹那的思,则称为‘业有’。或者,一个转向心与六个速行心中的思,称为‘造作之诸行’,第七个速行心的思则为‘业有’。又或者,任何思皆为‘业有’,与之相应的思则皆是‘造作之诸行’。‘欲求是渴爱’:造业者对其果报、对再生之有的欲求与渴望,这即是渴爱。‘接近是取’:作为业有之缘,依‘我造了此业后,将在某处享受欲乐,或将断灭’等种种方式而生起的接近、执持、执取,这即是取。‘思是业有’:应知,在下面‘对于正在造业者,那些前行之思’等三种义理分别中,凡被称为‘业有’的思,此思即是‘业有’,应如此领会其义。显示巴利原文
Tattha (vibha. aṭṭha. 242; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.47) purimakammabhavasminti purime kammabhave, atītajātiyaṃ kammabhave kariyamāneti attho. Moho avijjāti yo tadā dukkhādīsu moho yena mūḷho kammaṃ karoti, sā avijjā. Āyūhanā saṅkhārāti taṃ kammaṃ karoto yā purimacetanāyo, yathā ‘‘dānaṃ dassāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvā māsampi saṃvaccharampi dānūpakaraṇāni sajjentassa uppannā purimacetanāyo, paṭiggāhakānaṃ pana hatthe dakkhiṇaṃ patiṭṭhāpayato cetanā bhavoti vuccati. Ekāvajjanesu vā chasu javanesu cetanā āyūhanasaṅkhārā nāma, sattamā bhavo. Yā kāci vā pana cetanā bhavo, sampayuttā āyūhanasaṅkhārā nāma. Nikanti taṇhāti yā kammaṃ karontassa tassa phale upapattibhave nikāmanā patthanā, sā taṇhā nāma. Upagamanaṃ upādānanti yaṃ kammabhavassa paccayabhūtaṃ ‘‘idaṃ katvā asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne kāme sevissāmi ucchijjissāmī’’tiādinā nayena pavattaṃ upagamanaṃ gahaṇaṃ parāmasanaṃ, idaṃ upādānaṃ nāma. Cetanā bhavoti ‘‘taṃ kammaṃ karoto yā purimā cetanāyo’’tiādinā heṭṭhā vuttesu tīsu atthavikappesu yā cetanā bhavoti vuttā, sā cetanā bhavoti evamattho veditabbo.
现在,为了含摄示显这一切无明等法在两种轮中的情形,他说道:‘这五种法,是过去的业轮’。在此处,就严格意义而言,诸行与业有即是业;而无明等法,由于是业的助伴、与业相似、是业的资助者,因此也被称为‘业’。无明等法,因其本身是能生异熟的法性,故与业相似,并以俱生缘和亲依止缘之力资助业。而业本身,则因其彼此相连、往复轮转的特性,故为‘业轮’。‘识等五种’:以识为始、以受为终的五种法,是‘现在’,即指现前、于此生中。‘无明与行已被包含’:此处亦如前所应知,即由于烦恼性与业性之共通,通过摄持渴爱与取,便含摄了无明;通过摄持有,便含摄了诸行。或者,当摄持有时,其前行部分或与之相应的诸行即已被包括在内;而通过摄持渴爱与取,与之相应的痴惑,或者因受其蒙蔽而造业的痴惑本身即是无明,因此,通过摄持渴爱、取、有,无明与行即已被包含其中。故如是言——显示巴利原文
Idāni sabbepete avijjādayo dhamme dvīhi vaṭṭehi saṅgahetvā dassetukāmo āha ‘‘ime pañca dhammā atīte kammavaṭṭa’’nti. Ettha ca nippariyāyato saṅkhārā bhavo ca kammaṃ, avijjādayo pana kammasahāyatāya kammasarikkhakā tadupakārakā cāti kammanti vuttā. Avijjādayo hi vipākadhammadhammatāya kammasarikkhakā sahajātakoṭiyā upanissayakoṭiyā ca kammassa ca upakārakā. Kammameva ca aññamaññasambandhaṃ hutvā punappunaṃ parivattanaṭṭhena kammavaṭṭaṃ. Viññāṇādayo pañcāti viññāṇādayo vedanāpariyantā pañca etarahi idāni imasmiṃ attabhāveti vuttaṃ hoti. Avijjāsaṅkhārā gahitāva hontīti etthāpi pubbe viya kilesakammabhāvasāmaññato taṇhupādānaggahaṇena avijjā gahitā, bhavaggahaṇena saṅkhārā gahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā bhave gahite tassa pubbabhāgā taṃsampayuttā vā saṅkhārā gahitāva honti , taṇhupādānaggahaṇena ca taṃsampayuttā yāya vā mūḷho kammaṃ karoti, sā avijjāva hotīti taṇhupādānabhavaggahaṇena avijjāsaṅkhārā gahitāva honti. Teneva vuttaṃ –
即‘于此,诸处成熟故,痴为无明,造作为诸行,欲求为渴爱,接近为取,思为业有。如是,此五种法,即于此处的业有中,为未来结生之缘。’(《无碍解道》1.47)显示巴利原文
‘‘Idha paripakkattā āyatanānaṃ moho avijjā, āyūhanā saṅkhārā, nikanti taṇhā, upagamanaṃ upādānaṃ, cetanā bhavo, iti ime pañca dhammā idha kammabhavasmiṃ āyatiṃ paṭisandhiyā paccayā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.47).
在此,“诸处已成熟”一句,说明了诸处成熟者造业时的痴。其余如前文所述。显示巴利原文
Tattha idha paripakkattā āyatanānanti paripakkāyatanassa kammakaraṇakāle sammoho dassito. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
识、名色、六处、触、受的生、老、坏灭等状态,被称为生、老、死。由于把握了状态,便也把握了具有状态者——二者不相离——故说“借由生、老、死的名称而指示了识等”。“借名称”即借生、老、死的言说。这些即识等。未来的果报轮转,是因为从现在因所生的未来法已被把握。那些即无明等。所谓“行相”:虽未从自性上宣说,但在每一类摄中亦被纳入,通过无明、行等的把握而被阐明,故为“行相”;或指过去因等的类别,故为“行相”。由此,从行相而说,则有二十种,即依过去因五支等的分类而为二十种。显示巴利原文
Viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanānaṃ jātijarābhaṅgāvatthā jātijarāmaraṇanti vuttāti avatthānaṃ gahaṇena avatthāvantā gahitāva honti tadavinābhāvatoti āha ‘‘jātijarāmaraṇāpadesena viññāṇādīnaṃ niddiṭṭhattā’’ti. Apadesenāti jātijarāmaraṇānaṃ kathanena. Imeti viññāṇādayo. Āyatiṃ vipākavaṭṭanti paccuppannahetuto bhāvīnaṃ anāgatānaṃ gahitattā. Teti avijjādayo. Ākāratoti sarūpato avuttāpi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ saṅgahe ākirīyanti avijjāsaṅkhārādiggahaṇehi pakāsīyantīti ākārā, atītahetuādīnaṃ vā pakārā ākārā . Tato ākārato. Vīsatividhā hontīti atīte hetupañcakādibhedato vīsatividhā honti.
在此,行与识之间有一个连结:由于从因至果无间地转起,故为因与果相关联的一个连结;同样,有与生之间也是如此。而受与爱之间,则由于从果至因无间地转起,故为果与因相关联的一个连结。因为即使是果法,也能成为其他具有因性之法的缘。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhāraviññāṇānañcettha antarā eko sandhīti hetuto phalassa avicchedappavattibhāvato hetuphalassa sambandhabhūto eko sandhi, tathā bhavajātīnamantarā. Vedanātaṇhānamantarā pana phalato hetuno avicchedappavattibhāvato phalahetusambandhabhūto eko sandhi. Phalabhūtopi hi dhammo aññassa hetusabhāvassa dhammassa paccayo hotīti.
“如是”是回顾前述的方式。因此说“四种简略”等。“以一切行相”,即以此处已说及未说的、在缘起分别、《无碍解道》等中所开显的一切行相。知,即了知。见,即以作为见的智眼现前照见。证知,即通达——这些是同义词。那“知”,即以如实知之义;“以了知之义”,即以无常等行相通达之义。显示巴利原文
Itīti vuttappakāraparāmasanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘catusaṅkhepa’’ntiādi. Sabbākāratoti idha vuttehi ca avuttehi ca paṭiccasamuppādavibhaṅge anantanayasamantapaṭṭhānādīsu ca āgatehi sabbehi ākārehi. Jānātīti avabujjhati. Passatīti dassanabhūtena ñāṇacakkhunā paccakkhato passati. Aññāti paṭivijjhatīti tesaṃyeva vevacanaṃ. Tanti taṃ jānanaṃ. Ñātaṭṭhenāti yathāsabhāvato jānanaṭṭhena. Pajānanaṭṭhenāti aniccādīhi pakārehi paṭivijjhanaṭṭhena.
现在,为了说明这部有轮为何被引用于此,而说“依此”等。其中,“那些法”即无明等法。“如实知已”,即以大金刚智如实了知之后。“厌离”,即以强力观智厌离。“离染、解脱”,即以圣道离染、解脱。“杀敌”,此为连接句。其中,当世尊离染、解脱时,即名为杀敌。此后,取正觉刹那而说“已杀、已摧、已灭”。如此,由于已杀敌,故为阿罗汉。依此方式,也由于已杀如前所说的轮回之轮的诸行等辐,故为阿罗汉。在此,这样说——显示巴利原文
Idāni yadatthamidaṃ bhavacakkaṃ idhānītaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘iminā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha te dhammeti te avijjādike dhamme. Yathābhūtaṃ ñatvāti mahāvajirañāṇena yāthāvato jānitvā. Nibbindantoti balavavipassanāya nibbindanto. Virajjanto vimuccantoti ariyamaggehi virajjanto vimuccanto. Are hanīti sambandho. Tattha yadā bhagavā virajjati vimuccati, tadā are hanati nāma. Tato paraṃ pana abhisambuddhakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘hani vihani viddhaṃsesī’’ti. Evampi arānaṃ hatattā arahanti evaṃ imināpi pakārena yathāvuttasaṃsāracakkassa saṅkhārādiarānaṃ hatattā arahaṃ. Etthedaṃ vuccati –
“轮回之轮的诸辐,已为智剑所断除;
因此,他由世间怙主而被称为阿罗汉。”(《清净道论》1.128)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Arā saṃsāracakkassa, hatā ñāṇāsinā yato; Lokanāthena tenesa, arahanti pavuccatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.128);
“最上应供”,即由于处于最上应供的状态。为显示:当转轮王无生命的轮宝出现时,世间便会于彼处行供养,他处的殊胜供养便告断绝,更何况正等觉者出现于世时?因而说“如来出现时”等。纵使有人说“我将以一一法蕴、一一住处来作供养”,因是特意针对导师而作,故说“为世尊”等。更何况其余的殊胜供养呢?即是说,与前述相比,其余由威力低劣的天、人所行的并不广大的殊胜供养,在阿罗汉的境界中还有什么可论?因为对资具等的应受,亦是阿罗汉——即由于前述的衣等资具及殊胜供养,以最上应供的状态而堪能,故为阿罗汉。为便于理解此义,这样说——显示巴利原文
Aggadakkhiṇeyyattāti uttamadakkhiṇeyyabhāvato. Cakkavattino acetane cakkaratane uppanne tattheva loko pūjaṃ karoti, aññattha pūjāvisesā pacchijjanti, kimaṅgaṃ pana sammāsambuddhe uppanneti dassento ‘‘uppannetathāgate’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Ekekaṃ dhammakkhandhaṃ ekekavihārena pūjessāmī’’ti vuttepi satthāraṃyeva uddissa katattā ‘‘bhagavantaṃ uddissā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ko pana vādo aññesaṃ pūjāvisesānanti yathāvuttato aññesaṃ amahesakkhehi devamanussehi kariyamānānaṃ nātiuḷārānaṃ pūjāvisesānaṃ arahabhāve kā nāma kathā. Paccayādīnaṃ arahattāpi arahanti yathāvuttacīvarādipaccayānaṃ pūjāvisesassa ca aggadakkhiṇeyyabhāvena anucchavikattāpi arahaṃ. Imassapi atthassa sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ idaṃ vuccati –
“殊胜供养与资具一同”,
因为这位世间怙主当受供养,
而在世间,“阿拉汉”之名与义相应,
所以,这位胜者得此“阿拉汉”之名。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pūjāvisesaṃ saha paccayehi, Yasmā ayaṃ arahati lokanātho; Atthānurūpaṃ arahanti loke, Tasmā jino arahati nāmameta’’nti. (visuddhi. 1.129);
“因恶名声之怖畏”,即因非好名声之怖畏、因恶名、因谴责之怖畏,此为其义。秘密作恶者,乃是指怀着“莫让任何人知晓”之念而于隐秘处造恶之人。如是,他永无如此之作——这位世尊因于菩提座处已彻底断除诸恶之因,故于任何时皆不作此。于此有偈颂曰:显示巴利原文
Asilokabhayenāti akittibhayena, ayasabhayena garahābhayenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Raho pāpaṃ karontīti ‘‘mā naṃ koci jaññā’’ti rahasi pāpaṃ karonti. Evamesa na kadāci karotīti esa bhagavā pāpahetūnaṃ bodhimaṇḍeyeva suppahīnattā kadācipi evaṃ na karoti. Hoti cettha –
“于诸恶业中,真实无秘密,
由无秘密故,彼称阿罗汉。”(《清净道论》1.130)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yasmā natthi raho nāma, pāpakammesu tādino; Rahābhāvena tenesa, arahaṃ iti vissuto’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.130);
现在,为便于把握,将前文所说全部义理总摄而出,故说“于此有偈”等。“彼牟尼是烦恼敌”一句中,为令偈颂相连顺畅,可见随韵的省略,其义为“已杀烦恼敌”。“及资具等应受”一句,亦当依前述之理,视作随韵的省略。显示巴利原文
Idāni sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ yathāvuttamatthaṃ sabbampi saṅgahetvā dassento āha ‘‘hoti cetthā’’tiādi. Kilesārīna so munīti ettha gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ niggahītalopo daṭṭhabbo, kilesārīnaṃ hatattāti attho. Paccayādīna cārahoti etthāpi niggahītalopo vuttanayeneva daṭṭhabbo.
于此,“阿罗汉”一词尚应知另一理趣——“远离”即阿罗汉,义为极远的状态。何以说是极远的状态?凡未修身、未修戒、未修心、未修慧者,即由此未断贪、嗔、痴,不晓圣法,于圣法中未受调练,不见圣法,未行圣道而行邪道者,他们便与阿罗汉极其遥远。此即世尊所说——显示巴利原文
Arahanti ettha ayamaparopi nayo daṭṭhabbo – ārakāti arahaṃ, suvidūrabhāvato icceva attho. Kuto pana suvidūrabhāvatoti? Ye abhāvitakāyā abhāvitasīlā abhāvitacittā abhāvitapaññā, tato eva appahīnarāgadosamohā ariyadhammassa akovidā ariyadhamme avinītā ariyadhammassa adassāvino appaṭipannā micchāpaṭipannā ca, tato suvidūrabhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
“诸比丘,纵使有比丘抓住我的僧伽梨衣角,紧跟在我身后,步步踏着我的足迹而行,然彼若怀贪求、于欲渴爱强烈,心瞋恚、意存恶念,失念、不正知,心不寂静、散乱不安,不摄护诸根,那么,他实远离于我,我也远离于他。何以故?诸比丘,彼比丘不见法;不见法者,则不见我。”(《如是语》92)显示巴利原文
‘‘Saṅghāṭikaṇṇe cepi me, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gahetvā piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandho assa pāde pādaṃ nikkhipanto, so ca hoti abhijjhālu kāmesu tibbasārāgo byāpannacitto paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo muṭṭhassati asampajāno asamāhito vibbhantacitto pākatindriyo, atha kho so ārakāva mayhaṃ, ahañca tassa. Taṃ kissa hetu? Dhammañhi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na passati, dhammaṃ apassanto na maṃ passatī’’ti (itivu. 92).
因为上述那些人,即使朝夕都在导师身边,也不能因此就说他们‘亲近导师’,导师对他们也是如此。因此,对于不善之人,阿拉汉是‘远离的、在远处的’。由此而说——显示巴利原文
Yathāvuttapuggalā hi sacepi sāyaṃpātaṃ satthu santikāvacarāva siyuṃ, na te tāvatā ‘‘satthu santikā’’ti vattabbā, tathā satthāpi nesaṃ. Iti asappurisānaṃ ārakā dūreti arahaṃ. Tenedaṃ vuccati –
那些志向低劣之人,未能正确行道;
世尊远离他们,因此阿拉汉被认为是在远处。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sammā na paṭipajjanti, ye nihīnāsayā narā; Ārakā tehi bhagavā, dūre tenārahaṃ mato’’ti.
同样地,‘ārakā’即阿罗汉,意为‘亲近的状态’。为何是亲近的状态呢?因为那些已修习身、已修习戒、已修习心、已修习慧的人,由此断除了贪嗔痴,他们通达圣法,于圣法中善加修习,已见圣法、正确行道,因此而成为亲近。世尊也曾这样说:显示巴利原文
Tathā ārakāti arahaṃ, āsannabhāvatoti attho. Kuto pana āsannabhāvatoti? Ye bhāvitakāyā bhāvitasīlā bhāvitacittā bhāvitapaññā, tato eva pahīnarāgadosamohā ariyadhammassa kovidā ariyadhamme suvinītā ariyadhammassa dassāvino sammāpaṭipannā, tato āsannabhāvato. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā –
“诸比丘,即使有比丘住在离我百由旬之处,若他于诸欲无贪求、无强烈贪染,心无嗔恚、无恶意思惟,具足正念正知,得定、心一境性,守护根门,那么他实是贴近我,我也贴近他。这是什么缘故呢?诸比丘,因为那位比丘见法,见法者即见我。”(《如是语》92)显示巴利原文
‘‘Yojanasate cepi me, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vihareyya, so ca hoti anabhijjhālu kāmesu na tibbasārāgo abyāpannacitto apaduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo upaṭṭhitassati sampajāno samāhito ekaggacitto saṃvutindriyo, atha kho so santikeva mayhaṃ, ahañca tassa. Taṃ kissa hetu? Dhammañhi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu passati, dhammaṃ passanto maṃ passatī’’ti (itivu. 92).
因为像这样的人,即使与导师相隔百由旬,也不能因此便说他们‘远离导师’,导师对他们而言也是如此。因此,对善人而言,阿罗汉即是‘远者即近’。由此而说——显示巴利原文
Tathārūpā hi puggalā satthu yojanasatantarikāpi honti, na tāvatā te ‘‘satthu dūracārino’’ti vattabbā, tathā satthāpi nesaṃ. Iti sappurisānaṃ ārakā āsanneti arahaṃ. Tenedaṃ vuccati –
那些正行之人,志趣极为高尚;
他们虽远而实近,由此胜者亦名阿罗汉。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ye sammā paṭipajjanti, suppaṇītādhimuttikā; Ārakā tehi āsanne, tenāpi arahaṃ jino’’ti.
凡是贪欲等不善法,若在某人的相续中生起,便会为其带来现世与来生的祸患,并且对于导向涅槃的修行之道,它们正是直接的对立面。因此,为了圆满自利利他而依正道修行的善士,应当远远避开、舍断这些法,故称之为‘应离’。而这些应离之法,世尊在菩提树下已以圣道将其完全断尽、彻底根除。如经中说:显示巴利原文
Ye ime rāgādayo pāpadhammā yasmiṃ santāne uppajjanti, tassa diṭṭhadhammikampi samparāyikampi anatthaṃ āvahanti, nibbānagāminiyā paṭipadāya ekaṃseneva ujuvipaccanīkabhūtā ca, te attahitaṃ parahitañca paripūretuṃ sammā paṭipajjantehi sādhūhi dūrato rahitabbā pariccajitabbā pahātabbāti rahā nāma, te ca yasmā bhagavato bodhimūleyeva ariyamaggena sabbaso pahīnā susamucchinnā. Yathāha –
婆罗门,如来的贪已断除,嗔已断除,痴已断除,一切恶不善法皆已断尽,根绝无余,如截顶的多罗树,归于无有,于未来不再生起。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tathāgatassa kho, brāhmaṇa, rāgo pahīno doso moho, sabbepi pāpakā akusalā dhammā pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṃkatā āyatiṃ anuppādadhammā’’ti (pārā. 9).
因此,他全然无有这些‘rahā’(应远离的恶法),故应称为‘araho’。随顺音声,将‘o’转为‘a’,称为‘arahaṃ’。由此有言:显示巴利原文
Tasmā sabbaso na santi etassa rahāti arahoti vattabbe okārassa sānusāraṃ akārādesaṃ katvā ‘‘araha’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenedaṃ vuccati –
恶法名为‘rahā’,因善人应当远离故;
由于世尊已彻底断除它们,故被称为阿罗汉。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pāpadhammā rahā nāma, sādhūhi rahitabbato; Tesaṃ suṭṭhu pahīnattā, bhagavā arahaṃ mato’’ti.
那些已遍知诸蕴、已断烦恼、已修习道、已作证灭的阿罗汉、漏尽者,那些尚为有学、未达心志、为希求无上安稳而住者,以及那些修行清净、志向贤善、具足信、戒、闻等功德的人们,世尊不远离、不舍弃他们。正因为世尊不舍离他们,故为阿罗汉。诚然,圣弟子们因现见了导师所开示的法,故与导师的法身不相离。正如具寿宾吉耶所说:显示巴利原文
Ye te sabbaso pariññātakkhandhā pahīnakilesā bhāvitamaggā sacchikatanirodhā arahanto khīṇāsavā, ye ca sekhā appattamānasā anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ patthayamānā viharanti, ye ca parisuddhappayogā kalyāṇajjhāsayā saddhāsīlasutādiguṇasampannā puggalā, tehi na rahitabbo na pariccajitabbo, te ca bhagavatāti arahaṃ. Tathā hi ariyapuggalā satthārā diṭṭhadhammassa paccakkhakaraṇato satthu dhammasarīrena avirahitāva honti. Yathāha āyasmā piṅgiyo –
我以心、以眼观见他,
婆罗门,我日夜安住不放逸;
我礼敬,度过夜晚,
因此,我知没有分离。
信、喜、意、念,
这些全都不离乔达摩的教法;
无论广慧者前往何方,
我便朝着那一方礼敬他。’(《经集》1148-1149)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Passāmi naṃ manasā cakkhunāva, Rattindivaṃ brāhmaṇa appamatto; Namassamāno vivasemi rattiṃ, Teneva maññāmi avippavāsaṃ. ‘‘Saddhā ca pīti ca mano sati ca, Nāpentime gotamasāsanamhā; Yaṃ yaṃ disaṃ vajati bhūripañño, Sa tena teneva natohamasmī’’ti. (su. ni. 1148-1149);
正因如此,他们不推举其他导师。正如经中所说——显示巴利原文
Teneva ca te aññaṃ satthāraṃ na uddisanti. Yathāha –
诸比丘!无有是处,无有可能,具足正见者会推举其他导师;此事不存在。’(《中部》3.128;《增支部》1.276)显示巴利原文
‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.128; a. ni. 1.276).
即使是善凡夫,也大多对导师怀有不动摇的信心。正因如此,善修行者与殊胜之人不应远离他,而他也不远离他们,因此他没有应当舍离的‘rahā’;或者说,善人们没有应当舍弃他的‘rahā’,故名为阿拉汉。由此而说——显示巴利原文
Kalyāṇaputhujjanāpi yebhuyyena satthari niccalasaddhā eva honti. Iti suppaṭipannehi purisavisesehi avirahitabbato tesañca avirahanato na santi etassa rahā pariccajanakā, natthi vā etassa rahā sādhūhi pariccajitabbatāti arahaṃ. Tenedaṃ vuccati –
那些亲证正法、行境清净的圣者;
他不曾与他们分离,因此导师被尊为阿拉汉。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ye sacchikatasaddhammā, ariyā suddhagocarā; Na tehi rahito hoti, nātho tenārahaṃ mato’’ti.
“raho”也意指“去”。然而世尊没有在诸趣中流转、名为轮回的“去”,因为能尽诸业的圣道已在菩提树下,将业轮及其资粮彻底摧毁。正如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Rahoti ca gamanaṃ vuccati, bhagavato ca nānāgatīsu paribbhamanasaṅkhātaṃ saṃsāre gamanaṃ natthi kammakkhayakarena ariyamaggena bodhimūleyeva sabbaso sasambhārassa kammavaṭṭassa viddhaṃsitattā. Yathāha –
“依此投生为天,或为乾闼婆,或为飞鸟;
依此成为夜叉,或得人身;
我的诸漏已尽,已摧毁,已拔除。’
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yena devūpapatyassa, gandhabbo vā vihaṅgamo; Yakkhattaṃ yena gaccheyyaṃ, manussattañca abbaje; Te mayhaṃ āsavā khīṇā, viddhastā vinaḷīkatā’’ti. (a. ni. 4.36);
如此,他没有任何隐匿的去处,于诸趣中亦无再生,故亦名阿罗汉。由此而说:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ natthi etassa raho gamanaṃ gatīsu paccājātītipi arahaṃ. Tenedaṃ vuccati –
‘凡于轮回中,全无隐匿处;
已断除生死者,是为阿拉汉、善逝。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Raho vā gamanaṃ yassa, saṃsāre natthi sabbaso; Pahīnajātimaraṇo, arahaṃ sugato mato’’ti.
或者,世尊因值得称赞而为阿拉汉。文字学家们将‘araha’一词解释为称赞。而世尊值得称赞的特质,非他人所共有,是如实证得的功德,于天人世间稳固确立。诚然,当如此称扬——他具足无上的戒、无上的定、无上的慧、无上的解脱,无等、无等等、无可比、无对等、无匹敌——时,智者、天人、梵天,乃至世尊自己,都无法穷尽其功德。因此,世尊也因值得称赞而为阿拉汉。由此而说——显示巴利原文
Pāsaṃsattā vā bhagavā arahaṃ. Akkharacintakā hi pasaṃsāyaṃ arahasaddaṃ vaṇṇenti. Pāsaṃsabhāvo ca bhagavato anaññasādhāraṇato yathābhuccaguṇādhigato sadevake loke suppatiṭṭhito. Tathā hesa anuttarena sīlena anuttarena samādhinā anuttarāya paññāya anuttarāya vimuttiyā asamo asamasamo appaṭimo appaṭibhāgo appaṭipuggaloti evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ guṇe vibhajitvā vuccamāne paṇḍitapurisehi devehi brahmehi bhagavatā vā pana pariyosāpetuṃ asakkuṇeyyarūpo. Iti pāsaṃsattāpi bhagavā arahaṃ. Tenedaṃ vuccati –
因为在天人世间中,没有与他功德相等者;
因此,也正因为值得称叹,两足至尊是阿拉汉。’
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Guṇehi sadiso natthi, yasmā loke sadevake; Tasmā pāsaṃsiyattāpi, arahaṃ dvipaduttamo’’ti.
然而,从总摄一切的角度来说——显示巴利原文
Sabbasaṅgahavasena pana –
愚钝之人离他很远,有智之人亦离他很远;
由于已彻底断除所应远离的恶法,且智者不应被远离,
因于诸有中已无贪著,故称为‘应供’,是为胜者。
显示巴利原文 Ārakā mandabuddhīnaṃ, ārakā ca vijānataṃ; Rahānaṃ suppahīnattā, vidūnamaraheyyato; Bhavesu ca rahābhāvā, pāsaṃsā arahaṃ jinoti.
至此,‘阿拉汉’一词的含义已完全阐明。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā ca ‘‘araha’’nti padassa sabbaso attho vibhatto hoti.
现在,为了阐明“正自觉者”的含义,说“正确地、自己地”等。其中,“正确地”意为无颠倒。“自己地”意为亲自,即不由他人引导。因为在“正觉者”一词中,“正”字应理解为表示“自己”这一义。“一切法”指无余的应知之法。然而,此处何以得此“一切法”的特定所指?因其不执取部分。若不执取部分,则可知所取是无余的,就如“受戒者不布施”的说法。如此,应知“佛”一词的成立唯在主动者,而非被动格的诉求。因为此处仅从字面得到“正确地、自己地觉悟故,为正自觉者”这一意义,而“一切法”则是依义理而取来说的。觉悟的作用若无对象,则不合理。显示巴利原文
Idāni sammāsambuddhoti imassa atthaṃ vibhajitvā dassento āha ‘‘sammā sāmañcā’’tiādi. Tattha sammāti aviparītaṃ. Sāmanti sayameva, aparaneyyo hutvāti attho. Sambuddhoti hi ettha saṃ-saddo sayanti etassa atthassa bodhakoti daṭṭhabbo. Sabbadhammānanti anavasesānaṃ neyyadhammānaṃ. Kathaṃ panettha sabbadhammānanti ayaṃ viseso labbhatīti? Ekadesassa aggahaṇato. Padesaggahaṇe hi asati gahetabbassa nippadesatāva viññāyati yathā ‘‘dikkhito na dadātī’’ti. Evañca katvā atthavisesanapekkhā kattari eva buddhasaddasiddhi veditabbā kammavacanicchāya abhāvato. ‘‘Sammā sāmañca buddhattā sammāsambuddho’’ti ettakameva hi idha saddato labbhati, ‘‘sabbadhammāna’’nti idaṃ pana atthato labbhamānaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Na hi bujjhanakiriyā avisayā yujjati.
现在,为了阐明总说“一切法”的范围,而说“应证知之法”等。其中,“应证知”指应以殊胜之智,从无常等相、特相等而知的四谛法。“由应证知故为觉者”意为:因应证知性而觉悟,即于前行分以观智等,于证得刹那以道智,于后分以一切知智等而了知。此后诸句也同此理。“应遍知之法”指应以无常等而遍知的苦圣谛。“应断除”指集谛所属之法。“应作证”是就涅槃而说。然而,此处使用复数表述,是着眼于有余依等基于理趣所成立的差别,或者这也是四谛法的总说。正如将说“眼是苦谛”等。总说是依其义尚未确定界限的法而作。因为总说仅说所列举诸法的存在性,而非界限,故以无界限的复数说,如“无因法、无为法”。或者,“应作证”也包含果与解脱,而非仅涅槃,故作复数表述。同样,“应修习”中,也应视为包含诸禅那。正因如此,世尊对塞拉婆罗门证明自己的觉位时,如此说。显示巴利原文
Idāni tassā visayaṃ ‘‘sabbadhamme’’ti sāmaññato vuttaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘abhiññeyye dhamme’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha abhiññeyyeti aniccādito lakkhaṇarasādito ca abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena jānitabbe catusaccadhamme. Abhiññeyyato buddhoti abhiññeyyabhāvato bujjhi, pubbabhāge vipassanāpaññādīhi adhigamakkhaṇe maggapaññāya aparabhāge sabbaññutaññāṇādīhi aññāsīti attho. Ito paresupi eseva nayo . Pariññeyye dhammeti aniccādivasena parijānitabbaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccamāha. Pahātabbeti samudayapakkhiye. Sacchikātabbeti nibbānaṃ sandhāyāha. Bahuvacananiddeso panettha sopādisesādikaṃ pariyāyasiddhaṃ bhedamapekkhitvā kato, uddeso vā ayaṃ catusaccadhammānampi. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘cakkhu dukkhasacca’’ntiādi. Uddeso ca avinicchitatthaparicchedassa dhammassa vasena karīyati. Uddesena hi uddisiyamānānaṃ atthitāmattaṃ vuccati, na paricchedoti aparicchedena bahuvacanena vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘appaccayā dhammā, asaṅkhatā dhammā’’ti. Sacchikātabbeti vā phalavimuttīnampi gahaṇaṃ, na nibbānassevāti bahuvacananiddeso kato. Evañca bhāvetabbeti ettha jhānānampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Teneva cāhāti selabrāhmaṇassa attano buddhabhāvaṃ sādhento evamāha.
那么,世尊是自己证明自己的正自觉位吗?是的,他以大悲心证明,因为此非他人所能及。于此,有“我独为正自觉者,我为一切胜者、一切知者”等经文,以及此“应证知”等经文,正是此义的证明。其中,以“应证知”说苦圣谛,以“应修习”说道圣谛。而此处的“而”字有连接未说之义的作用,由此应知包含了“应作证”。或者,仅以“应证知”,便以余类智显示了应遍知之法与应作证之法。因此,“我是觉者”意为:因为四谛已为我所觉,且没有任何离于谛的所知,故我觉了一切所知,即我已了知。在《塞拉经注》中,则如此说——显示巴利原文
Kiṃ pana bhagavā sayameva attano sammāsambuddhabhāvaṃ sādhetīti? Sādheti mahākaruṇāya aññesaṃ avisayato. Tattha ‘‘ekomhi sammāsambuddho, sabbābhibhū sabbavidūhamasmī’’tiādīni (ma. ni. 2.341; mahāva. 11) suttapadāni, idameva ca ‘‘abhiññeyya’’ntiādi suttapadaṃ etassa atthassa sādhakaṃ. Tattha abhiññeyyanti iminā dukkhasaccamāha, bhāvetabbanti maggasaccaṃ. Ca-saddo panettha avuttasamuccayattho, tena sacchikātabbassa gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Atha vā abhiññeyyanti imināva pārisesañāyena pariññeyyadhamme sacchikātabbadhamme ca dasseti. Tasmā buddhosmīti yasmā cattāri saccāni mayā buddhāni, saccavinimuttañca kiñci ñeyyaṃ natthi, tasmā sabbampi ñeyyaṃ buddhosmi, abbhaññāsinti attho. Selasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana idaṃ vuttaṃ –
‘应证知’指明与解脱。‘应修习’指道圣谛。‘应断除’指集圣谛。而由因之说,从果的成就而言,它们的果——灭圣谛与苦圣谛——也已被说出。如是,‘应作证’已作证,‘应遍知’已遍知,此亦包含其中。由此,开示了四谛的修习、四谛修习之果及解脱,并以合理的理由证成觉位:‘应觉已觉,我已成觉者。’显示巴利原文
‘‘Abhiññeyyanti vijjā ca vimutti ca. Bhāvetabbaṃ maggasaccaṃ. Pahātabbaṃ samudayasaccaṃ. Hetuvacanena pana phalasiddhito tesaṃ phalāni nirodhasaccadukkhasaccānipi vuttāneva honti. Evaṃ sacchikātabbaṃ sacchikataṃ, pariññātabbaṃ pariññātanti idampettha saṅgahitamevāti catusaccabhāvanaṃ catusaccabhāvanāphalañca vimuttiṃ dassento ‘bujjhitabbaṃ bujjhitvā buddho jātosmī’ti yuttahetunā buddhabhāvaṃ sādhetī’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.399).
其中,‘明’是指道明,依胜说而说。‘解脱’是指果解脱。虽然这里道明也以应修习的方式被包含,然而,一切自性法都是应证知的,故说明了明的应证知性。应知,依此道理,一切法的应证知性也已被说明。应知:若无果,则因性不成立,故由因之说而说果的成就。因为,以证得涅槃,道具有因性;以产生苦,渴爱具有集性。显示巴利原文
Tattha vijjāti maggavijjā vuttā ukkaṭṭhaniddesena. Vimuttīti phalavimutti. Kāmañcettha maggavijjāpi bhāvetabbabhāvena gahitā, sabbepi pana sabhāvadhammā abhiññeyyāti vijjāya abhiññeyyabhāvo vutto. Imināva nayena sabbesampi abhiññeyyabhāvo vutto evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Phalena vinā hetubhāvasseva abhāvato hetuvacanena phalasiddhi vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Nirodhassa hi sampāpanena maggassa hetubhāvo, dukkhassa nibbattanena taṇhāya samudayabhāvoti.
如此,为了以谛的方式,将依通说所说的义理,结合门与所缘、门所转起的法以及蕴等,同样以谛的方式分别显示,而开始宣说「再者……」等。所谓「以根本因的方式」,是指虽有无明等其他因存在,但以作为那些因之根本因的方式。因为渴爱是业种种性的因,且作为助伴,故为苦种种性的首要之因。‘令生起者’是指能令生起者。‘前渴爱’是指前生已成就的渴爱。‘两者’是指眼及其集。‘不转起’是指不转起的原因。‘灭的遍知’是指以证得、现观的方式通达灭。所谓‘以逐一词句引出’,是指以‘眼、眼集、眼灭’等方式,逐一范畴地拣出。为了显示渴爱虽亦具应遍知性,且摄于取蕴、是行苦,但它属于苦谛,故说‘色渴爱等六渴爱身’。因此,于现在有中,渴爱因含摄于蕴中且为行苦,故为苦谛。然而,在某一生命中,作为该生命根本因、能令生起的前生已成就的渴爱,应被理解为集谛。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saccavasena sāmaññato vuttamatthaṃ dvārārammaṇehi saddhiṃ dvārappavattadhammehi ceva khandhādīhi ca saccavaseneva vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Mūlakāraṇabhāvenāti santesupi avijjādīsu aññesu kāraṇesu tesampi mūlabhūtakāraṇabhāvena. Taṇhā hi kammassa vicittabhāvahetuto sahāyabhāvūpagamanato ca dukkhavicittatāya padhānakāraṇaṃ. Samuṭṭhāpikāti uppādikā. Purimataṇhāti purimabhavasiddhā taṇhā. Ubhinnanti cakkhussa taṃsamudayassa ca. Appavattīti appavattinimittaṃ. Nirodhappajānanāti sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena nirodhassa paṭivijjhanā. Ekekapaduddhārenāti ‘‘cakkhuṃ cakkhusamudayo cakkhunirodho’’tiādinā ekekakoṭṭhāsaniddhāraṇena. Taṇhāyapi pariññeyyabhāvasabbhāvato upādānakkhandhogadhattā saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato ca dukkhasaccasaṅgahaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā vattamānabhave taṇhā khandhapariyāpannattā saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato ca dukkhasaccaṃ. Yasmiṃ pana attabhāve sā uppajjati, tassa attabhāvassa mūlakāraṇabhāvena samuṭṭhāpikā purimabhavasiddhā taṇhā samudayasaccanti gahetabbā.
“遍处”指以遍处为所缘的禅那。“三十二行相”指三十二身分及以之为所缘的禅那。“九有”指欲有、色有、无色有、想有、无想有、非想非非想有、一蕴有、四蕴有、五蕴有,这九种有。其中,“有”即存在之义。与称为欲贪的欲相应之有,或名为欲的有,是欲有,即十一欲界地。舍离欲后,与称为色贪的色相应之有,或名为色的有,是色有,即十六色界地。舍离欲与色后,与称为无色贪的无色相应之有,或名为无色的有,是无色有,即四无色地。有想者的有是想有;或于彼有中有想存在,故为想有,这涵盖欲有、除无想有之外的色有、除非想非非想有之外的无色有。非想有即无想有,是色有的一部分。由于没有粗重之想,故非有想;由于有微细之想,故非无想,因此是非想非非想,与此相应的有是非想非非想有。或说,由于粗重之想不存在,而微细之想存在,故在此有中非有想、非无想,因此是非想非非想有,它是无色有的一部分。与一个色蕴相杂的有,或此有具有一个蕴,故为一蕴有,即无想有。与四个无色蕴相杂的有,或此有具有四个蕴,故为四蕴有,即无色有。与五个蕴相杂的显示巴利原文
Kasiṇānīti kasiṇārammaṇikajjhānāni. Dvattiṃsākārāti dvattiṃsa koṭṭhāsā tadārammaṇajjhānāni ca. Nava bhavāti kāmabhavo rūpabhavo arūpabhavo saññībhavo asaññībhavo nevasaññīnāsaññībhavo ekavokārabhavo catuvokārabhavo pañcavokārabhavoti nava bhavā. Tattha bhavatīti bhavo, kāmarāgasaṅkhātena kāmena yutto bhavo, kāmasaṅkhāto vā bhavo kāmabhavo, ekādasa kāmāvacarabhūmiyo. Kāme pahāya rūparāgasaṅkhātena rūpena yutto bhavo, rūpasaṅkhāto vā bhavo rūpabhavo, soḷasa rūpāvacarabhūmiyo. Kāmañca rūpañca pahāya arūparāgasaṅkhātena arūpena yutto bhavo, arūpasaṅkhāto vā bhavo arūpabhavo, catasso āruppabhūmiyo. Saññāvataṃ bhavo saññībhavo, saññā vā ettha bhave atthīti saññībhavo, so kāmabhavo ca asaññībhavamutto rūpabhavo ca nevasaññīnāsaññībhavamutto arūpabhavo ca hoti. Na saññībhavo asaññībhavo, so rūpabhavekadeso. Oḷārikattābhāvato nevasaññā, sukhumattassa sabbhāvato nāsaññāti nevasaññānāsaññā, tāya yutto bhavo nevasaññānāsaññābhavo. Atha vā oḷārikāya saññāya abhāvā sukhumāya ca bhāvā nevasaññā nāsaññā asmiṃ bhaveti nevasaññānāsaññābhavo, so arūpabhavekadeso. Ekena rūpakkhandhena vokiṇṇo bhavo, ekena vā vokāro assa bhavassāti ekavokārabhavo, so asaññībhavo. Catūhi arūpakkhandhehi vokiṇṇo bhavo, catūhi vā vokāro assa bhavassāti catuvokārabhavo, so arūpabhavo eva. Pañcahi khandhehi vokiṇṇo bhavo, pañcahi vā vokāro assa bhavassāti pañcavokārabhavo, so kāmabhavo ca rūpabhavekadeso ca hoti. Vokāroti vā khandhānametamadhivacanaṃ, tasmā eko vokāro assa bhavassāti ekavokārabhavoti evamādināpettha attho veditabbo. Cattāri jhānānīti aggahitārammaṇavisesāni cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānāni. Vipākajjhānānaṃ vā etaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Ettha ca kusaladhammānaṃ upanissayabhūtā taṇhāsamuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhāti veditabbā. Kiriyadhammānaṃ pana yattha te kiriyadhammā uppajjanti, tassa attabhāvassa kāraṇabhūtā taṇhā. Anulomatoti ettha ‘‘saṅkhārā dukkhasaccaṃ, avijjā samudayasacca’’nti iminā anukkamena yojetabbaṃ.
“已觉者”意指与所应觉知之法相应而觉了者。因此,由于以总说、别说及逐一列举的方式觉了一切法,故如此说。说了什么?即“正确地、亲自觉了一切法故”,意思是对于一切所知,以一切方式无颠倒地、独自完全现等觉。由此,显示了不依赖他人教导、能以一切方式觉了一切法、其作用系于愿望的、名为无碍智的一切知智的证得。显示巴利原文
Anubuddhoti bujjhitabbadhammassa anurūpato buddho. Tenāti yasmā sāmaññato visesato ca ekekapaduddhārena sabbadhamme buddho, tasmā vuttaṃ. Kiṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā’’ti, sabbassapi ñeyyassa sabbākārato aviparītaṃ sayameva abhisambuddhattāti attho. Imināssa paropadesarahitassa sabbākārena sabbadhammāvabodhanasamatthassa ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhavuttino anāvaraṇañāṇasaṅkhātassa sabbaññutaññāṇassa adhigamo dassito.
难道除了全知智之外,还有别的无碍智吗?若非如此,“六不共智为佛智”之说便成相违?其实并不相违,因为为了显示在所缘与转起方式上与其他不共,同一智被说为两种。实际上,那唯一的智,以无余的有为、无为及假名法为所缘,故为全知智;又由于在其中毫无障碍,无所执著而行,故称无碍智。如《无碍解道》所说:“知一切有为无为无余,故为全知智;于彼无障碍,故为无碍智”等。因此,二者在意义上没有差别,而且必定应当如此理解。否则,全知智与无碍智便成了共通之智,且不以一切法为所缘。因为世尊之智无有丝毫障碍,若无碍智不以一切法为所缘,则于其不转起之处便有障碍存在,也就不能称为无碍了。或者,即使无碍智与全知智有异,但在此处,由于在一切处皆无障碍而转,故“无碍智”所指正是全知智本身;而由证得此智,世尊被称为全知者、一切知者、正等觉者,这并非仅由一次通达一切法。正如《无碍解道》所说:“这是诸佛世尊于菩提树下,与全知智一同证得的、名为‘佛’的施设,即解脱之终极。”因为通过证得能通达一切法的智,世尊的相续显示巴利原文
Nanu ca sabbaññutaññāṇato aññaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ, aññathā ‘‘cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni buddhañāṇānī’’ti vacanaṃ virujjheyyāti? Na virujjhati visayappavattibhedavasena aññehi asādhāraṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ ekasseva ñāṇassa dvidhā vuttattā. Ekameva hi taṃ ñāṇaṃ anavasesasaṅkhatāsaṅkhatasammutidhammavisayatāya sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tattha ca āvaraṇābhāvato nissaṅgacāramupādāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti vuttaṃ. Yathāha paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.119) ‘‘sabbaṃ saṅkhatamasaṅkhataṃ anavasesaṃ jānātīti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tattha āvaraṇaṃ natthīti anāvaraṇañāṇa’’ntiādi. Tasmā natthi nesaṃ atthato bhedo, ekantena cetaṃ evamicchitabbaṃ. Aññathā sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇānaṃ sādhāraṇatā asabbadhammārammaṇatā ca āpajjeyya. Na hi bhagavato ñāṇassa aṇumattampi āvaraṇaṃ atthi, anāvaraṇañāṇassa asabbadhammārammaṇabhāve yattha taṃ na pavattati, tatthāvaraṇasabbhāvato anāvaraṇabhāvoyeva na siyā. Atha vā pana hotu aññameva anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇato, idha pana sabbattha appaṭihatavuttitāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti sabbaññutaññāṇameva adhippetaṃ, tassa cādhigamanena bhagavā sabbaññū sabbavidū sammāsambuddhoti ca vuccati na sakiṃyeva sabbadhammāvabodhanato. Tathā ca vuttaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.162) ‘‘vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā sacchikā paññatti yadidaṃ buddho’’ti. Sabbadhammāvabodhanasamatthañāṇasamadhigamena hi bhagavato santāne anavasesadhamme paṭivijjhituṃ samatthatā ahosīti.
此处有人问难:此智在转起时,是于一切境一次性转起,还是次第转起?对此,若谓于一切境一次性转起,那么过去、未来、现在、内、外等种种差别之有为法,以及无为法与假名法,若能同时现前,便如远观画布之人,无法一一明辨。若是如此,则会导致一种过失:如同修观者以‘无我’之行相观‘诸法无我’时一般,一切法将以未被分别的形态,沦为世尊智的所缘。有人说:‘诸佛之智于一切时,以一切所知法之住立自相为所缘,远离分别而转起,是故他们被称为一切知者。如此,所谓“行走时大象入定,站立时亦入定”之语,也就说得通了。’对这些人,上述过失同样无法避免;而且,既然以住立自相为所缘,而过去、未来与假名法并无那种住立自相,世尊的智就只会以一部分为所缘。因此,‘智一次性转起’是不合理的。显示巴利原文
Etthāha – kiṃ panidaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattamānaṃ sakiṃyeva sabbasmiṃ visaye pavattati, udāhu kamenāti. Kiñcettha – yadi tāva sakiṃyeva sabbasmiṃ visaye pavattati, atītānāgatapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhādibhedabhinnānaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ asaṅkhatasammutidhammānañca ekajjhaṃ upaṭṭhāne dūrato cittapaṭaṃ pekkhantassa viya paṭivibhāgenāvabodho na siyā, tathā sati ‘‘sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti vipassantānaṃ anattākārena viya sabbadhammā anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇassa visayā hontīti āpajjati. Yepi ‘‘sabbañeyyadhammānaṃ ṭhitalakkhaṇavisayaṃ vikapparahitaṃ sabbakālaṃ buddhānaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattati, tena te sabbavidūti vuccanti, evañca katvā ‘caraṃ samāhito nāgo, tiṭṭhantopi samāhito’ti idampi vacanaṃ suvuttaṃ hotī’’ti vadanti, tesampi vuttadosā nātivatti, ṭhitalakkhaṇārammaṇatāya ca atītānāgatasammutidhammānaṃ tadabhāvato ekadesavisayameva bhagavato ñāṇaṃ siyā, tasmā sakiṃyeva ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti na yujjati.
若认为智是于一切境次第转起,这同样不合理。因为当所知之法依种类、地、自性等,以及依方所、时间等而有无量差别时,若是次第了知,以所知无有边际故,毕竟不可能无余通达。有些人说:‘由于于义理不相违故,世尊将所知之一分现量证知后,依“其余亦是如此”的决定胜解而安立,是故为一切知者;而且,那智并非比量智,因为无有疑惑。世间唯有疑惑伴随者,方为比量智。’对他们而言,这也不成立。因为,若一切并非皆是现量,则通过‘于义理不相违’而将所知之一分现量证知后,再依‘其余亦是如此’的决定胜解来安立,是不可能的。因为那所谓的‘其余’,并非现量。显示巴利原文
Atha kamena sabbasmiṃ visaye ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti. Evampi na yujjati. Na hi jātibhūmisabhāvādivasena disādesakālādivasena ca anekabhedabhinne ñeyye kamena gayhamāne tassa anavasesappaṭivedho sambhavati apariyantabhāvato ñeyyassa. Ye pana ‘‘atthassa avisaṃvādanato ñeyyassa ekadesaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā sesepi evanti adhimuccitvā vavatthāpanena sabbaññū bhagavā, tañca ñāṇaṃ na anumānañāṇaṃ saṃsayābhāvato. Saṃsayānubaddhañhi loke anumānañāṇa’’nti vadanti, tesampi taṃ na yuttaṃ. Sabbassa hi appaccakkhabhāve atthāvisaṃvādanena ñeyyassa ekadesaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā sesepi evanti adhimuccitvā vavatthāpanassa asambhavato. Yañhi taṃ sesaṃ, taṃ appaccakkhanti.
问:那么,若那‘其余’亦是现量,便不成其为‘其余’了吧?这些一切皆无理据。何以故?因此为不应思惟之境界。正如世尊所说:‘比丘们,佛之境界是不应思惟、不可思惟的;若有人思惟,他将得疯狂、恼害之分。’(《增支部》4.77)然而,此处之定说乃是:凡是世尊想要了知的,无论为全分或一分,由于智于彼彼处无碍转起故,唯以现量方式转起;并且,由于无有散乱,其智为恒常等持与。倘若所想要了知的全部并非其境界,那么智便不会是依于愿望而转起的。依据‘一切法对佛世尊而言,是依转向、依愿望、依作意、依心生起而转起的’(《大义释》69;《无碍解道》3.5)这一圣言,必将如此信受。对于过去、未来之境界,世尊之智亦因非由比量、随闻、思择执取而现量生起。显示巴利原文
Atha tampi paccakkhaṃ tassa sesabhāvo eva na siyāti? Sabbametaṃ akāraṇaṃ. Kasmā? Avisayavicāraṇabhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘buddhavisayo, bhikkhave, acinteyyo na cintetabbo, yo cinteyya, ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti (a. ni. 4.77). Idaṃ panettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ – yaṃ kiñci bhagavatā ñātuṃ icchitaṃ sakalaṃ ekadeso vā, tattha tattha appaṭihatavuttitāya paccakkhato ñāṇaṃ pavattati niccasamādhānañca vikkhepābhāvato. Ñātuṃ icchitassa ca sakalassa avisayabhāve tassa ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhavuttitā na siyā, ekantenevassā icchitabbā ‘‘sabbe dhammā buddhassa bhagavato āvajjanappaṭibaddhā ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhā manasikārappaṭibaddhā cittuppādappaṭibaddhā’’ti (mahāni. 69; paṭi. ma. 3.5) vacanato. Atītānāgatavisayampi bhagavato ñāṇaṃ anumānāgamatakkagahaṇavirahitattā paccakkhameva.
难道在此主张中,当想遍知一切时,由于一次性以一切为所缘,世尊的智便会以未经分别的形态转起,前面所说的过失便无法避免吗?并非如此,因为那个领域已被净化。佛的领域已被净化,故不应思惟。否则,若与凡夫智作用相似,诸佛世尊的智便不是不应思惟的了。因此,即使以一切法为所缘,它也能如以单法为所缘那般,将诸法极清晰地确定后转起——这在此处是不应思惟的。正如所说:‘所知有多少,智就有多少;智有多少,所知就有多少。智以所知为边际,所知以智为边际。’(《无碍解道》3.5)如此,无论是总合地、各别地、一次性还是次第地,都能随其所欲,正确、亲自通达一切法,故为正等觉者。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca etasmimpi pakkhe yadā sakalaṃ ñātuṃ icchitaṃ, tadā sakiṃyeva sakalavisayatāya anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇaṃ pavatteyyāti vuttadosā nātivattiyevāti? Na, tassa visodhitattā. Visodhito hi so buddhavisayo acinteyyoti. Aññathā pacurajanañāṇasamānavuttitāya buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ ñāṇassa acinteyyatā na siyā, tasmā sakaladhammārammaṇampi taṃ ekadhammārammaṇaṃ viya suvavatthāpiteyeva te dhamme katvā pavattatīti idamettha acinteyyaṃ, ‘‘yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ. Ñeyyapariyantikaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇapariyantikaṃ ñeyya’’nti (paṭi. ma. 3.5) evamekajjhaṃ visuṃ sakiṃ kamena vā icchānurūpaṃ sammā sāmaṃ sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho.
「诸明」:此处,所谓「明」,即「得知、通达」,意为如实而了知。或者,以摧破自身的对立面之义而为「明」,即破除黑暗蕴聚等之义。也由此,以令自境被了知之义而为「明」。所谓「具足」,即具备、圆满,或完整无缺之义。此处指《庵婆咤经》。「意所成神通」:此处,依「比丘从此身化现另一身,具色、意所成、诸肢节俱全、诸根不缺」(《长部》1.236)的方式,由于在自身内部由禅那意所生的另一意所成身生起而转起,故称意所成神通。「六神通」:即神变等五神通,与漏尽智合为六通。诸经中对此处彼处三明与八明的收摄,应视为随应度化对象的意乐。七正法:信、惭、愧、多闻、精进、念、慧。正如经中所说:「此处,比丘有信、有惭、有愧、多闻、精进策励、念现前、有慧」(《长部》3.330)。「四禅」:即任何四种色界禅那。显示巴利原文
Vijjāhīti ettha vindiyaṃ vindatīti vijjā, yāthāvato upalabbhatīti attho. Attano vā paṭipakkhassa vijjhanaṭṭhena vijjā, tamokkhandhādikassa padālanaṭṭhenāti attho. Tato eva attano visayassa viditakaraṇaṭṭhenapi vijjā. Sampannattāti samannāgatattā paripuṇṇattā vā, avikalattāti attho. Tatrāti ambaṭṭhasutte. Manomayiddhiyāti ettha ‘‘idha bhikkhu imamhā kāyā aññaṃ kāyaṃ abhinimmināti rūpiṃ manomayaṃ sabbaṅgapaccaṅgaṃ ahīnindriya’’nti (dī. ni. 1.236) iminā nayena āgatā iddhi sarīrabbhantare aññasseva jhānamanena nibbattattā manomayassa sarīrassa nibbattivasena pavattā manomayiddhi nāma. Cha abhiññāti āsavakkhayañāṇena saddhiṃ iddhividhādikā pañcābhiññāyo. Tissannaṃ aṭṭhannañca vijjānaṃ tattha tattha sutte gahaṇaṃ veneyyajjhāsayavasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Satta saddhammā nāma saddhā hirī ottappaṃ bāhusaccaṃ vīriyaṃ sati paññā ca. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘idha bhikkhu saddho hoti, hirimā, ottappī, bahussuto, āraddhavīriyo, upaṭṭhitassati, paññavā hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.330). Cattāri jhānānīti yāni kānici cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānāni.
然而,为何此处唯戒等十五法被称为「行」?针对此问难,回答说「即这些」等。由于这些法含摄三学,故在趣向涅槃时,它们是决定的成就之因。今为证成此义,引圣教说「如所说」等。「世尊」等语句,是为归结前义而说。难道此明行具足在声闻弟子中也可获得吗?虽可获得,但并非如世尊那样,为显示此义,故说「其中,明具足」等。由于以漏尽明成就一切知性,故说「明具足圆满,即世尊的一切知性而住立」。由于四禅中内摄的行法所摄,悲梵住随其所宜,且依大悲等至之力,于世尊中可得不共之特性,故说「行具足圆满,即大悲性而住立」。正如令众生远离非利、从事于利,若无慧则不可能;同样,师对他们利与非利的了知,若无悲亦不可能。故二者于各自事业中皆唯尽其用。为显示何处以何者为主,故说「彼以一切知性」等。「如彼明行具足者」:此处「如」仅为小品词,意为「如同其他明行具足者也令他人如此从事,此亦如是」。由此显示,此乃明行具足者之不共行道。为显示此世尊的明行具足,是教法能出离、声闻正行的决定因,故说「因此,彼之」等。其中「自苦」等的「等」字,摄取了「他苦」与「自他俱苦」。余义易解。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha sīlādayoyeva pannarasa ‘‘caraṇa’’nti vuttāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘imeyeva hī’’tiādi. Tena tesaṃ sikkhattayasaṅgahato nibbānupagamane ekaṃsato sādhanabhāvamāha. Idāni tadatthasādhanāya āgamaṃ dassento ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādimāha. Bhagavātiādi vuttassevatthassa nigamanavasena vuttaṃ. Nanu cāyaṃ vijjācaraṇasampadā sāvakesupi labbhatīti? Kiñcāpi labbhati, na pana tathā, yathā bhagavatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha vijjāsampadā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āsavakkhayavijjāya sabbaññubhāvasiddhito āha ‘‘vijjāsampadā bhagavato sabbaññutaṃ pūretvā ṭhitā’’ti. Catūsu jhānesu antogadhabhāvena caraṇadhammapariyāpannattā karuṇābrahmavihārassa yathārahaṃ tassa ca mahākaruṇāsamāpattivasena asādhāraṇasabhāvassa bhagavati upalabbhanato āha ‘‘caraṇasampadā mahākāruṇikataṃ pūretvā ṭhitā’’ti. Yathā sattānaṃ anatthaṃ parivajjetvā atthe niyojanaṃ paññāya vinā na hoti, evaṃ nesaṃ atthānatthajānanaṃ satthu karuṇāya vinā na hotīti ubhayampi ubhayattha sakiccakameva siyā. Yattha pana yassā padhānabhāvo, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so sabbaññutāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā taṃ vijjācaraṇasampannoti ettha tanti nipātamattaṃ, yathā aññopi vijjācaraṇasampanno niyojeti, tathā ayanti attho. Tena vijjācaraṇasampannassevāyaṃ āveṇikā paṭipattīti dasseti. Sā panāyaṃ satthu vijjācaraṇasampadā sāsanassa niyyānikatāya sāvakānaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā ekantakāraṇanti dassetuṃ ‘‘tenassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha attantapādayoti ādi-saddena parantapaubhayantapā gahitā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
在这里,通过明具足彰显了世尊智慧的广大,通过行具足彰显了悲悯的广大。其中,凭借智慧,世尊成就法王之位;凭借悲悯,则能施与法。凭借智慧,厌离轮回之苦;凭借悲悯,忍受轮回之苦。凭借智慧,遍知他人之苦;凭借悲悯,着手救拔他人之苦。凭借智慧,趋向般涅槃;凭借悲悯,证得彼涅槃。凭借智慧,自度;凭借悲悯,度他。凭借智慧,成就佛果;凭借悲悯,成就佛事。或者,凭借悲悯,于菩萨地中面向轮回;凭借智慧,于彼处不生乐著。同样,凭借悲悯,令他不受伤害;凭借智慧,自己不为他所畏惧。凭借悲悯,护他而护己;凭借智慧,护己而护他。同样,凭借悲悯,不苦他人;凭借智慧,不苦自己。由此,在为自利而行等四种人中,成就第四种人之地位。同样,凭借悲悯,成为世间的依怙;凭借智慧,以自己为依怙。凭借悲悯,他有谦下之相;凭借智慧,无高慢之相。同样,凭借悲悯,于一切众生起摄受;而随顺智慧,并非于一切处心皆离染。凭借智慧,于一切法心离染著;而随顺悲悯,并非不为了摄受一切众生而转起。正如世尊的悲悯远离爱着与忧悲,智慧也脱离我执与我所执,二者互相净化,成为极其清净的功德殊胜,这是由明行具足所彰显的,应当如此观察。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca vijjāsampadāya satthu paññāmahattaṃ pakāsitaṃ hoti, caraṇasampadāya karuṇāmahattaṃ. Tesu paññāya bhagavato dhammarajjappatti, karuṇāya dhammasaṃvibhāgo. Paññāya saṃsāradukkhanibbidā, karuṇāya saṃsāradukkhasahanaṃ. Paññāya paradukkhaparijānanaṃ, karuṇāya paradukkhapatikārārambho. Paññāya parinibbānābhimukhabhāvo, karuṇāya tadadhigamo. Paññāya sayaṃ taraṇaṃ, karuṇāya paresaṃ tāraṇaṃ. Paññāya buddhabhāvasiddhi, karuṇāya buddhakiccasiddhi. Karuṇāya vā bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ saṃsārābhimukhabhāvo, paññāya tattha anabhirati, tathā karuṇāya paresaṃ abhiṃsāpanaṃ, paññāya sayaṃ parehi abhāyanaṃ. Karuṇāya paraṃ rakkhanto attānaṃ rakkhati, paññāya attānaṃ rakkhanto paraṃ rakkhati. Tathā karuṇāya aparantapo, paññāya anattantapo, tena attahitāya paṭipannādīsu catūsu puggalesu catutthapuggalabhāvo siddho hoti. Tathā karuṇāya lokanāthatā, paññāya attanāthatā. Karuṇāya cassa ninnatābhāvo, paññāya unnamābhāvo. Tathā karuṇāya sabbasattesu janitānuggaho, paññānugatattā na ca na sabbattha virattacitto, paññāya sabbadhammesu virattacitto, karuṇānugatattā na ca na sabbasattānuggahāya pavatto. Yathā hi karuṇā bhagavato sinehasokavirahitā, evaṃ paññā ahaṃkāramamaṃkāravinimuttāti aññamaññavisodhitā paramavisuddhā guṇavisesā vijjācaraṇasampadāhi pakāsitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
现在,为了显示“善逝”的含义而说“因善妙行故”等。在“已行、住立”等表述中,“行”也被称为“已行”,故说“行也被称为已行”。“善妙”即美善,美善之性源于清净,清净则源于断除过失,故说“清净无过”。而所谓的“行”有多种,为表明此处所取之行,故说为“圣道”。因此,圣道既是趣向涅槃之道,也是证得涅槃之道,故被称为“已行”和“行”。现在为了显示此行之因,而说“因此,彼”等。安稳之处即是涅槃。无滞著者,由于没有障碍,即使在善趣之行中也没有滞著、没有执取,何况其余之处。或者,由于一坐之间,以速疾证通之力证得四道,所以无滞著、无系缚而行。凡是能带来一切行之利益,并能成就一切无上成就的行,才名为善妙。世尊正是依此而行,所以说“如是,因善妙行故为善逝”,“善”字即表示善妙之义。显示巴利原文
Idāni sugatoti imassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sobhanagamanattā’’tiādi. ‘‘Gate ṭhite’’tiādīsu gamanampi gatanti vuccatīti āha ‘‘gamanampi hi gatanti vuccatī’’ti. Sobhananti subhaṃ, subhabhāvo visuddhatāya, visuddhatā dosavigamenāti āha ‘‘parisuddhamanavajja’’nti. Gamanañca nāma bahuvidhanti idhādhippetaṃ gamanaṃ dassento ‘‘ariyamaggo’’ti āha. So hi nibbānassa gati adhigamoti ca katvā gataṃ gamananti ca vuccati. Idāni tasseva gamane kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tena hesā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Khemaṃ disanti nibbānaṃ. Asajjamānoti paripanthābhāvena sugatigamanepi asajjanto saṅgaṃ akaronto, pageva itarattha. Atha vā ekāsane nisīditvā khippābhiññāvaseneva catunnampi maggānaṃ paṭiladdhabhāvato asajjamāno abajjhanto gato. Yaṃ gamanaṃ gacchanto sabbagamanatthaṃ āvahati, sabbañca anuttaraṃ sampattiṃ āvahati, tadeva sobhanaṃ nāma, tena ca bhagavā gatoti āha ‘‘iti sobhanagamanattā sugato’’ti sobhanattho susaddoti katvā.
由于那些不美的、以诸行运转的苦的不存在,故为毕竟乐,因此从绝对意义上说,无为界名为美妙。所以说:‘他到达了那美妙之处,即不死、涅槃。’因此,世尊说:‘涅槃是至上之乐。’‘正’即善妙。而所谓善妙的去,即不被对立面所制伏的去,故说:‘已断烦恼,不再退转’,即已断的烦恼不再以现行方式生起。为了显示已说的义理并引证教说而阐明,说:‘此亦为所说’等。‘此’指由各各道所断的烦恼不再退转,而这又是达到顶点的正行,由那能令到达的行道所成就,那道本身也就是正行。为了显示世尊以此义而为善逝,故说‘或正去’等。‘以正行道’指以证得正等觉的无颠倒行道。‘常作一切世间的利益安乐’,以此显示大菩提的行道,总括而言,是以常为一切众生带来利益安乐的方式而转起。‘不去到常见、断见这两个极端’,以此显示缘起之趣。‘不去到欲乐、自苦这两个极端’,以此显示圣道之趣。显示巴利原文
Asundarānaṃ dukkhānaṃ saṅkhārappavattīnaṃ abhāvato accantasukhattā ekantato sundaraṃ nāma asaṅkhatā dhātūti āha ‘‘sundarañcesa ṭhānaṃ gato amataṃ nibbāna’’nti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘nibbānaṃ paramaṃ sukha’’nti (ma. ni. 2.215; dha. pa. 203-204). Sammāti suṭṭhu. Suṭṭhu gamanañca nāma paṭipakkhena anabhibhūtassa gamananti āha ‘‘pahīne kilese puna apaccāgacchanto’’ti, pahīnānaṃ puna asamudācāravasena apaccāgacchanto. Vuttamevatthaṃ āgamaṃ dassetvā vibhāvento āha ‘‘vuttañceta’’ntiādi. Etanti tena tena maggena pahīnakilesānaṃ puna apaccāgamanaṃ, idañca sikhāppattaṃ sammāgamanaṃ, yāya āgamanīyapaṭipadāya siddhaṃ, sāpi sammāgamanamevāti evampi bhagavā sugatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘sammā vā āgato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sammāpaṭipattiyāti sammāsambodhiyā sampāpane aviparītapaṭipattiyā. Sabbalokassa hitasukhameva karontāti etena mahābodhiyā paṭipadā avibhāgena sabbasattānaṃ sabbadā hitasukhāvahabhāveneva pavattatīti dasseti. Sassataṃ ucchedanti ime ante anupagacchanto gatoti etena paṭiccasamuppādagatiṃ dasseti. Kāmasukhaṃ attakilamathanti ime anupagacchanto gatoti etena ariyamaggagatiṃ dasseti.
“于此”是指在适当的场合说适当的话。这是就应当成就、应当完成之事的处格而言。“不实”即是不真实之义——言语的不实或真实,是依义理而说的。“不真”是它的同义词。“与无义相连”指与现世或来世的无义相连,即带来无义。“非义”就是无义,是义的相反与不存在;与此相连的,即是离间语和杂秽语,这就是它的含义。应当知道,这些都含摄在四种语恶行之中。
其中,第一种语恶行,可见于对持戒者说“破戒者”、对非旃陀罗等说“旃陀罗”的人。第二种,可见于对破戒者以非律的方式说“破戒者”、对旃陀罗等说“旃陀罗”的人。第三种,是显示地狱等趣生状况的言说,如说“提婆达多是堕恶趣者、地狱者”等。第四种,是迷惑世间的言说,如“依照吠陀规定的祭祀仪轨而行杀生等,能带来善趣”。第五种,是以真实之事进行离间的话语。第六种,应知是在适当、合宜的场合所说的布施、持戒等言说。
如此,由于善妙地说,即如所说,避免不实等,而说真实、如实、与义相连、可爱、可意,因此善妙地说,故为善逝。纵然世尊的某些话,仅就入耳而言对某些人不可爱,但由于能成就义利,为世间带来利益安乐……显示巴利原文
Tatrāti yuttaṭṭhāne yuttasseva bhāsane. Nipphādetabbe sādhetabbe cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Abhūtanti abhūtatthaṃ. Atthamukhena hi vācāya abhūtatā bhūtatā vā. Atacchanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Anatthasaṃhitanti diṭṭhadhammikena samparāyikena vā anatthena saṃhitaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, anatthāvahaṃ. Na atthoti anattho, atthassa paṭipakkho abhāvo ca, tena saṃhitaṃ, pisuṇavācaṃ samphappalāpañcāti attho. Evamettha catubbidhassapi vacīduccaritassa saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Ettha ca paṭhamā vācā sīlavantaṃ ‘‘dussīlo’’ti, acaṇḍālādiṃ ‘‘caṇḍālo’’tiādinā bhāsamānassa daṭṭhabbā. Dutiyā dussīlaṃ ‘‘dussīlo’’ti, caṇḍālādimeva ‘‘caṇḍālo’’tiādinā avinayena bhāsamānassa. Tatiyā nerayikādikassa nerayikādibhāvavibhāvanīkathā yathā ‘‘āpāyiko devadatto nerayiko’’tiādikā. Catutthī ‘‘vedavihitena yaññavidhinā pāṇātipātādikataṃ sugatiṃ āvahatī’’ti lokassa byāmohanakathā. Pañcamī bhūtena pesuññupasaṃhārā kathā. Chaṭṭhā yuttapattaṭṭhāne pavattitā dānasīlādikathā veditabbā. Evaṃ sammā gadattāti yathāvuttaṃ abhūtādiṃ vajjetvā bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ piyaṃ manāpaṃ tato eva sammā suṭṭhu gadanato sugato. Āpāthagamanamattena kassaci appiyampi hi bhagavato vacanaṃ piyaṃ manāpameva atthasiddhiyā lokassa hitasukhāvahattā. Ettha pana da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘sugato’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
再者,“善逝”意为具有美妙之去、美妙之行。因为世尊前往应度化众生之处,纯粹是为了成就他们的利益与安乐,所以其行美妙、吉祥。同样,其身行——具足相好庄严,远离急促、迟缓、蹒跚、拖拽、挤压、蜷缩、弯曲、混乱等过失,犹如嬉戏的鹅王、象王、鹿王之行——是美妙的;其智行——具足广大、清净、悲、念、精进等殊胜功德,从发愿直至大菩提,无有过失,为众生带来利益安乐——也是美妙的。
或者,以自然智,通过遍知现观而遍知一切世间,正去、正解,故为善逝。同样,通过断现观而断世间集,令其达到不再生起的状态,正去、超越,故为善逝。通过证现观而正去、证得世间灭——涅槃,故为善逝。通过修现观而正去、行道于趣向世间灭的道路,故为善逝。
同样,此天神世间所见、所闻、所觉、所识、所得、所寻、所知、以意所伺的一切,世尊皆如掌中余甘子果一般,以现量正去、正知,故为善逝。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – sobhanaṃ gataṃ gamanaṃ etassāti sugato. Bhagavato hi veneyyajanupasaṅkamanaṃ ekantena tesaṃ hitasukhanipphādanato sobhanaṃ bhaddakaṃ. Tathā lakkhaṇānubyañjanappaṭimaṇḍitarūpakāyatāya dutavilambitakhalitānukaḍḍhananippīḷanukkuṭikakuṭilākulatādidosavirahitaṃ vilāsitarājahaṃsavasabhavāraṇamigarājagamanaṃ kāyagamanaṃ ñāṇagamanañca vipulanimmalakaruṇāsativīriyādiguṇavisesahitamabhinīhārato yāva mahābodhi anavajjatāya sattānaṃ hitasukhāvahatāya ca sobhanameva. Atha vā sayambhūñāṇena sakalampi lokaṃ pariññābhisamayavasena parijānanto sammā gato avagatoti sugato. Tathā lokasamudayaṃ pahānābhisamayavasena pajahanto anuppattidhammataṃ āpādento sammā gato atītoti sugato. Lokanirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena sammā gato adhigatoti sugato. Lokanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ bhāvanābhisamayavasena sammā gato paṭipannoti sugato. Tathā yaṃ imassa sadevakassa lokassa diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ pattaṃ pariyesitaṃ ñātaṃ anuvicaritaṃ manasā, sabbaṃ taṃ hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya sammā paccakkhato gato abbhaññāsīti sugato.
现在,为了阐明“世间解”的含义,他说“以一切方式了知世间故”等。其中,“以一切方式”即“以一切种类”,意思是:哪个世间应以哪种方式被了知,就以那种方式(了知)。为了显示那些方式,而说“从自性”等。其中,“从自性”即从苦的自性。因为一切世间都以苦为自性。如所说:“简而言之,五取蕴是苦。”“从集”即从它生起之处,即从渴爱等。“从灭”即从它息灭之处,即从无为(涅槃)。“从灭之道”即从证得彼灭的方法,即从圣道,因为除此之外没有其他方式。如此,说了“以一切方式了知世间”之后,为了显示证明此义的经文,他说“贤友,在哪里……”等。而这部经是世尊针对器世间的去处,被罗希陀天子所问:“尊者,在哪里不生……不往生,能否以步行去了知、见到、到达世间的尽头?”而说的。其中,以“不生”等直接否定了生等之后,以“不死、不往生”两句否定了辗转的死与往生。然而有些人说:“‘不生’等是就胎生等而说,另一句是就化生而说。”“彼”指离生等。“以步行”指以脚行走。“世间尽头”指作为行世间之边际的涅槃。“应知”指应被了知。“应见”指应被看见。“应证”指应被证得。或者有“此已知、此已见、此已证”的读法,在那里,意思是:我不说“以步行,世间的尽头是此已知、此已见、此已证”。“此”指希求涅槃者。显示巴利原文
Idāni lokavidūti imassa atthaṃ pakāsento āha ‘‘sabbathā viditalokattā’’tiādi. Tattha sabbathāti sabbappakārena, yo yo loko yena yena pakārena veditabbo, tena tena pakārenāti attho. Te pana pakāre dassetuṃ ‘‘sabhāvato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabhāvatoti dukkhasabhāvato. Sabbo hi loko dukkhasabhāvo. Yathāha ‘‘saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti. Samudayatoti yato samudeti, tato taṇhādito. Nirodhatoti yattha so nirujjhati, tato visaṅkhārato. Nirodhūpāyatoti yena vidhinā so nirodho pattabbo, tato ariyamaggato ito aññassa pakārassa abhāvā. Iti ‘‘sabbathā lokaṃ avedī’’ti vatvā tadatthasādhakaṃ suttaṃ dassento ‘‘yattha kho, āvuso’’tiādimāha. Idañca suttaṃ ‘‘yattha kho, bhante, na jāyati…pe… na upapajjati, sakkā nu kho so, bhante, gamanena lokassa anto ñātuṃ vā daṭṭhuṃ vā pāpuṇituṃ vā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.107; a. ni. 4.45) okāsalokassa gatiṃ sandhāya rohitadevaputtena puṭṭho bhagavā abhāsi. Tattha na jāyatītiādinā ujukaṃ jātiādīni paṭikkhipitvā na cavati na upapajjatīti padadvayena aparāparaṃ cavanupapatanāni paṭikkhipati. Keci pana ‘‘na jāyatītiādi gabbhaseyyakādivasena vuttaṃ, itaraṃ opapātikavasenā’’ti vadanti. Tanti jātiādirahitaṃ. Gamanenāti padasā gamanena. Lokassantanti saṅkhāralokassa antabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ. Ñāteyyanti jānitabbaṃ. Daṭṭheyyanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Patteyyanti pattabbaṃ. ‘‘Ñātāyaṃ diṭṭhāyaṃ pattāya’’nti vā pāṭho, tattha gamanena lokassantaṃ ñātā ayaṃ diṭṭhā ayaṃ pattā ayanti na vadāmīti attho. Ayanti nibbānatthiko.
诚然,通过步行去了解、见到或到达世间的尽头是不可能的;然而,我却在有限的、有界限的范围内施设并显示它——为了说明这一点,他说出“然而”等语。其中,“在这仅一寻长的有识之身中”,是指在这仅一寻量长的身体中。以此显示色蕴。“有想”,指与想俱。以此想为首,显示受等三蕴,因为与想俱。“有识”,指有识。以此显示识蕴。其意趣是:在无识的、仅是时节所生色的聚集上,无法施设世间。“世间”指蕴等世间。“世间灭”,指彼世间的息灭,亦即涅槃。因为涅槃也是依于蕴而施设,所以就在此身中施设。对于诸漏尽者,涅槃虽无方位,也依他们而从方位上、从方便上说明,例如:“眼是世间中可爱、可意的,在此处,渴爱被断除时即被断除,在此处,被息灭时即息灭。”显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ padasā gamanena gantvā lokassantaṃ ñātuṃ daṭṭhuṃ pattuṃ vā na sakkā, api ca parimitaparicchinnaṭṭhāne taṃ paññāpetvā dassemīti dassento ‘‘api cā’’tiādimāha. Tattha byāmamatte kaḷevareti byāmappamāṇe attabhāve. Iminā rūpakkhandhaṃ dasseti. Sasaññimhīti saññāya sahite. Iminā saññāsīsena vedanādayo tayo khandhe dasseti saññāsahitattā eva. Samanaketi saviññāṇaketi attho. Iminā viññāṇakkhandhaṃ dasseti, aviññāṇake pana utusamuṭṭhānarūpasamudāyamatte paññāpetuṃ na sakkāti adhippāyo. Lokanti khandhādilokaṃ. Lokanirodhanti tassa lokassa nirujjhanaṃ nibbānameva vā. Nibbānampi hi khandhe paṭicca paññāpanato sarīrasmiṃyeva paññāpeti. Adesampi hi taṃ yesaṃ nirodho, tesaṃ vasena desatopi upacāravasena niddisīyati yathā ‘‘cakkhuṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.401; ma. ni. 1.134; vibha. 204).
“以步行”是指以普通的步行。“世间尽头”指的是行世间的尽头,即作为边际之因的涅槃。“任何时候”指无论何时。“未证得”指未以最上道证得。“解脱”指释放、出离。“因此”指因为未证得世间尽头,则无有从轮回苦中解脱,所以。“have”仅是语助词。“世间解”指从自性等方面了知一切世间者。“善慧”指具有美妙智慧者。“达世间边者”指以遍知现观了知世间后,以断现观而达到世间边者。由于道梵行已圆满,故为“已住梵行者”。由于一切烦恼已寂灭,或由于四谛法已现证,故为“寂灭者”。“不希求”指不渴望,即既不希求此世间,也不希求他世间,因为不再结生。显示巴利原文
Gamanenāti pākatikagamanena. Lokassantoti saṅkhāralokassa anto antakiriyāya hetubhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ. Kudācananti kadācipi. Appatvāti aggamaggena anadhigantvā. Pamocananti pamutti nissaraṇaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā lokantaṃ appatvā vaṭṭadukkhato mutti natthi, tasmā. Haveti nipātamattaṃ. Lokavidūti sabhāvādito sabbaṃ lokaṃ vijānanto. Sumedhoti sundarapañño. Lokantagūti pariññābhisamayena lokaṃ viditvā pahānābhisamayena lokantagū. Maggabrahmacariyassa pariniṭṭhitattā vusitabrahmacariyo. Sabbesaṃ kilesānaṃ samitattā catusaccadhammānaṃ vā abhisamitattā samitāvī. Nāsīsatīti na pattheti, yathā imaṃ lokaṃ, evaṃ parañca lokaṃ nāsīsati appaṭisandhikattā.
如此,虽然世间解性已从自性等方面被无余地显示,但世间仅被部分提及,为了无余地显示它,而说“然而,有三种世间”等。其中,与根相连的诸蕴的集合与相续是“有情世间”。于色等中,由于有情贪著,故为“有情”;于此中,善、恶及其异熟被世间了知,故为“世间”。不与根相连的色等的集合与相续是“器世间”,因为于此中,动与不动的有情被世间了知,且它是它们的处所。由于是他们的依止,它也被称为“器世间”。这两种情况下的诸蕴都是“行世间”,因为它们由缘而被造作、被破坏、被毁坏。“依食而住”指依缘而住,意思是:依赖于缘而存在。在这里,“食”一词是缘的意思,如同“此食是未生之欲贪的生起之缘”等处。这样,以“一切有情”一词,无想有情也被包含在内。然而,此依食而住性,从严格意义上说是行法,而非有情法,因此他说:“在提到‘依食而住’之处,应知是指行世间。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ yadipi lokavidutā anavasesato dassitā sabhāvādito dassitattā, loko pana ekadeseneva vuttoti taṃ anavasesato dassetuṃ ‘‘api ca tayo lokā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha indriyabaddhānaṃ khandhānaṃ samūho santāno ca sattaloko. Rūpādīsu sattavisattatāya satto, lokīyati ettha kusalākusalaṃ tabbipāko cāti loko. Anindriyabaddhānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ samūho santāno ca okāsaloko lokīyanti ettha jaṅgamā thāvarā ca tesañca okāsabhūtoti katvā. Tadādhāratāya hesa ‘‘bhājanaloko’’tipi vuccati. Ubhayepi khandhā saṅkhāraloko paccayehi saṅkharīyanti lujjanti palujjanti cāti. Āhāraṭṭhitikāti paccayaṭṭhitikā, paccayāyattavuttikāti attho. Paccayattho hettha āhārasaddo ‘‘ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa uppādāyā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.232) viya. Evañhi ‘‘sabbe sattā’’ti iminā asaññasattāpi pariggahitā honti. Sā panāyaṃ āhāraṭṭhitikatā nippariyāyato saṅkhāradhammo, na sattadhammoti āha ‘‘āhāraṭṭhitikāti āgataṭṭhāne saṅkhāraloko veditabbo’’ti.
如果这样,那“一切众生”这句话又该如何理解呢?这并无过失,因为这是依人施设的教说。然而,为何世尊有时依人施设而说法,有时又依法施设而说法呢?这是由于说法的善巧与应度化者的意乐。诸佛世尊已获得说法善巧,随其所宜,有时依人施设而说法,有时依法施设而说法。或者,对于尚未进入教法次第的应度化者,则宣说依人施设的教法;对于已经进入者,则宣说依法施设的教法。依人施设的教说,属于世俗谛的范畴;另一种,则属于胜义谛的范畴。前者随顺于悲,后者随顺于智。又或者,因其信行的特质,为世间增上者宣说依人施设的教法;因其智行的特质,为法增上者宣说依法施设的教法。前者是应被引导释义的不了义说,后者是了义说。应知世尊是观察了诸种差别之后,在各处宣说这两种教法的。显示巴利原文
Yadi evaṃ ‘‘sabbe sattā’’ti idaṃ kathanti? Puggalādhiṭṭhānadesanāti nāyaṃ doso. Kasmā pana bhagavā katthaci puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā dhammaṃ deseti, katthaci dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desetīti? Desanāvilāsato veneyyajjhāsayato ca. Desanāvilāsappattā hi buddhā bhagavanto, te yathāruci katthaci puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā katthaci dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desenti. Ye vā pana veneyyā sāsanakkamaṃ anotiṇṇā, tesaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ desanaṃ desenti. Ye ca otiṇṇā, tesaṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Sammutisaccavisayā puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā, itarā paramatthasaccavisayā. Purimā karuṇānukūlā, itarā paññānukūlā. Saddhānusārīgottānaṃ vā purimā. Te hi puggalappamāṇikā, pacchimā dhammānusārīgottānaṃ. Saddhācaritatāya vā lokādhipatīnaṃ vasena puggalādhiṭṭhānā, paññācaritatāya dhammādhipatīnaṃ vasena dhammādhiṭṭhānā. Purimā ca neyyatthā, pacchimā nītatthā. Iti bhagavā taṃ taṃ visesaṃ apekkhitvā tattha tattha duvidhaṃ desanaṃ desetīti veditabbaṃ.
对于执持常见等邪见者,他们以“我、世间”等构想,大多以有情为所缘,而非以诸行为所缘,因此说:“在提到‘世间是常’或‘世间是非常’的地方,应知是指有情世间。”所谓“日月所运行之处”,是指日月回转、周行之处。所谓“照耀诸方而发光”,即由于它们的运行,各个方向变得明亮而照耀。或者,“诸方”为受格复数,因此意思是:自身发光的日月照耀、照亮了各个方向。所谓“千重世间”,即以此度量,有一千个这样的器世间,意思是千世界界。或者有读作“具千”的,即“它拥有如此千数”,故称“具千”。在此,是指名为千世界界的世间。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhigatikānaṃ sassatādivasena ‘‘attā loko’’ti parikappanā yebhuyyena sattavisayā, na saṅkhāravisayāti āha ‘‘sassato lokoti vā asassato lokoti vāti āgataṭṭhāne sattaloko veditabbo’’ti. Yāvatā candimasūriyā pariharantīti yattake ṭhāne candimasūriyā parivattanti paribbhamanti. Disā bhanti virocamānāti tesaṃ paribbhamaneneva tā tā disā pabhassarā hutvā virocanti. Atha vā disāti upayogabahuvacanaṃ, tasmā sayaṃ virocamānā candimasūriyā yattakā disā bhanti sobhenti obhāsayantīti attho. Tāva sahassadhā lokoti tattakena pamāṇena sahassappakāro okāsaloko, sahassalokadhātuyoti attho. ‘‘Tāvasahassavā’’ti vā pāṭho, tāva tattakaṃ sahassaṃ assa atthīti tāvasahassavā. Etthāti sahassalokadhātusaṅkhāte loke.
“那个也”指三种世间。“以一切方式了知”即从一切方面通达。如何通达?说“因为这样……”等。“因为这样,对他来说”一句,与“以一切方式了知”相关联。“对他来说”是指此世尊。“一种世间:一切众生依食而住”——通过这一依人施设的说法,说明了一切诸行皆依缘而转,由此,由于没有其他类别,一切行世间为一种。“二种世间”等,也应以此理趣了知其义。此处,通过提及“名”,并未包含涅槃,因为涅槃不具有世间的性质。难道不是这样吗?在“依食而住”中,由于依缘而转,道果等法也获得了世间性?并非如此,因为此处“世间”是指应遍知的苦谛诸法。或者,所谓“不坏、不灭”者,并非如此被执取,那即是“世间”,因此,远离那种执取的出世间法,并无世间性。显示巴利原文
Tampīti tividhampi lokaṃ. Sabbathā avedīti sabbappakārato paṭivijjhi. Kathaṃ paṭivijjhīti āha ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādi. Tathā hissāti imassa ‘‘sabbathā vidito’’ti etena sambandho. Assāti anena bhagavatā. Eko loko sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikāti yāya puggalādhiṭṭhānāya kathāya sabbesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ paccayāyattavuttitā vuttā, tāya sabbo saṅkhāraloko ekavidho pakārantarassa abhāvato. Dve lokātiādīsupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Nāmaggahaṇena cettha nibbānassa aggahaṇaṃ tassa alokasabhāvattā. Nanu ca ‘‘āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti ettha paccayāyattavuttitāya maggaphaladhammānampi lokatā āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati pariññeyyānaṃ dukkhasaccadhammānaṃ idha lokoti adhippetattā. Atha vā na lujjati na palujjatīti yo gahito tathā na hoti, so lokoti taṃgahaṇarahitānaṃ lokuttarānaṃ natthi lokatā.
三受,即依苦、乐、舍而说。四食,即段食、触食、意思食、识食。其中,段食带来食素第八色,故名为食;触带来三受,故名为食;意思带来三有中的结生,故名为食;识在结生刹那带来名色,故名为食。成为执取所缘的蕴,即是取蕴。六内处,即从眼处到意处。七识住,即:身异想异、身异想一、身一想异、身一想一,以及下三无色界。这七者,因识住于其中,故名识住。其中,身体各异或有差别,是为‘身异’;具有各异之想,是为‘想异’。依此理趣,其余文句亦应了知。显示巴利原文
Tisso vedanāti sukhadukkhaupekkhāvasena. Cattāro āhārāti kabaḷīkārāhāro phassāhāro manosañcetanāhāro viññāṇāhāroti cattāro āhārā. Tattha kabaḷīkārāhāro ojaṭṭhamakaṃ rūpaṃ āharatīti āhāro. Phasso tisso vedanā āharatīti āhāro. Manosañcetanā tīsu bhavesu paṭisandhiṃ āharatīti āhāro. Viññāṇaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe nāmarūpaṃ āharatīti āhāro. Upādānānaṃ ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā upādānakkhandhā. Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanānīti cakkhāyatanādimanāyatanapariyantāni. Satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, nānattakāyā ekattasaññino, ekattakāyā nānattasaññino, ekattakāyā ekattasaññino, heṭṭhimā ca tayo āruppāti imā satta ‘‘viññāṇaṃ tiṭṭhati etthāti viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo’’ti vuccanti. Tattha nānattaṃ kāyo etesaṃ, nānatto vā kāyo etesanti nānattakāyā, nānattasaññā etesaṃ atthīti nānattasaññino. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi attho veditabbo.
一切人类、六欲天诸天及部分堕恶趣者,名为“身异想异”。在无量轮围世界中,无量众生的容貌、形态等,没有两个完全相同的。纵使某处有双胞胎容貌或形态相似,其看、视、言、笑、行、住等也必有差异,且他们的结生想或为三因、二因或无因,是故一切人类皆身异想异。六欲天诸天中,有身色为蓝、黄等不同者,其结生想亦分二因、三因,故他们亦是身异想异。而所谓部分堕恶趣者,当知是指已脱离四恶趣之辈,如郁多罗母夜叉、彼扬卡拉母、法护等。他们肤色有白、黑、黄褐等别,且瘦、胖、矮、高互异,如同人类,结生想亦有三种因、二种因、无因之殊。然他们不具诸天之大威神力,恰如可怜之人,少威神力,难得衣食,为苦所逼而住。有些于黑分(月亏)时受苦,于白分(月盈)时得乐;他们从乐聚中堕落,故说“有从乐聚中堕落”;虽名为天,却无天界妙乐,故称“堕恶趣者”。然彼中具三因者,亦能证悟诸法。例如,彼扬卡拉母夜叉,于黎明时分,听闻阿那律……显示巴利原文
Sabbe manussā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.127; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.7.44-45) chakāmāvacarā ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā ‘‘nānattakāyā nānattasaññino’’ti vuccanti. Aparimāṇesu hi cakkavāḷesu aparimāṇānaṃ manussānaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivasena dvepi ekasadisā natthi. Yepi katthaci yamakabhātaro vaṇṇena vā saṇṭhānena vā ekasadisā honti, tesampi ālokitavilokitakathitahasitagamanaṭhānādīhi viseso hotiyeva, paṭisandhisaññā ca nesaṃ tihetukāpi duhetukāpi ahetukāpi hoti, tasmā sabbepi manussā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino. Chakāmāvacaradevesu ca kesañci kāyo nīlo hoti, kesañci pītādivaṇṇo, paṭisandhisaññā ca nesaṃ duhetukāpi tihetukāpi hoti, tasmā tepi nānattakāyā nānattasaññino. Ekacce vinipātikā pana catuapāyavinimuttakā uttaramātā yakkhinī, piyaṅkaramātā, dhammaguttāti evamādayo daṭṭhabbā. Etesañhi odātakaāḷamaṅguracchavisāmavaṇṇādivasena ceva kisathūlarassadīghādivasena ca kāyo nānā hoti, manussānaṃ viya tihetukaduhetukāhetukavasena paṭisandhisaññāpi, te pana devā viya na mahesakkhā , kapaṇamanussā viya appesakkhā dullabhaghāsacchādanā dukkhapīḷitā viharanti, ekacce kāḷapakkhe dukkhitā juṇhapakkhe sukhitā honti, tasmā sukhasamussayato vinipatitattā sukhasamussayato vinipāto etesaṃ atthīti vinipātikāti vuttā satipi devabhāve dibbasampattiyā abhāvato. Ye panettha tihetukā, tesaṃ dhammābhisamayopi hoti. Piyaṅkaramātā hi yakkhinī paccūsasamaye anuruddhattherassa dhammaṃ sajjhāyato sutvā –
“莫作声,彼扬卡拉,比丘正宣说法句;”
再者,了知法句之后,我们应为利益而修行,不应为害。
于诸众生,我们当自我克制,具正知而不说妄语;
我们应修学自身之善戒,亦愿能从毕舍遮鬼类中解脱。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Mā saddaṃ kari piyaṅkara, bhikkhu dhammapadāni bhāsati; Apica dhammapadaṃ vijāniya, paṭipajjema hitāya no siyā. ‘‘Pāṇesu ca saṃyamāmase, sampajānamusā na bhaṇāmase; Sikkhema susīlyamattano, api muccema pisācayoniyā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.240) –
如此教导儿子后,她当天便证得须陀洹果。而郁多罗的母亲听闻世尊说法后,即成为须陀洹。如是,这些有情也因身与结生识的差异,而被归为“身异想异”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ puttakaṃ saññāpetvā taṃ divasaṃ sotāpattiphalaṃ pattā. Uttaramātā pana bhagavato dhammaṃ sutvāva sotāpannā jātā. Evamimepi kāyassa ceva paṭisandhisaññāya ca nānattā ‘‘nānattakāyā nānattasaññino’’tveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti.
然而,由下品、中品、上品初禅所生的梵身天——梵众天、梵辅天、大梵天,以及四恶趣中的有情,被称为“身异想一”。在这些梵身天中,梵辅天的身体较梵众天更为广大,大梵天的身体又较梵辅天更为广大;他们的身体虽在威光上胜过下者,但此处不以威光为量。同样地,少光天等与少净天等,虽身形威光有殊,然仅依同一性而安立,故称“身一”。如是,这些梵身天由于身有差异,但由初禅果报之故,结生识是同一的,故为身异想一。如同他们一样,四恶趣的有情也是如此:地狱中,有些有情的身体为半由旬,有些为一由旬,提婆达多的身体则达一百由旬;畜生中,有些身形小,有些身形大;饿鬼中,有些为六十肘,有些为八十肘,有些金色,有些丑陋,黑闇饿鬼亦然。并且,此处还有名为“长背饿鬼”的,其身量甚至有六十由旬,但所有有情的结生识都是不善果报的无因心。因此,恶趣有情也被归为“身异想一”。显示巴利原文
Brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitamahābrahmasaṅkhātā pana hīnamajjhimapaṇītabhedabhinnena paṭhamajjhānena nibbattā brahmakāyikā ceva catūsu apāyesu sattā ca ‘‘nānattakāyā ekattasaññino’’ti vuccanti. Etesu hi brahmakāyikesu brahmapurohitānaṃ kāyo brahmapārisajjehi pamāṇato vipulataro hoti, mahābrahmānaṃ kāyo pana brahmapurohitehipi pamāṇato vipulataro hoti. Kāmañca nesaṃ pabhāvasenapi kāyo heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimehi uḷārataro hoti, taṃ pana idha appamāṇaṃ. Tathā hi parittābhādīnaṃ parittasubhādīnañca kāye satipi pabhāvematte ekattavaseneva vavatthapīyatīti ‘‘ekattakāyā’’tveva te vuccanti. Evamime brahmakāyikā kāyassa nānattā paṭhamajjhānavipākavasena pana paṭisandhisaññāya ca ekattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññino. Yathā ca te, evaṃ catūsu apāyesu sattā. Nirayesu hi kesañci gāvutaṃ, kesañci aḍḍhayojanaṃ, kesañci yojanaṃ attabhāvo hoti, devadattassa pana yojanasatiko jāto. Tiracchānesupi keci khuddakā, keci mahantā, pettivisayepi keci saṭṭhihatthā, keci asītihatthā honti, keci suvaṇṇā, keci dubbaṇṇā, tathā kālakañcikā asurā. Api cettha dīghapiṭṭhikapetā nāma saṭṭhiyojanikāpi honti, paṭisandhisaññā pana sabbesampi akusalavipākāhetukāva hoti. Iti āpāyikāpi ‘‘nānattakāyā ekattasaññino’’tveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti.
而第二禅地的少光天、无量光天、光音天,则被称为“身一想异”。因为他们的身体皆为同一大小,而结生识却因第二禅、第三禅果报的差异而有不同。显示巴利原文
Dutiyajjhānabhūmikā pana parittābhā appamāṇābhā ābhassarā ‘‘ekattakāyā nānattasaññino’’ti vuccanti. Nesañhi sabbesaṃ kāyo ekappamāṇova hoti, paṭisandhisaññā pana dutiyatatiyajjhānavipākavasena nānā hoti.
至于第三禅地的少净天、无量净天与遍净天,则是身一想一。依前述道理,他们的身是同一的,而且由于第四禅的果报,结生识也是同一的。有说:“广果天也属于这第四识住,因为其身与结生识都因第五禅果报而呈同一形相。然而净居天属于不退转、归于还灭的部分,并非一切时都有。在无佛出世的百千劫乃至无数劫中,他们不会出现;唯有在佛出世的十六千劫之内,他们才会出现,犹如转法轮世尊施设的营帐之处,因此他们既不属于识住,也不属于有情居。”但大尸婆长老依据《中部》的此经——“舍利弗啊,那样的住处实不易得,是我在这漫长轮回中除了净居天之外未曾住过的”而说:“净居天也属于第四识住、第四有情居。”由于此经未被驳斥,故获得认可。因此,除了无想有情之外,在从少净天到阿迦腻吒天的九地中,有情应被理解为“身一想一”。显示巴利原文
Parittasubhā appamāṇasubhā subhakiṇhā pana tatiyajjhānabhūmikā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino. Tesaṃ vuttanayena kāyassa ceva catutthajjhānavipākavasena paṭisandhisaññāya ca ekattā. ‘‘Vehapphalāpi imaṃyeva catutthaviññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ bhajanti kāyassa ceva pañcamajjhānavipākavasena paṭisandhisaññāya ca ekarūpattā. Suddhāvāsā pana apunarāvattanato vivaṭṭapakkhe ṭhitā, na sabbakālikā. Kappasatasahassampi asaṅkhyeyyampi buddhasuññe loke nuppajjanti, soḷasakappasahassabbhantare buddhesu uppajjantesuyeva uppajjanti, dhammacakkappavattissa bhagavato khandhāvāraṭṭhānasadisā honti, tasmā neva viññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ, na sattāvāsaṃ bhajantī’’ti vadanti. Mahāsīvatthero pana ‘‘na kho pana so sāriputta āvāso sulabharūpo, yo mayā anāvuṭṭhapubbo iminā dīghena addhunā aññatra suddhāvāsehi devehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.160) iminā suttena ‘‘suddhāvāsāpi catutthaviññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ catutthasattāvāsaṃ bhajantī’’ti vadati, taṃ appaṭibāhiyattā suttassa anuññātaṃ. Tasmā asaññasattaṃ apanetvā parittasubhādīsu akaniṭṭhapariyosānāsu navasu bhūmīsu sattā ‘‘ekattakāyā ekattasaññino’’ti gahetabbā.
而无想有情因为没有识,故不在此归类中。正如在无佛出世时,于外道处出家者,取风遍为业处,修习成办第四禅,从禅那出定后,生起这样的决意与欲乐:“呸,心!呸,心!心不存在才是好的。正因为有心,才会有杀戮、束缚等苦因;若无心,这些便不存在。”他在不退失禅那的情况下命终,以无想的色法结生而生于无想有情处。无论他在人间界所惯行的威仪是什么,他便以那种威仪出生,或站立、或安坐、或躺卧,这样持续五百大劫。如此,由于修习厌离心的缘故,他们那里不生起识,所以因无识而不属于识住。而非想非非想处,正如其想是微细的,其识也是微细的,故不归入识住中。因为如同想一样,识也达到了唯有行蕴残余的微细状态,没有明显的识的作用,既不是识,也非完全无识,所以说为非识非无识,因此不归入具有明显识作用的识住中。因此,连同恶趣有情在内的六欲天及人,是身异想异;初禅地者和恶趣有情,是身异想一;第二禅地者,是身一想异;第三禅地者,除去无想有情,以及其余第四禅地者,是身一想一。这四种识住,加上除非想非非想处外的空无边处等三无色界,应知为“七识住”。显示巴利原文
Asaññasattā pana viññāṇābhāvā ettha saṅgahaṃ na gacchanti. Tathā hi anuppanne buddhe titthāyatane pabbajitā vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvā catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘dhī cittaṃ, dhī cittaṃ, cittassa nāma abhāvoyeva sādhu. Cittañhi nissāya vadhabandhādipaccayaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, citte asati nattheta’’nti khantiṃ ruciṃ uppādetvā aparihīnajjhānā kālaṃ katvā rūpapaṭisandhivasena asaññabhave nibbattanti. Yo yassa iriyāpatho manussaloke paṇihito ahosi, so tena iriyāpathena nibbattitvā pañca kappasatāni ṭhito vā nisinno vā nipanno vā hoti. Evaṃ cittavirāgabhāvanāvasena tesaṃ tattha viññāṇuppatti na hotīti viññāṇābhāvato viññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ te na bhajanti. Nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ pana yatheva saññāya, evaṃ viññāṇassapi sukhumattā viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu saṅgahaṃ na gacchati. Tañhi saññāya viya viññāṇassapi saṅkhārāvasesasukhumabhāvappattattā paribyattaviññāṇakiccābhāvato neva viññāṇaṃ , na ca sabbaso aviññāṇaṃ hotīti nevaviññāṇā nāviññāṇaṃ, tasmā paripphuṭaviññāṇakiccavantīsu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu saṅgahaṃ na gacchati. Tasmā vinipātikehi saddhiṃ chakāmāvacaradevā manussā ca nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, paṭhamajjhānabhūmikā apāyasattā ca nānattakāyā ekattasaññino, dutiyajjhānabhūmikā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino, tatiyajjhānabhūmikā asaññasattaṃ vajjetvā sesā catutthajjhānabhūmikā ca ekattakāyā ekattasaññinoti imā catasso viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ vajjetvā ākāsānañcāyatanādiheṭṭhimāruppattayena saddhiṃ ‘‘satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo’’ti veditabbā.
八世间法,即得、失、誉、毁、称、讥、乐、苦。这八种因为是世间的法则,故称世间法。这些法对于有情世间是必然存在的,因此没有一个有情能从中脱离。它们时而追逐世间,时而被世间所追逐。经中也说:“诸比丘,这八种世间法随转世间,世间也随转八种世间法。”(《增支部》8.6)获得饮食衣物等,或者那些应被获得的事物本身,称为得。其不存在称为失。这里以“得”的把握,包含了与之相应的随顺;以“失”的把握,包含了与之相应的违逆。同样,在誉等当中,也应理解为包含了与之相应的随顺与违逆。然而,当得到来之时,失其实也同时到来,所以说“得与失”。在誉等中也是如此。正如有血液时,由于血液的败坏便有脓一样,当对于得等有随顺时,对于失等的违逆便得到了现起的机会。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭha lokadhammāti lābho alābho yaso ayaso nindā pasaṃsā sukhaṃ dukkhanti ime aṭṭha lokassa dhammattā lokadhammā. Ime hi sattalokassa avassaṃbhāvino dhammā, tasmā etehi vinimutto nāma koci satto natthi. Te hi aparāparaṃ kadāci lokaṃ anupatanti, kadāci te loko ca anupatati. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhime, bhikkhave, lokadhammā lokaṃ anuparivattanti, loko ca aṭṭha lokadhamme anuparivattatī’’ti (a. ni. 8.6). Ghāsacchādanādīnaṃ laddhi, tāni eva vā laddhabbato lābho. Tadabhāvo alābho. Lābhaggahaṇena cettha tabbisayo anurodho gahito, alābhaggahaṇena virodho. Evaṃ yasādīsupi tabbisayaanurodhavirodhānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Lābhe pana āgate alābho āgatoyeva hotīti lābho ca alābho ca vutto. Yasādīsupi eseva nayo. Tathā ca lohite sati tadupaghātavasena pubbo viya lābhādīsu anurodhe sati alābhādīsu virodho laddhāvasaro eva hoti.
九有情居:即前文所说的七识住,加上无想有情和四无色界,合为“九有情居”。有情居住其中,故称有情居,即种种身、种种想等各类有情群体。这些有情群体,对于摄属其中的有情,因其摄属关系,犹如树上的枝干一般,堪称依止处。至于为何将净居天也纳入有情居,前文已作说明。显示巴利原文
Nava sattāvāsāti heṭṭhā vuttasattaviññāṇaṭṭhitiyo eva asaññasattacatutthāruppehi saddhiṃ ‘‘nava sattāvāsā’’ti vuccanti. Sattā āvasanti etesūti sattāvāsā, nānattakāyanānattasaññīādibhedā sattanikāyā. Te hi sattanikāyā tappariyāpannānaṃ sattānaṃ tāya eva tappariyāpannatāya ādhāro viya vattabbataṃ arahanti samudāyādhāratāya avayavassa yathā ‘‘rukkhe sākhā’’ti. Suddhāvāsānampi sattāvāsaggahaṇe kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
十处:排除非色的意处以及色与非色等混合的法处,唯依色法而立眼等五处与色等五处,合为十处。若加上意处和法处,则称为十二处。显示巴利原文
Dasāyatanānīti arūpasabhāvaṃ manāyatanaṃ rūpārūpādimissakaṃ dhammāyatanañca ṭhapetvā kevalaṃ rūpadhammānaṃyeva vasena cakkhāyatanādayo pañca, rūpāyatanādayo pañcāti dasāyatanāni vuttāni, manāyatanadhammāyatanehi pana saddhiṃ tāniyeva ‘‘dvādasāyatanānī’’ti vuttāni.
为何在此将眼等称为“处”呢?因为它们能生起,或因为它们令(心等)延展生起,或因为它们引导漫长(的轮回),故称为处。在眼、色等之中,那些依各自门、各自所缘的心、心所法,以各自领纳等作用而生起、奋起、精进、努力;而这些处则令那些生起的法延展、扩张;并且,只要无始轮回中这极其漫长的轮回之苦尚未止息,它们便引导其继续转起,因此称为“处”。此外,以住处、矿藏、集会处、出生地、原因等义,也可称为处。例如,世间所说的“自在天处”“婆薮天处”等,即是以住处为处;“金处”“银处”等,是以矿藏为处;圣教中“在可爱之处,鸟群依止”(《增支部》5.38)等,是以集会处为处;“南印度是牛的出生地”等,是以出生地为处;“于彼彼处,若具念者,便能证得自证通智”(《中部》3.158;《增支部》3.102;5.23)等,是以原因为处。在眼等处,那些心、心所法依之转起,故眼等是它们的住处;那些心、心所法遍布眼等,依眼等而住,以眼等为所缘,故眼等是它们的矿藏;因各依其依处、门、所缘而聚集……显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha cakkhādayo ‘‘āyatanānī’’ti vuccanti? Āyatanato (vibha. aṭṭha. 154) āyānaṃ vā tananato āyatassa ca nayanato āyatanāni. Cakkhurūpādīsu hi taṃtaṃdvārārammaṇā cittacetasikā dhammā sena sena anubhavanādinā kiccena āyatanti uṭṭhahanti ghaṭanti vāyamanti, te ca pana āyabhūte dhamme etāni tanonti vitthārenti, idañca anamatagge saṃsāre pavattaṃ ativiya āyataṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ yāva na nivattati, tāva nayanti pavattayanti, tasmā ‘‘āyatanānī’’ti vuccanti. Api ca nivāsaṭṭhānaṭṭhena ākaraṭṭhena samosaraṇaṭṭhena sañjātidesaṭṭhena kāraṇaṭṭhena ca āyatanāni. Tathā hi loke ‘‘issarāyatanaṃ vāsudevāyatana’’ntiādīsu nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ āyatananti vuccati. ‘‘Suvaṇṇāyatanaṃ rajatāyatana’’ntiādīsu ākaro. Sāsane pana ‘‘manorame āyatane, sevanti naṃ vihaṅgamā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.38) samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Dakkhiṇāpatho gunnaṃ āyatana’’ntiādīsu sañjātideso. ‘‘Tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṃ pāpuṇāti sati satiāyatane’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.158; a. ni. 3.102; 5.23) kāraṇaṃ āyatananti vuccati. Cakkhuādīsu ca te te cittacetasikā dhammā nivasanti tadāyattavuttitāyāti cakkhādayo tesaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ. Cakkhādīsu ca te ākiṇṇā tannissitattā tadārammaṇattā cāti cakkhādayova nesaṃ ākaro. Tattha tattha vatthudvārārammaṇavasena samosaraṇato cakkhādayova nesaṃ samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. Tannissayārammaṇabhāvena tattheva uppattito cakkhādayova nesaṃ sañjātideso. Cakkhādīnaṃ abhāve abhāvato cakkhādayova nesaṃ kāraṇanti yathāvuttenatthena cakkhu ca taṃ āyatanañcāti cakkhāyatanaṃ. Evaṃ sesānipi.
这十二处与眼识等六识合在一起,从“安立”等义来说,便称为“十八界”。确实,在眼等之中,每一法各如其分地安立、被持守、有所安立,或依于此而安立,或安立于此中,因此叫做“界”。世间诸界,作为原因被确定之后,就像金、银等矿藏产生金、银那样,产生种种轮回之苦;又如搬运者背负货物一般,它们被有情执持、担持;而且它们唯是苦的安立,因为它们是自在的。由于这些界作为因,轮回之苦被有情随顺地安立,如此被安立的苦便又被持守、安放在这些界之中,所以称为“界”。再者,并不像外道所说的“我”那样并非真实存在,这些界保持着自己的自性,故称为界。又如同世间那些色彩斑斓的雌黄、雄黄等岩石部分被称作“界”,这些界也像“界”一样是界,因为它们作为智与所知的部分而色彩斑斓。或者,如同在名为身体的总体中,对味、血等部分,由于它们具有相互差异、被各自特相所限定的特征,而得到“界”的名称;同样地,在名为五蕴的有身中,眼等因为具有相互差异、被各自特相所限定的特征,也应知有“界”的名称。显示巴利原文
Imāneva pana dvādasāyatanāni cakkhuviññāṇādichaviññāṇehi saddhiṃ aṭṭhārasa vidahanādito ‘‘dhātuyo’’ti vuccanti. Tathā hi cakkhādīsu ekeko dhammo yathāsambhavaṃ vidahati, dhīyate, vidhānaṃ, vidhīyate etāya, ettha vā dhīyatīti dhātūti vuccati. Lokiyā hi dhātuyo kāraṇabhāvena vavatthitāva hutvā suvaṇṇarajatādidhātuyo viya suvaṇṇarajatādiṃ, anekappakāraṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ vidahanti, bhārahārehi ca bhāro viya sattehi dhīyanti dhārīyanti, dukkhavidhānamattameva cetā avasavattanato. Etāhi ca kāraṇabhūtāhi saṃsāradukkhaṃ sattehi anuvidhīyati, tathāvihitañca taṃ etāsveva dhīyati ṭhapīyati, tasmā ‘‘dhātuyo’’ti vuccanti. Api ca yathā titthiyānaṃ attā nāma sabhāvato natthi, na evametā, etā pana attano sabhāvaṃ dhārentīti dhātuyo. Yathā ca loke vicittā haritālamanosilādayo selāvayavā ‘‘dhātuyo’’ti vuccanti, evametāpi dhātuyo viya dhātuyo. Vicittā hetā ñāṇañeyyāvayavāti. Yathā vā sarīrasaṅkhātassa samudāyassa avayavabhūtesu rasasoṇitādīsu aññamaññavisabhāgalakkhaṇaparicchinnesu dhātusamaññā, evametesupi pañcakkhandhasaṅkhātassa attabhāvassa avayavesu dhātusamaññā veditabbā. Aññamaññavisabhāgalakkhaṇaparicchinnā hete cakkhādayoti. Api ca dhātūti nijjīvamattassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tathā hi bhagavā ‘‘chadhāturo ayaṃ bhikkhu puriso’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.343) jīvasaññāsamūhananatthaṃ dhātudesanamakāsi. Tasmā nijjīvaṭṭhenapi dhātuyoti vuccanti.
在此,以“依食而住”——即诸行依缘而转起——这一说法,显示了诸行的无常性;由此,根据“凡无常者,彼是苦;凡苦者,彼是无我”(《相应部》3.15)的教导,也阐明了苦与无我性,因此三共相全都被含摄在内。“名”是指四种无色蕴,从义理上说明就是触等。“色”是指四大种及所造色,从义理上说明就是地等。这样,从共相上,诸行已被无差别地含摄。而在含摄它们的同时,那些有差别的善等、因等,也都被含摄了。所以说:“如是,此诸行世间也于一切方面被了知了。”显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti paccayāyattavuttitāvacanena saṅkhārānaṃ aniccatā, tāya ca ‘‘yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.15) vacanato dukkhānattatā ca pakāsitā hontīti tīṇipi sāmaññalakkhaṇāni gahitāni. Nāmanti cattāro arūpino khandhā, te ca atthato phassādayo. Rūpanti bhūtupādāyarūpāni, tāni ca atthato pathavīādayoti aviseseneva salakkhaṇato saṅkhārā gahitā. Taggahaṇeneva ye te savisesā kusalādayo hetuādayo ca, tepi gahitā eva hontīti āha ‘‘iti ayaṃ saṅkhāralokopi sabbathā vidito’’ti.
如此开示了行世间于一切方面已被了知之后,现在为了开示有情世间于一切方面也已被了知,而说“然而,由于此……”等语。其中,“了知随眠倾向”的意思是:心依此而住,所以是“随眠倾向”,如同野兽的栖息处。就像野兽外出觅食后返回,便睡在那片密林里,那密林就是它的栖息处;同样,心即使在其它方面活动之后,也会回来依止于某处而住,那处便被称为它的“随眠倾向”。而此随眠倾向依常见等而有四种。恰如所说:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṅkhāralokassa sabbathā viditabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni sattalokassapi sabbathā viditabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘yasmā panesā’’tiādimāha. Tattha āsayaṃ jānātīti āgamma cittaṃ seti etthāti āsayo migāsayo viya. Yathā migo gocarāya gantvā paccāgantvā tattheva vanagahane sayatīti so tassa āsayo, evaṃ aññathā pavattitvāpi cittaṃ āgamma yattha seti, so tassa āsayoti vuccati. So pana sassatadiṭṭhiādivasena catubbidho. Vuttañca –
常见与断见,以及随顺忍;
以及如实智,这些名为随眠倾向。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sassatucchedadiṭṭhī ca, khanti cevānulomikā; Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaddita’’nti.
其中,由于一切见皆为常见与断见所摄,因此一切堕于见的有情都依附于此二见。正如所说:“迦旃延!此世间大多依于二见:有与无。”(《相应部》2.15)所谓“有”,即执取常见;“无”,即执取断见。此是依止于轮回的凡夫的随眠倾向;而依止于还灭的清净有情,则有随顺忍与如实智二种随眠倾向。其中,《破除愚痴·分别论注释》中说:“随顺忍是观智,如实智是道智。”佛陀了知这四种有情的随眠倾向,即使当那些见与那些智不现起的刹那,他也了知。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Tattha sabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ sassatucchedadiṭṭhīhi saṅgahitattā sabbepi diṭṭhigatikā sattā imā eva dve diṭṭhiyo sannissitā. Yathāha ‘‘dvayanissito khvāyaṃ kaccāna loko yebhuyyena atthitañceva natthitañcā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.15). Atthitāti hi sassataggāho adhippeto, natthitāti ucchedaggāho. Ayaṃ tāva vaṭṭanissitānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ āsayo, vivaṭṭanissitānaṃ pana suddhasattānaṃ anulomikā khanti yathābhūtañāṇanti duvidho āsayo. Tattha ‘‘anulomikā khanti vipassanāñāṇaṃ, yathābhūtañāṇaṃ pana maggañāṇa’’nti sammohavinodaniyā vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 815) vuttaṃ . Taṃ catubbidhampi sattānaṃ āsayaṃ jānāti, jānanto ca tesaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ tesañca ñāṇānaṃ appavattikkhaṇepi jānāti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“即使正在享受欲乐,他也了知:‘此人以欲为重、有欲的倾向、心向于欲’;即使正在享受欲乐,他也了知:‘此人以出离为重、有出离的倾向、心向于出离’等等。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Kāmaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo kāmagaruko kāmāsayo kāmādhimutto’ti, kāmaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo nekkhammagaruko nekkhammāsayo nekkhammādhimutto’’’tiādi (paṭi. ma. 1.113).
“了知随眠”:随逐而眠,故名“随眠”,即获得适当的因缘便生起之意。由此显示它们在获得因缘时,有生起的可能。因为未被断除的烦恼,在获得因缘时便会生起。那么,哪些是这些烦恼呢?欲贪等七种未来的烦恼,以及过去和现在的烦恼,由于性质相同,也被如此称呼。因为诸法的本质,不因时间不同而有差别。他了知这七种随眠,在各个有情的相续中,以或优或劣的方式转起。显示巴利原文
Anusayaṃ jānātīti anu anu sayantīti anusayā, anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ labhitvā uppajjantīti attho. Etena nesaṃ kāraṇalābhe uppajjanārahataṃ dasseti. Appahīnā hi kilesā kāraṇalābhe sati uppajjanti. Ke pana te? Kāmarāgādayo satta anāgatā kilesā, atītā paccuppannā ca taṃsabhāvattā tathā vuccanti. Na hi dhammānaṃ kālabhedena sabhāvabhedo atthi, taṃ sattavidhaṃ anusayaṃ tassa tassa sattassa santāne paroparabhāvena pavattamānaṃ jānāti.
“了知行”:此处,“行”指善行与恶行。这在《分别论》的“行分别”中已有说明。或者,“行”应理解为行为方式。这些行为方式,依贪、嗔、痴、信、慧、寻而有六种根本行;其内部的分化无量,而依接触方式的分化,则有六十三种。他从此行的本质、杂染、清净、生起、果报、等流等方面,了知此行。显示巴利原文
Caritaṃ jānātīti ettha caritanti sucaritaduccaritaṃ. Tañhi vibhaṅge (vibha. 814 ādayo) caritaniddese niddiṭṭhaṃ. Atha vā caritanti cariyā veditabbā. Tā pana rāgadosamohasaddhābuddhivitakkavasena cha mūlacariyā, tāsaṃ apariyanto antarabhedo, saṃsaggabhedo pana tesaṭṭhividho. Taṃ caritaṃ sabhāvato saṃkilesato vodānato samuṭṭhānato phalato nissandatoti evamādinā pakārena jānāti.
“了知胜解”意指:这里的“胜解”是指意乐界。它有两种:劣胜解和优胜解。由于这种胜解,劣胜解的众生只亲近劣胜解者,优胜解的众生只亲近优胜解者。即使戒师、依止师不是持戒者,而共住弟子是持戒者,这些弟子也不会亲近自己的戒师和依止师,只会亲近与自己同类、相宜的比丘。如果戒师和依止师是合适的比丘,而其他人不合适,那些人也不会亲近戒师和依止师,只会亲近与自己相同的劣胜解者。据说,三藏小无畏长老率领五百比丘前往龙岛礼敬塔庙,在一个村落受到大众邀请,当时与长老同行者中有一位不合适的比丘,常住寺院中也有另一位不合适的比丘。比丘僧团入村时,这两人虽客僧与住僧、住僧与客僧素未谋面,却聚到一处,有说有笑地站着交谈。长老看见后说:“正自觉者了知后,宣说了《界相应》。”如此,这种使劣胜解者等得以相互亲近等的意乐界、意乐状态,便称为“胜解”。他正是了知此胜解,他通达:“此人的胜解是劣的,此人的胜解是胜的。其中,此人的胜解是柔和的,此人的是更柔和的,此人的是最柔和的”等等。而胜解的利钝等,应通过根的利钝等来了解。显示巴利原文
Adhimuttiṃ jānātīti ettha adhimuttīti ajjhāsayadhātu. Sā duvidhā hīnādhimutti paṇītādhimuttīti. Yāya hīnādhimuttikā sattā hīnādhimuttikeyeva sevanti, paṇītādhimuttikā ca paṇītādhimuttike eva. Sace hi ācariyupajjhāyā na sīlavanto honti, saddhivihārikā sīlavanto honti, te attano ācariyupajjhāyepi na upasaṅkamanti, attanā sadise sāruppabhikkhūyeva upasaṅkamanti. Sace ācariyupajjhāyā sāruppabhikkhū, itare asāruppā, tepi na ācariyupajjhāye upasaṅkamanti, attanā sadise hīnādhimuttike eva upasaṅkamanti. Tipiṭakacūḷābhayatthero kira nāgadīpe cetiyavandanāya pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ gacchanto ekasmiṃ gāme manussehi nimantito therena ca saddhiṃ eko asāruppabhikkhu atthi, dhuravihārepi eko asāruppabhikkhu atthi, bhikkhusaṅghesu gāmaṃ osarantesu te ubho janā kiñcāpi āgantukena nevāsiko, nevāsikena vā āgantuko na diṭṭhapubbo, evaṃ santepi ekato hutvā hasitvā hasitvā kathayamānā aṭṭhaṃsu. Thero disvā ‘‘sammāsambuddhena jānitvā dhātusaṃyuttaṃ (saṃ. ni. 2.85 ādayo) kathita’’nti āha. Evamayaṃ hīnādhimuttikādīnaṃ aññamaññopasevanādiniyāmikā ajjhāsayadhātu ajjhāsayabhāvo adhimuttīti vuccati, taṃ adhimuttiṃ jānāti. ‘‘Imassa adhimutti hīnā, imassa paṇītā. Tatthāpi imassa mudu, imassa mudutarā, imassa mudutamā’’tiādinā paṭivijjhati. Adhimuttiyā pana tikkhamudubhāvādiko indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvādinā veditabbo.
“少尘”的意思是:在智慧之眼中,这些人的贪、嗔、痴尘垢极少,所以是“少尘”;或者说,这些人的贪等尘垢极少,所以是“少尘”,也就是随眠的贪等尘垢微薄的众生,他们是少尘者。“多尘”也依同一理趣,即增盛的贪等尘垢为多尘,他们是多尘者。“了知”是指:“此人的贪尘少,此人的嗔尘少”等等,他如此了知少尘者等。显示巴利原文
Apparajakkheti paññāmaye akkhimhi appaṃ parittaṃ rāgadosamoharajaṃ etesanti apparajakkhā, appaṃ vā rāgādirajaṃ etesanti apparajakkhā, anussadarāgādirajā sattā. Te apparajakkhe. Mahārajakkheti etthāpi eseva nayo, ussadarāgādirajā mahārajakkhā. Jānātīti ‘‘imassa rāgarajo appo, imassa dosarajo appo’’tiādinā apparajakkhādike jānāti.
“利根”的意思是:具足信等锐利之根。“钝根”的意思是:具足信等迟钝之根。这两处所指的都是作为依止的根。“善相”的意思是:相状善好,即本性良善、有还灭意乐之义;或者,那些随眠倾向等相状、部分善好者,称为“善相”。与之相反则为“恶相”。“易教化”的意思是:容易令其了悟正性决定,也就是具足信与慧者;或者,能领会所说义理、容易被教导者,称为“易教化”。与之相反则为“难教化”。“堪能与不堪能”的意思是:适合证悟圣道、具足依止、没有业障、烦恼障和异熟障者,称为“堪能”;反之则为“不堪能”。因此,世尊由于无余地了知无量众生的随眠倾向等,所以这位世尊的有情世间于一切方面也都已了知。显示巴利原文
Tikkhindriyeti tikhiṇehi saddhādīhi indriyehi samannāgate. Mudindriyeti mudukehi saddhādīhi indriyehi samannāgate. Ubhayatthāpi upanissayabhūtindriyāni adhippetāni. Svākāreti sundarākāre, kalyāṇapakatike vivaṭṭajjhāsayeti attho. Yesaṃ vā āsayādayo ākārā koṭṭhāsā sundarā, te svākārā. Viparītā dvākārā. Suviññāpayeti sammattaniyāmaṃ viññāpetuṃ sukare saddhe paññavante ca, ye vā kathitaṃ kāraṇaṃ sallakkhenti, sukhena sakkā honti viññāpetuṃ, te suviññāpayā. Viparītā duviññāpayā. Bhabbe abhabbeti ettha ye ariyamaggappaṭivedhassa anucchavikā upanissayasampannā kammāvaraṇakilesāvaraṇavipākāvaraṇarahitā, te bhabbā. Viparītā abhabbā. Tasmāti yasmā bhagavā aparimāṇe satte āsayādito anavasesetvā jānāti, tasmā assa bhagavato sattalokopi sabbathā vidito.
难道不也应当了知众生有量等吗?是的,但这种了知并非为了厌离、离欲、灭尽,故此处未予采用。然而世尊对此也已善知、善决了,只因无有必要而未予宣说。因此说——显示巴利原文
Nanu ca sattesu pamāṇādipi jānitabbo atthīti? Atthi, tassa pana jānanaṃ na nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāyāti idha na gahitaṃ, bhagavato pana tampi suviditaṃ suvavatthāpitameva, payojanābhāvā desanaṃ nāruḷhaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ –
那时,世尊将少许泥土置于指甲尖上,问诸比丘:“诸比丘,你们认为如何?是我放在指甲尖上的这点泥土多,还是这大地多?”等等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kho bhagavā parittaṃ nakhasikhāyaṃ paṃsuṃ āropetvā bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, katamaṃ nu kho bahutaraṃ yo vāyaṃ mayā paritto nakhasikhāyaṃ paṃsu āropito, ayaṃ vā mahāpathavī’’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.1121).
如此示现了有情世间为遍知之后,现在为示现器世间也同样为遍知,而说“正如有情世间”等。“器世间亦为遍知”是相连接的句义。“轮围”指世界。因其被形如轮缘的轮围山完全围绕,故称为“轮围”。“三个半”即三个半百,也就是三百五十。“那由他”指一万。“所说”指所宣示。由于此大地的横向没有限量,因此仅以厚度说“此大地被说为有如此厚度”。难道各个轮围大地不是被轮围山所限定的吗?不是,因为此大地与其他轮围大地是连成一片的。如同三片叶子之间的间隙,每三个世界之间没有大地,因为那里是世界中间的地狱;而轮围山与轮围山相连之处,大地则是连成一体的。在成劫时安立的大地,也与先前已安立的大地连成一体而安立。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sattalokassapi sabbathā viditabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni okāsalokassapi tatheva viditabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yathā casattaloko’’tiādi . Okāsalokopi sabbathā viditoti sambandho. Cakkavāḷanti lokadhātu. Sā hi nemimaṇḍalasadisena cakkavāḷapabbatena samantato parikkhittattā ‘‘cakkavāḷa’’nti vuccati. Aḍḍhuḍḍhānīti upaḍḍhacatutthāni, tīṇi satāni paññāsañcāti attho. Nahutānīti dasasahassāni. Saṅkhātāti kathitā. Yasmā pathavī nāmāyaṃ tiriyaṃ aparicchinnā, tasmā ‘‘ettakaṃ bahalattena, saṅkhātāyaṃ vasundharā’’ti bahalatoyeva paricchedo vutto. Nanu cakkavāḷapabbatehi taṃtaṃcakkavāḷapathavī paricchinnāti? Na tadaññacakkavāḷapathaviyā ekābaddhabhāvato. Tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇañhi pattānaṃ antarāḷasadise tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ lokadhātūnaṃ antareyeva pathavī natthi lokantaranirayabhāvato, cakkavāḷapabbatānaṃ pana cakkavāḷapabbatantarehi sambaddhaṭṭhāne pathavī ekābaddhāva, vivaṭṭakāle saṇṭhahamānāpi pathavī yathāsaṇṭhitapathaviyā ekābaddhāva saṇṭhahati.
“安立”指下方与上方等一切方位的安住。“如是安立”即如此住立。“此处”指轮围之中。“沉入”即没入、进入而安住。“高出”即恰好高出八万四千由旬。不仅此处的高度如此,其长度与宽度也同样如此。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Saṇṭhitīti heṭṭhā uparito cāti sabbaso ṭhiti. Evaṃ saṇṭhiteti evaṃ avaṭṭhite. Etthāti cakkavāḷe. Ajjhogāḷhoti ogāhitvā anupavisitvā ṭhito. Accuggato tāvadevāti tattakameva caturāsīti yojanasatasahassāniyeva uggato. Na kevalañcettha ubbedhova, atha kho āyāmavitthārāpissa tattakāyeva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
诸比丘,须弥山王长八万四千由旬,宽八万四千由旬。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sineru, bhikkhave, pabbatarājā caturāsīti yojanasahassāni āyāmena, caturāsīti yojanasahassāni vitthārenā’’ti (a. ni. 7.66).
“须弥山王”即诸山中的最上者,或者说,山本身就是最上者,故称山王;而以“须弥”为名的山王,即是须弥山王,说的正是须弥山王。此山的东面由银所成,因此在它的光芒照耀下,东方的大海水显现如乳。南面则由蓝宝石所成,因此南方的大海水显现为蓝色,虚空也是如此。西面由水晶所成,北面由黄金所成。四大海水也由须弥山的光芒所界定:东面的银光与南面的宝石光芒汇合为一,越过海面,触及轮围山而安住;南面的宝石光芒与西面的水晶光芒汇合;西面的水晶光芒与北面的黄金光芒汇合;北面的黄金光芒与东面的银光汇合为一,越过海面,触及轮围山而安住。在这些光芒之间,便是四大海。显示巴利原文
Sinerupabbatuttamoti pabbatesu uttamo, pabbatoyeva vā uttamo pabbatuttamo, sinerusaṅkhāto pabbatuttamo sinerupabbatuttamo, sinerupabbatarājāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassa ca pācīnapassaṃ rajatamayaṃ, tasmā tassa pabhāya ajjhottharantiyā pācīnadisāya samuddodakaṃ khīraṃ viya paññāyati. Dakkhiṇapassaṃ pana indanīlamaṇimayaṃ, tasmā dakkhiṇadisāya samuddodakaṃ yebhuyyena nīlavaṇṇaṃ hutvā paññāyati, tathā ākāsaṃ. Pacchimapassaṃ phalikamayaṃ. Uttarapassaṃ suvaṇṇamayaṃ. Cattāro samuddāpi sinerurasmīhi eva paricchinnā. Tathā hi pubbadakkhiṇapassehi nikkhantā rajatamaṇirasmiyo ekato hutvā mahāsamuddapiṭṭhena gantvā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ āhacca tiṭṭhanti, dakkhiṇapacchimapassehi nikkhantā maṇiphalikarasmiyo, pacchimuttarapassehi nikkhantā phalikasuvaṇṇarasmiyo, uttarapācīnapassehi nikkhantā suvaṇṇarajatarasmiyo ekato hutvā mahāsamuddapiṭṭhena gantvā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ āhacca tiṭṭhanti, tāsaṃ rasmīnaṃ antaresu cattāro mahāsamuddā honti.
“从彼”,即从须弥山向下与向上的量,如前所述。“一半一半”,即以一半再一半。意思是:瑜干达罗山沉入大海四万二千由旬,也高出大海四万二千由旬;伊萨达罗山沉入大海二万一千由旬,也高出二万一千由旬。依此理,其余诸山亦应知为一半一半的量。正如大海次第低下,直至轮围山脚;同样,直至须弥山脚,瑜干达罗山虽仅为须弥山量的一半,也稳固地安立于大地,伊萨达罗等山亦应如此看待。正如所说:“诸比丘,大海次第低下、次第倾斜、次第深陷。”在须弥山、瑜干达罗山等山之间,有名为“沉没中间海”的海。据说那里的水极细,即使投入如孔雀羽毛般之物也无法停留,即刻沉没,因此称为沉没海。然而,据说其宽度依次与须弥山等的高出量相等。“沉入高出”即沉入与高出。“大”即巨大。显示巴利原文
Tatoti sinerussa heṭṭhā upari ca vuttappamāṇato. Upaḍḍhupaḍḍhenāti upaḍḍhena upaḍḍhena. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – dvācattālīsa yojanasahassāni samudde ajjhogāḷho tattakameva upari uggato yugandharapabbato, ekavīsati yojanasahassāni mahāsamudde ajjhogāḷho tattakameva ca upari uggato īsadharo pabbatoti iminā nayena sesesupi upaḍḍhupaḍḍhappamāṇatā veditabbā. Yathā mahāsamuddo yāva cakkavāḷapādamūlā anupubbaninno, evaṃ yāva sinerupādamūlāti heṭṭhā sineruppamāṇato upaḍḍhappamāṇopi yugandharapabbato pathaviyaṃ suppatiṭṭhito, evaṃ īsadharādayopīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘mahāsamuddo, bhikkhave, anupubbaninno anupubbapoṇo anupubbapabbhāro’’ti (cūḷava. 184; udā. 45). Sineruyugandharādīnaṃ antare sīdantarasamuddā nāma honti. Tattha kira udakaṃ sukhumaṃ morapattamattampi pakkhittaṃ patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkoti sīdateva, tasmā te sīdasamuddā nāma vuccanti. Te pana vitthārato yathākkamaṃ sineruādīnaṃ accuggamasamānapaamāṇāti vadanti. Ajjhogāḷhuggatāti ajjhogāḷhā ca uggatā ca. Brahāti mahantā.
“须弥山周围”:即环绕须弥山而住立。首先,环绕须弥山而住立的是瑜干达罗山;环绕它而住立的是伊萨达罗山。如此,一一山环绕着前山而住立,因此说“须弥山周围”。然而,在某处也有“环绕须弥山而住立着名为阿沙干那的山,环绕它而住立着名为毗那多迦的山”等另一种次第的说法,正如《尼弥本生》中所说——显示巴利原文
Sinerussa samantatoti parikkhipanavasena sinerussa samantato ṭhitā. Sineruṃ tāva parikkhipitvā ṭhito yugandharo, taṃ parikkhipitvā īsadharo. Evaṃ taṃ taṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitā ‘‘sinerussa samantato’’ti vuttā. Katthaci pana ‘‘sineruṃ parikkhipitvā assakaṇṇo nāma pabbato patiṭṭhito, taṃ parikkhipitvā vinatako nāma pabbato’’ti evaṃ aññoyeva anukkamo āgato. Tathā hi nimijātake –
大王一路行进,望见大海之中有群山沉没;
看见之后,他问御者:‘这些是什么山?’”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sahassayuttaṃ hayavāhiṃ, dibbayānamadhiṭṭhito; Yāyamāno mahārājā, addā sīdantare nage; Disvānāmantayī sūtaṃ, ime ke nāma pabbatā’’ti. (jā. 2.22.566)
尼弥大王这样问后,摩多利天子回答道:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ nimimahārājena puṭṭhena mātalidevaputtena –
尼民达罗山、毗那多迦山、阿沙干那山,皆为巍峨大山。
这些耸立于大海之中的山,次第高峻;
那是诸大王的住处,大王,您正见到的。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sudassano karavīko, īsadharo yugandharo; Nemindharo vinatako, assakaṇṇo girī brahā. ‘‘Ete sīdantare nagā, anupubbasamuggatā; Mahārājānamāvāsā, yāni tvaṃ rāja passasī’’ti. (jā. 2.22.568-569)
对此,注疏中如是说:显示巴利原文
Tattha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ idaṃ vuttaṃ –
大王,这些山中最外面的一座名为善见山,紧接其后的是迦罗毗迦山,它比善见山更高。在这两座山之间,各有一个等距的大海。迦罗毗迦山之后是伊沙驮罗山,它比迦罗毗迦山更高。它们之间也有一个等距的大海。伊沙驮罗山之后是瑜乾驮罗山,它比伊沙驮罗山更高。它们之间也有一个等距的大海。瑜乾驮罗山之后是尼民驮罗山,它比瑜乾驮罗山更高。它们之间也有一个等距的大海。尼民驮罗山之后是毗那多迦山,它比尼民驮罗山更高。它们之间也有一个等距的大海。毗那多迦山之后是阿沙干那山,它比毗那多迦山更高。它们之间也有一个等距的大海。这七座山依次从等距的大海中耸立而出,如同阶梯一般排列。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ayaṃ, mahārāja, etesaṃ sabbabāhiro sudassano pabbato nāma, tadanantare karavīko nāma, so sudassanato uccataro. Ubhinnampi pana tesaṃ antare ekopi sīdantaramahāsamuddo. Karavīkassa anantare īsadharo nāma, so karavīkato uccataro. Tesampi antare eko sīdantaramahāsamuddo. Īsadharassa anantare yugandharo nāma, so īsadharato uccataro. Tesampi antare eko sīdantaramahāsamuddo. Yugandharassa anantare nemindharo nāma, so yugandharato uccataro. Tesampi antare eko sīdantaramahāsamuddo. Nemindharassa anantare vinatako nāma, so nemindharato uccataro. Tesampi antare eko sīdantaramahāsamuddo. Vinatakassa anantare assakaṇṇo nāma, so vinatakato uccataro. Tesampi antare eko sīdantaramahāsamuddo. Ete sīdantaramahāsamudde satta pabbatā anupaṭipāṭiyā samuggatā sopānasadisā hutvā ṭhitā’’ti (jā. aṭṭha. 6.22.569).
雪山高五百由旬,有五座山峰——意思是雪山的高度为五百由旬。其中,称为“雪山”,是因为降雪时节与雪相应,有雪故称雪山;在热季时,它吐出雪,故称雪山。“山”指岩石。岩石因具有称为“节”的众多连接部分而被称为“山”,又因流出水等,以及作为水之精华等药物的基体,而被称作“山”。长宽各三千由旬——意思是其长度与宽度均为三千由旬。显示巴利原文
Yojanānaṃ satānucco, himavā pañca pabbatoti himavā pabbato pañca yojanasatāni ucco, ubbedhoti attho. Tattha himavāti himapātasamaye himayuttatāya himaṃ assa atthīti himavā, gimhakāle himaṃ vamatīti himavā. Pabbatoti selo. Selo hi sandhisaṅkhātehi pabbehi sahitattā ‘‘pabbato’’ti vuccati, pasavanādivasena jalassa sārabhūtānaṃ bhesajjādīnaṃ vatthūnañca giraṇato ‘‘girī’’ti ca vuccati. Yojanānaṃ sahassāni, tīṇi āyatavitthatoti yojanānaṃ tīṇi sahassāni āyāmato ca vitthārato cāti attho, āyāmato ca vitthārato ca tīṇi yojanasahassānīti vuttaṃ hoti.
由八万四千座山峰所庄严——即由善见峰、杂色峰等八万四千座山峰所庄严,意为美妙。此外,虽未明说,但应知此细节:此雪山周围有五百条奔流的河作为庄严,其中有七个大湖:阿耨达池、迦那文达池、罗他迦罗池、六牙池、鸠那罗池、曼达基尼池、狮子崖池,各湖长宽五十由旬,周围一百五十由旬。其中,阿耨达池被善见峰、杂色峰、黑峰、香醉峰、开拉萨峰这五座山所环抱。善见峰纯金所成,高二百由旬,山峰内弯如乌鸦嘴形,覆盖此湖而立。杂色峰由一切宝所成。黑峰由锑所成。香醉峰由石所成,内部呈绿豆色,以黑沉香等根香、旃檀等心材香、松等肤香、丁香等皮香、迦比他等薄皮香、树脂等味香、多摩罗等叶香、龙藏红花等花香、肉豆蔻等果香,一切时中皆弥漫香气,故称香醉——以此十种香而充满,覆盖种种药草,于黑半月布萨日,如炽燃的火炭般赫奕而立。显示巴利原文
Caturāsītisahassehi, kūṭehi paṭimaṇḍitoti sudassanakūṭacitrakūṭādīhi caturāsītikūṭasahassehi paṭimaṇḍito, sobhitoti attho. Apicettha avuttopi ayaṃ viseso veditabbo (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.31; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.8.19; su. ni. aṭṭha. selasuttavaṇṇanā) – ayaṃ himavā nāma pabbato samantato sandamānapañcasatanadīvicitto, yattha āyāmavitthārena ceva gambhīratāya ca paṇṇāsa paṇṇāsa yojanā diyaḍḍhayojanasataparimaṇḍalā anotattadaho kaṇṇamuṇḍadaho rathakāradaho chaddantadaho kuṇāladaho mandākinīdaho sīhappapātadahoti satta mahāsarā patiṭṭhitā. Tesu anotatto sudassanakūṭaṃ citrakūṭaṃ kāḷakūṭaṃ gandhamādanakūṭaṃ kelāsakūṭanti imehi pañcahi pabbatehi parikkhitto. Tattha sudassanakūṭaṃ sovaṇṇamayaṃ dviyojanasatubbedhaṃ antovaṅkaṃ kākamukhasaṇṭhānaṃ tameva saraṃ paṭicchādetvā ṭhitaṃ. Citrakūṭaṃ sabbaratanamayaṃ. Kāḷakūṭaṃ añjanamayaṃ. Gandhamādanakūṭaṃ sānumayaṃ abbhantare muggavaṇṇaṃ kāḷānusāriyādimūlagandho candanādisāragandho saralādipheggugandho lavaṅgāditacagandho kapiṭṭhādipapaṭikagandho sajjādirasagandho tamālādipattagandho nāgakuṅkumādipupphagandho jātiphalādiphalagandho sabbathā gandhabhāvato gandhagandhoti imehi dasahi gandhehi ussannaṃ nānappakāraosadhasañchannaṃ kāḷapakkhauposathadivase ādittamiva aṅgāraṃ jalantaṃ tiṭṭhati.
彼处即有一山窟,名为欢喜根,是独觉佛的住处。那里有三座洞窟:金窟、宝窟与银窟。其中,宝窟门前有一棵名为曼殊沙的树,高一由旬,广一由旬。凡水中、陆地的花,此树无不盛开,尤其在独觉佛来临之日。彼时,树上现起一切珍宝所成的楼阁。彼处有扫地风,将尘垢清除;有平整风,将一切宝沙铺平;有洒水风,从阿耨达池取水洒下;有香风,带来一切香树之香;有采花风,将花采下散落;有铺花风,将花铺满各处——彼处常设座位。每逢独觉佛出现之日及布萨日,一切独觉佛便聚集而坐,这是那里的常法。一位已证菩提的独觉佛来至彼处,坐于所设之座。那时,若有其他独觉佛在,他们也会即刻聚集,坐于各自的座位,入于某种定,随后出定。接着,僧团长老为使大众随喜,便问新来的独觉佛:‘您是如何证悟的?’即询问其业处,彼时他便宣说自己感兴的偈颂。应知香醉峰便是如此成为独觉佛的住处。显示巴利原文
Tattheva nandamūlakaṃ (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.35) nāma pabbhāraṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ vasanokāso. Tisso guhāyo suvaṇṇaguhā maṇiguhā rajataguhāti. Tattha maṇiguhādvāre mañjūsako nāma rukkho yojanaṃ ubbedhena, yojanaṃ vitthārena, so yattakāni udake vā thale vā pupphāni, sabbāni pupphati visesena paccekabuddhāgamanadivase, tassūparito sabbaratanamāḷo hoti. Tattha sammajjanakavāto kacavaraṃ chaḍḍeti, samakaraṇavāto sabbaratanamayaṃ vālikaṃ samaṃ karoti, siñcanakavāto anotattadahato ānetvā udakaṃ siñcati, sugandhakaraṇavāto sabbesaṃ gandharukkhānaṃ gandhe āneti, ocinakavāto pupphāni ocinitvā pāteti, santharaṇakavāto sabbattha santharati, sadā paññattāneva cettha āsanāni honti. Yesu paccekabuddhuppādadivase uposathadivase ca sabbapaccekabuddhā sannipatitvā nisīdanti, ayaṃ tattha pakati. Abhisambuddhapaccekabuddho tattha gantvā paññattāsane nisīdati. Tato sace tasmiṃ kāle aññepi paccekabuddhā saṃvijjanti, tepi taṅkhaṇaṃ sannipatitvā paññattāsanesu nisīdanti, nisīditvā kiñcideva samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhahanti. Tato saṅghatthero adhunāgataṃ paccekabuddhaṃ sabbesaṃ anumodanatthāya ‘‘kathamadhigata’’nti kammaṭṭhānaṃ pucchati, tadā so attano udānabyākaraṇagāthaṃ bhāsati. Evamidaṃ gandhamādanakūṭaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ āvāsaṭṭhānaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
开拉萨峰则为银所成。所有这些杂色峰等,皆与善见峰等高同形,覆盖着此湖。据说,所有山峰宽度皆为五十由旬,长度则如其高度,为二百由旬。它们皆依仗天众与龙众的威神之力而住立,河流于其间流淌,一切水都流入阿耨达池。日月从南方或北方运行时,光芒会从山间照临彼处;若径直而行,则光照不及,因此它得名‘阿耨达’。那里有各种宝所成的可爱石阶与石板,浴场无鱼无鳖,水清如水晶,由享乐此处的众生之共业所巧妙准备与妥善建立。佛、独觉佛、漏尽者及有神通的仙人于中沐浴,天众、夜叉等则在此作园林之嬉。显示巴利原文
Kelāsakūṭaṃ pana rajatamayaṃ. Sabbāni cetāni citrakūṭādīni sudassanena samānubbedhasaṇṭhānāni tameva saraṃ paṭicchādetvā ṭhitāni. Sabbāni pana puthulato paññāsayojanāni, āyāmato pana ubbedhato viya dviyojanasatānevāti vadanti. Tāni sabbāni devānubhāvena nāgānubhāvena ca ṭhassanti, nadiyo ca tesu sandanti, taṃ sabbampi udakaṃ anotattameva pavisati, candimasūriyā dakkhiṇena vā uttarena vā gacchantā pabbatantarena tattha obhāsaṃ karonti, ujuṃ gacchantā na karonti, tenevassa ‘‘anotatta’’nti saṅkhā udapādi. Tattha ratanamayamanuññasopānasilātalāni nimmacchakacchapāni phalikasadisanimmalūdakāni nhānatitthāni tadupabhogīsattānaṃ sādhāraṇakammunāva suppaṭiyattāni susaṇṭhitāni honti, yesu buddhapaccekabuddhakhīṇāsavā ca iddhimanto ca isayo nhāyanti, devayakkhādayo uyyānakīḷaṃ kīḷanti.
此湖四面各有一口,即狮面口、象面口、马面口与牛面口,由此流出四条大河。从狮面口流出的河岸旁狮子较多,从象面等口流出的河岸旁则象、马、牛较多。自东方流出的河,绕阿耨达池三匝右旋后,不与其他三河汇合,独沿东雪山,经由无人之路,流入大海。自西方与北方流出的河,也同样右旋后,各沿西雪山和北雪山,经由无人之路,流入大海。然而,自南方流出的河,绕池三匝右旋后,向南在石床上径直流经六十由旬,冲击山岳,腾涌而起,形成周长约三牛呼之水柱,腾空而行六十由旬,落于名为‘三闩’的岩石上,岩石被水柱之力击得粉碎。此处形成一五十由旬之大池,名为‘三闩池’。洪流冲破池岸,穿入岩石,复行六十由旬;其后突破坚地,经由暗渠,又行六十由旬;继而冲击名为‘频阇’的横山,现为如掌中五指般的五股水流,奔流而下。此河绕阿耨达池三匝右旋后所行经之处,称为‘旋恒河’;在石床上直行六十由旬之处,称为‘黑恒河’;腾空而行六十由旬之处,称为‘空恒河’;停蓄于三闩岩石处五十由旬之地,称为‘三闩池’;冲破池岸,穿入岩石行六十由旬之处,称为‘厚恒河’;经由暗渠行六十由旬之处,称为‘暗渠恒河’。以水冲击名为‘频阇’的横山,现为五股水流而奔流者,即此河。显示巴利原文
Tassa catūsu passesu sīhamukhaṃ hatthimukhaṃ assamukhaṃ usabhamukhanti cattāri mukhāni honti, yehi catasso nadiyo sandanti. Sīhamukhena nikkhantanadītīre sīhā bahutarā honti, hatthimukhādīhi hatthiassausabhā. Puratthimadisato nikkhantanadī anotattaṃ tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā itarā tisso nadiyo anupagamma pācīnahimavanteneva amanussapathaṃ gantvā mahāsamuddaṃ pavisati. Pacchimadisato ca uttaradisato ca nikkhantanadiyopi tatheva padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pacchimahimavanteneva uttarahimavanteneva ca amanussapathaṃ gantvā mahāsamuddaṃ pavisanti. Dakkhiṇadisato nikkhantanadī pana taṃ tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā dakkhiṇena ujukaṃ pāsāṇapiṭṭheneva saṭṭhi yojanāni gantvā pabbataṃ paharitvā vuṭṭhāya parikkhepena tigāvutappamāṇā udakadhārā hutvā ākāsena saṭṭhi yojanāni gantvā tiyaggaḷe nāma pāsāṇe patitā, pāsāṇo udakadhārāvegena bhinno. Tattha paññāsayojanappamāṇā tiyaggaḷā nāma mahāpokkharaṇī jātā, mahāpokkharaṇiyā kūlaṃ bhinditvā pāsāṇaṃ pavisitvā saṭṭhi yojanāni gatā, tato ghanapathaviṃ bhinditvā umaṅgena saṭṭhi yojanāni gantvā viñjhaṃ nāma tiracchānapabbataṃ paharitvā hatthatale pañcaṅgulisadisā pañcadhārā hutvā pavattati. Sā tikkhattuṃ anotattaṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā gataṭṭhāne ‘‘āvaṭṭagaṅgā’’ti vuccati, ujukaṃ pāsāṇapiṭṭhena saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhāne ‘‘kaṇhagaṅgā’’ti, ākāsena saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhāne ‘‘ākāsagaṅgā’’ti, tiyaggaḷapāsāṇe paññāsayojanokāse ṭhitā ‘‘tiyaggaḷapokkharaṇī’’ti, kūlaṃ bhinditvā pāsāṇaṃ pavisitvā saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhāne ‘‘bahalagaṅgā’’ti, umaṅgena saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhāne ‘‘umaṅgagaṅgā’’ti vuccati. Viñjhaṃ nāma tiracchānapabbataṃ paharitvā pañcadhārā hutvā pavattaṭṭhāne pana gaṅgā yamunā aciravatī sarabhū mahīti pañcadhā saṅkhyaṃ gatā. Evametā pañca mahānadiyo himavantato pabhavanti.
在六牙池(《本生义释·六牙本生注释》)中央十二由旬范围内,既无苔藓也无浮萍,唯有如宝石聚般颜色的水安住。其外有一由旬宽的纯白睡莲林环绕此水而住;其外有一由旬宽的纯青睡莲林环绕;此后依次是各宽一由旬的红睡莲林、白睡莲林、红莲花林、白莲花林、白拘物头林,层层环绕前者。这七林之外,有一由旬宽的杂色林,由前述白睡莲等一切花混杂而成,环绕而立。其外有一由旬宽的红稻林,水深及龙腰;再往外在水边,有一由旬宽的矮丛林,散布着青、黄、红、白诸色芳香细妙之花——如此,这十座林各宽一由旬。之后是小豆林、大豆林、绿豆林;再外是黄瓜、甜瓜、葫芦、南瓜藤林;其后是高如槟榔树的甘蔗林;其后是果如象牙大的芭蕉林;其后是沙罗林;其外是果如瓮大的波罗蜜林;其后是甘果芒果林;其后是酸角林;其后是象耳林;其后是杂大丛林;最后是竹林。竹林之外,有七重山环绕而住。从最外围算起,第一重名小黑山,第二重名大黑山,其后名水触山,其后名月触山,其后名日触山,其后名宝触山,第七重名金触山。此山高七由旬,围绕六牙池,如钵口之沿般安立。其内侧一面呈金色。显示巴利原文
Chaddantadahassa pana (jā. aṭṭha. 5.16.chaddantajātakavaṇṇanā) majjhe dvādasayojanappamāṇe ṭhāne sevālo vā paṇakaṃ vā natthi, maṇikkhandhavaṇṇaṃ udakameva santiṭṭhati, tadanantaraṃ yojanavitthataṃ suddhakallahāravanaṃ taṃ udakaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitaṃ, tadanantaraṃ yojanavitthatameva suddhanīluppalavanaṃ taṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitaṃ, yojanayojanavitthatāneva rattuppalasetuppalarattapadumasetapadumakumudavanāni purimaṃ purimaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitāni, imesaṃ pana sattannaṃ vanānaṃ anantaraṃ sabbesampi kallahārādīnaṃ vasena vomissakavanaṃ yojanavitthatameva tāni parikkhipitvā ṭhitaṃ, tadanantaraṃ nāgānaṃ kaṭippamāṇe udake yojanavitthatameva rattasālivanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ udakapariyante nīlapītalohitodātasurabhisukhumakusumasamākiṇṇaṃ khuddakagacchavananti imāni dasa vanāni yojanayojanavitthatāneva. Tato khuddakarājamāsamahārājamāsamuggavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ tipusaeḷālukaalābukumbhaṇḍavallivanāni, tato pūgarukkhappamāṇaṃ ucchuvanaṃ, tato hatthidantappamāṇaphalaṃ kadalivanaṃ, tato sālavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ cāṭippamāṇaphalaṃ panasavanaṃ, tato madhuraphalaṃ ambavanaṃ, tato ciñcavanaṃ, tato kapiṭṭhavanaṃ, tato vomissako mahāvanasaṇḍo, tato veṇuvanaṃ, veṇuvanaṃ pana parikkhipitvā satta pabbatā ṭhitā, tesaṃ bāhirantato paṭṭhāya paṭhamo cūḷakāḷapabbato nāma, dutiyo mahākāḷapabbato nāma, tato udakapassapabbato nāma, tato candapassapabbato nāma, tato sūriyapassapabbato nāma, tato maṇipassapabbato nāma, sattamo suvaṇṇapassapabbato nāma. So ubbedhato sattayojaniko chaddantadahaṃ parikkhipitvā pattassa mukhavaṭṭi viya ṭhito. Tassa abbhantarimapassaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ, tato nikkhantena obhāsena chaddantadaho samuggatabālasūriyo viya hoti. Bāhirimapabbatesu pana eko ubbedhato cha yojanāni, eko pañca, eko cattāri, eko tīṇi, eko dve, eko yojanaṃ.
如此,在那七山环绕之池的东北角,水风吹拂之处,有一棵大榕树。其树干周长五由旬,高七由旬。四方各有一条枝干,各长六由旬;向上伸展的枝干也长六由旬。这样,这棵树从根部算起,高达十三由旬;枝干从这端到那端,宽广十二由旬;有八千条下垂的气根庄严,犹如摩尼宝珠山般耀目安立。在六牙池的西面,金山上有一个十二由旬的金洞。六牙龙王在雨季时,有八千条龙围绕,住于金洞之中;在热季时,则承受水风,住于大榕树根下的气根之间。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sattapabbataparikkhittassa pana tassa dahassa pubbuttarakaṇṇe udakavātappaharaṇokāse mahānigrodharukkho, tassa khandho parikkhepato pañcayojaniko, ubbedhato sattayojaniko. Catūsu disāsu catasso sākhāyo chachayojanikā, uddhaṃ uggatasākhāpi chayojanikāva. Iti so mūlato paṭṭhāya ubbedhena terasayojaniko sākhānaṃ orimantato yāva pārimantā dvādasayojaniko aṭṭhahi pārohasahassehi paṭimaṇḍito muṇḍamaṇipabbato viya vilāsamāno tiṭṭhati. Chaddantadahassa pana pacchimadisābhāge suvaṇṇapabbate dvādasayojanikā kañcanaguhā. Chaddanto nāgarājā vassāratte aṭṭhasahassanāgaparivuto kañcanaguhāyaṃ vasati, gimhakāle udakavātaṃ sampaṭicchamāno mahānigrodhamūle pārohantare tiṭṭhati.
在曼陀迦尼河中央约二十五由旬处,没有苔藓或浮萍,唯有水晶般清澈的水。从此往后,在龙齐腰深的水中,有一片宽半由旬的白莲林环绕着那片水域。那里的藕根如犁头般大,藕茎如大鼓面般大。每一节藕茎中都有约一阿罗迦量的乳汁。莲花盛开时,风吹花粉条落在莲叶上,水滴溅于其上,经日晒成熟,如同煮熟的铁丸一般,形成莲蜜。紧接着,有同样广大的红莲林,然后是红睡莲林、白睡莲林、青莲林、红莲林、香稻林,再后是黄瓜、葫芦、南瓜等甘味藤果林,随后是同样宽半由旬的甘蔗林,那里的甘蔗有槟榔树干般粗大。接着是芭蕉林,在那里吃两根熟芭蕉就能饱足。接着是果如大罐般的波罗蜜林,再后是芒果林、阎浮林、迦毗陀林。简言之,不应说此湖中缺乏可食之果。如此,存在于这喜马拉雅山中的七大湖等的量、形状等一切差别,世尊以一切方式了知、遍知、通达,应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Mandākiniyā pana majjhe pañcavīsatiyojanamatte ṭhāne sevālo vā paṇakaṃ vā natthi, phalikavaṇṇaṃ udakameva hoti, tato paraṃ pana nāgānaṃ kaṭippamāṇe udake aḍḍhayojanavitthataṃ setapadumavanaṃ taṃ udakaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitaṃ. Tattha muḷālaṃ naṅgalasīsamattaṃ hoti, bhisaṃ mahābheripokkharappamāṇaṃ hoti. Tassa ekekasmiṃ pabbantare āḷhakappamāṇaṃ khīraṃ hoti. Padumānaṃ pupphasamaye vāto reṇuvaṭṭiṃ uṭṭhāpetvā paduminīpattesu ṭhapeti, tattha udakaphusitāni patanti, tato ādiccapākena paccitvā pakkaayoghaṭikā viya pokkharamadhu tiṭṭhati, tadanantaraṃ tāvamahantameva rattapadumavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ rattakumudavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ setakumudavanaṃ , tadanantaraṃ nīluppalavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ rattuppalavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ sugandhasālivanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ eḷālukaalābukumbhaṇḍādīni madhurarasāni valliphalāni, tadanantaraṃ aḍḍhayojanavitthatameva ucchuvanaṃ, tattha pūgarukkhakkhandhappamāṇaṃ ucchu. Tadanantaraṃ kadalivanaṃ, yato duve pakkāni khādantā kilamanti. Tadanantaraṃ cāṭippamāṇaphalaṃ panasavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ ambavanaṃ, jambuvanaṃ, kapiṭṭhavananti saṅkhepato tasmiṃ dahe khāditabbayuttakaṃ phalaṃ nāma natthīti na vattabbaṃ. Iti imasmiṃ himavati vijjamānakasattamahāsarappabhutīnaṃ pamāṇasaṇṭhānādibhedaṃ sabbameva visesaṃ bhagavā sabbathā avedi aññāsi paṭivijjhiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“十五由旬树干之围”,指树干周长达十五由旬,即其树体围量十五由旬。“名为树”者,当以“树”之名来称呼,即是树木的名称。盖树因不移动,故称为 nagā(树)。应合释为“名为树的阎浮树”。“树干枝条长五十由旬”,即其树干高五十由旬,向上及向四周伸展的枝条亦各长五十由旬。正因如此,其伸展可达百由旬,高度亦然。阎浮树从根部至枝叶顶端为五十由旬,再往上直生的枝条长五十由旬,四周每一枝条各伸展五十由旬。于诸枝条间有大河流淌,河流两岸,在阎浮果坠落之处生出金芽,金芽为河水所冲,次第汇入大海。由于生于阎浮河,此金名为“阎浮金”。显示巴利原文
Tipañcayojanakkhandhaparikkhepāti pannarasayojanappamāṇakkhandhaparikkhepā, khandhassa pariṇāho pannarasayojanappamāṇoti vuttaṃ hoti. Nagavhayāti nagasaddena avhātabbā, rukkhābhidhānāti attho. Rukkho hi na gacchatīti nagoti vuccati. Nagavhayā jambūti yojetabbaṃ. Paññāsayojanakkhandhasākhāyāmāti ubbedhato paññāsayojanappamāṇakkhandhāyāmā ubbedhato samantato ca paññāsayojanasākhāyāmā ca. Tato eva satayojanavitthiṇṇā, tāvadeva ca uggatā. Jamburukkhassa hi mūlato paṭṭhāya yāva sākhāviṭapā, tāva paṇṇāsa yojanāni, tato parampi ujukaṃ uggatasākhā paṇṇāsa yojanāni, samantato ca ekekā sākhā paṇṇāsa paṇṇāsa yojanāni vaḍḍhitāni. Tāsu pana mahantā mahantā nadiyo sandanti, tāsaṃ nadīnaṃ ubhayatīre jambupakkānaṃ patitaṭṭhāne suvaṇṇaṅkurā uṭṭhahanti, te nadījalena vuyhamānā anupubbena mahāsamuddaṃ pavisanti, tatoyeva jambunadiyaṃ nibbattattā ‘‘jambunada’’nti taṃ suvaṇṇaṃ vuccati.
“以其威力”,即以其广大的形量与住劫等威力。此阎浮树之量,正是阿修罗的质多波吒厘树、金翅鸟的绢绵树、西牛货洲的迦昙婆树、北俱卢洲的劫波树、东胜身洲的尸利沙树、忉利天的波利质多罗树。是故古人云:显示巴利原文
Yassānubhāvenāti yassā mahantatā kappaṭṭhāyikādippakārena pabhāvena. Yañcetaṃ jambuyā pamāṇaṃ, etadeva asurānaṃ cittapāṭaliyā, garuḷānaṃ simbalirukkhassa, aparagoyāne kadambassa, uttarakurūsu kapparukkhassa, pubbavidehe sirīsassa, tāvatiṃsesu pāricchattakassāti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“波吒厘树、绢绵树、阎浮树,以及诸天的波利质多罗树;”
'迦昙婆树与劫波树,与尸利沙树共为第七。'(《清净道论》1.137;《增支部注》1.1.322)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pāṭalī simbalī jambū, devānaṃ pārichattako; Kadambo kapparukkho ca, sirīsena bhavati sattama’’nti. (visuddhi. 1.137; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.322);
此处“与尸利沙树共为第七”中,“sirīsena”是具格,表示伴随义。“第七”是因词性变化而说,意为“尸利沙树是第七”。显示巴利原文
Ettha sirīsena bhavati sattamanti ettha sirīsenāti paccatte karaṇavacanaṃ. Sattamanti liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ, sirīso bhavati sattamoti attho.
“轮围石山”即轮围山。“环绕那一切而住立”,意思是环绕前面所述的一切之后,轮围石山安立,这便名为一个世间界。“ma”音是为了词语连接而加入的。“环绕那一切世间界之后,此轮围石山安立”——应如此连接。即便这样说,也应当知道轮围山也是此世间界的一部分。显示巴利原文
Cakkavāḷasiluccayoti cakkavāḷapabbato. Parikkhipitvā taṃ sabbaṃ, lokadhātumayaṃ ṭhitoti heṭṭhā vuttaṃ sabbampi taṃ parikkhipitvā cakkavāḷasiluccayo patiṭṭhito, ayaṃ ekā lokadhātu nāmāti attho. Ma-kāro padasandhivasena āgato. ‘‘Taṃ sabbaṃ lokadhātuṃ parikkhipitvā ayaṃ cakkavāḷasiluccayo ṭhito’’ti evampettha sambandhaṃ vadanti, evaṃ vuttepi cakkavāḷapabbatopi lokadhātuyevāti veditabbaṃ.
其中,即于此三界之中。月轮直径四十九由旬:纵、广、高均为四十九由旬,其周长则差三由旬不足一百五十由旬。日轮直径五十由旬:依上所说,其纵广亦为五十由旬,周长则为一百五十由旬。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tissaṃ lokadhātuyaṃ. Candamaṇḍalaṃ ekūnapaññāsayojananti ujukaṃ āyāmato vitthārato ubbedhato ca ekūnapaññāsayojanaṃ, parimaṇḍalato pana tīhi yojanehi ūnadiyaḍḍhasatayojanaṃ. Sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ paññāsayojananti etthāpi candamaṇḍale vuttanayeneva ujukaṃ paññāsayojananti veditabbaṃ, parimaṇḍalato pana diyaḍḍhasatayojanaṃ.
其中,月轮在下,日轮在上,二者间隔一由旬。从月轮下缘至日轮上缘,共一百由旬。月宫内部为宝所成,外部以银覆之,内外皆悉清凉。日宫内部为金所成,外部以水晶覆之,内外皆悉炎热。月亮纵向运行迟缓。于朔日,它与太阳同行,此后日渐落后,至满月时已落后半程;其横向运行则迅疾。是故,月亮在一月之中,时而见于南,时而见于北。月亮两侧有星宿运行,月亮如母牛近犊般趋近诸星宿;而星宿不脱其位,各依自轨而行。太阳纵向运行迅疾,横向运行迟缓。横向运行,即从南至北、从北至南的运行,此运行缓慢,需六个月方完成。显示巴利原文
Tesu pana candamaṇḍalaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.121) heṭṭhā, sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ upari, antarā nesaṃ yojanaṃ hoti. Candassa heṭṭhimantato sūriyassa uparimantaṃ yojanasataṃ hoti, candavimānaṃ anto maṇimayaṃ, bahi rajatena parikkhittaṃ, anto ca bahi ca sītalameva hoti. Sūriyavimānaṃ anto kanakamayaṃ, bāhiraṃ phalikaparikkhittaṃ hoti, anto ca bahi ca uṇhameva. Cando ujukaṃ saṇikaṃ gacchati. So hi amāvāsiyaṃ sūriyena saddhiṃ gacchanto divase divase thokaṃ thokaṃ ohīyanto puṇṇamāsiyaṃ upaḍḍhamaggato ohīyati, tiriyaṃ pana sīghaṃ gacchati. Tathā hesa ekasmiṃ māse kadāci dakkhiṇato, kadāci uttarato dissati, candassa ubhosu passesu nakkhattatārakā gacchanti, cando dhenu viya vacchaṃ taṃ taṃ nakkhattaṃ upasaṅkamati, nakkhattāni pana attano gamanaṭṭhānaṃ na vijahanti, attano vīthiyāva gacchanti. Sūriyassa pana ujukaṃ gamanaṃ sīghaṃ, tiriyaṃ gamanaṃ dandhaṃ. Tiriyaṃ gamanaṃ nāma dakkhiṇadisato uttaradisāya, uttaradisato dakkhiṇadisāya gamanaṃ, taṃ dandhaṃ chahi chahi māsehi ijjhanato.
太阳在黑分布萨日与月亮一同运行后,于次日的初日,因自身运行疾速而月亮运行迟缓,便超越月轮十万由旬而行,此时月亮显现如一条细线。此后,于半月的初二日,又超越月轮十万由旬。如此日复一日,直至白分布萨日,每日超越十万由旬,月亮便逐渐增大,至布萨日成为满月。应知此处所谓逐渐增大,乃因从上方投射的日光,在下方生起的月影,随着太阳日渐远离而次第衰减,由此月轮区域看似日渐增大;因此,月亮看似逐渐增大,于布萨日即满月日,显现为圆满之轮。继而,太阳于初日疾行十万由旬,再次捕捉月轮,因月亮运行迟缓而自身运行疾速;同样,于初二日又疾行十万由旬。如此直至布萨日,每日疾行十万由旬而捕捉。于是月亮逐渐亏减,至黑分布萨日全然不现。此处所谓逐渐亏减,应依前述逐渐增大的道理而了知。然而,彼处因月影衰减而月轮看似增大,此处则因月影增长而月轮看似减小,因此月亮看似逐渐亏减,于布萨日全然不现。太阳将月亮置于下方而居于上方,月轮犹如大钵覆盖小器般被遮蔽,月影如正午的屋影般不显现。当影不显现时,月亮自身亦如远处白昼之灯,全然不现。显示巴利原文
Sūriyo kāḷapakkhauposathe candena saheva gantvā tato paraṃ pāṭipadadivase yojanānaṃ satasahassaṃ candamaṇḍalaṃ ohāya gacchati attano sīghagāmitāya tassa ca dandhagāmitāya, atha cando lekhā viya paññāyati. Tato parampi pakkhassa dutiyāya yojanānaṃ satasahassaṃ candamaṇḍalaṃ ohāya gacchati. Evaṃ divase divase yāva sukkapakkhauposathadivasā satasahassaṃ satasahassaṃ ohāya gacchati, atha cando anukkamena vaḍḍhitvā uposathadivase paripuṇṇo hoti. Anukkamena vaḍḍhanañcettha uparibhāgato patitasūriyālokatāya heṭṭhato pavattāya sūriyassa dūrabhāvena divase divase anukkamena parihāyamānāya attano chāyāya vasena anukkamena caṇḍamaṇḍalappadesassa vaḍḍhamānassa viya dissamānatāyāti veditabbaṃ, tasmā anukkamena vaḍḍhitvā viya uposathadivase puṇṇamāyaṃ paripuṇṇamaṇḍalo hutvā dissati. Atha sūriyo pāṭipadadivase yojanānaṃ satasahassaṃ dhāvitvā puna candamaṇḍalaṃ gaṇhāti candassa dandhagatitāya attano ca sīghagatitāya, tathā dutiyāya satasahassanti evaṃ yāva uposathadivasā satasahassaṃ satasahassaṃ dhāvitvā gaṇhāti. Atha cando anukkamena hāyitvā kāḷapakkhauposathadivase sabbaso na paññāyati, anukkamena hāyamānatā cettha anukkamena vaḍḍhamānatāya vuttanayena veditabbā. Tattha pana chāyāya hāyamānatāya maṇḍalaṃ vaḍḍhamānaṃ viya dissati, idha ca chāyāya vaḍḍhamānatāya maṇḍalaṃ hāyamānaṃ viya dissati, tasmā anukkamena hāyitvā viya uposathadivase sabbaso na paññāyati. Candaṃ heṭṭhā katvā sūriyo upari hoti, mahatiyā pātiyā khuddakabhājanaṃ viya candamaṇḍalaṃ pidhīyati, majjhanhike gehacchāyā viya candassa chāyā na paññāyati. So chāyāya apaññāyamānāya dūre ṭhitānaṃ divā padīpo viya sayampi na paññāyati.
然而,运行轨道有三种:羊道、龙道、牛道。其中,羊道的水令人不悦,龙道的水使龙象欢喜,牛道的水因寒暑均衡而舒适。同样,当太阳沿某道运行时,如果雨云天子因受太阳灼热逼迫而不出离自己的宫殿,耽著嬉戏而不游行,那时日宫便从常道下降而行;因为日宫下降,月宫也随之下降,月宫是随日宫而行的。因此,此道无水,与羊相应,故称为羊道。当太阳沿另一道运行时,如果雨云天子未受太阳灼热,频频出离宫殿,耽著嬉戏而四处游行,那时日宫便从常道上升而行;因为日宫上升,月宫也随之上升,月宫是随日宫而行的。所说的随行,就是同速,这是由于风轮推动着宫殿。因此,此道水多,与龙相应,故称为龙道。当太阳既不上升也不下降,只依常道而行时,雨云天子便适时、随心出离宫殿,安乐游行,由此适时降雨,世间时节均衡;以此时节均衡为因,日月的运行便与牛相应,故称为牛道。所以,当日月进入羊道时,天空一滴雨也不下。进入龙道时,天空如破裂般倾泻。进入牛道时,时节均衡得以成就。显示巴利原文
Imesaṃ pana ajavīthi nāgavīthi govīthīti tisso gamanavīthiyo honti. Tattha ajānaṃ udakaṃ paṭikūlaṃ hoti, hatthināgānaṃ manāpaṃ, gunnaṃ sītuṇhasamatāya phāsu hoti. Tathā ca yāya vīthiyā sūriye gacchante vassavalāhakadevaputtā sūriyābhitāpasantattā attano vimānato na nikkhamanti, kīḷāpasutā hutvā na vicaranti, tadā kira sūriyavimānaṃ pakatimaggato adho otaritvā vicarati, tassa oruyha caraṇeneva candavimānampi adho oruyha carati taggatikattā, tasmā sā vīthi udakābhāvena ajānurūpatāya ‘‘ajavīthī’’ti samaññā gatā. Yāya pana vīthiyā sūriye gacchante vassavalāhakadevaputtā sūriyābhitāpābhāvato abhiṇhaṃ attano vimānato bahi nikkhamitvā kīḷāpasutā hutvā ito cito ca vicaranti, tadā kira sūriyavimānaṃ pakatimaggato uddhaṃ āruhitvā vicarati, tassa uddhaṃ āruyha caraṇeneva candavimānampi uddhaṃ āruyha carati taggatikattā, taggatikatā ca samānagati nāma vātamaṇḍalena vimānassa phellitabbattā, tasmā sā vīthi udakabahubhāvena nāgānurūpatāya ‘‘nāgavīthī’’ti samaññā gatā. Yadā sūriyo uddhaṃ anārohanto adho ca anotaranto pakatimaggeneva gacchati, tadā vassavalāhakā yathākālaṃ yathāruciñca vimānato nikkhamitvā sukhena vicaranti, tena kālena kālaṃ vassanato loke utusamatā hoti, tāya utusamatāya hetubhūtāya sā candimasūriyānaṃ gati gavānurūpatāya ‘‘govīthī’’ti samaññā gatā. Tasmā yaṃ kālaṃ candimasūriyā ajavīthiṃ āruhanti, tadā devo ekabindumpi na vassati. Yadā nāgavīthiṃ ārohanti, tadā bhinnaṃ viya nabhaṃ paggharati. Yadā govīthiṃ ārohanti, tadā utusamatā sampajjati.
然而,当国王行非法时,由于国王的非法,副王、将军等,乃至所有天人与梵天也都行非法。这时,由于他们的非法,日月便运行不正。那是因为,如前所述,名为“非法”的共业恶业之力——它是多病等不可爱果报的依止——使日月被不正直的风所推动,环绕须弥山运行不正,不循正道而行。风不循正道而吹,却循非道;循非道而吹时,便摇荡空中的宫殿;宫殿被摇荡时,诸天的心便不倾向于游戏;心不倾向于游戏时,寒暑等时节便不能按时成就;时节不成就时,天便不能正确降雨:有时降,有时不降;这里降,那里不降。即使降雨,在播种时、发芽时、抽茎时、开花时、灌浆等时,雨也如此忽降忽停,以致不能随顺地利益庄稼。因此,庄稼收成不均,失去香气、味道等成就;即便放入同一器皿中的米粒,也一处生硬、一处过烂、一处均匀煮熟。食用之后,在腹中也全然不消化,或部分消化,或完全消化——只以这三种方式而熟,不能正常地消化成熟。因此,众生便多病且短寿。显示巴利原文
Yadā pana rājāno adhammikā honti, tesaṃ adhammikatāya uparājasenāpatippabhutayo sabbe devā brahmāno ca adhammikā honti, tadā tesaṃ adhammikatāya visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattanti. Tadā hi bahvābādhatādianiṭṭhaphalūpanissayabhūtassa yathāvuttassa adhammikatāsaññitassa sādhāraṇassa pāpakammassa balena visamaṃ vāyantena vāyunā phelliyamānā candimasūriyā sineruṃ parikkhipantā visamaṃ parivattanti, yathāmaggena na pavattanti. Vāto yathāmaggena na vāyati, ayathāmaggena vāyati, ayathāmaggena vāyanto ākāsaṭṭhavimānāni khobheti, vimānesu khobhitesu devatānaṃ kīḷanatthāya cittāni na namanti, cittesu anamantesu sītuṇhabhedo utu yathākālena na sampajjati, tasmiṃ asampajjante na sammā devo vassati, kadāci vassati, kadāci na vassati, katthaci vassati, katthaci na vassati. Vassantopi vappakāle aṅkurakāle nāḷakāle pupphakāle khīraggahaṇādikālesu yathā yathā sassānaṃ upakāro na hoti, tathā tathā vassati ca vigacchati ca. Tena sassāni visamapākāni honti vigatagandharasādisampadāni, ekabhājane pakkhittataṇḍulesupi ekasmiṃ padese bhattaṃ uttaṇḍulaṃ hoti, ekasmiṃ atikilinnaṃ, ekasmiṃ samapākaṃ. Taṃ paribhuttaṃ kucchiyampi sabbaso apariṇataṃ, ekadesena pariṇataṃ, supariṇatanti evaṃ tīhiyeva pakārehi paccati, pakkāsayaṃ na sammā upagacchati. Tena sattā bahvābādhā ceva honti appāyukā ca.
而在如法国王们的时代,则与前述相反,日月均匀运转,依正道而行,季节也得以平衡。日月六个月从须弥山外出而行,六个月在内运行。即:它们靠近须弥山右绕而行,六个月间从该运行轨道向外,以自身横向运行朝向轮围山而出。如此,六个月中刹那刹那以远离须弥山的方式从彼处出离,到达轮围山附近。从彼处又六个月中刹那刹那以远离的方式出离,到达须弥山附近,在内运行。它们在阿沙荼月靠近须弥山运行,此后两个月出离在外运行。在初迦提迦月行于中间,此后朝向轮围山而去,三个月靠近轮围山运行,再出离,在质多罗月行于中间,此后两个月朝向须弥山趋入,再于阿沙荼月靠近须弥山运行。在此,当知它们行于须弥山与轮围山之间的中点,以及须弥山之间的中点时,称为靠近须弥山运行,并非紧贴须弥山顶的平台;靠近轮围山运行也应依此理而了知。而当它们正直行于须弥山与轮围山的正中间时,应知为行于正中。显示巴利原文
Dhammikānaṃ pana rājūnaṃ kāle vuttavipariyāyena candimasūriyā samaṃ parivattanti, yathāmaggena pavattanti, utusamatā ca sampajjati, candimasūriyā cha māse sineruto bahi nikkhamanti, cha māse anto vicaranti. Tathā hi sinerusamīpena taṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā gacchantā cha māse tato gamanavīthito bahi attano tiriyaṃ gamanena cakkavāḷābhimukhā nikkhamanti . Evaṃ cha māse khaṇe khaṇe sineruto apasakkanavasena tato nikkhamitvā cakkavāḷasamīpaṃ pattā. Tatopi cha māse khaṇe khaṇe apasakkanavasena nikkhamitvā sinerusamīpaṃ pāpuṇantā anto vicaranti. Te hi āsāḷhīmāse sinerusamīpena caranti, tato dve māse nikkhamitvā bahi caranti. Paṭhamakattikamāse majjhena gacchanti, tato cakkavāḷābhimukhā gantvā tayo māse cakkavāḷasamīpena vicaritvā puna nikkhamitvā citramāse majjhena gantvā tato pare dve māse sineruabhimukhā pakkhanditvā puna āsāḷhe sinerusamīpena caranti. Ettha ca sinerussa cakkavāḷassa ca yaṃ ṭhānaṃ vemajjhaṃ, tassa sinerussa ca yaṃ ṭhānaṃ vemajjhaṃ, tena gacchantā sinerusamīpena carantīti veditabbā, na sinerussa aggālindaṃ allīnā, cakkavāḷasamīpena caraṇampi imināva nayena veditabbaṃ. Yadā pana sinerussa cakkavāḷassa ujukaṃ vemajjhena gacchanti, tadā vemajjhena vicarantīti veditabbaṃ.
日月如此运行,同时照亮三洲,每一方向驱散九万由旬黑暗而现光明。具体如何?当此洲日出时,东胜身洲为正午,北俱卢洲为日落,西牛货洲为中夜;东胜身洲日出时,北俱卢洲为正午,西牛货洲为日落,此洲为中夜;北俱卢洲日出时,西牛货洲为正午,此洲为日落,东胜身洲为中夜;西牛货洲日出时,此洲为正午,东胜身洲为日落,北俱卢洲为中夜。当此洲正午时,东胜身洲众生因日落只见半日轮,西牛货洲众生因日出只见半日轮。其余洲亦可类推。应知日月即以此方式同时放光于三洲。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vicarantā ca ekappahārena tīsupi dīpesu ālokaṃ karonti. Ekekāya disāya nava nava yojanasatasahassāni andhakāraṃ vidhamitvā ālokaṃ dassenti. Kathaṃ? Imasmiñhi dīpe sūriyuggamanakālo pubbavidehe majjhanhiko hoti, uttarakurūsu atthaṅgamanakālo, aparagoyāne majjhimayāmo, pubbavidehamhi uggamanakālo uttarakurūsu majjhanhiko, aparagoyāne atthaṅgamanakālo, idha majjhimayāmo, uttarakurūsu uggamanakālo aparagoyāne majjhanhiko, idha atthaṅgamanakālo, pubbavidehe majjhimayāmo, aparagoyānadīpe uggamanakālo idha majjhanhiko, pubbavidehadīpe atthaṅgamanakālo, uttarakurūsu majjhimayāmo. Imasmiñhi dīpe ṭhitamajjhanhikavelāyaṃ pubbavidehavāsīnaṃ atthaṅgamanavasena upaḍḍhaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ paññāyati, aparagoyānavāsīnaṃ uggamanavasena upaḍḍhaṃ paññāyati. Evaṃ sesadīpesupi. Iti imināva pakārena tīsu dīpesu ekappahāreneva candimasūriyā ālokaṃ dassentīti veditabbaṃ.
有时与之不同,则仅同时照亮二洲。因为,若某洲因日落仅见半日轮,日落之后便不复见,也就不再放光,唯余二洲同时放光。每一方驱散九万由旬黑暗之理,亦可依此类推。如此洲正午之时,东胜身洲因日落见半日轮,即于东胜身洲驱散九万由旬黑暗而放光;西牛货洲因日出,亦仅见半日轮。东胜身洲日落后便不再见,则仅在二洲遍处驱散黑暗而放光;西牛货洲日出时,亦在二洲遍处驱散黑暗而放光。显示巴利原文
Ito aññathā pana dvīsu eva dīpesu ekappahāreneva ālokaṃ dassenti. Yasmiñhi dīpe atthaṅgamanavasena upaḍḍhaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ paññāyati, atthaṅgamite tattha na paññāyati, ālokaṃ na dasseti, dvīsu eva dīpesu ekappahārena ubhayaṃ. Ekekāya disāya nava nava yojanasatasahassāni andhakāravidhamanampi imināva nayena daṭṭhabbaṃ. Imasmiñhi dīpe ṭhitamajjhanhikavelāyaṃ pubbavidehavāsīnaṃ atthaṅgamanavasena upaḍḍhaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ paññāyatīti pubbavidehe navayojanasatasahassappamāṇe ṭhāne andhakāraṃ vidhamitvā ālokaṃ dasseti, tathā aparagoyāne uggamanavasena tatthāpi upaḍḍhasseva paññāyamānattā. Pubbavidehānaṃ pana atthaṅgamite na paññāyatīti dvīsu dīpesu sabbattha andhakāraṃ vidhamitvā ālokaṃ dasseti aparagoyānepi uggate sūriye sabbattha andhakāravidhamanato.
日月出现时,是于世间一同出现的,其中太阳先被察觉。初劫众生自身光明消失后,黑暗生起。他们恐惧惊怖,心想:‘善哉,若有其他光明生起该多好。’于是,能令大众生起勇悍心的日轮升起,因此得名‘太阳’。太阳于白昼放光后落下,黑暗复生。他们又恐惧惊怖,心想:‘善哉,若有其他光明生起该多好。’此时,似知其意,月轮升起,因此得名‘月亮’。日月如此出现之后,星辰、星宿显现,从此昼夜分明。渐次便有了月份、半月、季节、年岁。应知,日月出现之日,须弥山、轮围山、雪山及四大洲也同时出现,且唯于颇勒具那月满月之日同时出现。显示巴利原文
Pātubhavantā ca candimasūriyā ekatova loke pātubhavanti, tesu sūriyo paṭhamataraṃ paññāyati. Paṭhamakappikānañhi sattānaṃ sayaṃpabhāya antarahitāya andhakāro ahosi. Te bhītatasitā ‘‘bhaddakaṃ vatassa, sace añño āloko bhaveyyā’’ti cintayiṃsu. Tato mahājanassa sūrabhāvaṃ janayamānaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ uṭṭhahi, tenevassa ‘‘sūriyo’’ti nāmaṃ ahosi. Tasmiṃ divasaṃ ālokaṃ katvā atthaṅgamite puna andhakāro ahosi. Te bhītatasitā ‘‘bhaddakaṃ vatassa, sace añño āloko uppajjeyyā’’ti cintayiṃsu. Atha nesaṃ chandaṃ ñatvā viya candamaṇḍalaṃ uṭṭhahi, tenevassa ‘‘cando’’ti nāmaṃ ahosi. Evaṃ candimasūriyesu pātubhūtesu nakkhattāni tārakarūpāni pātubhavanti , tato pabhuti rattindivā paññāyanti. Anukkamena ca māsaḍḍhamāsautusaṃvaccharā jāyanti. Candimasūriyānaṃ pana pātubhūtadivaseyeva sinerucakkavāḷahimavantapabbatā cattāro ca dīpā pātubhavanti, te ca kho apubbaṃ acarimaṃ phagguṇapuṇṇamadivaseyeva pātubhavantīti veditabbaṃ.
又此中,注释书说:“一轮围山,长宽各十二万三千四百五十由旬。”故依此量,于轮围山中须弥山所立之处,除去八万四千由旬,直至轮围山北面部分之量,于其南方——显示巴利原文
Yasmā cettha ‘‘ekaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ āyāmato ca vitthārato ca yojanānaṃ dvādasa satasahassāni tīṇi sahassāni cattāri satāni paññāsañca yojanānī’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.1 verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ, tasmā vuttappamāṇato imassa cakkavāḷassa sinerupatiṭṭhitokāse caturāsīti yojanasahassāni parato yāva cakkavāḷapabbatā uttaradisābhāgappamāṇañca pahāya imissā dakkhiṇadisāya –
须弥山与轮围山之间,其间距之量:
五十万由旬,又六万不足千。
显示巴利原文 Sinerucakkavāḷānaṃ, antaraṃ parimāṇato; Pañca satasahassāni, sahassānūnasaṭṭhi ca. Satāni satta ñeyyāni, pañcavīsuttarāni ca;
所谓行于中道者,日轮即运行于正中。显示巴利原文
Majjhavīthigato nāma, tattha vemajjhago ravi.
从正中至须弥山,于轮围山间;
当日轮居于正中时,便处于两端之间。
就量度而言,四周与中道的圆环;
十万少十九,再加一千少三十三。
第七百一十五,应知此外更有七十五;
日轮于向南及向北之际,
正是依中道之量、呈圆相而行。
显示巴利原文 Majjhato yāva merumhā, cakkavāḷānamantare; Vemajjhago yadā hoti, ubhayantagato tadā. Majjhato yāva merumhā, cakkavāḷā ca pabbatā; Duve satasahassāni, sahassānūnasīti ca. Aṭṭhasataṃ duve saṭṭhi, yojanāni dvigāvutaṃ; Ubhato antato meru-cakkavāḷānamantare. Ekaṃ satasahassañca, sahassānūnatālīsaṃ; Navasatānekatiṃsa, yojanāni ca gāvutaṃ. Pamāṇato samantā ca, maṇḍalaṃ majjhavīthiyā; Satasahassānūnavīsa, sahassānekatiṃsa ca. Satamekañca viññeyyaṃ, pañcasattati uttaraṃ; Dakkhiṇaṃ uttarañcāpi, gacchanto pana bhāṇumā. Majjhavīthippamāṇena , maṇḍaleneva gacchati;
他如此行进时,便从下方一再下降、下降而行。显示巴利原文
Gacchanto ca panevaṃ so, oruyhoruyha heṭṭhato.
又向上方一再上升、上升,由此,他恒常行进;
因此,依其行速,那段路程对他而言是遥远的。
一千五百五十四由旬
三牛呼、十三牛呼,与三十三宝珠。
他行于外道需六个月,行于中道则需三个月;
而太阳则在须弥山附近的边道上运行。
三万三千由旬又十八由旬三迦浮陀,
这是轮围界之内,亦是诸洲之间与正中。
显示巴利原文 Āruyhāruyha uddhañca, yato gacchati sabbadā; Tato gativasenassa, dūramaddhānamāsi taṃ. Tiṃsa satasahassāni, yojanāni pamāṇato; Tasmā so parito yāti, tattakaṃva dine dine. Sahassamekaṃ pañcasataṃ, catupaññāsayojanaṃ; Tigāvutaṃ terasūsabhaṃ, tettiṃsa ratanāni ca. Aṭṭhaṅgulāni ca tiriyaṃ, gacchatekadine ravi; Chatālīsasahassāni, cha satāni tigāvutaṃ. Yojanānaṃ titālīsaṃ, māsenekena gacchati; Tenavutisahassāni, dvisataṃ sattasīti ca. Gāvutāni duve cāpi, dvīhi māsehi gacchati; Imāya gatiyā anta-vīthito vīthiantimaṃ. Gacchati chahi māsehi, timāsehi ca majjhimaṃ; Sinerusantike anta-vīthito pana bhāṇumā; Āgacchanto dvimāsehi, assa dīpassa majjhago. Tasmā sīhaḷadīpassa, majjhato meruantaraṃ; Duve satasahassāni, dvisatenādhikāni tu. Tettiṃsañca sahassāni, aṭṭhārasa tigāvutaṃ; Cakkavāḷantarañcassa, dīpasseva ca majjhato. Tīṇi satasahassāni, sahassāni chavīsati; Cha uttarāni pañceva, satānekañca gāvutanti.
同样地,此处亦当了知这一差别。显示巴利原文
Evamettha ayampi viseso veditabbo.
“三十三天宫为一万由旬”:此处,三十三位共同造作福德者生于此天,因此他们共住之处名为“三十三”,那正是三十三天,他们的住处即是三十三天宫。正如摩伽童子与同伴们在摩遮罗村命终后,往生于彼,缘此三十三位天子,此天界便得此名。或者,由于其余轮围世界中也存在六欲天界,且经中说“千四大王天、千三十三天”,故应知此仅为该天界之名称施设。而“一万由旬”,应知是就帝释城而言。如是,三十三天众,有依山而住者,有依虚空而住者,他们相续相接乃至轮围山,四大王天、夜摩天等也是如此。即使在一处天界,天众的相续也没有不周遍轮围山的。然而,这三十三天宫,应知就位于须弥山顶一万由旬之处。其东、西二门之间为一万由旬,南、北二门之间也是如此。此城确有千门,园林池沼以为庄严。显示巴利原文
Tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ dasasahassayojananti ettha tettiṃsa sahapuññakārino ettha nibbattāti taṃsahacaritaṭṭhānaṃ tettiṃsaṃ, tadeva tāvatiṃsaṃ , taṃ nivāso etesanti tāvatiṃsā, devā, tesaṃ bhavanaṃ tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ. Tathā hi maghena māṇavena saddhiṃ macalagāmake kālaṃ katvā tattha uppanne tettiṃsa devaputte upādāya assa devalokassa ayaṃ paṇṇatti jātāti vadanti. Atha vā yasmā sesacakkavāḷesupi cha kāmāvacaradevalokā atthi. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘sahassaṃ cātumahārājikānaṃ sahassaṃ tāvatiṃsāna’’nti. Tasmā nāmapaṇṇattiyevesā tassa devalokassāti veditabbā. Dasasahassayojananti idaṃ pana sakkapuraṃ sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi tāvatiṃsakāyikā devā atthi pabbataṭṭhakā, atthi ākāsaṭṭhakā, tesaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ pattā, tathā cātumahārājikānaṃ yāmādīnañca. Ekadevalokepi hi devānaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ appattā nāma natthi. Idaṃ pana tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ sinerussa uparimatale dasasahassayojanike ṭhāne patiṭṭhitanti veditabbaṃ. Tassa pācīnapacchimadvārānaṃ antarā dasayojanasahassaṃ hoti, tathā dakkhiṇuttaradvārānaṃ. Taṃ kho pana nagaraṃ dvārasahassayuttaṃ ahosi ārāmapokkharaṇīpaṭimaṇḍitaṃ.
在其中央,有帝释名为最胜殿的宫殿,高七百由旬,以高三百由旬的幢幡庄严,七宝所成。那里,金柱上饰有宝幢,宝柱上饰有金幢,珊瑚柱上饰有珍珠幢,珍珠柱上饰有珊瑚幢,七宝柱上饰有七宝幢。显示巴利原文
Tassa majjhe (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.29 maghavatthu) tiyojanasatubbedhehi, dhajehi paṭimaṇḍito sattaratanamayo sattayojanasatubbedho sakkassa vejayanto nāma pāsādo. Tattha suvaṇṇayaṭṭhīsu maṇidhajā ahesuṃ, maṇiyaṭṭhīsu suvaṇṇadhajā, pavāḷayaṭṭhīsu muttadhajā, muttayaṭṭhīsu pavāḷadhajā, sattaratanamayāsu yaṭṭhīsu sattaratanamayā dhajā.
最胜车长一百五十由旬(《相应部注》1.1.249等)。其西端为五十由旬,中间车棚为五十由旬,从车辕至车首亦为五十由旬。将此量加倍,亦说为“长三百由旬”。其上实际有一由旬之座,彼处有三十由旬之白伞盖,仅一轭即套千匹良马。其余庄严之量无有限量。其幢幡高二百五十由旬,风吹动时,发出如五支乐器之声。显示巴利原文
Diyaḍḍhayojanasatāyāmo vejayantaratho (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.249 ādayo). Tassa hi pacchimanto paṇṇāsayojano, majjhe rathapañjaro paṇṇāsayojano, rathasandhito yāva rathasīsā paṇṇāseva yojanāni. Tadeva pamāṇaṃ diguṇaṃ katvā ‘‘tiyojanasatāyāmo’’tipi vadantiyeva. Tasmiṃ yojanikapallaṅko atthato tiṭṭhati. Tattha tiyojanikaṃ setacchattaṃ, ekasmiṃyeva yuge sahassaājaññayuttaṃ. Sesālaṅkārassa pamāṇaṃ natthi. Dhajo panassa aḍḍhatiyāni yojanasatāni uggato, yassa vātāhatassa pañcaṅgikatūriyasseva saddo niccharati.
帝释有名为伊罗婆那之象,长一百五十由旬,彼亦为天子。天界中无畜生趣,故彼于出园游戏时,舍自形而成一百五十由旬之伊罗婆那象。彼化三十三首,每首以旋纹计有半由旬至一牛呼量,于一切首中央,为帝释化一名为善见之三十由旬首。其上有一十二由旬之宝帐,帐中处处竖立高一由旬之七宝幢幡。周边悬垂璎珞网,微风吹动时,发出如五支乐器、如天乐之声。帐中央为帝释敷设一由旬之宝座,帝释坐于彼处。于三十三首之每一首,各化七牙,每一牙长五十由旬。每一牙各有七莲池,每一莲池各有七莲丛,每一莲丛各有七花,每一花各有七瓣,每一瓣各有七天女舞蹈。如是,周围五十由旬处,唯于象牙之上即有舞乐集会。显示巴利原文
Sakkassa pana erāvaṇo nāma hatthī diyaḍḍhayojanasatiko, sopi devaputtoyeva. Na hi devalokasmiṃ tiracchānagatā honti, tasmā so uyyānakīḷāya nikkhamanakāle attabhāvaṃ vijahitvā diyaḍḍhayojanasatiko erāvaṇo nāma hatthī hoti. So tettiṃsakumbhe māpeti āvaṭṭena gāvutaaḍḍhayojanappamāṇe, sabbesaṃ majjhe sakkassa atthāya sudassanaṃ nāma tiṃsayojanikaṃ kumbhaṃ māpeti. Tassa upari dvādasayojaniko ratanamaṇḍapo hoti. Tattha antarantarā sattaratanamayā yojanubbedhā dhajā uṭṭhahanti. Pariyante kiṅkiṇikajālā olambanti, yassa mandavāteritassa pañcaṅgikatūriyasaddasadiso dibbagītasaddo viya ravo niccharati. Maṇḍapamajjhe sakkassa yojaniko maṇipallaṅko paññatto hoti, tattha sakko nisīdati. Tettiṃsāya kumbhānaṃ ekekasmiṃ kumbhe satta satta dante māpeti, tesu ekeko paṇṇāsayojanāyāmo. Ekekasmiñcettha dante satta satta pokkharaṇiyo honti, ekekāya pokkharaṇiyā satta satta paduminīgacchā, ekekasmiṃ gacche satta satta pupphāni honti, ekekassa pupphassa satta satta pattāni, ekekasmiṃ patte satta satta devadhītaro naccanti. Evaṃ samantā paṇṇāsayojanaṭṭhāne hatthidantesuyeva naccanaṭasamajjo hoti.
另有一处名为难陀的莲池,方圆五十由旬,也有人说有“五百由旬”。显示巴利原文
Nandā nāma pana pokkharaṇī paññāsayojanā. ‘‘Pañcasatayojanikā’’tipi vadanti.
杂色林苑方圆六十由旬,也有人说有五百由旬。该苑有千株天树庄严,欢喜苑与帕鲁沙迦苑也是如此。帝释天王为天女众所围绕,降临于这六十由旬的黄金大道上,观赏星宿,游乐于欢喜苑等处。显示巴利原文
Cittalatāvanaṃ pana saṭṭhiyojanikaṃ. ‘‘Pañcayojanasatika’’ntipi vadanti. Taṃ pana dibbarukkhasahassapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ, tathā nandanavanaṃ phārusakavanañca. Sakko panettha accharāsaṅghaparivuto saṭṭhiyojanikaṃ suvaṇṇamahāvīthiṃ otaritvā nakkhattaṃ kīḷanto nandanavanādīsu vicarati.
而名为巴利恰答卡的葛维腊拉树,周围方圆三百由旬,树干周长十五由旬,高一百由旬。其根部有一块长六十由旬、宽五十由旬、高十五由旬的般杜甘巴拉石,色泽如胜利茉莉花。此石极为柔软,帝释坐下时,半个身体陷入石中;起身后,凹陷处又恢复原状。显示巴利原文
Pāricchattako pana koviḷāro samantā tiyojanasataparimaṇḍalo pañcadasayojanapariṇāhakkhandho yojanasatubbedho. Tassa mūle saṭṭhiyojanāyāmā paññāsayojanavitthārā pañcadasayojanubbedhā jayasumanapupphakavaṇṇā paṇḍukambalasilā, yassā mudutāya sakkassa nisīdato upaḍḍhakāyo anupavisati, uṭṭhitakāle ūnaṃ paripūrati.
名为善法堂的天众会堂,长宽各三百由旬,周长九百由旬,高五百由旬。其地面为水晶所成;柱、横梁、接合处等连接构件上的猛兽形等装饰钉,为宝石所成;柱子为金所成,柱础与接合处为银所成,猛兽形像为珊瑚所成;椽子、翼墙及檐口为七宝所成;屋顶以青玉瓦覆盖,顶饰为金所成,塔尖为银所成。显示巴利原文
Sudhammā nāma devasabhā āyāmato ca vitthārato ca tiyojanasatikā, parikkhepato navayojanasatikā, ubbedhato pañcayojanasatikā, tassā phalikamayā bhūmi, thambhatulāsaṅghāṭādīsu vāḷarūpādisaṅghaṭṭanakaāṇiyo maṇimayā, suvaṇṇamayā thambhā, rajatamayā thambhaghaṭakā ca saṅghāṭañca, pavāḷamayāni vāḷarūpāni, sattaratanamayā gopānasiyo ca pakkhapāsā ca mukhavaṭṭi ca, indanīlaiṭṭhakāhi chadanaṃ, sovaṇṇamayaṃ chadanavidhaṃ, rajatamayā thupikā.
有一种名为阿萨瓦蒂的藤蔓,天众为一睹其花开,守护奉侍一千年;而于巴利恰答卡树开花时,则守护奉侍一年。从该树叶子变黄等阶段开始,他们便心生欢喜。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Āsāvatī nāma ekā latā atthi, ‘‘sā pupphissatī’’ti devā vassasahassaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ gacchanti, pāricchattake pupphamāne ekaṃ vassaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ gacchanti. Te tassa paṇḍupalāsādibhāvato paṭṭhāya attamanā honti. Yathāha –
“诸比丘,每当忉利天众的巴利恰答卡树叶子变黄之时,诸比丘,那时忉利天众便心生欢喜:‘巴利恰答卡树现在叶子变黄了,不久即将落叶了’等等。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiṃ, bhikkhave, samaye devānaṃ tāvatiṃsānaṃ pāricchattako koviḷāro paṇḍupalāso hoti, attamanā, bhikkhave, devā tāvatiṃsā tasmiṃ samaye honti ‘paṇḍupalāso dāni pāricchattako koviḷāro, na cirasseva dāni pannapalāso bhavissatī’’’tiādi (a. ni. 7.69).
当巴利恰答卡葛维腊拉树全然盛开时,周围五百由旬遍放光明,顺风则一百由旬飘送香气。巴利恰答卡树开花之时,无需攀爬,无需持钩拉弯枝条,也无需为采花准备篮筐。有断梗风起,从梗上将花吹断;有承接风承接花朵;有送入风将花送入善法天众集会厅;有清扫风清除旧花;有铺陈风将花瓣、花蕊、花须铺陈整齐。中央设有法座,那是一由旬大小的宝榻,上方撑开三由旬的白伞盖;紧接铺设帝释天王之座,而后是三十三位天子之座,再后是其余大威神力天众之座。其余天众则以花蕊为座。天众进入天众集会厅后,依次就座。那时,花粉柱从花中升起,上触顶蕊后落下,将天众们三伽乌塔大的身体涂抹得如同经过虫漆加工一般。他们的这般娱乐持续四个月才告结束。应知,世尊以一切方式了知如此具足种种成就的忉利天界。显示巴利原文
Sabbapāliphullassa pana pāricchattakassa koviḷārassa samantā pañca yojanasatāni ābhā pharati, anuvātaṃ yojanasataṃ gandho gacchati. Pupphite pāricchattake ārohaṇakiccaṃ vā aṅkusaṃ gahetvā nāmanakiccaṃ vā pupphāharaṇatthaṃ caṅkoṭakakiccaṃ vā natthi. Kantanakavāto uṭṭhahitvā pupphāni vaṇṭato kantati, sampaṭicchanakavāto sampaṭicchati, pavesanakavāto sudhammadevasabhaṃ paveseti, sammajjanakavāto purāṇapupphāni nīharati, santharaṇakavāto pattakaṇṇikakesarāni racento santharati, majjhaṭṭhāne dhammāsanaṃ hoti yojanappamāṇo ratanapallaṅko, tassa upari dhāriyamānaṃ tiyojanikaṃ setacchattaṃ, tadanantaraṃ sakkassa devarañño āsanaṃ attharīyati, tato bāttiṃsāya devaputtānaṃ, tato aññesaṃ mahesakkhadevatānaṃ. Aññesaṃ devatānaṃ pana pupphakaṇṇikāva āsanaṃ hoti. Devā devasabhaṃ pavisitvā nisīdanti. Tato pupphehi reṇuvaṭṭi uggantvā upari kaṇṇikaṃ āhacca nipatamānā devatānaṃ tigāvutappamāṇaṃ attabhāvaṃ lākhāparikammasajjitaṃ viya karoti, tesaṃ sā kīḷā catūhi māsehi pariyosānaṃ gacchati. Iti imāhi sampattīhi samannāgataṃ tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ bhagavā sabbathā avedīti veditabbaṃ.
同样,关于阿修罗界:此处,“不闪耀、不统治、不发光如同天众者,是阿修罗”。“天众”名为“修罗”,与之敌对者,即称为阿修罗。据说,帝释往昔在摩遮拉村是一位名叫摩诃的青年,带领三十三人行善,圆满七种义务后,于该处命终,与随从一同生于天界。原先住于此处的天众说:“外来天子们来了,我们应当款待。”便献上天界莲花,并以半国相邀。帝释对半国并不满足。于是原住天众说:“我们为外来天子们准备香酒作为款待。”帝释向自己的随从示意:“诸位,不要喝香酒,只做出喝的样子即可。”他们便照做了。原住天众用金杯献上香酒,尽情饮用,醉后纷纷倒在金地上睡去。帝释说:“抓住这些恶徒,赶走这些恶徒!”命人抓住他们的脚,将他们扔到须弥山脚下。凭借帝释的福德威力,那些随从也全都落于该处。那时,由于他们的业与时节因缘,在须弥山下方一万由旬处,形成了阿修罗界,有如同巴利恰答卡树遮蔽般的彩绘帕塔莉树作为庄严。帝释为使他们在返回后不再前来,设置了防护。关于此事,有言:显示巴利原文
Tathā asurabhavananti ettha devā viya na suranti na īsaranti na virocantīti asurā. Surā nāma devā, tesaṃ paṭipakkhāti vā asurā. Sakko kira macalagāmake magho nāma māṇavo hutvā tettiṃsa purise gahetvā kalyāṇakammaṃ karonto satta vattapadāni pūretvā tattha kālakato devaloke nibbatti saddhiṃ parisāya. Tato pubbadevā ‘‘āgantukadevaputtā āgatā, sakkāraṃ nesaṃ karomā’’ti vatvā dibbapadumāni upanāmesuṃ, upaḍḍharajjena ca nimantesuṃ. Sakko upaḍḍharajjena asantuṭṭho ahosi, atha nevāsikā ‘‘āgantukadevaputtānaṃ sakkāraṃ karomā’’ti gandhapānaṃ sajjayiṃsu. Sakko sakaparisāya saññaṃ adāsi ‘‘mārisā mā gandhapānaṃ pivittha, pivamānākāramattameva dassethā’’ti. Te tathā akaṃsu. Nevāsikadevatā suvaṇṇasarakehi upanītaṃ gandhapānaṃ yāvadatthaṃ pivitvā mattā tattha tattha suvaṇṇapathaviyaṃ patitvā sayiṃsu. Sakko ‘‘gaṇhatha dhutte, haratha dhutte’’ti te pādesu gāhāpetvā sinerupāde khipāpesi. Sakkassa puññatejena tadanuvattakāpi sabbe tattheva patiṃsu. Atha nesaṃ kammapaccayautusamuṭṭhānaṃ sinerussa heṭṭhimatale dasayojanasahassaṃ asurabhavanaṃ nibbatti pāricchattakapaṭicchannabhūtāya citrapāṭaliyā upasobhitaṃ. Sakko tesaṃ nivattitvā anāgamanatthāya ārakkhaṃ ṭhapesi. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
于两座不战城之间,设立了五重防护;
持龙冠与水者,及四位大威力、令人迷醉者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Antarā dvinnaṃ ayujjhapurānaṃ, pañcavidhā ṭhapitā abhirakkhā; Uragakaroṭipayassa ca hārī, madanayutā caturo ca mahatthā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.247; jā. aṭṭha. 1.1.31);
这里,“两座不战城之间”,是指天城与阿修罗城之间。据说有两座城,因无法以战争夺取,故得名为“不战城”。当阿修罗势力强盛时,天人便逃入天城,关闭城门;纵有十万阿修罗,也无可奈何。当天人势力强盛时,阿修罗便逃入阿修罗城,关闭城门;纵有十万帝释,也无能为力。因此,这两座城称为“不战城”。在它们之间,帝释于龙等五处设置了守卫。其中,“蛇”指龙。龙在水中力大,故在须弥山的第一层阶台,设置它们的守卫。据说须弥山四周有四层阶台,各厚广五千由旬,由龙、金翅鸟、鸠槃荼、夜叉为守护忉利天宫而安住。据说它们占据了须弥山的一半,这些即是须弥山的阶台和腰带。“颅”指金翅鸟,据说它们的饮食名为“颅”,因此得名,在第二层阶台设置它们的守卫。“饮乳者”指鸠槃荼,据说是施主罗刹,在第三层阶台设置它们的守卫。“迷醉者”指夜叉,据说行踪不定、好战,在第四层阶台设置它们的守卫。“四大伟业者”即四大王。他们因在须弥山四方、持双山等五百小岛所围绕的大洲中,所应治理的广大事业,而称为“大业者”。显示巴利原文
Tattha dvinnaṃ ayujjhapurānanti dvinnaṃ devāsuranagarānaṃ antarāti attho. Dve kira nagarāni yuddhena gahetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya ayujjhapurāni nāma jātāni. Yadā hi asurā balavanto honti, atha devehi palāyitvā devanagaraṃ pavisitvā dvāre pihite asurānaṃ satasahassampi kiñci kātuṃ na sakkoti. Yadā devā balavanto honti, atha asurehi palāyitvā asuranagaraṃ pavisitvā dvāre pihite sakkānaṃ satasahassampi kiñci kātuṃ na sakkoti. Iti imāni dve nagarāni ayujjhapurāni nāma. Tesaṃ antarā etesu uragādīsu pañcasu ṭhānesu sakkena ārakkhā ṭhapitā. Tattha uragasaddena nāgā gahitā. Te udake mahabbalā honti, tasmā sinerussa paṭhamālinde etesaṃ ārakkhā. Sinerussa kira samantato bahalato puthulato ca pañcayojanasahassaparimāṇāni cattāri paribhaṇḍāni tāvatiṃsabhavanassa ārakkhāya nāgehi garuḷehi kumbhaṇḍehi yakkhehi ca adhiṭṭhitāni. Tehi kira sinerussa upaḍḍhaṃ pariyādinnaṃ, etāniyeva ca sinerussa ālindāni mekhalāni ca vuccanti. Karoṭisaddena supaṇṇā gahitā. Tesaṃ kira karoṭi nāma pānabhojanaṃ, tena nāmaṃ labhiṃsu, dutiyālinde tesaṃ ārakkhā. Payassahārīsaddena kumbhaṇḍā gahitā. Dānavarakkhasā kira te, tatiyālinde tesaṃ ārakkhā. Madanayutasaddena yakkhā gahitā. Visamacārino kira te yuddhasoṇḍā, catutthālinde tesaṃ ārakkhā. Caturo ca mahatthāti cattāro mahārājāno vuttā. Te hi sinerussa tasmiṃ tasmiṃ passe yugandharādīsu pañcasataparittadīpaparivāre mahādīpe ca sāsitabbassa mahato atthassa vasena ‘‘mahatthā’’ti vuccanti, pañcamālinde tesaṃ ārakkhā.
然而,那些阿修罗在寿命、容貌、名声、财富方面,与忉利天众相似。因此,他们不辨中间地带,当波吒厘花盛开时,心想:“这不是天城——那里的波利质多树正在开花,这里却是花波吒厘。我们被老帝释灌酒欺骗,天城也没夺得。走,我们与他交战!”于是他们登上象、马、车乘,手持金、银、宝石盾牌,整装待战,敲响阿修罗战鼓,分开大海之水,从中涌涌而出。他们如同白蚁涌出蚁冢一般,开始攀登须弥山。尔后,他们首先与龙交战。然而在那场战斗中,没有任何人的皮肤或肉被割裂,也无流血,仅仅如同孩童玩木羊游戏,只是互相恐吓而已。纵有百千亿龙与之战斗,也只是将他们逼回阿修罗城,然后便退回。但若阿修罗势力强盛,龙便退却,在第二层阶台与金翅鸟会合一处战斗。金翅鸟等也是如此。当阿修罗击破那五处据点时,那五支力量即使集结一处,也会退却。于是四大王便前往向帝释报告情况。帝释听了他们的话,登上宽一百五十由旬的胜利车,或亲自出阵,或派遣一个儿子。某一天,如此出阵后,以战斗击退阿修罗,将他们掷入大海,并在四门安置与自己相似的像。因此,阿修罗即使战胜龙等。显示巴利原文
Te pana asurā āyuvaṇṇayasaissariyasampattīhi tāvatiṃsasadisāva. Tasmā antarā attānaṃ ajānitvā pāṭaliyā pupphitāya ‘‘nayidaṃ devanagaraṃ, tattha pāricchattako pupphati, idha pana cittapāṭalī, jarasakkena mayaṃ suraṃ pāyetvā vañcitā, devanagarañca no gahitaṃ, gacchāma tena saddhiṃ yujjhissāmā’’ti hatthiassarathe āruyha suvaṇṇarajatamaṇiphalakāni gahetvā yuddhasajjā hutvā asurabheriyo vādentā mahāsamudde udakaṃ dvidhā bhinditvā uṭṭhahanti. Te deve vuṭṭhe vammikamakkhikā vammikaṃ viya sineruṃ abhiruhituṃ ārabhanti. Atha nesaṃ paṭhamaṃ nāgehi saddhiṃ yuddhaṃ hoti. Tasmiṃ kho pana yuddhe na kassaci chavi vā cammaṃ vā chijjati, na lohitaṃ uppajjati, kevalaṃ kumārakānaṃ dārumeṇḍakayuddhaṃ viya aññamaññaṃ santāsanamattameva hoti. Koṭisatāpi koṭisahassāpi nāgā tehi saddhiṃ yujjhitvā asurapuraṃyeva pavesetvā nivattanti. Sace pana asurā balavanto honti, atha nāgā osakkitvā dutiye ālinde supaṇṇehi saddhiṃ ekato hutvā yujjhanti. Esa nayo supaṇṇādīsupi. Yadā pana tāni pañcapi ṭhānāni asurā maddanti, tadā ekato sampiṇḍitānipi tāni pañca balāni osakkanti . Atha cattāro mahārājāno gantvā sakkassa pavattiṃ ārocenti. Sakko tesaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā diyaḍḍhayojanasatikaṃ vejayantarathaṃ āruyha sayaṃ vā nikkhamati, ekaṃ vā puttaṃ peseti. Ekasmiṃ pana divase evaṃ nikkhamitvā asure yuddhena abbhuggantvā samudde pakkhipitvā catūsu dvāresu attanā sadisā paṭimā māpetvā ṭhapeti, tasmā asurā nāgādayo jinitvā āgatāpi indapaṭimā disvā ‘‘sakko nikkhanto’’ti palāyanti. Iti surānaṃ paṭipakkhāti asurā, vepacittipahārādādayo, tesaṃ bhavanaṃ asurabhavanaṃ. Taṃ pana āyāmato ca vitthārato ca dasasahassayojananti dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā asurabhavana’’nti vuttaṃ.
于“无间大地狱与阎浮洲”此处,亦应连接“同样”一词,其意为无间大地狱与阎浮洲各为一万由旬。其中,无间大地狱内部长宽各一百由旬,地为铁、盖为铁,每面墙壁各九由旬。从东墙生起的火焰,扑向西墙,穿透之后又向外蔓延一百由旬。其余诸方亦是如此。由此,以火焰之网为边际,长宽为三百一十八由旬,周长为九百五十四由旬。连同周边的附属地狱,则为一万由旬。何以称此地狱为“无间”耶?“间”即间隙,而彼处无论火焰、众生或苦痛,皆无间隙,故称“无间”。因从东墙生起的火焰,交织蔓延百由旬,穿透墙壁后又向外蔓延百由旬,余方亦尔。如此,因火焰无有间断故为无间。在其内部百由旬处,众生犹如三管压榨机中所捣碎满装之粉末,密无间隙,不能说“此处有众生,彼处无众生”。行、住、坐、卧及受苦者之间皆无间隙,行走者不碍站立、安坐或卧倒之人。如此,因众生无有间断故为无间。于身门处,有六个与舍俱行之心及一个与苦俱行之心生起。虽则如此,犹如于舌尖放六滴蜜、复加一滴铜汁,由剧烈燃烧之力,唯铜汁得显,其余……显示巴利原文
Avīcimahānirayo jambudīpo cāti etthāpi tathā-saddo yojetabbo, avīcimahānirayo jambudīpo ca tathā dasasahassayojanamevāti attho. Ettha ca avīcimahānirayassa abbhantaraṃ āyāmena ca vitthārena ca yojanasataṃ hoti, lohapathavī lohachadanaṃ ekekā ca bhitti navanavayojanikā hoti. Puratthimāya bhittiyā acci uṭṭhahitvā pacchimaṃ bhittiṃ gahetvā taṃ vinivijjhitvā parato yojanasataṃ gacchati. Sesadisāsupi eseva nayo. Iti jālapariyantavasena āyāmavitthārato aṭṭhārasayojanādhikāni tīṇi yojanasatāni honti, parikkhepena nava yojanasatāni catupaṇṇāsañca yojanāni. Samantā pana ussadehi saddhiṃ dasayojanasahassaṃ hoti. Kasmā panesa narako ‘‘avīcī’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gatoti? Vīci nāma antaraṃ vuccati, tattha ca aggijālānaṃ vā sattānaṃ vā dukkhassa vā antaraṃ natthi, tasmā so ‘‘avīcī’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gato. Tassa hi puratthimabhittito jālā uṭṭhahitvā saṃsibbamānayojanasataṃ gantvā bhittiṃ vinivijjhitvā parato yojanasataṃ gacchati. Sesadisāsupi eseva nayo. Evaṃ jālānaṃ nirantaratāya avīci. Abbhantare panassa yojanasatike ṭhāne nāḷiyaṃ koṭṭetvā pūritatipupiṭṭhaṃ viya sattā nirantarā, ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne satto atthi, imasmiṃ ṭhāne natthī’’ti na vattabbaṃ, gacchantānaṃ ṭhitānaṃ nisinnānaṃ nipannānañca paccamānānaṃ anto natthi, gacchantā ṭhite vā nisinne vā nipanne vā na bādhenti. Evaṃ sattānaṃ nirantaratāya avīci. Kāyadvāre pana cha upekkhāsahagatāni cittāni uppajjanti, ekaṃ dukkhasahagataṃ. Evaṃ santepi yathā jivhāgge cha madhubindūni ṭhapetvā ekasmiṃ tambalohabindumhi ṭhapite anudahanabalavatāya tadeva paññāyati, itarāni abbohārikāni honti, evaṃ anudahanabalavatāya dukkhamevettha nirantaraṃ, itarāni abbohārikānīti evaṃ dukkhassa nirantaratāya avīcīti vuccati. ‘‘Ayañca avīcimahānirayo jambudīpassa heṭṭhā patiṭṭhito’’ti vadanti.
阎浮洲则长宽各一万由旬。其中,有一四千由旬之区域,因受用此地之众生福报耗竭,为水所淹,称为“海”。人类居住于三千由旬之区域,雪山则耸立于三千由旬之区域,应如此了知。显示巴利原文
Jambudīpo pana āyāmato ca vitthārato ca dasasahassayojanaparimāṇo. Tattha ca catusahassayojanappamāṇo padeso tadupabhogīsattānaṃ puññakkhayā udakena ajjhotthaṭo ‘‘samuddo’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gato. Tisahassayojanappamāṇe manussā vasanti, tisahassayojanappamāṇe himavā patiṭṭhitoti veditabbo.
于“西牛货洲七千由旬”等句中,应知为显示长度与宽度之衡量。此中,阎浮洲形如车乘,具有九十六俱胝又十万港口、五十六宝殿、九十九俱胝又十万河口,以及三次六万三千城镇。据传,阎浮洲最初产生六万三千城镇,第二次亦然,第三次亦复如是。他们合计为十万,此后又成八万九千。河口即大都市赖以存续之主要屋舍。西牛货洲形如镜,东胜身洲形如半月,北俱卢洲形如座。据传“各洲及附属岛屿居民之面貌,亦如其洲之形状”。显示巴利原文
Aparagoyānaṃ sattasahassayojanantiādīsu āyāmato ca vitthārato ca pamāṇaṃ dassitanti veditabbaṃ. Tattha jambudīpo sakaṭasaṇṭhāno, channavutiyā paṭṭanakoṭisatasahassehi chapaṇṇāsaratanāgārehi navanavutiyā doṇamukhasatasahassehi tikkhattuṃ tesaṭṭhiyā nagarasahassehi ca samannāgato. Jambudīpe kira ādito tesaṭṭhimattāni nagarasahassāni uppannāni, tathā dutiyaṃ, tathā tatiyaṃ. Tāni pana sampiṇḍetvā satasahassaṃ, tato paraṃ asīti sahassāni ca nava sahassāni ca honti. Doṇamukhanti ca mahānagarassa āyuppattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ padhānagharaṃ vuccati. Aparagoyāno ādāsasaṇṭhāno, pubbavideho aḍḍhacandasaṇṭhāno, uttarakuru pīṭhasaṇṭhāno. ‘‘Taṃtaṃnivāsīnaṃ taṃtaṃparivāradīpavāsīnañca manussānaṃ mukhampi taṃtaṃsaṇṭhāna’’nti vadanti.
在此,北俱卢洲人由福报威力所成就的这一殊胜也应了知。据说,那里各处有枝叶茂密、层层覆盖、如同楼阁般令人愉悦的树木,为那里的人们充当住所,他们安乐地居住其中。那里还有其他良木,恒时花开满枝。水池中开满莲花、白莲、香睡莲等花朵,一切时中,极其芬芳的香气四处弥漫。显示巴利原文
Api cettha uttarakurukānaṃ puññānubhāvasiddho ayampi viseso veditabbo. Tattha kira tesu tesu padesesu ghananicitapattasañchannasākhāpasākhā kūṭāgārupamā manoramā rukkhā tesaṃ manussānaṃ nivesanakiccaṃ sādhenti. Yattha sukhaṃ nivasanti, aññepi tattha rukkhā sujātā sabbadāpi pupphitaggā tiṭṭhanti. Jalāsayāpi vikasitapadumapuṇḍarīkasogandhikādipupphasañchannā sabbakālaṃ paramasugandhā samantato pavāyantā tiṭṭhanti.
他们的身体也无过长等缺陷,体形高矮、胖瘦皆匀称,不为衰老所制,故无皱纹、白发等衰相,尽其天年,敏捷、力量与勇健之美始终不减。他们依自然成熟的果实为生,不劳而获,故无农耕、经商等谋食之苦,亦无奴婢、佣人等所有。那里亦无寒、热、蚊、虻、风、日、爬虫、猛兽等危难。如同此方热季最后一月黎明时分的冷暖适中,那里一切时中气候皆如此冷暖适中,他们也全无伤害与苦恼。显示巴利原文
Sarīrampi tesaṃ atidīghatādidosarahitaṃ ārohapariṇāhasampannaṃ jarāya anabhibhūtattā valitapalitādidosavirahitaṃ yāvatāyukaṃ aparikkhīṇajavabalaparakkamasobhameva hutvā tiṭṭhati. Anuṭṭhānaphalūpajīvitāya na ca tesaṃ kasivaṇijjādivasena āhārapariyeṭṭhivasena dukkhaṃ atthi, tato eva na dāsadāsīkammakarādipariggaho atthi. Na ca tattha sītuṇhaḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapavāḷādiparissayo atthi. Yathā nāmettha gimhānaṃ pacchime māse paccūsavelāyaṃ samasītuṇho utu hoti, evameva sabbakālaṃ tattha samasītuṇhova utu hoti, na ca nesaṃ koci upaghāto vihesā vā uppajjati.
他们只食用自然成熟、不经耕种、无糠无壳、纯净芳香、米粒为果的稻谷,以无烟炭火烹煮而食。据说那里有一种名为“光石”的石头,他们将三块石头放好,把锅放在上面,石头生火烹煮食物。不另加汤菜,入口时其味随心而现。他们食用此食,便不会患癞、痈、白斑、痨病、咳嗽、癫痫、衰老等任何疾病。凡有来者,他们必施予食物,毫无悭吝之心,佛陀、独觉佛等大神通者亦前往该处接受施食。他们之中,没有驼背、侏儒、独眼、手曲、跛脚、半身不遂、肢体残缺或根器不全之人。显示巴利原文
Akaṭṭhapākimameva sāliṃ akaṇaṃ athusaṃ suddhaṃ sugandhaṃ taṇḍulaphalaṃ niddhūmaṅgārena agginā pacitvā paribhuñjanti. Tattha kira jotikapāsāṇā nāma honti, atha te tayo pāsāṇe ṭhapetvā tattha ukkhaliṃ āropenti, pāsāṇehi tejo samuṭṭhahitvā taṃ pāceti, añño sūpo vā byañjano vā na hoti, bhuñjantānaṃ cittānukūloyevassa raso hoti. Taṃ pana bhuñjantānaṃ nesaṃ kuṭṭhaṃ gaṇḍo kilāso soso kāso apamāro jaroti evamādiko na koci rogo uppajjati. Te taṃ ṭhānaṃ sampattānaṃ dentiyeva, macchariyacittaṃ nāma neva hoti, buddhapaccekabuddhādayopi mahiddhikā tattha gantvā piṇḍapātaṃ gaṇhanti. Na ca te khujjā vā vāmanā vā kāṇā vā kuṇī vā khañjā vā pakkhahatā vā vikalaṅgā vā vikalindriyā vā honti.
那里的女子不过高、不矮、不瘦、不胖、不黑、不过白,具足端严之相。她们手指纤长,指甲铜色,乳房不过度垂耷,腰肢细软,面如满月,眼眸宽广,肢体柔嫩,股如芭蕉干,齿色洁白,脐深,小腿修长,发长而青黑卷曲,臀宽丰满,体毛不稀不浓,容色美丽,触感悦适,肌肤细滑,言语柔和,佩戴种种饰物而行,一切时中犹如十六岁少女。显示巴利原文
Itthiyopi tattha nātidīghā nātirassā nātikisā nātithūlā nātikāḷikā nāccodātā sobhaggappattarūpā honti. Tathā hi dīghaṅgulī tambanakhā alambathanā tanumajjhā puṇṇacandamukhī visālakkhī mudugattā sahibhorū odātadantā gambhīranābhī tanujaṅghā dīghanīlavellitakesī puthulasussoṇī nātilomā nālomā subhagā utusukhasamphassā saṇhā sakhilasambhāsā nānābharaṇavibhūsitā vicaranti, sabbadāpi soḷasavassuddesikā viya honti.
男子亦如二十五岁之青年,子女不恋慕父母等,这是彼处的常法。那里的男女仅以七日行于欲乐,此后便如离欲者般,随心所欲而去。那里并无比世间因入胎、怀胎或生产所生之苦。婴儿犹如从红色布套中取出的金像,不为痰等所染,安然从母胎而出,这是彼处的常法。母亲生下儿子或女儿后,将其放置在众人活动之处,便无有牵挂地随意离去。此时,看见他们躺卧的男女,将自己的手指伸过去,由他们的业力,乳汁便从指中流出,婴儿以此维生。如此成长,仅数日便得气力,女孩便走向妇女,男孩便走向男子。显示巴利原文
Purisāpi pañcavīsativassuddesikā viya, na puttā mātādīsu rajjanti, ayaṃ tattha dhammatā. Sattāhikameva ca tattha itthipurisā kāmaratiyā viharanti , tato vītarāgā viya yathāsukhaṃ gacchanti, na tattha idha viya gabbhokkantimūlakaṃ gabbhapariharaṇamūlakaṃ vā dukkhaṃ vijāyanamūlakaṃ vā dukkhaṃ hoti, rattakañcukato kañcanapaṭimā viya dārakā mātukucchito amakkhitā eva semhādinā sukheneva nikkhamanti, ayaṃ tattha dhammatā. Mātā pana puttaṃ vā dhītaraṃ vā vijāyitvā tesaṃ vicaraṇakappadese ṭhapetvā anapekkhā yathāruci gacchati. Tesaṃ tattha sayitānaṃ ye passanti purisā vā itthiyo vā, te attano aṅguliyo upanāmenti, tesaṃ kammabalena tato khīraṃ pavattati, tena te dārakā yāpenti. Evaṃ pana vaḍḍhantā katipayadivaseyeva laddhabalā hutvā dārikā itthiyo upagacchanti, dārakā purise.
他们的衣服和饰物皆从如意树中产生。种种色彩斑斓、质地细软、触感舒适的衣服,悬挂在各处的如意树上。种种光芒交织、镶嵌各色宝石,并以种种花鬘工艺、藤蔓工艺、壁画工艺所严饰的头饰、颈饰、胸饰、手饰、足饰等金制饰物,亦从如意树垂下。同样,箜篌、鼓、小鼓、铜钹、螺贝、竹笛、大鼓等弦乐与吹奏乐器,亦从彼处垂挂。那里有许多果树,结出如瓮般大小的果实,味道甘美,食用后,他们七日不受饥渴所恼。显示巴利原文
Kapparukkhato eva ca tesaṃ tattha vatthābharaṇāni nipphajjanti. Nānāvirāgavaṇṇavicittāni hi vatthāni sukhumāni mudusukhasamphassāni tattha tattha kapparukkhesu olambantāni tiṭṭhanti. Nānāvidharaṃsijālasamujjalavividhavaṇṇaratanavinaddhāni anekavidhamālākammalatākammabhittikammavicittāni sīsūpagagīvūpagakaṭūpagahatthūpagapādūpagāni sovaṇṇamayāni ābharaṇāni ca kapparukkhato olambanti. Tathā vīṇāmudiṅgapaṇavasammatāḷasaṅkhavaṃsavetāḷaparivārādīni vallakīpabhautikāni tūriyabhaṇḍānipi tato olambanti. Tattha ca bahū phalarukkhā kumbhamattāni phalāni phalanti, madhurarasāni yāni paribhuñjitvā te sattāhampi khuppipāsāhi na bādhīyanti.
那里的河流极为清净,有善美之岸,令人悦意;无有淤泥,沙质河床,水不冷也不热。水面覆盖着散发芬芳的水生花朵,常年有香风吹拂。那里没有带刺的粗硬灌木和藤蔓,只有无刺且为花果所覆盖的树木;旃檀树与龙脑香树自己渗出汁液。想要沐浴的人们,将衣物和饰物放在河岸一处,便下河沐浴。沐浴完毕上岸后,各自取回自己放在最上面的衣物和饰物,不会生起“这是我的,那是别人的”这样的念头。因此,他们之间没有任何争执或争论。他们的欲乐游戏仅持续七日,之后便如离欲者一般游历。他们想在哪棵树下睡眠,那里就会出现床铺。显示巴利原文
Najjopi tattha suvisuddhajalā supatitthā ramaṇīyā akaddamā vālukatalā nātisītā nātiuṇhā surabhigandhīhi jalajapupphehi sañchannā sabbakālaṃ surabhī vāyantiyo sandanti, na tattha kaṇṭakinā kakkhaḷagacchalatā honti, akaṇṭakā pupphaphalasacchannā eva honti, candananāgarukkhā sayameva rasaṃ paggharanti. Nahāyitukāmā ca nadītitthe ekajjhaṃ vatthābharaṇāni ṭhapetvā nadiṃ otaritvā nahāyitvā uttiṇṇā uttiṇṇā upariṭṭhimaṃ upariṭṭhimaṃ vatthābharaṇaṃ gaṇhanti, na tesaṃ evaṃ hoti ‘‘idaṃ mama, idaṃ parassā’’ti. Tato eva na tesaṃ koci viggaho vā vivādo vā, sattāhikā eva ca nesaṃ kāmaratikīḷā hoti, tato vītarāgā viya vicaranti. Yattha ca rukkhe sayitukāmā honti, tattheva sayanaṃ upalabbhati.
对于死去的众生,他们不哭泣也不悲伤,将遗体装饰后便放置。随即有那样的鸟飞来,将死者带往其他岛屿,因此那里没有墓地或不净之处;而且从那里死去者,不会投生地狱、畜生道或饿鬼界。他们说:“凭借法尔成就的五戒威力,他们生于天界。”他们的寿命恒常为一千年。当知这一切,如同他们的五戒一样,是法尔成就的。显示巴利原文
Mate ca satte na rodanti na socanti, tañca maṇḍayitvā nikkhipanti. Tāvadeva ca tathārūpā sakuṇā upagantvā mataṃ dīpantaraṃ nenti, tasmā susānaṃ vā asuciṭṭhānaṃ vā tattha natthi, na ca tato matā nirayaṃ vā tiracchānayoniṃ vā pettivisayaṃ vā upapajjanti. ‘‘Dhammatāsiddhassa pañcasīlassa ānubhāvena te devaloke nibbattantī’’ti vadanti. Vassasahassameva ca nesaṃ sabbakālaṃ āyuppamāṇaṃ, sabbametaṃ nesaṃ pañcasīlaṃ viya dhammatāsiddhamevāti veditabbaṃ.
“在其之间”:指那些轮围山之间。“世界中间地狱”:世界与世界界之间的空隙、裂缝,称为世界中间;存在于那里的地狱,便是世界中间地狱。就像三个车轮或三个轮子紧密相邻放置时,其间所留的缝隙一样,每三座轮围山之间,各有一个世界中间地狱。其大小量为八千由旬,常时敞开,下方与上方皆无任何遮盖。如同下方没有大地覆盖水那样,世界中间地狱没有遮盖;上方也因没有像轮围山中的天宫,故而无所覆盖、无所遮蔽,并具足能障碍眼识生起的黑暗。据说那里因为没有光明,眼识不生。即便是能同时照亮三洲的日月,也无法在那里显现光明。因为日月在与持双山等高的虚空区域运行,在轮围山的中间运行,而世界中间地狱已超出轮围山,所以日月不在那里显现光明,因此眼识不生。然而,当一切知菩萨入胎等时,光明便会生起,那时眼识得以生起。那一天,他们互相看见,说道:“哦,原来还有其他众生投生于此!”可是这光明,连喝一碗粥的时间都持续不了,仅如闪电般刹那即逝,在人们正说着“这是什么”时,便消失了。显示巴利原文
Tadantaresūti tesaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antaresu. Lokantarikanirayāti lokānaṃ lokadhātūnaṃ antaro vivaro lokantaro, tattha bhavā lokantarikā, nirayā. Tiṇṇañhi sakaṭacakkānaṃ pattānaṃ vā aññamaññaṃ āsannabhāvena ṭhapitānaṃ antarasadisesu tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antaresu ekeko lokantarikanirayo. So pana parimāṇato aṭṭhayojanasahassappamāṇo hoti niccavivaṭo heṭṭhā upari ca kenaci na pihito. Yathā hi heṭṭhā udakassa pidhāyikā pathavī natthīti asaṃvutā lokantarikanirayā, evaṃ uparipi cakkavāḷesu viya devavimānānaṃ abhāvato asaṃvutā apihitā cakkhuviññāṇuppattinivāraṇasamatthena ca andhakārena samannāgatā. Tattha kira cakkhuviññāṇaṃ na jāyati ālokassa abhāvato. Tīsu dīpesu ekappahārena ālokakaraṇasamatthāpi candimasūriyā tattha ālokaṃ na dassenti. Te hi yugandharasamappamāṇe ākāsappadese vicaraṇato cakkavāḷapabbatassa vemajjhena vicaranti, cakkavāḷapabbatañca atikkamma lokantarikanirayā, tasmā te tattha ālokaṃ na dassentīti cakkhuviññāṇaṃ nuppajjati. Yadā pana sabbaññubodhisattassa paṭisandhiggahaṇādīsu obhāso uppajjati, tadā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Aññepi kira bho santi sattā idhūpapannā’’ti taṃ divasaṃ aññamaññaṃ passanti. Ayaṃ pana obhāso ekaṃ yāgupānamattampi na tiṭṭhati, accharāsaṅghāṭamattameva vijjobhāso viya niccharitvā ‘‘kiṃ ida’’nti bhaṇantānaṃyeva antaradhāyati.
那么,造作何种业而投生彼处的众生呢?造作了粗重、残酷、恶劣的业——即对父母及如法沙门、婆罗门犯下过失,并日复一日造作杀生等暴恶之业,便投生彼处,犹如铜掌岛的无畏盗贼、龙盗贼之类。他们的身体有三伽浮陀大,指甲长如蝙蝠。他们如同蝙蝠,用指甲钩挂在轮围山的山壁上,当爬行至彼此伸手可及之处时,便以为‘我们得不到食物了’,进而试图抓住对方啃食,结果翻身落入支撑世界的水中;当风吹击时,也如蜜果般折断堕入水中。刚一落入,便在那极咸的水中如面团般溶解,因为水极冷,没有阳光的炽热。正是针对极冷的状态,方谓极咸。因为那支撑劫的水,并非如同带来繁荣的大雨所降的持地之水,亦非毁劫之水那样可能变咸。若如是,大地亦将溶解。或者,由于其恶业之力,犹如饿鬼的平常水会变成脓血一般,那时彼水会转成咸味,因此说‘在那极咸的水中如面团般溶解’。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ pana kammaṃ katvā tattha sattā nibbattantīti? Bhāriyaṃ dāruṇaṃ garukaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ dhammikasamaṇabrāhmaṇānañca upari aparādhaṃ aññañca divase divase pāṇavadhādiṃ sāhasikakammaṃ katvā uppajjanti tambapaṇṇidīpe abhayacoranāgacorādayo viya. Tesaṃ attabhāvo tigāvutiko hoti, vaggulīnaṃ viya dīghanakhā honti. Te rukkhe vagguliyo viya nakhehi cakkavāḷapāde lagganti, yadā saṃsappantā aññamaññassa hatthapāsagatā honti, atha ‘‘bhakkho no laddho’’ti maññamānā khādanatthaṃ gaṇhituṃ upakkamantā viparivattitvā lokasandhārake udake patanti, vāte paharantepi madhukaphalāni viya chijjitvā udake patanti, patitamattāva accantakhāre udake piṭṭhapiṇḍaṃ viya vilīyanti atisītalabhāvato ātapasantāpābhāvena. Atisītalabhāvameva hi sandhāya accantakhāratā vuttā. Na hi taṃ kappasaṇṭhahanaudakaṃ sampattikaramahāmeghavuṭṭhaṃ pathavīsandhārakaṃ kappavināsakaudakaṃ viya khāraṃ bhavituṃ arahati. Tathā hi sati pathavīpi vilīyeyya, tesaṃ vā pāpakammabalena petānaṃ pakatiudakassa pubbakheḷabhāvāpatti viya tassa udakassa tadā khārabhāvappatti hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘accantakhāre udake piṭṭhapiṇḍaṃ viya vilīyantī’’ti.
‘无量’是指不可计量,‘如此之多’即无法被他人测量。世尊以无量的佛智了知:‘虚空无量,众生界无量,轮围山无量。’因为佛智本身也是无量的,所以能以佛智限定这三种无量。因为所知有多少,智就有多少;智有多少,所知就有多少。智以所知为边界,所知以智为边界。因此说‘以无量佛智了知’等。而其无量性,应知是由于通达无量所知,且在其中无有障碍而行。现在,为了总结如上所述之义,说:‘如是,世间空间也于一切方面为他所了知。’显示巴利原文
Anantānīti aparimāṇāni, ‘‘ettakānī’’ti aññehi minituṃ asakkuṇeyyāni. Tāni ca bhagavā anantena buddhañāṇena avedi ‘‘ananto ākāso, ananto sattanikāyo, anantāni cakkavāḷānī’’ti. Tividhampi hi anantaṃ buddhañāṇena paricchindati sayampi anantattā. Yāvatakañhi ñeyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakameva ñeyyaṃ. Ñeyyapariyantikaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇapariyantikaṃ ñeyyanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anantena buddhañāṇena avedī’’tiādi. Anantatā cassa anantañeyyappaṭivijjhaneneva veditabbā tattha appaṭihatacārattā. Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ nigamento āha ‘‘evamassa okāsalokopi sabbathā vidito’’ti.
而且,这里也应说明对坏劫等的了解,因此坏劫等从最初就应这样理解:坏、坏住、成、成住,这是劫的四个不可计数阶段。其中,坏灭、毁坏称为坏,正在毁坏的是不可计数劫。它实质上就是时间,应理解为依那时正在进行的诸行而有的毁坏。坏之后同样安住的时期是坏住。生成、产生或增长称为成,正在增长的是不可计数劫。它实质上也是时间,应理解为依那时正在进行的诸行而有的增长。成之后同样安住的时期是成住。其中,坏有三种:火坏、水坏、风坏。坏的三种界限是:光音天、遍净天、广果天。当劫被火毁坏时,从光音天以下被火焚烧。当被水毁坏时,从遍净天以下被水消融。当被风毁坏时,从广果天以下被风摧毁。显示巴利原文
Api cettha vivaṭṭādīnampi viditatā vattabbā, tasmā vivaṭṭādayopi ādito pabhuti evaṃ veditabbā – saṃvaṭṭo saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī vivaṭṭo vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyīti kappassa cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni. Tattha saṃvaṭṭanaṃ vinassanaṃ saṃvaṭṭo, vinassamāno asaṅkhyeyyakappo. So pana atthato kāloyeva, tadā pavattamānasaṅkhāravasenassa vināso veditabbo. Saṃvaṭṭato uddhaṃ tathāṭhāyīkālo saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Vivaṭṭanaṃ nibbattanaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ vā vivaṭṭo, vaḍḍhamāno asaṅkhyeyyakappo. Sopi atthato kāloyeva, tadā pavattamānasaṅkhāravasenassa vaḍḍhi veditabbā. Vivaṭṭato uddhaṃ tathāṭhāyīkālo vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Tattha tayo saṃvaṭṭā tejosaṃvaṭṭo āposaṃvaṭṭo vāyosaṃvaṭṭoti. Tisso saṃvaṭṭasīmā ābhassarā subhakiṇhā vehapphalāti. Yadā kappo tejena saṃvaṭṭati, tadā ābhassarato heṭṭhā agginā ḍayhati. Yadā āpena saṃvaṭṭati, tadā subhakiṇhato heṭṭhā udakena vilīyati. Yadā vāyunā saṃvaṭṭati, tadā vehapphalato heṭṭhā vātena viddhaṃsati.
然而,从范围上说,在三种坏劫时,一个佛刹会毁坏。佛刹有三种,即:诞生刹、教令刹、境界刹。其中,诞生刹以一万轮围世界为限,如来入胎等时,此范围便生震动。凡如来入胎智等智的威神力、被福果所激发而自然展现之处,这一切都称为诞生刹,即佛刹。教令刹则以百千俱胝轮围世界为限,是《宝经》《蕴护卫》《幢顶护卫》《阿吒那胝耶护卫》《孔雀护卫》等护卫经的威力所及之处。具足神通、心得自在者,站在教令刹所摄的任意轮围世界中,为自己作护卫后,即使去到其他轮围世界,也仍属于已受护卫者。若在一个轮围世界中为一切众生作护卫,则护卫的威力能遍及教令刹内的一切众生,因为那里的诸天会纳受护卫,因此称为教令刹。境界刹则无有限量。因为在无有限量的轮围世界中,如来凡有所欲知,悉皆了知,佛智随愿而转。如此,在这三种佛刹中,一个教令刹会毁坏;当其毁坏时,诞生刹必定同时毁坏。它们毁坏时是同时毁坏,安住时也是同时安住。应如此了知它们的毁坏与安住。显示巴利原文
Vitthārato pana tīsupi saṃvaṭṭakālesu ekaṃ buddhakkhettaṃ vinassati. Buddhakkhettaṃ nāma tividhaṃ hoti jātikkhettaṃ āṇākkhettaṃ visayakkhettañca. Tattha jātikkhettaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷapariyantaṃ hoti, yaṃ tathāgatassa paṭisandhiggahaṇādīsu kampati. Yattake hi ṭhāne tathāgatassa paṭisandhiñāṇādiñāṇānubhāvo puññaphalasamuttejito saraseneva paṭivijambhati, taṃ sabbampi buddhaṅkurassa nibbattanakkhettaṃ nāmāti buddhakkhettanti vuccati. Āṇākkhettaṃ pana koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷapariyantaṃ, yattha ratanasuttaṃ (khu. pā. 6.1 ādayo; su. ni. 224 ādayo) khandhaparittaṃ (a. ni. 4.67; jā. 1.2.105-106; cūḷava. 251 ādayo) dhajaggaparittaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.249) āṭānāṭiyaparittaṃ (dī. ni. 3.275 ādayo) moraparittanti (jā. 1.2.17-18) imesaṃ parittānaṃ ānubhāvo vattati. Iddhimā hi cetovasippatto āṇākkhettapariyāpanne yattha katthaci cakkavāḷe ṭhatvā attano atthāya parittaṃ katvā tattheva aññaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ gatopi kataparitto eva hoti. Ekacakkavāḷe ṭhatvā sabbasattānaṃ atthāya paritte kate āṇākkhette sabbasattānampi abhisambhuṇāteva parittānubhāvo tattha devatāhi parittānaṃ sampaṭicchitabbato, tasmā taṃ āṇākkhettanti vuccati. Visayakkhettaṃ pana anantaṃ aparimāṇaṃ. Anantāparimāṇesu hi cakkavāḷesu yaṃ yaṃ tathāgato ākaṅkhati, taṃ taṃ jānāti ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhavuttitāya buddhañāṇassa. Evametesu tīsu buddhakkhettesu ekaṃ āṇākkhettaṃ vinassati, tasmiṃ pana vinassante jātikkhettaṃ vinaṭṭhameva hoti. Vinassantampi ekatova vinassati, saṇṭhahantampi ekatova saṇṭhahati, tassevaṃ vināso saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ.
当劫被火毁坏时,最初会生起劫灭大云,在百千俱胝轮围世界降下大雨。人们欣喜,取出所有种子播种。然而,当庄稼长到仅如被牛啃食过一般大小,雷声便如驴鸣般响起,不降一滴雨,从此雨水完全断绝。世尊正是就此而说:‘诸比丘,会有那样的时节,很多年、很多百年、很多千年、很多百千年,天不降雨。’(《增支部》7.66)依靠雨水而活的众生,死后往生少光天等梵天界;依靠花果而活的天神,也是如此。如此经过漫长的时间,各处的水逐渐枯竭,随后鱼、龟等也次第死后往生梵天界。地狱众生亦是如此。其中,有人认为地狱众生在第七个太阳出现时才毁灭。显示巴利原文
Yasmiṃ samaye kappo agginā nassati, āditova kappavināsakamahāmegho uṭṭhahitvā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷe ekaṃ mahāvassaṃ vassati , manussā tuṭṭhā sabbabījāni nīharitvā vapanti, sassesu pana gokhāyitamattesu jātesu gadrabharavaṃ ravanto ekabindumpi na vassati, tadā pacchinnapacchinnameva hoti vassaṃ. Idaṃ sandhāya hi bhagavatā ‘‘hoti so, bhikkhave, samayo yaṃ bahūni vassāni bahūni vassasatāni bahūni vassasahassāni bahūni vassasatasahassāni devo na vassatī’’ti (a. ni. 7.66) vuttaṃ. Vassūpajīvinopi sattā kālaṃ katvā parittābhādibrahmaloke nibbattanti, pupphaphalūpajīviniyo ca devatā. Evaṃ dīghe addhāne vītivatte tattha tattha udakaṃ parikkhayaṃ gacchati, athānupubbena macchakacchapāpi kālaṃ katvā brahmaloke nibbattanti nerayikasattāpi. Tattha nerayikā sattamasūriyapātubhāve vinassantīti eke.
然而,没有禅定则不能往生梵天界。他们中有些被饥馑所逼,有些无力证得禅定,又如何能往生彼处呢?那是凭借在天界获得的禅定。那时,名为‘世界劝化者’的欲界天神,披头散发,面带泪痕,以手拭泪,身着红衣,现出极为骇人之相,游行于人间道路,如是宣告:‘诸位贤友,诸位贤友,从此百千年后,劫将生起,此世界将毁灭,大海洋亦将干涸,此大地与须弥山王将被焚烧毁灭,乃至梵天界,一切世界都将坏灭。诸位贤友,请修习慈心;诸位贤友,请修习悲心、喜心、舍心;请奉养母亲,奉养父亲,尊敬家族中的长者。’因为这些天神劝化、集合世间,故被称为‘世界劝化者’。据说,人们见到他们后,不论原先站着或坐着,都会生起悚惧,惊慌失措,聚集到他们附近。显示巴利原文
Jhānaṃ pana vinā natthi brahmaloke nibbatti, etesañca keci dubbhikkhapīḷitā, keci abhabbā jhānādhigamāya, te kathaṃ tattha nibbattantīti? Devaloke paṭiladdhajjhānavasena. Tadā hi ‘‘vassasatasahassassa accayena kappavuṭṭhānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti lokabyūhā nāma kāmāvacaradevā muttasirā vikiṇṇakesā rudammukhā assūni hatthehi puñchamānā rattavatthanivatthā ativiya virūpavesadhārino hutvā manussapathe vicarantā evaṃ ārocenti ‘‘mārisā mārisā ito vassasatasahassassa accayena kappavuṭṭhānaṃ bhavissati, ayaṃ loko vinassissati, mahāsamuddopi ussussissati, ayañca mahāpathavī sineru ca pabbatarājā ḍayhissanti vinassissanti, yāva brahmalokā lokavināso bhavissati, mettaṃ mārisā bhāvetha, karuṇaṃ, muditaṃ, upekkhaṃ mārisā bhāvetha, mātaraṃ upaṭṭhahatha, pitaraṃ upaṭṭhahatha, kule jeṭṭhāpacāyino hothā’’ti. Te pana devā lokaṃ byūhenti sampiṇḍentīti ‘‘lokabyūhā’’ti vuccanti. Te kira disvā manussā yattha katthaci ṭhitāpi nisinnāpi saṃvegajātā sambhamappattāva hutvā tesaṃ āsanne ṭhāne sannipatanti.
他们又是如何知道世界已住立了呢?诸师说:‘由法性所策励。’有说:‘由见到那样的相。’还有说:‘由梵天神遣使。’听闻他们的话后,大多数人与地居天人都生起悚惧,彼此心变得柔和,修习慈等福德,往生天界。在那里享用了天界的妙食之后,以风遍作遍为业处,证得禅那。据说,由于天人执取微细之触,风遍的禅那很容易成就。此外,其他恶趣众生也依后后业往生天界。因为没有后后业而流转轮回的众生是不存在的。他们也在那里同样证得禅那。如此,一切众生依凭在天界所证得的禅那之力,往生梵天界。而这只是就多数而言的。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ panete kappavuṭṭhānaṃ jānantīti? ‘‘Dhammatāya sañcoditā’’ti ācariyā. ‘‘Tādisanimittadassanenā’’ti eke. ‘‘Brahmadevatāhi uyyojitā’’ti apare. Tesaṃ pana vacanaṃ sutvā yebhuyyena manussā ca bhummadevatā ca saṃvegajātā aññamaññaṃ muducittā hutvā mettādīni puññāni karitvā devaloke nibbattanti. Tattha dibbasudhābhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā tato vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvā jhānaṃ paṭilabhanti. Devānaṃ kira sukhasamphassavātaggahaṇapaacayena vāyokasiṇe jhānāni sukheneva ijjhanti. Tadaññe pana āpāyikā sattā aparāpariyavedanīyena kammena devaloke nibbattanti. Aparāpariyavedanīyakammarahito hi saṃsāre saṃsaranto nāma satto natthi. Tepi tattha tatheva jhānaṃ paṭilabhanti. Evaṃ devaloke paṭiladdhajjhānavasena sabbepi brahmaloke nibbattanti. Idañca yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ.
然而,一些论师认为:‘恶趣众生也往生于正在毁灭的世界之外的其他世界。因为那时并非所有恶趣众生都生于色界、无色界,这是可以理解的,因为恶趣中长寿者不可能往生天界。然而,具决定邪见者,即便在世界坏灭时也绝无从地狱解脱,因此他不往生彼处,而生于轮围山之外。因为具足决定邪见者,绝无可能从有(轮回)中出离。具彼邪见者,既无天界,亦无道,故于正在毁灭的轮围之外的其他地狱往生而受苦。’问:‘轮围山之外难道不被焚烧吗?’答:‘也被焚烧。即使彼处被焚烧,他也在空中某一处受苦。’显示巴利原文
Keci pana ‘‘apāyasattā saṃvaṭṭamānalokadhātūhi aññesu lokadhātūsupi nibbattanti. Na hi sabbe apāyasattā tadā rūpārūpabhavesu uppajjantīti sakkā viññātuṃ apāyesu dīghāyukānaṃ devalokūpapattiyā asambhavato. Niyatamicchādiṭṭhiko pana vinassamānepi kappe nirayato na muccatiyeva, tasmā so tattha anibbattitvā piṭṭhicakkavāḷe nibbattati. Niyatamicchādiṭṭhiyā hi samannāgatassa bhavato vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthi. Tāya hi samannāgatassa neva saggo atthi, na maggo, tasmā so saṃvaṭṭamānacakkavāḷato aññattha niraye nibbattitvā paccati. Kiṃ pana piṭṭhicakkavāḷaṃ na jhāyatīti? Jhāyati. Tasmiṃ jhāyamānepi esa ākāse ekasmiṃ padese paccatī’’ti vadanti.
自雨断以后,经过极其漫长的时间,第二个太阳出现。当它出现时,既无法划分黑夜,也无法划分白昼。一个太阳升起,一个太阳落下,世界持续处于太阳的灼热之中。而且,与在世界住立时之前生于日宫中的太阳天子不同,坏劫的太阳中没有天子。在世界住立时,如同其他欲界天,太阳天子也修习禅那后往生梵天界。而日轮则变得光耀更盛、威光更足而运行。有些人说,那个日轮隐没后,另一个新日轮生起。当寻常太阳运行时,空中尚有云与烟焰;当坏劫的太阳运行时,天空无烟无云,一如清净的镜面。除了五大河之外,其余小河等之水都干涸了。显示巴利原文
Vassūpacchedato pana uddhaṃ dīghassa addhuno accayena dutiyo sūriyo pātubhavati, pātubhūte pana tasmiṃ neva rattiparicchedo, na divāparicchedo paññāyati. Eko sūriyo uṭṭheti, eko atthaṃ gacchati, avicchinnasūriyasantāpova loko hoti. Yathā ca kappavuṭṭhānakālato pubbe uppannasūriyavimāne sūriyadevaputto hoti, evaṃ kappavināsakasūriye natthi. Kappavuṭṭhānakāle pana yathā aññe kāmāvacaradevā, evaṃ sūriyadevaputtopi jhānaṃ nibbattetvā brahmalokaṃ upapajjati. Sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ pana pabhassaratarañceva tejavantatarañca hutvā pavattati. Taṃ antaradhāyitvā aññameva uppajjatīti apare. Tattha pakatisūriye vattamāne ākāse valāhakāpi dhūmasikhāpi vattanti, kappavināsakasūriye vattamāne vigatadhūmavalāhakaṃ ādāsamaṇḍalaṃ viya nimmalaṃ nabhaṃ hoti. Ṭhapetvā pañca mahānadiyo sesakunnadiādīsu udakaṃ sussati.
此后,又经过漫长的时间,第三个太阳出现了。它的出现,令大河也为之干涸。显示巴利原文
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena tatiyo sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā mahānadiyopi sussanti.
此后,又经过极漫长的时间,第四个太阳出现了。它的出现,使雪山中那些大河的源头——狮崖湖、曼达基尼湖、甘那蒙达湖、车匠湖、无热恼湖、六牙湖、拘那罗湖,这七座大湖全部干涸。显示巴利原文
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena catuttho sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā himavati mahānadīnaṃ pabhavā sīhappapātadaho mandākinīdaho kaṇṇamuṇḍadaho rathakāradaho anotattadaho chaddantadaho kuṇāladahoti ime satta mahāsarā sussanti.
此后,又经过极漫长的时间,第五个太阳出现了。它的出现,令大海中的水渐次消减,乃至连一节手指高的水都不复存在。显示巴利原文
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena pañcamo sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā anupubbena mahāsamudde aṅgulipabbatemanamattampi udakaṃ na saṇṭhāti.
此后,经过极为漫长的时间,第六个太阳出现。由于它的出现,整个轮围化为一团浓烟,一切湿润都被烟所耗尽。因为水界本使得地界在各处凝结而保持聚合,而此水界因第六太阳的出现而彻底灭尽。同样,百千俱胝轮围也是如此。显示巴利原文
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena chaṭṭho sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā sakalacakkavāḷaṃ ekadhūmaṃ hoti pariyādinnasinehaṃ dhūmena. Yāya hi āpodhātuyā tattha tattha pathavīdhātu ābandhattā sampiṇḍitā hutvā tiṭṭhati, sā chaṭṭhasūriyapātubhāvena parikkhayaṃ gacchati. Yathā cidaṃ, evaṃ koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷānipi.
此后,经过极为漫长的时间,第七个太阳出现。由于它的出现,整个轮围连同百千俱胝轮围成为一片火海。百由旬等高广的须弥山峰崩坏,于空中尽皆消失。那火焰生起后,蔓延至四大王天,烧尽那里的金殿、宝殿、珠殿后,又烧到忉利天宫。如此次第,乃至烧至初禅地,在那里焚尽三个梵天后,便到达光音天而止。只要还有微细的行法存在,此火便不熄灭;当一切行法灭尽时,它便如油尽之灯,连灰烬也不留地熄灭。下方虚空与上方虚空合为一体,成为一片大黑暗。显示巴利原文
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena sattamo sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā sakalacakkavāḷaṃ ekajālaṃ hoti saddhiṃ koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷehi, yojanasatikādibhedāni sinerukūṭāni palujjitvā ākāseyeva antaradhāyanti. Sā aggijālā uṭṭhahitvā cātumahārājike gaṇhāti. Tattha kanakavimānaratanavimānamaṇivimānāni jhāpetvā tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ gaṇhāti. Etenevūpāyena yāva paṭhamajjhānabhūmiṃ gaṇhāti, tattha tayopi brahmaloke jhāpetvā ābhassare āhacca tiṭṭhati. Sā yāva aṇumattampi saṅkhāragataṃ atthi, tāva na nibbāyati. Sabbasaṅkhāraparikkhayā pana sappitelajjhāpanaggisikhā viya chārikampi anavasesetvā nibbāyati. Heṭṭhāākāsena saha upariākāso eko hoti mahandhakāro.
如此,当世间安住于一个无量、空旷的状态时,为了使世界形成,天开始降雨。最初犹如中劫时期的降雪。之后,雨滴渐次如米粒、如谷粒、如绿豆、如黑豆、如枣、如余甘子、如黄瓜、如葫芦、如大瓜大小;进而如牛、如二牛、如半俱卢舍、如一俱卢舍、如半由旬、如一由旬、二由旬……乃至百由旬、千由旬大小,充满百千俱胝轮围内部,直达尚未毁坏的梵天界,而后消失。其时,水下与横向有风生起,令水凝聚,结成圆形,如同莲叶上的水珠。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ekamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ ekaṅgaṇaṃ hutvā ṭhite lokasannivāse lokassa saṇṭhānatthāya devo vassituṃ ārabhati, āditova antaraṭṭhake himapāto viya hoti. Tato kaṇamattā taṇḍulamattā muggamāsabadaraāmalakaeḷālukakumbhaṇḍaalābumattā udakadhārā hutvā anukkamena usabhadveusabhaaḍḍhagāvutagāvutaaḍḍhayojanayojanadviyojana…pe… yojanasatayojanasahassamattā hutvā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷagabbhantaraṃ yāva avinaṭṭhabrahmalokā pūretvā antaradhāyati. Taṃ udakaṃ heṭṭhā ca tiriyañca vāto samuṭṭhahitvā ghanaṃ karoti parivaṭumaṃ paduminīpatte udakabindusadisaṃ.
问:“如此巨大的水聚,如何变得稠密?”答:“因水聚为风提供了各处空隙。那水聚被风聚拢、压缩,变得稠密,逐渐消散,次第向下沉降。随着水逐渐下降,在梵天界所处的位置,梵天界便显现;在上层四欲界天之处,诸天界亦现。然而,四大王天与忉利天的宫殿因与大地相连,当时尚未显现。当水沉降到先前大地所在之处时,便生起强力风暴,那些风暴将那水聚如同封闭了门户的讲堂中的水一般,令其密不透风而阻断。甘甜之水逐渐消散时,在上方生起地味,大地犹如睡莲叶安住于水面之上。那大地具足色泽,亦具足香与味,如同无水的乳粥表面所结的薄膜。在此,应知大菩提金刚座处,于世界坏灭时最后坏灭,于世界成立时最先成立。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ tāvamahantaṃ udakarāsiṃ ghanaṃ karotīti ce? Vivarasampadānato vātassāti. Tañhissa tahiṃ tahiṃ vivaraṃ deti. Taṃ evaṃ vātena sampiṇḍiyamānaṃ ghanaṃ kariyamānaṃ parikkhayamānaṃ anupubbena heṭṭhā otarati. Otiṇṇe otiṇṇe udake brahmalokaṭṭhāne brahmaloko, uparicatukāmāvacaradevalokaṭṭhāne ca devalokā pātubhavanti. Cātumahārājikatāvatiṃsabhavanāni pana pathavīsambandhatāya na tāva pātubhavanti. Purimapathaviṭṭhānaṃ otiṇṇe pana balavavātā uppajjanti, te taṃ pihitadvāre dhammakaraṇe ṭhitaudakamiva nirussāsaṃ katvā rumbhanti . Madhurodakaṃ parikkhayaṃ gacchamānaṃ upari rasapathaviṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, udakapiṭṭhe uppalinīpattaṃ viya pathavī saṇṭhāti. Sā vaṇṇasampannā ceva hoti gandharasasampannā ca nirudakapāyāsassa upari paṭalaṃ viya. Ettha pana mahābodhipallaṅkaṭṭhānaṃ vinassamāne loke pacchā vinassati, saṇṭhahamāne paṭhamaṃ saṇṭhahatīti veditabbaṃ.
那时,最初投生于光音天梵天界的众生,因寿尽或福尽,从彼处死后化生于此。他们自身发着光,翱翔空中。在尝了那地味之后,被渴爱所征服,便用手捧取而食。此后,他们自身的光明消失,黑暗降临。他们见黑暗而生起恐惧。于是,为了消除他们的恐惧、增长其勇气,五十由旬圆满的日轮便出现了。他们见到日轮,欢喜踊跃,说道:『我们得到光明了!』又说:『此光为我们消除恐惧、增长勇气而生起,故应名为太阳。』于是为它取名太阳。显示巴利原文
Tadā ca ābhassarabrahmaloke paṭhamatarābhinibbattā sattā āyukkhayā vā puññakkhayā vā tato cavitvā opapātikā hutvā idhūpapajjanti, te honti sayaṃpabhā antalikkhacarā, te taṃ rasapathaviṃ sāyitvā taṇhābhibhūtā āluppakārakaṃ paribhuñjituṃ upakkamanti. Atha tesaṃ sayaṃpabhā antaradhāyati, andhakāro hoti. Te andhakāraṃ disvā bhāyanti. Tato tesaṃ bhayaṃ nāsetvā sūrabhāvaṃ janayantaṃ paripuṇṇapaññāsayojanaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ pātubhavati. Te taṃ disvā ‘‘ālokaṃ paṭilabhimhā’’ti haṭṭhatuṭṭhā hutvā ‘‘amhākaṃ bhītānaṃ bhayaṃ nāsetvā sūrabhāvaṃ janayanto uṭṭhito, tasmā sūriyo hotū’’ti sūriyotvevassa nāmaṃ karonti.
此后,当太阳带来白昼光明而隐没时,他们又感到恐惧,说:『我们曾经得到的光明,也已经失去了。』他们心想:『好啊,若能再得一种光明那该多好!』仿佛了知他们的心意,四十九由旬的月轮便出现了。他们见到月轮,更加欢喜踊跃,说道:『它似知我们所愿而生起,故应名为月亮。』便为它取名月亮。显示巴利原文
Atha sūriye divasaṃ ālokaṃ katvā atthaṅgate ‘‘yampi ālokaṃ labhimha, sopi no naṭṭho’’ti puna bhītā honti. Tesaṃ evaṃ hoti ‘‘sādhu vatassa, sace aññaṃ ālokaṃ labheyyāmā’’ti. Tesaṃ cittaṃ ñatvā viya ekūnapaññāsayojanaṃ candamaṇḍalaṃ pātubhavati. Te taṃ disvā bhiyyoso mattāya haṭṭhatuṭṭhā hutvā ‘‘amhākaṃ chandaṃ ñatvā viya uṭṭhito, tasmā cando hotū’’ti candotvevassa nāmaṃ karonti.
当月亮与太阳出现后,星宿等群星也显现出来。从此,昼夜得以分辨,次第有了月、半月、季节与年。就在月亮与太阳出现的那一天,须弥山、轮围山、雪山、岛屿及大海也同时显现。它们并非前后次第,而是同在颇勒具那月的满月日出现。怎么出现的呢?犹如煮粟米饭时,泡沫同时生起,有些地方高耸,有些地方低洼,有些地方平坦;同样,高耸之处成了山峦,低洼之处成了海洋,平坦之处成了岛屿。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ candimasūriyesu pātubhūtesu nakkhattāni tārakarūpāni pātubhavanti, tato pabhuti rattindivā paññāyanti, anukkamena ca māsaḍḍhamāsautusaṃvaccharā, candimasūriyānaṃ pātubhūtadivaseyeva sinerucakkavāḷahimavantapabbatā dīpasamuddā ca pātubhavanti. Te ca kho apubbaṃ acarimaṃ phagguṇapuṇṇamadivaseyeva pātubhavanti. Kathaṃ? Yathā nāma kaṅgubhatte paccamāne ekappahāreneva pubbuḷakā uṭṭhahanti, eke padesā thūpathūpā honti, eke ninnaninnā, eke samasamā, evameva thūpathūpaṭṭhāne pabbatā honti, ninnaninnaṭṭhāne samuddā, samasamaṭṭhāne dīpāti.
那时,那些众生在享用着地味。由于业的关系,他们之中有的容色美丽,有的容色丑陋。容色美丽者便轻慢容色丑陋者。因这种骄慢,那地味也随之消失,地膜出现。其后,按照同样的方式,地膜也消失了,蔓草出现。蔓草同样消失后,不耕自熟的稻米出现,无糠、无壳,芳香洁净,米粒为果。接着,容器也出现了。他们将稻米放入容器,置于石板上,火焰自生而烹煮。煮成的饭如同素馨花一般,无需佐以汤菜,想尝什么味道,饭即是那味道。当众生开始取用这种粗劣的食物后,自此便有了大小便。确实,地味、地膜、蔓草这些被享用时,如同天食一般除去饥饿,仅凭味觉便输布滋养而延续生命,因其物质微细,没有排泄物,细微到只是执持而已。而饭虽味道更增,但由于物质粗劣,便排出排泄物,产生大小便。显示巴利原文
Atha tesaṃ sattānaṃ rasapathaviṃ paribhuñjantānaṃ kammena ekacce vaṇṇavanto honti, ekacce dubbaṇṇā honti. Tattha vaṇṇavanto dubbaṇṇe atimaññanti, tesaṃ atimānapaccayā sāpi rasapathavī antaradhāyati, bhūmipappaṭako pātubhavati. Atha nesaṃ teneva nayena sopi antaradhāyati, atha padālatā pātubhavati. Teneva nayena sāpi antaradhāyati, akaṭṭhapāko sāli pātubhavati akaṇo athuso sugandho taṇḍulaphalo. Tato nesaṃ bhājanāni uppajjanti. Te sāliṃ bhājane ṭhapetvā pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhapenti, sayameva jālasikhā uṭṭhahitvā taṃ pacati. So hoti odano sumanajātipupphasadiso, na tassa sūpena vā byañjanena vā karaṇīyaṃ atthi, yaṃ yaṃ rasaṃ bhuñjitukāmā honti, taṃtaṃrasova hoti. Tesaṃ taṃ oḷārikaṃ āhāraṃ āharayataṃ tato pabhuti muttakarīsaṃ sañjāyati. Tathā hi rasapathavī bhūmipappaṭako padālatāti ime tāva paribhuttā sudhāhāro viya khudaṃ vinodetvā rasaharaṇīhi rasameva paribyūhentā tiṭṭhanti vatthuno sukhumabhāvena, na nissandā, sukhumabhāveneva gahaṇindhanameva ca hoti. Odano pana paribhutto rasaṃ vaḍḍhentopi vatthuno oḷārikabhāveneva nissandaṃ vissajjento passāvaṃ karīsañca uppādeti.
那时,为了排泄,他们的疮口裂开。男性特征与女性特征显露出来。原来,在过去生中,凭借已修习的近行定威力,只要众生相续中的欲贪还被镇伏的力量所平息,以粗重欲贪为所依的男女根就不会出现。但当欲贪由于断绝(那种定力)而得到机会时,那时,以此为依的诸根便在众生身中生起。于是,女人过度注视男人,男人也过度注视女人。由于这样过度相视,欲贪的热恼生起,从此便行淫欲之法。他们因行此非法,被智者责备、厌弃。为了覆藏那种非法,便建造起房屋。他们住进房屋后,又渐渐追随某个懒惰众生的行为,开始贮存积蓄。从此以后,糠与壳覆盖了米粒,收割之后也不再生长。显示巴利原文
Atha tesaṃ nikkhamanatthāya vaṇamukhāni pabhijjanti. Purisassa purisabhāvo, itthiyā itthibhāvo pātubhavati. Purimattabhāvesu hi pavattaupacārajjhānānubhāvena yāva sattasantānesu kāmarāgo vikkhambhanavegena samito , na tāva bahalakāmarāgūpanissayāni itthipurisindriyāni pāturahesuṃ. Yadā panassa vicchinnatāya bahalakāmarāgo laddhāvasaro ahosi, tadā tadupanissayāni tāni sattānaṃ attabhāvesu sañjāyiṃsu, tadā itthī purisaṃ, puriso ca itthiṃ ativelaṃ upanijjhāyati. Tesaṃ ativelaṃ upanijjhāyanapaccayā kāmapariḷāho uppajjati, tato methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevanti. Te asaddhammapaṭisevanapaccayā viññūhi garahiyamānā viheṭhiyamānā tassa asaddhammassa paṭicchādanahetu agārāni karonti. Te agāraṃ ajjhāvasamānā anukkamena aññatarassa alasajātikassa sattassa diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjantā sannidhiṃ karonti. Tato pabhuti kaṇopi thusopi taṇḍulaṃ pariyonandhanti, lāyitaṭṭhānampi na paṭiviruhati.
他们聚集后悲叹道:“诸贤,恶法确实已在众生中出现,因为我们从前是意所成的。”此应依《阿迦那经》(《长部》3.128)所述方式详加展开。此后他们设立了界限。那时,有一众生未给而取他人份额,他们两次呵责他,第三次便用手、土块、棍棒打他。当不与取、争斗、妄语和杖罚等事生起后,他们便聚集思惟:“我们何不推选一位有情,让他正确地谴责应谴责的,呵责应呵责的,摈除应摈除的,我们则向他供给米谷之份。”就在此劫,在如此作出决定的众生之中,这位世尊当时身为菩萨,于那时的众生中最为端严、最为悦目、最有大威德,具足智慧,堪能惩恶扬善。他们前往他那里,请求并推选了他。他因被大众推选而称为“大众推选者”;因是田地的领主而称为“刹帝利”;因以法、以平等令他人喜悦而称为“王”,以此三种名称而著称。凡世间稀有之处,菩萨便是那里最初之人。如此以菩萨为始,刹帝利阶层成立后,婆罗门等其他种姓也次第成立。显示巴利原文
Te sannipatitvā anutthunanti ‘‘pāpakā vata bho dhammā sattesu pātubhūtā, mayañhi pubbe manomayā ahumhā’’ti, aggaññasutte (dī. ni. 3.128) vuttanayena vitthāretabbaṃ. Tato mariyādaṃ ṭhapenti, athaññataro satto aññassa bhāgaṃ adinnaṃ ādiyati, taṃ dvikkhattuṃ paribhāsetvā tatiyavāre pāṇileḍḍudaṇḍehi paharanti. Te evaṃ adinnādāne kalahamusāvādadaṇḍādānesu uppannesu ca sannipatitvā cintayanti ‘‘yannūna mayaṃ ekaṃ sattaṃ sammanneyyāma, yo no sammā khīyitabbaṃ khīyeyya, garahitabbaṃ garaheyya, pabbājetabbaṃ pabbājeyya, mayaṃ panassa sālīnaṃ bhāgamanuppadassāmā’’ti. Evaṃ katasanniṭṭhānesu pana sattesu imasmiṃ tāva kappe ayameva bhagavā bodhisattabhūto tena samayena tesu sattesu abhirūpataro ca dassanīyataro ca mahesakkhataro ca buddhisampanno paṭibalo niggahapaggahaṃ kātuṃ. Te taṃ upasaṅkamitvā yācitvā sammanniṃsu. So tena mahājanena sammatoti mahāsammato, khettānaṃ adhipatīti khattiyo, dhammena samena paresaṃ rañjetīti rājāti tīhi nāmehi paññāyittha. Yañhi loke acchariyaṭṭhānaṃ, bodhisattova tattha ādipurisoti evaṃ bodhisattaṃ ādiṃ katvā khattiyamaṇḍale saṇṭhite anupubbena brāhmaṇādayopi vaṇṇā saṇṭhahiṃsu.
其中,从劫灭大云直至火焰断绝,这是一不可数,称为坏劫。从劫灭火焰断绝直至充满百千俱胝轮围的成就大云,这是第二不可数,称为坏住劫。从成就大云直至日月出现,这是第三不可数,称为成劫。从日月出现直至再次的劫灭大云,这是第四不可数,称为成住劫。此成住不可数包含六十四中间劫,有人说是包含二十中间劫。其余不可数在时间量上与此相等。此四个不可数合为一个大劫。应当了知,以上便是以火坏灭与成立的论述。显示巴利原文
Tattha kappavināsakamahāmeghato yāva jālopacchedo, idamekamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ saṃvaṭṭoti vuccati. Kappavināsakajālopacchedato yāva koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaparipūrako sampattimahāmegho, idaṃ dutiyamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyīti vuccati. Sampattimahāmeghato yāva candimasūriyapātubhāvo, idaṃ tatiyamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ vivaṭṭoti vuccati. Candimasūriyapātubhāvato yāva puna kappavināsakamahāmegho, idaṃ catutthamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyīti vuccati. Vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyīasaṅkhyeyyaṃ catusaṭṭhiantarakappasaṅgahaṃ. ‘‘Vīsatiantarakappasaṅgaha’’nti keci. Sesāsaṅkhyeyyāni kālato tena samappamāṇāneva. Imāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni eko mahākappo hoti. Evaṃ tāva agginā vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ.
然而,当劫以水坏灭时,最先是劫灭大云生起等,应如前文所述方式详加展开。但此处有差别:如同彼处有第二日,此处则有劫灭性的碱水大云生起。它最初降下微细之雨,次第以大雨流充满百千俱胝轮围。被碱水触及的大地、山等,悉皆消融;水由诸风从四方托持。水从大地最下边际,一直维持到第二禅地。由此,被碱水触及的大地、山等,如同投入水中的盐粒般消融,故有人说它与持地之水合为同一水体。另有人说:“它无余地坏灭持地之水及持水之风蕴后,于一切处唯自成一味,凝然安住。”此说合理。在上方,消融六梵天界后,达光音天而住。只要尚有微许行法存在,它便不止息;一旦超越一切随水行法,便顿然止息、消失。下方虚空与上方虚空合为一味,成大黑暗,一切如前所说。唯此处以光音天梵界为始,世间显现。有情从光音天命终后,生于光音天等处。其中,从劫灭大云直至劫灭碱水断绝,是一不可数;从水断绝直至成就大云,是第二不可数;从成就大云直至日月出现,是第三不可数;从日月出现直至劫灭大云,是第四不可数。此四个不可数合为一个大劫。应当了知,以上便是以水坏灭与成立的论述。显示巴利原文
Yasmiṃ pana samaye kappo udakena nassati, āditova kappavināsakamahāmegho vuṭṭhahitvāti pubbe vuttanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yathā tattha dutiyasūriyo, evamidha kappavināsako khārudakamahāmegho vuṭṭhāti. So ādito sukhumaṃ sukhumaṃ vassanto anukkamena mahādhārāhi koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷānaṃ pūrento vassati. Khārudakena phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhā pathavīpabbatādayo vilīyanti, udakaṃ samantato vātehi dhārīyati. Pathaviyā heṭṭhimantato pabhuti yāva dutiyajjhānabhūmiṃ udakaṃ gaṇhāti. Tena hi khārudakena phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhā pathavīpabbatādayo udake pakkhittaloṇasakkharā viya vilīyanteva, tasmā pathavīsandhārakaudakena saddhiṃ ekūdakameva taṃ hotīti keci. Apare pana ‘‘pathavīsandhārakaudakaṃ taṃ sandhārakavāyukkhandhañca anavasesato vināsetvā sabbattha sayameva eko ghanabhūto tiṭṭhatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ. Upari pana chapi brahmaloke vilīyāpetvā subhakiṇhe āhacca tiṭṭhati, taṃ yāva aṇumattampi saṅkhāragataṃ atthi, tāva na vūpasammati, udakānugataṃ pana sabbaṃ saṅkhāragataṃ abhibhavitvā sahasā vūpasammati, antaradhānaṃ gacchati. Heṭṭhāākāsena saha upariākāso eko hoti mahandhakāroti sabbaṃ vuttasadisaṃ. Kevalaṃ panidha ābhassarabrahmalokaṃ ādiṃ katvā loko pātubhavati. Subhakiṇhato cavitvā ābhassaraṭṭhānādīsu sattā nibbattanti. Tattha kappavināsakamahāmeghato yāva kappavināsakakhārudakopacchedo, idamekamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ . Udakupacchedato yāva sampattimahāmegho, idaṃ dutiyamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ. Sampattimahāmeghato yāva candimasūriyapātubhāvo, idaṃ tatiyamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ. Candimasūriyapātubhāvato yāva kappavināsakamahaāmegho, idaṃ catutthamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ. Imāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni eko mahākappo hoti. Evaṃ udakena vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ.
当劫被风毁灭时,首先出现劫灭大云降雨,应如前文所述方式广说。但此处有差别——如同那里第二日轮出现,此处为毁灭劫而生起风。此风先扬起粗尘,后扬起细尘、细沙、粗沙、砾石、岩石等,乃至扬起如尖顶屋大小的岩石及立于不平处的大树。它们从大地升腾至天空后不再落下,便在空中粉碎消散。随后,风从大地下方次第生起,将大地翻转,令其根基朝上抛入空中。即使百由旬量的大地板块,乃至二百、三百、四百、五百、六百、七百由旬量的大地板块也破裂开来,被风势抛起,在空中粉碎消散。风亦将轮围山和须弥山举起抛入空中。它们互相撞击,粉碎消散。以此方式,风摧毁地上天宫和空中天宫,摧毁六欲天界后,摧毁百千俱胝轮围世界。在那里,轮围与轮围、雪山与雪山、须弥与须弥互相碰撞,粉碎消散。风从大地执取直至第三禅地,摧毁九梵天界后,止于广果天。如此,风与持地之水及持水之风一起,摧毁一切行法后,自身亦因无所依而息灭。下方虚空与上方虚空合为一体,成大黑暗,一切如前所说。但此处以遍净梵天界为始,世界显现。众生从广果天死后,生于遍净天等处。其中,从劫显示巴利原文
Yasmiṃ samaye kappo vātena nassati, āditova kappavināsakamahāmegho vuṭṭhahitvāti pubbe vuttanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yathā tattha dutiyasūriyo, evamidha kappavināsanatthaṃ vāto samuṭṭhāti. So paṭhamaṃ thūlarajaṃ uṭṭhāpeti, tato saṇharajaṃ sukhumavālikaṃ thūlavālikaṃ sakkharapāsāṇādayoti yāvakūṭāgāramatte pāsāṇe visamaṭṭhāne ṭhitamahārukkhe ca uṭṭhāpeti. Te pathavito nabhamuggatā na puna patanti, tattheva cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā abhāvaṃ gacchanti. Athānukkamena heṭṭhā mahāpathaviyā vāto samuṭṭhahitvā pathaviṃ parivattetvā uddhaṃ mūlaṃ katvā ākāse khipati. Yojanasatappamāṇāpi pathavippadesā dviyojanatiyojanacatuyojanapañcayojanachayojanasattayojanappamāṇāpi pabhijjitvā vātavegukkhittā ākāseyeva cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā abhāvaṃ gacchanti. Cakkavāḷapabbatampi sinerupabbatampi vāto ukkhipitvā ākāse khipati. Te aññamaññaṃ abhihantvā cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā vinassanti. Etenevūpāyena bhūmaṭṭhakavimānāni ca ākāsaṭṭhakavimānāni ca vināsento chakāmāvacaradevaloke vināsetvā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷāni vināseti. Tattha cakkavāḷā cakkavāḷehi, himavantā himavantehi, sinerū sinerūhi aññamaññaṃ samāgantvā cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā vinassanti. Pathavito yāva tatiyajjhānabhūmi vāto gaṇhāti, navapi brahmaloke vināsetvā vehapphale āhacca tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ pathavīsandhārakaudakena taṃsandhārakavātena ca saddhiṃ sabbasaṅkhāragataṃ vināsetvā sayampi vinassati avaṭṭhānassa kāraṇābhāvato. Heṭṭhāākāsena saha upariākāso eko hoti mahandhakāroti sabbaṃ vuttasadisaṃ. Idha pana subhakiṇhabrahmalokaṃ ādiṃ katvā loko pātubhavati. Vehapphalato cavitvā subhakiṇhaṭṭhānādīsu sattā nibbattanti. Tattha kappavināsakamahāmeghato yāva kappavināsakavātupacchedo, idamekamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ. Vātupacchedato yāva sampattimahāmegho, idaṃ dutiyamasaṅkhyeyyantiādi vuttanayameva. Evaṃ vātena vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ.
以何因缘世界如此毁灭?诸行虽无因之自性灭,但若无毁坏者则不存在;而相续之灭,若无因亦不存在。正如众生诸趣中,器世界亦必有具因之毁灭。因此问:世界毁灭以何为因?以不善根为因。正如生于该处之众生以福业力令世界最初成立,同样,以其恶业力而世界坏灭。故当不善根增盛时,世界如此毁灭。又,当贪嗔痴增盛时,依次有疾疫劫、刀兵劫、饥馑劫,此三种中间劫在住劫的不可数劫中生起。同样,上述三种坏劫亦因贪等增盛而生。显示巴利原文
Atha kiṃkāraṇā evaṃ loko vinassati. Yadipi hi saṅkhārānaṃ ahetuko sarasanirodho vināsakābhāvato, santānanirodho pana hetuvirahito natthi. Yathā taṃ sattanikāyesūti bhājanalokassapi sahetukena vināsena bhavitabbaṃ, tasmā kimevaṃ lokavināse kāraṇanti? Akusalamūlaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Yathā hi tattha nibbattanakasattānaṃ puññabalena paṭhamaṃ loko vivaṭṭati, evaṃ tesaṃ pāpakammabalena saṃvaṭṭati, tasmā akusalamūlesu ussannesu evaṃ loko vinassati. Yathā hi rāgadosamohānaṃ adhikabhāvena yathākkamaṃ rogantarakappo satthantarakappo dubbhikkhantarakappoti ime tividhā antarakappā vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyimhi asaṅkhyeyyakappe jāyanti. Evamete yathāvuttā tayo saṃvaṭṭā rāgādīnaṃ adhikabhāveneva honti.
其中,贪增盛时,世界被火毁灭;嗔增盛时,被水毁灭。因为嗔增盛时,以更强烈的嗔,如同以更剧烈的碱水毁灭,方为合理。然而,有些人说:‘嗔增盛时被火毁灭,贪增盛时被水毁灭。’据说他们的意图是:嗔如显明之敌,与火相似;贪如不显明之敌,与碱水相似,此说合理。痴增盛时,被风毁灭。如此毁灭时,连续七次被火毁灭,第八次被水毁灭,又七次被火毁灭,第八次被水毁灭,如此每第八次毁灭,经过七次水灭后,又七次被火毁灭。至此,六十三劫已过。其间,水灭之轮次虽已到,却被排斥,获得机会之风摧毁寿量满六十四劫的遍净天,毁灭世界。然而此处,因贪于众生中多现行,故应知以火灭为多。如是,世尊如实了知以这些因缘毁灭后成立、成立后安住之器世界,故应知世尊以一切方式了知器世界。显示巴利原文
Tattha rāge ussannatare agginā vinassati, dose ussannatare udakena vinassati. Dose hi ussannatare adhikatarena dosena viya tikkhatarena khārudakena vināso yuttoti. Keci pana ‘‘dose ussannatare agginā, rāge udakenā’’ti vadanti, tesaṃ kira ayamadhippāyo – pākaṭasattusadisassa dosassa aggisadisatā, apākaṭasattusadisassa rāgassa khārudakasadisatā ca yuttāti. Mohe pana ussannatare vātena vinassati. Evaṃ vinassantopi ca nirantarameva satta vāre agginā nassati, aṭṭhame vāre udakena, puna satta vāre agginā, aṭṭhame udakenāti evaṃ aṭṭhame aṭṭhame vāre vinassanto sattakkhattuṃ udakena vinassitvā puna satta vāre agginā nassati. Ettāvatā tesaṭṭhi kappā atītā honti. Etthantare udakena nassanavāraṃ sampattampi paṭibāhitvā laddhokāso vāto paripuṇṇacatusaṭṭhikappāyuke subhakiṇhe viddhaṃsento lokaṃ vināseti. Ettha pana rāgo sattānaṃ bahulaṃ pavattatīti aggivasena bahuso lokavināso veditabbo. Iti evaṃ imehi kāraṇehi vinassitvā saṇṭhahantaṃ saṇṭhahitvā ṭhitañca okāsalokaṃ bhagavā yāthāvato avedīti evampissa sabbathā okāsaloko viditoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
前文已说“以一切方式了知世间故,为世间解”,现在总结道:“如是,以一切方式了知世间故,为世间解”。其中,“以一切方式”指:从相状等差别了知行世间,从意乐等差别了知有情世间,从量、形状等差别了知器世间。如此以一切种类了知世间,这就是“世间解”的含义。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana heṭṭhā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbathā viditalokattā lokavidū’’ti, idāni taṃ nigamento āha ‘‘evaṃ sabbathā viditalokattā lokavidū’’ti. Tattha sabbathāti lakkhaṇādippabhedato saṅkhāralokassa, āsayādippabhedato sattalokassa, parimāṇasaṇṭhānādippabhedato okāsalokassāti evaṃ sabbappakārena viditalokattāti attho.
现在解释“无上”一词的含义,说“以自己功德”等。其中,attano是表示来源的属格,意为“从自己”。“以功德,自己为更殊胜者”应当这样连接。此处加“更”(tara)是为了解释“无上”一词的义理,并不是说真有一个更为殊胜者存在。因为在天世间中,连与如来相似者都不存在,何况相等者,更不用说殊胜者了。kassaci指任何人。abhibhavati(超胜)是指:世尊由于戒具足所依止的惭、愧、慈、悲等殊胜缘,以及达到究竟的信、念、精进、慧,从证得以来便不与他人共;因断除习气之类的敌对法,达到究竟彼岸的导师戒德,以此完全超胜天世间而住,不被任何所超胜,这便是其义。同样地,对于定德等也应随宜而说。而这些戒等,应当知道是世间与出世间混合的,解脱智见则唯是欲界世间。显示巴利原文
Idāni anuttaroti padassa atthaṃ saṃvaṇṇento āha ‘‘attano pana guṇehī’’tiādi. Tattha attanoti nissakkatthe sāmivacanametaṃ, attatoti attho. Guṇehi attano visiṭṭhatarassāti sambandho. Taraggahaṇañcettha ‘‘anuttaro’’ti padassa atthaniddesatāya kataṃ, na visiṭṭhassa kassaci atthitāya. Sadevake hi loke sadisakappopi nāma koci tathāgatassa natthi, kuto sadiso, visiṭṭhe pana kā kathā. Kassacīti kassacipi. Abhibhavatīti sīlasampadāya upanissayabhūtānaṃ hirottappamettākaruṇānaṃ visesapaccayānaṃ saddhāsativīriyapaññānañca ukkaṃsappattiyā samudāgamato paṭṭhāya na aññasādhāraṇo savāsanapaṭipakkhassa pahīnattā ukkaṃsapāramippatto satthu sīlaguṇo, tena bhagavā sadevakaṃ lokaṃ aññadatthu abhibhuyya pavattati, na sayaṃ kenaci abhibhuyyatīti adhippāyo. Evaṃ samādhiguṇādīsupi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ. Sīlādayo cete lokiyalokuttaramissakā veditabbā, vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ pana lokiyaṃ kāmāvacarameva.
若问:“既然如此,他如何能超胜包括诸天在内的世间呢?”这也是由于他的威神力无与伦比。因为那解脱功德从所缘与转起方式来说,都更为殊胜。它确实是依于佛陀那不与外道共的解脱功德而生起,生起时超越思惟、极为深奥、微细、柔软、精妙、殊胜;由于敌对法已被彻底断除,它生起时极为明显、极其光辉;又由于对自在转起的熟练,以及有分间隔极为短暂,它得以极为迅速地生起。显示巴利原文
Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ tena sadevakaṃ lokaṃ abhibhavatīti? Tassapi ānubhāvato asadisattā. Tampi hi visayato pavattito pavattiākārato ca uttaritarameva. Tañhi anaññasādhāraṇaṃ satthu vimuttiguṇaṃ ārabbha pavattati, pavattamānañca atakkāvacaraṃ paramagambhīraṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ sātisayaṃ paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ suppahīnattā suṭṭhu pākaṭaṃ vibhūtataraṃ katvā pavattati, sammadeva ca vasībhāvassa pāpakattā bhavaṅgaparivāsassa ca atiparittakattā lahu lahu pavattatīti.
如此,在显示了世尊以戒等功德更无上者之后,为显示连相似者亦不存在,便说“以戒功德亦无等”等语。其中,“无等”是指于某一时中,并没有以戒等功德与他相等、相似者,故称无等。同样,与无等者相等,则为无等等;或者,他具有无等之相等,故称无等等。以戒等功德,他无有譬喻,故为无喻。其余两词也可据此理了知。其中,譬喻即比喻,相似的譬喻为映照,以对举方式而成立者为对者,应当如此了知。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sīlādiguṇehi bhagavato uttaritarassa abhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni sadisassapi abhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sīlaguṇenapi asamo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha asamoti ekasmiṃ kāle natthi etassa sīlādiguṇena samo sadisoti asamo. Tathā asamehi samo asamasamo. Asamā vā samā etassāti asamasamo. Sīlādiguṇena natthi etassa paṭimāti appaṭimo. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Tattha upamāmattaṃ paṭimā, sadisūpamā paṭibhāgo, yugaggāhavasena ṭhito paṭipuggaloti veditabbo.
“比丘们,我不见……”等语句,意思是:我虽以一切眼,如同观看掌中余甘子一般,观见一切世间,但在包含诸天……乃至……在内的众生中,我确实不见有任何人的戒功德比我自身更为圆满、更为具足,因为如此之人并不存在。显示巴利原文
Na kho panāhaṃ bhikkhave samanupassāmītiādīsu mama samantacakkhunā hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya sabbaṃ lokaṃ passantopi tattha sadevake…pe… pajāya attano attato sīlasampannataraṃ sampannatarasīlaṃ kañcipi puggalaṃ na kho pana passāmi tādisassa abhāvatoti adhippāyo.
所谓《初善说经》等,即就此而言。显示巴利原文
Aggappasādasuttādīnīti ettha –
诸比丘,一切众生,或无足、或二足、或四足、或多足,或有色、或无色,或有想、或无想、或非想非非想,如来皆被尊为最上者,即阿罗汉、正自觉者。诸比丘,凡对佛有净信者,即于最上者生起净信。而于最上者生净信者,所感果报亦为最上。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā dvipadā vā catuppadā vā bahuppadā vā rūpino vā arūpino vā saññino vā asaññino vā nevasaññīnāsaññino vā, tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyati arahaṃ sammāsambuddho. Ye, bhikkhave, buddhe pasannā, agge te pasannā. Agge kho pana pasannānaṃ aggo vipāko hotī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) –
此为《最胜净信经》。以“等”字而言——显示巴利原文
Idaṃ aggappasādasuttaṃ. Ādi-saddena –
诸比丘,在含括诸天……乃至……含括诸天与人的世间,如来是征服者、不被征服者、确然一切见者、自在主,因此被称为如来。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sadevake, bhikkhave, loke…pe… sadevamanussāya tathāgato abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthu daso vasavattī, tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23; dī. ni. 3.188) –
应当了知如是等经文。而以“等”字起始之偈颂,即为:显示巴利原文
Evamādīni suttapadāni veditabbāni. Ādikā gāthāyoti –
“我是世间阿拉汉,我是无上导师;
我是唯一正自觉者,我已清凉、已寂灭。”
在已调伏者中,我为调伏者之最胜;在已寂静者中,我为令寂静者之仙人;
在已解脱者中,我为令解脱者之最上;在已渡越者中,我为令渡越者之殊胜。
不于此世间,亦不于他世间,
无人能与最胜的佛陀相等或相似;
他堪受最上的供养,
对于希求福德、追求广大果报者而言。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ahañhi arahā loke, ahaṃ satthā anuttaro; Ekomhi sammāsambuddho, sītibhūtosmi nibbuto. (mahāva. 11; ma. ni. 1.285; 2.341); ‘‘Danto damayataṃ seṭṭho, santo samayataṃ isi; Mutto mocayataṃ aggo, tiṇṇo tārayataṃ varo. (itivu. 112) ‘‘Nayimasmiṃ loke parasmiṃ vā pana, Buddhena seṭṭho sadiso ca vijjati; Āhuneyyānaṃ paramāhutiṃ gato, Puññatthikānaṃ vipulapphalesina’’nti. (vi. va. 1047; kathā. 799) –
如此一类的偈颂,应当详细展开解释。显示巴利原文
Evamādikā gāthā vitthāretabbā.
“调御丈夫”等词中,“dammā”指应被调御者,即适合被调御者。那些人既是人,又是应被调御者,故称为“purisadammā”(应被调御之人)。此处是依修饰语后置的方式作解说,其义即为“应被调御之人”。他们说:“即使女性也具足应被调御的性质,但取‘人’(purisa)一词,是以殊胜者为界定标准。”为说明“sāreti”(引导)的含义,故说“dameti”(调御)等。其中,“dameti”意为令其平息,即通过身等调御使之相应。而通过身等调御令其相应,便是随宜将其安立于彼分断除等之中,因此说“即称为引导”。“未调御者”是指那些完全未被调御的应被调御者,这是就全然未调御而言。然而,那些调御之事尚未完成、尚未完全超越应被调御状态的人,也仍是应被调御者,因为导师会调御他们。世尊确实为戒清净者教授初禅,为证得初禅者教授第二禅,如此次第为其教授更上之殊胜,即使对已部分调御者,也令其平息。因此,《清净道论》中说:“而且,彼世尊为戒清净者等教授初禅等,为须陀洹等教授上道之修行,即使对已调御者,也令其进步。”显示巴利原文
Purisadammasārathītiādīsu damitabbāti dammā, damituṃ araharūpā. Purisā ca te dammā cāti purisadammā. Visesanassa cettha paranipātaṃ katvā niddeso, dammapurisāti attho. ‘‘Satipi mātugāmassapi dammabhāve purisaggahaṇaṃ ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasenā’’ti vadanti. Sāretīti imassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘dametī’’tiādi. Tattha dametīti sameti, kāyasamādīhi yojetīti attho. Taṃ pana kāyasamādīhi yojanaṃ yathārahaṃ tadaṅgavinayādīsu patiṭṭhāpanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘vinetīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Adantāti idaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ damataṃ anupagatā purisadammāti vuttāti katvā vuttaṃ. Ye pana vippakatadammabhāvā sabbathā dametabbataṃ nātivattā, tepi purisadammā eva, yato te satthā dameti. Bhagavā hi visuddhasīlassa paṭhamajjhānaṃ ācikkhati, paṭhamajjhānalābhino dutiyajjhānantiādinā tassa tassa uparūpari visesaṃ ācikkhanto ekadesena dantepi sameti. Teneva vuttaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.139) ‘‘api ca so bhagavā visuddhasīlādīnaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīni sotāpannādīnañca uttarimaggappaṭipadaṃ ācikkhanto dantepi dametiyevā’’ti. Atha vā sabbena sabbaṃ adantā ekadesena dantā ca idha adantaggahaṇeneva saṅgahitāti veditabbaṃ. Dametuṃ yuttāti damanārahā.
“畜生人”等词中,“tiracchāna”(畜生)是指不向上而行,而是横向弯曲、行走、增长者;即不如天、人等那样向上长,而是横向生长。畜生即是人,故称“畜生人”。“人”(manussā)源于心意的高涨。由于勇猛、具念、堪任梵行等功德,其心增盛,成为具有殊胜功德之心。他们都是谁呢?是赡部洲洲的殊胜众生。因此世尊说:显示巴利原文
Tiracchānapurisātiādīsu uddhaṃ anuggantvā tiriyaṃ añcitā gatā vaḍḍhitāti tiracchānā, devamanussādayo viya uddhaṃ dīghaṃ ahutvā tiriyaṃ dīghāti attho. Tiracchānāyeva purisā tiracchānapurisā. Manassa ussannatāya manussā. Satisūrabhāvabrahmacariyayogyatādiguṇavasena upacitamānasā ukkaṭṭhaguṇacittā. Ke pana te? Jambudīpavāsino sattavisesā. Tenāha bhagavā –
诸比丘,赡部洲洲的人以三种殊胜之处,胜过北俱卢洲的人与三十三天的天人。哪三种?勇猛、具念、在此修习梵行。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tīhi, bhikkhave, ṭhānehi jambudīpakā manussā uttarakuruke ca manusse adhiggaṇhanti deve ca tāvatiṃse. Katamehi tīhi? Sūrā satimanto idha brahmacariyavāso’’ti (a. ni. 9.21).
事实上,诸佛世尊、独觉佛、上首弟子、大弟子、转轮王以及其他有大威力的众生,唯于此处(赡部洲)出现。然而,有些人说,由于与那些大威力众生具有相同的形态等,其他大洲的居民与这小岛的居民一样,都只被认知为“人”。另一些人则说:由于与贪等和不贪等相伴的心极为显著,故称为“人”。因为在属于人类种姓的众生中,贪等和不贪等特别显著,他们由于贪等显著而趣入恶趣,由于不贪等显著而趣入善趣乃至涅槃。因此,由于与贪等和不贪等相伴的心极为显著,这四大洲的众生与这小岛的居民一起,被特别称为“人”。然而,世间论者说:“因为是摩奴的后代,所以称为人。”名为摩奴者,是劫初之人,是世间规范的创始者,是众生利害的裁定者,处于父亲之位,他在教法中被称为“大选出者”。由于直接或间接地安住于他的教诫之中,如同他的儿子一般,故而称为“人”或“摩奴的后代”。正因如此,那些年轻人也被称为“摩奴所生”。而“人”且为“男子”,即是“人中之男子”。显示巴利原文
Tathā hi buddhā bhagavanto paccekabuddhā aggasāvakā mahāsāvakā cakkavattino aññe ca mahānubhāvā sattā tattheva uppajjanti. Tehi samānarūpāditāya pana saddhiṃ parittadīpavāsīhi itaramahādīpavāsinopi manussātveva paññāyiṃsūti eke. Apare pana bhaṇanti – lobhādīhi ca alobhādīhi ca sahitassa manassa ussannatāya manussā. Ye hi sattā manussajātikā, tesu visesato lobhādayo alobhādayo ca ussannā, te lobhādiussannatāya apāyamaggaṃ, alobhādiussannatāya sugatimaggaṃ nibbānagāmimaggañca pūrenti, tasmā lobhādīhi alobhādīhi ca sahitassa manassa ussannatāya parittadīpavāsīhi saddhiṃ catumahādīpavāsino sattavisesā manussāti vuccanti. Lokiyā pana ‘‘manuno apaccabhāvena manussā’’ti vadanti. Manu nāma paṭhamakappiko lokamariyādāya ādibhūto hitāhitavidhāyako sattānaṃ pituṭṭhāniyo, yo sāsane mahāsammatoti vuccati, paccakkhato paramparāya ca tassa ovādānusāsaniyaṃ ṭhitā tassa puttasadisatāya manussā mānusāti ca vuccanti. Tato eva hi te māṇavā ‘‘manujā’’ti ca voharīyanti, manussā ca te purisā cāti manussapurisā.
“非人男子”:此处,非人即不是人。这是就相似性而说。因此,他们并非具有人的特性,而是与人类相似的另一种众生,此即所指的夜叉等非人。这并非指任何与人相异的众生,因为畜生男子已另行列出。此处所指即是夜叉等。住在喜马拉雅的阿波罗罗龙,住在龙岛的朱罗陀罗与大腹龙,住在狮子岛的火焰顶与烟顶龙,他们皆由去除嗔恚之毒而得调伏。因此说:“他们被安置于皈依与戒中。”“曲齿等”:此中的“等”字,应知包含了狰狞面、优婆离居士等。“帝释等”:此中的“等”字,应知包含了阿阇迦罗夜叉、跋迦梵天等。然而,对他们的调伏,在各处已应所述方法而可知,此处因过于繁复,不再详述。“而此处的经文应详加展开”:即此《凯西经》,依“以种种奇妙之调御方便而得调御”这一意义,应详加展开,因为它是依柔和方法等适宜方式而显示调御的。显示巴利原文
Amanussapurisāti ettha na manussāti amanussā. Taṃsadisatā ettha jotīyati. Tena manussattamattaṃ natthi, aññaṃ samānanti yakkhādayo amanussāti adhippetā. Na ye keci manussehi aññe, tathā tiracchānapurisānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Yakkhādayo eva ca niddiṭṭhā. Apalālo himavantavāsī, cūḷodaramahodarā nāgadīpavāsino, aggisikhadhūmasikhā sīhaḷadīpavāsino nibbisā katā dosavisassa vinodanena. Tenāha ‘‘saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpitā’’ti. Kūṭadantādayoti ādi-saddena ghoramukhaupāligahapatiādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Sakkādayoti ādi-saddena ajakalāpayakkhabakabrahmādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Etesaṃ pana damanaṃ tattha tattha vuttanayeneva sakkā viññātunti atippapañcabhāvato idha na vuccati. Idañcettha suttaṃ vitthāretabbanti idaṃ kesīsuttaṃ ‘‘vinītā vicitrehi vinayanūpāyehī’’ti etasmiṃ atthe vitthāretabbaṃ yathārahaṃ saṇhādīhi upāyehi vinayanassa dīpanato.
“义句”:即能显明义理的语句;“语句”本身就是义理。因为义理依语句而显明,并非单凭名词等单词;而且,仅此一词便显出导师作为“调御丈夫”的不共特质,故说“世尊”等。“八方”:即八等至。它们虽相互关联,却如方位一般各不混杂地显现,故称为“方”。“无著”:即不黏著,因得自在而无所著地游走。“驰骋”:因有速行之用,故说驰骋。“唯向一方驰骋”:意指不转动自身;然已被导师调御的应调御者,能以一威仪路向八方驰骋,故说“唯以一结跏趺坐”。而所说“八方”,仅为举例,因为还能趣入世间凡夫未曾至的灭尽定之方与不死之方。显示巴利原文
Atthapadanti atthābhibyañjanakaṃ padaṃ, vākyanti attho. Vākyena hi atthābhibyatti, na nāmādipadamattena, ekapadabhāvena ca anaññasādhāraṇo satthu purisadammasārathibhāvo dassito hoti. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādi. Aṭṭha disāti aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Tā hi aññamaññaṃ sambandhāpi asaṃkiṇṇabhāvena dissanti apadissanti, disā viyāti vā disā. Asajjamānāti na sajjamānā vasībhāvappattiyā nissaṅgacārā. Dhāvantīti javanavuttiyogato dhāvanti. Ekaṃyeva disaṃ dhāvatīti attano kāyaṃ aparivattantoti adhippāyo, satthārā pana damitā purisadammā ekiriyāpatheneva aṭṭha disā dhāvanti. Tenāha ‘‘ekapallaṅkeneva nisinnā’’ti. Aṭṭha disāti ca nidassanamattametaṃ lokiyehi agatapubbaṃ nirodhasamāpattidisaṃ amatadisañca pakkhandanato.
于“以现法、来世、胜义(之利益)”等语中:“现法”指现前可见的自身;与此相属,即为“现法的”,指此世的利益。“来世”:因依业与烦恼而应被转赴、应被正确前往,故称“来世”,即他世;与此相属,即为“来世的”,指他世的利益。最上、最殊胜的利益,称为“胜义”,即涅槃。以这些现法、来世、胜义之利益。“如宜”:即随宜、相称地,于种种利益中,对某人、以某种相宜的方式。“教诫”:即调御,令其安立于他们利益之中。“与利益同行者”为“商队”,即带着货物资本、为经商而前往异乡的人群。“以利益、教诫等而应被护持、应被教导者,此即存在于他”——依词源学而释为“导师”、“商队主”。世尊亦如商队主,故说“如导师故为导师,世尊即是商队主”。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehītiādīsu diṭṭhadhammo vuccati paccakkho attabhāvo, tattha niyuttoti diṭṭhadhammiko, idhalokattho. Kammakilesavasena samparetabbato sammā gantabbato samparāyo, paraloko. Tattha niyuttoti samparāyiko, paralokattho. Paramo uttamo attho paramattho, nibbānaṃ. Tehi diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi. Yathārahanti yathānurūpaṃ, tesu tesu atthesu yo yo puggalo yaṃ yaṃ arahati, tadanurūpaṃ. Anusāsatīti vineti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe patiṭṭhāpeti. Saha atthena vattatīti sattho, bhaṇḍamūlena vaṇijjāya desantaraṃ gacchanto janasamūho. Hitupadesādivasena paripāletabbo sāsitabbo so etassa atthīti satthā satthavāho niruttinayena. So viya bhagavāti āha ‘‘satthā viyāti satthā, bhagavā satthavāho’’ti.
今为依释义巴利宣示其义,而说“如商队主”等。其中,“于商队”:即于商队众人之中。“余令渡水(之处)”,即“荒野”,指无水的林野区域;依惯用,其他林野区域也如此称之。“贼寇荒野”:即被贼寇盘踞的荒野;同样,“猛兽荒野”。“饥馑荒野”:即难以得食的荒野。“令渡”:即令其越过不安稳处。而“令出渡”等,是加上前缀的扩展之说。或云:“令出渡”:令其近安稳处而渡;“令离渡”:令其从不安稳处出离而渡;“令遍渡”:如以手执取后而渡越一般,执取而后渡,此为含义。所有这些“渡”、“出渡”等,都只是令安立于安稳处,故说“令到达安稳地”。“众生”:即应调御的众生。“生之荒野”:因生是大丛林、大灾难、难度越,故“生”本身就是荒野,即那“生之荒野”。显示巴利原文
Idāni tamatthaṃ niddesapāḷinayena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā satthavāho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sattheti satthike jane. Kaṃ udakaṃ tārenti etthāti kantāro, nirudako araññappadeso. Ruḷhīvasena pana itaropi araññappadeso tathā vuccati. Corakantāranti corehi adhiṭṭhitakantāraṃ, tathā vāḷakantāraṃ. Dubbhikkhakantāranti dullabhabhikkhaṃ kantāraṃ. Tāretīti akhemantaṭṭhānaṃ atikkāmeti. Uttāretītiādi upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā vuttaṃ. Atha vā uttāretīti khemantabhūmiṃ upanento tāreti. Nittāretīti akhemantaṭṭhānato nikkhāmento tāreti. Patāretīti pariggahetvā tāreti, hatthena pariggahetvā tāreti viya tāretīti attho. Sabbampetaṃ tāraṇuttāraṇādi khemaṭṭhāne ṭhapanamevāti āha ‘‘khemantabhūmiṃ sampāpetī’’ti. Satteti veneyyasatte. Mahāgahanatāya mahānatthatāya dunnittharatāya ca jātiyeva kantāro jātikantāro, taṃ jātikantāraṃ.
所谓“以最胜众生为限”,即是以最胜的众生来限定。因为天与人正是最胜的众生,而非畜生等。“此”即指“天与人”这句话。“以堪能者之划分为准”,即通过限定堪能入正定聚的相应众生。“世尊”一词为属格,如同“从戒师处学习”等例子,意思是“从世尊处”或“于世尊之近处”。“具足亲依止”,即三因结生等,是证得道果的强有力因缘。“嘎嘎拉”:是名为嘎嘎拉的国王的王妃,又因由她所建而被称为“嘎嘎拉”的池。“于声取相”:即依“此即是法”的法想而取声相,取相时,即使以净信心躺在集会边缘,也去取那个声相。“压住而立”:意为没有看见杖已放在他头上,而在那里将杖压下去站着。青蛙即便在杖被放置或被压住时,也因对法生起的净信而不出声,命终。这是生于天界者的习性:即“我从何处生于此界?在那里我曾造了什么业?”的省察。因此,由于见到自己的前生,说:“啊!我也竟生于此界。”“以头礼世尊之足”:即是以因知恩而增长的慈爱、恭敬与尊重而顶礼。显示巴利原文
Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasenāti ukkaṭṭhasattaparicchedavasena. Devamanussā eva hi ukkaṭṭhasattā, na tiracchānādayo. Etanti ‘‘devamanussāna’’nti etaṃ vacanaṃ. Bhabbapuggalaparicchedavasenāti sammattaniyāmokkamanassa yogyapuggalassa paricchindanavasena. Bhagavatoti nissakke sāmivacanaṃ yathā ‘‘upajjhāyato ajjhetī’’ti. Bhagavato santike vāti attho. Upanissayasampattinti tihetukapaṭisandhiādikaṃ maggaphalādhigamassa balavakāraṇaṃ. Gaggarāyāti gaggarāya nāma rañño deviyā, tāya vā kāritattā ‘‘gaggarā’’ti laddhanāmāya. Sare nimittaṃ aggahesīti ‘‘dhammo eso vuccatī’’ti dhammasaññāya sare nimittaṃ gaṇhi, gaṇhanto ca pasannacitto parisapariyante nipajji. Sannirumbhitvā aṭṭhāsīti tassa sīse daṇḍassa ṭhapitabhāvaṃ apassanto tattha daṇḍaṃ uppīḷetvā aṭṭhāsi. Maṇḍūkopi daṇḍe ṭhapitepi uppīḷitepi dhammagatena pasādena vissaramakarontova kālamakāsi. Devaloke nibbattasattānaṃ ayaṃ dhammatā, yā ‘‘kutohaṃ idha nibbatto, tattha kinnu kho kammamakāsi’’nti āvajjanā. Tasmā attano purimabhavassa diṭṭhattā āha ‘‘are ahampi nāma idha nibbatto’’ti. Bhagavato pāde sirasā vandīti kataññutāsaṃvaḍḍhitena pemagāravabahumānena vandi.
明知而问:世尊为使大众亲证业果及佛的威力,以偈颂问道:“谁在礼敬我?”其中,“谁”指天、龙、夜叉、乾闼婆等中的哪一位,意为“哪一个”。“我”即“我的”。“足”即双足。“以神通”即以此种天神通力。“以名声”即以此种名声与随从。“照耀”即闪耀着。“以殊胜”指极其可爱、悦意、美妙的。“色”即以此肤色与身色而照耀。“照亮一切方”:即令十方一切方向都成为一片光明、一片光亮,犹如月亮、犹如太阳般照耀的意思。显示巴利原文
Jānantovapucchīti mahājanassa kammaphalaṃ buddhānubhāvañca paccakkhaṃ kātukāmo bhagavā ‘‘ko me vandatī’’ti gāthāya pucchi. Tattha (vi. va. aṭṭha. 857) koti devanāgayakkhagandhabbādīsu ko, katamoti attho. Meti mama. Pādānīti pāde. Iddhiyāti imāya evarūpāya deviddhiyā. Yasasāti iminā edisena yasena ca parivārena ca. Jalanti vijjotamāno. Abhikkantenāti ativiya kantena kāmanīyena sundarena. Vaṇṇenāti chavivaṇṇena sarīravaṇṇanibhāya. Sabbā obhāsayaṃ disāti sabbā dasapi disā pabhāsento, cando viya sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekālokaṃ karontoti attho.
然而,被世尊如此询问后,天子表明自己,说出“我曾是青蛙”的偈颂。其中,“曾”指在过去生。“水”这是当时显示自己的出生地。“水中青蛙”由此排除了肿胀等陆地上的青蛙。牛行走之处为“行境”,即牛觅食之处。但此处,如同行境一样为“行境”,水是其行境者为“水行境”。因为即使有些水行生物如龟等,也可能不是水行境,故特别说“水行境”。听闻您的法,即当您以梵音、如迦陵频伽鸟鸣般美妙的声音说法时,通过“此即是法”的声音取相而听闻。此处的属格表示不敬。牧牛童杀了我,即一个正在看牛的牧牛童来到我身边,拄着杖站着,把杖压在我头上,杀了我。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pana bhagavatā pucchito devaputto attānaṃ pavedento ‘‘maṇḍūkohaṃ pure āsi’’nti gāthamāha. Tattha pureti purimajātiyaṃ. Udaketi idaṃ tadā attano uppattiṭṭhānadassanaṃ. Udake maṇḍūkoti tena uddhumāyikādikassa thale maṇḍūkassa nivattanaṃ kataṃ hoti. Gāvo caranti etthāti gocaro, gunnaṃ ghāsesanaṭṭhānaṃ. Idha pana gocaro viyāti gocaro, vāri udakaṃ gocaro etassāti vārigocaro. Udakacārīpi hi koci kacchapādi avārigocaropi hotīti ‘‘vārigocaro’’ti visesetvā vuttaṃ. Tava dhammaṃ suṇantassāti brahmassarena karavīkarutamañjunā desentassa tava dhammaṃ ‘‘dhammo eso vuccatī’’ti sare nimittaggāhavasena suṇantassa. Anādare cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Avadhī vacchapālakoti vacche rakkhanto gopālakadārako mama samīpaṃ āgantvā daṇḍamolubbha tiṭṭhanto mama sīse daṇḍaṃ sannirumbhitvā maṃ māresīti attho.
他心生喜悦与满足,心想:“以如此微少福业之力,竟能获得如是极为广大的世间与出世间成就。”于是面露微笑,更显皎洁明亮的牙齿闪耀着光芒,将那处所照耀得更为灿烂。他正是由喜悦与满足而——显示巴利原文
Sitaṃ katvāti ‘‘tathā parittatarenapi puññānubhāvena evaṃ ativiya uḷārā lokiyalokuttarasampattiyo labbhantī’’ti pītisomanassajāto bhāsurataradhavaḷavipphurantadasanakhakiraṇāvaḷīhi bhiyyoso mattāya taṃ padesaṃ obhāsento sitaṃ katvā. Pītisomanassavasena hi so –
“一时心净信之功,且看我神通与名声;
且看我之威神力,看我容貌与光辉。
那些长夜以来,听闻乔达摩教法的人,
他们已达不动之境,到了那里,便不再忧愁。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Muhuttaṃ cittapasādassa, iddhiṃ passa yasañca me; Ānubhāvañca me passa, vaṇṇaṃ passa jutiñca me. ‘‘Ye ca te dīghamaddhānaṃ, dhammaṃ assosuṃ gotama; Pattā te acalaṭṭhānaṃ, yattha gantvā na socare’’ti. (vi. va. 859-860) –
说完这两首偈颂后,便离去了。显示巴利原文
Imā dve gāthā vatvā pakkāmi.
其中,“凡任何”的“凡”是不定词,“任何”也是如此。“而”仅是庄严语词。因此,“凡任何”是对所知的无余遍取。或者,“而”是显示差别义的不变词。由此,以“正自觉者”一词,简要而详尽地说明了导师对四圣谛的正觉。又以“佛”一词,说明对其他所知的觉悟。或者,前者显示导师的证悟智之威力,后者显示教说智之威力。“喜”字所指的差别,将在下面显明。依解脱究竟智之力,此处“解脱”指从一切对立面完全解脱,即最上道;其究竟,即最上果;于彼应得的果位中,所应得者即“解脱究竟”;此智即与一切知智俱在的一切佛智。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana kiñcīti ettha yanti aniyamitavacanaṃ, tathā kiñcīti. Panāti vacanālaṅkāramattaṃ. Tasmā yaṃ kiñcīti ñeyyassa anavasesapariyādānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Panāti vā visesatthadīpako nipāto. Tena ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti iminā saṅkhepato vitthārato ca satthu catusaccābhisambodho vutto. Buddhoti pana iminā tadaññassapi ñeyyassa avabodho. Purimena vā satthu paṭivedhañāṇānubhāvo, pacchimena desanāñāṇānubhāvo. Pī-ti upari vuccamāno viseso jotīyati. Vimokkhantikañāṇavasenāti ettha sabbaso paṭipakkhehi vimuccatīti vimokkho, aggamaggo, tassa anto, aggaphalaṃ, tasmiṃ laddhe laddhabbato tattha bhavaṃ vimokkhantikaṃ, ñāṇaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ sabbampi buddhañāṇaṃ.
称为如是转流,是指——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pavattoti ettha –
以一切知性故,名为佛;以一切见性故,名为佛;以不从他引导性故,名为佛;以开显性故,名为佛;以漏尽故,名为佛;以无染着故,名为佛;以一向离贪故,名为佛;以一向离嗔故,名为佛;以一向离痴故,名为佛;以一向无烦恼故,名为佛;以行一乘道故,名为佛;以独自觉悟无上正等觉故,名为佛;以摧破无觉故、获得觉故,名为佛。佛陀此名,非母亲所造,非父亲所造,非兄弟所造,非姐妹所造,非朋友同僚所造,非亲族血亲所造,非沙门婆罗门所造,非诸天所造。这是诸佛世尊于菩提树下,在证得一切知智的同时,所现证的施设,即所谓佛。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbaññutāya buddho, sabbadassāvitāya buddho, anaññaneyyatāya buddho, visavitāya buddho, khīṇāsavasaṅkhātena buddho, nirupalepasaṅkhātena buddho, ekantavītarāgoti buddho, ekantavītadosoti buddho, ekantavītamohoti buddho, ekantanikkilesoti buddho, ekāyanamaggaṃ gatoti buddho, eko anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti buddho, abuddhivihatattā buddhipaṭilābhā buddho. Buddhoti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kataṃ, na pitarā kataṃ, na bhātarā kataṃ, na bhaginiyā kataṃ, na mittāmaccehi kataṃ, na ñātisālohitehi kataṃ, na samaṇabrāhmaṇehi kataṃ, na devatāhi kataṃ, vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā sacchikā paññatti yadidaṃ buddho’’ti (mahāni. 192) –
这是义释圣典的方法。又因在此处它与《无碍解道》圣典并无差别,为显示依两者中的任何一种亦能成就义理,故说“或无碍解道的方法”,此中“或”字表不确定义。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ niddesapāḷinayo. Yasmā cettha tassā paṭisambhidāpāḷiyā (paṭi. ma. 1.162) bhedo natthi, tasmā dvīsu ekenapi atthasiddhīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭisambhidānayo vā’’ti aniyamattho vāsaddo vutto.
于《无碍解道注》及《大义释注》中,正如世间了知者被称为“已了知者”,同样,觉知诸谛者以纯粹作者之义而称为佛陀。正如吹落叶之风被称为“落叶风”,同样,令众生觉悟者以成因为者之义而称为佛陀,此处已将因义含摄在内。以一切知性而为佛陀,是以能觉知一切法的智慧而为佛陀;以一切见性而为佛陀,是以能觉悟一切法的智慧而为佛陀;以不从他闻性而为佛陀,是并非由他人令觉,而是自己觉悟故为佛陀;以开敷性而为佛陀,是如莲花绽放种种功德,以开显之义而为佛陀;以称为漏尽者而为佛陀,如此六句,意指由舍断令心狭隘之法,如同从睡眠中完全醒觉之人,因从一切烦恼睡眠中完全醒觉而称为佛陀。其中,“称为”与“被称”义理相同,故“以称为”即“以部分”之义。以无贪着、无见着故,称为无着。因一切烦恼连同习气皆已断除,故以绝对之语特说“绝对离贪”等。绝对无烦恼,即远离贪、瞋、痴等残余一切烦恼而成为无烦恼。已行唯一之道而为佛陀,如同“行”之义可理解为“觉”之义,“觉”之义亦可获得“行”之义,故显示巴利原文
Tattha (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.162; mahāni. aṭṭha. 192) yathā loke avagantā ‘‘avagato’’ti vuccati, evaṃ bujjhitā saccānīti buddho suddhakattuvasena. Yathā paṇṇasosā vātā ‘‘paṇṇasusā’’ti vuccanti, evaṃ bodhetā pajāyāti buddho hetukattuvasena. Hetuattho cettha antonīto . Sabbaññutāya buddhoti sabbadhammabujjhanasamatthāya buddhiyā buddhoti attho. Sabbadassāvitāya buddhoti sabbadhammabodhanasamatthāya buddhiyā buddhoti attho. Anaññaneyyatāya buddhoti aññena abodhito sayameva buddhattā buddhoti attho. Visavitāya buddhoti nānāguṇavisavanato padumamiva vikasanaṭṭhena buddhoti attho. Khīṇāsavasaṅkhātena buddhoti evamādīhi chahi padehi cittasaṅkocakaradhammappahānena niddākkhayavibuddho puriso viya sabbakilesaniddākkhayavibuddhattā buddhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha saṅkhā saṅkhātanti atthato ekattā saṅkhātenāti vacanassa koṭṭhāsenāti attho. Taṇhālepadiṭṭhilepābhāvena nirupalepasaṅkhātena. Savāsanānaṃ sabbakilesānaṃ pahīnattā ekantavacaneneva visesetvā ‘‘ekantavītarāgo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekantanikkilesoti rāgadosamohāvasesehi sabbakilesehi nikkileso. Ekāyanamaggaṃ gatoti buddhoti gamanatthānaṃ buddhiatthatā viya buddhiatthānampi gamanatthatā labbhatīti ekāyanamaggaṃ gatattā buddhoti vuccatīti attho. Eko anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti buddhoti na parehi buddhattā buddho, atha kho sayameva anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhattā buddhoti attho. Abuddhivihatattā buddhipaṭilābhā buddhoti buddhi buddhaṃ bodhoti anatthantaraṃ. Tattha yathā rattaguṇayogato ratto paṭo, evaṃ buddhaguṇayogato buddhoti ñāpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tato paraṃ buddhoti netaṃ nāmantiādi atthānugatāyaṃ paññattīti bodhanatthaṃ vuttanti evamettha imināpi kāraṇena bhagavā buddhoti veditabbo.
今为显示“世尊”一词之义,说:“世尊,此则是他的……”等。其中,“他的”是指世尊的。“具德殊胜、众生中最上、应受尊敬之称谓”,即因具足一切戒等功德而殊胜,由此而为一切众生中最上者、应受尊敬者,出于尊敬而使用的称号,这便是“世尊”。正如世间怙主,具足无量、无与伦比的威德与戒等殊胜功德,以先除一切违缘为先导,致力于施设无余安乐,以无上修行成就,对包括天人在内的众生作最极饶益,故于无量世界、无量众生中,成为最上的尊敬依处。显示巴利原文
Idāni bhagavāti imassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhagavāti idaṃ panassā’’tiādi. Tattha assāti bhagavato. Guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamagarugāravādhivacananti sabbehi sīlādiguṇehi visiṭṭhassa tato eva sabbasattehi uttamassa garuno gāravavasena vuccamānavacanametaṃ bhagavāti. Tathā hi lokanātho aparimitanirupamappabhāvasīlādiguṇavisesasamaṅgitāya sabbānatthaparihārapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā sadevamanussāya pajāya accantupakāritāya ca aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ uttamaṃ gāravaṭṭhānanti.
“世尊”一词意为最胜,即表最胜之语,因与最胜功德相伴,故称为“最胜”。又,“被说”即是言语、义理,因此,以“世尊”一词所称说的义理,彼即是“最胜”——这是它的含义。“世尊”一词为无上,此处理趣亦同。“应受尊敬者”,即具足应受尊敬之体,因具足应受尊敬的功德。或者说,值得特别恭敬,故为“应受尊敬者”,即值得尊敬之义。有人说:“传授技艺等者为师,却未必是应受尊敬者,但此世尊并非如此,所以先称‘师’,再称‘应受尊敬者’。”显示巴利原文
Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhanti seṭṭhavācakaṃ vacanaṃ seṭṭhaguṇasahacaraṇato ‘‘seṭṭha’’nti vuttaṃ. Atha vā vuccatīti vacanaṃ, attho, tasmā yo ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vacanena vacanīyo attho, so seṭṭhoti attho. Bhagavāti vacanamuttamanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Gāravayuttoti garubhāvayutto garuguṇayogato. Garukaraṇaṃ vā sātisayaṃ arahatīti gāravayutto, gāravārahoti attho. ‘‘Sippādisikkhāpakā garū honti, na ca gāravayuttā, ayaṃ pana tādiso na hoti, tasmā ‘garū’ti vatvā ‘gāravayutto’ti vutta’’nti keci.
“以功德殊胜为因,此‘世尊’即是世尊之名”,为了详细分析这一略说之义,先以义理提取的方式显示名称本身,故说:“名称有四种”等。其中,“依状态而立的”,即依状态而被认知,依彼彼状态而施设、称呼。“依相而立的”,即依彼彼相而称呼。“依征兆而立的”,即从征兆而来。“随意而生的”,即随欲而生、随欲而来、随意而成。为了显示依状态而立等名称的具体形态,又说:“其中,如犊、幼、牡牛”等。在此,以第一个词中的“等”字摄取了“愚者、青年、老者”等;以第二个摄取了“剃度者、结发者”等;以第三个摄取了“多闻者、说法者、禅修者”等;以第四个摄取了“恶行燃烧、圣教”等。为以遮遣的方式确立“依征兆而立的”之义,说:“非因大幻”等。而“以解脱为终的”,显示此名在圣者出生之刹那即已生起。如果是以解脱为终,那么为何与其他漏尽者不共呢?回答是:“与获得一切知智同时”。因为诸佛证得阿罗汉果时,是与一切知智等一切佛陀功德一同成就的,所以说“以解脱为终的”。“现证施设”,即依现证一切法之相而有的施设。或者说,“现证施设”即现……显示巴利原文
Guṇavisesahetukaṃ ‘‘bhagavā’’ti idaṃ bhagavato nāmanti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato vibhajitukāmo nāmaṃyeva tāva atthuddhāravasena dassento ‘‘catubbidhañhi nāma’’ntiādimāha. Tattha āvatthikanti avatthāya viditaṃ taṃ taṃ avatthaṃ upādāya paññattaṃ voharitaṃ. Tathā liṅgikaṃ tena tena liṅgena voharitaṃ. Nemittikanti nimittato āgataṃ. Adhiccasamuppannanti yadicchāya pavattaṃ, yadicchāya āgataṃ yadicchakaṃ. Idāni āvatthikādīni nāmāni sarūpato dassento āha ‘‘tattha vaccho dammo balibaddo’’tiādi. Tattha paṭhamena ādi-saddena bālo yuvā vuḍḍhoti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti, dutiyena muṇḍī jaṭīti evamādiṃ, tatiyena bahussuto dhammakathiko jhāyīti evamādiṃ, catutthena aghapadīpanaṃ pāvacananti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Nemittikanti vuttamatthaṃ byatirekavasena patiṭṭhāpetuṃ ‘‘na mahāmāyāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vimokkhantikanti iminā pana idaṃ nāmaṃ ariyāya jātiyā jātakkhaṇeyeva jātanti dasseti. Yadi vimokkhantikaṃ, atha kasmā aññehi khīṇāsavehi asādhāraṇanti āha ‘‘saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā’’ti. Buddhānañhi arahattaphalaṃ nipphajjamānaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇādīhi sabbehi buddhaguṇehi saddhiṃyeva nipphajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vimokkhantika’’nti. Sacchikā paññattīti sabbadhammānaṃ sacchikiriyāya nimittā paññatti. Atha vā sacchikā paññattīti paccakkhasiddhā paññatti. Yaṃguṇanimittā hi sā, te satthu paccakkhabhūtā, taṃguṇā viya sāpi sacchikatā eva nāma hoti, na paresaṃ vohāramattenāti adhippāyo.
说“称颂”时,因对大长老表示尊重,故用复数形式;或指结集者所作之随说。“具分者”,指具有自在等诸分,即“具有分”之义。“受用者”,指此尊以戒受持、亲近道果等圣法宝,以及具足少声等功德之阿兰若、林野、偏僻住处,故名“受用者”,即以受用为性。“具份者”,谓此尊为衣、食等四资具之份,也为义、法、解脱之味,以及增上戒等之份,这是“具份者”的含义。“分别了法宝”,即已分别、广分别法宝者。“令破裂”,谓令贪等恶法破裂,故称“世尊”,此为其义。世间亦称“世尊”为尊重者,故说“重”。因尊重,故得称世尊。“伊底”字表因由之义。凡无“伊底”字之处,如“具分者”等,应各随文义相应。“具福”,即具有福德。“以多种方法”,指以身修习等种种修习次第。“善修自性”,即正确修习其自性者。此处“自性”为与格,故云“善修自性”,即善修其自性。而《大疏结》中说:“善修自性,善修其身。”“到达诸有之边际涅槃”,即抵达涅槃,涅槃是诸有之终边。显示巴利原文
Vadantīti mahātherassa garubhāvato bahuvacanenāha, saṅgītikārehi vā katamanuvādaṃ sandhāya. Issariyādibhedo bhago assa atthīti bhagī. Maggaphalādiariyadhammaratanaṃ araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni appasaddādiguṇayuttāni bhaji sevi sīlenāti bhajī, bhajanasīloti attho. Bhāgīti cīvarapiṇḍapātādīnaṃ catunnaṃ paccayānañceva atthadhammavimuttirasassa ca adhisīlādīnañca bhāgīti attho. Vibhaji pavibhaji dhammaratananti vibhattavā. Akāsi bhagganti rāgādipāpadhammaṃ bhaggaṃ akāsīti bhagavāti attho. Garupi loke bhagavāti vuccatīti āha ‘‘garū’’ti. Yasmā garu, tasmāpi bhagavāti vuttaṃ hoti. Hetuattho hi iti-saddo. So ca yattha iti-saddo natthi bhagītiādīsu, tattha paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Bhāgyamassa atthīti bhāgyavā. Bahūhi ñāyehīti kāyabhāvanādikehi anekehi bhāvanākkamehi. Subhāvitattanoti sammadeva bhāvitasabhāvassa. Paccatte cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ, tena subhāvitattāti vuttaṃ hoti, subhāvitasabhāvoti attho. Mahāgaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘subhāvitattano subhāvitakāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhavānaṃ antaṃ nibbānaṃ gatoti bhavantago.
所谓“依《义释》所说之方式”,此处《义释》之方式如下——显示巴利原文
Niddesevuttanayenāti etthāyaṃ niddesanayo –
“世尊”一词,是表示敬重的称谓。此外,已破贪,故为世尊;已破嗔,故为世尊;已破痴,故为世尊;已破慢,故为世尊;已破见,故为世尊;已破渴爱,故为世尊;已破烦恼,故为世尊;已分别、细分、广分法宝,故为世尊;作诸有之边际者,故为世尊;已修身、已修戒、已修心、已修慧者,故为世尊。又或,世尊亲近阿兰若、林野、偏僻住处,少声、少喧、远人风、宜独处、适宴坐,故为世尊。又或,世尊是衣、食、住处、病缘药资具之份者,故为世尊。又或,世尊是义味、法味、解脱味、增上戒、增上心、增上慧之份者,故为世尊。又或,世尊是四禅、四无量、四无色定之份者,故为世尊。又或,世尊是八解脱、八胜处、九次第住定之份者,故为世尊。又或,世尊是十想修习、十遍处定、入出息念定、不净定之份者,故为世尊。又或,世尊是四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、圣八支道之份者,故为世尊。又或,世尊是十如来力、四无畏、四无碍解、六神通、六佛法之份者,故为世尊。“世尊”此名,非……乃至……现证之施设,即此“世尊”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Bhagavāti gāravādhivacanametaṃ. Apica bhaggarāgoti bhagavā, bhaggadosoti bhagavā, bhaggamohoti bhagavā, bhaggamānoti bhagavā, bhaggadiṭṭhīti bhagavā, bhaggataṇhoti bhagavā, bhaggakilesoti bhagavā, bhaji vibhaji pavibhaji dhammaratananti bhagavā, bhavānaṃ antakaroti bhagavā, bhāvitakāyo bhāvitasīlo bhāvitacitto bhāvitapaññoti bhagavā, bhaji vā bhagavā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni appasaddāni appanigghosāni vijanavātāni manussarāhasseyyakāni paṭisallānasāruppānīti bhagavā. Bhāgī vā bhagavā cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānanti bhagavā. Bhāgī vā bhagavā attharasassa dhammarasassa vimuttirasassa adhisīlassa adhicittassa adhipaññāyāti bhagavā. Bhāgī vā bhagavā catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ catunnaṃ appamaññānaṃ catunnaṃ arūpasamāpattīnanti bhagavā. Bhāgī vā bhagavā aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ abhibhāyatanānaṃ navannaṃ anupubbavihārasamāpattīnanti bhagavā. Bhāgī vā bhagavā dasannaṃ saññābhāvanānaṃ dasannaṃ kasiṇasamāpattīnaṃ ānāpānassatisamādhissa asubhasamāpattiyāti bhagavā. Bhāgī vā bhagavā catunnaṃ satipaṭṭhānānaṃ catunnaṃ sammappadhānānaṃ catunnaṃ iddhipādānaṃ pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ pañcannaṃ balānaṃ sattannaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ ariyassa aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassāti bhagavā. Bhāgī vā bhagavā dasannaṃ tathāgatabalānaṃ catunnaṃ vesārajjānaṃ catunnaṃ paṭisambhidānaṃ channaṃ abhiññānaṃ channaṃ buddhadhammānanti bhagavā. Bhagavāti netaṃ nāmaṃ…pe… sacchikā paññatti yadidaṃ bhagavā’’ti (mahāni. 84).
此处,“尊敬之称谓”等词,虽未按偈颂中出现的顺序逐一说明,但应知上述诸词,皆是以释义的方式加以解说。其中,“尊敬之称谓”,是表达对尊长敬意的话。“分说”,指分门别类地宣说。故云“分别、细分法宝”。所谓“法宝”,即道、果等圣法。再如“亲近”,此处义为“亲近修习”。“有份者”,指值得称为有份者。再言“有份者”,此处义为“以亲近为习”。“义味”,即依义理所生之滋味。安住于解脱门之首而说法时,听者随顺彼义理而生喜悦与欣悦,此即义味。随顺法而生起者,即为法味。正如所说“得义知、得法知”。“解脱味”,是以解脱为体或依于解脱之滋味。“想修习”,即无常想等十种想之修习。“六种佛法”,指六种不共智。各处“世尊”之称,应依语源的方式加以理解。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘gāravādhivacana’’ntiādīni yadipi gāthāyaṃ āgatapadānukkamena na niddiṭṭhāni, yathārahaṃ pana tesaṃ sabbesampi niddesabhāvena veditabbāni. Tattha gāravādhivacananti garūnaṃ garubhāvavācakaṃ vacanaṃ. Bhajīti bhāgaso kathesi. Tenāha ‘‘vibhaji pavibhaji dhammaratana’’nti. Maggaphalādi ariyadhammoyeva dhammaratanaṃ. Puna bhajīti imassa sevīti attho. Bhāgīti bhāgābhidheyyavā. Puna bhāgīti ettha bhajanasīloti attho. Attharasassāti atthasannissayassa rasassa. Vimuttāyatanasīse hi ṭhatvā dhammaṃ kathentassa suṇantassa ca tadatthaṃ ārabbha uppajjanakapītisomanassaṃ attharaso. Dhammaṃ ārabbha dhammaraso. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammaveda’’nti (a. ni. 6.10). Vimuttirasassāti vimuttibhūtassa vimuttisannissayassa vā rasassa. Saññābhāvanānanti aniccasaññādīnaṃ dasannaṃ saññābhāvanānaṃ . Channaṃ buddhadhammānanti cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha tattha bhagavātisaddasiddhi niruttinayeneva veditabbā.
虽然以“bhāgyavā”等词所表达的意义,已摄于《义释》“bhagī bhajī”等偈颂中,然而配合词形成、义辨别、义连结等的注释方法,与彼有别,因此说“这是另一种方式”。所谓“vaṇṇavipariyāyo”等,其中“iti”表“等”义,由此则包含了音变、音失、依词根义而连结这三种特征。所谓“saddanayena”,即依词语特征的方式。因“pisodara”等词属于不规则类,故说“取pisodara等插入之特性”。插入即是其特性,因为令其归属此类便是插入。所谓“pārappatti”,即到达彼岸、到达波罗蜜的状态。所谓“bhāgya”,即是善。其中,道善能生出世间乐,其余善能生世间乐;或者,其余善亦能成为还灭的亲依止,辗转而生出世间的乐。显示巴利原文
Yadipi ‘‘bhāgyavā’’tiādīhi padehi vuccamāno attho ‘‘bhagī bhajī’’ti (mahāni. 84) niddesagāthāya saṅgahito eva, tathāpi padasiddhiatthavibhāgaatthayojanādisahito saṃvaṇṇanānayo tato aññākāroti vuttaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ pana aparo nayo’’ti. Vaṇṇavipariyāyoti etanti ettha itisaddo ādiattho, tena vaṇṇavikāro vaṇṇalopo dhātuatthena niyojanañcāti imaṃ tividhaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Saddanayenāti saddalakkhaṇanayena. Pisodarādīnaṃ saddānaṃ ākatigaṇabhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘pisodarādipakkhepalakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā’’ti. Pakkhipanameva lakkhaṇaṃ. Tappariyāpannatākaraṇañhi pakkhipanaṃ. Pārappattanti paramukkaṃsagataṃ pāramībhāvappattaṃ. Bhāgyanti kusalaṃ. Tattha maggakusalaṃ lokuttarasukhanibbattakaṃ, itaraṃ lokiyasukhanibbattakaṃ, itarampi vā vivaṭṭupanissayaṃ pariyāyato lokuttarasukhanibbattakaṃ siyā.
现在为分解显示“世尊”一词的意义而说“因为……”等。其中,贪等以单一的方式摄;同样,颠倒作意以颠倒的共通性摄;无惭等以成对的方式摄。其中,愤怒以生气为特相,它生起于九种怨恨事。依于“他骂了我、打了我”等(法句经3-4)而一再生气、缠缚于心者,是怨恨。这两种都只是嗔恚,但因生起的状态不同而分别开说。一次生起的愤怒仅是愤怒,其后的是怨恨。曾如此说:“前时是怒,后时是怨恨”(分别论891)。对于在家者(中部注1.71)或出家者,破坏其所做善行的,是抹杀。因为,在家者有时被某位怜悯者从贫穷中安置于高位,后来却说“你为我做过什么?”而破坏那人的善行。出家者也是如此,从沙弥时起,由阿阇梨或和尚以四资具、教授教诫等摄受,教导说法、理趣、论藏善巧等,后来得到国王、大臣等恭敬尊重,却对阿阇梨、和尚不恭敬,行为傲慢,被人说“此人是我们从小这样摄受养育的,现在却变得如此无情”,他却说“你们为我做过什么?”而破坏他们的善行。对他而言,这种破坏先前所作、以功德为特相的善行,犹如擦去身上……显示巴利原文
Idāni bhagavāti imassa atthaṃ vibhajitvā dassento āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Tattha lobhādayo ekakavasena gahitā, tathā viparītamanasikāro vipallāsabhāvasāmaññena, ahirikādayo dukavasena. Tattha kujjhanalakkhaṇo kodho, so navavidhaāghātavatthusambhavo. ‘‘Akkocchi maṃ avadhi ma’’ntiādinā (dha. pa. 3-4) punappunaṃ kujjhanavasena cittapariyonandhano upanāho. Ubhayampi paṭighoyeva, so pavattinānattato bhinditvā vutto. Sakiṃ uppanno kodho kodhoyeva, taduttari upanāho. Vuttañcetaṃ ‘‘pubbakāle kodho, aparakāle upanāho’’ti (vibha. 891). Agāriyassa (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.71) anagāriyassa vā sukatakaraṇavināsano makkho. Agāriyopi hi kenaci anukampakena daliddo samāno ucce ṭhāne ṭhapito aparena samayena ‘‘kiṃ tayā mayhaṃ kata’’nti tassa sukatakaraṇaṃ vināseti. Anagāriyopi sāmaṇerakālato pabhuti ācariyena vā upajjhāyena vā catūhi paccayehi uddesaparipucchādīhi ca anuggahetvā dhammakathānayappakaraṇakosallādīni sikkhāpito aparena samayena rājarājamahāmattādīhi sakkato garukato ācariyupajjhāyesu acittīkato caramāno ‘‘ayaṃ amhehi daharakāle evaṃ anuggahito saṃvaḍḍhito ca, atha ca panidāni nissineho jāto’’ti vuccamāno ‘‘kiṃ mayhaṃ tumhehi kata’’nti tesaṃ sukatakaraṇaṃ vināseti, tasseso pubbakāritālakkhaṇassa guṇassa vināsano udakapuñchaniyā viya sarīrānugataṃ udakaṃ nipuñchanto makkho. Tathā hi so paresaṃ guṇānaṃ makkhanaṭṭhena ‘‘makkho’’ti vuccati. Paḷāsatīti paḷāso, parassa guṇe dassetvā attano guṇehi same karotīti attho. So pana bahussutepi puggale ajjhottharitvā ‘‘īdisassa ca bahussutassa aniyatā gati, tava vā mama vā ko viseso’’ti, rattaññū cirapabbajite puggale ajjhottharitvā ‘‘tvampi imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajito, ahampi pabbajito, tvampi sīlamatte ṭhito, ahampī’’tiādinā nayena uppajjamāno yugaggāho. Yugaggāhalakkhaṇo hi paḷāso.
对他人的恭敬等感到减损、嫉妒的,是嫉妒。隐藏自己的成就,无法忍受与他人共享的,是悭吝。欺骗性的行为是谄,其特相是掩盖自己的过失。同样,它由于掩盖自身存在的过失,如障眼幻术一般,故称为“谄”。以显示自身本不存在的功德为特相,以欺诈的状态生起的,是诡诈。因为显示不实的功德被称为“欺诈”。欺诈之人犹如阿耶那鱼。所谓阿耶那鱼,是一种蛇头鱼尾的鱼。据说,它向鱼示现尾巴,向蛇示现头部,以示“我与你们同类”。同样,欺诈者无论接近哪位经师或论师,都这样说:“我是您的弟子,您是我的依怙,我不离开您。”这样,他们会认为“此人对我们有恭敬、有顺从”。对他而言,如此以欺诈的状态生起的,即是诡诈。显示巴利原文
Paresaṃ sakkārādīni khīyamānā usūyamānā issā. Attano sampattiyā nigūhanaṃ parehi sādhāraṇabhāvaṃ asahamānaṃ macchariyaṃ. Vañcanikacariyabhūtā māyā, sā sakadosapaṭicchādanalakkhaṇā. Tathā hi sā attano vijjamānadosapaṭicchādanato cakkhumohanamāyā viyāti ‘‘māyā’’ti vuccati. Attano avijjamānaguṇappakāsanalakkhaṇaṃ kerāṭikabhāvena uppajjamānaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ. Asantaguṇadīpanañhi ‘‘kerāṭiya’’nti vuccati. Kerāṭiko hi puggalo āyanamaccho viya hoti. Āyanamaccho nāma sappamukhamacchavālā ekā macchajāti. So kira macchānaṃ naṅguṭṭhaṃ dasseti, sappānaṃ sīsaṃ ‘‘tumhākaṃ sadiso aha’’nti jānāpetuṃ, evameva kerāṭiko puggalo yaṃ yaṃ suttantikaṃ vā ābhidhammikaṃ vā upasaṅkamati, taṃ taṃ evaṃ vadati ‘‘ahaṃ tumhākaṃ antevāsī, tumhe mayhaṃ anukampakā, nāhaṃ tumhe muñcāmī’’ti. Evamete ‘‘sagāravo ayaṃ amhesu sappatisso’’ti maññissanti, tassevaṃ kerāṭikabhāvena uppajjamānaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ.
由于完全没有柔和,如同充满了风的皮囊那般僵硬,又像不肯弯曲的棍子,致使头颅高昂、身体亦不随顺——这便是“傲慢”。比此更进一步的,是“好胜”。好胜有两种所得:依于不善,与依于善。其中,在家者见到他人所做的装饰等,便做其两倍、三倍而生起;出家者对于他人所学的多少或所讲的多少,以慢心做其两倍、三倍而生起——这是不善,因为具足此好胜之人,便会做两倍、三倍之事。在家者中,若有一人准备了一处房产,另一人便准备两处,又一人四处,又一人八处,又一人十六处。出家者中,若有一人掌握了一部尼柯耶,心想“我不可低于他”,另一人便掌握两部,又一人三部,又一人四部,又一人五部。以好胜心而多学,是不恰当的。这是不善分,是趣向地狱之道。然而,在家者见到他人布施一份筹食,自己便想要布施两份或三份而生起;出家者见到他人掌握了一部尼柯耶,不依慢心,仅仅因此见而克服懈怠,想要掌握两部尼柯耶而生起——这是善。因为在善分之中,若有人布施一份筹食,便有人布施两份;若有人布施两份,便有人布施四份——这是恰当的。比丘见到他人掌握了一部尼柯耶,立于还灭分而想:“我若掌握两部尼柯耶,读诵修习,便能安乐。”显示巴利原文
Sabbaso maddavābhāvena vātabharitabhastasadisassa thaddhabhāvassa anonamitadaṇḍasadisatāya paggahitasiraanivātavuttikāyassa ca kārako thambho. Taduttarikaraṇo sārambho. So duvidhena labbhati akusalavasena ceva kusalavasena ca. Tattha agāriyassa parena kataṃ alaṅkārādiṃ disvā taddiguṇataddiguṇakaraṇena uppajjamāno, anagāriyassa ca yattakaṃ yattakaṃ paro pariyāpuṇāti vā katheti vā, mānavasena taddiguṇataddiguṇakaraṇena uppajjamāno akusalo. Tena hi samannāgato puggalo taddiguṇaṃ taddiguṇaṃ karoti. Agāriyo samāno ekenekasmiṃ gharavatthusmiṃ sajjite aparo dve vatthūni sajjeti, aparo cattāro, aparo aṭṭha, aparo soḷasa. Anagāriyo samāno ekenekasmiṃ nikāye gahite ‘‘nāhaṃ etassa heṭṭhā bhavissāmī’’ti aparo dve gaṇhāti, aparo tayo, aparo cattāro, aparo pañca. Sārambhavasena hi gaṇhituṃ na vaṭṭati. Akusalapakkho hesa nirayagāmimaggo. Agāriyassa pana paraṃ ekaṃ salākabhattaṃ dentaṃ disvā attano dve vā tīṇi vā dātukāmatāya uppajjamāno, anagāriyassa ca parena ekanikāye gahite mānaṃ anissāya kevalaṃ taṃ disvā attano ālasiyaṃ abhibhuyya dve nikāye gahetukāmatāya uppajjamāno kusalo. Kusalapakkhavasena hi ekasmiṃ ekaṃ salākabhattaṃ dente dve, dve dente cattāri dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Bhikkhunāpi parena ekasmiṃ nikāye gahite ‘‘dve nikāye gahetvā sajjhāyantassa me phāsu hotī’’ti vivaṭṭapakkhe ṭhatvā taduttari gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati, idha pana akusalapakkhiyo taduttarikaraṇo ‘‘sārambho’’ti vutto.
依于出生等,以“我是优越者”等抬高、推崇的方式而生起的,名为“慢”。以极度推崇的方式而生起的,是“过慢”。应当了知:先前将自己与某人视作同等,之后又认为自己更胜、更优而生起的,即是过慢。依于出生等而陶醉的状态,是“骄”;从意义上说,它也是慢。然而,此骄有出生骄、种姓骄、健康骄、青春骄、生命骄、利得骄、恭敬骄、尊重骄、推崇骄、随从骄、财富骄、容貌骄、闻骄、辩才骄、耆旧骄、常乞食骄、不轻慢骄、威仪骄、神通骄、名声骄、戒骄、禅定骄、技艺骄、身高骄、体围骄、体形骄、圆满骄等多种。显示巴利原文
Jātiādīni nissāya seyyassa ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā unnativasena paggaṇhanavasena pavatto māno. Abbhunnativasena pavatto atimāno. Pubbe kenaci attānaṃ sadisaṃ katvā pacchā tato adhikato dahato uppajjamānako atimānoti veditabbo. Jātiādiṃ paṭicca majjanākāro mado, sopi atthato māno eva. So pana jātimado gottamado ārogyamado yobbanamado jīvitamado lābhamado sakkāramado garukāramado purekkhāramado parivāramado bhogamado vaṇṇamado sutamado paṭibhānamado rattaññumado piṇḍapātikamado anavaññattimado iriyāpathamado iddhimado yasamado sīlamado jhānamado sippamado ārohamado pariṇāhamado saṇṭhānamado pāripūrimadoti anekavidho.
其中,依出生而生起的、以陶醉状态现行之慢,是出生骄。它于刹帝利等四种姓中皆会生起。因为具足出生的刹帝利,会生起慢心:“没有像我这样的其他人,其余的是中途兴起的刹帝利,而我则是传承而来的刹帝利。”婆罗门等也是如此。依种姓而生起的、以陶醉状态现行之慢,是种姓骄。它也在刹帝利等四种姓中皆会生起。刹帝利也生起慢心:“我是憍陈如种姓”“我是日种姓”等。婆罗门也生起慢心:“我是迦叶种姓”“我是跋罗堕阇种姓”等。吠舍、首陀罗也依各自的家系种姓而生起慢心。在健康骄等之中,以“我健康,其余人多病,我连痒病都没有”的方式,依陶醉而生起的慢,称为健康骄。以“我年轻,其余众生的身体如同立于悬崖的树,而我正当青春”的方式,依陶醉而生起的慢,是青春骄。以“我长寿,我活得久,我将活得久,我安乐活,我安乐地活着,我将安乐地活着”的方式,依陶醉而生起的慢,称为生命骄。以“我有利得,其余众生利得少,而我的利得没有限量”的方式,依陶醉而生起的慢,称为利得骄。显示巴利原文
Tattha (vibha. aṭṭha. 843-844) jātiṃ nissāya uppanno majjanākārappavatto māno jātimado, so khattiyādīnaṃ catunnampi vaṇṇānaṃ uppajjati. Jātisampanno hi khattiyo ‘‘mādiso añño natthi, avasesā antarā uṭṭhāya khattiyā jātā, ahaṃ pana vaṃsāgatakhattiyo’’ti mānaṃ karoti. Brāhmaṇādīsupi eseva nayo. Gottaṃ nissāya uppanno majjanākārappavatto māno gottamado, sopi khattiyādīnaṃ catunnampi vaṇṇānaṃ uppajjati. Khattiyopi hi ‘‘ahaṃ koṇḍaññagotto, ahaṃ ādiccagotto’’ti mānaṃ karoti. Brāhmaṇopi ‘‘ahaṃ kassapagotto, ahaṃ bhāradvājagotto’’ti mānaṃ karoti. Vessopi suddopi attano attano kulagottaṃ nissāya mānaṃ karoti. Ārogyamadādīsupi ‘‘ahaṃ arogo, sesā rogabahulā, kaṇḍuvanamattampi mayhaṃ byādhi nāma natthī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno ārogyamado nāma. ‘‘Ahaṃ taruṇo, avasesasattānaṃ attabhāvo papāte ṭhitarukkhasadiso, ahaṃ pana paṭhamavaye ṭhito’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno yobbanamado. ‘‘Ahaṃ ciraṃ jīviṃ, ciraṃ jīvāmi, ciraṃ jīvissāmi, sukhaṃ jīviṃ, sukhaṃ jīvāmi, sukhaṃ jīvissāmī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno jīvitamado nāma. ‘‘Ahaṃ lābhī, avasesā sattā appalābhā, mayhaṃ pana lābhassa pamāṇaṃ natthī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno lābhamado nāma.
心想“其余的众生只得到这样那样的东西,而我却获得善作、精良的衣等资具”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为恭敬慢。心想“人们踩着其余比丘的脚背而行,连'这是沙门'的念头都没有而加以礼敬,然而见到我却顶礼,像对待石伞盖一样尊重,像对待火团一样视我为不可触碰”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为尊重慢。心想“凡是生起的问题都由我亲口解决,外出乞食时和归来时都以我为先导、环绕着我而行”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为推崇慢。在家者以大随从自居,心想“百人乃至千人围绕着我”;出家者心想“百沙门乃至千沙门围绕着我,其余的人随从很少,而我的随从众多且清净”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为随从慢。心想“其余的众生连自己的受用都得不到,而我储藏的财富没有限量”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为财富慢。心想“其余的众生容貌丑陋、形色低劣,而我容貌俊美、令人欢喜”,以及心想“其余的众生没有德行、名声不显,而我的名声在天人世间广为人知:'这位长老多闻,这位长老持戒,这位长老具足头陀功德'”,像这样缘于身体容貌与功德名声,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为容貌慢。显示巴利原文
‘‘Avasesā sattā yaṃ vā taṃ vā labhanti, ahaṃ pana sukataṃ paṇītaṃ cīvarādipaccayaṃ labhāmī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno sakkāramado nāma. ‘‘Avasesabhikkhūnaṃ pādapiṭṭhiyaṃ akkamitvā gacchantā manussā ‘ayaṃ samaṇo’tipi na vandanti, maṃ pana disvā vandanti, pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garukaṃ katvā aggikkhandhaṃ viya ca durāsadaṃ katvā maññantī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno garukāramado nāma. ‘‘Uppanno pañho mayhameva mukhena chijjati, bhikkhācāraṃ gacchantāpi āgacchantāpi mameva purato katvā parivāretvā gacchantī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno purekkhāramado nāma. Agāriyassa tāva mahāparivārassa ‘‘purisasatampi purisasahassampi maṃ parivāretī’’ti, anagāriyassa ‘‘samaṇasatampi samaṇasahassampi maṃ parivāreti, sesā appaparivārā, ahaṃ mahāparivāro ceva suciparivāro cā’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno parivāramado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā attano paribhogamattakampi na labhanti, mayhaṃ pana nidhānagatasseva dhanassa pamāṇaṃ natthī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno bhogamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā dubbaṇṇā durūpā, ahaṃ abhirūpo pāsādiko’’tipi ‘‘avasesasattā nigguṇā patthaṭaakittino, mayhaṃ pana kittisaddo devamanussesu pākaṭo ‘itipi thero bahussuto, itipi sīlavā, itipi dhutaguṇayutto’’’ti, evaṃ sarīravaṇṇaṃ guṇavaṇṇañca paṭicca majjanavasena uppanno māno vaṇṇamado nāma.
心想“其余的众生少闻寡学,而我博学多闻”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为闻慢。心想“其余的众生没有辩才,而我的辩才无量无边”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为辩才慢。心想“我是耆旧长宿,我知道某佛史、某王统史、某地方史、某村落史,以及昼夜的区分、星宿时刻的配合”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为耆旧慢。心想“其余的比丘是半路出家后才成为常乞食者,而我自出生以来便一直是常乞食者”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为常乞食慢。心想“其余的众生被轻蔑、被鄙视,而我却不被轻视”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为不轻慢慢。心想“其余众生威仪不能令人欢喜,而我的威仪令人欢喜”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为威仪慢。心想“其余的众生如同被折断翅膀的乌鸦,而我却有大神通、大威力”,或者心想“我所做的任何事业都能成就”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为神通慢。显示巴利原文
‘‘Avasesā sattā appassutā, ahaṃ pana bahussuto’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno sutamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā appaṭibhānā, mayhaṃ pana paṭibhānassa pamāṇaṃ natthī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno paṭibhānamado nāma. ‘‘Ahaṃ rattaññū asukaṃ buddhavaṃsaṃ rājavaṃsaṃ janapadavaṃsaṃ gāmavaṃsaṃ rattindivaparicchedaṃ nakkhattamuhuttayogaṃ jānāmī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno rattaññumado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā bhikkhū antarā piṇḍapātikā jātā, ahaṃ pana jātipiṇḍapātiko’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno piṇḍapātikamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā uññātā avaññātā, ahaṃ pana anavaññāto’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno anavaññattimado nāma. ‘‘Avasesānaṃ sattānaṃ iriyāpatho apāsādiko, mayhaṃ pana pāsādiko’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno iriyāpathamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā chinnapakkhakākasadisā, ahaṃ pana mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo’’ti vā ‘‘ahaṃ yaṃ yaṃ kammaṃ karomi, taṃ taṃ ijjhatī’’ti vā majjanavasena uppanno māno iddhimado nāma.
然而,名声慢无论是在家者还是出家者,都应当加以阐明。因为有些在家者是十八种行业团体中某一行的首领,他心想“其余的人由我安排差遣,由我调度指挥”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,便名为名声慢。有些出家者在某处是上座首领,他心想“其余的比丘都遵行我的教导,我是首领”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,也名为名声慢。心想“其余的众生破戒,而我持戒”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为戒慢。心想“其余的众生即使在如鸡饮水般短暂的时间里,也得不到心一境性,而我却获得了近行定与安止定”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为禅那慢。心想“其余的众生没有技艺,而我有技艺”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为技艺慢。心想“其余的众生身材矮小,而我高大”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为身高慢。心想“其余的众生非矮即高,而我如同榕树般圆满匀称”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为体态慢。心想“其余众生的体形丑陋可厌,而我的体形可爱悦目”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为相貌慢。心想“其余众生的身体缺陷众多,而我的身体连毛发尖那么大的过失也没有”,依此陶醉而生起的慢,名为无暇慢。显示巴利原文
Yasamado pana agārikenapi anagārikenapi dīpetabbo. Agārikopi hi ekacco aṭṭhārasasu seṇīsu ekissā jeṭṭhako hoti, tassa ‘‘avasese purise ahaṃ paṭṭhapemi, ahaṃ vicāremī’’ti, anagārikopi ekacco katthaci jeṭṭhako hoti, tassa ‘‘avasesā bhikkhū mayhaṃ ovāde vattanti, ahaṃ jeṭṭhako’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno yasamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā dussīlā, ahaṃ pana sīlavā’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno sīlamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesānaṃ sattānaṃ kukkuṭassa udakapānamattepi kāle cittekaggatā natthi, ahaṃ pana upacārappanānaṃ lābhī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno jhānamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā nissippā, ahaṃ sippavā’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno sippamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā rassā, ahaṃ dīgho’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno ārohamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā rassā vā honti dīghā vā, ahaṃ nigrodhaparimaṇḍalo’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno pariṇāhamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesānaṃ sattānaṃ sarīrasaṇṭhānaṃ virūpaṃ bībhacchaṃ, mayhaṃ pana manāpaṃ pāsādika’’nti majjanavasena uppanno māno saṇṭhānamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesānaṃ sattānaṃ sarīre bahū dosā, mayhaṃ pana sarīre kesaggamattampi vajjaṃ natthī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno pāripūrimado nāma. Evamayaṃ sabbopi jātiādiṃ nissāya majjanākāravasappavatto māno idha ‘‘mado’’ti vutto. Kāmaguṇesu cittassa vossaggo pamādo, pañcasu kāmaguṇesu satiyā aniggaṇhitvā cittassa vossajjanaṃ, sativirahoti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṇhāvijjā pākaṭāyeva.
再者,贪等被摄入三种不善根,以三法摄之。“三种”一词,于恶行等中应各别相应。其中,身恶行等为三种恶行,渴爱杂染等为三种杂染,贪垢等因能令心染污,故为三种垢。因为贪等令心染污,使心执取垢秽,故称为“垢”。依“贪是不正,嗔是不正,痴是不正”(《分别论》924)之说,贪等为不正;依“身不正、语不正、意不正”(同前)之说,身恶行等为不正——此即三种不正。然因众生于此贪等及身恶行等中颠踬,颠踬后复从教法与善趣堕落,故此颠踬与堕落之因,名为“不正”。依“欲想、嗔恚想、害想”(《分别论》911)之说,与欲等相应的想为三种想。同样,依“欲寻、嗔恚寻、害寻”之说,为三种寻。渴爱戏论、见戏论、慢戏论,此为三种戏论。因渴爱等令众生在轮回中延漫,故称为“戏论”。显示巴利原文
Lobhādayo ca puna tividhākusalamūlanti tikavasena gahitā. Duccaritādīsupi tividha-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Tattha kāyaduccaritādīni tividhaduccaritāni. Taṇhāsaṃkilesādayo tividhasaṃkilesā. Rāgamalādayo malīnabhāvakarattā tividhamalāni. Rāgādayo hi cittaṃ malīnaṃ karonti, malaṃ gāhāpenti, tasmā ‘‘malānī’’ti vuccanti. ‘‘Rāgo visamaṃ, doso visamaṃ, moho visama’’nti (vibha. 924) evaṃ vuttā rāgādayo ‘‘kāyavisamaṃ vacīvisamaṃ manovisama’’nti (vibha. 924) evamāgatā kāyaduccaritādayo ca tividhavisamāni. Tāni pana yasmā rāgādīsu ceva kāyaduccaritādīsu ca sattā pakkhalanti, pakkhalitā ca sāsanatopi sugatitopi patanti, tasmā pakkhalanapātahetubhāvato ‘‘visamānī’’ti vuccanti. ‘‘Kāmasaññā byāpādasaññā vihiṃsāsaññā’’ti (vibha. 911) evamāgatā kāmādipaṭisaṃyuttā saññā tividhasaññā. Tathā ‘‘kāmavitakko byāpādavitakko vihiṃsāvitakko’’ti evamāgatā tividhavitakkā. Taṇhāpapañco diṭṭhipapañco mānapapañcoti ime tividhapapañcā. Vaṭṭasmiṃ satte papañcentīti taṇhādayo ‘‘papañcā’’ti vuccanti.
于“四种颠倒”等中,“四种”一词应各别相应。其中,将无常等事物以常等之方式颠倒寻求,故为“颠倒”。如“于无常作常想,是想颠倒、心颠倒、见颠倒;于苦作乐想,是想颠倒、心颠倒、见颠倒;于不净作净想,是想颠倒、心颠倒、见颠倒;于无我作我想,是想颠倒、心颠倒、见颠倒”(《分别论》),依此所明之十二种颠倒,以无常等四种事物为所依,称为“四种颠倒”。于此,当心行作用力弱时,无见的不善想于其自身作用强盛之际,应知为想颠倒;无见的不善心作用强盛时,为心颠倒;于与见相应之心中生起者,为见颠倒。是故,想颠倒最为薄弱,心颠倒较之为强,见颠倒最为强盛。想颠倒有如未生辨识之幼童见钱币,唯执取所缘呈现之相状;心颠倒有如村民见钱币,能通达特征;见颠倒有如铁匠以大钳夹取铁块,以邪执而执取。其中,四种见颠倒,及于无常、无我作常等想而生起的四种想颠倒与心颠倒,此八颠倒由入流道断除;于不净作净之想颠倒与心颠倒,由斯陀含道减弱,由阿那含道断除;于苦作乐之想颠倒与心颠倒,由阿罗汉道断除。应如此了知。显示巴利原文
Catubbidhavipariyesātiādīsu catubbidha-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Tattha aniccādīni vatthūni niccantiādinā nayena viparītato esantīti vipariyesā. ‘‘Anicce niccanti saññāvipariyeso cittavipariyeso diṭṭhivipariyeso , dukkhe sukhanti saññāvipariyeso cittavipariyeso diṭṭhivipariyeso, asubhe subhanti saññāvipariyeso cittavipariyeso diṭṭhivipariyeso , anattani attāti saññāvipariyeso cittavipariyeso diṭṭhivipariyeso’’ti evamāgatā dvādasa vipallāsā catunnaṃ aniccādivatthūnaṃ vasena ‘‘catubbidhavipariyesā’’ti vuttā. Ettha pana cittakiccassa dubbalaṭṭhāne diṭṭhivirahitāya akusalasaññāya sakakiccassa balavakāle saññāvipallāso veditabbo, diṭṭhivirahitasseva akusalacittassa sakakiccassa balavakāle cittavipallāso, diṭṭhisampayuttacitte diṭṭhivipallāso. Tasmā sabbadubbalo saññāvipallāso, tato balavataro cittavipallāso, sabbabalavataro diṭṭhivipallāso. Ajātabuddhidārakassa kahāpaṇadassanaṃ viya saññā ārammaṇassa upaṭṭhānākāramattagahaṇato. Gāmikapurisassa kahāpaṇadassanaṃ viya cittaṃ lakkhaṇappaṭivedhassapi sampādanato. Kammārassa mahāsaṇḍāsena ayogahaṇaṃ viya diṭṭhi abhinivesaparāmasanato. Tattha cattāro diṭṭhivipallāsā, aniccānattesu niccantiādivasappavattā cattāro saññācittavipallāsāti ime aṭṭha vipallāsā sotāpattimaggena pahīyanti. Asubhe subhanti saññācittavipallāsā sakadāgāmimaggena tanukā honti, anāgāmimaggena pahīyanti. Dukkhe sukhanti saññācittavipallāsā arahattamaggena pahīyantīti veditabbā.
所谓“欲漏、有漏、见漏、无明漏”(《小义释·阇都干耳摩纳婆问义释》69),如此所说的欲爱等四种漏,从眼等根门流出、流转,故称为漏。虽然从眼等根门也有善等法的生起,但唯有欲漏等,如同从伤口流出脓汁般,以流出的不净性而流转,因此唯独它们被称为“漏”。因为在那里,“漏”这个词是约定俗成地用于流出的不净物上。或者,从法上说,它们流至种姓地;从处所说,它们流至有顶,即以取所缘的方式流转,故称为漏,意思是它们将那些法及那个处所包含在内而流转。因为前缀“ā”有“界限”之义。界限又分为“边际”与“遍摄”两种。其中,边际是将行为排除在外而流转,例如“雨下到巴吒厘子城为止”;遍摄则是遍覆行为而流转,例如“世尊的声誉流布至有顶”。此处所取的正是这遍摄义的“ā”前缀,因此,它们将那些法及那个处所包含在内,以取所缘的方式流转,故称为“漏”。又因为久住之义,如同酒等称为“āsava”(陈酿)一样,这些也称为漏。因为在世间,久藏的酒等被称为“āsava”。如果以久住之义称为漏,那么唯有这些才配称为漏。诚如所说:“诸比丘,无明的起始点不可知,在此之前无明并不存在”等(《增支部》10.61)。而在其他如慢等法,以如前所述的法与处所为所缘而生起,以及存在我、我所等执取的情况下,唯有这些(四漏)以遍满、迷醉的方式与“āsava”相似,其他则不然。因此,在这两种义释中,应知“漏”这个词唯独约定俗成地用于这些。或者,它们使漫长的轮回之苦流出、产生,故也称为漏。因为没有任何轮回之苦,能在没有诸漏的情况下生起。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kāmāsavo bhavāsavo diṭṭhāsavo avijjāsavo’’ti (cūḷani. jatukaṇṇimāṇavapucchāniddesa 69) evamāgatā kāmataṇhādayo cattāro āsavanti cakkhuādito sandanti pavattantīti āsavā. Kiñcāpi cakkhuādito kusalādīnampi pavatti atthi, kāmāsavādayo eva pana vaṇato yūsaṃ viya paggharaṇakaasucibhāvena sandanti, tasmā te eva ‘‘āsavā’’ti vuccanti. Tattha hi paggharaṇakaasucimhi niruḷho āsavasaddoti. Atha vā dhammato yāva gotrabhuṃ, okāsato yāva bhavaggaṃ savanti gacchanti ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pavattantīti āsavā, ete dhamme etañca okāsaṃ antokaritvā pavattantīti attho. Avadhiattho hi ā-kāro. Avadhi ca mariyādābhividhibhedato duvidho. Tattha mariyādaṃ kiriyaṃ bahikatvā pavattati yathā ‘‘āpāṭaliputtaṃ vuṭṭho devo’’ti, abhividhi pana kiriyaṃ byāpetvā pavattati yathā ‘‘ābhavaggaṃ bhagavato yaso pavattatī’’ti, abhividhiattho cāyaṃ ā-kāro idha gahito, tasmā te dhamme tañca okāsaṃ antokaritvā ārammaṇakaraṇavasena savantīti ‘‘āsavā’’ti vuccanti. Cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena madirādayo āsavā viyātipi āsavā. Lokasmiñhi cirapārivāsikā madirādayo ‘‘āsavā’’ti vuccanti. Yadi ca cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena āsavā, eteyeva bhavitumarahanti. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati avijjāya, ito pubbe avijjā nāhosī’’tiādi (a. ni. 10.61). Aññesu pana yathāvutte dhamme okāsañca ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānesu mānādīsu ca vijjamānesu attattaniyādiggāhavasena abhibyāpanaṃ madanakaraṇavasena āsavasadisatā ca etesaṃyeva, na aññesanti dvīsupi atthavikappesu etesuyeva āsavasaddo niruḷhoti daṭṭhabbo. Āyataṃ vā saṃsāradukkhaṃ savanti pasavantītipi āsavā. Na hi taṃ kiñci saṃsāradukkhaṃ atthi, yaṃ āsavehi vinā uppajjeyya.
所谓“贪欲身系、嗔恚身系、戒禁取身系、此实执取身系”(《相应部》5.175;《大义释》29, 147),若这四种存在于某人,便以死死生生相续的方式将其捆缚于轮回中,故称“系”。所谓“欲暴流、有暴流、见暴流、无明暴流”(《相应部》5.172;《大义释》14;《小义释·慈氏摩纳婆问义释》21),若这四种欲贪等存在于某人,便将其淹没于轮回中,令其沉没,故称“暴流”。这些同样的法,又被称为“欲轭、有轭、见轭、无明轭”(《相应部》5.173;《增支部》4.10),因其在轮回中系缚,故称“轭”。圣者不以此而行,故称“非行处”;非行处依欲等而有四种。所谓“比丘或因衣服而生起贪爱,或因饮食、或因坐卧处、或因如是有有、无有之因而生起贪爱”(《增支部》4.9),这便是所说的四种贪爱生起。其中,“如是有有、无有之因”中的“如是”是举例的介词,意思是:如同因衣服等,同样也因有有、无有之因。而这里的“有有、无有”,是指殊胜、更殊胜的油、蜜、糖等。欲取等四种为取。显示巴利原文
‘‘Abhijjhā kāyagantho byāpādo kāyagantho sīlabbataparāmāso kāyagantho idaṃsaccābhiniveso kāyagantho’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.175; mahāni. 29, 147) evamāgatā abhijjhādayo cattāro yassa saṃvijjanti, taṃ cutipaṭisandhivasena vaṭṭasmiṃ ganthenti ghaṭentīti ganthā. ‘‘Kāmogho bhavogho diṭṭhogho avijjogho’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.172; mahāni. 14; cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 21) evamāgatā cattāro kāmataṇhādayo yassa saṃvijjanti, taṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ ohananti osīdāpentīti oghā. Teyeva ‘‘kāmayogo bhavayogo diṭṭhiyogo avijjāyogo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.173; a. ni. 4.10) evamāgatā vaṭṭasmiṃ yojentīti yogā. Ariyā etāya na gacchantīti agati, sā chandādivasena catubbidhā. ‘‘Cīvarahetu vā bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, piṇḍapāta, senāsana, itibhavābhavahetu vā bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.9) evamāgatā cattāro taṇhuppādā. Tattha itibhavābhavahetūti ettha itīti nidassane nipāto, yathā cīvarādihetu, evaṃ bhavābhavahetupīti attho. Bhavābhavoti cettha paṇītapaṇītatarāni telamadhuphāṇitādīni adhippetāni. Kāmupādānādīni cattāri upādānāni.
在五种心荒芜等中:“于佛疑惑,于法疑惑,于僧疑惑,于学处疑惑,于同梵行者忿怒、不悦、心受伤害而生起荒芜”(《中部》1.185;《长部》3.319),这便是所说的五种心荒芜;心因这些而变得荒芜、僵硬,故称“心荒芜”。在心系缚等中,“五”字应分别与各法搭配。“于欲未离贪,于身未离贪,于色未离贪,尽量饱食后,沉溺于床乐、触乐、睡眠乐而住,为求生某一天众而修梵行”(《中部》1.186;《长部》3.320),如此所说的这五种,将心系缚,如同紧握在拳中一般执取,故称“心系缚”。这些法以欲贪的形态生起,通过不给善法生起机会的方式,将心包围执取,犹如束缚。从词义上说,心因这些而被扭曲地系缚、抑制,故称“心系缚”。欲贪等五种,障碍、遮蔽善法,故称“盖”。色喜等五种为“喜”。显示巴利原文
Pañca cetokhilātiādīsu ‘‘buddhe kaṅkhati, dhamme, saṅghe, sikkhāya kaṅkhati, sabrahmacārīsu kupito hoti anattamano āhatacitto khilajāto’’ti (ma. ni. 1.185; dī. ni. 3.319) evamāgatāni pañca cetokhilāni, ceto khilayati thaddhabhāvaṃ āpajjati etehīti cetokhilāni. Vinibandhādīsupi pañca-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. ‘‘Kāme avītarāgo hoti, kāye avītarāgo, rūpe avītarāgo, yāvadatthaṃ udarāvadehakaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṃ passasukhaṃ middhasukhaṃ anuyutto viharati, aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṃ caratī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.186; dī. ni. 3.320) āgatā pañca cittaṃ bandhitvā muṭṭhiyaṃ katvā viya gaṇhantīti cetovinibandhā. Ete hi taṇhāppavattibhāvato kusalappavattiyā avasarāppadānavasena cittaṃ bandhaṃ viya samorodhetvā gaṇhanti. Saddatthato pana ceto virūpaṃ nibandhīyati saṃyamīyati etehīti cetovinibandhā. Kāmacchandādīni pañca kusaladhamme nīvārenti āvarantīti nīvaraṇāni. Rūpābhinandanādayo pañcābhinandanā.
在六诤根等中:忿、覆、嫉、诳、恶欲、执取己见,这六种是诤根。因为忿怒的人或因忿怒……乃至……执取己见者,因执取己见,而生起斗诤、口角、争论,所以忿等称为“六诤根”。色爱、声爱等为六爱身。欲贪、嗔恚、邪见、疑、有贪、慢、无明,是七随眠。以强有力之义及未断除之义而随眠,故称“随眠”。邪见、邪思惟、邪语、邪业、邪命、邪精进、邪念、邪定,是八邪行。显示巴利原文
Chavivādamūlātiādīsu kodho makkho issā sāṭheyyaṃ pāpicchatā sandiṭṭhiparāmāsoti imāni cha vivādamūlāni. Yasmā kuddho vā kodhavasena…pe… sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī vā sandiṭṭhiparāmasitāya kalahaṃ viggahaṃ vivādaṃ āpajjati, tasmā kodhādayo ‘‘cha vivādamūlānī’’ti vuccanti. Rūpataṇhāsaddataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā. Kāmarāgapaṭighadiṭṭhivicikicchābhavarāgamānāvijjā sattānusayā. Thāmagataṭṭhena appahīnaṭṭhena ca anusentīti anusayā. Micchādiṭṭhimicchāsaṅkappamicchāvācāmicchākammantamicchāājīvamicchāvāyāmamicchāsatimicchāsamādhī aṭṭha micchattā.
“缘于渴爱而有寻求,缘于寻求而有获得,缘于获得而有决断,缘于决断而有欲贪,缘于欲贪而有执取,缘于执取而有占有,缘于占有而有悭吝,缘于悭吝而有守护,缘于守护,便生起执杖、执刀、争斗、纷争、争论、相骂、离间、妄语等种种恶不善法。”如经所说,寻求等九法实以渴爱为根本。其中,《长部注》解释:“缘于渴爱”即依止于渴爱。“寻求”是对色等所缘的寻求;因为有渴爱,寻求方得生起。“获得”是对色等所缘的获得;因为有寻求,获得方得生起。“决断”在此是指寻思;因为获得之后,便以寻思决断可爱与不可爱、美妙与不美妙:“这些用于我所需的色所缘,这些用于声等所缘;这些归属于我,这些归属于他人;这些我将受用,这些我将储藏。”因此说“缘于获得而有决断”。“欲贪”是指以如此不善的寻思而去寻思对象时,所生起的弱贪与强贪,其中“欲”是弱贪的别名。“执取”是以“我”、“我所”而作的强力认定。“占有”是以渴爱与邪见而作占有。“悭吝”是无法忍受与他人共同享有的心态。因此,古师如此解释其词义:“因生起‘此稀有物唯属于我,显示巴利原文
‘‘Taṇhaṃ paṭicca pariyesanā, pariyesanaṃ paṭicca lābho, lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo, vinicchayaṃ paṭicca chandarāgo, chandarāgaṃ paṭicca ajjhosānaṃ, ajjhosānaṃ paṭicca pariggaho, pariggahaṃ paṭicca macchariyaṃ, macchariyaṃ paṭicca ārakkho, ārakkhādhikaraṇaṃ daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādatuvaṃtuvaṃpesuññamusāvādā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavantī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.103; 3.359) evamāgatā pariyesanādayo nava taṇhāmūlakā. Tattha (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.103) taṇhaṃ paṭiccāti taṇhaṃ nissāya. Pariyesanāti rūpādiārammaṇapariyesanā. Sā hi taṇhāya sati hoti. Lābhoti rūpādiārammaṇapaṭilābho. So hi pariyesanāya sati hoti. Vinicchayoti idha vitakko adhippeto. Lābhaṃ labhitvā hi iṭṭhāniṭṭhaṃ sundarāsundarañca vitakkeneva vinicchinati ‘‘ettakaṃ me rūpārammaṇatthāya bhavissati, ettakaṃ saddādiārammaṇatthāya, ettakaṃ mayhaṃ bhavissati, ettakaṃ parassa, ettakaṃ paribhuñjissāmi, ettakaṃ nidahissāmī’’ti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo’’ti. Chandarāgoti evaṃ akusalavitakkena vitakkite vatthusmiṃ dubbalarāgo ca balavarāgo ca uppajjati. Chandoti hi idha dubbalarāgassādhivacanaṃ. Ajjhosānanti ahaṃ mamanti balavasanniṭṭhānaṃ. Pariggahoti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena pariggahakaraṇaṃ. Macchariyanti parehi sādhāraṇabhāvassa asahanatā. Tenevassa porāṇā evaṃ vacanatthaṃ vadanti ‘‘idaṃ acchariyaṃ mayhameva hotu, mā aññassa acchariyaṃ hotūti pavattattā macchariyanti vuccatī’’ti. Ārakkhoti dvārapidahanamañjusagopanādivasena suṭṭhu rakkhaṇaṃ. Adhikarotīti adhikaraṇaṃ, kāraṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ārakkhādhikaraṇanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ, ārakkhahetūti attho. Daṇḍādānādīsu paranisedhanatthaṃ daṇḍassa ādānaṃ daṇḍādānaṃ. Ekatodhārādino satthassa ādānaṃ satthādānaṃ. Kalahoti kāyakalahopi vācākalahopi. Purimo purimo virodho viggaho. Pacchimo pacchimo vivādo. Tuvaṃ tuvanti agāravavacanaṃ, tvaṃ tvanti attho.
杀生、不与取、欲邪行、妄语、离间语、粗恶语、杂秽语、贪欲、瞋恚、邪见,此十不善业道。四种常见论、四种一分常见论、四种有边无边论、四种诡辩论、二种无因生论、十六种有想论、八种无想论、八种非有想非无想论、七种断灭论、五种现法涅槃论,此六十二种邪见。色爱等六爱,各各依欲爱、有爱、无有爱而成为十八种。即:缘于色的爱,或于色的爱,是色爱。它若以欲贪的状态,乐着色而转起,是欲爱;若以与常见相应的贪的状态,如此乐着“色是常、恒、常住”而转起,是有爱;若以与断见相应的贪的状态,如此乐着“色断灭、坏灭,死后不存在”而转起,是无有爱。如是成为三种。如同色爱,声爱等也是如此。这些是十八种爱行。它们于内色等有十八种,于外色等有十八种,合为三十六种。如是,过去三十六种、未来三十六种、现在三十六种,共为一百零八种爱行,即一百零八种爱行。“分别”一词应各别连接。此处的连接是:“贪分别、瞋分别……乃至一百零八种爱行分别”。一切恼害、热恼、烦恼百千种,即一切令众生恼害、热恼的烦恼,有无数百千种。因为依所缘等的分别及转起行相的分别,烦恼有无量种类。显示巴利原文
Pāṇātipātaadinnādānakāmesumicchācāramusāvādapisuṇavācāpharusavācāsamphappalāpaabhijjhābyāpādamicchādiṭṭhī dasa akusalakammapathā. Cattāro sassatavādā cattāro ekaccasassatavādā cattāro antānantikā cattāro amarāvikkhepikā dve adhiccasamuppannikā soḷasa saññīvādā aṭṭha asaññīvādā aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā satta ucchedavādā pañca paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti etāni dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni. Rūpataṇhādichataṇhāyeva paccekaṃ kāmataṇhābhavataṇhāvibhavataṇhāvasena aṭṭhārasa honti. Tathā hi rūpārammaṇā taṇhā, rūpe vā taṇhāti rūpataṇhā, sā kāmarāgabhāvena rūpaṃ assādentī pavattamānā kāmataṇhā, sassatadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena ‘‘rūpaṃ niccaṃ dhuvaṃ sassata’’nti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā bhavataṇhā, ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena ‘‘rūpaṃ ucchijjati vinassati pecca na bhavatī’’ti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā vibhavataṇhāti evaṃ tividhā hoti. Yathā ca rūpataṇhā, evaṃ saddataṇhādayopīti etāni aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritāni honti, tāni ajjhattarūpādīsu aṭṭhārasa, bahiddhārūpādīsu aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa, iti atītāni chattiṃsa, anāgatāni chattiṃsa, paccuppannāni chattiṃsāti aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni, aṭṭhuttarasatataṇhāvicaritānīti attho. Pabheda-saddo paccekaṃ sambandhitabbo. Tatthāyaṃ yojanā ‘‘lobhappabhedo dosappabhedo yāva aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritappabhedo’’ti. Sabbadarathapariḷāhakilesasatasahassānīti sabbāni sattānaṃ darathapariḷāhakarāni kilesānaṃ anekāni satasahassāni. Ārammaṇādivibhāgato hi pavattiākāravibhāgato ca anantappabhedā kilesā.
在“简略而言”等句中:因对众生现世与来世带来不利,以杀戮义、恼害义,烦恼本身就是魔,故为烦恼魔。以杀害义,蕴本身就是魔,故为蕴魔。正如所说:“不知‘杀害之色、杀害之色’如实”等。因产生生、老等大灾祸,行本身就是魔,故为行魔。成为杂染之相,以杀戮功德义,天子本身就是魔,故为天子魔。因令众生的生命与生活资具损耗,为大怖畏相,死本身就是魔,故为死魔。其中,以正断断的方式,令烦恼魔完全不再生起;以断因与遍知的方式,破蕴魔;以令缺少助伴的方式,令行魔完全不再生起;以摧伏威力、超越领域的方式,破天子魔与死魔。已破、已坏之意。“诸患难”即诸灾祸。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhepato vātiādīsu sampati āyatiñca sattānaṃ anatthāvahattā māraṇaṭṭhena vibādhanaṭṭhena kilesāva māroti kilesamāro. Vadhakaṭṭhena khandhāva māroti khandhamāro. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘vadhakaṃ rūpaṃ, vadhakaṃ rūpanti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātī’’tiādi. Jātijarādimahābyasananibbattanena abhisaṅkhārova māro abhisaṅkhāramāro. Saṃkilesanimittaṃ hutvā guṇamāraṇaṭṭhena devaputtova māroti devaputtamāro. Sattānaṃ jīvitassa jīvitaparikkhārānañca jānikaraṇena mahābādharūpattā maccu eva māroti maccumāro. Tattha samucchedappahānavasena sabbaso appavattikaraṇena kilesamāraṃ, samudayappahānapariññāvasena khandhamāraṃ, sahāyavekallakaraṇavasena sabbaso appavattikaraṇena abhisaṅkhāramāraṃ, balavidhamanavisayātikkamanavasena devaputtamaccumārañca abhañji, bhagge akāsīti attho. Parissayānanti upaddavānaṃ.
具足百福所生之相者:即具足由众多百数福业所生的大人相。于此,注释师们并不认可‘仅以一百数量的福业便生起每一相’的说法,因为‘若那样,任何人都能成佛’。他们认可的是:将无量世界中所有众生各自百次所行布施等福业的总和,大士复以百倍于其中每一福业而行,这便是‘百’的含义。因此,此处的‘百’字应视为表示众多之义,而非固定数字,如同‘百价’‘百天与人’等语中的用法。之所以阐明色身成就,是因为它是其余果报成就的根本与依处。而此‘阐明’一语也通于法身成就等。其中,应知法身成就的阐明,是以断德成就为先导,而有智德成就等。在‘为世间与同梵行者所尊重’一句中,应理解为:因具足福德而为世间所尊重,因断除过失而为同梵行者所尊重。同样,其后的语句也应按此次第类推而理解。显示巴利原文
Satapuññajalakkhaṇadharassāti aneka sata puñña nibbattamahā purisalakkhaṇadharassa. Ettha hi ‘‘kevalaṃ satamattena puññakammena ekekalakkhaṇaṃ nibbatta’’nti imamatthaṃ na rocayiṃsu aṭṭhakathācariyā ‘‘evaṃ sante yo koci buddho bhaveyyā’’ti, anantāsu pana lokadhātūsu yattakā sattā, tehi sabbehi paccekaṃ satakkhattuṃ katāni dānādīni puññakammāni yattakāni, tato ekekaṃ puññakammaṃ mahāsattena sataguṇaṃ kataṃ satanti adhippetanti imamatthaṃ rocayiṃsu. Tasmā idha sata-saddo bahubhāvapariyāyo, na saṅkhyāvisesavacanoti daṭṭhabbo ‘‘satagghaṃ sataṃ devamanussā’’tiādīsu viya. Rūpakāyasampatti dīpitā hoti itarāsaṃ phalasampadānaṃ mūlabhāvato adhiṭṭhānabhāvato ca. Dīpitā hotīti idaṃ dhammakāyasampattītiādīsupi yojetabbaṃ. Tattha pahānasampadāpubbakattā ñāṇasampadādīnaṃ dhammakāyasampatti dīpitā hotīti veditabbaṃ. Lokiyasarikkhakānaṃ bahumatabhāvoti ettha bhāgyavantatāya lokiyānaṃ bahumatabhāvo, bhaggadosatāya sarikkhakānaṃ bahumatabhāvoti yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ ito paresupi yathākkamaṃ yojanā veditabbā.
具足福德者,刹帝利等在家人前来亲近;已断除过失者,为令他人断除过失而说法,因此,出家人、苦行者、游方者等前来亲近。故说‘为在家与出家者所亲近’。应知,对于前来亲近者,由于具备以财施与法施作利益的能力,便能消除他们的身心之苦:以净信眼见其色身,以智慧眼见其法身后,令两种苦止息。因具足福德而给予前来者财施,因断除过失而给予法施,所以说‘以财施与法施作利益’。此外,也阐明了能令来者与世间及出世间乐相连接的能力:‘过去我以此财施与法施证得此世间最胜之身,故你们也应当如此行道’——通过这样劝导正行,便阐明了能令前来亲近者与世间及出世间乐相连接的能力。显示巴利原文
Puññavantaṃ gahaṭṭhā khattiyādayo abhigacchanti, pahīnadosaṃ dosavinayāya dhammaṃ desetīti pabbajitā tāpasaparibbājakādayo abhigacchantīti āha ‘‘gahaṭṭhapabbajitehi abhigamanīyatā’’ti. Abhigatānañca tesaṃ kāyacittadukkhāpanayane paṭibalabhāvo āmisadānadhammadānehi upakārasabbhāvato rūpakāyaṃ tassa pasādacakkhunā, dhammakāyaṃ paññācakkhunā disvā dukkhadvayassa paṭippassambhanatoti veditabbo. Bhāgyavantatāya upagatānaṃ āmisadānaṃ deti, bhaggadosatāya dhammadānaṃ detīti āha ‘‘āmisadānadhammadānehi upakāritā’’ti. Lokiyalokuttarasukhehi ca saṃyojanasamatthatā dīpitā hotīti ‘‘pubbe āmisadānadhammadānehi mayā ayaṃ lokaggabhāvo adhigato, tasmā tumhehipi evameva paṭipajjitabba’’nti evaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ niyojanena abhigatānaṃ lokiyalokuttarasukhehi saṃyojanasamatthatā ca dīpitā hoti.
所谓‘于自心得自在’,即令自心得自主。于厌恶等境中修习不厌恶想等成就,以及决意神通等神变种类,也唯有心得自在才能成就,因为这是通过修心达到自主而实现的。‘等’字涵盖了‘大身、到达、所作、自在、自主、所欲处成就’这六种。其中,令身体变微细为‘微细’;以能在空中行走等而令身轻快为‘轻快’;令身体变广大为‘大身’;到达所欲之处为‘到达’;以决意等力成就所欲为‘所作’;自身即为主宰的自在状态为‘自在’;于神变中得自主为‘自主’;于空中行走或作其他任何事时,在任何处都能达到究竟为‘所欲处成就’。也有说‘示现童子形等’。如此,这是世间共许的八种自在。然而,世尊的此种自在虽包含于神变之中,但乃不共(声闻等)之法,故说‘具足一切行相’。同样,出世间法也是存在的,应如此连接。由此,‘有’字也应连至‘名声’等之后。显示巴利原文
Sakacitte issariyaṃ nāma attano cittassa vasībhāvāpādanaṃyeva, paṭikūlādīsu appaṭikūlasaññitādivihārasiddhi, adhiṭṭhāniddhiādiko iddhividhopi cittissariyameva cittabhāvanāya vasībhāvappattiyā ijjhanato. Aṇimālaghimādikanti ādi-saddena mahimā patti pākammaṃ īsitā vasitā yatthakāmāvasāyitāti ime chapi saṅgahitā. Tattha kāyassa aṇubhāvakaraṇaṃ aṇimā. Ākāse padasā gamanādīnaṃ arahabhāvena lahubhāvo laghimā. Mahattaṃ mahimā kāyassa mahantatāpādanaṃ. Iṭṭhadesassa pāpuṇanaṃ patti. Adhiṭṭhānādivasena icchitanipphādanaṃ pākammaṃ. Sayaṃvasitā issarabhāvo īsitā. Iddhividhe vasībhāvo vasitā. Ākāsena vā gacchato aññaṃ vā kiñci karoto yattha katthaci vosānappatti yatthakāmāvasāyitā. ‘‘Kumārakarūpādidassana’’ntipi vadanti. Evamidaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ lokiyasammataṃ issariyaṃ. Taṃ pana bhagavato iddhividhantogadhaṃ anaññasādhāraṇañcāti āha ‘‘sabbakāraparipūraṃ atthī’’ti. Tathā lokuttaro dhammo atthīti sambandho. Evaṃ yasādīsupi atthi-saddo yojetabbo.
有些人的名声只限于局部,且因依于不实功德而不清净,但如来并非如此。为显示此义,故说“遍满三界”。其中,那些在此处证得大师功德、生于无色界者,通过“彼世尊如此……”等语句令世尊的名声显扬,所以说“遍满三界”。“依真实功德而证得”,即由真实功德所成就。“极其清净”,即因依真实功德而证得,故为绝对清净。“具足一切行相”,即因无余具足相好等成就,于一切方面圆满。“一切肢节庄严”,即所有大小肢节的美妙。“凡彼所希愿、所期望者”,即通过“已度者令度”等语句,说明这位世间怙主以心、语的愿求所希愿,以身的愿求所期望的一切。“即如彼”,即如其愿求而成就。“名为正精进之努力”,即达到波罗蜜程度且属于圣道的、名为正精进的勤奋。显示巴利原文
Kesañci yaso padesavutti ayathābhūtaguṇasannissayattā aparisuddho ca hoti, na evaṃ tathāgatassāti dassetuṃ ‘‘lokattayabyāpako’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha idha adhigatasatthuguṇānaṃ āruppe uppannānaṃ ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā bhagavato yaso pākaṭo hotīti āha ‘‘lokattayabyāpako’’ti. Yathābhuccaguṇādhigatoti yathābhūtaguṇehi adhigato. Ativiya parisuddhoti yathābhūtaguṇādhigatattā eva accantaparisuddho. Sabbākāraparipūrāti anavasesalakkhaṇānubyañjanādisampattiyā sabbākārehi paripuṇṇā. Sabbaṅgapaccaṅgasirīti sabbesaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ sobhā. Yaṃ yaṃ etena icchitaṃ patthitanti ‘‘tiṇṇo tāreyya’’ntiādinā yaṃ yaṃ etena lokanāthena manovacīpaṇidhānavasena icchitaṃ kāyapaṇidhānavasena patthitaṃ. Tathevāti paṇidhānānurūpameva. Sammāvāyāmasaṅkhāto payattoti vīriyapāramibhāvappatto ariyamaggapariyāpanno ca sammāvāyāmasaṅkhāto ussāho.
“以善等为分类”,是指以一切三法、二法句所摄的善等分类。“以缘起等”,其中的“等”字,应知不仅包含了《分别论》中出现的念处等,也包含了总摄等、时解脱等、安立等,以及三法发趣等。又如“压迫、有为、热恼、变易之义为苦圣谛”等所说,压迫义是指对有彼苦的众生造成伤害、令其不得自在。有为义是由诸缘共同聚集、和合造作之性。热恼义是以苦苦等而烧灼、燃烧。变易义是因老与死两种方式而变易之性。集谛的聚集义,是依令苦生起的方式而积集。因缘义,是如同指示“这就是苦”一般地令苦生起。结缚义,是令与轮回之苦相结合。障碍义,是障碍道的证得。灭谛的出离义,是因舍弃一切依着的自性而从中脱离,或者是成为其出离之因。远离义,是不与一切行相结合。无为义,是不由任何缘所造作。不死义,是因常恒自性而无死,或是众生无死的因。道谛的出离义,是从轮回之苦中出离之义。因义,是令到达涅槃之性。见义,是对极微细涅槃的作证。增上义,是在四圣谛的见上对相应法作增上,或者特别由于说“道增上”,故指所缘增上的状态。因为即使禅那等也有所缘增上的状态,却不称为“禅那增上之法”等。显示巴利原文
Kusalādīhi bhedehīti sabbattikadukapadasaṅgahitehi kusalādippabhedehi. Paṭiccasamuppādādīhīti ādi-saddena na kevalaṃ vibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ āgatā satipaṭṭhānādayova saṅgahitā, atha kho saṅgahādayo samayavimuttādayo ṭhapanādayo tikapaṭṭhānādayo ca saṅgahitāti veditabbaṃ. Pīḷanasaṅkhatasantāpavipariṇāmaṭṭhena vā dukkhamariyasaccantiādīsu pīḷanaṭṭho taṃsamaṅgino sattassa hiṃsanaṃ avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ. Saṅkhataṭṭho samecca saṅgamma sambhūya paccayehi katabhāvo. Santāpaṭṭho dukkhadukkhatādīhi santāpanaṃ paridahanaṃ. Vipariṇāmaṭṭho jarāya maraṇena cāti dvidhā vipariṇāmetabbatā. Samudayassa āyūhanaṭṭho dukkhassa nibbattanavasena sampiṇḍanaṃ. Nidānaṭṭho ‘‘idaṃ taṃ dukkha’’nti nidassentassa viya samuṭṭhāpanaṃ. Saṃyogaṭṭho saṃsāradukkhena saṃyojanaṃ. Palibodhaṭṭho maggādhigamassa nivāraṇaṃ. Nirodhassa nissaraṇaṭṭho sabbūpadhīnaṃ paṭinissaggasabhāvattā tato vinissaṭatā, taṃnissaraṇanimittatā vā. Vivekaṭṭho sabbasaṅkhāravisaṃyuttatā. Asaṅkhataṭṭho kenacipi paccayena anabhisaṅkhatatā. Amataṭṭho niccasabhāvattā maraṇābhāvo, sattānaṃ maraṇābhāvahetutā vā. Maggassa niyyānaṭṭho vaṭṭadukkhato nikkamanaṭṭho. Hetuattho nibbānassa sampāpakabhāvo. Dassanaṭṭho accantasukhumassa nibbānassa sacchikaraṇaṃ. Ādhipateyyaṭṭho catusaccadassane sampayuttānaṃ ādhipaccakaraṇaṃ, ārammaṇādhipatibhāvo vā visesato maggādhipativacanato . Satipi hi jhānādīnaṃ ārammaṇādhipatibhāve ‘‘jhānādhipatino dhammā’’ti evamādiṃ avatvā ‘‘maggādhipatino dhammā’’icceva vuttaṃ, tasmā viññāyati ‘‘atthi maggassa ārammaṇādhipatibhāve viseso’’ti. Eteyeva ca pīḷanādayo soḷasākārāti vuccanti.
在“天住、梵住、圣住”等中,以遍等为所缘的色界禅那,称为天住。以慈等为所缘的禅那,称为梵住。果等至称为圣住。依远离诸欲之义,身独一的状态为身远离。依初禅等,心远离盖等,为心远离。依着远离即是涅槃。此处所谓“依着”,有四种:欲依着、蕴依着、烦恼依着、行依着。因为诸欲也是乐的安立处,如说“依于五欲功德而生起乐与喜悦,这是诸欲的味”,依“乐安立于此”这一词义而称为“依着”;诸蕴因为是蕴根本之苦的安立处;诸烦恼因为是恶趣之苦的安立处;诸行因为是生存之苦的安立处,依所说之理而称为“依着”。由于远离这四种依着,涅槃被称为“依着远离”。显示巴利原文
Dibbabrahmaariyavihāretiādīsu kasiṇādiārammaṇāni rūpāvacarajjhānāni dibbavihāro. Mettādijjhānāni brahmavihāro. Phalasamāpatti ariyavihāro. Kāmehi vivekaṭṭhakāyatāvasena ekībhāvo kāyaviveko. Paṭhamajjhānādinā nīvaraṇādīhi vivittacittatā cittaviveko. Upadhiviveko nibbānaṃ. Upadhīti cettha cattāro upadhī kāmupadhi khandhupadhi kilesupadhi abhisaṅkhārupadhīti. Kāmāpi hi ‘‘yaṃ pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ, ayaṃ kāmānaṃ assādo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.166) evaṃ vuttassa sukhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato upadhīyati ettha sukhanti iminā vacanatthena ‘‘upadhī’’ti vuccanti, khandhāpi khandhamūlakassa dukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, kilesāpi apāyadukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, abhisaṅkhārāpi bhavadukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato vuttanayena ‘‘upadhī’’ti vuccanti. Imehi pana catūhi upadhīhi vivittatāya nibbānaṃ ‘‘upadhiviveko’’ti vuccati.
以空的方式,缘取涅槃而生起的圣道,即是空解脱。由空界而生起,故名为空;由从烦恼解脱,故名为解脱。依此理趣,以无愿的方式,缘取涅槃而生起者,为无愿解脱;以无相的方式,缘取涅槃而生起者,为无相解脱。或者,依称为空随观的无我随观之力而证得的圣道,从入门的角度名为“空解脱”。同样,依称为无愿随观的苦随观之力而证得者,名为无愿解脱;依称为无相随观的无常随观之力而证得者,应知名为“无相解脱”。这确实已说过:显示巴利原文
Suññatākārena nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavatto ariyamaggo suññatavimokkho. So hi suññatāya dhātuyā uppannattā suññato, kilesehi ca vimuttattā vimokkho. Eteneva nayena appaṇihitākārena nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavatto appaṇihitavimokkho. Animittākārena nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavatto animittavimokkho. Atha vā suññatānupassanāsaṅkhātāya anattānupassanāya vasena paṭiladdho ariyamaggo āgamanavasena ‘‘suññatavimokkho’’ti vuccati. Tathā appaṇihitānupassanāsaṅkhātāya dukkhānupassanāya vasena paṭiladdho appaṇihitavimokkho. Animittānupassanāsaṅkhātāya aniccānupassanāya vasena paṭiladdho ‘‘animittavimokkho’’ti veditabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ –
以无常作意、胜解增上者,证得无相解脱;以苦作意、轻安增上者,证得无愿解脱;以无我作意、智增上者,证得空解脱。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aniccato manasikaronto adhimokkhabahulo animittavimokkhaṃ paṭilabhati, dukkhato manasikaronto passaddhibahulo appaṇihitavimokkhaṃ paṭilabhati, anattato manasikaronto vedabahulo suññatavimokkhaṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.223).
“其他”即指世间神通等。显示巴利原文
Aññeti lokiyaabhiññādike.
由烦恼与行之力而在诸有中流转,而此流转以渴爱为主导,故说为“称为渴爱的流转”。已吐出者,即由圣道之口吐出、依不再返回的方式而舍弃者。为显示“世尊”一词是依词源学的方式而说,故说“如世间”等语。其意为:如同在世间依词源学的方式,从每一个词取每一个字母而说“腰带”一样,此处也是如此。“Mehanassa”指隐秘处,“Khassa”指空间。显示巴利原文
Kilesābhisaṅkhāravasena bhavesu paribbhamanaṃ, tañca taṇhāpadhānanti āha ‘‘taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ gamana’’nti. Vantanti ariyamaggamukhena uggiritaṃ puna apaccāgamanavasena chaḍḍitaṃ. Bhagavāti vuccati niruttinayenāti dassento āha ‘‘yathā loke’’tiādi. Yathā loke niruttinayena ekekapadato ekekamakkharaṃ gahetvā ‘‘mekhalā’’ti vuttaṃ, evamidhāpīti attho. Mehanassāti guyhappadesassa. Khassāti okāsassa.
另一种解释方式:具足诸分者,故名为世尊。受奉养者,故名为世尊。于诸分中寻求者,故名为世尊。于诸分中寻求者,故名为世尊。具足奉养者,故名为世尊。于诸分中吐出者,故名为世尊。于诸分中吐出者,故名为世尊。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo (itivu. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) – bhāgavāti bhagavā. Bhatavāti bhagavā. Bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Bhage vanīti bhagavā. Bhattavāti bhagavā. Bhage vamīti bhagavā. Bhāge vamīti bhagavā.
具分者、受奉养者、于诸分中,及于诸分中寻求者、具足奉养者,是世尊;
于诸分中排泄者,于诸分中亦如此,因已排泄故,为世尊、胜者。
显示巴利原文 Bhāgavā bhatavā bhāge, bhage ca vani bhattavā; Bhage vami tathā bhāge, vamīti bhagavā jino.
其中,如何是‘具分者’而为世尊?那些戒等法蕴、功德之分,唯如来所拥有、可证得,不为他人共有,无与伦比。如是,他的戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见,惭、愧,信、精进,念、正知,戒清净、见清净,止、观,三善根,三善行,三正思惟,三无过失想,三界,四念处,四正勤,四神足,四圣道,四圣果,四无碍解,四胎藏简别智,四圣种,四无畏智,五勤支,五支正定,五智正定,五根,五力,五出离界,五解脱处智,五解脱成熟想,六随念处,六恭敬,六出离界,六常行住,六无上,六决择分想,六神通,六不共智,七不退法,七圣财,七觉支,七善士法,七消尽事,七想,七应供人施说,七漏尽力说,八慧得因说,八正道,八世间法超越,八发勤事,八非时说,八大人思惟,八胜处说,八解脱,九如理作意根法,九遍净勤支,九众生居说,九嗔恚调伏,九想,九种种,九次第住,十作护法,十遍处,十善业道,十正法,十圣居,十无学法,十如来力,十一慈心功德,十二法轮相,十三头陀功德,十四佛智,十五解脱成熟法,十六种入出息念,十六后际能引法,十八佛法,十九观察智。显示巴利原文
Tattha kathaṃ bhāgavāti bhagavā? Ye te sīlādayo dhammakkhandhā guṇakoṭṭhāsā, te anaññasādhāraṇā niratisayā tathāgatassa atthi upalabbhanti. Tathā hissa sīlaṃ samādhi paññā vimutti vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ, hirī ottappaṃ, saddhā vīriyaṃ, sati sampajaññaṃ, sīlavisuddhi diṭṭhivisuddhi, samatho vipassanā, tīṇi kusalamūlāni, tīṇi sucaritāni, tayo sammāvitakkā, tisso anavajjasaññā, tisso dhātuyo, cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, cattāro ariyamaggā, cattāri ariyaphalāni, catasso paṭisambhidā, catuyoniparicchedakañāṇāni, cattāro ariyavaṃsā, cattāri vesārajjañāṇāni, pañca padhāniyaṅgāni, pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhi, pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhi, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, pañca nissāraṇīyā dhātuyo, pañca vimuttāyatanañāṇāni, pañca vimuttiparipācanīyā saññā, cha anussatiṭṭhānāni, cha gāravā, cha nissāraṇīyā dhātuyo, cha satatavihārā, cha anuttariyāni, chanibbedhabhāgiyā saññā, cha abhiññā, cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni, satta aparihānīyā dhammā, satta ariyadhanāni, satta bojjhaṅgāni, satta sappurisadhammā, satta nijjaravatthūni, satta saññā, sattadakkhiṇeyyapuggaladesanā, sattakhīṇāsavabaladesanā, aṭṭhapaññāpaṭilābhahetudesanā, aṭṭha sammattāni, aṭṭhalokadhammātikkamo, aṭṭha ārambhavatthūni, aṭṭhaakkhaṇadesanā, aṭṭha mahāpurisavitakkā, aṭṭhaabhibhāyatanadesanā, aṭṭha vimokkhā, nava yonisomanasikāramūlakā dhammā, nava pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgāni, navasattāvāsadesanā, nava āghātappaṭivinayā, nava saññā, nava nānattā, nava anupubbavihārā, dasa nāthakaraṇā dhammā, dasa kasiṇāyatanāni, dasa kusalakammapathā, dasa sammattāni, dasa ariyavāsā, dasa asekkhadhammā, dasa tathāgatabalāni, ekādasa mettānisaṃsā, dvādasa dhammacakkākārā, terasa dhutaguṇā, cuddasa buddhañāṇāni, pañcadasa vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā, soḷasavidhā ānāpānassati, soḷasa aparantapanīyā dhammā, aṭṭhārasa buddhadhammā, ekūnavīsati paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni, catucattālīsa ñāṇavatthūni, paññāsa udayabbayañāṇāni, paropaṇṇāsa kusaladhammā, sattasattati ñāṇavatthūni, catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasamāpattisañcārimahāvajirañāṇaṃ, anantanayasamantapaṭṭhānapavicayapaccavekkhaṇadesanāñāṇāni, tathā anantāsu lokadhātūsu anantānaṃ sattānaṃ āsayādivibhāvanañāṇāni cāti evamādayo anantāparimāṇabhedā anaññasādhāraṇā niratisayā guṇabhāgā guṇakoṭṭhāsā saṃvijjanti upalabbhanti, tasmā yathāvuttavibhāgā guṇabhāgā assa atthīti bhāgavāti vattabbe ākārassa rassattaṃ katvā ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vutto. Evaṃ tāva bhāgavāti bhagavā.
Yasmā sīlādayo sabbe, guṇabhāgā asesato; Vijjanti sugate tasmā, bhagavāti pavuccati.
为何说“已承载者”即是世尊?为利益一切世间而发起精勤、具足人趣等八法,已发大愿、于正等觉立大誓愿的大菩萨们,所应圆满的正是:布施巴拉密、持戒巴拉密、出离巴拉密、智慧巴拉密、精进巴拉密、忍耐巴拉密、真实巴拉密、决意波罗蜜、慈爱巴拉密、舍巴拉密,此即十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜、十最上波罗蜜,合为三十种波罗蜜;布施等四摄事,四决意;舍自身、舍眼、舍财、舍王国、舍子女,此为五大舍;前行、前所行、说法、利亲族行、利世间行、利佛行等。简而言之,这些就是福德资粮、智慧资粮等成佛之法。从大誓愿开始,历经四阿僧祇十万劫,它们不会成为退分、杂染分或住分,唯是辗转增上的殊胜分。如此,恭敬地、无间断地、无余地承载、完全承载了这一切,故为“bhatavā”;依词源学,将ta音转为ga音,而称“bhagavā”。或者,“bhatavā”的意思是:他以所说方式,承载、完全承载、圆满了那些成佛之法。如是,“已承载者”而为世尊。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhatavāti bhagavā? Ye te sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpannehi manussattādike aṭṭha dhamme samodhānetvā sammāsambodhiyā katamahābhinīhārehi mahābodhisattehi paripūretabbā dānapāramī sīlanekkhammapaññāvīriyakhantisaccaadhiṭṭhānamettāupekkhāpāramīti dasa pāramiyo dasa upapāramiyo dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samatiṃsa pāramiyo, dānādīni cattāri saṅgahavatthūni, cattāri adhiṭṭhānāni, attapariccāgo nayanadhanarajjaputtadārapariccāgoti pañca mahāpariccāgā, pubbayogo, pubbacariyā, dhammakkhānaṃ, ñātatthacariyā, lokatthacariyā, buddhatthacariyāti evamādayo saṅkhepato vā puññasambhārañāṇasambhārā buddhakarā dhammā, te mahābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya kappānaṃ satasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni yathā hānabhāgiyā saṃkilesabhāgiyā ṭhitibhāgiyā vā na honti, atha kho uttaruttari visesabhāgiyāva honti, evaṃ sakkaccaṃ nirantaraṃ anavasesato bhatā sambhatā assa atthīti bhatavāti bhagavā niruttinayena ta-kārassa ga-kāraṃ katvā. Atha vā bhatavāti teyeva yathāvutte buddhakare dhamme vuttanayena bhari sambhari, paripūresīti attho. Evampi bhatavāti bhagavā.
因为对于正等觉而言,布施巴拉密等一切资粮,
导师已承载,因此也被认为是“世尊”。
显示巴利原文 Yasmā sambodhiyā sabbe, dānapāramiādike; Sambhāre bhatavā nātho, tasmāpi bhagavā mato.
世尊如何被称为“分享部分”?那些数以二十四万百千亿计的每日受用的等至部分,他为了利益世间及自己的现法乐住,恒常地分享、受用、修习、多作,因此世尊称为“分享部分”。或者,于应证知法等善法、蕴等中,那些以应遍知等方式略说为四种现观的部分——如详说“眼应遍知,耳应遍知……乃至老死应遍知”等众多应遍知部分,以“眼之集应断……乃至老死之集应断”等方式为应断部分,以“眼之灭……乃至老死之灭应作证”等方式为应作证部分,以“眼灭之道”及“四念处”等方式为众多差别的应修部分——所有这些法,他都随宜以行境修习与亲近的方式分享、受用了。如此,世尊也称为“分享部分”。或者,那些戒等法蕴,是弟子们共通的功德部分、功德份额,他以大悲心分享、希愿:“如何令这些在应调伏者的相续中建立呢?”而他的这个愿望也如愿成就。如此,世尊也称为“分享部分”。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhāge vanīti bhagavā? Ye te catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhā devasikaṃ vaḷañjanakasamāpattibhāgā, te anavasesato lokahitatthaṃ attano ca diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ niccakappaṃ vani bhaji sevi bahulamakāsīti bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Atha vā abhiññeyyadhammesu kusalādīsu khandhādīsu ca ye te pariññeyyādivasena saṅkhepato vā catubbidhā abhisamayabhāgā, vitthārato pana ‘‘cakkhu pariññeyyaṃ, sotaṃ pariññeyyaṃ…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ pariññeyya’’ntiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.21) aneke pariññeyyabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa samudayo pahātabbo…pe… jarāmaraṇassa samudayo pahātabbo’’tiādinā nayena pahātabbabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa nirodho…pe… jarāmaraṇassa nirodho sacchikātabbo’’tiādinā sacchikātabbabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa nirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’tiādinā ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā ca anekabhedā bhāvetabbabhāgā ca dhammā vuttā, te sabbe vani bhaji yathārahaṃ gocarabhāvanāsevanānaṃ vasena sevi. Evampi bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Atha vā ye ime sīlādayo dhammakkhandhā sāvakehi sādhāraṇā guṇakoṭṭhāsā guṇabhāgā, kinti nu kho te vineyyasantānesu patiṭṭhapeyyanti mahākaruṇāya vani abhipatthayi, sā cassa abhipatthanā yathādhippetaphalāvahā ahosi. Evampi bhāge vanīti bhagavā.
因为如来分享了应知、等至与功德的部分;
为愿利益众生,世尊从此便分享。
显示巴利原文 Yasmā ñeyyasamāpatti-guṇabhāge tathāgato; Bhaji patthayi sattānaṃ, hitāya bhagavā tato.
世尊如何称为“受用部分”?略说而言,由具足精勤的曾作福者随力受用的世间与出世间成就,即称为“受用部分”。其中世间方面,如来在正觉之前为菩萨时,受用了最上等的部分,依此圆满具足佛陀之法,成熟佛果。成佛之后,他也受用那些无过失、带来安乐、不与外道共的乃至出世间部分。详言之,他以地方王权、自在、转轮王成就、天王成就等,以及禅那、解脱、定、等至、智见、道修习、果作证等上人法,受用了种种不与外道共的受用部分。因此,世尊称为“受用部分”。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhage vanīti bhagavā? Samāsato tāva katapuññehi payogasampannehi yathāvibhavaṃ bhajīyantīti bhagā, lokiyalokuttarasampattiyo. Tattha lokiye tāva tathāgato sambodhito pubbe bodhisattabhūto paramukkaṃsagate vani bhaji sevi, yattha patiṭṭhāya niravasesato buddhakaradhamme samannānento buddhadhamme paripācesi. Buddhabhūto pana te niravajjasukhūpasaṃhite anaññasādhāraṇe lokuttarepi vani bhaji sevi. Vittārato pana padesarajjaissariyacakkavattisampattidevarajjasampattiādivasena jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattiñāṇadassanamaggabhāvanāphalasacchikiriyādiuttarimanussadhammavasena ca anekavihite anaññasādhāraṇe bhage vani bhaji sevi. Evaṃ bhage vanīti bhagavā.
凡世间诸成就,及种种出世间成就;
正自觉者受用了一切,因此也被尊为世尊。
显示巴利原文 Yā tā sampattiyo loke, yā ca lokuttarā puthu; Sabbā tā bhaji sambuddho, tasmāpi bhagavā mato.
世尊如何称为“有坚固拥护者”?“有坚固拥护者”意为:他有众多坚固拥护者。如来由于具足大悲、一切知智等无量、无与伦比的威德功德殊胜,是一切众生中最上者;由于以去除一切不利为先导,致力于无余利益安乐,具足无上精进成就,对包括天人在内的众生作最上饶益;由于具足三十二大丈夫相、八十随形好、身光一寻等不与外道共的殊胜庄严身相;由于以如实证得的功德,具足“彼世尊即是如此”等语道所起的、遍满三界、广大清净的称赞音声;由于在少欲、知足等达到最上究竟中善安住;由于具足十力、四无畏等无上功德殊胜;在此四种量度的世间聚集处——依色量而净信色者、依声量而净信声者、依粗量而净信粗者、依法量而净信法者——他一切时处皆能令生净信,成为无量众生及天人的恭敬、尊重、崇敬之处,是最高敬爱、坚固拥护的所依。那些安住于他的教诫中、具足不动净信者,不会被任何沙门、婆罗门、天、魔、梵天等所动摇。确实,他们即使在自己生命有危难时,也不舍弃对彼的净信,或对彼教令的坚固拥护。因此说:显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhattavāti bhagavā? Bhattā daḷhabhattikā assa bahū atthīti bhattavā. Tathāgato hi mahākaruṇāsabbaññutaññāṇādiaparimitanirupamappabhāvaguṇavisesasamaṅgībhāvato sabbasattāuttamo, sabbānatthaparihārapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā sadevamanussāya pajāya accantupakāritāya dvattiṃsa mahāpurisalakkhaṇāsīti anubyañjana byāmappabhādi anaññasādhāraṇavisesapaṭimaṇḍitarūpakāyatāya yathābhuccaguṇādhigatena ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinayappavattena lokattayabyāpinā suvipulena suvisuddhena ca thutighosena samannāgatattā ukkaṃsapāramippattāsu appicchatāsantuṭṭhitāādīsu suppatiṭṭhitabhāvato dasabalacatuvesārajjādiniratisayaguṇavisesasamaṅgībhāvato ca rūpappamāṇo rūpappasanno, ghosappamāṇo ghosappasanno, lūkhappamāṇo lūkhappasanno, dhammappamāṇo dhammappasannoti evaṃ catuppamāṇike lokasannivāse sabbathāpi pasādāvahabhāvena samantapāsādikattā aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ sadevamanussānaṃ ādarabahumānagāravāyatanatāya paramapemasambhattiṭṭhānaṃ. Ye cassa ovāde patiṭṭhitā aveccappasādena samannāgatā honti, kenaci asaṃhāriyā tesaṃ sambhatti samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vāti. Tathā hi te attano jīvitapaaccāgepi tattha pasādaṃ na pariccajanti tassa vā āṇaṃ daḷhabhattibhāvato. Tenevāha –
‘‘Yo ve kataññū katavedi dhīro, Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hotī’’ti. (jā. 2.17.78);
诸比丘,犹如大海安住于法性,不越海岸;正是如此,诸比丘,凡我为弟子们制定的学处,我的弟子们即使舍命亦不违越。显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, mahāsamuddo ṭhitadhammo velaṃ nātivattati, evameva kho, bhikkhave, yaṃ mayā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ mama sāvakā jīvitahetupi nātikkamantī’’ti (udā. 45; cūḷava. 385) ca.
如是,世尊被称为“有坚固拥护者”,即依语法规则,省略一个t字母,并将另一个t字母转为g字母。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhattavāti bhagavā niruttinayena ekassa ta-kārassa lopaṃ katvā itarassa ta-kārassa ga-kāraṃ katvā.
利益世间者具足殊胜功德,又有众多坚固的拥护者,世尊因此而得名。
显示巴利原文 Guṇātisayayuttassa, yasmā lokahitesino; Sambhattā bahavo satthu, bhagavā tena vuccati.
为何说世尊已“吐出”吉祥呢?因为如来尚在菩萨位时,于过去诸生中圆满波罗蜜,便已将称为吉祥的荣光、自在与名声吐出、呕出,如同对待唾液一般,无所顾念地弃舍了。例如,在欢喜童子时(《本生经》1.15.211等)、护象童子时(《本生经》1.15.337等)、铁屋智者时(《本生经》1.15.363等)、默然跛足智者时(《本生经》2.22.1等)、小善月王时(《本生经》2.17.195等),在这些时期,为了圆满出离巴拉密,他舍弃了与天王之位相当的转轮圣王荣华,所弃舍的自身存在不可计量。即使在最后一生,他也将已到手的转轮圣王荣华、堪与天界主宰相比的四洲自在,以及依转轮圣王成就而闪耀的七宝名声,视如草芥,无所顾念地弃舍,出离之后,证悟了正等正觉。因此,他吐出了这些荣华等吉祥,故称世尊。或者,另一种解释:名为“星宿”的诸星,与之等同地运行、转起,故称为“吉祥”,因为它们以须弥山、持双山、北俱卢洲、雪山等器世间殊胜处为所依的光辉,有持续一劫之久的状态。世尊同样也吐出了这些,因为超越了以那些所依处为住处的众生境界,断除了对它们的系缚欲。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhage vamīti bhagavā? Yasmā tathāgato bodhisattabhūtopi purimāsu jātīsu pāramiyo pūrento bhagasaṅkhātaṃ siriṃ issariyaṃ yasañca vami uggiri, kheḷapiṇḍaṃ viya anapekkho chaḍḍayi. Tathā hissa somanassakumārakāle(jā. 1.15.211 ādayo) hatthipālakumārakāle (jā. 1.15.337 ādayo) ayogharapaṇḍitakāle(jā. 1.15.363 ādayo) mūgapakkhapaṇḍitakāle (jā. 2.22.1 ādayo) cūḷasutasomakāleti (jā. 2.17.195 ādayo) evamādīsu nekkhammapāramīpūraṇavasena devarajjasadisāya rajjasiriyā pariccattattabhāvānaṃ pamāṇaṃ natthi, carimattabhāvepi hatthagataṃ cakkavattisiriṃ devalokādhipaccasaasaṃ catudīpissariyaṃ cakkavattisampattisannissayaṃ sattaratanasamujjalaṃ yasañca tiṇāyapi amaññamāno nirapekkho pahāya abhinikkhamitvā sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, tasmā ime siriādike bhage vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāni nāma nakkhattāni, tehi samaṃ gacchanti pavattantīti bhagā, sineruyugandharauttarakuruhimavantādibhājanalokavisesasannissayā sobhā kappaṭṭhāyibhāvato, tepi bhagavā vami taṃnivāsisattāvāsasamatikkamanato tappaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānena pajahīti. Evampi bhage vamīti bhagavā.
他舍弃了转轮王的荣华、名声、自在与快乐,
也舍弃了世间心,因此善逝乃是世尊。
显示巴利原文 Cakkavattisiriṃ yasmā, yasaṃ issariyaṃ sukhaṃ; Pahāsi lokacittañca, sugato bhagavā tato.
为何说世尊“已吐出诸部分”呢?“部分”指同类的法聚,即依蕴、处、界等,其中又依色、受等,以及依过去等而有多种。世尊断尽一切戏论、一切轭、一切系缚、一切结缚,证得不死界,遂吐出、呕出它们,无所顾念地舍弃,不复回转。正如他对于一切地、水、火、风,眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意,色、声、香、味、触、法,眼识乃至意识,眼触乃至意触,眼触所生受乃至意触所生受,眼触所生想乃至意触所生想,眼触所生思乃至意触所生思,色爱乃至法爱,色寻乃至法寻,色伺乃至法伺等,以无间法分别,毫无剩余地吐出、呕出了一切法聚,以无所顾念的舍弃而抛弃了。正如经中所说:“阿难,凡已舍、已吐、已放、已断、已遣的,如来绝不可能再回转。”由此,世尊也因“已吐出诸部分”而得名。又或者,“已吐出诸部分”是指,以圣道智,吐出、呕出了一切善与不善、有罪与无罪、劣与胜、黑与白相对之法,无所顾念地舍弃、断除,并为令他人也能如此而说法。经中也说:“比丘们,法尚且应舍,”显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ bhāge vamīti bhagavā? Bhāgā nāma sabhāgadhammakoṭṭhāsā, te khandhāyatanadhātādivasena, tatthāpi rūpavedanādivasena atītādivasena ca anekavidhā, te ca bhagavā sabbaṃ papañcaṃ sabbaṃ yogaṃ sabbaṃ ganthaṃ sabbaṃ saṃyojanaṃ samucchinditvā amatadhātuṃ samadhigacchanto vami uggiri, anapekkho chaḍḍayi na paccāgami. Tathā hesa sabbatthakameva pathaviṃ āpaṃ tejaṃ vāyaṃ, cakkhuṃ sotaṃ ghānaṃ jivhaṃ kāyaṃ manaṃ, rūpe sadde gandhe rase phoṭṭhabbe dhamme, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ…pe… manoviññāṇaṃ, cakkhusamphassaṃ…pe… manosamphassaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ saññaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ saññaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ cetanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ cetanaṃ, rūpataṇhaṃ…pe… dhammataṇhaṃ, rūpavitakkaṃ…pe… dhammavitakkaṃ, rūpavicāraṃ…pe… dhammavicārantiādinā anupadadhammavibhāgavasenapi sabbeva dhammakoṭṭhāse anavasesato vami uggiri, anapekkhapariccāgena chaḍḍayi. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ taṃ, ānanda, cattaṃ vantaṃ muttaṃ pahīnaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ, taṃ tathāgato puna paccāgamissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.183). Evampi bhāge vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāge vamīti sabbepi kusalākusale sāvajjānavajje hīnapaṇīte kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāge dhamme ariyamaggañāṇamukhena vami uggiri, anapekkho pariccaji pajahi, paresañca tathattāya dhammaṃ desesi. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘dhammāpi vo, bhikkhave , pahātabbā pageva adhammā (ma. ni. 240). Kullūpamaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desessāmi nittharaṇatthāya, no gahaṇatthāyā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.240). Evampi bhāge vamīti bhagavā.
蕴、处、界等一切法的差别,大牟尼已全然吐弃;
黑法与白法既已吐弃,他由此得名世尊。
显示巴利原文 Khandhāyatanadhātādi dhammabhedā mahesinā; Kaṇhā sukkā yato vantā, tatopi bhagavā mato.
他具足吉祥,承载吉祥,并吐出了吉祥及诸分;
他吐出吉祥,同样吐出诸分,因此,胜利者即是世尊。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhāgavā bhatavā bhāge, bhage ca vani bhattavā; Bhage vami tathā bhāge, vamīti bhagavā jino’’ti.
在此,由于简略而言,佛陀的功德依自利成就与利他行道而有两种。其中,自利成就依断德与智德的差别而有两种,因为威德成就等不离于此,故包含于其中。利他行道依加行与意乐而有两种。其中,加行是指心无顾念于利养恭敬等,而教导能出离一切苦的法;意乐是指即使对敌对者也常怀利益之心,以及等待智慧成熟之时等利他行道。以财物的接受等而行利益事,也是利他行道。因此,为了阐明这些,应知在经文中采用了“阿罗汉”等词。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca yasmā saṅkhepato attahitasampattiparahitapaṭipattivasena duvidhā buddhaguṇā, tāsu attahitasampatti pahānasampadāñāṇasampadābhedato duvidhā ānubhāvasampadādīnaṃ tadavinābhāvena tadantogadhattā. Parahitapaṭipatti payogāsayabhedato duvidhā. Tattha payogato lābhasakkārādinirapekkhacittassa sabbadukkhaniyyānikadhammūpadeso, āsayato paṭiviruddhesupi niccaṃ hitesitā ñāṇaparipākakālāgamanādiparahitappaṭipatti. Āmisapaṭiggahaṇādināpi atthacariyā parahitapaapatti hotiyeva, tasmā tesampi vibhāvanavasena pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘araha’’ntiādīnaṃ padānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
其中,以“阿罗汉”一词,依断德而阐明世尊的自利成就;以“正自觉者”与“世间解”这些词,依智德而阐明。难道不是以“世间解”一词也阐明正自觉性吗?确实阐明,然而有差别:以“正自觉者”一词阐明了一切知智的威力,以“世间解”一词则阐明了意乐随眠智等的威力。以“明行具足”一词,阐明世尊的全部自利成就。以“善逝”一词,则从发源开始,阐明世尊的自利成就与利他行道。以“无上调御丈夫、天人师”这些词,阐明世尊的利他行道。以“佛”一词,阐明世尊的自利成就与利他行道。如此,说了“正自觉者”之后,再说“佛”一词便得到了合理的支持。因此他说:“自己觉悟,也令其他众生觉悟”等。以“世尊”一词,也从发源开始,阐明世尊的一切自利成就与利他行道。显示巴利原文
Tattha arahanti iminā padena pahānasampadāvasena bhagavato attahitasampatti vibhāvitā, sammāsambuddho lokavidūti ca imehi padehi ñāṇasampadāvasena. Nanu ca ‘‘lokavidū’’ti imināpi sammāsambuddhatā vibhāvīyatīti? Saccaṃ vibhāvīyati, atthi pana viseso ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti iminā sabbaññutaññāṇānubhāvo vibhāvito, ‘‘lokavidū’’ti pana iminā āsayānusayañāṇādīnampi ānubhāvo vibhāvitoti. Vijjācaraṇasampannoti iminā sabbāpi bhagavato attahitasampatti vibhāvitā. Sugatoti pana iminā samudāgamato paṭṭhāya bhagavato attahitasampatti parahitapaṭipatti ca vibhāvitā. Anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānanti imehi padehi bhagavato parahitapaṭipatti vibhāvitā. Buddhoti iminā bhagavato attahitasampatti parahitapaṭipatti ca vibhāvitā. Evañca katvā ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti vatvā ‘‘buddho’’ti vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘attanāpi bujjhi, aññepi satte bodhesī’’tiādi . Bhagavāti ca imināpi samudāgamato paṭṭhāya bhagavato sabbā attahitasampatti parahitapaṭipatti ca vibhāvitā.
另一种方法:依因、果及利益众生,佛德简略为三种。其中,以“阿罗汉、正自觉者、明行具足、世间解”这些词,依果德成就而阐明佛德。以“无上调御丈夫、天人师”这些词,依利益众生而阐明佛德。以“佛陀”一词,依果德及利益众生而阐明佛德。然而,应知以“善逝、世尊”这些词,依因、果、利益众生而阐明佛德。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – hetuphalasattupakāravasena saṅkhepato tividhā buddhaguṇā. Tattha arahaṃ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno lokavidūti imehi padehi phalasampattivasena buddhaguṇā vibhāvitā. Anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānanti imehi sattupakāravasena buddhaguṇā pakāsitā. Buddhoti iminā phalavasena sattupakāravasena ca buddhaguṇā vibhāvitā. Sugato bhagavāti pana imehi padehi hetuphalasattupakāravasena buddhaguṇā vibhāvitāti veditabbaṃ.
在“彼世尊”等句中,“彼世尊”即指那位以“阿罗汉”等德号所称扬功德的世尊。“此世间”并非仅就大众面前而说,而是为了显示无余遍取,故说“包括天界”等,因此说“现在将显示应说之义”。“已生故”是指各依其业与烦恼而出生。应知以“包括天界”一词,依剩余法摄取了五欲界天,因为其余诸词已包含了其他天。而“包括天界”是以部分来作解释,整体是复合词义。以“包括魔界”一词,应视为依邻近法摄取了第六欲界天,因为魔在那里出生并居住。以“包括梵天界”一词,摄取了梵身天等梵天,这里也是同样的道理。“敌对者……乃至……摄取了沙门婆罗门”,这只是举例,因为以“包括沙门婆罗门”一词,已摄取了非敌对者及未完全去除恶的沙门婆罗门。虽然依“包括天界”等限定语,可知“世间”一词的所缘为有情,因为它们是同喻所缘;但为了显示在“有毛者、有翼者”等中,即使不是同喻,也有这样的复合词,故说“以‘众生’一词摄取有情世间”。以“包括天界”等词摄取了化生天,以“包括沙门婆罗门”一词摄取了净居天,因此说“以‘包括天人’一词摄取了共许天及其他余者”。其中,共许天显示巴利原文
So imaṃ lokantiādīsu so bhagavāti yo ‘‘araha’’ntiādinā kittitaguṇo, so bhagavā. Imaṃ lokanti nayidaṃ mahājanassa sammukhāmattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, atha kho anavasesaṃ pariyādāyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘idāni vattabbaṃ nidassetī’’ti. Pajātattāti yathāsakaṃ kammakilesehi nibbattattā. Sadevakavacanena pañcakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ pārisesañāyenāti veditabbaṃ itaresaṃ padantarehi saṅgahitattā. Sadevakanti ca avayavena viggaho samudāyo samāsattho. Samārakavacanena chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ paccāsattiñāyenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha hi so jāto taṃnivāsī ca. Sabrahmakavacanena brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Paccatthikā…pe… samaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇanti nidassanamattametaṃ apaccatthikānaṃ asamitābāhitapāpānañca samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇīvacanena gahitattā. Kāmaṃ ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādivisesanānaṃ vasena sattavisayo lokasaddoti viññāyati tulyayogavisayattā tesaṃ, ‘‘salomako sapakkhako’’tiādīsu pana atulyayogepi ayaṃ samāso labbhatīti byabhicāradassanato pajāgahaṇanti āha ‘‘pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇa’’nti. Sadevakādivacanena upapattidevānaṃ, sassamaṇabrāhmaṇīvacanena visuddhidevānañca gahitattā āha ‘‘sadevamanussavacanena sammutidevaavasesamanussaggahaṇa’’nti. Tattha sammutidevā rājāno. Avasesamanussaggahaṇanti samaṇabrāhmaṇehi avasesamanussaggahaṇaṃ. Tīhi padehīti sadevakasamārakasabarhmakavacanehi. Dvīhīti sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ sadevamanussanti imehi dvīhi padehi.
无色界有情安住于自身不动的住处而闪耀,故得‘天’之名,因此说‘以“包括天界”一语摄取了无色界世间’。世尊也正是因此说:‘生于空无边处天的诸天为伴’等。由于六欲天世间特别处于魔的势力范围内,故说‘以“包括魔界”一语摄取了六欲天世间’。因无色界梵天世间已被单独摄取,故说‘色界梵天世间’。‘依四众’指依刹帝利众、婆罗门众、居士众、沙门众这四众,在八众(刹帝利众、婆罗门众、居士众、沙门众、四大王天众、三十三天众、魔众、梵天众)中,依刹帝利等四众。其余四众则已由‘包括魔界’一语所摄取。显示巴利原文
Arūpī sattā attano āneñjavihārena viharantā dibbantīti devāti imaṃ nibbacanaṃ labhantīti āha ‘‘sadevakaggahaṇena arūpāvacaraloko gahito’’ti. Tenevāha bhagavā ‘‘ākāsānañcāyatanūpagānaṃ devānaṃ sahabyata’’ntiādi (a. ni. 3.117). Chakāmāvacaradevalokassa savisesaṃ mārassa vase vattanato āha ‘‘samārakaggahaṇena chakāmāvacaradevaloko’’ti . Arūpībrahmalokassa visuṃ gahitattā āha ‘‘rūpī brahmaloko’’ti. Catuparisavasenāti khattiyaparisā, brāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇacātumahārājikatāvatiṃsamārabrahmaparisāti imāsu aṭṭhasu parisāsu khattiyādicatuparisavasena. Itarā pana catasso parisā samārakaggahaṇena gahitā evāti.
然而,此处如何依四众而摄取了人世间呢?以‘包括沙门婆罗门’一语,摄取了沙门众与婆罗门众;以‘包括天人’一语,摄取了刹帝利众与居士众;而‘众生’一语所指的正是这四众,即名为四众的‘众生’。再者,如何与共许的天一起摄取了人世间呢?此处同样以‘包括沙门婆罗门’一语摄取了沙门与婆罗门;以‘包括天人’一语摄取了被称为共许天的刹帝利,以及称为居士、首陀罗的其余人等。然而,由于除此之外并无其他人类有情,故应知‘众生’一语即指以这四种方式存在的人类有情。如此,在两种分别中,‘众生’一语都只摄取了依四众等而存在的人,因此现在为了显示‘众生’一语也包含其余有情,而说‘或者,其余一切有情世间’。其中,应知其余有情世间指龙、金翅鸟等。此处亦应连接:依四众,或与共许天一起,或其余一切有情世间。也就是说:摄取了与四众共住的其余龙、金翅鸟、地狱等有情世间,或与以四种方式存在的人共住的其余龙、金翅鸟、地狱等有情世间。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ panettha catuparisavasena manussaloko gahito? ‘‘Sassamaṇabrāhmaṇi’’nti iminā samaṇaparisā brāhmaṇaparisā ca gahitā honti, ‘‘sadevamanussa’’nti iminā khattiyaparisā gahapatiparisā ca gahitā, ‘‘paja’’nti iminā pana imāyeva catasso parisā vuttā, catuparisasaṅkhātaṃ pajanti vuttaṃ hoti, kathaṃ pana sammutidevehi saha manussaloko gahito? Etthāpi ‘‘sassamaṇabrāhmaṇi’’nti iminā samaṇabrāhmaṇā gahitā, ‘‘sadevamanussa’’nti iminā sammutidevasaṅkhātā khattiyā, gahapatisuddasaṅkhātā avasesamanussā ca gahitā honti. Ito pana aññesaṃ manussasattānaṃ abhāvato ‘‘paja’’nti iminā catūhi pakārehi ṭhitā eteyeva manussasattā vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ vikappadvayepi pajāggahaṇena catuparisādivasena ṭhitānaṃ manussānaṃyeva gahitattā idāni ‘‘paja’’nti iminā avasesasatte saṅgahetvā dassetukāmo āha ‘‘avasesasabbasattaloko vā’’ti. Tattha nāgagaruḷādivasena avasesasattaloko veditabbo. Etthāpi catuparisavasena sammutidevehi vā saha avasesasabbasattaloko vāti yojetabbaṃ. Catuparisasahito avasesasuddhanāgasupaṇṇanerayikādisattaloko, catudhā ṭhitamanussasahito vā avasesanāgasupaṇṇanerayikādisattaloko gahitoti vuttaṃ hoti.
至此,已分门别类地把握世间并显示了其构造,现在为了以种种差别、不再分门别类地把握世间并显示其构造,而说‘再者,于此……’等。其中,‘以最胜的界定’即依最胜之趣的智识。因为在五趣中,唯有摄属于天趣者为最胜,其中又以无色界众生因远离烦恼苦的逼迫,具足寂静、殊胜、不动的定境,以及极其长寿等种种殊胜,而为最胜。‘大梵天有大威神力’是依一万世界的大梵天而说。因为已说‘以最胜的界定’。‘无上’即最胜的九种出世间法。‘随顺次第’即义与句的连结次第。然而,古师们对此如此解释:‘与天同在’即与诸天一起的其余世间;‘与魔同在’即与魔罗一起的其余世间;‘与梵天同在’即与诸梵天一起的其余世间。如此,将一切三有中的众生,以‘与天、魔、梵天共住’为名的三种方式,纳入‘与天同在’等三句之后,再以两句总括,而说‘与沙门、婆罗门、人天共住的众生’。如是,以五句,通过‘与天同在’等种种方式,总括了三界。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatā bhāgaso lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetvā idāni tena tena visesena abhāgaso lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicetthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ukkaṭṭhaparicchedatoti ukkaṃsagativijānanena. Pañcasu hi gatīsu devagatipariyāpannāva seṭṭhā, tatthāpi arūpino dūrasamussāritakilesadukkhatāya santapaṇītaāneñjavihārasamaṅgitāya ativiya dīghāyukatāyāti evamādīhi visesehi ativiya ukkaṭṭhā. Brahmā mahānubhāvoti dasasahassiyaṃ mahābrahmuno vasena vadati. ‘‘Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Anuttaranti seṭṭhaṃ navalokuttaraṃ. Anusandhikkamoti atthānañceva padānañca anusandhānukkamo. Porāṇā panettha evaṃ vaṇṇayanti – sadevakanti devatāhi saddhiṃ avasesaṃ lokaṃ. Samārakanti mārena saddhiṃ avasesaṃ lokaṃ. Sabrahmakanti brahmehi saddhiṃ avasesaṃ lokaṃ. Evaṃ sabbepi tibhavūpage satte devamārabrahmasahitatāsaṅkhātehi tīhi pakārehi ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādīsu tīsu padesu pakkhipitvā puna dvīhi padehi pariyādiyanto ‘‘sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ pajaṃ sadevamanussa’’nti āha. Evaṃ pañcahipi padehi sadevakattādinā tena tena pakārena tedhātukameva pariyādinnanti.
“证知”:这是省略了ya‑kāra的表述,其义为“证知后”,故说“以证知、以殊胜之智了知后”。之所以遮止推理等,即遮止推理、譬喻、义准等,是因为(佛智)是唯一的量。确实,以无碍智行遍一切处故,诸佛世尊于一切法皆是现量。无上远离乐,即果等至之乐。因此,世尊说法有时也间杂着(果等至的)心路过程,故说“舍弃后”,并加上了“pi”字。因为世尊说法时,在听众喝彩或随闻审察法义的那一刻,他会以预备行限定那一刻而入果等至,并依所限定的时间从等至出定后,从所立之处开始说法。“或说少,或说多”:依利根顿悟者而说少,或依广慧者、可引导者而说多。他所开示的法正是初善等样式,也就是说:在开头也使之成为善妙、贤善、无过而开示;在中间、在结尾也使之成为善妙、贤善、无过而开示。这是所说的意思。因为法的善性在于能引导出离,而能引导出离则在于其完全无过的状态。显示巴利原文
Abhiññāti yakāralopenāyaṃ niddeso, abhijānitvāti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘abhiññāya adhikena ñāṇena ñatvā’’ti. Anumānādipaṭikkhepoti anumānaupamānaatthāpattiādipaṭikkhepo ekappamāṇattā. Sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratāya hi sabbapaccakkhā buddhā bhagavanto. Anuttaraṃ vivekasukhanti phalasamāpattisukhaṃ. Tena vīthimissāpi kadāci bhagavato dhammadesanā hotīti hitvāpīti pisaddaggahaṇaṃ. Bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento yasmiṃ khaṇe parisā sādhukāraṃ vā deti, yathāsutaṃ vā dhammaṃ paccavekkhati, taṃ khaṇaṃ pubbabhāgena paricchinditvā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, yathāparicchedañca samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ṭhitaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya dhammaṃ deseti. Appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desentoti ugghaṭitaññussa vasena appaṃ vā, vipañcitaññussa neyyassa vā vasena bahuṃ vā desento. Ādikalyāṇādippakārameva desetīti ādimhipi kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā deseti. Majjhepi pariyosānepi kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā desetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammassa hi kalyāṇatā niyyānikatāya niyyānikatā ca sabbaso anavajjabhāvena.
“周遍贤善”:即由一切部分而美好。“法”指教理之法。虽然从究竟义上说,并没有脱离组成部分而独立存在的“集合体”,但当那些组成部分以集合体的形态被观待时,便获得了“偈颂”的名称。为了显示这一点,将其视为与组成部分相异,并赋予共相施设,而说“以初句为初善”等。“同一连贯”是就依其连贯性而为一连贯、并非过于繁多的(经典)而说。而其他(经典)则依所应说之法的区分,而有初、中、后分。“以序分”即由阿难长老所安立的、以说明时、处、师、众等为特征的序分经文。“以结分”即由“此是世尊所说”等,或“如是所说者,是缘于此而说”等随所说义而作的结分。因为即使是结集者所安立的序分与结分,也由于随顺佛陀的教说,而包含在三藏之内。因此,在《长部注》中说:“对于同一连贯的经,序分是初,‘此是世尊所说’是后,二者之间是中。”显示巴利原文
Samantabhaddakattāti sabbabhāgehi sundarattā. Dhammassāti pariyattidhammassa. Kiñcāpi avayavavinimutto samudāyo nāma paramatthato koci natthi, yesu pana avayavesu samudāyarūpena apekkhitesu gāthāti samaññā, taṃ tato bhinnaṃ viya katvā saṃsāmivohāraṃ āropetvā dassento ‘‘paṭhamapādena ādikalyāṇā’’tiādimāha. Ekānusandhikanti idaṃ nātibahuvibhāgaṃ yathānusandhinā ekānusandhikaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Itarassa pana teneva desetabbadhammavibhāgena ādimajjhapariyosānabhāgā labbhantīti. Nidānenāti ānandattherena ṭhapitakāladesadesakaparisādiapadisanalakkhaṇena nidānaganthena. Nigamenāti ‘‘idamavocā’’tiādikena ‘‘iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vutta’’nti vā yathāvuttatthanigamanena. Saṅgītikārakehi ṭhapitānipi hi nidānanigamanāni dassetvā tīṇi piṭakāni satthu desanāya anuvidhānato tadantogadhāneva. Teneva dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ekānusandhikassa suttassa nidānaṃ ādi, idamavocāti pariyosānaṃ, ubhinnamantarā majjha’’nti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.190) vuttaṃ.
如此,依经藏说明了法的初善等之后,现在将三藏统合起来,为了显示它而说“整个……”等。其中,教法是指——显示巴利原文
Evaṃ suttantapiṭakavasena dhammassa ādikalyāṇāditaṃ dassetvā idāni tīṇi piṭakāni ekajjhaṃ gahetvā taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sakalopī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sāsanadhammoti –
“诸恶莫作,众善奉行,
自净其意,是诸佛教。”——(《长部》2.90;《法句经》183;《导论》30, 50)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ, kusalassa upasampadā; Sacittapariyodapanaṃ, etaṃ buddhāna sāsana’’nti. (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183; netti. 30, 50) –
如是所说佛陀教法的阐明者,即是教理法。由于戒为教法根本,故说“以戒为初善”。由于止等为教法成就的中间阶段,故说“以止、观、道、果为中善”。由于证得涅槃后更无所应作,故说“以涅槃为后善”。教法中,行道以慧为体,而戒与定为根本,故说“或以戒、定为初善”。然慧有随觉与通达二种,为兼此二者,故说“以观、道为中善”。为显示其圆满即果的作用——现证涅槃,此后更无所作,故说“以果、涅槃为后善”。又或以“果”指有余涅槃,以“涅槃”指无余依涅槃,此二者为教法成就的究竟,故说“以果、涅槃为后善”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttassa satthusāsanassa pakāsako pariyattidhammo. Sīlamūlakattā sāsanassa ‘‘sīlena ādikalyāṇo’’ti vuttaṃ. Samathādīnaṃ sāsanasampattiyā vemajjhabhāvato āha ‘‘samathavipassanāmaggaphalehi majjhekalyāṇo’’ti. Nibbānādhigamato uttari karaṇīyābhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘nibbānena pariyosānakalyāṇo’’ti. Sāsane sammāpaṭipatti nāma paññāya hoti, tassā ca sīlaṃ samādhi ca mūlanti āha ‘‘sīlasamādhīhivā ādikalyāṇo’’ti. Paññā pana anubodhapaavedhavasena duvidhāti tadubhayampi gaṇhanto ‘‘vipassanāmaggehi majjhekalyāṇo’’ti āha. Tassā nipphattiphalakiccaṃ nibbānasacchikiriyā, tato paraṃ kattabbaṃ natthīti dassento āha ‘‘phalanibbānehi pariyosānakalyāṇo’’ti. Phalaggahaṇena vā saupādisesaṃ nibbānamāha, itarena itaraṃ tadubhayañca sāsanasampattiyā osānanti āha ‘‘phalanibbānehi pariyosānakalyāṇo’’ti.
由于佛陀的善觉悟性而为‘初善’:佛陀的善觉悟,即正等正觉,以此为因而为初善。彻底断除一切杂染、圆满清净,是法的善法性,以此为体而为中善。按照导师所教导的而行道,是僧的善行道,由此令教法善住世间而为后善。‘此’指教法。‘为彼真实性’:即为了如世尊所说法的真实性、如性。然而,此觉有三种:正等觉、缘觉、声闻觉,因为除此之外别无证得涅槃的途径。其中,第一觉于一切功德中最为殊胜,且是其余二觉的根本,故为初善;第二觉功德处于中等,故为中善;第三觉兼具二者或成为终了,故为教法的后善。显示巴利原文
Buddhasubodhitāya vā ādikalyāṇoti buddhassa subodhitā sammāsambuddhatā, tāya ādikalyāṇo tappabhavattā. Sabbaso saṃkilesappahānaṃ vodānapāripūrī ca dhammasudhammatā, tāya majjhekalyāṇo taṃsarīrattā. Satthārā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ tathā paṭipatti saṅghasuppaṭipatti, tāya pariyosānakalyāṇo tāya sāsanassa loke suppatiṭṭhitabhāvato. Tanti sāsanadhammaṃ. Tathattāyāti yathattāya bhagavatā dhammo desito, tathattāya tathabhāvāya. So pana abhisambodhi paccekabodhi sāvakabodhīti tividho ito aññathā nibbānādhigamassa abhāvato. Tattha sabbaguṇehi aggabhāvato itarabodhidvayamūlatāya ca paṭhamāya bodhiyā ādikalyāṇatā, guṇehi vemajjhabhāvato dutiyāya majjhekalyāṇatā, tadubhayatāya vā vosānatāya ca sāsanadhammassa tatiyāya pariyosānakalyāṇatā vuttā.
此是教法。‘由于能镇伏诸盖’:即站在解脱处之首而听闻正法者,确有镇伏诸盖的情形。此义已说:显示巴利原文
Esoti sāsanadhammo. Nīvaraṇavikkhambhanatoti vimuttāyatanasīse ṭhatvā saddhammaṃ suṇantassa nīvaraṇānaṃ vikkhambhanasabbhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“贤友,比丘的导师或某位可敬的同梵行者说法时,他即于该处获得义之感受、获得法之感受。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathā yathāvuso, bhikkhuno satthā vā dhammaṃ deseti, aññataro vā garuṭṭhānīyo sabrahmacārī, tathā tathā so tattha labhati atthavedaṃ labhati dhammaveda’’nti.
比丘们,当圣弟子专心谛听法时,在那时,他的五种盖障已断除。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiṃ , bhikkhave, samaye ariyasāvako ohitasoto dhammaṃ suṇāti, pañcassa nīvaraṇāni tasmiṃ samaye pahīnāni hontī’’ti –
等等。由于能带来止观之乐:也就是能证得止之乐与观之乐。这层含义也已说明如下:“他远离诸欲、远离不善法,有寻有伺,由远离而生起喜与乐”等等,以及:显示巴利原文
Ca ādi. Samathavipassanāsukhāvahanatoti samathasukhassa vipassanāsukhassa ca sampāpanato. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘so vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukha’’ntiādi, tathā –
“他从何处如理作观,诸蕴的兴灭便从那里现起”
他获得欢喜与愉悦,那即是了知不死者之境。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānataṃ. Amānusī ratī hoti, sammā dhammaṃ vipassato’’ti ca. (dha. pa. 374-373);
“如是行道者”:指能带来止观之乐,或如导师所教导那样而行道的教法。“由于能带来如如状态”:即依六支舍,面对可意等境,能成就不为世间法所染的如如状态。“由于以依怙为根源”:“根源”指从此而生起,即生起的依处;由于依怙正是此的根源,故说“以依怙为根源”,其性为“以依怙为根源性”,因此教法以依怙为因,这是它的含义。“以义清净而为中善”:即无杂染、能出离的义清净,以此义清净作为中善。“以作用清净而为后善”:即名为“善行道”的作用清净,后善即是善行道的圆满终结,因为教法以善行道为归宿。总结上述之义,故说“因此”等。显示巴利原文
Tathā paṭipannoti yathā samathavipassanāsukhaṃ āvahati, yathā vā satthārā anusiṭṭhaṃ, tathā paṭipanno sāsanadhammo. Tādibhāvāvahanatoti chaḷaṅgupekkhāvasena iṭṭhādīsu tādibhāvassa lokadhammehi anupalepassa āvahanato. Nāthappabhavattāti pabhavati etasmāti pabhavo, uppattiṭṭhānaṃ, nāthova pabhavo etassāti nāthappabhavo, tassa bhāvo nāthappabhavattaṃ, tasmā sāsanadhammassa nāthahetukattāti attho. Atthasuddhiyā majjhekalyāṇoti nirupakkilesatāya niyyānikatā atthasuddhi, tāya majjhekalyāṇo. Kiccasuddhiyā pariyosānakalyāṇoti suppaṭipattisaṅkhātakiccassa suddhiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo suppaṭipattipariyosānattā sāsanadhammassa. Yathāvuttamatthaṃ nigamento āha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi.
所谓“教法梵行”等,通指三学与全部经教之法,称为教法梵行。依此而说:“尊者,哪些佛陀、世尊的梵行不能久住?”等。圣八支道则是道梵行。依此而说:“生已尽,梵行已立,所作已办。”随宜,即如其所应。因为包含三学的教法梵行,以具足义而成为有义;同样,道梵行也是如此。此外,名为经教之法的教法梵行,依如上所说之义,而为有义及有文。所谓“具足义”,即义已成就,此处“具足”即是成就的意思。所谓“具足文”,道理亦同。若某人的说法依靠粥饭、男女等描述,那样的说法不名为有义之说,因其说法缺乏出离之义。然而世尊舍弃了那样的说法,宣说依靠四念处等的说法,故称“以具足义而说有义之法”。若某人的说法,在松、紧等各类文辞中,仅以一种或两种文辞来组合,如同达弥罗语那样只有单一文辞等组合;或如基罗多语那样,因开口发音不触唇,故全是无唇音;或如臾那语那样,一切处皆带送气,故全是送气音;或如卑陀私迦等蛮族语那样,一切处皆带随韵,故全是随韵——由于文辞不圆满,那样的说法便称为无文。因为这一切都只是依文辞显示巴利原文
Sāsanabrahmacariyantiādīsu avisesena tisso sikkhā sakalo ca tantidhammo sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘katamesānaṃ kho, bhante, buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ brahmacariyaṃ na ciraṭṭhitikamahosī’’tiādi (pārā. 18). Ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti (pārā. 14). Yathānurūpanti yathārahaṃ. Sikkhattayasaṅgahañhi sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ, tathā maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Itaraṃ pana tantidhammasaṅkhātaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ yathāvuttenatthena sātthaṃ sabyañjanañca. Atthasampattiyāti sampannatthatāya. Sampattiattho hi idha sahasaddo. Byañjanasampattiyāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Yassa hi yāgubhattādiitthipurisādivaṇṇanānissitā desanā hoti, na so sātthaṃ deseti niyyānatthavirahato tassā desanāya. Bhagavā pana tathārūpaṃ desanaṃ pahāya catusatipaṭṭhānādinissitaṃ desanaṃ deseti, tasmā ‘‘atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ desetī’’ti vuccati . Yassa pana desanā sithiladhanitādibhedesu byañjanesu ekappakāreneva dvippakāreneva vā byañjanena yuttatāya ekabyañjanādiyuttā vā damiḷabhāsā viya, vivaṭakaraṇatāya oṭṭhe aphusāpetvā uccāretabbato sabbaniroṭṭhabyañjanā vā kirātabhāsā viya, sabbattheva vissajjanīyayuttatāya sabbavissaṭṭhabyañjanā vā yavanabhāsā viya, sabbattheva sānusāratāya sabbaniggahītabyañjanā vā pādasikādi milakkhubhāsā viya, tassa byañjanapāripūriyā abhāvato abyañjanā nāma desanā hoti. Sabbāpi hi esā byañjanekadesavaseneva pavattiyā aparipuṇṇabyañjanāti katvā ‘‘abyañjanā’’ti vuccati. Bhagavā pana –
松音、紧音、长音、短音、重音、轻音及随韵,结合、确定、分离——依文辞智有十种分类。
(《长部注》1.190;《中部注》1.291;《无碍解道注》485)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sithilaṃ dhanitañca dīgharassaṃ, garukaṃ lahukañca niggahītaṃ; Sambandhaṃ vavatthitaṃ vimuttaṃ, dasadhā byañjanabuddhiyā pabhedo’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.190; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.291; pari. aṭṭha. 485) –
如此,他说法时不遗漏所说的十种文辞,令文辞完全圆满,因此说“以文辞具足而说有文之法”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttaṃ dasavidhaṃ byañjanaṃ amakkhetvā paripuṇṇabyañjanameva katvā dhammaṃ deseti, tasmā ‘‘byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ desetī’’ti vuccati.
现在,为依导论的方法显示“有义有文”中的义,故说“略示……有文”。在《导论》中,虽然先举出了“由文句之门而把握文句之义,故文字、词句……”等文句,但此处圣典中为显示“有义有文”,故先显示义句,而说“略示、开示”等。其中,简略地显示、阐明,名为“略示”。“显示”意谓被显示、被阐明、被明了。例如,“比丘若思量则为魔所缚,不思量则解脱”等,以简略方式阐明,即名为“略示”,因为仅凭这些,那位比丘便得以通达,故说“世尊已了知”等。先阐明名为“开示”,如“诸比丘,一切在燃烧”等,对于随后应说的义理,先用一句话阐明,即名为“开示”;其中“pa-”前缀用于起始之义,如“令知、令安立”等。此二句是就利根者而言,属于略说性质,因为利根者能通达简略所说及先所说的义理。对简略所说加以广说,以及对已说一次者再次宣说,名为“开显”与“分别”。例如,对“善法”这一简略且仅说一次的义理,以“哪些法是善?于何时生起欲界善心……”等,通过广说、开显的方式和分别的方式再次宣说。此二句是就中根者而言,显示巴利原文
Idāni ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjana’’nti ettha nettinayenapi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkāsanaṃ…pe… sabyañjana’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha yadipi nettiyaṃ ‘‘byañjanamukhena byañjanatthaggahaṇaṃ hotīti akkharaṃ pada’’ntiādinā byañjanapadāni paṭhamaṃ uddiṭṭhāni, idha pana pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjana’’nti āgatattā atthapadāniyeva paṭhamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkāsanapakāsanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅkhepato kāsanaṃ dīpanaṃ saṅkāsanaṃ. Kāsananti ca kāsīyati dīpīyati vibhāvīyatīti attho. ‘‘Maññamāno kho bhikkhu baddho mārassa amaññamāno mutto’’tiādīsu viya saṅkhepena dīpanaṃ saṅkāsanaṃ nāma. Tattakena hi tena bhikkhunā paṭividdhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aññātaṃ bhagavā’’tiādi. Paṭhamaṃ kāsanaṃ pakāsanaṃ. ‘‘Sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, āditta’’nti evamādīsu pacchā kathitabbamatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ vacanena dīpanaṃ pakāsanaṃ nāma. Ādikammasmiñhi ayaṃ pa-saddo ‘‘paññapeti paṭṭhapetī’’tiādīsu viya. Tikkhindriyāpekkhañcetaṃ padadvayaṃ uddesabhāvato. Tikkhindriyo hi saṅkhepato paṭhamañca vuttamatthaṃ paṭipajjati. Saṃkhittassa vitthāravacanaṃ sakiṃ vuttassa puna vacanañca vivaraṇavibhajanāni, yathā ‘‘kusalā dhammā’’ti saṅkhepato sakiṃyeva ca vuttassa atthassa ‘‘katame dhammā kusalā? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ citta’’ntiādinā vitthārato vivaraṇavasena vibhajanavasena ca puna vacanaṃ. Majjhimindriyāpekkhametaṃ padadvayaṃ niddesabhāvato. Vivaṭassa vitthāratarābhidhānaṃ vibhattassa ca pakārehi ñāpanaṃ vineyyānaṃ cittaparitosanaṃ uttānīkaraṇapaññāpanāni, yathā ‘‘phasso hotī’’tiādinā vivaṭavibhattassa atthassa ‘‘katamo tasmiṃ samaye phasso hoti? Yo tasmiṃ samaye phasso phusanā saṃphusanā’’tiādinā uttānīkiriyā paññāpanā ca. Mudindriyāpekkhametaṃ padadvayaṃ paṭiniddesabhāvato.
或者,先将义理阐明,如“诸比丘,一切在燃烧”,然后再将其彰显而阐明:“诸比丘,什么是‘一切在燃烧’?诸比丘,眼在燃烧,色在燃烧……”等,以对简略所说作广说、对已说一次者再次宣说的方式,展开教导,即名为“开显”。对以“善法”简略安立的义理,以详说开显善法:“哪些法是善?于何时生起欲界善心……”;对此已开显的善法再作分类:“于其时,有触、有受……”,即名为“分别”。对已开显者作广说,以及对已分别者以譬喻说明,使之明了,即名为“明了”:对以开显而开示的义理,再进一步开示:“于其时,何等为触?即于其时,触、接触、合触……”;对以分别而分别的义理,以譬喻说明:“诸比丘,譬如剥皮之牛,诸比丘,我亦说触食应如是观……”等。令闻法者因种种不同的说法而生起喜悦,令极利智者以种种方式磨砺智慧,即名为“施设”——以令听者心满足及智敏锐而施设,故为“施设”。由于具备义句,故为“有义”:因为所学之义具有略示等义句之性质,由于具备如前所述的六种义句,故为“有义”。因为略示、开示等具有义之相貌,故被称为显示巴利原文
Atha vā ‘‘sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, āditta’’nti evaṃ paṭhamaṃ dīpitamatthaṃ puna pākaṭaṃ katvā dīpanena ‘‘kiñca, bhikkhave, sabbaṃ ādittaṃ? Cakkhu, bhikkhave, ādittaṃ, rūpā ādittā’’ti evamādinā saṃkhittassa vitthārābhidhānena sakiṃ vuttassa punapi abhidhānena vitthāretvā desanaṃ vivaraṇaṃ nāma. ‘‘Kusalā dhammā’’ti saṅkhepena nikkhittassa ‘‘katame dhammā kusalā? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’ti niddesavasena vivarite kusale dhamme ‘‘tasmiṃ samaye phasso hoti vedanā hotī’’ti vibhāgakaraṇaṃ vibhajanaṃ nāma. Vivaṭassa vitthārābhidhānena vibhattassa ca upamābhidhānena uttāniṃ karotīti vivaraṇena vivaritatthassa ‘‘katamo tasmiṃ samaye phasso hoti? Yo tasmiṃ samaye phasso phusanā saṃphusanā’’ti ativivaritvā kathanaṃ, vibhajanena vibhattassa ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, gāvī niccammā, evameva khvāyaṃ bhikkhave phassāhāro daṭṭhabboti vadāmī’’ti evamādiupamākathanañca uttānīkaraṇaṃ nāma. Dhammaṃ suṇantānaṃ dhammadesanena vicittena anekavidhena somanassassa uppādanaṃ atikhiṇabuddhīnaṃ anekavidhena ñāṇatikhiṇakaraṇañca paññatti nāma sotūnaṃ cittatosanena cittanisānena ca paññāpanaṃ paññattīti katvā. Atthapadasamāyogato sātthanti pariyattiatthassa saṅkāsanādiatthapadarūpattā yathāvuttachaatthapadasamāyogato sātthaṃ. Saṅkāsanapakāsanādayo hi atthākārattā ‘‘atthapadānī’’ti vuccanti. Atthoyeva hi byañjanapadehi saṅkāsīyati pakāsīyati vivarīyati vibhajīyati uttānī karīyati paññāpīyati.
文字、词、句、形态、语义解释、详释的圆满成就——此处,“六万劫”等语句中,如同带 sa、du、so 等音,在发音尚未终结的词中,音素被称为“字”,或因辗转流转之义而名为字,亦因别无他名。实则音素并辗转流转的同义语。正如词因有别名,依于义而有同义语,如同流转、移行一般;音素则不然,以无别名故。又或,单字成词亦即为字,如“莫如是”等中的 mā 等音。然而有一类人说:“由三门中以清净之修行状态,从心所发动的教说言音,凭借清净之处的音素而称为字,以无别名、未被宣说故。此义当依《彼岸道品》中婆罗门们心中所问的问题,以及世尊坐于宝屋中所触证的《发趣大论》来理解。”带有语尾变化、能令人了知意义的,即是词。由彼而义被表达,故为词。彼词有四种:名词、动词、前缀词、不变词。其中,“触、受、心”等以实体为主者,是名词。于名词中,实体显现其相,而动作不显现其相。“触知、感受、了知”等以动作为主者,是动词。于动词中,动作显现其相,而实体不显现其相。又如“久居他乡者”中的 pa 音,显示与居住动作相离的特性,如此,由能显示巴利原文
Akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesasampattiyāti ettha ‘‘saṭṭhi vassasahassānī’’ti evamādīsu sa-kāra du-kāra so-kārādi viya uccāraṇavelāya apariyosite pade vaṇṇo akkharaṃ pariyāyavasena akkharaṇato avevacanato. Na hi vaṇṇassa pariyāyo vijjati. Yathā hi padaṃ savevacanatāya atthavasena pariyāyaṃ carantaṃ sañcarantaṃ viya hoti, na evaṃ vaṇṇo avevacanattā. Ekakkharaṃ vā padaṃ akkharaṃ ‘‘mā evaṃ kira ta’’ntiādīsu mā-kārādayo viya. Keci pana ‘‘tīsu dvāresu parisuddhapayogabhāvena visuddhakaraṇaṭṭhānānaṃ cittena pavattitadesanāvācāhi akkharaṇato avevacanato akathitattā akkharanti saññitā. Taṃ pārāyanikabrāhmaṇānaṃ manasā pucchitapañhānaṃ vasena bhagavatā ratanaghare nisīditvā sammasitapaṭṭhānamahāpakaraṇavasena ca gahetabba’’nti vadanti. Vibhattiyantaṃ atthassa ñāpanato padaṃ. Pajjati attho etenāti hi padaṃ. Taṃ nāmapadaṃ ākhyātapadaṃ upasaggapadaṃ nipātapadanti catubbidhaṃ. Tattha phasso vedanā cittanti evamādikaṃ dabbapadhānaṃ nāmapadaṃ. Nāmapadehi dabbamāvibhūtarūpaṃ, kiriyā anāvibhūtarūpā. Phusati vedayati vijānātīti evamādikaṃ kiriyāpadhānaṃ ākhyātapadaṃ. Ākhyātapadehi kiriyā āvibhūtarūpā, dabbamanāvibhūtarūpaṃ. Yathā ‘‘cirappavāsi’’nti ettha pa-saddo vasanakiriyāya viyogavisiṭṭhataṃ dīpeti, evaṃ kiriyāvisesadīpanato kiriyāvisesāvabodhanimittaṃ. Pa-iti evamādikaṃ upasaggapadaṃ. Kiriyāya dabbassa ca sarūpavisesappakāsanahetubhūtaṃ evanti evamādikaṃ nipātapadaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ manasi karotha, mā evaṃ manasākatthā’’tiādīsu hi kiriyāvisesadīpanato kiriyāvisesassa jotako evaṃsaddo, ‘‘evaṃsīlā evaṃdhammā’’tiādīsu dabbavisesassa. Saṅkhepato vuttaṃ padābhihitaṃ atthaṃ byañjetīti byañjanaṃ, vākyaṃ. ‘‘Cattāro iddhipādā’’ti saṅkhepena kathitamatthaṃ ‘‘katame cattāro? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāveti, vīriya, citta, vīmaṃsasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādinā pākaṭaṃ karotīti vākyameva byañjanaṃ, taṃ pana atthato padasamudāyoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saākhyātaṃ sanipātaṃ sakārakaṃ savisesanaṃ vākyanti hi vadanti. Nanu ca padenapi attho byañjīyatīti padampi byañjananti āpajjatīti? Taṃ na. Padamattasavanepi hi adhikārādivasena labbhamānehi padantarehi anusandhānaṃ katvāva atthasampaṭipatti hotīti vākyameva atthaṃ byañjayatīti.
以种种方式对语句进行区分,即是形态。如“其中,什么是欲?凡是欲、欲求、想做之欲”等中,对已述的语句作多种方式的区分,名为形态。对形态所表达的内涵加以解释,即是语义解释。如“触、受”等中,由形态所述的内容,通过“能触故为触,能感受故为受”等提取出来而作详细说明,名为语义解释。通过“它趋向涅槃,或被求涅槃者所寻求,或灭除烦恼而行,故为道”等语义解释的详细展开,以无余解说故,名为详释。或者,在通过“能感受故为受”的语义解释所得之词中,对于乐、苦、不苦不乐,详细说明“能乐故为乐,能苦故为苦,既不苦也不乐故为不苦不乐”之义,以无余解说故,名为详释。由于这些文字等、句词的圆满成就、具足,故为“具足句”。显示巴利原文
Pakārato vākyavibhāgo ākāro. ‘‘Tattha katamo chando? Yo chando chandikatā kattukamyatā’’ti evamādīsu kathitasseva vākyassa anekavidhena vibhāgakaraṇaṃ ākāro nāma. Ākārābhihitaṃ nibbacanaṃ nirutti. ‘‘Phasso vedanā’’ti evamādīsu ākārena kathitaṃ ‘‘phusatīti phasso, vedayatīti vedanā’’ti nīharitvā vitthāravacanaṃ nirutti nāma. ‘‘Nibbānaṃ maggati, nibbānatthikehi vā maggīyati, kilese vā mārento gacchatīti maggo’’tiādinā nibbacanavitthāro niravasesadesanattā niddeso. Atha vā vedayatīti vedanāti nibbacanaladdhapadesu sukhadukkhaadukkhamasukhāsu sukhayatīti sukhā, dukkhayatīti dukkhā, neva dukkhayati na sukhayatīti adukkhamasukhāti atthavitthāro niravasesena kathitattā niddeso nāma. Etesaṃ akkharādīnaṃ byañjanapadānaṃ sampattiyā sampannatāya sabyañjanaṃ.
然而,应如此了知此法之义与词之结合、句之成就。其中,世尊以文字令知晓,以词令阐明,以句令开显,以形态令分别,以语义解释令明了,以详释令施设。的确,通过把握词的组成部分而把握词,由已把握的词,对于先前已有约定者,能了知词义,因此世尊以文字令知晓。然而,由于以文字简要显示的意义,在词结束时语句尚未完结,故先由词令阐明、令显示,因此以词令阐明。而在语句完结时,彼义便被开显、显露,因此以句令开显。又因以种种方式对语句作区分时,彼义即被分别,因此以形态令分别。同样,当对语句的各个部分逐一作语义解释的区分时,彼义便转为明显,因此以语义解释令明了。而通过已作语义解释的语句部分,以详细方式无余解说时,便令所化导者心生满足、成就智慧,因此以详释令施设。再者,世尊以文字令开悟后,以词教导略解者;以句令广解后,以形态教导广解者;以语义解释引导后,以详释教导可引导者。如此,此法在被开悟时教导略解者,在被广解时教导广解者,在被引导时教导可引导者。其中,开悟为初,广解为中,引导为后。如此,于三时中以三种方式宣说。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ panassa atthapadasamāyogo byañjanapadasampatti ca veditabbā. Tattha bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāseti, padehi pakāseti, byañjanehi vivarati, ākārehi vibhajati, niruttīhi uttāniṃ karoti, niddesehi paññapeti. Tathā hi padāvayavaggahaṇamukhena padaggahaṇaṃ, gahitena ca padena padatthāvabodho gahitapubbasaṅketassa hotīti bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāseti. Yasmā pana akkharehi saṃkhittena dīpiyamāno attho padapariyosāne vākyassa apariyositattā padena paṭhamaṃ pakāsito dīpito hoti, tasmā padehi pakāseti. Vākyapariyosāne pana so attho vivarito vivaṭo kato hotīti byañjanehi vivarati. Yasmā ca pakārehi vākyabhede kate tadattho vibhatto nāma hoti, tasmā ākārehi vibhajati. Tathā vākyāvayavānaṃ paccekaṃ nibbacanavibhāge kate so attho pākaṭo hotīti niruttīhi uttāniṃ karoti. Katanibbacanehi pana vākyāvayavehi vitthāravasena niravasesato desitehi veneyyānaṃ cittaparitosanaṃ buddhinisānañca kataṃ hotīti niddesehi paññapeti. Apica bhagavā akkharehi ugghaṭetvā padehi vineti ugghaṭitaññuṃ, byañjanehi vipañcetvā ākārehi vineti vipañcitaññuṃ, niruttīhi netvā niddesehi vineti neyyaṃ. Evañcāyaṃ dhammo ugghaṭiyamāno ugghaṭitaññuṃ vineti, vipañciyamāno vipañcitaññuṃ, nīyamāno neyyaṃ. Tattha ugghaṭanā ādi, vipañcanā majjhe, nayanaṃ ante. Evaṃ tīsu kālesu tidhā desito dosattayavidhamano guṇattayāvaho tividhavineyyavinayanoti evampi tividhakalyāṇoyaṃ dhammo atthabyañjanapāripūriyā sāttho sabyañjanoti veditabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ nettipakaraṇe (netti. 9) –
其中,世尊以文字而阐明,以语句而显示,以章句而开解,以形态而分析,以语义解释令浅显,以详说而施设。其中,世尊以文字及语句而为开示,以章句及形态而为广解,以语义解释及详说而为展开。其中,开示为初,广解为中,展开为后。此法与律,于开示时调伏了知开示之人,故称初善;于广解时调伏了知广解之人,故称中善;于展开时调伏可引导之人,故称后善。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāseti, padehi pakāseti, byañjanehi vivarati, ākārehi vibhajati, niruttīhi uttāniṃ karoti, niddesehi paññapeti. Tattha bhagavā akkharehi ca padehi ca ugghaṭeti, byañjanehi ca ākārehi ca vipañceti, niruttīhi ca niddesehi ca vitthāreti. Tattha ugghaṭanā ādi, vipañcanā majjhe, vitthāranā pariyosānaṃ. Soyaṃ dhammavinayo ugghaṭiyanto ugghaṭitaññuṃ puggalaṃ vineti, tena naṃ āhu ādikalyāṇoti. Vipañciyanto vipañcitaññuṃ puggalaṃ vineti, tena naṃ āhu majjhekalyāṇoti. Vitthāriyanto neyyaṃ puggalaṃ vineti, tena naṃ āhu pariyosānakalyāṇotī’’ti.
在“义深”等词中,所谓“义”,即经藏之义;“法”,即经藏;“通达”,即对经藏及经藏之义如实了知;“说法”,即由心确定之经藏的宣说。然而,这些义等,由于如同大海之于兔子等,对于智慧迟钝者而言,难以深入且无法获得立足处,故为“深”。或者,所谓“义”,即因果;“法”,即因;“说法”,即施设,如法而说之法语;或以顺、逆、略、广等方式的言说。“通达”,即现观,即随顺义于诸法、随顺法于诸义、随顺施设路径于诸施设的了知;或者,应通达的诸法各自之相,即无颠倒的自性。这些义等,也由于如同大海之于兔子等,对于未积集善资粮的劣慧者而言,难以深入且无法获得立足处,故为“深”。其中,由于通达也依附于义,为显示义之功德,故说“以义深与通达深而具义”。由于那些法说依附于文句,为显示其文句成就,故说“以法深与说法深而具文”。于义中,分类而生的智为义无碍解;于义、法、词无碍解中,分类而生的智为辩无碍解——由于此无碍解也以义为境,故说“以义无碍解与辩无碍解为境而具义”,因为若无义成就,此则无有。“法”,即经藏;“词”,即对经藏词句的确定言说。其中,分类而生的智为法无碍解与词无碍解,故说“以法无碍解与词无碍解为境而具文”,因为若无文句成就,此则无有。显示巴利原文
Atthagambhīratātiādīsu attho nāma tantiattho. Dhammo tanti. Paṭivedho tantiyā tantiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho. Desanā nāma manasā vavatthāpitāya tantiyā desanā. Te panete atthādayo yasmā sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo mandabuddhīhi dukkhogāhā alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Atha vā attho nāma hetuphalaṃ. Dhammo hetu. Desanā paññatti, yathādhammaṃ dhammābhilāpo. Anulomapaṭilomasaṅkhepavitthārādivasena vā kathanaṃ. Paṭivedho abhisamayo, atthānurūpaṃ dhammesu, dhammānurūpaṃ atthesu, paññattipathānurūpaṃ paññattīsu avabodho. Tesaṃ tesaṃ vā dhammānaṃ paṭivijjhitabbo lakkhaṇasaṅkhāto aviparītasabhāvo. Tepi cete atthādayo yasmā anupacitakusalasambhārehi duppaññehi sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo dukkhogāhā alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Tesu paṭivedhassapi atthasannissitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘atthagambhīratāpaṭivedhagambhīratāhi sāttha’’nti atthaguṇadīpanato. Tāsaṃ dhammadesanānaṃ byañjanasannissitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammagambhīratādesanāgambhīratāhi sabyañjana’’nti tāsaṃ byañjanasampattidīpanato. Atthesu pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā, atthadhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāsu pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāti imissāpi paṭisambhidāya atthavisayattā āha ‘‘atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāvisayato sāttha’’nti atthasampattiyā asati tadabhāvato. Dhammoti tanti. Niruttīti tantipadānaṃ niddhāretvā vacanaṃ. Tattha pabhedagatāni ñāṇāni dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāti āha ‘‘dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāvisayato sabyañjana’’nti asati byañjanasampattiyā tadabhāvato.
“令审察者生净信”中,此处iti字表原因。因为能令审察者、寻求何者为善者生起净信,故为“具义”。“义成就”者,是以果对因的推论,如河流涨满可推知上游降雨。而其具义性,在于为智者所觉知,此应知是由于其极为深邃、微细、微妙之故。即如所说“深奥、难见”等。“令世俗人生净信”故为“具文”,因为能令世俗人生起净信,故为“具文”。世俗之人确实因文句成就而喜悦。此处也是以果对因的推论。而其具文性,在于可令人信受,此应知是由于初善等状态之故。或者,由为智者所觉知而“具义”,是说以慧为依处而义成就;由此,令审察者生净信、可令人信受而“具文”,是说以信为依处而文句成就;由此,令世俗人生净信——此处应如此看待其义。由深奥的意趣而“具义”,是说由意趣不可测度、无有边际而义成就,否则即无此。由浅显的文句而“具文”,是说由善解的音声而文句成就,因为即使极为深奥之义,也能令所化者善解。应知,所有这些都是:以义成就而“具义”,以文句成就而“具文”,是对最初所说的二义之广释。各处注释亦复如是。同样,此处未取简择或合集之义。因为无可添加者,即无可加入的、未说的清净义。Kevala一词为“完整”的同义词,故说“以完整圆满的状态”,即由一切部分而圆满之义。“应去除者”,即杂染法。显示巴利原文
Parikkhakajanappasādakantīti ettha iti-saddo hetuattho. Yasmā parikkhakajanānaṃ kiṃkusalagavesīnaṃ pasādāvahaṃ, tasmā sātthaṃ. Atthasampannanti phalena hetuno anumānaṃ nadīpūrena viya upari vuṭṭhipavattiyā. Sātthakatā panassa paṇḍitavedanīyatāya, sā paramagambhīrasaṇhasukhumabhāvato veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘gambhīro duddaso’’tiādi. Lokiyajanappasādakanti sabyañjananti yasmā lokiyajanassa pasādāvahaṃ, tasmā sabyañjanaṃ. Lokiyajano hi byañjanasampattiyā tussati. Idhāpi phalena hetuno anumānaṃ. Sabyañjanatā panassa saddheyyatāya, sā ādikalyāṇādibhāvato veditabbā. Atha vā paṇḍitavedanīyato sātthanti paññāpadaṭṭhānatāya atthasampannataṃ āha, tato parikkhakajanappasādakaṃ saddheyyato sabyañjananti saddhāpadaṭṭhānatāya byañjanasampannataṃ, tato lokiyajanappasādatanti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Gambhīrādhippāyato sātthanti adhippāyato agādhāpāratāya atthasampannaṃ aññathā tadabhāvato. Uttānapadato sabyañjananti subodhasaddakatāya byañjanasampannaṃ paramagambhīrassapi atthassa vineyyānaṃ suviññeyyabhāvāpādanato. Sabbopesa atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ, byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjananti sabbapaṭhamaṃ vuttasseva atthadvayassa papañcoti daṭṭhabbo. Tathā ceva tattha tattha saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Tathā hettha vikappassa samuccayassa vā aggahaṇaṃ. Upanetabbassa abhāvatoti pakkhipitabbassa vodānatthassa avuttassa abhāvato. Kevalasaddo sakalādhivacananti āha ‘‘sakalaparipuṇṇabhāvenā’’ti , sabbabhāgehi paripuṇṇatāyāti attho. Apanetabbassāti saṃkilesadhammassa.
在“阐明梵行”中,此“梵行”一词,可见于布施、服务、五学处戒、四梵住、离淫欲、满足于己妻、精进、布萨支、圣道、教法等义中。显示巴利原文
Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti ettha pana ayaṃ brahmacariya-saddo dāne veyyāvacce pañcasikkhāpadasīle appamaññāsu methunaviratiyaṃ sadārasantose vīriye uposathaṅgesu ariyamagge sāsaneti imesu atthesu dissati.
神通、光辉、力量与精进之成就,
以及你这如龙之广大天宫。
我与妻子,在人间时,
两人皆具信心,同为施主;
那时,我家犹如水井,
沙门与婆罗门皆得饱足。
这是我的誓愿,这是我的梵行,
这是圆满修行的果报;
神通、威光、力与精进的成就,
智者啊,这便是我的广大天宫。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kiṃ te vataṃ kiṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ, Kissa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko; Iddhī jutī balavīriyūpapatti, Idañca te nāgamahāvimānaṃ. ‘‘Ahañca bhariyā ca manussaloke, Saddhā ubho dānapatī ahumhā; Opānabhūtaṃ me gharaṃ tadāsi, Santappitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā ca. ‘‘Taṃ me vataṃ taṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ, Tassa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko; Iddhī jutī balavīriyūpapatti, Idañca me dhīra mahāvimāna’’nti. –
在《布纳迦本生》中,布施被称为“梵行”。显示巴利原文
Imasmiñhi puṇṇakajātake (jā. 2.22.1592-1593, 1595) dānaṃ ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuttaṃ.
以此,手能施与所欲;以此,手流溢蜜汁;
由此我的梵行,福德成就于手中。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kena pāṇi kāmadado, kena pāṇi madhussavo; Kena te brahmacariyena, puññaṃ pāṇimhi ijjhati. ‘‘Tena pāṇi kāmadado, tena pāṇi madhussavo; Tena me brahmacariyena, puññaṃ pāṇimhi ijjhatī’’ti. –
在《盎古罗饿鬼事》(《小部·饿鬼事》275, 277)中,履行义务被称为“梵行”。在《鹧鸪本生》(《小部·本生》311)——“诸比丘,如是,曾有名为鹧鸪之梵行”——中,五学处戒被称为“梵行”。在《大戈宾达经》(《长部》2.329)——“五髻,然我此梵行,非为厌离、非为离欲、非为灭尽,唯为生于梵天界”——中,四梵住被称为“梵行”。在《渐损经》(《中部》1.83)——“他人将成非梵行者,我等在此当作梵行者”——中,远离淫欲被称为“梵行”。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃ aṅkurapetavatthumhi (pe. va. 275, 277) veyyāvaccaṃ ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ kho taṃ bhikkhave tittiriyaṃ nāma brahmacariyaṃ ahosī’’ti (cūḷava. 311) imasmiṃ tittirajātake pañcasikkhāpadasīlaṃ ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ kho pana me pañcasikha brahmacariyaṃ neva nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya yāvadeva brahmalokūpapattiyā’’ti imasmiṃ mahāgovindasutte (dī. ni. 2.329) catasso appamaññāyo ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuttā. ‘‘Pare abrahmacārī bhavissanti, mayamettha brahmacārī bhavissāmā’’ti imasmiṃ sallekhasutte (ma. ni. 1.83) methunavirati ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuttā.
我等亦不逾越妻子,
妻子亦不逾越我等;
除了与她们相处之外,我们行梵行,
因此,我们的幼者便不会死亡。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Mayañca bhariyā nātikkamāma, Amhe ca bhariyā nātikkamanti; Aññatra tāhi brahmacariyaṃ carāma, Tasmā hi amhaṃ daharā na mīyare’’ti. –
《大法护本生》(《本生》1.10.97)中,将满足于己妻称为“梵行”。在《身毛竖立经》(《中部》1.155)中——“舍利弗,我确实记得曾修习具备四支的梵行,我那时确是苦行者”——则称精进为“梵行”。显示巴利原文
Mahādhammapālajātake (jā. 1.10.97) sadārasantoso ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vutto. ‘‘Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṃ, sāriputta, caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ brahmacariyaṃ caritā, tapassī sudaṃ homī’’ti lomahaṃsanasutte (ma. ni. 1.155) vīriyaṃ ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuttaṃ.
以低劣的梵行,投生刹帝利族;
以中等的梵行生于天界,以殊胜的梵行而得清净。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Hīnena brahmacariyena, khattiye upapajjati; Majjhimena ca devattaṃ, uttamena visujjhatī’’ti. –
正如《尼弥本生》(《本生》2.22.429)中,以调御自己而行的八支布萨,被称为“梵行”。而《大戈宾达经》(《长部》2.329)中说:“五髻,我的这种梵行,确实导向彻底的厌离、离欲……乃至……这就是圣八支道。”——在此,圣道被称为“梵行”。《清净经》(《长部》3.174)中说:“这种梵行,确实成就、繁荣、广布、大众化、普及,乃至被善加宣说。”——在此,含摄三学的整个教法被称为“梵行”。此处所指的,也正是这种梵行,故说“由于为三学所摄持”等。所谓“最胜者”,即佛陀等最胜之人。或者,以最胜为义,梵之行持,即是梵行。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ (jā. 2.22.429) nimijātake attadamanavasena kato aṭṭhaṅgiko uposatho ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vutto. ‘‘Idaṃ kho pana me, pañcasikha, brahmacariyaṃ ekantanibbidāya virāgāya…pe… ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti mahāgovindasuttasmiṃyeva (dī. ni. 2.329) ariyamaggo ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vutto. ‘‘Tayidaṃ brahmacariyaṃ iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṃ bāhujaññaṃ puthubhūtaṃ yāvadeva manussehi suppakāsita’’nti pāsādikasutte (dī. ni. 3.174) sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sakalasāsanaṃ ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuttaṃ. Imasmimpi ṭhāne idameva ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti adhippetanti āha ‘‘sikkhattayapariggahitattā’’tiādi. Seṭṭhehīti buddhādīhi seṭṭhehi. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūtaṃ vā cariyaṃ brahmacariyaṃ.
“有因缘”:具备如前文所说的特征,故有因缘。“有因事生起”:即因事而生起。“随顺所化者”:随顺所化者的行为等。“有义利”:对所宣说的戒等义利。“具足理由与譬喻”:即如“诸比丘,那是何因由?譬如”等,随处引用理由与譬喻,因此具足理由与譬喻。“以信获得”:如“他们听闻了那法后,于如来处获得信”等所说的信获得。“以行道”:即戒清净等正行道,是行道的因相。“以证得而明达”:由于以谛现观而证得明达,故为有义利,不像迦毗罗宗等那样空虚无义,而是具足义利。“以教法”:即通达教法。“以阿含而明达”:不像于恶说之法中修习者那样产生迷惑,由于多闻明达而确立,故为有文句。文句具足时,即有阿含的明达。“具足戒等五法蕴”:由于不远离戒等五种法蕴。“完全圆满”:无余、周遍地圆满,完全充满。“无随烦恼”:无有见、慢等随烦恼。“为渡越”:为从轮回之苦中出离。“不期望世间利养”:不依止于渴爱,故为清净。这是说:若有人为了‘我将由此说法获得利养或恭敬’而说法。显示巴利原文
Sanidānanti heṭṭhā vuttalakkhaṇena nidānena sanidānaṃ. Sauppattikanti saaṭṭhuppattikaṃ. Veneyyānaṃanurūpatoti veneyyānaṃ cariyādianurūpato. Atthassāti desiyamānassa sīlādiatthassa. Hetudāharaṇayuttatoti ‘‘taṃ kissa hetu seyyathāpi, bhikkhave’’ti ca ādinā tattha tattha hetupamaggahaṇena hetudāharaṇehi yuttato. Saddhāpaṭilābhenāti ‘‘te taṃ dhammaṃ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhantī’’tiādinā vuttasaddhāpaṭilābhena. Paṭipattiyāti sīlavisuddhiyādisammāpaṭipattiyā, paṭipattinimittanti attho. Adhigamabyattitoti saccappaṭivedhena adhigamaveyyattiyasabbhāvato sātthaṃ kapilamatādi viya tucchaṃ niratthakaṃ ahutvā atthasampannanti katvā. Pariyattiyāti pariyattidhammaparicayena. Āgamabyattitoti durakkhātadhammesu paricayaṃ karontassa viya sammohaṃ ajanetvā bāhusaccaveyyattiyasabbhāvato sabyañjanaṃ. Byañjanasampattiyā hi sati āgamabyattīti. Sīlādipañcadhammakkhandhayuttatoti sīlādīhi pañcahi dhammakoṭṭhāsehi avirahitattā. Kevalaparipuṇṇanti anavasesena samantato puṇṇaṃ pūritaṃ. Nirupakkilesatoti diṭṭhimānādiupakkilesābhāvato. Nittharaṇatthāyāti vaṭṭadukkhato nissaraṇāya. Lokāmisanirapekkhatoti kathañcipi taṇhāsannissayassa anissayato parisuddhaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yo ‘‘imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ nissāya lābhaṃ vā sakkāraṃ vā labhissāmī’’ti deseti, tassa aparisuddhā desanā hoti. Bhagavā pana lokāmisanirapekkho hitapharaṇena mettābhāvanāya muduhadayo ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitena cittena deseti, tasmā tassa desanā parisuddhāti.
“善哉”一词,在“善哉,尊者,愿世尊为我略说法要”(《相应部》4.95)等处,表请求。在“那位比丘说:‘善哉,尊者’,欢喜、随喜世尊所说后”(《中部》3.86)等处,表接受。在“善哉,善哉,舍利弗”(《长部》3.349)等处,表称赞。在“那么,婆罗门,好好地听”(《中部》5.192)等处,表强调与命令。显示巴利原文
Sādhūti ayaṃ saddo ‘‘sādhu me bhante bhagavā saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.95) āyācane dissati. ‘‘Sādhu bhanteti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinanditvā anumoditvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.86) sampaṭicchane. ‘‘Sādhu sādhu sāriputtā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.349) sampahaṃsane. ‘‘Tena hi brāhmaṇa sādhukaṃ suṇohī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 5.192) daḷhīkamme āṇattiyañca dissati.
‘‘Sādhu dhammaruci rājā, sādhu paññāṇavā naro; Sādhu mittānamaddubbho, pāpassākaraṇaṃ sukha’’nti. –
在“美好”等词中(《本生经》2.18.101)指“善妙的”。此处也应视为“善妙的”,故说“善哉,确实是善妙的”。其中“善妙的”即吉祥的。而吉祥性对于见者而言,具有带来利益与安乐的性质,故说“带来利益、带来安乐”。其中“带来利益”指带来现世、来世及胜义谛意义上的利益。“带来安乐”指带来如前所述的三种安乐。“如是等”指那样的。世尊具足怎样的功德,便因那些功德的如实本性,于一切时都能令四众世间生起极度的净信,为显示此义而说“如实相”等。其中,通过“如实……阿罗汉”等,显示依法衡量及依粗衡量之众生对世尊生起净信,而借此显示,亦应知其余依色衡量、依声衡量之众生亦生起净信,因为他们不离于此。“宣扬梵行”指称誉之声远扬,此处关联如此,故说“即使仅仅见到也是善妙的,如此作意后”等。其中,“即使仅仅见到也是善妙的”此处应讲述拘翅鸟的故事。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu (jā. 2.18.101) sundare. Idhāpi sundareyeva daṭṭhabboti āha ‘‘sādhu kho panāti sundaraṃ kho panā’’ti. Tattha sundaranti bhaddakaṃ. Bhaddakatā ca passantassa hitasukhāvahabhāvenāti āha ‘‘atthāvahaṃ sukhāvaha’’nti. Tattha atthāvahanti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthasaññitahitāvahaṃ. Sukhāvahanti yathāvuttatividhasukhāvahaṃ. Tathārūpānanti tādisānaṃ . Yādisehi pana guṇehi bhagavā samannāgato, tehi catuppamāṇikassa lokassa sabbakālepi accantāya pasādanīyo tesaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvattāti dassento ‘‘yathārūpo’’tiādimāha. Tattha yathābhucca…pe… arahatanti iminā dhammappamāṇānaṃ lūkhappamāṇānañca sattānaṃ bhagavato pasādāvahataṃ dasseti, taṃdassanena ca itaresampi rūpappamāṇaghosappamāṇānaṃ pasādāvahatā dassitā hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ tadavinābhāvato. Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti kittisaddo abbhuggatoti evamettha sambandhoti āha ‘‘dassanamattampi sādhu hotīti evamajjhāsayaṃ katvā’’tiādi. Tattha dassanamattampi sādhu hotīti ettha kosiyasakuṇavatthu kathetabbaṃ.
2 “以某种原因”中的这个具格语是表示原因的。因为原因的含义是行为的因,不像工具那样表示行为的方式。而此处的“前往”这一行为,是为了获得种种功德殊胜,因此这个具格语恰当地表示原因义——正如“以食物而住”等例子——而不是表示工具义,因为作工具义解不合理。故说“以某种原因”。世尊被喻为甜美常结果的大树,恒常不断地流出无上、极为甜美、广大的甘露法味之果。由于并未加以分别,取其甜美果实受用的意图,即是取大树之甜美果性。“前往”指正在前往。因为怀着已到达的愿望而前往某处时,每越过一处,就可以说“已前往”、“正在前往”,故说“即说为‘已去’”,意为已到达。“前往后”是表示先前动作的说明,故说“表明前往的结束”。“从彼处”:指从所说的已到达之处,即从已到达的地方。“较近之处”:指能提问或听法之处。显示巴利原文
2.Yena vā kāraṇenāti hetumhi idaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Hetuattho hi kiriyākāraṇaṃ, na karaṇaṃ viya kiriyattho, tasmā nānappakāraguṇavisesādhigamatthā idha upasaṅkamanakiriyāti ‘‘annena vasatī’’tiādīsu viya hetuatthamevetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ yuttaṃ, na karaṇatthaṃ tassa ayujjamānattāti vuttaṃ ‘‘yena vā kāraṇenā’’ti. Avibhāgato hi satatappavattaniratisayasāduvipulāmatarasasaddhammaphalatāyassa sāduphalaniccaphalitamahārukkhena bhagavā upamito. Sāduphalūpabhogādhippāyaggahaṇeneva hi mahārukkhassa sāduphalatā gahitāti. Upasaṅkamīti upasaṅkamanto. Sampattakāmatāya hi kiñci ṭhānaṃ gacchanto taṃtaṃpadesātikkamanena upasaṅkami upasaṅkamantoti vattabbataṃ labhati. Tenāha ‘‘gatoti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti, upagatoti attho. Upasaṅkamitvāti pubbakālakiriyāniddesoti āha ‘‘upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpana’’nti. Tatoti yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patto upasaṅkamīti vutto, tato upagataṭṭhānato. Āsannataraṃ ṭhānanti pañhaṃ vā pucchituṃ dhammaṃ vā sotuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṭṭhānaṃ.
当世尊以“婆罗门,你是否堪忍?是否能维持?”等语问候堪忍等事时,便与那位婆罗门一同生起喜悦。依前所述而仿效此举,那位婆罗门也同样与世尊一同生起喜悦,应如此连接理解。为了以譬喻显示这种同喜的状态,而说“如清凉水”等。“欢喜欢聚”指欢悦交融。成为一体:指通过欢喜的行为而达到相同、同一的状态。“堪忍”:即询问“此四轮九门之身器,因苦多而本性难忍,你能堪忍否?”。“能维持”:指依缘而活、名为长久延续的维持,你能维持否?“少病”:因无头痛等疾病而少病。“少恼”:因无苦命而少恼。“轻快”:因处理事务时起身轻便而轻快。“有力”:因有相应的体力而有力。“安稳住”:因有安乐住的可能,是否有安稳住?在各个词后均应配合“是否”一词来理解其义。“得力”即喜悦。“青春喜”即欣悦。能生喜、能作喜者,名为“令喜”,而此即是“应喜”,故说“因能生喜”。“应喜”又示另一义,说“因适于欢喜”。“应忆念”指所应忆念。原应说“应忆念”,而以长音说为“应忆持”。“因听闻时甜美”指入耳悦意。“因忆念时甜美”指回味之乐。“因辞句清净”指彼语之善巧,因其本具之语性故。显示巴利原文
Yathā khamanīyādīni pucchantoti yathā bhagavā ‘‘kacci te brāhmaṇa khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīya’’ntiādinā khamanīyādīni pucchanto tena brāhmaṇena saddhiṃ samappavattamodo ahosi. Pubbabhāsitāya tadanukaraṇena evaṃ sopi brāhmaṇo bhagavatā saddhiṃ samappavattamodo ahosīti yojanā. Taṃ pana samappavattamodataṃ upamāya dassetuṃ ‘‘sītodakaṃ viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sammoditanti saṃsanditaṃ. Ekībhāvanti sammodanakiriyāya samānataṃ ekarūpataṃ. Khamanīyanti ‘‘idaṃ catucakkaṃ navadvāraṃ sarīrayantaṃ dukkhabahulatāya sabhāvato dussahaṃ, kacci khamituṃ sakkuṇeyyanti pucchati. Yāpanīyanti paccayāyattavuttikaṃ cirappabandhasaṅkhātāya yāpanāya kacci yāpetuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṃ. Sīsarogādiābādhābhāvena kacci appābādhaṃ. Dukkhajīvikābhāvena kacci appātaṅkaṃ. Taṃtaṃkiccakaraṇe uṭṭhānasukhatāya kacci lahuṭṭhānaṃ. Tadanurūpabalayogato kacci balaṃ. Sukhavihārasambhavena kacci phāsuvihāro atthīti tattha tattha kaccisaddaṃ yojetvā attho veditabbo . Balappattā pīti pītiyeva. Taruṇapīti pāmojjaṃ. Sammodaṃ janeti karotīti sammodanikaṃ, tadeva sammodanīyanti āha ‘‘sammodajananato’’ti. Sammoditabbato sammodanīyanti idaṃ pana atthaṃ dassento ‘‘sammodituṃ yuttabhāvato’’ti āha. Saritabbabhāvatoti anussaritabbabhāvato. ‘‘Saraṇīya’’nti vattabbe dīghaṃ katvā ‘‘sāraṇīya’’nti vuttaṃ. Suyyamānasukhatoti āpāthamadhuratamāha. Anussariyamānasukhatoti vimaddaramaṇīyataṃ. Byañjanaparisuddhatāyāti sabhāvaniruttibhāvena tassā kathāya vacanacāturiyamāha. Atthaparisuddhatāyāti atthassa nirupakkilesataṃ. Anekehi pariyāyehīti anekehi kāraṇehi.
遮止过远与过近,即得名为不远不近。此应从最低限度两者伸展手臂相触来理解。“伸颈”:指以转动颈部的方式伸出。“我”为具格表作者,故说“我所听闻”。“种姓婆罗门”:指依种姓而为婆罗门,并非因已除诸恶,此义已明。“令成缺齿等相”:指成就牙齿缺损、白发等相。“达增长之极”:指达到增长的界限,即已达增长之终极。“因种姓长老性”:指因出生而具长老性。得大者,即执取大者,为长老;依种姓而长老,非依财富等,故为种姓长老。“长久”:指长时间。“究竟多少?”故说“二或三个王轮”,意为经历二或三个国王统治的次第。既然已说“已历长久”,如何取其年龄?为示现终末之年龄,故说“已达后分年龄”。后分即第三部分,从六十七岁开始为后分年龄。显示巴利原文
Atidūraaccāsannapaṭikkhepena nātidūranāccāsannaṃ nāma gahitaṃ, taṃ pana avakaṃsato ubhinnaṃ pasāritahatthāsaṅghaṭṭanena daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gīvaṃ pasāretvāti gīvaṃ parivattanavasena pasāretvā. Meti kattuatthe sāmivacananti āha ‘‘mayā suta’’nti. Jātibrāhmaṇeti jātiyā brāhmaṇe, na bāhitapāpatāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Khaṇḍiccādibhāvaṃ āpāditeti khaṇḍitadantapalitakesādibhāvaṃ sampāpite. Vuḍḍhimariyādappatteti vuḍḍhiparicchedaṃ sampatte, vuḍḍhipariyantappatteti vuttaṃ hoti. Jātimahallakatāyāti uppattiyā mahallakabhāvena. Mahattaṃ lāti gaṇhātīti mahallako, jātiyā mahallako, na vibhavādināti jātimahallako. Addhānanti dīghakālaṃ. Kittako pana soti āha ‘‘dve tayo rājaparivaṭṭe’’ti, dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ rājūnaṃ rajjapasāsanapaṭipāṭiyoti attho. ‘‘Addhagate’’ti vatvā kathaṃ vayogahaṇaṃ osānavayāpekkhanti āha ‘‘pacchimavayaṃ anuppatte’’ti. Pacchimo tatiyabhāgoti sattasaṭṭhito paṭṭhāya pacchimavayo koṭṭhāso.
在第二个义释中,“年老”并非仅指年龄上的老迈,而是指因家族累代传承而显得古旧,故说“年老即古旧”等。以此说明那些婆罗门依其家族而有兴衰起落之状。由于“年岁已达”将依出生之增长而说,而功德之增长较之更为殊胜,故说“增长即具足戒行等功德之增长”。同样,因“年长”一词也将依此而说,故以“年长”一词关联财富的巨大。所谓“行道者”,指已进入婆罗门的修行轨范、并未偏离其行持者。“最后时期”指生命的最后阶段。显示巴利原文
Dutiye atthavikappe jiṇṇeti nāyaṃ jiṇṇatā vayomattena, atha kho kulaparivaṭṭena purāṇatāyāti āha ‘‘jiṇṇeti porāṇe’’tiādi. Tena tesaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ kulavasena uditoditabhāvamāha. ‘‘Vayoanuppatte’’ti iminā jātivuḍḍhiyā vakkhamānattā guṇavuḍḍhiyā tato sātisayattā ca ‘‘vuḍḍheti sīlācārādiguṇavuḍḍhiyutte’’ti āha. Tathā jātimahallakatāyapi teneva vakkhamānattā mahallaketi padena vibhavamahattatā yojitā. Maggapaṭipanneti brāhmaṇānaṃ paṭipattividhiṃ upagate taṃ avokkamma caraṇato. Antimavayanti pacchimavayaṃ.
“起立”即从座位起身,故说“不从座位起身”,意思是从所坐的座位不起身。此处,“年老……年岁已达”为受格,并非期待起身动作,因此应补充“看见年老……年岁已达者”来理解其义。或者,受格是期待迎接动作,故应理解为“不起立”即不起身迎接,因为迎接也称为“起立”。确实有这样的说法:“见到老师从远处便起身迎接,这称为起立。”而“不从座位起身”应视为仅表明没有迎接的表现。在“区别”这一含义上,是指本性上的区别,并非指不敬礼,而是说“不敬礼”即认为不应敬礼。显示巴利原文
Paccuṭṭhānaṃ nāma āsanā vuṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘nāsanā vuṭṭhahatī’’ti, nisinnāsanato na vuṭṭhātīti attho. Ettha ca jiṇṇe…pe… vayoanuppatteti upayogavacanaṃ āsanā vuṭṭhānakiriyāpekkhaṃ na hoti, tasmā jiṇṇe…pe… vayoanuppatte disvāti ajjhāhāraṃ katvā attho veditabbo. Atha vā paccuggamanakiriyāpekkhaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, tasmā na paccuṭṭhetīti uṭṭhāya paccuggamanaṃ na karotīti attho veditabbo. Paccuggamanampi hi paccuṭṭhānanti vuccati. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘ācariyaṃ pana dūratova disvā paccuṭṭhāya paccuggamanakaraṇaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ nāmā’’ti. Nāsanā vuṭṭhātīti iminā pana paccuggamanābhāvassa upalakkhaṇamattaṃ dassitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vibhāvane nāma attheti pakativibhāvanasaṅkhāte atthe, na abhivādeti vāti na abhivādetabbanti sallakkhetīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“那种无知”是指基于“此人不应受我敬礼等”这样的不知而生起的无知。“观察”是指以智慧之眼观察,如经中所说:“无恭敬、无尊重而住是苦的,我应恭敬、尊重哪位沙门或婆罗门呢?”等。“应受礼敬者”指应受合掌礼敬者。“刚出生者”意为刚刚出生、出生后立即。“面向北方”即面向北、朝北方。关于“行走七步后观察整个一万世界”,这是依据经典中这样说:“诸比丘,这是法性:刚出生的菩萨双足平稳站立,面向北方行走七步,当白色伞盖被持举时观察一切方向,并发出如牛王般的语言。”如此说,是因经典中讲述了行走七步后观察一切方向,但不应理解为行走七步后才观察方向,因为观察方向是在行走七步之前。实际上,大士从人们手中解脱后,先观察东方,无数千轮围世界成为一片平地,那里的天人们以香花等供养并说:“大士,此处无与您相等者,何况更胜者?”如此观察四正方向、四隅方向、下方、上方共十方后,未见与自己相等者,然后说“这是北方”而行走七步。所谓“观察”,是指以福德威力显现世界开阔神变时,以肉眼观察所显现的一万世界。显示巴利原文
Taṃ aññāṇanti ‘‘ayaṃ mama abhivādanādīni kātuṃ araharūpo na hotī’’ti ajānanavasena pavattaṃ aññāṇaṃ. Olokentoti ‘‘dukkhaṃ kho agāravo viharati appatisso, kiṃ nu kho ahaṃ samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā sakkareyyaṃ, garuṃ kareyya’’ntiādisuttavasena (a. ni. 4.21) ñāṇacakkhunā olokento. Nipaccakārārahanti paṇipātārahaṃ. Sampatijātoti muhuttajāto, jātasamanantaramevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Uttarena mukhoti uttarābhimukho, uttaradisābhimukhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Sattapadavītihārena gantvā sakalaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuṃ olokesinti idaṃ ‘‘dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, sampatijāto bodhisatto samehi pādehi patiṭṭhahitvā uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gacchati, setamhi chatte anudhāriyamāne sabbā disā viloketi, āsabhiñca vācaṃ bhāsatī’’ti evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ (dī. ni. 2.31) sattapadavītihārūpariṭṭhitassa viya sabbadisānuvilokanassa kathitattā vuttaṃ, na panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, sattapadavītihārato pageva disāvilokanassa katattā. Mahāsatto hi manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā puratthimadisaṃ olokesi, anekāni cakkavāḷasahassāni ekaṅgaṇāni ahesuṃ. Tattha devamanussā gandhamālādīhi pūjayamānā ‘‘mahāpurisa idha tumhehi sadisopi natthi, kuto uttaritaro’’ti āhaṃsu. Evaṃ catasso disā catasso anudisā heṭṭhā uparīti dasapi disā anuviloketvā attano sadisaṃ adisvā ‘‘ayaṃ uttarā disā’’ti sattapadavītihārena agamāsīti veditabbo. Olokesinti mama puññānubhāvena lokavivaraṇapāṭihāriye jāte paññāyamānaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuṃ maṃsacakkhunāva olokesinti attho.
“大士”指以出生、种姓、家族、地域等而言的大人物。“最上”指以功德而言为一切中最殊胜者。“最年长”指以功德而言为一切中最年长者,即功德上最成熟的意思。“最优秀”指以功德而言为一切中最值得称赞者。从义理上应知后两者是前者的同义词。“比你”是处格用作具格。“更超胜”指更殊胜。“敬奉”指供养。“如牛王般的”指最上的。“应受我敬礼等的人”指适合我进行敬礼等行为的人。此处应视为常相依关系的复合词。“从如来”指从如来、从如来的身边。“如此”指具有敬礼等性质。“因成熟而束缚松弛”指因成熟而束缚变得松弛。显示巴利原文
Mahāpurisoti jātigottakulappadesādivasena mahantapuriso. Aggoti guṇehi sabbapadhāno. Jeṭṭhoti guṇavaseneva sabbesaṃ vuḍḍhatamo, guṇehi mahallakatamoti vuttaṃ hoti. Seṭṭhoti guṇavaseneva sabbesaṃ pasatthatamo. Atthato pana pacchimāni dve purimasseva vevacanānīti veditabbaṃ. Tayāti nissakke karaṇavacanaṃ. Uttaritaroti adhikataro. Patimānesīti pūjesi. Āsabhinti uttamaṃ. Mayhaṃ abhivādanādiraho puggaloti mayhaṃ abhivādanādikiriyāya araho anucchaviko puggalo. Niccasāpekkhatāya panettha samāso daṭṭhabbo. Tathāgatāti tathāgatato, tathāgatassa santikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Evarūpanti abhivādanādisabhāvaṃ. Paripākasithilabandhananti paripākena sithilabandhanaṃ.
3 “那句话”指“我不是那个婆罗门”等语。若说出“我并非无味之人,或如我者并非无味之人”,婆罗门恐会心生僵硬。故说“为令心生柔软”。“Pariyāya”一词用于说法、轮转、原因等义:在此,能令所应说之义得以理解、觉悟,故为“说法”;前后轮转,故为“轮转”;执取其果而转起,或成为其因,故为“原因”。应如此了知“pariyāya”一词于说法、轮转、原因等义上的运用。“以证知而确立”指确立于阿罗汉果。“那个是哪个”是期待同义词的阳性指示词,意思是“那个同义词是哪个”。“以出生而言”指以刹帝利等出生而言。“以转生而言”指以在天神中转生而言。“即使是公认最优秀者”中的“即使”一词,显示更不用说非公认最优秀者。“欢喜者”指以有喜贪而喜悦者。“染著者”指以强力贪欲而染著者。由享用色等而生起的、与贪相应的喜受,从色产生后触击于心,犹如芒果味等,故称“色味”。“吸引”即拉拽。在依处、所缘等条件和合之中。“不抬高”指因自赞对婆罗门而言并不适宜,故不抬高、不称赞自己。显示巴利原文
3.Taṃ vacananti ‘‘nāhaṃ taṃ brāhmaṇā’’tiādivacanaṃ. ‘‘Nāhaṃ arasarūpo, mādisā vā arasarūpā’’ti vutte brāhmaṇo thaddho bhaveyya. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cittamudubhāvajananattha’’nti. Ayañhi pariyāyasaddo desanāvārakāraṇesu vattatīti ettha pariyāyeti desetabbamatthaṃ avagameti bodhetīti pariyāyo, desanā. Pariyāyati aparāparaṃ parivattetīti pariyāyo, vāro. Pariyāyati attano phalaṃ pariggahetvā vattati, tassa vā kāraṇabhāvaṃ gacchatīti pariyāyo, kāraṇanti evaṃ pariyāyasaddassa desanāvārakāraṇesu pavatti veditabbā. Aññāya saṇṭhaheyyāti arahatte patiṭṭhaheyya. Katamo pana soti pariyāyāpekkho pulliṅganiddeso, katamo so pariyāyoti attho. Jātivasenāti khattiyādijātivasena. Upapattivasenāti devesu upapattivasena. Seṭṭhasammatānampīti api-saddena pageva aseṭṭhasammatānanti dasseti. Abhinandantānanti sappītikataṇhāvasena pamodamānānaṃ. Rajjantānanti balavarāgavasena rajjantānaṃ. Rūpādiparibhogena uppannataṇhāyuttasomanassavedanā rūpato nibbattitvā hadayatappanato ambarasādayo viya ‘‘rūparasā’’ti vuccanti. Āviñchantīti ākaḍḍhanti. Vatthārammaṇādisāmaggiyanti vatthuārammaṇādikāraṇasāmaggiyaṃ. Anukkhipantoti attukkaṃsanavasena kathite brāhmaṇassa asappāyabhāvato attānaṃ anukkhipanto anukkaṃsento.
然于此义中,于作格处用属格,故“jahitā”即此义。“Tathāgatassa”是作格的属格,意为“由如来所舍断”。“Mūla”指有之根。本应说“tālavatthuvatthukatā”,但如“oṭṭhamukho”等词那样,省略中间音节并将a音延长,说为“tālāvatthukatā”,故注释说:“如同多罗树的基址被作成它们的基址,故为tālāvatthukatā”。其中,多罗树的基址称为tālavatthu。譬如,曾是园林基址之处,园林消失后便被称为“园林基址”,同样,多罗树扎根之地,当多罗树被连根拔起,仅剩那块地时,因曾是树的基址,故称“tālavatthu”。“Nesaṃ”指色、味等。为何说“如同多罗树的基址被作成它们的基址”呢?注释说“正如……”等。由于通过享用色等而生起的、与渴爱相应的喜受,即所谓色味等,乃是心相续的依止处,故说“它们”。显示巴利原文
Etasmiṃ panatthe karaṇe sāmivacananti ‘‘jahitā’’ti etasmiṃ atthe. Tathāgatassāti karaṇe sāmivacanaṃ, tathāgatena jahitāti attho. Mūlanti bhavamūlaṃ. ‘‘Tālavatthuvatthukatā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘oṭṭhamukho’’tiādīsu viya majjhepadalopaṃ katvā akārañca dīghaṃ katvā ‘‘tālāvatthukatā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘tālavatthu viya nesaṃ vatthu katanti tālāvatthukatā’’ti. Tattha tālassa vatthu tālavatthu. Yathā ārāmassa vatthubhūtapubbo padeso ārāmassa abhāve ‘‘ārāmavatthū’’ti vuccati, evaṃ tālassa patiṭṭhitokāso samūlaṃ uddharite tāle padesamatte ṭhite tālassa vatthubhūtapubbattā ‘‘tālavatthū’’ti vuccati. Nesanti rūparasādīnaṃ. Kathaṃ pana tālavatthu viya nesaṃ vatthu katanti āha ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi. Rūpādiparibhogena uppannataṇhāyuttasomanassavedanāsaṅkhātarūparasādīnaṃ cittasantānassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘tesaṃ pubbe uppannapubbabhāvena vatthumatte cittasantāne kate’’ti. Tattha pubbeti pure, sarāgakāleti vuttaṃ hoti. Tālāvatthukatāti vuccantīti tālavatthu viya attano vatthussa katattā rūparasādayo ‘‘tālāvatthukatā’’ti vuccanti. Etena pahīnakilesānaṃ puna uppattiyā abhāvo dassito.
“Aviruḷhidhammattā”意为具有不再生长的性质。顶部被截断的多罗树,不再是叶、果等的基址,故说“如同顶部被截断的多罗树那样被作成”。由此显示了“如同多罗树的基址被作成,故为tālāvatthukatā”这一词解。在此,本应说“avatthutālākatā”,即被作成无基址的多罗树,却将修饰词后置,说为“tālāvatthukatā”,应如此理解。以此义显示:以“色味等”之言,摄取了曾作为异熟法于过去生起的善、不善法;这些法虽已生起,但由于如顶部般的渴爱与无明已被道之利剑斩断,于未来已无力产生如同多罗树叶般的异熟蕴,因此说色味等“如同多罗树的基址被作成,故为tālāvatthukatā”。于此义中,有说“abhinandantānaṃ”一词也包含了善的喜。显示巴利原文
Aviruḷhidhammattāti aviruḷhisabhāvatāya. Matthakacchinno tālo pattaphalādīnaṃ avatthubhūto tālāvatthūti āha ‘‘matthakacchinnatālo viya katā’’ti. Etena ‘‘tālāvatthu viya katāti tālāvatthukatā’’ti ayaṃ viggaho dassito. Ettha pana avatthubhūto tālo viya katāti avatthutālākatāti vattabbe visesanassa padassa paranipātaṃ katvā ‘‘tālāvatthukatā’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Iminā panatthena idaṃ dasseti – rūparasādivacanena vipākadhammadhammā hutvā pubbe uppannā kusalākusaladhammā gahitā, te uppannāpi matthakasadisānaṃ taṇhāvijjānaṃ maggasatthena chinnattā āyatiṃ tālapattasadise vipākakkhandhe nibbattetuṃ asamatthā jātā, tasmā tālāvatthu viya katāti tālāvatthukatā rūparasādayoti. Imasmiñhi atthe ‘‘abhinandantāna’’nti iminā padena kusalasomanassampi saṅgahitanti vadanti.
“Anabhāvaṃkatā”中,前缀“anu”与“pacchā”(后)意义相同,故注释说“如同它们不再有后有的状态”等。“Anuabhāvaṃ gatā”意为:以不再生起的性质故,趣入无有、归于灭尽,即已断除之义。为了以实例显示“anacchariya”一词,[注释]说“如同anuacchariyā即anacchariyā”,如“这些非奇特的偈颂于心中显现”(《大品》7,8)。其中,“anuacchariyā”意为在听闻时,层层递进而令人惊叹。显示巴利原文
Anabhāvaṃkatāti ettha anu-saddo pacchā-saddena samānatthoti āha ‘‘yathā nesaṃ pacchābhāvo na hotī’’tiādi. Anuabhāvaṃ gatāti pacchā anuppattidhammatāvasena abhāvaṃ gatā vināsamupagatā, pahīnāti attho. ‘‘Imā anacchariyā gāthāyo paṭibhaṃsū’’ti (mahāva. 7, 8) ettha anacchariyasaddaṃ udāharaṇavasena dassento āha ‘‘yathā anuacchariyā anacchariyā’’ti. Tattha anuacchariyāti savanakāle uparūpari vimhayakarāti attho.
“你所说的那个,并非理由(pariyāya)”意为:你所称说的、那名为无有问候等和合之味的无味状态,这个理由并不存在、不可得。难道婆罗门不是针对那名为无有问候等和合之味的理由,而说“乔达摩尊者是无味的”吗?当说“那个理由不存在”时,便会导致“世尊行问候等”这一不欲的过失。为了显示此点,注释才说“为何世尊这样说呢?”等。显示巴利原文
Yañca kho tvaṃ vadesi, so pariyāyo na hotīti yaṃ vandanādisāmaggirasābhāvasaṅkhātaṃ kāraṇaṃ arasarūpatāya vadesi, taṃ kāraṇaṃ na hoti, na vijjatīti attho. Nanu ca brāhmaṇo yaṃ vandanādisāmaggirasābhāvasaṅkhātaṃ pariyāyaṃ sandhāya ‘‘arasarūpo bhavaṃ gotamo’’ti āha, so pariyāyo natthīti vutte vandanādīni bhagavā karotīti āpajjatīti imaṃ aniṭṭhappasaṅgaṃ dassento āha ‘‘kasmā pana bhagavā evamāhā’’tiādi.
4 “4. Sabbapariyāyesu”意为在一切情况中。“Sandhāya bhāsitamattaṃ”:婆罗门针对某义而说“乔达摩尊者是无受用的”等,以及世尊针对某义而认可自己无受用等,那仅是循着那个意思而说。“Chandarāgaparibhogo”是因欲贪而有的受用。“Aparaṃ pariyāyaṃ”指另一个理由。显示巴利原文
4.Sabbapariyāyesūti sabbavāresu. Sandhāya bhāsitamattanti yaṃ sandhāya brāhmaṇo ‘‘nibbhogo bhavaṃ gotamo’’tiādimāha, bhagavā ca yaṃ sandhāya nibbhogatādiṃ attani anujānāti, taṃ sandhāya bhāsitamattaṃ . Chandarāgaparibhogoti chandarāgavasena paribhogo. Aparaṃ pariyāyanti aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ.
5 “Kulasamudācārakammaṃ”,是指称为家族习俗的业,即家族的行仪。“Akiriyanti”,指不造作的状态。恶行,即恶的行为;因以身门居多而转起,故从身所起的恶行,名为身恶行。为显示其自相,注释说“其中”等。应知这是杀生、不与取、邪淫的思。其中,“pāṇa”(有情),就胜义而言是命根,就世俗而言则是有情。此处的命根,应依色命根与非色命根来理解;因为当色命根被破坏时,与之相应的非色命根也随之坏灭。而“有情”,应理解为蕴的相续,因为于彼处安立了“有情”的假名。“pāṇa”一词本身具有坠落之意,极度地令其坠落,即是“atipāta”(杀),也就是不让它缓慢坠落,而令其迅速坠落。或者,“ati”为超越,“pāta”为以刀杖等制伏而令堕落,合之即为“atipāta”。“pāṇātipāta”,即是对有情的杀害,意为杀有情、断有情命。就实质而言,这是对有情起有情想、为断绝他人命根而发起的加行所等起的、于身门或语门之一所转起的杀思。因为,当那一思现行时,作为现存命根所依的大种,由于加行所作的显示巴利原文
5.Kulasamudācārakammanti kulācārasaṅkhātaṃ kammaṃ, kulacārittanti vuttaṃ hoti. Akiriyanti akaraṇabhāvaṃ. Duṭṭhu caritaṃ duccaritaṃ, kāyadvāre bāhullavuttito kāyato pavattaṃ duccaritanti kāyaduccaritaṃ. Taṃ sarūpato dassento ‘‘tattha cā’’tiādimāha. Pāṇātipātaadinnādānamicchācāracetanāveditabbāti ettha (itivu. aṭṭha. 74) pāṇoti paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ, vohārato satto. Jīvitindriyañcettha rūpārūpavasena veditabbaṃ. Rūpajīvitindriye hi vikopite itarampi taṃsambandhatāya vinassati. Sattoti ca khandhasantāno gahetabbo. Tattha hi sattapaññatti. Saraseneva patanasabhāvassa antarā eva atīva pātanaṃ atipāto, saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghaṃ pātananti attho. Atikkamma vā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātanaṃ atipāto, pāṇassa atipāto pāṇātipāto, pāṇavadho pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti. Atthato pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino parassa jīvitindriyupacchedakapayogasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānamaññatarappavattā vadhakacetanā. Yāya hi cetanāya vattamānassa jīvitindriyassa nissayabhūtesu mahābhūtesu upakkamakaraṇahetukamahābhūtapaccayā uppajjanakamahābhūtā nuppajjissanti, sā tādisappayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pāṇātipāto. Laddhupakkamāni hi bhūtāni itarabhūtāni viya na visadānīti samānajātiyānaṃ kāraṇāni na honti.
于此,有问难说:在刹那刹那即灭为自性的诸行中,谁是杀者?谁是被杀?若是心与心所的相续,彼无形色,并不具有以切割、破坏等方式加以损害的能力,亦不可被损害。若是色的相续,彼无思,犹如木石,所以于其中,如同在死尸上,不能由切割等而有杀生。再者,杀生的加行,如打击、被打击等,若是在过去、未来或现在的诸行中发生,然在过去与未来中不可能,因为他们并不存在;在现在,诸行是刹那性,以自性即灭为本质,于趋向坏灭者,加行应成无用;而且坏灭无因,所以并非以打击、被打击等加行为缘而有死;又因诸行无有作者,那加行属于谁?由刹那性故,与杀意同时即坏灭,那是谁的造作?因为没有最终时刻可得,又有谁被杀生业所系缚?显示巴利原文
Etthāha – khaṇe khaṇe nirujjhanasabhāvesu saṅkhāresu ko hantā, ko vā haññati, yadi cittacetasikasantāno, so arūpatāya na chedanabhedanādivasena vikopanasamattho, napi vikopanīyo. Atha rūpasantāno, so acetanatāya kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamoti na tattha chedanādinā pāṇātipāto labbhati yathā matasarīre. Payogopi pāṇātipātassa paharaṇappahārādi atītesu vā saṅkhāresu bhaveyya anāgatesu vā paccuppannesu vā, tattha na tāva atītānāgatesu sambhavati tesaṃ abhāvato, paccuppannesu ca saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikattā saraseneva nirujjhanasabhāvatāya vināsābhimukhesu nippayojano payogo siyā, vināsassa ca kāraṇarahitattā na paharaṇappahārādippayogahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, nirīhakatāya ca saṅkhārānaṃ kassa so payogo, khaṇikattā vadhādhippāyasamakālabhijjanato kassa kiriyā, pariyosānakālānavaṭṭhānato kassa vā pāṇātipātakammabaddhoti?
答曰:与如前所述的杀意相应的诸行聚集,即所谓‘有情’,是杀者。由彼所发起的杀生加行为缘,失去命根、识已离去、成为‘死’之名称所依的、应于彼杀生加行造作时生起的色与非色法聚集,被杀害;或纯粹的心与心所相续,被杀害。虽杀生加行非以色相续为直接对象,但在五蕴有中,因心与心所相续依于色相续而转,当他人于色相续施以断绝命根之加行时,由于能生起与彼断绝相系之相似色法,相续便中断,故杀生并非不可能,杀生亦非无因,加行亦非无用。于现在诸行,由所施加行之力,应于其后刹那生起的诸行聚不如此生起;因这里不以刹那诸行的刹那死为‘死’义,而相续死依前说之理是有因的,故死非无因;又,杀生加行非无作者,虽诸行无作者,但于仅以现前为助缘、各自决定生起相应果的诸缘中,依世间言说可安立作者,如说‘灯照亮’,‘月是夜之主’。又,不应仅将与杀意俱起的心与心所聚视为杀生,因为承认的是依相续而安立者。而依相续而转的灯等,可见其有作用,故确有以杀生业而系缚者。此理趣于不与取等中,亦应随宜阐明。显示巴利原文
Vuccate – yathāvuttavadhakacetanāsahito saṅkhārānaṃ puñjo sattasaṅkhāto hantā. Tena pavattitavadhappayoganimittaṃ apagatusmāviññāṇajīvitindriyo matavohārappavattinibandhano yathāvuttavadhappayogakaraṇe uppajjanāraho rūpārūpadhammasamūho haññati, kevalo vā cittacetasikasantāno. Vadhappayogāvisayabhāvepi tassa pañcavokārabhave rūpasantānādhīnavuttitāya rūpasantāne parena payojitajīvitindriyupacchedakapayogavasena tannibbattivinibandhakavisadisarūpuppattiyā vihate vicchedo hotīti na pāṇātipātassa asambhavo, napi ahetuko pāṇātipāto, na ca payogo nippayojano. Paccuppannesu saṅkhāresu katapayogavasena tadanantaraṃ uppajjanārahassa saṅkhārakalāpassa tathā anuppattito khaṇikānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikamaraṇassa idha maraṇabhāvena anadhippetattā santatimaraṇassa ca yathāvuttanayena sahetukabhāvato na ahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, na ca katturahito pāṇātipātapayogo nirīhakesupi saṅkhāresu sannihitatāmattena upakārakesu attano attano anurūpaphaluppādaniyatesu kāraṇesu kattuvohārasiddhito yathā ‘‘padīpo pakāseti, nisākarova candimā’’ti. Na ca kevalassa vadhādhippāyasahabhuno cittacetasikakalāpassa pāṇātipāto icchitabbo santānavasena avaṭṭhitasseva paṭijānanato. Santānavasena vattamānānañca padīpādīnaṃ atthakiriyā dissatīti attheva pāṇātipātena kammabaddho. Ayañca vicāro adinnādānādīsupi yathāsambhavaṃ vibhāvetabbo.
关于杀生:对于无功德的有情如畜生等,若杀小的有情,罪便轻;若杀大的有情,罪便重。为什么呢?因为加行有大有小;即便加行相当,也因所依对象的大小而有差别。对于有功德的人等有情,若杀少功德的有情,罪便轻;若杀大功德的有情,罪便重。然而,即便所杀对象的形体大小与功德相当,也应当了知:因烦恼与加行的柔和而罪轻,因猛烈而罪重。显示巴利原文
So (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.89; dha. sa. aṭṭha. akusalakammapathakathā) ca pāṇātipāto guṇavirahitesu tiracchānagatādīsu pāṇesu khuddake pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahante mahāsāvajjo. Kasmā? Payogamahantatāya, payogasamattepi vatthumahantatāya. Guṇavantesu manussādīsu appaguṇe pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāguṇe mahāsāvajjo. Sarīraguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve satipi kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjo, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjoti veditabbo.
未以语或身所授予,故为“不与”,即属于他人之物;取走此物,便是不与取。夺取他人之物,即是偷盗,是贼的行为。就义理而言,这是对他人所护持之物,作他人所护持想,生起夺取的加行,在语门或身门之一生起的偷盗思。对于低劣的他人所有物,罪轻;对于殊胜的,罪重。为什么呢?因为所依对象的殊胜。在所依相当时,对于更具功德者的所有物,罪重;与之相比,对于功德次第较低者的所有物,罪轻。显示巴利原文
Kāyavācāhi na dinnanti adinnaṃ, parasantakaṃ, tassa ādānaṃ adinnādānaṃ. Parassaharaṇaṃ theyyaṃ, corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atthato pana parapariggahe parapariggahitasaññino tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānamaññataradvārappavattā theyyacetanā. Taṃ hīne parasantake appasāvajjaṃ, paṇīte mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kasmā? Vatthupaṇītatāya. Vatthusamatte sati guṇādhikānaṃ santake vatthusmiṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ, taṃtaṃguṇādhikaṃ upādāya tato tato hīnaguṇassa santake vatthusmiṃ appasāvajjaṃ.
邪行,即邪淫,于淫欲行中一向被呵责的鄙陋行。据其特相,乃以欲行非法之意,于身门转起,违越不可行处之思。此邪淫,于无戒等功德之不可行处,罪轻;于具足戒等功德者,罪重。其有四缘:不可行处,于彼生起行欲之心,行欲之加行,以道入道之领受。唯一加行,唯自身作。显示巴利原文
Micchā caraṇaṃ micchācāro, methunasamācāresu ekantanindito lāmakācāro. So pana lakkhaṇato asaddhammādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā. So panesa micchācāro sīlādiguṇavirahite agamanīyaṭṭhāne appasāvajjo, sīlādiguṇasampanne mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā – agamanīyavatthu, tasmiṃ sevanacittaṃ, sevanapayogo, maggenamaggappaṭipattiadhivāsananti. Eko payogo sāhatthiko eva.
于语门中,因多从语言而生起的恶行,称为语恶行。为说明其自性,说:“应知即是妄语、离间语、粗恶语、杂秽语的思心所。”其中,“妄”指不真实、不如实之事。依此事而说妄语,故为妄语,即欲令他人将不实之事理解为真实,而生起那种表知之思。若依所破坏之义,所破坏之义小则罪轻,所破坏之义大则罪重。又,在家人不欲施舍己物而说“没有”等,罪过为轻;作为证人破坏他人之义,罪过为重。出家人得到少许油或酥,以玩笑意说“今日村中油如河流”等夸大之语,罪过为轻;若说“见未所见”等,罪过为重。它有四种条件:不实之事,欺诳之心,相应的精勤努力,令他了解彼义。唯有一种加行,即唯由自身而作。此应见于以身、或身所系物、或语,作欺诳他人之行为时。若由那种行为使他人了解了彼义,则在生起该行为之思的刹那,即被妄语业所系缚。然而,如同以身、身所系物及语欺诳他人,同样地,令他人说“如此说”,或书写文书置于前,或于壁等书写“此义应如是知”而安置,因此在此处,令作、放下、不动等加行也都合理。但由于注释中未提及,故应审察而取用。显示巴利原文
Vacīdvāre bāhullavuttito vācato pavattaṃ duccaritanti vacīduccaritaṃ. Taṃ sarūpato dassento āha ‘‘musāvādapisuṇavācāpharusavācāsamphappalāpacetanā veditabbā’’ti. Tattha musāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu. Musā vadīyati vuccati etāyāti musāvādo, atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā. So yamatthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appatāya appasāvajjo, mahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Apica gahaṭṭhānaṃ attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāya natthīti ādinayappavatto appasāvajjo, sakkhinā hutvā atthabhañjanatthaṃ vutto mahāsāvajjo. Pabbajitānaṃ appakampi telaṃ vā sappiṃ vā labhitvā hasādhippāyena ‘‘ajja gāme telaṃ nadī maññe sandatī’’ti pūraṇakathānayena pavatto appasāvajjo, adiṭṭhaṃyeva pana diṭṭhantiādinā nayena vadantānaṃ mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā honti – atathaṃ vatthu, visaṃvādanacittaṃ, tajjo vāyāmo, parassa tadatthaviññāpananti. Eko payogo sāhatthikova. So kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā vācāya vā paravisaṃvādakakiriyākaraṇe daṭṭhabbo. Tāya ce kiriyāya paro tamatthaṃ jānāti, ayaṃ kiriyāsamuṭṭhāpikacetanākkhaṇeyeva musāvādakammunā bajjhati. Yasmā pana yathā kāyakāyapaṭibaddhavācāhi paraṃ visaṃvādeti, tathā ‘‘idamassa bhaṇāhī’’ti āṇāpentopi, paṇṇaṃ likhitvā purato nissajjantopi, ‘‘ayaṃ attho evaṃ veditabbo’’ti kuṭṭādīsu likhitvā ṭhapentopi, tasmā ettha āṇattikanissaggiyathāvarāpi payogā yujjanti. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana anāgatattā vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbā.
“pisati”意为破坏、分裂,因此称为离间语(pisuṇā),意思是使和合的众生、作为部分的群体变得分裂、不和。或者,依词源学解释,因能令亲密、和合变为空无,故为离间语。的确,由于那种语言,对于说那种语言的人,会在他自己心中生起对自己的喜爱,而在他人心中生起亲爱空无的状态,那语言就是离间语。然而从特相来说,具有染污心的人,为了分裂他人,或出于对自己喜爱、受信乐的欲求,而发起身业、语业之思,这称为离间语,因为以此而说离间的话。它若对有少德者造成分裂,则罪过轻;若对有尊者者造成分裂,则罪过重。它有四种资粮:应被分裂的他人;以分裂为先导的想法——“这样他们就会不同,就会分离”,或以喜爱、受信乐的欲求为先导的想法——“这样我就会成为可爱、可信赖的人”;相应的努力;以及对方明白其意思。如果他人未被分裂,则不构成业道差别;只有在被分裂时,才构成。显示巴利原文
Pisatīti pisuṇā, samagge satte avayavabhūte vagge bhinne karotīti attho. Niruttinayena vā piyasuññakaraṇato pisuṇā. Yāya hi vācāya yassa taṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, tassa hadaye attano piyabhāvaṃ, parassa ca piyasuññabhāvaṃ karoti, sā pisuṇavācā. Lakkhaṇato pana saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa paresaṃ vā bhedāya attano piyakamyatāya vā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pisuṇavācā pisuṇaṃ vadati etāyāti katvā. Sā yassa bhedaṃ karoti, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā cattāro sambhārā – bhinditabbo paro, ‘‘iti ime nānā bhavissanti vinā bhavissantī’’ti bhedapurekkhāratā vā ‘‘iti ahaṃ piyo bhavissāmi vissāsiko’’ti piyakamyatā vā, tajjo vāyāmo, tassa tadatthavijānananti. Pare pana abhinne kammapathabhedo natthi, bhinne eva hoti.
“pharusayati”意为使之粗糙,因此称为粗恶语(pharusā),即语言。的确,由于那种语言,使自己和他人都变得粗糙、因无慈爱而粗涩,那种语言就是粗恶语。或者,这种语言本身也是粗恶的,因为它由忧受所生起,其本性即是粗硬,既不悦耳,也不悦心,故为粗恶语。在此,应知由于以切断他人痛处的方式生起,因其一向的严厉性,以及依本性、依原因的通称,而将语言称为粗恶。以此而说粗恶的话,故为粗恶语,即为了切断他人痛处而发起身业、语业之思,那是一向粗恶的思。为了阐明它,有这样一个事例:据说,有一个男孩不听母亲的话前往森林,母亲无法叫他回来,便骂他:“愿凶暴的母水牛追你!”后来在森林里,果然有一头母水牛出现。男孩作了真实语:“愿我母亲口中说的话不要实现,愿她心中所想的实现。”那头母水牛便像被绑住一样停在那里。如此,即使行为是在切断痛处,若心柔软,则不成为粗恶语。因为父母有时也会对孩子们这样说:“愿盗贼把你们剁成碎片!”但他们连一片莲花瓣落在孩子们身上都不愿意。师长与和尚有时也会对依止者这样说:“这些无惭无愧之人,我们应被从他们之中……”但他们心中却希望他们能有所成就。因此,在切断痛处时,若心柔软,则不成为粗恶语。显示巴利原文
Pharusayatīti pharusā, vācā. Yāya hi vācāya attānampi parampi pharusaṃ sinehābhāvena lūkhaṃ karoti, sā pharusavācā. Atha vā sayampi pharusā domanassasamuṭṭhitattā sabhāvenapi kakkasā neva kaṇṇasukhā na hadayasukhāti pharusavācā. Ettha pana paresaṃ mammacchedanavasena pavattiyā ekantaniṭṭhuratāya sabhāvena kāraṇavohārena ca vācāya pharusasaddappavatti daṭṭhabbā. Taṃ pharusaṃ vadati etāyāti pharusavācā, parassa mammacchedakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā ekantapharusā cetanā. Tassā āvibhāvatthamidaṃ vatthu – eko kira dārako mātu vacanaṃ anādiyitvā araññaṃ gacchati, taṃ mātā nivattetuṃ asakkontī ‘‘caṇḍā taṃ mahiṃsī anubandhatū’’ti akkosi. Athassa tatheva araññe mahiṃsī uṭṭhāsi. Dārako ‘‘yaṃ mama mātā mukhena kathesi, taṃ mā hotu. Yaṃ cittena cintesi, taṃ hotū’’ti saccakiriyamakāsi. Mahiṃsī tattheva baddhā viya aṭṭhāsi . Evaṃ mammacchedakopi payogo cittasaṇhatāya pharusavācā na hoti. Mātāpitaro hi kadāci puttake evampi vadanti ‘‘corā vo khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ karontū’’ti, uppalapattampi ca nesaṃ upari patantaṃ na icchanti. Ācariyupajjhāyā ca kadāci nissitake evaṃ vadanti ‘‘kiṃ ime ahirikā anottappino caranti, niddhamatha ne’’ti. Atha ca nesaṃ āgamādhigamasampattiṃ icchanti, yathā cittasaṇhatāya pharusavācā na hoti, evaṃ vacanasaṇhatāya apharusavācāpi na hoti. Na hi mārāpetukāmassa ‘‘imaṃ sukhaṃ sayāpethā’’ti vacanaṃ apharusavācā hoti, cittapharusatāya pana esā pharusavācāva. Sā yaṃ sandhāya pavattitā, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā tayo sambhārā – akkositabbo paro, kupitacittaṃ, akkosanāti.
“Saṃ”意为自己的,它破坏、散失、毁灭快乐与利益,故称为杂秽(sampha),即对自己和他人无益的任何事物。以此而说杂秽的话,故称为杂秽语(samphappalāpo),即为了表达无义利而发起身业、语业之思,属于不善思。它若习行轻微,则罪过轻;若习行重大,则罪过重。它有两种资粮:以谈论婆罗多大战、悉多被掳等无义利故事为先导,以及说那样的故事。如果他人不接受那种话,则不构成业道差别;只有在他人接受了杂秽语时,才构成。显示巴利原文
Saṃ sukhaṃ hitañca phalati visarati vināsetīti samphaṃ, attano paresañca anupakārakaṃ yaṃ kiñci, samphaṃ palapati etāyāti samphappalāpo, anatthaviññāpikakāyavacīpayogasamauṭṭhāpikā akusalacetanā. So āsevanamandatāya appasāvajjo, āsevanamahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Tassa dve sambhārā – bhāratayuddhasītāharaṇādiniratthakakathāpurekkhāratā, tathārūpīkathākathanañca. Pare pana taṃ kathaṃ agaṇhante kammapathabhedo natthi, parena pana samphappalāpe gahiteyeva hoti.
关于贪欲、嗔恚、邪见:在此,“abhimukhaṃ jhāyati”意为面向而专注,故为贪欲(abhijjhā),即对他人的成就生起贪。它以“啊,但愿这成为我的”这样对他人的财物专注渴望为特相。如同不与取,有罪过轻和罪过重的情况。它有两种资粮:他人的财物,以及将其归于自己。因为即使对他人的财物生起了贪,只要还未将其归于自己——“啊,但愿这成为我的”,就不构成业道差别。显示巴利原文
Abhijjhābyāpādamicchādiṭṭhiyoti ettha parasampattiṃ abhimukhaṃ jhāyatīti abhijjhā, parasampattīsu lobho. Sā pana ‘‘aho vata idaṃ mamassā’’ti evaṃ parabhaṇḍābhijjhāyanalakkhaṇā. Adinnādānaṃ viya appasāvajjā mahāsāvajjā ca. Tassā dve sambhārā – parabhaṇḍaṃ, attano pariṇāmanañca. Parabhaṇḍavatthuke hi lobhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vata idaṃ mamassā’’ti attano na pariṇāmeti.
“Byāpādeti”意为破坏、毁灭利益与快乐,故为嗔恚(byāpādo),即嗔怒。它以为了毁灭他人而心生恼害为特相。如同粗恶语,有罪过轻和罪过重的情况。它有两种资粮:其他的有情,以及思惟其毁灭。因为即使对其他有情生起了忿怒,只要还未思惟其毁灭——“啊,但愿他灭亡、毁灭”,就不构成业道差别。显示巴利原文
Hitasukhaṃ byāpādeti vināsetīti byāpādo, paṭigho. So paravināsāya manopadosalakkhaṇo . So pharusavācā viya appasāvajjo mahāsāvajjo ca. Tassa dve sambhārā – parasatto, tassa ca vināsanacintā. Parasattavatthuke hi kodhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vatāyaṃ ucchijjeyya vinasseyyā’’ti tassa vināsanaṃ na cinteti.
邪见:由于执取不如实,故颠倒而见,名为邪见。它以“无布施”等颠倒见为特相。如同杂秽语,有轻罪与重罪之分。其中,不决定者为轻罪,决定者为重罪。它具两种资粮:对所缘执取的方式颠倒,以及依其执取而如实显现。唯以无有见、无因见、非圣见,方构成业道的差别。显示巴利原文
Yathābhuccagahaṇābhāvena micchā passatīti micchādiṭṭhi. Sā ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā nayena viparītadassanalakkhaṇā. Samphappalāpo viya appasāvajjā mahāsāvajjā ca. Apica aniyatā appasāvajjā, niyatā mahāsāvajjā. Tassa dve sambhārā – vatthuno gahitākāraviparītatā, yathā ca taṃ gaṇhāti, tathābhāvena tassupaṭṭhānanti. Tattha natthikāhetukaaariyadiṭṭhīhi eva kammapathabhedo hoti.
“种种恶不善法”一语,虽是总说,但依剩余可知,应取所说的其余不善法,故说“除了那些法”等。意思是除了如前所说的身恶行等不善法之外。种种,即多种类别。显示巴利原文
‘‘Anekavihitānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammāna’’nti sāmaññavacanepi pārisesañāyato vuttāvasesā akusalā dhammā gahetabbāti āha ‘‘ṭhapetvā te dhamme’’tiādi. Te yathāvuttakāyaduccaritādike akusaladhamme ṭhapetvāti attho. Anekavihitāti anekappakārā.
6 6. 此“世间传承”者,即此以对长者等的问候等行为为特征的世间传统。由于对不来梵天的装饰品等以及不来比丘的衣等生起爱着,故有贪欲生起,因此应知由不来道所断除的仅是五种欲贪,故说“五种欲贪的”。对于色等五种欲境——即所依欲的部分——中所生起的贪,应知为“五种欲贪”。在此,“部分”一词中的“guṇa”字,如同“逐渐舍弃青春之德”等(《相应部》1.4)中那样,是表示部分的词。于二不善心中,即与忧俱行的二不善心中。由于痴通于一切不善,故说“一切不善之生起”。其余者,即有身见等。显示巴利原文
6.Ayaṃ lokatantīti ayaṃ vuḍḍhānaṃ abhivādanādikiriyālakkhaṇā lokappaveṇī. Anāgāmibrahmānaṃ alaṅkārādīsu anāgāmibhikkhūnañca cīvarādīsu nikantivasena rāguppatti hotīti anāgāmimaggena pañcakāmaguṇikarāgasseva pahānaṃ veditabbanti āha ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassā’’ti. Rūpādīsu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu vatthukāmakoṭṭhāsesu uppajjamāno rāgo ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇikarāgo’’ti veditabbo. Koṭṭhāsavacano hettha guṇasaddo ‘‘vayoguṇā anupubbaṃ jahantī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.4) viya. Dvīsu akusalacittesūti domanassasahagatesu dvīsu akusalacittesu. Mohassa sabbākusalasādhāraṇattā āha ‘‘sabbākusalasambhavassā’’ti. Avasesānanti sakkāyadiṭṭhiādīnaṃ.
7 “厌恶地想”:心想“我是出身高贵、相貌端庄、具足智慧的人,怎可向他人问讯行礼呢?”因而如同厌恶般嫌弃,或者说,我理解为“厌恶”。以不善巧所生之义,即依无明所生之义。当厌恶不善法时,也厌恶与之相应的状态,故说“不善法的具足”。“具足”正是此词的同义词,意为进入、相应。所谓“好装饰之种类”,即好装饰之本性,好装饰之习性之义。“可厌”,即厌恶的习性。显示巴利原文
7.Jigucchati maññeti ‘‘ahamabhijāto rūpavā paññavā, kathaṃ nāma aññesaṃ abhivādanādiṃ kareyya’’nti jigucchati viya jigucchatīti vā sallakkhemi. Akosallasambhūtaṭṭhenāti aññāṇasambhūtaṭṭhena. Akusale dhamme jigucchamāno tesaṃ samaṅgībhāvampi jigucchatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattī’’ti. Samāpattīti etasseva vevacanaṃ samāpajjanā samaṅgibhāvoti. Maṇḍanakajātiyoti maṇḍanasabhāvo, maṇḍanasīloti attho. Jegucchitanti jigucchanasīlataṃ.
8 “世间最尊者的业”:指世间最尊者应作之业,或是世间公认最上的业。于此,即在前述两种释义之中。由词所表达的意义是词义,也就是文义。“或应受调伏”:此处,调伏即是律,意为惩治。因此说“即应受惩治之义”。难道不是在前述的两种释义——自义与应受义中,依语法规则可见派生词缀,而在“为调伏而说法”这一意义中却不见派生词缀吗?那为何此处有派生词缀呢?故说“因为派生词的用法是多样的”。这种多样性应依世间共许来理解。因为世间在何种意义上使用派生词,派生词的用法便依世间在那种意义上成立,所以派生词的用法是多样的。因此,如同被告诫“莫作声”者被称为“莫作声者”,同样,为调伏而说法者即被称为“调伏者”,这是要旨所在。显示巴利原文
8.Lokajeṭṭhakakammanti loke jeṭṭhakānaṃ kattabbakammaṃ, loke vā seṭṭhasammataṃ kammaṃ. Tatrāti yathāvuttesu dvīsupi atthavikappesu. Padābhihito attho padattho, byañjanatthoti vuttaṃ hoti. Vinayaṃ vā arahatīti ettha vinayanaṃ vinayo, niggaṇhananti attho. Tenāha ‘‘niggahaṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Nanu ca paṭhamaṃ vuttesu dvīsupi atthavikappesu sakatthe arahatthe ca bhaddhitapaccayo saddalakkhaṇato dissati, na pana ‘‘vinayāya dhammaṃ desetī’’ti imasmiṃ atthe, tasmā kathamettha taddhitapaccayoti āha ‘‘vicitrā hi taddhitavuttī’’ti. Vicitratā cettha lokappamāṇato veditabbā. Tathā hi yasmiṃ yasmiṃ atthe taddhitappayogo lokassa, tattha tattha taddhitavutti lokato siddhāti vicitrā taddhitavutti. Tasmā yathā ‘‘mā saddamakāsī’’ti vadanto ‘‘māsaddiko’’ti vuccati, evaṃ vinayāya dhammaṃ desetīti venayikoti vuccatīti adhippāyo.
9 “可怜人”:指由于缺乏功德而可怜的人。“不审察词句”:如同对“提舍达他”等词,未作“在此意义中,此词为此缘”这样的词句审察,这是依不变化词干而说的。显示巴利原文
9.Kapaṇapurisoti guṇavirahitatāya dīnamanusso. Byañjanāni avicāretvāti tissadattādisaddesu viya ‘‘imasmiṃ atthe ayaṃ nāma paccayo’’ti evaṃ byañjanaṃ vicāraṃ akatvā, anipphannapāṭipadikavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti.
10 在说了“天界胎之成就”之后,由于除地居天外,其余诸天并无入胎的情形,所以在此应当知道,只以结生为胎之成就。为了开显这一已说的意义,而说:“为获得天界结生而起作用”。“阿萨”,指问候等合宜的行为。为了显示在母胎中结生的过失,就像欲骂詈者通过揭出“你是婢女之子”即生于婢女腹中的过失来骂詈一样,通过显示世尊在母胎中结生的过失而骂詈,他也这样说,这是意趣所在。从胎,即从天界结生。因此说:“意即不能达到生天界”。“或彼有低劣之胎”故为“无胎者”——为了显示这一解释方式的意趣,而说:“由于被排除在天界胎之外,故未来应得低劣之胎”。“iti”一词在此是原因之义,因为未来也应得低劣之胎,所以“或彼有低劣之胎”即是“无胎者”,这是意趣所在。显示巴利原文
10.Devalokagabbhasampattiyāti vatvā ṭhapetvā bhummadeve sesesu devesu gabbhaggahaṇassa abhāvato paṭisandhiyevettha gabbhasampattīti veditabbāti vuttamevatthaṃ vivaritvā dassento āha ‘‘devalokapaṭisandhipaṭilābhāya saṃvattatī’’ti. Assāti abhivādanādisāmīcikammassa. Mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇe dosaṃ dassentoti mātito aparisuddhabhāvaṃ dassento, akkositukāmassa dāsiyā puttoti dāsikucchismiṃ nibbattabhāve dosaṃ dassetvā akkosanaṃ viya bhagavato mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇe dosaṃ dassetvā akkosantopi evamāhāti adhippāyo. Gabbhatoti devalokapaṭisandhito. Tenevāha ‘‘abhabbo devalokūpapattiṃ pāpuṇitunti adhippāyo’’ti. Hīno vā gabbho assāti apagabbhoti imassa viggahassa ekena pariyāyena adhippāyaṃ dassento āha ‘‘devalokagabbhaparibāhirattā āyatiṃ hīnagabbhapaṭilābhabhāgītī’’ti. Iti-saddāe hetuattho, yasmā āyatimpi hīnagabbhapaṭilābhabhāgī, tasmā hīno vā gabbho assāti apagabbhoti adhippāyo.
又,为显示同一释文依嗔怒而为……的意趣,与前说之理相应而开显其意趣,说道:“或彼在母胎中的胎住是低劣的,这是意趣所在”。“胎”一词,有时作为母胎的同义词,如“青年住于胎中”等(《本生经》1.15.363)。有时作为生于母胎中有情的同义词,如“乃至包括堕胎”等(《大品》129)。在此,取母胎的同义词而显示其义,说:“未来的胎卧”。“胎中的卧”即胎卧。以无上道,即以最上之道。由于道已摧破业与烦恼,故说“由于已摧破之因”。其余三种,即卵生、湿生、化生。在此,虽然依“无胎者”的适当意义只应说胎卧,但依连带关系,凡可得的都可说,因此也应知道说“再有之发生”。显示巴利原文
Puna tasseva viggahassa kodhavasena…pe… dassentoti heṭṭhā vuttanayassa anurūpaṃ katvā adhippāyaṃ dassento āha ‘‘hīno vāssa mātukucchismiṃ gabbhavāso ahosīti adhippāyo’’ti. Gabbha-saddo atthi mātukucchipariyāyo ‘‘gabbhe vasati māṇavo’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.15.363) viya . Atthi mātukucchismiṃ nibbattasattapariyāyo ‘‘antamaso gabbhapātanaṃ upādāyā’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 129) viya. Tattha mātukucchipariyāyaṃ gahetvā atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘anāgate gabbhaseyyā’’ti. Gabbhe seyyā gabbhaseyyā. Anuttarena maggenāti aggamaggena. Kammakilesānaṃ maggena vihatattā āha ‘‘vihatakāraṇattā’’ti. Itarā tissopīti aṇḍajasaṃsedajaopapātikā. Ettha ca yadipi ‘‘apagabbho’’ti imassa anurūpato gabbhaseyyā eva vattabbā, pasaṅgato pana labbhamānaṃ sabbampi vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti punabbhavābhinibbattipi vuttāti veditabbā.
现在,为了显示依“胎”作为有情同义词而有不同的解释,说“再者”等。然而,在此种解释中,“胎卧”与“再有之发生”,两者都只是依胎卧而说的,也有人这样说。难道不会因为“未来的胎卧已断”这样的说法,而成为只是胎的卧已断、并非胎已断的过失吗?因此说“正如”等。那么,为何不只说“发生”一词,而要说“再有”呢?因此说:“所谓发生”等。“不再有”者,即刹那刹那生起之诸法的发生。显示巴利原文
Idāni sattapariyāyassa gabbhasaddassa vasena viggahanānattaṃ dassento āha ‘‘apicā’’tiādi. Imasmiṃ pana vikappe gabbhaseyyā punabbhavābhinibbattīti ubhayampi gabbhaseyyavaseneva vuttantipi vadanti. Nanu ca ‘‘āyatiṃ gabbhaseyyā pahīnā’’ti (pārā. 10) vuttattā gabbhassa seyyā eva pahīnā, na pana gabbhoti āpajjatīti āha ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādi. Atha ‘‘abhinibbattī’’ti ettakameva avatvā punabbhavaggahaṇaṃ kimatthanti āha ‘‘abhinibbatti ca nāmā’’tiādi. Apunabbhavabhūtāti khaṇe khaṇe uppajjamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhinibbatti.
11 “法界”者:于此,无余地含摄诸法、如实了知,故为法界;即依诸法自性而觉了的自性,这是一切知智的异名。“彻证”者:即作证、获得,意为获得之因。达到说法之妙趣者:能随顺所好而转、说法之能力,即是说法妙趣;达到、证得此,即为此义。以大悲心遍满一切众生。为再以譬喻阐明这些功德相,故说“心如大地之平等”。如大地于净秽投置、切割、破裂等而不为所动,不随顺逆之境转,同样,于可爱不可爱、得与不得等,由断除了随顺与违逆,心不动摇,故为“心如大地之平等”,此是义趣。“不动法”者:于此,三结处皆说“不动法即是果等至”。然而,我等忍许此义:“当他人怒骂时,自身心如大地平等之相,即是不怒的自性,此处应取此义。”为老所追随者,即是为老所缠缚。成为轮回之桩者:因其成为众多不幸与灾祸坠落之相、支柱之状态,故为轮回之桩。婆罗门因年老而临近死亡,依可能之语势而说“今日死”等。以大精进者:即“善哉,我得见如是阿罗汉”,因而生起大精进。无与伦比的先存状态者:即不共于他的先存状态。无有与其相等者,故为无与伦比,即先存状态。显示巴利原文
11.Dhammadhātunti ettha dhamme anavasese dhāreti yāthāvato upadhāretīti dhammadhātu, dhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvato avabujjhanasabhāvo, sabbaññutaññāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Paṭivijjhitvāti sacchikatvā, paṭilabhitvāti attho, paṭilābhahetūti vuttaṃ hoti. Desanāvilāsappatto hotīti rucivasena parivattetvā desetuṃ samatthatā desanāvilāso, taṃ patto adhigatoti attho. Karuṇāvipphāranti sabbasattesu mahākaruṇāya pharaṇaṃ. Tādiguṇalakkhaṇameva puna upamāya vibhāvetvā dassento āha ‘‘pathavīsamacittata’’nti. Yathā pathavī suciasucinikkhepachedanabhedanādīsu na vikampati, anurodhavirodhaṃ na pāpuṇāti, evaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu lābhālābhādīsu anurodhavirodhappahānato avikampitacittatāya pathavīsamacittatanti attho. Akuppadhammatanti ettha ‘‘akuppadhammo nāma phalasamāpattī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. ‘‘Paresu pana akkosantesupi attano pathavīsamacittatālakkhaṇaṃ akujjhanasabhāvatanti evamettha attho gahetabbo’’ti amhākaṃ khanti. Jarāya anusaṭanti jarāya paliveṭhitaṃ. Vaṭṭakhāṇubhūtanti anekesaṃ anayabyasanānaṃ nipātalakkhaṇatthambhabhūtatāya saṃsārakhāṇubhūtaṃ. Brāhmaṇassa vuḍḍhatāya āsannavuttimaraṇanti sambhāvanavasena ‘‘ajja maritvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Mahantena kho pana ussāhenāti ‘‘sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṃ arahataṃ dassanaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ sañjātamahussāhena. Appaṭisamaṃ purejātabhāvanti anaññasādhāraṇaṃ purejātabhāvaṃ. Natthi etassa paṭisamoti appaṭisamo, purejātabhāvo.
不说“api”而说“pi”,是为了表明“pi”字亦可作为独立的不变词。于可能义:“岂非如此耶”的简择义即是可能义,为显明此义而用“pi”字。为言语流畅者:即是为了使言语甜美、柔和。如此,世间方有流畅语:即不单说一数,而与另一数合说,世间便以此为流畅语,如说“二或三滴水”。正确地安卧其上者:即母鸡以足等不伤害其卵,为避开风等外在危险,而正确地安卧于卵上。此处“adhi”字,是“在上”之义。令其得温者:为令其湿润滑气耗尽,以自身体温令之得温。故说“令温暖”。正确地培育者:即完全正确地以母鸡的气息令其充分熏染。故说“令带鸡味”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Apī’’ti avatvā ‘‘pī’’ti vadanto pi-saddopi visuṃ atthi nipātoti dasseti. Sambhāvanattheti ‘‘api nāmevaṃ siyā’’ti vikappanattho sambhāvanattho, tasmiṃ jotakatāya pisaddo vattati. Vacanasiliṭṭhatāyāti vacanassa madhurabhāvatthaṃ, mudubhāvatthanti attho. Evañhi loke siliṭṭhavacanaṃ hotīti evaṃ ekameva gaṇanaṃ avatvā aparāya gaṇanāya saddhiṃ vacanaṃ loke siliṭṭhavacanaṃ hoti yathā ‘‘dve vā tīṇi vā udakaphusitānī’’ti. Sammā adhisayitānīti pādādīhi attanā nesaṃ kiñci upaghātaṃ akarontiyā bahivātādiparissayaparihāratthaṃ sammadeva upari sayitāni. Upariattho hettha adhi-saddo. Utuṃ gaṇhāpentiyāti tesaṃ allasinehapariyādānatthaṃ attano kāyusmāvasena utuṃ gaṇhāpentiyā. Tenāha ‘‘usmīkatānī’’ti. Sammā paribhāvitānīti sammadeva sabbaso kukkuṭavāsanāya vāsitāni. Tenāha ‘‘kukkuṭagandhaṃ gāhāpitānī’’ti.
于此,应知正确的温润与鸡味培育,乃是由正确安卧其上之成就所成。因为正是由于正确地安卧其上,其余二者方得成就。实则,并无离于正确安卧其上而能成办正确温润与正确培育之事;然而,与彼俱起时,其余二者亦得成就,故说“如是依三种方式护持其卵”。爪尖者:即爪之尖端。嘴喙端者:即嘴之尖端。因壳薄者:于此,应知壳薄是内中光明显现之因,同样,壳薄与爪尖、嘴喙端之锐利,是湿润滑气耗尽的因,此是说明因由之言。“拳缩手足”者:此处“手”指翼。因为鸡除翼之外,别无他手。此处者:即光明之处。振翼者:即摇动其翼。出离者:此为简别之属格,即“于出离者中”之义。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca sammā parisedanaṃ kukkuṭagandhaparibhāvanañca sammā adhisayananipphattiyā ānubhāvanipphāditanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sammā adhisayaneneva hi itaradvayaṃ ijjhati . Na hi sammā adhisayanato visuṃ sammā parisedanassa sammā paribhāvanassa ca karaṇaṃ atthi, tena pana saddhiṃyeva itaresaṃ dvinnampi ijjhanato vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ tīhi pakārehi tāni aṇḍāni paripāliyamānānī’’ti. Nakhasikhāti nakhaggāni. Mukhatuṇḍakanti mukhaggaṃ. Kapālassa tanukattāti ettha yathā kapālassa tanutā ālokassa anto paññāyamānassa kāraṇaṃ, tathā kapālassa tanutāya nakhasikhāmukhatuṇḍakānaṃ kharatāya ca allasinehapariyādānaṃ kāraṇavacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saṅkuṭitahatthapādāti ettha hatthāti pakkhā. Na hi kukkuṭānaṃ pakkhato añño hattho nāma atthi. Etthāti ālokaṭṭhāne. Pakkhe vidhunantāti pakkhe cālentā. Nikkhamantānanti niddhāraṇe sāmivacanaṃ, nikkhamantesūti attho.
“彼为最年长者”,即它应被称为最年长者:谁最先从卵壳中出,那只鸡雏便应被称为最年长者,这是它的含义。“令相合”,即令其一致。虽然三地所摄的众生也入于无明壳内,因为在各处于无明尚未断除而被缠缚,因此说“于入无明壳内之众生中”。“卵壳”,即种子壳。“世间聚落”,世间即是世间聚落。“正等觉”,在此,“正”是不颠倒之义,“等”字显示“自”义,因此以不颠倒的方式,自己觉悟、彻证四圣谛,所以道称为正等觉。故说“正且自之觉”,即正确而且自己觉悟之义。或者,“正”是殊胜之语,“等”是美妙之语,因此说“或殊胜且美妙之觉”。为显示“觉”字的多义,而简别此处所指之义,故说“觉者,树亦道亦”等。其中,由于在此处觉悟,所以树称为觉;自己觉悟,或圣者依之觉悟,所以道称为觉;依一切方式觉悟、彻证一切法,所以一切知智称为觉;被觉悟、被作证,所以涅槃称为觉。“中间之觉”,这是为了显示即使没有“树”字,“觉”字也可用于树,所以举出第二例。“最胜广慧”,即如大地般广布的殊胜智慧,这是含义。“因不施一切功德”,即不施与一切功德。既然不施一切功德,便是不施一切功德者,这是于语法上并不严合的复合词,然而因为可以理解,如“不见日之面”等。显示巴利原文
So jeṭṭho iti assa vacanīyoti yo paṭhamataraṃ aṇḍakosato nikkhanto kukkuṭapotako, soyeva jeṭṭhoti vacanīyo assa, bhaveyyāti attho. Sampaṭipādentoti saṃsandento. Tibhūmakapariyāpannāpi sattā avijjākosassa anto paviṭṭhā tattha tattha appahīnāya avijjāya veṭhitattāti āha ‘‘avijjākosassa anto paviṭṭhesu sattesū’’ti. Aṇḍakosanti bījakapālaṃ. Lokasannivāseti loko eva lokasannivāso. Sammāsambodhinti ettha sammāti aviparītattho, saṃ-saddo sāmanti imamatthaṃ dīpeti, tasmā sammā aviparītenākārena sayameva cattāri saccāni bujjhati paṭivijjhatīti sammāsambodhīti maggo vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘sammā sāmañca bodhi’’nti, sammā sayameva ca bujjhanakanti attho. Sammāti vā pasatthavacano, saṃ-saddo sundaravacanoti āha ‘‘atha vā pasatthaṃ sundarañca bodhi’’nti. Bodhisaddassa anekatthataṃ dassetvā idhādhippetamatthaṃ niddhāretvā dassetukāmo āha ‘‘bodhīti rukkhopi maggopī’’tiādi. Tattha abujjhi etthāti rukkho bodhi. Sayaṃ bujjhati, bujjhanti vā tena ariyāti maggo bodhi. Sabbadhamme sabbākārato bujjhati paṭivijjhatīti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ bodhi. Bujjhīyati sacchikarīyatīti nibbānaṃ bodhi. Antarā ca bodhinti dutiyamudāharaṇaṃ vināpi rukkhasaddena bodhisaddassa rukkhe pavattidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Varabhūrimedhasoti mahāpathavī viya patthaṭavarapaññoti attho. Asabbaguṇadāyakattāti sabbaguṇānaṃ adāyakattā. Sabbaguṇe na dadātīti hi asabbaguṇadāyako, ayuttasamāsoyaṃ gamakattā yathā ‘‘asūriyaṃpassāni mukhānī’’ti.
“三明”:对于有近依者,道与阿罗汉果一同给予三明。难道这里没有过失吗?因为三明中的漏尽智是包含在道中的,“道给予三明”如何合理?这并非过失。虽然漏尽智包含在道中,但当八支道存在时,三明与道智一起圆满,所以说“道给予三明”。“六通”在此也是同样的道理。“声闻波罗蜜智”:即上首弟子所应证得的全部世间智与出世间智。“缘觉菩提智”也应以此方式理解其义。“完全了知”:即知道。而知道并非依靠传闻等,故说“通达”,意思是现量而作。通达也并非如站在远处认识特征那样,故说“我已证得”,意思是到达。而到达也不是自己走过去,故说“我已获得”,意思是以在自己的相续中生起的方式而获得。显示巴利原文
Tisso vijjāti upanissayavato saheva arahattaphalena tisso vijjā deti. Nanu cettha tīsu vijjāsu āsavakkhayañāṇassa maggapariyāpannattā kathametaṃ yujjati ‘‘maggo tisso vijjā detī’’ti? Nāyaṃ doso. Satipi āsavakkhayañāṇassa maggapariyāpannabhāve aṭṭhaṅgike magge sati maggañāṇena saddhiṃ tisso vijjā paripuṇṇā hontīti ‘‘maggo tisso vijjā detī’’ti vuccati. Cha abhiññāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sāvakapāramiñāṇanti aggasāvakehi paṭilabhitabbaṃ sabbameva lokiyalokuttarañāṇaṃ. Paccekabodhiñāṇanti etthāpi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Abbhaññāsinti jāniṃ. Jānanañca na anussavādivasenāti āha ‘‘paṭivijjhi’’nti, paccakkhamakāsinti attho. Paṭivedhopi na dūre ṭhitassa lakkhaṇappaṭivedho viyāti āha ‘‘pattomhī’’ti, pāpuṇinti attho. Pāpuṇanañca na sayaṃ gantvāti āha ‘‘adhigatomhī’’ti, sakasantāne uppādanavasena paṭilabhinti attho.
“譬喻的善巧安立”:即用所喻之义,正确地安立譬喻之义。“以义”:即以所喻之义。如同母鸡对鸡蛋所做的三种行为,是鸡雏从卵壳中出生的根本原因;同样,处于菩萨位的世尊修习三种随观,是从无明卵壳中出生的根本原因,因此说“如同那只母鸡……三种随观的修习”。由于说了“在相续中”,所以卵的相似性是指相续;从卵壳中出来的鸡雏,其相似性是指佛的功德,而佛的功德从意义上说就是佛本身,因为“瓦塞塔,如来有这样一个同义词,即‘法身’”。“无明卵壳的变薄”:即依强力的观,无明卵壳变薄,而由于遮蔽作用的共通性,无明具有卵壳的相似性。即使变软了,也可能出现坚硬的状态,为了排除这种可能,故说“僵硬坚硬的状态”。“锐利、坚硬、明净、勇猛的状态”:在此,在把握诸行时,观智依定根而容易进入,这是锐利;进入后,依念根而不退转、不迟钝,这是坚硬。因为有些箭虽然锐利,但射中目标后却会变钝,而这里并非如此。虽有坚硬,但依信根,由于以微细的方式运作而无烦恼现行的扰动,这是明净;虽明净,但依精进根,由于不中途退缩而能善于战胜烦恼怨敌,这是勇猛。应知,通显示巴利原文
Opammasampaṭipādananti opammatthassa upameyyena sammadeva paṭipādanaṃ. Atthenāti upameyyatthena. Yathā kukkuṭiyā aṇḍesu tividhakiriyākaraṇaṃ kukkuṭacchāpakānaṃ aṇḍakosato nikkhamanassa mūlakāraṇaṃ, evaṃ bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanākaraṇaṃ avijjaṇḍakosato nikkhamanassa mūlakāraṇanti āha ‘‘yathā hi tassā kukkuṭiyā…pe… tividhānupassanākaraṇa’’nti. ‘‘Santāne’’ti vuttattā aṇḍasadisatā santānassa bahi nikkhantakukkuṭacchāpakasadisatā buddhaguṇānaṃ, buddhaguṇāti ca atthato buddhoyeva ‘‘tathāgatassa kho etaṃ, vāseṭṭha, adhivacanaṃ dhammakāyo itipī’’ti vacanato. Avijjaṇḍakosassa tanubhāvoti balavavipassanāvasena avijjaṇḍakosassa tanubhāvo, paṭicchādanasāmaññena ca avijjāya aṇḍakosasadisatā. Mudubhūtassapi kharabhāvāpatti hotīti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘thaddhakharabhāvo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tikkhakharavippasannasūrabhāvoti ettha pariggayhamānesu saṅkhāresu vipassanāñāṇassa samādhindriyavasena sukhānuppaveso tikkhatā, anupavisitvāpi satindriyavasena anatikkamanato akuṇṭhatā kharabhāvo. Tikkhopi hi ekacco saro lakkhaṃ patvā kuṇṭho hoti, na tathā idaṃ. Satipi kharabhāve sukhumappavattivasena kilesasamudācārasaṅkhobharahitatāya saddhindriyavasena pasannabhāvo, satipi ca pasannabhāve antarā anosakkitvā kilesapaccatthikānaṃ suṭṭhu abhibhavanato vīriyindriyavasena sūrabhāvo veditabbo. Evamimehi pakārehi saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇameva gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vipassanāñāṇassa pariṇāmakāloti vipassanāya vuṭṭhānagāminibhāvappatti, tadā ca sā maggañāṇagabbhaṃ dhārentī viya hotīti āha ‘‘gabbhaggahaṇakālo’’ti. Gabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvāti saṅkhārupekkhāya anantaraṃ sikhāppattaanulomavipassanāvasena maggavijāyanatthaṃ gabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā. Anupubbādhigatenāti paṭhamamaggapaṭipāṭiyā adhigatena. Abhiññāpakkheti lokiyābhiññāpakkhe. Lokuttarābhiññā hi avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padālitā. Potthakesu pana katthaci ‘‘chaabhiññāpakkhe’’ti likhanti, so apāṭhoti veditabbo. Jeṭṭho seṭṭhoti vuddhatamattā jeṭṭho, sabbaguṇehi uttamattā pasatthatamoti seṭṭho.
现在,为显示与“婆罗门,我确实已激发精进”等开示的衔接,而说“世尊这样”等语。其中,“从前行部分开始”,即从修行的加行精进策励开始。“心生起如是”,即依下文将述的思惟,心便如彼生起,这是其意。另也有写本作“心便生起”,那里意指心便生起,而非对世尊生起净信。“失念者”,即念已失坏者,意为无念者。“身有躁动”,即身有不安。“在菩提座”,即在那被称为菩提的智慧变得明净之处。由于“菩提”称为智慧,它在那里变得明净、清净,故彼处名为“菩提座”。“具足四支”,即如所说“纵使皮、筋、骨残留,身体之血肉干枯”的具足四支的精进。其中,皮是一支,筋是一支,骨是一支,肉血是一支,应如此了知。且“皮是一支”应理解为:对皮无所顾惜,此即一支。因为对于那些专修精进者,即使皮在毁坏,也不因此而生退转,这便是其精进的一支、一个原因。对其余支亦应如此理解其义。“已策励”,即不让策励松懈,以坚固精勤的奋发状态而把握。因此说“不松懈地运作”的意思。显示巴利原文
Idāni ‘‘āraddhaṃ kho pana me brāhmaṇa vīriya’’ntiādikāya desanāya anusandhiṃ dassento āha ‘‘evaṃ bhagavā’’tiādi. Tattha pubbabhāgato pabhutīti bhāvanāya pubbabhāgiyavīriyārambhādito paṭṭhāya. Cittamevamuppannanti evaṃ upari vakkhamānaparivitakkavasena cittamuppannanti attho. ‘‘Cittameva uppanna’’ntipi pāṭho, tattha cittameva uppannaṃ, na tāva bhagavati pasādoti attho. Muṭṭhassatināti vinaṭṭhassatinā, sativirahitenāti attho. Sāraddhakāyenāti sadarathakāyena. Bodhimaṇḍeti bodhisaṅkhātassa ñāṇassa maṇḍabhāvappatte ṭhāne. Bodhīti hi paññā vuccati, sā ettha maṇḍā pasannā jātāti so padeso ‘‘bodhimaṇḍo’’ti paññāto. Caturaṅgasamannāgatanti ‘‘kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu, sarīre upasussatu maṃsalohita’’nti (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 2.22; a. ni. 2.5; mahāni. 196) evaṃ vuttacaturaṅgasamannāgataṃ vīriyaṃ. Tattha tacoti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ nhāru ekaṃ aṅgaṃ aṭṭhi ekaṃ aṅgaṃ maṃsalohitaṃ ekaṃ aṅganti veditabbaṃ. Taco ekaṃ aṅganti ca tace nirapekkhabhāvo ekaṃ aṅganti gahetabbaṃ. Padhānaṃ anuyuñjantassa hi tace palujjamānepi taṃnimittaṃ avosānāpajjanaṃ tassa vīriyassa ekaṃ aṅgaṃ ekaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi attho veditabbo. Paggahitanti ārambhaṃ sithilaṃ akatvā daḷhaparakkamasaṅkhātussāhanabhāvena gahitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘asithilappavattitanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
“不松弛”即不蜷缩,未陷入由懈怠所生的收缩。“近住”即通过称为“沉浸”的不散乱状态,趋近所缘而安住。因此说“以面向所缘的状态”。“不忘失”即由于以摧毁忘失的方式而转起,故不忘失。虽然仅由心轻安而心轻安,仅由身轻安而身轻安,然而因为身轻安生起时与心轻安一同生起,非无关联,故说“由身心轻安”。由于身轻安能令两种身都轻安,故说“色身亦轻安”。那个身即那个身。“离不安”即离烦恼不安。因为当名身离不安时,色身亦成为止息不安与热恼。善安置:即断除于种种所缘中驰骋的散乱,通过令心于单一所缘中不散乱,而妥善地安置、安立。因此说“妥善地安立”等。心的不专一状态即由散乱而致的动摇,当有专一时此状态便不存在,故说“专一、不动、不摇”。至此,通过“已发起精进”等,显示了精进、念、轻安、定的作用成就。显示巴利原文
Asallīnanti asaṅkucitaṃ kosajjavasena saṅkocaṃ anāpannaṃ. Upaṭṭhitāti ogāhanasaṅkhātena apilāpabhāvena ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhitā. Tenāha ‘‘ārammaṇābhimukhībhāvenā’’ti. Sammosassa viddhaṃsanavasena pavattiyā na sammuṭṭhāti asammuṭṭhā. Kiñcāpi cittapassaddhivaseneva cittameva passaddhaṃ, kāyapassaddhivaseneva ca kāyo passaddho hoti, tathāpi yasmā kāyapassaddhi uppajjamānā cittapassaddhiyā saheva uppajjati, na vinā, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyacittapassaddhivasenā’’ti. Kāyapassaddhiyā ubhayesampi kāyānaṃ passambhanāvahattā vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpakāyopi passaddhoyeva hotī’’ti. So ca khoti so ca kho kāyo. Vigatadarathoti vigatakilesadaratho. Nāmakāye hi vigatadarathe rūpakāyopi vūpasantadarathapariḷāho hoti. Sammā āhitanti nānārammaṇesu vidhāvanasaṅkhātaṃ vikkhepaṃ vicchinditvā ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe avikkhittabhāvāpādanena sammadeva āhitaṃ ṭhapitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘suṭṭhu ṭhapita’’ntiādi. Cittassa anekaggabhāvo vikkhepavasena cañcalatā, sā sati ekaggatāya na hotīti āha ‘‘ekaggaṃ acalaṃ nipphandana’’nti. Ettāvatāti ‘‘āraddhaṃ kho panā’’tiādinā vīriyasatipassaddhisamādhīnaṃ kiccasiddhidassanena.
难道信与慧的作用成就,不应在禅那的前行道中被期望吗?确实应被期望,然而它由于非无间性的缘故,未被宣说而已成就,故未被单独列出。因为若无信,则精进的策励等根本不可能存在;若无慧的摄持,它们的如理策励等状态也不会存在;同样,不松弛、不忘失等属于精进等。因此,应知在此仅由不松弛等的列举,慧的作用成就已被包含。或者,为了显示在禅那修习中,定的作用更为主要而应被期望,故禅那的前行道以定作为结尾而被宣说,应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca saddhāpaññānampi kiccasiddhi jhānassa pubbapaṭipadāya icchitabbāti? Saccaṃ icchitabbā, sā pana nānantarikabhāvena avuttasiddhāti na gahitā. Asati hi saddhāya vīriyārambhādīnaṃ asambhavoyeva, paññāpariggahe ca nesaṃ asati ñāyārambhādibhāvo na siyā, tathā asallīnāsammosatādayo vīriyādīnanti asallīnatādiggahaṇenevettha paññākiccasiddhi gahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Jhānabhāvanāyaṃ vā samādhikiccaṃ adhikaṃ icchitabbanti dassetuṃ samādhipariyosānāva jhānassa pubbapaṭipadā kathitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
初禅那论显示巴利原文
Paṭhamajjhānakathā
现在,为了以注释书的方式解释“已离诸欲”等经文中——即使在《分别论》的禅那分别中也已说过的——义理,并显示未按《分别论》经文中所示方式宣说的原因,而说“虽然在那里,什么是欲”等。其中,以希求方式转起的微弱贪,因欲求之义而称为“欲”;比此更强的,因染著之义而称为“贪”;比此更强、更浓厚的贪,则称为“欲贪”。以它来思惟相与随相,故称为“思惟”,即如此转起的贪。其中,“相思惟”是指将各部分综合起来,如“女人、男人”等,总括为一,而对更高烦恼的生起之相所作的构想。“随相思惟”则是指如“手美、足美”那样,依随相而分别所作的构想。因为对于诸烦恼,这些部分是随逐地、分别地、明显地生起的缘,所以手、足等部分被称为“随相”。比此更强的,因染著之义而称为“贪”;比此更强、唯以思惟方式转起的,则称为“思惟贪”。应知这些差别,仅是就同一种贪的转起方式与阶段差别而说,如同“犊、幼牛、大牛”的譬喻。所谓“欲”,是指烦恼欲;令人欲求者,故为“欲”;或者,以此而欲求者,故为“欲”。显示巴利原文
Idāni ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādinayappavattāya pāḷiyā jhānavibhaṅge (vibha. 508) vuttampi atthaṃ aṭṭhakathānayeneva saṃvaṇṇetukāmo vibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ vuttanayena avacane kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kiñcāpi tattha katame kāmā’’tiādimāha . Tattha patthanākārena pavatto dubbalo lobho chandanaṭṭhena chando, tato balavā rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo, tatopi balavataro bahalarāgo chandarāgo. Nimittānubyañjanāni saṅkappeti etenāti saṅkappo, tathāpavatto lobho. Tattha nimittasaṅkappanā nāma avayave samodhānetvā ‘‘itthī puriso’’tiādinā ekajjhaṃ katvā uparūpari kilesuppattiyā nimittassa kappanā. Anubyañjanasaṅkappanā pana ‘‘hatthā sobhanā, pādā sobhanā’’ti evaṃ anubyañjanavasena vibhajitvā kappanāti. Kilesānañhi anu anu byañjanato paribyañjanato paribyattivasena uppattiyā paccayabhāvato anubyañjanaṃ hatthapādādiavayavā vuccanti. Tato balavā rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo, saṅkappavaseneva pavatto tatopi balavataro saṅkapparāgo. Svāyaṃ pabhedo ekasseva lobhassa pavattiākāravasena avatthābhedavasena ca veditabbo yathā ‘‘vaccho dammo balībaddo’’ti. Kāmāti kilesakāmā, kāmentīti kāmā, kāmenti etehīti vā.
“Seyyathidaṃ”的意思是“那是什么”或“那是如何”。“Viviccitvā”即成为分离,因此说“成为没有、离开”,即以舍断的方式离去的意思。在“vivicceva kāmehi”中,通过“viviccā”一词,仅说明了在禅那刹那诸欲的不存在状态。而通过“vivicceva”一词,则通过显示诸欲必定应被远离,表明了禅那与欲远离的对治关系,以及欲的舍断是证得禅那的方便。为了显示此义,在说了“初禅”等之后,为令该义更为明显,而说“如何”等。如黑暗中有灯:以此显示,如同在没有灯的夜晚,黑暗被征服;同样,在没有禅那时,心相续中的欲便会被征服。显示巴利原文
Seyyathidanti imassa taṃ katamaṃ, taṃ kathanti vā attho. Viviccitvāti visuṃ hutvā. Tenāha ‘‘vinā hutvā apasakkitvā’’ti, pajahanavasena apakkamitvāti attho. Vivicceva kāmehīti ettha viviccāti iminā vivecanaṃ jhānakkhaṇe kāmānaṃ abhāvamattaṃ vuttaṃ. Viviccevāti pana iminā ekaṃsato kāmānaṃ vivecetabbatādīpanena tappaṭipakkhatā jhānassa kāmavivekappahānassa ca jhānādhigamūpāyatā dassitā hotīti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭhamajjhāna’’ntiādiṃ vatvā tamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Andhakāre sati padīpo viyāti etena yathā padīpābhāvena rattiyaṃ andhakārābhibhavo, evaṃ jhānābhāvena cittasantatiyaṃ kāmābhibhavoti dasseti.
“Etaṃ”仅是对前句的简别语,但不应视为“唯从诸欲”这样的简别,因为并未构成“kāmehi eva”的简别。“Tannissaraṇato”:出离、由此而出、或于此而出,称为“出离”。谁出离?诸欲。那些欲的出离、舍断,即是“彼出离”,由此,意为“从欲出离”。然而,在同样都是镇伏的情况下,为何这仅是诸欲的出离,而非嗔恚等的出离?为了以正理与圣教成立此说,而说“欲界”等。其中,“超越欲界”是因为不存在超越整个欲有的行道,以此说明此禅那具有遍知欲的情况。“对治欲贪”是因为对于以“欲求为欲”等所说分类的烦恼欲,它是敌对者,以此显示:如同慈对治嗔恚,悲对治害,此禅那直接成为欲贪的正对治。在此,应知超越欲界是通过其果报,而于其自身转起刹那的对治欲贪性则是通过其自身。如此,由于此禅那在自身转起与果报转起中,都具有从欲贪、从欲界回转的本质,故特别地只是诸欲的出离。此义已由经文而得,故说“如所说”等。“出离”指初禅。显示巴利原文
Etanti pubbapadeyeva avadhāraṇavacanaṃ, na kho pana evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘kāmehi evā’’ti avadhāraṇassa akatattā. Tannissaraṇatoti nissaranti niggacchanti etena, ettha vāti nissaraṇaṃ. Ke niggacchanti? Kāmā. Tesaṃ kāmānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ pahānaṃ tannissaraṇaṃ, tato kāmanissaraṇatoti attho. Kathaṃ pana samāne vikkhambhane kāmānamevetaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, na byāpādādīnanti codanaṃ yuttito āgamato ca sādhetuṃ ‘‘kāmadhātū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kāmadhātusamatikkamanatoti sakalassapi kāmabhavassa samatikkamapaṭipadābhāvato. Tena imassa jhānassa kāmapariññābhāvamāha . Kāmarāgapaṭipakkhatoti ‘‘chando kāmo’’tiādinā (mahāni. 1) vuttavibhāgassa kilesakāmassa paccatthikabhāvato. Tena yathā mettā byāpādassa, karuṇā vihiṃsāya, evamidaṃ jhānaṃ kāmarāgassa ujuvipaccanīkabhūtanti dasseti. Vipākena cettha kāmadhātusamatikkamo attano pavattikkhaṇe kāmarāgapaṭipakkhatā ca veditabbā. Evamattano pavattiyā vipākappavattiyā ca kāmarāgato kāmadhātuto ca vinivattasabhāvattā idaṃ jhānaṃ visesato kāmānameva nissaraṇaṃ, svāyamattho pāṭhāgato evāti āha ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi. Nekkhammanti paṭhamajjhānaṃ.
虽为阐明此义,前句已取简别,然为令义理成立,后句亦应取简别,故说“于后句亦”等言。“从此”者,谓从欲贪。“应见此理”者,谓应见此决定。“以共通之语”者,即与一切远离共通而说。彼分远离、镇伏远离、正断远离、安息远离、出离远离,是为彼分远离等;身远离、心远离、依远离,是为身远离等。然于此禅那论中,唯此三种应见,因正断远离等于此不成故。“于释义中”者,指大释义中。彼处先以摄颂总摄:“有二种欲:事欲与烦恼欲”,随后解释事欲:“云何事欲?可爱之色……乃至……可爱之触”等。彼事欲由可欲求而得“欲”名。“即于彼处”者,即于彼释义中。“于分别中”者,即于禅那分别中。若如是,即总摄二种欲时,“从事欲也离”之义亦得成立,如是则pi字应解为合理之他义合集义,而非烦恼欲之合集义。何以故?因此处第二句已说离烦恼欲故。是故由事欲远离,即已说身远离;因显示舍离子女、妻妾等执着,故身远离已得成立。显示巴利原文
Kāmañcettha tamatthaṃ dīpetuṃ purimapadeyeva avadhāraṇaṃ gahitaṃ, uttarapadepi pana taṃ gahetabbameva tathā atthasambhavatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘uttarapadepī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Itoti kāmacchandato. Esa daṭṭhabboti esa niyamo daṭṭhabbo. Sādhāraṇavacanenāti sabbavivekasādhāraṇavacanena. Tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavivekā tadaṅgavivekādayo. Kāyacittaupadhivivekā kāyavivekādayo. Tayo eva idha daṭṭhabbāti tayo eva idha jhānakathāyaṃ daṭṭhabbā samucchedavivekādīnaṃ asambhavato. Niddeseti mahāniddese (mahāni. 1). Tattha hi ‘‘uddānato dve kāmā vatthukāmā kilesakāmā cā’’ti uddisitvā tattha ‘‘katame vatthukāmā manāpiyā rūpā…pe… manāpiyā phoṭṭhabbā’’tiādinā vatthukāmā niddiṭṭhā. Te pana kāmīyantīti kāmāti veditabbā. Tatthevāti niddeseyeva. Vibhaṅgeti jhānavibhaṅge. Evañhi satīti evaṃ ubhayesampi kāmānaṃ saṅgahe sati. Vatthukāmehipīti vatthukāmehi viviccevātipi attho yujjatīti evaṃ yujjamānatthantarasamuccayattho pi-saddo, na kilesakāmasamuccayattho. Kasmā? Imasmiṃ atthe kilesakāmehi vivekassa dutiyapadena vuttattā. Tenāti vatthukāmavivekena. Kāyaviveko vutto hotīti puttadārādipariggahavivekadīpanato kāyaviveko vutto hoti.
“先前者”,谓身远离。“此处”者,即“离欲、离不善法”此二句。若依前句简别二种远离,则“不善”之声或指烦恼欲,或总摄一切不善法;不论如何,皆已说离烦恼欲,故言“以后句说离烦恼欲”。而“后句”即指心远离。前句亦与心远离之义相应,故如是说。断贪之根,即断痴、恶见等不善心,是为断一切烦恼之法。欲为诸欲之缘,令执取生起;为遮止恶业,此修习有其根本作用。断烦恼已,心得清净,安住善法,此即名为念修习,故说此修习能净化心。由此显示所谓“断烦恼”之禅定。显示巴利原文
Purimenāti kāyavivekena. Etthāti ‘‘vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehī’’ti etasmiṃ padadvaye. Ito vā niddhārite vivekadvaye, akusalasaddena yadi kilesakāmā, sabbākusalāpi vā gahitā, sabbathā kilesakāmehi viveko vuttoti āha ‘‘dutiyena kilesakāmehi vivekavacanato’’ti. Dutiyenāti ca cittavivekenāti attho. Etesanti yathāvuttānaṃ dvinnaṃ padānaṃ. Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Taṇhādisaṃkilesānaṃ vatthuno pahānaṃ saṃkilesavatthuppahānaṃ. Lolabhāvo nāma tattha tattha rūpādīsu taṇhuppādo, tassa hetū vatthukāmā eva veditabbā. Bālabhāvassa hetupariccāgoti sambandho. Bālabhāvo nāma avijjā, ducintitacintitādi vā, tassa ayonisomanasikāro, sabbepi vā akusalā dhammā hetū. Kāmaguṇādhigamahetu pāṇātipātādiasuddhappayogo hotīti tabbivekena payogasuddhi vibhāvitā. Taṇhāsaṃkilesasodhanena vivaṭṭūpanissayasaṃvaḍḍhanena ca ajjhāsayavisodhanaṃ āsayaposanaṃ. Āsayaposananti ca jhānabhāvanāya paccayabhūtā pubbayogādivasena siddhā ajjhāsayasampadā , sā pana taṇhupatāpavigamena hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘taṇhāsaṃkilesavisodhanenā’’ti. Kāmesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.
“多种”者,谓依欲漏、欲贪结等,及依色界渴爱等,而有种种差别。“欲贪”即是欲之本质,既非意欲之欲,亦非善法欲。“亦摄于不善中”者,谓“离不善法”中所说之不善法亦摄此。因是禅那之对治故,依厌离与弃舍恶贪之力,而舍烦恼。由欲贪有多异,故说“多种”。他者,如无惭、无愧者,因愚昧无惧而依止烦恼边之旧习,故生起触。“念遍及对治”者,谓正念与正知为助伴,能断诸魔之扰。安立“念”与“无念”二途,以显对治因缘所生法之正息。故说彼“对治”等禅定境界得以安立。显示巴利原文
Anekabhedoti kāmāsavakāmarāgasaṃyojanādivasena rūpataṇhādivasena ca anekappabhedo. Kāmacchandoyevāti kāmasabhāvoyeva chando, na kattukamyatāchando napi kusalacchandoti adhippāyo. Akusalapariyāpannopīti ‘‘vivicca akusalehī’’ti ettha vuttaakusalesu antogadhopi. Jhānapaṭipakkhatoti jhānassa paṭipakkhabhāvato taṃhetu taṃnimittaṃ visuṃ vutto, akusalabhāvasāmaññena aggahetvā visuṃ sarūpena gahito. Yadi kilesakāmova purimapade vutto, taṃ kathaṃ bahuvacananti āha ‘‘anekabhedato’’tiādi. Aññesampīti diṭṭhimānaahirikānottappādīnaṃ taṃsahitaphassādīnañca. Uparijhānaṅgapaccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanatoti ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’ntiādinā upari vuccamānāni jhānaṅgāni uparijhānaṅgāni, tesaṃ attano paccanīkānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvadassanato tappaccanīkanīvaraṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Uparijhānaṅgānaṃ paccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanato’’tipi pāṭho. Tattha paccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanatoti upari vuccamānajhānaṅgānaṃ ujuvipaccanīkavasena paṭipakkhabhāvadassanatoti atthaṃ vadanti. Jhānaṅgapaccanīkānīti jhānaṅgānaṃ pavattinivāraṇato jhānaṅgapaccanīkāni. Viddhaṃsakānīti vighātakāni. Samādhi kāmacchandassapaṭipakkhoti rāgapaṇidhiyā ujuvipaccanīkabhāvato nānārammaṇehi palobhitassa paribbhamantassa cittassa samādhānato kāmacchandassa samādhi paṭipakkho. Pīti byāpādassāti pāmojjena samānayogakkhemattā byāpādassa pīti paṭipakkhā. Vitakko thinamiddhassāti yoniso saṅkappanavasena savipphārappavattito vitakko thinamiddhassa paṭipakkho. Sukhaṃ uddhaccakukkuccassāti sukhaṃ vūpasantasītalasabhāvattā avūpasamānutāpasabhāvassa uddhaccakukkuccassa paṭipakkhaṃ. Vicāro vicikicchāyāti vicāro ārammaṇe anumajjanavasena paññāpatirūpasabhāvattā vicikicchāya paṭipakkho. Mahākaccānattherena desitā piṭakānaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā peṭakaṃ, tasmiṃ peṭake.
所谓“五欲根本差别”的所缘,即是从慢等烦恼对五种欲功德的破坏所作的分别,以及通过对“他做无益于我”等嗔怒事所作的分别观察,来辨明嗔、痴与昏沉睡眠等。烦恼的对治则表现为对嗔恚等的转化与破除,因此称为“烦恼的镇伏”。这种对治实则基于对所缘的觉知与正念的力量。通过对贪、嗔等烦恼障的对治,能除遣诸恶,这便是善法的基础。因此,禅定的正行体现在断除欲贪的修习,以及烦恼被转化的表现。由此可知,修行者本质上是处于烦恼已断的状态,从所说的所缘中可以了知。显示巴利原文
Pañcakāmaguṇabhedavisayassāti rūpādipañcakāmaguṇavisesavisayassa. Āghātavatthubhedādivisayānanti byāpādavivekavacanena ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādiāghātavatthubhedavisayassa dosassa, mohādhikehi thinamiddhādīhi vivekavacanena paṭicchādanavasena dukkhādipubbantādibhedavisayassa mohassa vikkhambhanaviveko vutto. Kāmarāgabyāpādatadekaṭṭhathinamiddhādivikkhambhakañcetaṃ sabbākusalapaṭipakkhasabhāvattā sabbakusalānaṃ, tena sabhāvena sabbākusalappahāyakaṃ hontampi kāmarāgādivikkhambhanasabhāvameva hoti taṃsabhāvattāti avisesetvā nīvaraṇākusalamūlādīnaṃ vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hotīti āha.
对于依缘而转起的自性法,并无任何自主性,因此为了遮止“自主”之说,而说“思维即寻”。所谓“思维”,即是思维的作用,而这只是寻依自己的缘而转起而已,故对状态的说明是为了遮止自主性的主张。此思维即是对所缘作出“是这样”的构想,因此说“即称为推度”。因为心依寻的力量而如同登上所缘,所以说它具备安置于所缘的特相。正如有人依靠国王的宠臣、亲属或朋友而登上、进入王宫,同样地,心依靠寻而登上所缘。既然如此,无寻的心如何登上所缘?正是依靠寻的力量。正如那人由于熟悉,即使没有他的帮助也能毫无疑虑地进入王宫,同样地,由于熟悉,即使没有寻,无寻的心也能登上所缘。所谓“由于熟悉”,是指在相续中持续转起的、称为“寻修习”的熟悉。因为寻在相续中频繁转起的力量,心登上所缘已长久熟悉,因此它有时即使没有寻,也在那里转起。正如与智俱行、以思惟方式长久熟悉者,有时即使没有智,也以思惟方式转起;又如与烦恼俱行而转起者,即使全无烦恼,也由于熟悉而以烦恼习气的方式转起。应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Yathāpaccayaṃ pavattamānānaṃ sabhāvadhammānaṃ natthi kāci vasavattitāti vasavattibhāvanivāraṇatthaṃ ‘‘vitakkanaṃ vitakko’’ti vuttaṃ. Vitakkananti hi vitakkanakiriyā, sā ca vitakkassa attano paccayehi pavattimattamevāti bhāvaniddeso vasavattibhāvanivāraṇāya hoti. Tayidaṃ vitakkanaṃ ‘‘īdisamida’’nti ārammaṇaparikappananti āha ‘‘ūhananti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Yasmā cittaṃ vitakkabalena ārammaṇaṃ abhiniruḷhaṃ viya hoti, tasmā so ārammaṇābhiniropanalakkhaṇo vutto. Yathā hi koci rājavallabhaṃ ñātiṃ vā mittaṃ vā nissāya rājagehaṃ ārohati anupavisati, evaṃ vitakkaṃ nissāya cittaṃ ārammaṇaṃ ārohati. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ avitakkaṃ cittaṃ ārammaṇaṃ ārohatīti? Vitakkabaleneva. Yathā hi so puriso paricayena tena vināpi nirāsaṅko rājagehaṃ pavisati, evaṃ paricayena vitakkena vināpi avitakkaṃ cittaṃ ārammaṇaṃ ārohati. Paricayenāti ca santāne pavattavitakkabhāvanāsaṅkhātena paricayena. Vitakkassa hi santāne abhiṇhaṃ pavattassa vasena cittassa ārammaṇābhiruhanaṃ ciraparicitaṃ, tena taṃ kadāci vitakkena vināpi tattha pavattateva. Yathā taṃ ñāṇasahitaṃ hutvā sammasanavasena ciraparicitaṃ kadāci ñāṇarahitampi sammasanavasena pavattati, yathā vā kilesasahitaṃ hutvā pavattaṃ sabbaso kilesarahitampi paricayena kilesavāsanāvasena pavattati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“击打与遍击的作用”:从最初或对面进行的击打称为“击打”;周遍或翻转后进行的击打称为“遍击”。应当了知,寻以击打与遍击的方式转起,犹如敲击时喊着“色、色”“地、地”一般。因为寻在将心安置于某个所缘时,令该所缘适于执取,如同敲击。既然如此,那先长老为何说“寻有敲击的特相。大王,如击鼓后,随后回响、发出随响,大王,如此,应如敲击般看待寻,随后如回响、随响般看待伺”?这并无矛盾。因为长老是依作用而说特相。诸法并没有脱离自性之外的任何作用,但有应当如此把握的方式。然而,为了顺应所应调教的众生,即使是胜义上同一的自性法,也会以多种方式、如同假立的形式,用同义语来阐明。如此,它才被善巧地阐明。“引近的现起”:此处“引近”是指将所缘引近于心,或拉近。显示巴利原文
Āhananapariyāhananarasoti ādito, abhimukhaṃ vā hananaṃ āhananaṃ. Parito, parivattitvā vā āhananaṃ pariyāhananaṃ. ‘‘Rūpaṃ rūpaṃ, pathavī pathavī’’ti ākoṭentassa viya pavatti āhananaṃ pariyāhanananti ca veditabbaṃ. Yasmiñhi ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropeti, taṃ tassa gahaṇayogyaṃ karonto vitakko ākoṭento viya hoti. Yadi evaṃ nāgasenattherena ‘‘ākoṭanalakkhaṇo vitakko. Yathā, mahārāja, bherī ākoṭitā atha pacchā anuravati anusaddāyati, evameva kho, mahārāja, yathā ākoṭanā, evaṃ vitakko daṭṭhabbo. Atha pacchā anuravanā anusaddanā, evaṃ vicāro daṭṭhabbo’’ti ākoṭanalakkhaṇatā vitakkassa kasmā vuttā? Nāyaṃ virodho. Therena hi kiccasannissitaṃ katvā lakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Dhammānañhi sabhāvavinimuttā kāci kiriyā nāma natthi tathā gahetabbākāro ca. Bodhaneyyajanānurodhena pana paramatthato ekībhāvopi sabhāvadhammo pariyāyavacanehi viya samāropitarūpehi bahūhi pakārehi pakāsīyati. Evañhi so suṭṭhu pakāsito hoti. Ānayanapaccupaṭṭhānoti ettha ānayanaṃ citte ārammaṇassa upanayanaṃ, ākaḍḍhanaṃ vā.
“随行、随转”:应知,此一差别唯有在相续中可得时,方才显现于相续中。于其余诸处,同理亦然。“随触”:即心于所缘的随触,意为遍触。正如所说:“伺如遍触之手,如移动之手。”“于彼”:即于所缘。对俱生法的策励,应知即是依于所缘随行、名为随触的方式。“随续”:心于所缘犹如无间断地转起。因此,它被称为“随续性”。也正因此,说“如钟的回响,如旋转”。“某处”:指初禅以及小心生起之时。“以粗的意义”:即比伺更粗的意义。如同撞钟声是初次撞击,同样地,以面向所缘而加安置的意义,寻犹如心的初次撞击,故说“如撞钟声”等。“有震荡”:此处“震荡”是寻对治昏沉睡眠,于所缘不退缩、不收缩,然而因其安置的状态而犹如动摇,依此意趣,说为“心的散动状态”。“如旋转”:此处应知,是为了审察无有危险而旋转。在《双论注》中——显示巴利原文
Anusañcaraṇaṃ anuparibbhamanaṃ. Svāyaṃ viseso santānamhi labbhamāno eva santāne pākaṭo hotīti daṭṭhabbo. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Anumajjananti ārammaṇe cittassa anumasanaṃ, parimajjananti attho. Tathā hi ‘‘vicāro parimajjanahattho viya sañcaraṇahattho viyā’’ti ca vutto. Tatthāti ārammaṇe. Sahajātānaṃ anuyojanaṃ ārammaṇe anuvicaraṇasaṅkhātaanumajjanavaseneva veditabbaṃ. Anuppabandhanaṃ ārammaṇe cittassa avicchinnassa viya pavatti. Tathā hi so ‘‘anuppabandhanatā’’ti niddiṭṭho. Teneva ca ‘‘ghaṇṭānuravo viya, paribbhamanaṃ viyā’’ti ca vutto. Katthacīti paṭhamajjhāne parittacittuppādesu ca. Oḷārikaṭṭhenāti vicārato oḷārikaṭṭhena. Yathā ghaṇṭābhighātasaddo paṭhamābhinipāto hoti, evaṃ ārammaṇābhimukhaniropanaṭṭhena vitakko cetaso paṭhamābhinipāto viya hotīti āha ‘‘ghaṇṭābhighātasaddo viyā’’tiādi. Vipphāravāti ettha vipphāro nāma vitakkassa thinamiddhapaṭipakkho ārammaṇe anolīnatā asaṅkoco, so pana abhiniropanabhāvena calanaṃ viya hotīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘paripphandanabhāvo cittassā’’ti. Paribbhamanaṃ viyāti ettha parissayābhāvavīmaṃsanatthaṃ paribbhamananti veditabbaṃ. Dukanipātaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
“犹如在空中飞行的大鸟,以双翼攫取风后,收拢双翼而滑翔,如是依心于所缘的安置状态而转起者为寻;犹如为了攫取风而扇动双翼飞行,如是依随触的状态而转起者为伺。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ākāse gacchato mahāsakuṇassa ubhohi pakkhehi vātaṃ gahetvā pakkhe sannisīdāpetvā gamanaṃ viya ārammaṇe cetaso abhiniropanabhāvena pavatto vitakko, vātaggahaṇatthaṃ pakkhe phandāpayamānassa gamanaṃ viya anumajjanabhāvena pavatto vicāro’’ti –
此说适用于以随续而转起的情形。因为在近行或安止中,当以相续转起时,寻变得安定,宛如进入所缘后而转起,并非在初次撞击时明显。正如对于未曾有过的所缘,作为初次撞击的寻是有震荡的,而在同一所缘上以无间随续的方式转起时则不然,在那里由于收摄的状态,并无太大的震荡。“在初禅与第二禅中明显”:寻的差别即安置的方式,因其粗而在初禅中明显;由于无此,在五法中的第二禅,伺的差别即随触的方式明显。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ, taṃ anuppabandhanena pavattiyaṃ yujjati. Tathā hi upacāre vā appanāyaṃ vā santānena pavattiyaṃ vitakko niccalo hutvā ārammaṇaṃ anupavisitvā viya pavattati, na paṭhamābhinipāte pākaṭo hoti. Yathā hi apubbārammaṇe paṭhamābhinipātabhūto vitakko vipphāravā hoti, na tathā ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe nirantaraṃ anuppabandhavasena pavattiyaṃ, nātivipphāravā pana tattha hoti sannisinnabhāvato. Paṭhamadutiyajjhānesu pākaṭo hotīti vitakkassa viseso abhiniropanākāro oḷārikattā paṭhamajjhāne pākaṭo hoti, tadabhāvato pañcakanaye dutiyajjhāne vicārassa viseso anumajjanākāro pākaṭo hoti.
此处另有譬喻:譬如有人一手紧握沾有污垢的铜器,另一手以沾着粉、油、羊毛等的布团擦拭——紧握之手如同寻,擦拭之手如同伺。又如陶师以棍棒击转轮而制器时,压紧泥团之手如同寻,同一只手来回移动如同伺。又如于铜器等上画圆形或圆圈时,固定于中心的针如同安立的寻,在外旋转的针如同随触的伺,应当如此了知。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha aparo nayo – malaggahitaṃ kaṃsabhājanaṃ ekena hatthena daḷhaṃ gahetvā itarena hatthena cuṇṇatelaeḷakalomādikatacumbaṭakena parimajjantassa daḷhaṃ gahaṇahattho viya vitakko, parimajjanahattho viya vicāro. Tathā kumbhakārassa daṇḍappahārena cakkaṃ bhamayitvā bhājanaṃ karontassa piṇḍassa uppīḷanahattho viya vitakko, tasseva ito cito ca sañcaraṇahattho viya vicāro. Tathā kaṃsabhājanādīsu kiñci maṇḍalaṃ vaṭṭalekhaṃ karontassa majjhe sannirumbhitvā ṭhitakaṇṭako viya abhiniropano vitakko, bahi paribbhamanakaṇṭako viya anumajjano vicāroti veditabbaṃ.
如同离开了花、果、枝等部分,树虽不可得,仍可称为‘有花有果’;同样,为了显示离开了寻等支、禅那虽不可得,仍可称为‘有寻有伺’,故说‘如树’等。而在《分别论》等中,由于应依人而说修禅,故以‘此处比丘离诸欲……’(《分别论》508)依补特伽罗增上而列举诸禅。虽然《分别论》中依补特伽罗增上而作教说,但其义趣亦应如这里以‘以此寻’等依法而说那样来理解,因为就胜义而言,补特伽罗并不存在,这是其意旨。或者说,通过显示具禅者的寻伺具足,而说禅那本身的有寻有伺性,故说‘然而其义趣在那里亦应如此理解’。显示巴利原文
Yathā pupphaphalasākhādiavayavavinimutto avijjamānopi rukkho ‘‘sapuppho saphalo’’ti voharīyati, evaṃ vitakkādiaṅgavinimuttaṃ avijjamānampi jhānaṃ ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’nti voharīyatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘rukkho viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vibhaṅge panātiādīsu jhānabhāvanāya puggalavasena desetabbattā ‘‘idha bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādinā (vibha. 508) puggalādhiṭṭhānena jhānāni uddiṭṭhānīti. Yadipi vibhaṅge puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā katā, attho pana tatrāpi vibhaṅgepi yathā idha ‘‘iminā ca vitakkenā’’tiādinā dhammavasena vutto, evameva daṭṭhabbo, paramatthato puggalasseva abhāvatoti adhippāyo. Atha vā jhānasamaṅgino vitakkavicārasamaṅgitādassanena jhānasseva savitakkasavicāratā vuttāti āha ‘‘attho pana tatrāpi evameva daṭṭhabbo’’ti.
就‘离’(viveka)一词的依主释(bhāvasādhana),说‘因此从离……’。此处的从格是表因义,意为‘以离为因’。就‘离’一词的依作者释(kattusādhana)或依业释(kammasādhana),说‘或于彼离中’。因为‘已离’(vivitto)一词,既指‘已离诸盖’,也指‘被他们所离’,故包含了两种释法。‘令喜悦’(pinayati)意为令满足或令增长。‘遍喜相’(sampiyāyanalakkhaṇā)即令遍悦意之相。‘喜满味’(pīnanarasā)即令充盛之味。‘遍满味’(pharaṇarasā)即以殊胜色法遍满身体之味。‘昂扬状态’(udaggabhāvo)即庆悦(odagyaṃ)。‘令乐’(sukhayatīti sukhaṃ)意为令自己及相应诸法获得滋味,即令享受。此处的作者说(kattuniddeso)是依迂回方式所得,旨在遮止其他作者,而依直接方式则唯得依主释,故说‘乐性即乐’(sukhanaṃ sukhaṃ)。‘乐相’(sātalakkhaṇaṃ)显示巴利原文
Vivekasaddassa bhāvasādhanataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tasmā vivekā’’ti. Hetuatthe cetaṃ nissakkavacanaṃ, tasmā vivekā hetubhūtāti attho. Vivekasaddassa kattusādhanataṃ kammasādhanataṃ vā sandhāyāha ‘‘tasmiṃ vā viveke’’ti. ‘‘Vivitto’’ti hi iminā nīvaraṇehi vinābhūto tehi vivecitoti ca sādhanadvayampi saṅgahitamevāti. Pinayatīti tappeti vaḍḍheti vā. Sampiyāyanalakkhaṇāti paritussanalakkhaṇā. Pīnanarasāti paribrūhanarasā. Pharaṇarasāti paṇītarūpehi kāyassa byāpanarasā. Udaggabhāvo odagyaṃ. Sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, attanā sampayuttadhamme laddhassāde karotīti attho. Svāyaṃ kattuniddeso pariyāyaladdho dhammato aññassa kattunivattanattho, nippariyāyena pana bhāvasādhanameva labbhatīti ‘‘sukhanaṃ sukha’’nti vuttaṃ. Sātalakkhaṇanti iṭṭhasabhāvattā taṃsamaṅgīpuggalaṃ, sampayuttadhamme vā attani sādayatīti sātaṃ da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā. Sātaṃ madhuranti vadanti, sātaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti sātalakkhaṇaṃ. Upabrūhanarasantiādīsu upabrūhanaṃ sampayuttadhammānaṃ saṃvaddhanaṃ, dukkhaṃ viya avissajjetvā adukkhamasukhā viya anajjhupekkhitvā anu anu gaṇhanaṃ upakāritā vā anuggaho. Katthacīti paṭhamajjhānādike. Paṭilābhatuṭṭhīti paṭilābhavasena uppajjanakatuṭṭhi. Paṭiladdharasānubhavananti paṭiladdhassa ārammaṇarasassa anubhavanaṃ. Etena pītisukhāni sabhāvato vibhajitvā dassitāni. Yattha pīti, tattha sukhanti vitakkassa viya vicārena pītiyā sukhena accantasaṃyogamāha. Yattha sukhaṃ, tattha na niyamato pītīti vicārassa viya vitakkena, sukhassa pītiyā anaccantasaṃyogaṃ. Tena accantānaccantasaṃyogitāya pītisukhānaṃ visesaṃ dasseti.
“何者令人渡过水?”——此即旷野,指无水的荒漠。林即是林野。如同在林荫、入水、用水等方面所感受的快乐:譬如有人行于大旷野路,为暑热所逼,焦渴难耐,途中见人便问:“何处有水?”那人回答:“越过森林,有一处自然湖丛林,到那里便可得到。”此人闻语即欢喜踊跃;继而前行,见地上散落着莲瓣、莲茎、莲叶等,便更加欢喜踊跃;又继续前行,见到衣湿发湿之人,听到林鸡、孔雀等鸣声,望见自然湖边际如宝石网般的青翠丛林,见到湖中所生的青莲、红莲、白莲,也见到清澈明净之水;他愈发欢喜踊跃,进入自然湖,随意沐浴、饮水,止息疲劳,食用藕、莲根、莲茎等,佩戴青莲等,将柔软花鬘之根挂在肩上,上岸,穿好下衣,将浴衣晒于日光下,在清凉树荫下、微风徐徐吹拂之处躺卧,说道:“啊,乐啊!啊,乐啊!”——应知此喻如此。此人从听闻自然湖丛林所在,直到见水为止的那段欢喜踊跃的时分,犹如在前分所缘中欢喜踊跃相的喜;沐浴、饮水后,在清凉树荫下、微风吹拂之处,说着“啊,乐啊!啊,乐啊!”而躺卧的时分,犹如已得强力、住于品味所缘味之相的乐。显示巴利原文
Kaṃ udakaṃ tārenti etthāti kantāraṃ, nirudakamaruṭṭhānaṃ. Vanameva vanantaṃ. Vanacchāyappavesanaudakaparibhogesu viya sukhanti yathā hi puriso mahākantāramaggaṃ paṭipanno ghammapareto tasito pipāsito paṭipathe purisaṃ disvā ‘‘kattha pānīyaṃ atthī’’ti puccheyya, so ‘‘aṭaviṃ uttaritvāva jātassaravanasaṇḍo atthi, tattha gantvā labhissasī’’ti vadeyya, so tassa kathaṃ sutvāva haṭṭhapahaṭṭho bhaveyya, tato gacchanto bhūmiyaṃ patitāni uppaladalanāḷapattādīni disvā suṭṭhutaraṃ haṭṭhapahaṭṭho hutvā gacchanto allavatthe allakese purise passeyya, vanakukkuṭavanamorādīnaṃ saddaṃ suṇeyya, jātassarapariyante jātamaṇijālasadisaṃ nīlavanasaṇḍaṃ passeyya, sare jātāni uppalapadumakumudāni passeyya, acchaṃ vippasannaṃ udakampi passeyya, so bhiyyo bhiyyo haṭṭhapahaṭṭho hutvā jātassaraṃ otaritvā yathāruci nhatvā ca pivitvā ca passaddhadaratho bhisamuḷālapokkharādīni khāditvā nīluppalādīni piḷandhitvā mandālavamūlāni khandhe khipitvā uttaritvā sāṭakaṃ nivāsetvā udakasāṭakaṃ ātape katvā sītacchāyāya mandamande vāte paharante nipannova ‘‘aho sukhaṃ aho sukha’’nti vadeyya, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tassa hi purisassa jātassaravanasaṇḍasavanato paṭṭhāya yāva udakadassanā haṭṭhapahaṭṭhakālo viya pubbabhāgārammaṇe haṭṭhapahaṭṭhākārā pīti, nhāyitvā ca pivitvā ca sītacchāyāya mandamande vāte paharante ‘‘aho sukhaṃ aho sukha’’nti vadanto nipannakālo viya balappattaṃ ārammaṇarasānubhavanākārasaṇṭhitaṃ sukhaṃ.
“于彼彼时”:指在获得可意所缘时、在体验已得之味时、在听闻及看见林荫等时、在受用时。“由明显性故”:指喜与乐依次第而显著之故。“离生喜乐”——此处,于前面的意义中,“离生”指禅那。又由“喜乐”一词,以及此禅那有义与义差别故,或者于此禅那中,应见一“a”字,如“arisaso”(无病者)。于第二禅,唯喜乐是离生,而“离生喜乐”是依他词义复合,且未省略自指称;若省略,则读作“vivekajapītisukhaṃ”,这是差别。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samayeti iṭṭhārammaṇassa paṭilābhasamaye paṭiladdhassa rasānubhavanasamaye vanacchāyādīnaṃ savanadassanasamaye paribhogasamaye ca. Pākaṭabhāvatoti yathākkamaṃ pītisukhānaṃ vibhūtabhāvato. Vivekajaṃpītisukhanti ettha purimasmiṃ atthe vivekajanti jhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Pītisukhasaddato ca atthiatthavisesavato assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāneti ettha akāro daṭṭhabbo yathā arisasoti. Dutiye pītisukhameva vivekajaṃ, vivekajaṃpītisukhanti ca aññapadatthasamāso paccattaniddesassa ca alopo kato, lope vā sati ‘‘vivekajapītisukha’’nti pāṭhoti ayaṃ viseso.
“按次第顺序而初”——以此指示说法的次第。也有读作“次第顺序为初”的,其义也是“以次第顺序”,或者“仅是次第顺序,此语即称为初”。然而,“最初证入故为初”——这并非绝对的定义。因为已得自在者证得八等至时,既能从最初开始渐次达到顶点而证入,也能从顶点开始渐次达到最初而证入,还能中间跳跃而证入。因此,依“先前生起”之义,最初生起的也称为初。正因如此,《清净道论》中仅说:“次第顺序为初,最初生起亦为初”。“燃烧”:指燃烧敌对法,即燃烧诸盖等敌对法,是以镇伏的方式断除之义。“行处”:指遍等所缘。“彼”:指彼行处。“近观”:指观察。“与近行俱”:指与近行定一起。“以遍所缘近观故”:指如以眼观色般,近观地遍等自己的所缘。“以相为近观故”:指如理近观无常等三相及涅槃界的真实相。因此说“于此”等。由于断除常等颠倒,道无迷惑地近观无常等相,故称为“相之近观”,并说“观之近观作用”等。“真实相”:指涅槃具有不坏之法、无变异之性,因此是无颠倒的自性,即真实相;或者,道也以涅槃为所缘,故应联系为“真实相之近观”。显示巴利原文
Gaṇanānupubbato paṭhamanti iminā desanākkamaṃ ulliṅgeti. ‘‘Gaṇanānupubbatā paṭhama’’ntipi pāṭho, tatthāpi gaṇanānupubbatāyāti attho, gaṇanānupubbatāmattaṃ vā paṭhamanti idaṃ vacananti attho. Paṭhamaṃ samāpajjatīti paṭhamanti idaṃ pana na ekantalakkhaṇaṃ. Ciṇṇavasībhāvo hi aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī ādito paṭṭhāya matthakaṃ pāpentopi samāpajjituṃ sakkoti, matthakato paṭṭhāya ādiṃ pāpentopi samāpajjituṃ sakkoti, antarantarā okkamantopi sakkoti. Evaṃ pubbuppattiyaṭṭhena pana paṭhamaṃ uppannantipi paṭhamaṃ. Teneva visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.75) ‘‘gaṇanānupubbatā paṭhamaṃ, paṭhamaṃ uppannantipi paṭhama’’nti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Paccanīkadhamme jhāpetīti nīvaraṇādipaccanīkadhamme dahati, vikkhambhanavasena pajahatīti attho. Gocaranti kasiṇādiālambanaṃ. Tanti taṃ gocaraṃ. Upanijjhāyatīti passati. Saha upacārenāti saddhiṃ upacārajjhānena. Kasiṇārammaṇūpanijjhāyanatoti pathavīkasiṇādino attano ārammaṇassa rūpaṃ viya cakkhunā upanijjhāyanato. Lakkhaṇūpanijjhāyanatoti yathāsambhavaṃ aniccādilakkhaṇattayassa nibbānadhātuyā tathalakkhaṇassa ca upanijjhāyanato. Tenevāha ‘‘ettha hī’’tiādi. Niccādivipallāsappahānena maggo asammohato aniccādilakkhaṇāni upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānanti āha ‘‘vipassanāya upanijjhāyanakicca’’ntiādi. Tathalakkhaṇanti avināsadhammassa nibbānassa anaññathābhāvato aviparītasabhāvo tathalakkhaṇaṃ, maggassapi vā nibbānārammaṇato tathalakkhaṇūpanijjhānatā yojetabbā.
首先,为举出不同的譬喻,他说“如有财者”等。“另有堪为喻者”是指:因拥有财富与眷属而与众不同的人,他既有财富又有眷属,与财富共住、与眷属共住,故称“有财者、有眷属者”,堪为喻证,即应当被援引为譬喻之义。“军队之名仅安立于军支之上”是指:并非有脱离车兵等军支而独存的军队,但因与车兵、步兵共住,故称为“有车兵、有步兵的军队”,这即是说,“军队”之名仅仅是依托于车兵等军支而施设的。既然如此,为何在这段关于禅那的经文中,并未直接提及的心一境性,却被说到了呢?为了回应这一质难,他说道“因未说故”等。“即如此已说”是指:在《分别论》中,已依其自性如此说过。“虽在此无‘有心一境性’”一句,意为:虽然在这段关于禅那的经文中,未依其自性直接说“有心一境性”,但以“禅那”这一总名来说时,心一境性即已包含在内。因此,说“因为……”等。其意趣是:为了开显与寻等俱起之法,世尊在《分别论》中以“心一境性”来进行解说时,便已表明了以“有寻有伺”等解说来显示彼内涵的同一意趣。因此,不应思虑心一境性会在这段关于禅那的经文中未被提及。显示巴利原文
Visadisodāharaṇaṃ tāva dassento āha ‘‘yathā sadhano’’tiādi. Añño apadesāraho hotīti dhanato parijanato ca añño dhanavā parijanavā ca puriso saha dhanena vattati parijanena cāti sadhano saparijanoti apadesaṃ arahatīti apadesāraho hoti , apadisitabbo hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Senaṅgesu eva senāsammutīti rathādisenaṅgavinimuttāya senāya abhāvepi rathehi pattīhi ca saha vattanato sarathā sapatti senāti rathādisenaṅgesuyeva senāvohāroti attho. Kasmā panettha jhānapāṭhe aggahitā cittekaggatā gahitāti anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘avuttattā’’tiādi. Evaṃ vuttāyevāti evaṃ sarūpato vibhaṅge vuttāyeva. Sacittekaggatanti idha avuttepīti ‘‘sacittekaggata’’nti evaṃ sarūpato imasmiṃ jhānapāṭhe avuttepīti attho, sāmaññato pana jhānaggahaṇena gahitā eva. Tenevāha ‘‘yena hī’’tiādi . Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yena vitakkādīhi saha vattabbaṃ, taṃ dhammaṃ dīpetuṃ tassa pakāsanādhippāyena ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’ntiādinā uddeso kato, so eva adhippāyo tena bhagavatā vibhaṅge (vibha. 569) ‘‘cittassekaggatā’’ti niddisantena pakāsito, tasmā sā jhānapāṭhe aggahitāti na cintetabbanti.
于“证入”一词中,先为表明前缀upa-、saṃ-如同在“upalabbhati”等词中那样并非无义,而说“前往”等语;其后,为更明确地显示它们的有义,又说“使成就”等。因此,“证入”在此处的意思是“到达之后”或“成就之后”。“iriyanti”指行为。“vuttinti”等是它的同义词。一种威仪的受损,当以其他威仪来守护、保护。因是诸佛恒常所行之故,唯说此入出息念业处。因为据说,此乃一切诸佛之所恒行。显示巴利原文
Upasampajjāti ettha upa-saṃsaddā ‘‘upalabbhatī’’tiādīsu viya niratthakāti dassetuṃ ‘‘upagantvā’’tiādiṃ vatvā puna tesaṃ sātthakabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘upasampādayitvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tasmā upasampajjāti ettha patvā sādhetvāti vā attho. Iriyanti kiriyaṃ. Vuttintiādīni tasseva vevacanāni. Ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ iriyāpathantarehi rakkhaṇaṃ pālanaṃ. Sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇattā ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānameva vuttaṃ. Tañhi sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇanti vadanti.
第二禅那论显示巴利原文
Dutiyajjhānakathā
“平息”意为为了平息。在这里,“平息”意指断除,而这种断除在意义上即是超越寻与伺,令它们在第二禅那的刹那不再生起,因此他说“由于超越”等。然而,这里所指的是哪些寻与伺的平息呢?指的是初禅的寻与伺,还是第二禅的寻与伺?于此,若说是初禅的寻与伺,它们其实并未平息,因为初禅从未离开过寻与伺;若说是第二禅的寻与伺,它们同样谈不上平息,因为在第二禅中它们根本就不存在。为了回应这一诘难,他说“于此,虽然”等。其意趣为:所谓平息,是指那些已见过患的法,在彼彼禅那的刹那不再生起;而作为禅支的寻等正是如此被对待的,并非与它们相应的触等其他心所。因此,在禅那中,“平息”一词专指寻等的平息。然而,在经典中,对于与寻等相应的法,也同样像对寻等一样,观察“以此,此为粗”等的过患,故在应当说寻等及其相应法的平息等时,如果仅说寻等的平息,那么这一增语也能令知其他意义,从而显示某种差别。为了阐明此点,他说“然而,对于粗的……”等。此处的意趣是:由于超越那些使初禅成为粗的寻与伺而证得第二禅,并非由于超越本性并非粗糙的触等而证得。显示巴利原文
Vūpasamāti vūpasamahetu. Vūpasamoti cettha pahānaṃ adhippetaṃ, tañca vitakkavicārānaṃ atikkamo atthato dutiyajjhānakkhaṇe anuppādoti āha ‘‘samatikkamā’’tiādi. Katamesaṃ panettha vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo adhippeto, kiṃ paṭhamajjhānikānaṃ, udāhu dutiyajjhānikānanti, kiñcettha – yadi paṭhamajjhānikānaṃ, natthi tesaṃ vūpasamo. Na hi kadāci paṭhamajjhānaṃ vitakkavicārarahitaṃ atthi. Atha dutiyajjhānikānaṃ, evampi nattheva vūpasamo sabbena sabbaṃ tesaṃ tattha abhāvatoti imaṃ anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Yasmā diṭṭhādīnavassa taṃtaṃjhānakkhaṇe anuppattidhammatāpādanaṃ vūpasamanaṃ adhippetaṃ, vitakkādayo eva ca jhānaṅgabhūtā tathā karīyanti, na taṃsampayuttā phassādayo, tasmā vitakkādīnaṃyeva vūpasamādhivacanaṃ jhāne āgataṃ. Yasmā pana vitakkādīnaṃ viya taṃsampayuttadhammānampi ‘‘etena etaṃ oḷārika’’nti ādīnavadassanaṃ sutte āgataṃ, tasmā avisesena vitakkādīnaṃ taṃsahagatānañca vūpasamādike vattabbe vitakkādīnaṃyeva vūpasamo vuccamāno adhikavacanaṃ aññamatthaṃ bodhetīti katvā kañci visesaṃ dīpetīti dassento ‘‘oḷārikassa panā’’tiādimāha. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – yehi vitakkavicārehi paṭhamajjhānassa oḷārikatā, tesaṃ samatikkamā dutiyajjhānassa samadhigamo, na sabhāvato anoḷārikānaṃ phassādīnaṃ samatikkamāti ayamattho ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti etena dīpito , tasmā ‘‘kiṃ paṭhamajjhānikānaṃ vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo idhādhippeto, udāhu dutiyajjhānikāna’’nti edisī codanā anokāsāva. ‘‘Pītiyā ca virāgā’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Tasmā vitakkavicārapītisukhasamatikkamavacanāni oḷārikoḷārikaṅgasamatikkamā dutiyādiadhigamadīpakānīti tesaṃ ekadesabhūtaṃ vitakkavicārasamatikkamavacanaṃ avayavena samudāyopalakkhaṇanayena taṃ dīpakaṃ vuttaṃ. Visuṃ visuṃ ṭhitepi hi vitakkavicārasamatikkamavacanādike paheyyaṅganiddesatāsāmaññena cittena samūhato gahite vitakkavicāravūpasamavacanassa tadekadesatā hotīti. Atha vā vitakkavicāravūpasamavacaneneva taṃsamatikkamā dutiyādiadhigamadīpakena pītivirāgādivacanānaṃ pītiādisamatikkamā tatiyādiadhigamadīpakatā dīpitā hotīti tassa taṃdīpakatā vuttā. Evañhi avayavena samudāyopalakkhaṇaṃ vinā vitakkavicāravūpasamavacanena pītivirāgādivacanānaṃ savisaye samānabyāpāratā dassitā hoti.
“Ajjhattaṃ”意指自身内在,而非“内内”等。为显示此义,故说“‘ajjhattaṃ’意指自身内在”。对此,给出理由:“在《分别论》中亦”等。“pana”字也有“亦”的含义,意为“在《分别论》中亦然”。或者,此即是原文。显示巴利原文
Ajjhattanti niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ, na ajjhattajjhattādīti dassento āha ‘‘ajjhattanti niyakajjhattaṃ adhippeta’’nti. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘vibhaṅgepanā’’tiādi. Pana-saddopi apisaddattho, vibhaṅgepīti attho. Ayameva vā pāṭho.
“如同因与蓝色结合而成为蓝布”,其意为:犹如布与蓝色结合而成为蓝色。在此义释中,即对于“令心明净”这一分支。“心之”(cetaso)是用于受格意义的属格。于前一种情况,即“因与明净结合,禅那亦为明净”所说的分支中,“心之”是表达关联的属格。在“乃至我令他人成为一境”等句中,“一”字在世间也被用作最胜之语,故说“世间最胜者亦称为‘一’”。在“被独行之微小者所胜”等句中,“一”字又用作无伴侣之义,故说“成为独一无伴”。信等诸法对相应法,固然既共通又各别地成为缘;然而,定在禅那刹那,以不散乱为相,对相应法发挥主导作用,从而成为殊胜之缘。为显示此义,故说“对相应诸法……乃至……之增上语”。显示巴利原文
Nīlavaṇṇayogato nīlavatthaṃ viyāti nīlayogato vatthaṃ nīlaṃ viyāti adhippāyo. Imasmiñca atthavikappeti ‘‘ceto sampasādayatī’’ti etasmiṃ pakkhe. Cetasoti ca upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Purimasminti ‘‘sampasādanayogato jhānampi sampasādana’’nti vuttapakkhe. Cetasoti sambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. ‘‘Yāva na pare ekagate karomī’’tiādīsu seṭṭhavacanopi ekasaddo loke dissatīti āha ‘‘seṭṭhopi hi loke ekoti vuccatī’’ti. ‘‘Ekākīhi khuddakehi jita’’ntiādīsu asahāyatthopi ekasaddo diṭṭhoti āha ‘‘eko asahāyo hutvā’’ti. Saddhādayopi kāmaṃ sampayuttadhammānaṃ sādhāraṇato ca asādhāraṇato ca paccayā hontiyeva, samādhi pana jhānakkhaṇe sampayuttadhammānaṃ avikkhepalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhakaraṇena sātisayaṃ paccayo hotīti dassento ‘‘sampayuttadhamme…pe… adhivacana’’nti āha.
“心的明净”与“心一境性”这两个修饰语,是依于表达禅那殊胜的意趣而采用。为显示这一殊胜——于第二禅中可得,而在初禅中则无——故说“难道不是……”等。由于寻与伺以撞击、遍击所缘的方式,以及随伺、随入的方式转起,纵使藉由断除五盖而远离了烦恼的暗昧,它们仍对相应法造成某种扰动,且因它们的存在,那些相应法并未完全安止,因此说“由于寻伺的扰动……心不明净”。其中,小的波浪称为涟漪,大的称为波涛。即便有定,也不明显——虽诸根具足且精进平等,但因那种扰动及明净的缺乏,定如鱼在浊水,并不明显。由于没有寻伺的障碍——在此,所说的扰动本身即是障碍。通过如此所说——即《分别论》中以此方式显示诸法转起行相差别的文句,如“信解……”等(《分别论》574),正是基于这些法——由其信而有“明净”,由其心一境性而有“心一境性”——而说为禅那。这就是义理的解释:即“由于与明净相应,或由于能令明净,故为‘明净’。修习令心专一,故为‘心一境性’,如此说为禅那”这一释义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti visesanadvayaṃ jhānassa atisayavacanicchāvasena gahitaṃ. Svāyamatisayo yathā imasmiṃ jhāne labbhati, na tathā paṭhamajjhāneti imaṃ visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nanu cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ārammaṇe āhananapariyāhananavasena anumajjanaanuyujjanavasena ca pavattamānā dhammā satipi nīvaraṇappahānena kilesakālussiyāpagame sampayuttānaṃ kiñci khobhaṃ karontā viya tehi ca te na sannisinnā hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘vitakkavicārakkhobhena…pe… na suppasanna’’nti. Tattha khuddikā ūmiyo vīciyo, mahatiyo taraṅgā. Samādhipi na suṭṭhu pākaṭoti satipi indriyasamatte vīriyasamatāya ca teneva khotena sampasādābhāvena ca bahale viya jale maccho samādhipi na suṭṭhu pākaṭo. Vitakkavicārapalibodhābhāvenāti ettha yathāvuttakhobho eva palibodho. Evaṃ vuttenāti yassā saddhāya vasena sampasādanaṃ, yassā ca cittekaggatāya vasena ekodibhāvanti ca jhānaṃ vuttaṃ, tāsaṃ eva ‘‘saddahanā’’tiādinā (vibha. 574) pavattiākāravisesavibhāvanavasena vuttena tena vibhaṅgapāṭhena. Ayaṃ atthavaṇṇanāti ‘‘sampasādanayogato, sampasādanato vā sampasādanaṃ. Ekodiṃ bhāvetīti ekodibhāvanti jhānaṃ vutta’’nti evaṃ pavattā ayaṃ atthavaṇṇanā. Aññadatthu saṃsandati ceva sameti ca, evaṃ veditabbāti kathaṃ panāyaṃ atthavaṇṇanā tena vibhaṅgapāṭhena saddhiṃ saṃsandati sameti, nanu jhānavibhaṅge ‘‘sampasādana’’nti padaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘yā saddhā saddahanā’’tiādinā (vibha. 574) saddhāyeva vuttā, ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti ca padaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘yā cittassa ṭhiti saṇṭhiti avaṭṭhitī’’tiādinā samādhisseva niddeso kato, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘sampasādanaṃ ekodibhāva’’nti jhānameva vuttanti aṭṭhakathāya vibhaṅgapāṭhena saddhiṃ virodho āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati vibhaṅgepi imināva adhippāyena niddesassa katattā. Tathā hi yena sampasādanena yogā jhānaṃ ‘‘sampasādana’’nti vuccati, tasmiṃ ‘‘yā saddhā saddahanā’’tiādinā dassite sampasādanaṃ jhānanti samānādhikaraṇaniddeseneva taṃyogā jhāne taṃsaddappavatti dassitā hoti. ‘‘Ekodibhāva’’nti ca padaṃ uddharitvā ekodimhi dassite ekodibhāvaṃ jhānanti samānādhikaraṇaniddeseneva jhānassa ekodivaḍḍhanatā vuttāva hotīti iminā adhippāyena byañjanavicāraṃ akatvā dhammamattameva niddiṭṭhanti avirodho yutto.
然而,部分复注师——如法护长老等——曾如此主张:“若‘ekodī’意在指称定,那么抽出‘ekodibhāva’一词后,便不应再对定作解释。因此,‘ekodibhāva’这个词本身,就像‘sampasādana’一词用于禅那那样,是直接用于禅那的,这才合理。”此说与义注相违。他们之所以持此见解,其意图在于:因不被寻与伺所登临,故能单一地生起,便称为‘ekodī’;以具有如此定力的禅那心本身作为所取之境,而说‘ekodī的状态’即‘ekodibhāva’,这样便可解释为指称定。然而,他们所执取的观点——“若‘ekodī’指称定,则抽出‘ekodibhāva’一词后,便不应再对定作解释”——这并不合理,因为它并非普遍适用。在其他地方,也能见到《分别论》大多不作字句分别,仅直接解释义理本身的情形。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ṭīkākārehi ācariyadhammapālattherādīhi ‘‘yadi ekodīti samādhissa gahaṇaṃ adhippetaṃ, tadā ‘ekodibhāva’nti padaṃ uddharitvā samādhissa niddeso na kattabbo siyā. Tasmā ekodibhāvasaddo eva samādhimhi pavatto sampasādanasaddo viya jhāne pavattatīti yutta’’nti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāya virujjhati. Tasmā so aṭṭhakathānirapekkho visuṃyeveko atthavikappoti gahetabbaṃ. Ayañhi nesaṃ adhippāyo – vitakkavicārehi anajjhāruḷhattā ekaṃ udetīti ekodīti tathāvidhasamādhiyuttaṃ jhānacittameva gahetvā ekodissa bhāvo ekodibhāvoti samādhissa gahaṇaṃ sakkā vattunti. Yo panāyaṃ tesamabhiniveso ‘‘ekodīti samādhissa gahaṇe sati ‘ekodibhāva’nti padaṃ uddharitvā samādhissa niddeso na kattabbo siyā’’ti , so anekantikattā ayutto. Aññatthapi hi byañjanavicāraṃ akatvā atthamattasseva bāhullena vibhaṅge niddeso dissati.
寂静:指已经抵达平等的灭尽。寂止:通过修习,被平等地引导至灭尽。善寂:由此而极善地寂静。灭没:指已经到达灭没、坏灭。完全灭没:这是加上前缀以加强语气的表述。已至:指已被引导至、趣向坏灭。干涸:由于没有被称为轮转的相续,已到达干涸、枯竭的状态。已尽:指已令其边际消失。显示巴利原文
Santāti samaṃ nirodhaṃ gatā. Samitāti bhāvanāya samaṃ gamitā nirodhitā. Vūpasantāti tato eva suṭṭhu upasantā. Atthaṅgatāti atthaṃ vināsaṃ gatā. Abbhatthaṅgatāti upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā vuttaṃ. Appitāti gamitā vināsaṃ gatā. Sositāti pavattisaṅkhātassa santānassa abhāvena sosaṃ sukkhabhāvaṃ gatā. Byantīkatāti vigatantā katā.
此义:即因修习断除而令寻与伺不存在的道理。为了接纳提问者所说的义理并作释答,先说“确实如此,此义已成立”,然后才说“然而并非……”等语。其中,“此”是指“寻与伺的止息”这句话。能显了彼义:即能显了那仅指寻与伺不存在的道理,而并非指烦恼暗昧的止息。意思是,它不像近行刹那那样,由于止息了称为五盖的烦恼扰动,而有明净。难道不是说了“即使前面已说,也仍当再说”吗?这是为何而说?因为:通过“内明净”、“心一境性”这些显示第二禅等证得之因的词,以及通过“寻与伺止息”这一显示无寻无伺之因的词,已经显了寻与伺的不存在,那么,何必再用“无寻无伺”这个词呢?并非如此,因为尚未显了。因为“寻与伺止息”这句话,并没有说寻与伺不转起。对于寻与伺而言,断除渴爱才是它们的止息。通过粗显支分,以“寻与伺止息”等语,显示了对此彼禅那之欲贪的镇伏。由于“寻与伺止息”一语是显示对寻与伺离染的,而那些在诸行中断除渴爱者,在断除渴爱的道与果中,诸行仍有转起;同样,在此,对于已镇伏对寻与伺之渴爱的第二禅,其与寻与伺的相应,可能并未被前说所遮止。显示巴利原文
Ayamatthoti bhāvanāya pahīnattā vitakkavicārānaṃ abhāvasaṅkhāto attho. Codakena vuttamatthaṃ sampaṭicchitvā pariharituṃ ‘‘evametaṃ siddhovāyamattho’’ti vatvā ‘‘na paneta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha etanti ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ. Tadatthadīpakanti tassa vitakkavicārābhāvamattasaṅkhātassa atthassa dīpakaṃ. Na kilesakālussiyassāti upacārakkhaṇe viya nīvaraṇasaṅkhātassa kilesasaṅkhobhassa vūpasamā na sampasādananti attho. Nanu ca ‘‘purimaṃ vatvāpi vattabbamevā’’ti idaṃ kasmā vuttaṃ. Tathā hi dutiyajjhānādiadhigamūpāyadīpakena ajjhattaṃ sampasādanatāya cetaso ekodibhāvatāya ca hetudīpakena avitakkaavicārabhāvahetudīpakena ca vitakkavicāravūpasamavacaneneva vitakkavicārābhāvo dīpitoti, kiṃ puna avitakkaavicāravacanena katenāti? Na, adīpitattā. Na hi vitakkavicāravūpasamavacanena vitakkavicārānaṃ appavatti vuttā hoti. Vitakkavicāresu hi taṇhāppahānaṃ etesaṃ vūpasamanaṃ. Oḷārikaṅgamukhena hi taṃtaṃjhānanikantiyā vikkhambhanaṃ vitakkavicāravūpasamavacanādīhi pakāsitaṃ. Yato vitakkavicāresu virattabhāvadīpakaṃ vitakkavicāravūpasamavacanaṃ, ye ca saṅkhāresu taṇhāppahānaṃ karonti, tesu maggesu pahīnataṇhesu ca phalesu saṅkhārappavatti hoti, evamidhāpi vikkhambhitavitakkavicārataṇhassa dutiyajjhānassa vitakkavicārasampayogo purimena na nivārito siyāti tannivāraṇatthaṃ āvajjitukāmatādiatikkamo ca tesaṃ vūpasamoti dassanatthañca ‘‘avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti vuttaṃ. Paṭhamajjhānaṃ dutiyajjhānassa upanissayapaccayena paccayo hotīti āha ‘‘paṭhamajjhānasamādhito’’ti. Paṭhamampīti paṭhamajjhānampi.
“依数递增”等,应依前文所述之理而了知。在此处,说“第二生起者即是第二支”也是恰当的。为了以《分别》的经文证成已说之义,而说“如所说”等。然而,在《分别》(《分别》580)中说“禅那者,即净信、喜、乐、心一境性”,那是为了显示带有资具的禅那,而以间接方式说的。如同车上的华丽毛毯是车的资具,而非禅支,所以说“这确实只是间接的说法”。若依直接的说法,则依达到近伺察相之支而言,此禅那唯是三支,故说“然而,除去净信”等。显示巴利原文
Gaṇanānupubbatotiādi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Etthāpi ‘‘dutiyaṃ uppannantipi dutiya’’nti vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Vuttamevatthaṃ vibhaṅgapāṭhena sādhento āha ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi. Yaṃ pana vibhaṅge (vibha. 580) ‘‘jhānanti sampasādo pīti sukhaṃ cittassekaggatā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ saparikkhāraṃ jhānaṃ dassetuṃ pariyāyena vuttaṃ. Rathassa paṇḍukambalaṃ viya hi sampasādo jhānassa parikkhāro, na jhānaṅganti āha ‘‘pariyāyoyeva ceso’’ti. Nippariyāyato pana upanijjhānalakkhaṇappattānaṃ aṅgānaṃ vasena tivaṅgikamevetaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘sampasādanaṃ pana ṭhapetvā’’tiādi.
第三禅那论显示巴利原文
Tatiyajjhānakathā
离染即是离贪。为了显示那离染是通过厌离而舍弃,或是断除与彼相关的贪,故说“对那喜的厌恶或超越”。“两者之间”是指“喜的离染”这两个词之间,即中间的意思。合集即是总合。道即是方法。因为若不证得第二禅,则不能证得第三禅,所以寻与伺的止息是证得第三禅的方法。“为了证得彼”即是为了证得第三道。显示巴利原文
Virajjanaṃ virāgo. Taṃ pana virajjanaṃ nibbindanamukhena hīḷanaṃ vā tappaṭibaddharāgappahānaṃ vāti dassetuṃ ‘‘tassā pītiyā jigucchanaṃ vā samatikkamo vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ubhinnamantarāti pītiyā virāgāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ padānaṃ antarā, majjheti attho. Sampiṇḍanaṃ samuccayo. Maggoti upāyo. Dutiyajjhānassa hi paṭilābhaṃ vinā tatiyajjhānassa adhigamo na hotīti vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo tatiyajjhānādhigamassa upāyo. Tadadhigamāyāti tatiyamaggādhigamāya.
“依等至”者,由于以平衡的状态,适当地,禅那舍亦以平衡的状态将其纳入后而转起,故说“平等地看”。“清净”者,由于远离杂染而明净。“广大”者,由于达到极其广大的状态而广大。“有力”者,由于喜的离去而达到坚固的状态。若问:此处并无舍受存在,那么,此第三禅的具足者如何因具足舍而被称为“舍者”呢?为了显示并非只有受舍才称为舍,还有其他舍存在,而说“然而,舍有十种”等。其中,“诸比丘,在此,比丘以眼见色后,不喜不忧,具念正知,住于舍”,如是所说,是漏尽者在六门面对可意与不可意的六所缘时,不舍弃清净本性状态的舍,名为六支舍。显示巴利原文
Upapattitoti samavāhitabhāvena patirūpato jhānupekkhāpi samavāhitameva antonītaṃ katvā pavattatīti āha ‘‘samaṃ passatī’’ti. Visadāyāti saṃkilesavigamena paribyattāya. Vipulāyāti sātisayaṃ mahaggatabhāvappattito mahatiyā. Thāmagatāyāti pītivigamena thirabhāvappattāya. Nanu cettha upekkhāvedanāva na sambhavati, tasmā kathamayaṃ tatiyajjhānasamaṅgī upekkhāya samannāgatattā ‘‘upekkhako’’ti vuccatīti ce? Na kevalaṃ vedanupekkhāva upekkhāti vuccati, atha kho aññāpi upekkhā vijjantīti dassento āha ‘‘upekkhā pana dasavidhā hotī’’tiādi. Tattha (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 163; visuddhi. 1.84) ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno’’ti (a. ni. 6.1) evamāgatā khīṇāsavassa chasu dvāresu iṭṭhāniṭṭhachaḷārammaṇāpāthe parisuddhapakatibhāvāvijahanākārabhūtā upekkhā chaḷaṅgupekkhā nāma.
然而,“以舍俱行之心遍满一方而住”——如此所说的,是对有情保持中舍状态的舍,这称为梵住舍。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.308) evamāgatā sattesu majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ brahmavihārupekkhā nāma.
“修习舍觉支,依止远离”——如此所说的,是对俱生诸法保持中舍状态的舍,这称为觉支舍。显示巴利原文
Yā ‘‘upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti vivekanissita’’nti (ma. ni. 1.27; saṃ. ni. 5.182, 190-191) evamāgatā sahajātadhammānaṃ majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ bojjhaṅgupekkhā nāma.
然而,“时时作意舍相”——如此所说的,是不偏于过度精勤、不偏于过分松懈的精进,这称为精进舍。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘kālena kālaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasi karotī’’ti (a. ni. 3.103) evamāgatā anaccāraddhanātisithilavīriyasaṅkhātā upekkhā, ayaṃ vīriyupekkhā nāma.
有多少种行舍依止而生?又有多少种行舍依观而生?依止而生之行舍有八种,依观而生之行舍有十种。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kati saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti, kati saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti? Aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti, dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti.
哪八种行舍依止而生?为证得初禅,于诸盖审察安住之慧,是行舍中的智;为证得第二禅,于寻、伺审察安住之慧,是行舍中的智;为证得第三禅,于喜审察安住之慧,是行舍中的智;为证得第四禅,于乐与苦审察安住之慧,是行舍中的智;为证得空无边处定,于色想、有对想、种种想审察安住之慧,是行舍中的智;为证得识无边处定,于空无边处想审察安住之慧,是行舍中的智;为证得无所有处定,于识无边处想审察安住之慧,是行舍中的智;为证得非想非非想处定,于无所有处想审察安住之慧,是行舍中的智。这八种便是依止而生之行舍。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamā aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti? Paṭhamajjhānapaṭilābhatthāya nīvaraṇe paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, dutiyajjhānapaṭilābhatthāya vitakkavicāre paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, tatiyajjhānapaṭilābhatthāya pītiṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, catutthajjhānapaṭilābhatthāya sukhadukkhe paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattipaṭilābhatthāya rūpasaññaṃ paṭighasaññaṃ nānattasaññaṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattipaṭilābhatthāya ākāsānañcāyatanasaññaṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattipaṭilābhatthāya viññāṇañcāyatanasaññaṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattipaṭilābhatthāya ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, imā aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti.
哪十种行舍依观而生?为证得入流道,对生起、转起、相、积集、结生、趣、出生、再生、生、老、病、死、愁、悲、恼审察、安住之慧,是行舍中之智;为证得须陀洹果定,对生起、转起、相、积集、结生、趣、出生、再生、生、老、病、死、愁、悲、恼审察、安住之慧,是行舍中之智;为证得斯陀含道,对生起、转起、相、积集、结生、趣、出生、再生、生、老、病、死、愁、悲、恼审察、安住之慧,是行舍中之智;为证得斯陀含果定,对生起、转起、相、积集、结生、趣、出生、再生、生、老、病、死、愁、悲、恼审察、安住之慧,是行舍中之智;为证得阿那含道,对生起、转起、相、积集、结生、趣、出生、再生、生、老、病、死、愁、悲、恼审察、安住之慧,是行舍中之智;为证得阿那含果定,对生起、转起、相、积集、结生、趣、出生、再生、生、老、病、死、愁、悲、恼审察、安住之慧,是行舍中之智;为证得阿罗汉道,对生起、转起、相、积集、结生、趣、出生、再生、生、老、病、死、愁、悲、恼审察、安住之慧,是行舍中之智;为证得阿罗汉果定,对生起、转起、相、积集、结生、趣、出生、再生、生、老、病、死、愁、悲、恼审察、安住之慧,是行舍中之智;为证得空住定,对生起、转起、相、积集、结生审察、安住之慧,是行舍中之智;为证得无相住定,对生起、转起、相、积集、结生审察、安住之慧,是行舍中之智。此十种行舍依观而生。显示巴利原文
‘‘Katamā dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti? Sotāpattimaggapaṭilābhatthāya uppādaṃ pavattaṃ nimittaṃ āyūhanaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gatiṃ nibbattiṃ upapattiṃ jātiṃ jaraṃ byādhiṃ maraṇaṃ sokaṃ paridevaṃ upāyāsaṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, sotāpattiphalasamāpattatthāya uppādaṃ pavattaṃ nimittaṃ āyūhanaṃ paṭisandhiṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, sakadāgāmimaggapaalābhatthāya…pe… sakadāgāmiphalasamāpattatthāya…pe… anāgāmimaggapaṭilābhatthāya…pe… anāgāmiphalasamāpattatthāya…pe… arahattamaggapaṭilābhatthāya uppādaṃ pavattaṃ nimittaṃ āyūhanaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gatiṃ nibbattiṃ upapattiṃ jātiṃ jaraṃ byādhiṃ maraṇaṃ sokaṃ paridevaṃ upāyāsaṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, arahattaphalasamāpattatthāya…pe… suññatavihārasamāpattatthāya…pe… animittavihārasamaāpattatthāya uppādaṃ pavattaṃ nimittaṃ āyūhanaṃ paṭisandhiṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, imā dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.57) –
如上所说,对诸盖等审察与安住的舍,即名为行舍。显示巴利原文
Evamāgatā nīvaraṇādipaṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā nāma.
其中,“思择诸盖”是指以应被断除的方式思择、把握五盖,这就是“思择”的含义。“安住”是指由于面对诸盖的断除,以不作功用、中舍的状态而安住于它们的断除。“于诸行舍”是指在断除诸盖时不作功用,从而对称为“盖”的诸行保持舍心,这就是其义。这一道理同样适用于寻、伺等的生起等。其中,“生起”是指由过去业为缘,诸蕴在此处的产生。“转起”是指如此生起后的持续运转。“相”是指一切三地行法,以其自相而现前。“积集”是指成为未来结生之因的业。“结生”是指未来的投生。“趣”是指结生所依的趣。“出生”是指诸蕴的出生。“再生”是指异熟果报的转起。“生”是指作为老死等之缘、由有缘而有的生。老、死等之义则显而易见。显示巴利原文
Tattha nīvaraṇe paṭisaṅkhāti pañca nīvaraṇāni pahātabbabhāvena paṭisaṅkhāya, pariggahetvāti attho. Santiṭṭhanāti nīvaraṇānaṃ pahānābhimukhībhūtattā tesaṃ pahānepi abyāpārabhāvūpagamanena majjhattatāya santiṭṭhanā. Saṅkhārupekkhāsūti nīvaraṇappahāne byāpārākaraṇena nīvaraṇasaṅkhātānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ upekkhanāsūti attho. Esa nayo vitakkavicārādīsu uppādādīsu ca. Tattha uppādanti purimakammapaccayā khandhānaṃ idha uppattimāha. Pavattanti tathāuppannassa pavattiṃ. Nimittanti sabbampi tebhūmakaṃ saṅkhāragataṃ nimittabhāvena upaṭṭhānato. Āyūhananti āyatiṃ paṭisandhihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ. Paṭisandhinti āyatiṃ upapattiṃ. Gatinti yāya gatiyā sā paṭisandhi hoti. Nibbattinti khandhānaṃ nibbattanaṃ. Upapattinti vipākappavattiṃ. Jātinti jarādīnaṃ paccayabhūtaṃ bhavapaccayā jātiṃ. Jarāmaraṇādayo pākaṭā eva.
在此,“生起”等五词是就诸行舍智的所缘范围而说的,其余诸词则是其同义词。其中,“出生”与“生”这二词,是“生起”与“结生”的同义词;“趣”与“再生”这二词,是“转起”的同义词;老等,是“相”的同义词。当如此了知。若问:此处于四个道果阶段中,说了“生起”等五个根本词,连同“趣”等十个同义词,总计十五词;而于六个果等至阶段中,为何只说了五个根本词?应知:当诸行舍智锐利时,由于有能断烦恼的道存在,为彰显其锐利,故将根本词与同义词一并坚固宣说;而果由于无功用、寂静的自性,且依属于道,即使诸行舍智较为迟钝,也能成为果的缘,为显明此义,故只宣说根本词。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca uppādādayo pañceva saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇassa visayavasena vuttā, sesā tesaṃ vevacanavasena. Nibbatti jātīti idañhi dvayaṃ uppādassa ceva paṭisandhiyā ca vevacanaṃ. Gati upapatti cāti idaṃ dvayaṃ pavattassa, jarādayo nimittassāti veditabbaṃ. Nanu cettha catūsu maggavāresu ‘‘uppāda’’ntiādīni pañca mūlapadāni, ‘‘gatī’’tiādīni dasa vevacanapadānīti pannarasa padāni vuttāni, chasu pana phalasamāpattivāresu pañca mūlapadāneva vuttāni, taṃ kasmāti ce? Saṅkhārupekkhāya tikkhabhāve sati kilesappahānasamatthassa maggassa sabbhāvato tassā tikkhabhāvadassanatthaṃ vevacanapadehi saha daḷhaṃ katvā mūlapadāni vuttāni, phalassa nirussāhabhāvena santasabhāvattā maggāyattattā ca mandabhūtāpi saṅkhārupekkhā phalassa paccayo hotīti dassanatthaṃ mūlapadāneva vuttānīti veditabbāni.
其中,在“为证得入流道”等四个道阶段中,所说的是空、无相、无愿三种道中的一种。而在“为证得须陀洹果等至”等四个果阶段中,应知是指无愿果等至。何以故?因为“为证得空住等至”与“为证得无相住等至”,已另外宣说了其余二种果等至。依经教方法应知:由无常随观出起故,为无相道,于果等至时亦然,为无相果等至;由苦随观出起故,为无愿道与果等至;由无我随观出起故,为空道与果等至。如此,依空等解脱而说了四种为道生起因的观智,同样地,无愿果等至有四种,依空住与无相住而有二种,共说了十种诸行舍观慧。而止的诸行舍,则是在安止速行临近遍作阶段力量强大的修习所成智。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘sotāpattimaggapaṭilābhatthāyā’’tiādīsu catūsu maggavāresu suññatānimittappaṇihitamaggānaṃ aññataro vutto. ‘‘Sotāpattiphalasamāpattatthāyā’’tiādīsu catūsu phalavāresu pana appaṇihitaphalasamāpatti veditabbā. Kasmā? Suññatavihārasamāpattatthāya animittavihārasamāpattatthāyāti itarāsaṃ dvinnaṃ phalasamāpattīnaṃ visuṃ vuttattā. Aniccānupassanāvuṭṭhānavasena hi animittamaggo, tatheva phalasamāpattikāle animittaphalasamāpatti, dukkhānupassanāvuṭṭhānavasena appaṇihitamaggaphalasamāpattiyo, anattānupassanāvuṭṭhānavasaena suññatamaggaphalasamāpattiyo suttantanayena veditabbā. Evañca katvā suññatādivimokkhavasena magguppattihetubhūtā catasso, tathā appaṇihitaphalasamāpattiyā catasso, suññatavihāraanimittavihāravasena dveti dasa saṅkhārupekkhāvipassanāpaññā vuttā, samathasaṅkhārupekkhā pana appanāvīthiyā āsannapubbabhāge balappattaṃ bhāvanāmayañāṇaṃ.
而于“在何时,欲界善心生起,与舍俱行”等(《法集论》150)处所说、称为不苦不乐受的舍,这名爲“受舍”。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti upekkhāsahagata’’nti (dha. sa. 150) evamāgatā adukkhamasukhasaññitā upekkhā, ayaṃ vedanupekkhā nāma.
而那种在“凡所有、所存在者,他皆舍断,并获得舍”(《中部》3.71;《增支部》7.55)等经句中所说的、在简择中安住于中舍的舍,这称为观舍。显示巴利原文
Yā ‘‘yadatthi yaṃ bhūtaṃ, taṃ pajahati, upekkhaṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.71; a. ni. 7.55) evamāgatā vicinane majjhattabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā nāma.
其中,“凡所有、所存在者”指五蕴,他以欲解脱智而舍弃。“获得舍”的意思是:如同在观察一条已见三种相状的蛇的诸特征时一样,在观察已见三种相状的五蕴的诸行特征时,便获得舍,这就是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Tattha yadatthi yaṃ bhūtanti khandhapañcakaṃ, taṃ muñcitukamyatāñāṇena pajahati. Upekkhaṃ paṭilabhatīti diṭṭhasovattikattayassa sappassa lakkhaṇavicinane viya diṭṭhalakkhaṇattayassa khandhapañcakassa saṅkhāralakkhaṇavicinane upekkhaṃ paṭilabhatīti attho.
而那种出现于欲等相应法中、作为俱生法平等转起之因的舍,这称为中舍性舍。显示巴利原文
Yā pana chandādīsu yevāpanakesu āgatā sahajātānaṃ samappavattihetubhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhā nāma.
在“住于舍”(《长部》1.230;《法集论》163)等经文中所说的、即使在最上乐中也能生起不偏袒的舍,这称为禅舍。显示巴利原文
Yā ‘‘upekkhako ca viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.230; dha. sa. 163) evamāgatā aggasukhepi tasmiṃ apakkhapātajananī upekkhā, ayaṃ jhānupekkhā nāma.
在“舍念清净,第四禅”(《长部》1.232;《法集论》165)等经文中所说的、一切对立皆已清净、即使在对立的止息中也不起功用的舍,这称为清净舍。显示巴利原文
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhāna’’nti (dī. ni. 1.232; dha. sa. 165) evamāgatā sabbapaccanīkaparisuddhā paccanīkavūpasamanepi abyāpārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ pārisuddhupekkhā nāma.
其中,六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、中舍性舍、禅那舍和遍净舍,从意义上说,实为同一种中舍性舍。然而,由于不同阶段状态的差别,它有这样的区分,就如同一人有幼童、青年、长者、将军、国王等差别一样。因此,应当了知:在那些舍中,哪里有六支舍,那里就没有觉支舍等;或者,哪里有觉支舍,那里就没有六支舍等。正如这些舍在意义上是一体,行舍与观舍也是如此。因为那智慧本身依作用而分为两种。譬如有人傍晚进屋,拿起牧羊杖寻找蛇,看见它躺在谷壳堆上,观察‘这是不是蛇?’,见到三个颈纹后,断定‘是蛇,不是蛇’时,在审察中有中舍性;同样地,当已开始修观的禅修者以观智见到三法印时,在审察诸行的无常性等时生起的中舍性,这就是观舍。又如那人用牧羊杖紧紧按住蛇,寻找‘我如何能不伤害这条蛇,也不让它咬到我而放开它?’的放开方法时,在抓取中有中舍性;同样地,由于已见到三法印,观见三界犹如火宅的禅修者,在抓取诸行时生起的中舍性,这就是行舍。如此,当观舍成就时,行舍也成就了。然而,此舍依审察与抓取中的中舍性这一作用而分为两种。精进舍和受舍则彼此不同,且与其余诸舍在意义上也是不同的。显示巴利原文
Tattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā ca brahmavihārupekkhā ca bojjhaṅgupekkhā ca tatramajjhattupekkhā ca jhānupekkhā ca pārisuddhupekkhā ca atthato ekā tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti. Tena tena avatthābhedena panassā ayaṃ bhedo ekassapi sato sattassa kumārayuvatherasenāpatirājādivasena bhedo viya. Tasmā tāsu yattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā, na tattha bojjhaṅgupekkhādayo. Yattha vā pana bojjhaṅgupekkhā, na tattha chaḷaṅgupekkhādayo hontīti veditabbā. Yathā cetāsaṃ atthato ekībhāvo, evaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāvipassanupekkhānampi. Paññā eva hi sā kiccavasena dvidhā bhinnā. Yathā hi purisassa sāyaṃ gehaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ sappaṃ ajapadadaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pariyesamānassa taṃ thusakoṭṭhake nipannaṃ disvā ‘‘sappo nu kho, no’’ti avalokentassa sovattikattayaṃ disvā nibbematikassa ‘‘sappo, na sappo’’ti vicinane majjhattatā hoti, evameva yā āraddhavipassakassa vipassanāñāṇena lakkhaṇattaye diṭṭhe saṅkhārānaṃ aniccabhāvādivicinane majjhattatā uppajjati, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā. Yathā pana tassa purisassa ajapadena daṇḍena gāḷhaṃ sappaṃ gahetvā ‘‘kintāhaṃ imaṃ sappaṃ aviheṭhento attānañca iminā aḍaṃsāpento muñceyya’’nti muñcanākārameva pariyesato gahaṇe majjhattatā hoti, evameva yā lakkhaṇattayassa diṭṭhattā āditte viya tayo bhave passato saṅkhāraggahaṇe majjhattatā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā. Iti vipassanupekkhāya siddhāya saṅkhārupekkhāpi siddhāva hoti. Iminā panesā vicinanagahaṇesu majjhattasaṅkhātena kiccena dvidhā bhinnā. Vīriyupekkhā pana vedanupekkhā ca aññamaññañca avasesāhi ca atthato bhinnā evāti.
为说明这十种舍依地、人、心、所缘等的差别,各处已按所说之法而应了知,故开示者说:‘如此,这十种……’等。其中,依地、人、心、所缘分别:‘六支舍属欲界,梵住舍属色界’等,是依地而说。‘六支舍唯漏尽者所有,梵住舍为凡夫、有学、无学三者所有’等,是依人而说。‘六支舍与喜俱、舍俱之心相应’等,是依心而说。‘六支舍以六尘为所缘,梵住舍以法尘为所缘’等,是依所缘而说。依蕴的归类而说:受舍为受蕴所摄,其余九种为行蕴所摄。依同一刹那而说:六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、禅那舍、遍净舍与中舍性舍在意义上是一体,因此,于一刹那中若有其中一种,则无其余;同样,行舍与观舍也应如此了知;受舍与精进舍则可能于同一刹那生起。依善等三法而说:六支舍是无记,梵住舍是善及无记,其余亦然;然而受舍也可能是不善。依简略而说:此十种舍,简而言之,依精进、受、中舍性、智,仅是四种法。显示巴利原文
Imāsaṃ pana dasannampi upekkhānaṃ bhūmipuggalādivasena vibhāgo tattha tattha vuttanayeneva veditabboti dassento āha ‘‘evamayaṃ dasavidhāpī’’tiādi. Tattha bhūmipuggalacittārammaṇatoti ‘‘chaḷaṅgupekkhā kāmāvacarā, brahmavihārupekkhā rūpāvacarā’’ti evamādinā bhūmito. ‘‘Chaḷaṅgupekkhā khīṇāsavasseva, brahmavihārupekkhā tiṇṇampi puthujjanasekkhāsekkhāna’’nti evamādinā puggalato. ‘‘Chaḷaṅgupekkhā somanassupekkhāsahagatacittasampayuttā’’tiādinā cittato. ‘‘Chaḷaṅgupekkhā chaḷārammaṇā, brahmavihārupekkhā dhammārammaṇā’’tiādinā ārammaṇato. Khandhasaṅgahaekakkhaṇakusalattikasaṅkhepavasenāti ‘‘vedanupekkhā vedanākkhandhena saṅgahitā, itarā nava saṅkhārakkhandhenā’’ti khandhasaṅgahavasena. Chaḷaṅgupekkhā brahmavihārabojjhaṅgajhānapārisuddhitatramajjhattupekkhā ca atthato ekā, tasmā ekakkhaṇe tāsu ekāya sati na itarā, tathā saṅkhārupekkhāvipassanupekkhāpi veditabbā, vedanāvīriyupekkhānaṃ ekakkhaṇe siyā uppattīti evaṃ ekakkhaṇavasena. Chaḷaṅgupekkhā abyākatā, brahmavihārupekkhā kusalābyākatā, tathā sesā, vedanupekkhā pana siyā akusalāpīti evaṃ kusalattikavasena. Dasapetā saṅkhepato cattārova dhammā vīriyavedanātatramajjhattatāñāṇavasenāti evaṃ saṅkhepavasena.
现在,为简别并显示此处所指禅那舍的相状等,说:‘然而,从相状等来说……’等。其中,‘无功用为味’的意思是:即使在殊胜的乐中,它也对治偏向该乐的作用。‘无造作为现起’是指:即使达到了乐的极致,它仍以不耽著于彼乐的状态而现起;或者说,它令相应法于彼处无造作而现前。由于被相应法的扰动和踊跃的寻等所制伏,中舍性的作用于彼处不明显;而在此处,由于没有那些,所以是明显的,因此说‘由于作用不明显’。正因如此,说:‘因为不明显……’等。显示巴利原文
Idāni idhādhippetāya jhānupekkhāya lakkhaṇādiṃ niddhāretvā dassento āha ‘‘lakkhaṇādito panā’’tiādi. Tattha anābhogarasāti paṇītasukhepi tasmiṃ avanatipaṭipakkhakiccāti attho. Abyāpārapaccupaṭṭhānāti satipi sukhapāramippattiyaṃ tasmiṃ sukhe abyāvaṭā hutvā paccupatiṭṭhati, sampayuttānaṃ vā tattha abyāpāraṃ paccupaṭṭhapetīti attho. Sampayuttadhammānaṃ khobhaṃ uppilavañca āvahantehi vitakkādīhi abhibhūtattā aparibyattaṃ tattha tatramajjhattatāya kiccaṃ, tadabhāvato idha paribyattanti āha ‘‘aparibyattakiccato’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘aparibyattaṃ hī’’tiādi.
现在,“具念与正知”这句中,应补充“被称为”一词。通过“他忆念”来说明“具念”一词是主动义(作者成就)。正知,即正确地了知。以“人”来说,是以补特伽罗为安立处。具有忆念、思维、现起、特相,故为“以忆念为特相”。以不忘失为作用,即与忘失相反的不忘失,故为“以不忘失为作用”。以从烦恼中守护而现起,或令守护现起,故为“以守护为现起”。不痴迷,即正确地了知,或以不痴为特相,即与痴相反,故为“以不痴为特相”。审察是作用的完成。探究即审察。固然,就近行定、初禅等而言,初禅、第二禅也是微细的,但相对于这更高的禅那,则说“由于那些禅那的粗重性”,而那种粗重性应知是由于寻等粗重支分。有些人则说“由于具有众多心所”。如同人在大地上,意思是如同人在大地上的行走。行走是快乐的,意思是在那些禅那中的行走是快乐的。在那里,念与正知的作用不明显,是因为没有“这名为难行之事正在被做”这样的可说的,故这样说。然而,由于舍断粗重支分而变得微细,这个意义在第二禅中也可能存在,尽管如此,由于在通常不离而存在的喜与乐中,舍断了称为喜的粗重支分而变得微细,因此这里说“人的”等,以显示有殊胜的念与慧的作用。饮母牛的奶,称为“近母牛者”,意思是饮母牛的奶。如果再次达到喜,那禅那就会是退分的,意思是就会变成第二禅。因此说“就会与喜相应”。而这是指第三禅的乐为极甘甜之乐,其极甘甜性应知正是由于没有具有兴奋激动性质的喜。这,是指“具念、正知”这两个词。显示巴利原文
Idānisato ca sampajānoti ettha ‘‘vuccatī’’ti ajjhāharitabbaṃ. Saratīti iminā ‘‘sato’’ti padassa kattusādhanatamāha. Sampajānātīti sammadeva pajānāti. Puggalenāti puggalādhiṭṭhānena. Saraṇaṃ cintanaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ lakkhaṇametissāti saraṇalakkhaṇā. Sammussanapaṭipakkho asammussanaṃ kiccaṃ etissāti asammussanarasā. Kilesehi ārakkhā hutvā paccupatiṭṭhati, tato vā ārakkhaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetīti ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā. Asammuyhanaṃ sammadeva pajānanaṃ, sammohapaṭipakkho vā asammoho lakkhaṇametassāti asammohalakkhaṇaṃ. Tīraṇaṃ kiccassa pāragamanaṃ. Pavicayo vīmaṃsā. Kāmaṃ upacārajjhānādiṃ upādāya paṭhamadutiyajjhānānipi sukhumāneva, imaṃ pana uparimajjhānaṃ upādāya ‘‘oḷārikattā pana tesaṃ jhānāna’’nti vuttaṃ, sā ca oḷārikatā vitakkādithūlaṅgatāya veditabbā. Keci ‘‘bahucetasikatāyā’’ti ca vadanti. Bhūmiyaṃ viya purisassāti purisassa bhūmiyaṃ gati viyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Gati sukhā hotīti tesu jhānesu gati sukhā hoti. Abyattaṃ tattha satisampajaññakiccanti ‘‘idaṃ nāma dukkaraṃ karīyatī’’ti vattabbassa abhāvato vuttaṃ. Oḷārikaṅgappahānena pana sukhumattāti ayamattho kāmaṃ dutiyajjhānepi sambhavati, tathāpi yebhuyyena avippayogībhāvena vattamānesu pītisukhesu pītisaṅkhātassa oḷārikaṅgassa pahānena sukhumatāya idha sātisayo satipaññābyāpāroti vuttaṃ ‘‘purisassā’’tiādi. Dhenuṃ pivatīti dhenupago, dhenuyā khīraṃ pivantoti vuttaṃ hoti. Punadeva pītiṃ upagaccheyyāti hānabhāgiyaṃ jhānaṃ siyā , dutiyajjhānameva sampajjeyyāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘pītisampayuttameva siyā’’ti. Idañca atimadhuraṃ sukhanti tatiyajjhāne sukhaṃ sandhāyāha, atimadhuratā cassa pahāsodagyasabhāvāya pītiyā abhāveneva veditabbā. Idanti ‘‘sato sampajāno’’ti padadvayaṃ.
“并且以身感受乐”此句中,有人问:若无作意,如何能感受乐?于是说“虽无……”等。因为他以名身而与乐相应,为显明此义,所以说“并且以身感受乐”,应如此连接。此处的简要意思是:即便没有“我感受乐”这样的作意,禅那具足者也仍以名身感受心所乐;同时,由于生起身乐之因的色法,他也感受身乐,故如此说。“他的”,指禅那具足者。或者,“那个”即如前所述与名身相应的乐。由于彼所生起的——即由彼所生起的极其殊胜的色法——当其触及其色身时,为显明此义,应如此连接。“那个”,指色身的。“由于被触及”,意思是由于被遍满。正如身体被水触及时,当那样的触被触及时,乐便会生起;同样地,当身体被这些禅那心所生的色法触及时也是如此。即便从禅那出定后,也还能感受乐——即通过心所生色法与其余念所生色法的接触而生起的身识,感受身乐。此意义,便是依上述方式所说的感受心所乐与身乐的意义。显示巴利原文
Sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedesinti ettha kathamābhogena vinā sukhapaṭisaṃvedanāti āha ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Yasmā tassa nāmakāyena sampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, tasmā etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedesi’’nti āhāti yojetabbaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – ‘‘sukhaṃ vedayāmī’’ti evamābhoge asatipi nāmakāyena cetasikasukhaṃ, kāyikasukhaheturūpasamuṭṭhāpanena kāyikasukhañca jhānasamaṅgī paṭisaṃvedetīti vuccatīti. Tassāti jhānasamaṅgino. Yaṃ vā tanti yaṃ vā taṃ yathāvuttaṃ nāmakāyasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ. Taṃsamuṭṭhānenāti tato samuṭṭhitena atipaṇītena rūpena assa jhānasamaṅgino rūpakāyo yasmā phuṭo, tasmā etamatthaṃ dassentoti sambandhitabbaṃ. Yassāti rūpakāyassa. Phuṭattāti byāpitattāti attho. Yathā hi udakena phuṭṭhasarīrassa tādise phoṭṭhabbe phuṭṭhe sukhaṃ uppajjati, evaṃ etehi jhānacittasamuṭṭhitehi rūpehi phuṭṭhasarīrassa. Jhānā vuṭṭhitopīti jhānamhā vuṭṭhitopi. Sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeyyāti cittasamuṭṭhitarūpehi avasesatisamuṭṭhitarūpasaṅghaṭṭanena uppannakāyaviññāṇena kāyikaṃ sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeyya. Etamatthanti vuttanayena cetasikakāyikasukhapaṭisaṃvedanasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ.
“Ya”是不变词,表原因,意为“因为”。因此说“由于该禅那之因”。“称说”等词是称赞的意思,故说“意思是称赞”。“如何”是在询问称赞的方式。“达到乐之彼岸”,即达到了乐的终极边际。“由于对乐的贪着”,即由于对乐的喜爱。在这些地方,取了念也就取了正知,而这里经文中只取了念,所以只说“具念者”为念现前,或是因为前面已说过“正知”。“不染污”,即因不与烦恼混杂而不染污。在禅那刹那,严格来说只有心所乐可得,故说“以名身感受乐”。“第三”,是按数目次第的第三等,应依前文所说的方法了知。显示巴利原文
Yanti hetuatthe nipāto, yasmāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃjhānahetū’’ti. Ācikkhantītiādīni padāni kittanatthānīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘pasaṃsantīti adhippāyo’’ti. Kintīti pasaṃsanākārapucchā. Sukhapāramippatteti sukhassa paramaṃ pariyantaṃ patte. Sukhābhisaṅgenāti sukhasmiṃ ālayena. Edisesu ṭhānesu satiggahaṇeneva sampajaññampi gahitaṃ hotīti idha pāḷiyaṃ satiyā eva gahitattā evaṃ upaṭṭhitassatitāya satimā icceva vuttaṃ, sampajānoti heṭṭhā vuttattā vā. Asaṃkiliṭṭhanti kilesehi asammissattā asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ. Jhānakkhaṇe nippariyāyato cetasikasukhameva labbhatīti ‘‘sukhaṃ nāmakāyena paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatiyanti gaṇanānupubbato tatiyantiādi heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ.
第四禅那之论显示巴利原文
Catutthajjhānakathā
由于说了“先前已”,于是提起诘问:“那么,它们的舍断是何时呢?”随后说:“在四禅的近行刹那。”应如此了知,这是连接。对于未按舍断次第而说的,此处所谓的舍断次第,是指所舍断法的生起顺序。然而,若依那次第来说明,则应是“苦、忧、乐、喜”,为何此处说法不同?于是说“在《根分别》中”等。即按开示的次第,如“乐根、苦根、喜根、忧根”这样进行的开示次第。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pubbevā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘kadā pana nesaṃ pahānaṃ hotī’’ti codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā āha ‘‘catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇe’’ti. Evaṃ veditabbanti sambandho. Pahānakkamena avuttānanti ettha pahānakkamo nāma pahāyakadhammānaṃ uppattipaṭipāṭi. Tena pana vuccamāne ‘‘dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ sukhaṃ somanassa’’nti vattabbaṃ siyā, kasmā ito aññathā vacananti āha ‘‘indriyavibhaṅge’’tiādi . Uddesakkamenāti ‘‘sukhindriyaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ somanassindriyaṃ domanassindriya’’nti evaṃ pavattauddesakkamena.
那么,为何独在诸禅中说“灭”?这便是关联所在。问:“于何处有已生的苦根?”即由各自之缘所生、未被镇伏的苦根。又问:“于何处无余灭尽?”这既是在问灭尽之处,也是在问灭尽之因。因此,以“于何处”提问,以“于此”作答时,当知此亦是因之处格用法。依于禅那威力之所缘,苦根不再生起,即称为无余灭尽。殊胜灭则是彻底断除,是以正对治而达成的寂止;此“灭”仅是断除而已。“于种种转向中”:指异于安止路的转向,或多种转向。因为在安止路中,近行是一种转向;而另一种因多次生起,故是多种转向。不舒适坐姿所生的疲劳,即不舒适坐姿带来的恼害。“以喜遍满”:因喜有遍满的作用,或因由喜所生的殊胜色法遍满全身而说。由此故说“全身都沉浸于乐”。既然由殊胜色法所触之身已是沉浸于乐之身,又怎会因不舒适坐姿的恼害等而生起苦呢?所以说“未被对治所破坏”。“即使在寻伺为缘的情况下”:此中pi字位置有误,应将其带到“已断除的”一词处相连。“已断除的忧根”:此句应与“可能会有生起”连接。“此”,指忧根,与“生起”相连。由“我若过久地寻思、伺察,身体也会疲劳,心也会被扰动”的说法,应知显示巴利原文
Atha kasmā jhānesveva nirodho vuttoti sambandho. Kattha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyanti attano paccayehi uppannaṃ avikkhambhitaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ. Kattha ca aparisesaṃ nirujjhatīti nirodhaṭṭhānaṃ nirodhakāraṇaṃ pucchati. Tena katthāti pucchāya etthāti vissajjanepi hetumhi bhummavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Jhānānubhāvanimittañhi anuppajjantaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatīti vuttaṃ. Atisayanirodho suṭṭhu pahānaṃ ujupaṭipakkhena vūpasamo. Nirodho pahānamattaṃ. Nānāvajjaneti yena āvajjanena appanāvīthi, tato bhinnāvajjane anekāvajjane vā. Appanāvīthiyañhi upacāro ekāvajjano, itaro anekāvajjano anekakkhattuṃ pavattanato. Visamanisajjāya uppannakilamatho visamāsanupatāpo. Pītipharaṇenāti pītiyā pharaṇarasattā pītisamuṭṭhānānaṃ vā paṇītarūpānaṃ kāyassa byāpanato vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbo kāyo sukhokkanto hotī’’ti. Paṇītarūpaphuṭṭhasarīrassa sukhokkantakāyattā kuto dukkhuppatti visamāsanupatāpādināti āha ‘‘paṭipakkhena avihatattā’’ti. Vitakkavicārapaccayepīti pi-saddo aṭṭhānappayutto, so ‘‘pahīnassā’’ti ettha ānetvā sambandhitabbo. Pahīnassapi domanassindriyassāti idañca ‘‘siyā uppattī’’ti iminā sambandhitabbaṃ. Etanti domanassindriyaṃ. ‘‘Uppajjatī’’ti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Tassa mayhaṃ aticiraṃ vitakkayato vicārayato kāyopi kilami, cittampi ūhaññī’’ti vacanato kāyacittakhedānaṃ vitakkavicārapaccayatā veditabbā. Vitakkavicārabhāveti ettha ‘‘uppajjati domanassindriya’’nti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tatthassa siyā uppattīti tattha dutiyajjhānūpacāre assa pahīnassapi domanassindriyassa uppatti bhaveyya.
于此,有者言:“以‘于彼处可能会有生起’之说,显示了纵然得禅定者也有忧的生起,由此表明嗔亦如贪一般,具有非盖的性质。因无嗔则忧不生,且于此不应思惟与《发趣论》相违。以彼处显示了以退失的禅那为所缘而生起的忧;既然以未退失的禅那为所缘而生起忧是不可能的,便不可说‘得禅定者的忧全然无生’,因为即使得八等至者也有忧的生起,然而他并非退失禅那者。”此说并不合理,因为不存在具有非盖性质的忧。若存在,色界、无色界有情也应生起忧,然实非如此。正如于无色界中,依欲贪盖而有昏沉睡眠盖、掉举盖、无明盖等,其中并未除去嗔恚、恶作盖;且于此,非盖的同义语也用来指称欲贪等,因其虽非盖却与盖相似,故以盖的同义语而说。至于所言“即使得八等至者也有忧的生起”,亦无根据,因为生起的忧会导致从禅那退失。当知那些以轻微因缘退失禅那者,尚能不太困难地令其复原。而“于彼处可能会有生起”一语,只是假设之说,目的在于表明忧在近行刹那尚未断除。正如所说:“然绝非在安止内部”。如果那时显示巴利原文
Ettha ca yadeke vadanti ‘‘tatthassa siyā uppattīti vadantena jhānalābhīnampi domanassuppatti atthīti dassitaṃ hoti, tena ca anīvaraṇasabhāvo lobho viya dosopi atthīti dīpeti. Na hi dosena vinā domanassaṃ pavattati, na cettha paṭṭhānapāḷiyā virodho cintetabbo. Yasmā tattha parihīnajjhānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānaṃ domanassaṃ dassitaṃ, aparihīnajjhānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjamānassa domanassassa asambhavato jhānalābhīnaṃ sabbaso domanassaṃ nuppajjatīti ca na sakkā vattuṃ aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino api tassa uppannattā, na heva kho so parihīnajjhāno ahosī’’ti, taṃ ayuttaṃ anīvaraṇasabhāvassa domanassassa abhāvato. Yadi siyā, rūpārūpāvacarasattānampi uppajjeyya, na ca uppajjati. Tathā hi āruppe kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ paṭicca thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ uddhaccanīvaraṇaṃ avijjānīvaraṇantiādīsu byāpādakukkuccanīvaraṇāni anuddhaṭāni, na cettha anīvaraṇatāpariyāyo kāmacchandādīnampi anīvaraṇānaṃyeva nīvaraṇasadisatāya nīvaraṇapariyāyassa vuttattā. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino api tassa uppannattā’’ti, tampi akāraṇaṃ uppajjamānena ca domanassena jhānato parihāyanato. Lahukena pana paccayena parihīnaṃ tādisā naṃ appakasireneva paṭipākatikaṃ karontīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Tatthassa siyā uppattī’’ti idaṃ pana parikappanavacanaṃ upacārakkhaṇe domanassassa appahīnabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘na tveva antoappanāya’’nti. Yadi pana tadā domanassaṃ uppajjeyya, paṭhamajjhānampissa parihīnamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pahīnampi somanassindriyaṃ pīti viya na dūreti katvā ‘‘āsannattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nānāvajjanūpacāre pahīnampi pahānaṅgaṃ paṭipakkhena avihatattā antarantarā uppajjeyya vāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘appanāppattāyā’’tiādimāha. Tādisāya āsevanāya icchitabbattā yathā maggavīthito pubbe dve tayo javanavārā sadisānupassanāva pavattanti, evamidhāpi appanāvārato pubbe dve tayo javanavārā upekkhāsahagatāva pavattantīti vadanti.
“Samāharī”:意为令等持、统合之后而说。“微细”:如苦、乐等,因不粗重、不明显而为微细,正因如此,其性质须经推度,故难了知。“恶者”:指恶加行者,即难调伏者之义。“能被把握”:意即通过令其知解的方便而能被把握。“不苦不乐心解脱”:此当视为第四禅。“为显示缘”:为显示作为证得方便的缘。因而说:“因苦的断除等是它的缘”。而此“苦的断除等”即指带有近行的初禅等。说“已断除”:因经中说“五顺下分结的灭尽”。“这些”:指乐等感受。“乐是悦的缘”:由住所、涂香、花鬘、装饰等所生的身乐,是悦的缘。依“友毗舍佉,于乐受,随眠贪随眠”之说,故说“悦是贪的缘”。依“友毗舍佉,于苦受,随眠嗔恚随眠”之说,故说“忧是嗔的缘”。“以乐的断除等”:即以乐等的断除。显示巴利原文
Samāharīti samānesi, saṅgahetvā abhāsīti attho. Sukhumāti sukhadukkhāni viya anoḷārikattā avibhūtatāya sukhumā, tato eva anuminitabbasabhāvattā dubbiññeyyā. Duṭṭhassāti duṭṭhapayogassa, duddamassāti attho. Sakkā hoti esā gāhayitunti aññāpohananayena sakkā gāhayitunti adhippāyo. Adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyāti idameva catutthaṃ jhānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paccayadassanatthanti adhigamassa upāyabhūtapaccayadassanatthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘dukkhappahānādayo hi tassā paccayā’’ti. Dukkhappahānādayoti ca sopacārā paṭhamajjhānādayovettha adhippetā. Pahīnāti vuttāti ‘‘pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.147; saṃ. ni. 5.1021) vuttattā. Etāti sukhādayo vedanā. Sukhaṃsomanassassa paccayoti vasanagandhālepanapupphābharaṇasamālepanādinibbattaṃ kāyikasukhaṃ somanassassa paccayo. ‘‘Sukhāya kho, āvuso visākha vedanāya, rāgānusayo anusetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465) vacanato āha ‘‘somanassaṃ rāgassa paccayo’’ti. ‘‘Dukkhāya kho, āvuso visākha, vedanāya paṭighānusayo anusetī’’ti vacanato vuttaṃ ‘‘domanassaṃ dosassa paccayo’’ti. Sukhādighātenāti sukhādīnaṃ pahānena.
“不苦不乐”中,“不苦”即非苦、远离于苦。因其中无苦,故说“以无苦故”。“不乐”同理。“以此”即以此遮遣苦乐之言。“成为对立”是就第三种受通过超越苦等而应被证得来说的,并非像善与不善那样直接相违。“以体验与可意不可意相反者为相”指体验与可意、不可意相反的中舍所缘,或以中舍方式体验与可意、不可意相反者。正因如此,其味为中舍。“现起为不明显”即不像苦乐那样形相明显,犹如山背岩石上的鹿迹,须由推知而得,故其现起为不明显之相。此处“乐灭”指第四禅的近分定,那是它的足处,故说“以乐灭为足处”。“舍念清净”是省略后分词的前分词复合词,故说“由舍所生的念清净”。当清净舍——以一切敌对法清净、对敌对法平息亦无造作——在第四禅中现起时,念便如被称赞的智慧一般极清净、极明澈,所以说“念的清净,那是舍所为,非由其他”。“若这里‘舍’意指中舍性,为何只说念清净?”对此有“并非唯……”等说。“以念为首”即令念为上首、令念为主。显示巴利原文
Adukkhamasukhanti ettha na dukkhanti adukkhaṃ, dukkhavidūraṃ. Yasmā tattha dukkhaṃ natthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dukkhābhāvenā’’ti. Asukhanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Etenāti dukkhasukhapaṭikkhepavacanena. Paṭipakkhabhūtanti idaṃ idha tatiyavedanāya dukkhādīnaṃ samatikkamavasena pattabbattā vuttaṃ, na kusalākusalānaṃ viya ujuvipaccanīkatāya. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītānubhavanalakkhaṇāti iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītassa majjhattārammaṇassa, iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītaṃ vā majjhattākārena anubhavanalakkhaṇā. Tato eva majjhattarasā. Avibhūtapaccupaṭṭhānāti sukhadukkhāni viya na vibhūtākārā piṭṭhipāsāṇe migagatamaggo viya tehi anumātabbāvibhūtākāropaṭṭhānā. Sukhanirodho nāma idha catutthajjhānūpacāro, so padaṭṭhānaṃ etissāti sukhanirodhapadaṭṭhānā. Upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti purimapade uttarapadalopenetaṃ samāsapadanti āha ‘‘upekkhāya janitasatipārisuddhi’’nti. Sabbapaccanīkadhammaparisuddhāya paccanīkasamanepi abyāvaṭāya pārisuddhupekkhāya vattamānāya catutthajjhāne sati sampahaṃsanapaññā viya suparisuddhā suvisadā ca hotīti āha ‘‘satiyā pārisuddhi, sā upekkhāya katā na aññenā’’ti. Yadi tatramajjhattatā idha ‘‘upekkhā’’ti adhippetā, kathaṃ satiyeva pārisuddhāti vuttāti āha ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādi. Satisīsenāti satiṃ uttamaṅgaṃ katvā, padhānaṃ katvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
即使如此,为何唯在此处说“舍念清净”?针对这一追问,说“其中虽……”等。其中,下三禅中虽也有中舍性,但因镇伏敌对法及助缘的欠缺而不清净;同样,与之相应的那些法由于没有它,在此则为清净。为以譬喻说明此义,说“然而如同……”等。“因日光所掩”即被日光所掩蔽。月牙极为微细,如同在夜间,而月牙恰在与其同分的夜间方闪耀,为显示它为彼夜所摄,故说“以柔和性及以对自己有饶益故,与同分的夜间”。其余此处义理明显。显示巴利原文
Evamapi kasmā idheva sati ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhī’’ti vuttāti anuyogaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha heṭṭhā tīsu jhānesu vijjamānāyapi tatramajjhattatāya paccanīkābhibhavanato sahāyapaccayavekallato ca apārisuddhi, tathā taṃsampayuttānaṃ tadabhāvato idha pārisuddhīti imamatthaṃ upamāvasena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sūriyappabhābhibhavāti sūriyappabhāya abhibhuyyamānattā. Atikkhatāya candalekhā viya rattipi sommasabhāvā sabhāgāya rattiyameva ca candalekhā samujjalatīti sā tassā saṅgayhatīti dassento ‘‘sommabhāvena ca attano upakārakattena vā sabhāgāya rattiyā’’ti āha. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
宿住随念之论显示巴利原文
Pubbenivāsakathā
12 第十二,以修习离色贪而生的四种无色定,也摄于第四禅,故说“四禅”。就心一境性而言,如同为投生之目的,作为观之基础亦为四禅共通,由此说“四禅”是合理的;然而作为神通基础及灭尽定基础,唯是第四禅所特有,这又如何说为四禅共通呢?由辗转依止故。因为足处之足处亦称为足处,原因之原因亦称为原因,如说“以草做饭”。如此,在目的解说中,八等至的摄受便得以成立。“为心一境性目的”即为这些定之目的,为现法乐住的目的。实际上,以心一境性为首说现法乐住,是依干观漏尽者而说。因此说“我等心一境,将乐住一日”。“为投生目的”即为投生诸有之目的。由入灭尽定七日,说“七日成为无心”。为何仅入灭尽定七日?因如此制定时限的分量,且大多依食而活的众生,其所执受的色身延续,一日所食仅能维持七日。显示巴利原文
12. Rūpavirāgabhāvanāvasena pavattaṃ catubbidhampi arūpajjhānaṃ catutthajjhānasaṅgahamevāti āha ‘‘cattāri jhānānī’’ti. Yuttaṃ tāva cittekaggatā bhavokkamanatthatā viya vipassanāpādakatāpi catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ sādhāraṇāti tesaṃ vasena ‘‘cattāri jhānānī’’ti vacanaṃ, abhiññāpādakatā pana nirodhapādakatā ca catutthasseva jhānassa āveṇikā, sā kathaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ sādhāraṇā vuttāti? Paramparādhiṭṭhānabhāvato. Padaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānampi hi padaṭṭhānantveva vuccati, kāraṇakāraṇampi kāraṇanti yathā ‘‘tiṇehi bhattaṃ siddha’’nti. Evañca katvā payojananiddese aṭṭhasamāpattiggahaṇaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Cittekaggatatthānīti ittasamādhatthāni, diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthānīti attho. Cittekaggatāsīsena hi diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāro vutto, sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavavasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ekaggacittā sukhaṃ divasaṃ viharissāmā’’ti. Bhavokkamanatthānīti bhavesu nibbattiatthāni. Sattāhaṃ nirodhasamāpattiyā samāpajjanato āha ‘‘sattāhaṃ acittakā hutvā’’ti. Kasmā pana sattāhameva nirodhaṃ samāpajjantīti? Tathākālaparicchedakaraṇato, tañca yebhuyyena āhārūpajīvīnaṃ sattānaṃ upādinnakappavattassa ekadivasaṃ bhuttāhārassa sattāhameva yāpanato.
什么是灭尽定?哪些人入此定,哪些人不入?在何处入?为何入?如何入?答:所谓灭尽定,即依渐次灭而心与心所法不转起。哪些人入此定,哪些人不入?一切凡夫、须陀洹、斯陀含、干观者阿那含、阿罗汉不入;证得八等至的阿那含与漏尽者入。在何处入?在五蕴有。何以故?因为需要依渐次等至。在四蕴有中,连初禅等都不生起,故不能于彼处入定。为何入?因厌患诸行的转起与破坏,为‘于现法中成为无心,证得灭尽涅槃,住于乐’而欲入。如何入?由止观双运的精进、已作预备业者,令非想非非想处灭,如是入此定。若唯以止精进者,仅达非想非非想处等至便止;若唯以观精进者,仅达果等至便止;若以两者双运精进而令非想非非想处灭,彼即入此定。此是此处略说。显示巴利原文
Kā (visuddhi. 2.867-868) panāyaṃ nirodhasamāpatti nāma, ke taṃ samāpajjanti, ke na samāpajjanti, kattha samāpajjanti, kasmā samāpajjanti, kathañcassā samāpajjanaṃ hotīti? Vuccate – tattha kā panāyaṃ nirodhasamāpatti nāmāti yā anupubbanirodhavasena cittacetasikānaṃ dhammānaṃ appavatti. Ke taṃ samāpajjanti, ke na samāpajjantīti sabbepi puthujjanasotāpannasakadāgāmino sukkhavipassakā ca anāgāmiarahanto na samāpajjanti, aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino pana anāgāmino khīṇāsavā ca samāpajjanti. Kattha samāpajjantīti pañcavokārabhave. Kasmā? Anupubbasamāpattisabbhāvato. Catuvokārabhave pana paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ uppattiyeva natthi, tasmā na sakkā tattha samāpajjituṃ. Kasmā samāpajjantīti saṅkhārānaṃ pavattibhede ukkaṇṭhitvā ‘‘diṭṭhadhamme acittakā hutvā nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ patvā sukhaṃ viharissāmā’’ti. Kathañcassā samāpajjanaṃ hotīti samathavipassanāvasena ussakkitvā katapubbakiccassa nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ nirodhayato evamassā samāpajjanaṃ hoti. Yo hi samathavaseneva ussakkati, so nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ patvā tiṭṭhati. Yopi vipassanāvaseneva ussakkati, so phalasamāpattiṃ patvā tiṭṭhati. Yo pana ubhayavaseneva ussakkitvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ nirodheti, so taṃ samāpajjatīti ayamettha saṅkhepo.
详细而言:此处,有比丘欲入灭尽定,先入初禅,出定后,于彼处观诸行为无常、苦、无我。此观有三种:行把握观、果等至观、灭尽定观。其中,行把握观无论弱或锐利,皆成为道的近因。果等至观唯锐利方适宜,类似于道的修习。然而灭尽定观则不宜过弱或过锐,因此,他以不过弱、不过锐的观来观彼诸行。之后,入第二禅……乃至入识无边处,出定后,在彼处同样观诸行。接着,入无所有处,出定后,作四种准备:不坏别系物、尊重僧团、师之召唤、寿限的限定。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana vitthāro – idha bhikkhu nirodhaṃ samāpajjitukāmo paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya tattha saṅkhāre aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassati. Vipassanā ca panesā tividhā saṅkhārapariggaṇhanakavipassanā phalasamāpattivipassanā nirodhasamāpattivipassanāti. Tattha saṅkhārapariggaṇhanakavipassanā mandā vā tikkhā vā maggassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hotiyeva. Phalasamāpattivipassanā tikkhāva vaṭṭati maggabhāvanāsadisā. Nirodhasamāpattivipassanā pana nātimandanātitikkhā vaṭṭati, tasmā esa nātimandāya nātitikkhāya vipassanāya te saṅkhāre vipassati. Tato dutiyajjhānaṃ…pe… tato viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya tattha saṅkhāre tatheva vipassati. Atha ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya catubbidhaṃ pubbakiccaṃ karoti nānābaddhaavikopanaṃ saṅghapatimānanaṃ satthupakkosanaṃ addhānaparicchedanti.
其中,‘不坏别系物’是指:凡是此比丘不与自己共系一处、而是别处放置的钵、衣、床座、住处,或其他任何资具,都应这样决意:令其不被火、水、风、贼、鼠等所损坏。此处的决意方法是:‘在此七日之内,愿此物及彼物不被火烧,不被水漂,不被风吹散,不被贼偷,不被鼠等咬噬。’如此决意后,七日之内彼物无任何灾患;若不决意,则会被火等毁坏。这称为‘不坏别系物’。至于与自身共系一处的下衣、上衣或所坐之座,则无需特别决意,等至本身即能护持它们。显示巴利原文
Tattha nānābaddhaavikopananti yaṃ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekābaddhaṃ na hoti, nānābaddhaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ pattacīvaraṃ vā mañcapīṭhaṃ vā nivāsagehaṃ vā aññaṃ vā pana yaṃ kiñci parikkhārajātaṃ, taṃ yathā na vikuppati, aggiudakavātacoraundūrādīnaṃ vasena na vinassati, evaṃ adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Tatridaṃ adhiṭṭhānavidhānaṃ ‘‘idañcidañca imasmiṃ sattāhabbhantare mā agginā jhāyatu, mā udakena vuyhatu, mā vātena viddhaṃsatu, mā corehi harīyatu, mā undūrādīhi khajjatū’’ti. Evaṃ adhiṭṭhite taṃ sattāhaṃ tassa na koci parissayo hoti, anadhiṭṭhahato pana aggiādīhi nassati, idaṃ nānābaddhaavikopanaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana ekābaddhaṃ hoti nivāsanapārupanaṃ vā nisinnāsanaṃ vā, tattha visuṃ adhiṭṭhānakiccaṃ natthi, samāpattiyeva naṃ rakkhati.
“僧团期待”是指对比丘僧团的等候、守候,意思是:只要那位比丘尚未到来,便不举行僧团羯磨。此处,等候本身并非预备工作,而作意“僧团期待”方为预备工作。因此,应如此作意:“若在我入灭尽定七日期中,僧团欲行白二甘马等任何羯磨,当比丘前来唤我时,我当即刻出定。”以此作意而入定者,届时定会出定。若不作此作意,僧团聚集后不见彼比丘,便问:“某某比丘在哪里?”得知“已入灭尽定”后,即差一比丘:“去唤他来。”当那位比丘站到可听闻的范围之内,仅仅说:“贤友,僧团期待您。”他便出定。僧团的教令便是如此重大。因此,应当以此作意,使在最初即能出定,这样入定。显示巴利原文
Saṅghapatimānananti bhikkhusaṅghassa patimānanaṃ udikkhanaṃ, yāva so bhikkhu āgacchati, tāva saṅghakammassa akaraṇanti attho. Ettha ca patimānanaṃ etassa na pubbakiccaṃ, patimānanāvajjanaṃ pana pubbakiccaṃ. Tasmā evaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ ‘‘sace mayi sattāhaṃ nirodhaṃ samāpajjitvā nisinne saṅgho apalokanakammādīsu kiñcideva kammaṃ kattukāmo hoti, yāva maṃ koci bhikkhu āgantvā na pakkosati, tāvadeva vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti. Evaṃ katvā samāpanno hi tasmiṃ samaye vuṭṭhahatiyeva. Yo pana evaṃ na karoti, saṅgho ce sannipatitvā taṃ apassanto ‘‘asuko bhikkhu kuhi’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘nirodhaṃ samāpanno’’ti vutte kañci bhikkhuṃ peseti ‘‘taṃ pakkosāhī’’ti, athassa tena bhikkhunā savanūpacāre ṭhatvā ‘‘saṅgho taṃ āvuso patimānetī’’ti vuttamatteyeva vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Evaṃ garukā hi saṅghassa āṇā nāma, tasmā taṃ āvajjitvā yathā paṭhamameva vuṭṭhāti, evaṃ samāpajjitabbaṃ.
“师之召唤”:此处,同样以作意“师之召唤”为预备工作,因此,也应当如此作意。其余应如前文所说而了知。显示巴利原文
Satthupakkosananti idhāpi satthupakkosanāvajjanameva imassa pubbakiccaṃ, tasmā tampi evaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
“寿限的限定”是指对寿命期限的决断。这位比丘须通达寿限的限定,在作意“我的寿行在七日之内是继续运转,还是不再运转”之后,方可入定。若寿行将于七日内断灭,而不作意便入定,其灭尽定便无法防护死亡——因为在灭尽定中不会死亡,故会中途出定。因此,必须先作意此事再入定。其他预备工作即使不作意尚可,但此寿限限定则必须作意,故如此说。他如此入无所有处定,出定后做完这些预备工作,再入非想非非想处定,经过一或两个心刹那,便成无心,触证灭尽。为什么两个心之后心识不再生起?因为精勤于灭尽。这位比丘将止观配合而修,次第证入八等至,是为渐次灭尽的精勤,并非为了非想非非想处定。由于精勤于灭尽,故在两个心之后心识不再生起。显示巴利原文
Addhānaparicchedoti jīvitaddhānassa paricchedo. Iminā bhikkhunā addhānaparicchedesu kusalena bhavitabbaṃ, ‘‘attano āyusaṅkhārā sattāhaṃ pavattissanti na pavattissantī’’ti āvajjitvāva samāpajjitabbaṃ. Sace hi sattāhabbhantare nirujjhanake āyusaṅkhāre anāvajjitvāva samāpajjati, tassa nirodhasamāpatti maraṇaṃ paṭibāhituṃ na sakkoti, antonirodhe maraṇassa natthitāya antarāva samāpattito vuṭṭhāti, tasmā etaṃ āvajjitvāva samāpajjitabbaṃ. Avasesañhi anāvajjitumpi vaṭṭati, idaṃ pana āvajjitabbamevāti vuttaṃ. So evaṃ ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya idaṃ pubbakiccaṃ katvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samāpajjati, athekaṃ vā dve vā cittavāre atikkamitvā acittako hoti, nirodhaṃ phusati . Kasmā panassa dvinnaṃ cittānaṃ upari cittāni na pavattantīti? Nirodhassa payogattā. Idañhi imassa bhikkhuno dve samathavipassanādhamme yuganaddhe katvā aṭṭhasamāpattiārohanaṃ anupubbanirodhassa payogo, na nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyāti nirodhassa payogattā dvinnaṃ cittānaṃ upari cittāni na pavattantīti.
因为菩萨在前往菩提道场之前,于最后一生中,也曾生起第四禅,但那时仅是生起而已,并非作为观等的基础。因此,为了加以区别,而说“在菩提树下生起”。“观的基础”,是指在开始修观时作为观的基础。“神通的基础”,此处也是同理。诸佛只是在最初开始的时候,才需要以基础禅那为用,此后便不再为了证得更高的道果、果等至、神通变化等目的而使用它。因为从证得正等觉的那一刻起,一切智与定的作用,便只系于期望而已。“成就一切事”,是指成就次第住等一切事。“给予一切世间出世间功德”:这里,由于第四禅是观与神通的基础,故应知世尊的第四禅,具有给予一切世间出世间功德的性质。因为道智是一切知智的近因,一切知智即是正等觉,而道智又以第四禅为近因。在世尊证得正等觉的同时,一切佛功德皆已掌握,而道的证得,乃是以第四禅为所依。显示巴利原文
Yasmā bodhisattena bodhimaṇḍupasaṅkamanato pubbepi carimabhave catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattitapubbaṃ, tadā pana taṃ nibbattitamattameva ahosi, na vipassanādipādakaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘bodhirukkhamūle nibbattita’’nti tato visesetvā vuttaṃ. Vipassanāpādakanti vipassanārambhe vipassanāya pādakaṃ. Abhiññāpādakanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Buddhānañhi paṭhamārambhe eva pādakajjhānena payojanaṃ ahosi, na tato paraṃ uparimaggādhigamaphalasamāpattiabhiññāvaḷañjanādiatthaṃ. Abhisambodhisamadhigamato paṭṭhāya hi sabbaṃ ñāṇasamādhikiccaṃ ākaṅkhāmattapaṭibaddhamevāti. Sabbakiccasādhakanti anupubbavihārādisabbakiccasādhakaṃ. Sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇadāyakanti ettha vipassanābhiññāpādakattā eva catutthassa jhānassa bhagavato sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇadāyakatā veditabbā. Sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi maggañāṇaṃ taṃpadaṭṭhānañca sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ abhisambodhi, tadadhigamasamakālameva ca bhagavato sabbe buddhaguṇā hatthagatā ahesuṃ, catutthajjhānasannissayo ca maggādhigamoti.
在说到“具足第四禅而住”之后,因为提到了“彼”,所以接着说“彼我”。在“这样入定”这句中,“这样”一词,是为表明前面依次证得三种禅那之后所成就的第四禅之等持,所以说“这样,是对第四禅次第的指示”。这是对第四禅及其证得之道的指示,即通过那样的等持次第而获得第四禅定,这是对这两者的指示。因此说“由此……已说”。其中,“由此次第”是指由证得初禅等开始的次第。虽然“这样”一词连同入定的等持,已显示了第四禅的等持,但由于只有念清净之定才是神通的基础,所以特别强调说“以第四禅定入定”。当舍念清净现起时,由于一切敌对法与随烦恼已得清净,并且在敌对法止息时不再有干扰,第四禅及其相应诸法便极为清净、极为明澈,而在这里是以念为首而作教示,所以说“以舍念清净的状态而清净”,意思是由舍而产生了念清净。这种清净由于殊胜的缘而有殊胜的转起,其遍净的状态,犹如经过研磨的纯净黄金变得光辉闪耀,所以说“正因为清净,所以遍净、光辉,这是所说的意思”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja vihāsi’’nti vatvā ‘‘so’’ti vuttattā āha ‘‘so aha’’nti. Evaṃ samāhiteti ettha evaṃ-saddo heṭṭhā jhānattayādhigamapaṭipāṭisiddhassa catutthajjhānasamādhānassa nidassanatthoti āha ‘‘evanti catutthajjhānakkamanidassanameta’’nti. Catutthajjhānassa tassa ca adhigamamaggassa nidassanaṃ, yena samādhānānukkamena catutthajjhānasamādhi laddho, tadubhayanidassananti attho. Tenāha ‘‘iminā…pe… vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Tattha iminā kamenāti iminā paṭhamajjhānādhigamādinā kamena. Yadipi ‘‘eva’’nti idaṃ āgamanasamādhinā saddhiṃ catutthajjhānasamādhānaṃ dīpeti, satipārisuddhisamādhi eva pana iddhiyā adhiṭṭhānabhāvato padhānanti āha ‘‘catutthajjhānasamādhinā samāhite’’ti. Sabbapaccanīkadhammupakkilesaparisuddhāya paccanīkasamanepi abyāvaṭāya pārisuddhupekkhāya vattamānāya catutthajjhānaṃ taṃsampayuttā ca dhammā suparisuddhā suvisadā ca honti, satisīsena pana tattha desanā katāti āha ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvena parisuddhe’’ti, upekkhāya janitasatipārisuddhisambhavenāti attho. Parisuddhiyā eva paccayavisesena pavattiviseso pariyodātatā sudhantasuvaṇṇassa nighaṃsanena pabhassaratā viyāti āha ‘‘parisuddhattāyeva pariyodāte, pabhassareti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
“以断除乐等之缘”,是指通过镇伏乐与喜、苦与忧,它们依次是贪与瞋的缘。如所说:“乐是喜的缘,喜是贪的缘;苦是忧的缘,忧是瞋的缘。”正如贪等由于心的垢秽不净而被称为“污点”,同样,由于它们靠近而染污的意义,便被称为随烦恼,所以说“正因为无有污点,所以远离随烦恼”。因此说“因为污点,心被随烦恼所染污”,意思是受到逼迫、受到热恼。“善修习”,是指通过达到熟练而善加修习。因而说“达到自在”,意即通过转向等五种或十四种调伏,达到能自在运作。能自在运作的心,被称为“柔软”,如同经过良好鞣制的皮革和经过良好加工的紫胶被称为柔软。“堪任业处”,是指堪任神变等神通业处。“此两者”,即指柔软与堪任这两种。显示巴利原文
Sukhādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ ghātenāti sukhasomanassānaṃ dukkhadomanassānañca yathākkamaṃ rāgadosapaccayānaṃ vikkhambhanena. ‘‘Sukhaṃ somanassassa paccayo, somanassaṃ rāgassa, dukkhaṃ domanassassa paccayo, domanassaṃ dosassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā rāgādayo cetaso malāsucibhāvena ‘‘aṅgaṇānī’’ti vuccanti, evaṃ upagantvā kilesanaṭṭhena upakkilesāti āha ‘‘anaṅgaṇattā eva ca vigatupakkilese’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘aṅgaṇena hi cittaṃ upakkilissatī’’ti, vibādhīyati upatāpīyatīti attho. Subhāvitattāti paguṇabhāvāpādanena suṭṭhu bhāvitattā. Tenāha ‘‘vasībhāvappatte’’ti, āvajjanādinā pañcadhā cuddasavidhena vā paridamanena vasaṃ vattituṃ upagateti attho. Vase vattamānañhi cittaṃ mudūti vuccatīti vase vattamānaṃ cittaṃ paguṇabhāvāpattiyā suparimadditaṃ viya cammaṃ suparikammakatā viya ca lākhā mudūti vuccati. Kammakkhameti vikubbanādiiddhikammakkhame. Tadubhayanti mudutākammaniyadvayaṃ.
在“我不见”等语中,“不”字表否定。“我”是导师自称。“比丘们”是呼唤比丘。“其他”是指与现前所说的心不同者。“一法”指一个自性法。“我不见”表关联。此处之义为:比丘们,我以一切知智观照,亦不见其他任何一法,能如同此心一般,由修习而达自在、由反复修习而多作,从而获得殊胜的柔软而柔软、因堪任业处而堪任。而之所以说“此心”,是因为他自身与那些比丘皆现量亲证之故。显示巴利原文
Nāhantiādīsu (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.1) na-kāro paṭisedhattho. Ahanti satthā attānaṃ niddisati. Bhikkhaveti bhikkhū ālapati. Aññanti idāni vuccamānacittato aññaṃ. Ekadhammampīti ekampi sabhāvadhammaṃ. Na samanupassāmīti sambandho. Ayañhettha attho – ahaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbaññutaññāṇena olokentopi aññaṃ ekadhammampi na samanupassāmi, yaṃ vasībhāvāpādanena bhāvitaṃ tathā punappunaṃ karaṇena bahulīkataṃ evaṃ savisesamudubhāvappattiyā mudu kammakkhamatāya kammaniyañca hoti yathā idaṃ cittanti. Idaṃ cittanti ca attano tesañca paccakkhatāya evamāha.
如同所说的清净等状态不会消失一般,善修习的心安住其中,在此称为“住立、达不动”,故说“因安住于这些清净等状态而住立;正因住立,故达不动”。如同柔软与堪任以达自在为相,达自在亦以柔软与堪任为相,故说“或由柔软、堪任的状态而住立于己之自在,故为住立”。正如可由因推果,由果亦可推因。由于不动摇而安住,以及由于相应诸法之坚固而不被敌对法所动摇,此乃依凭信等力量之威势而生起,故说“由信等所摄持,故达不动”。显示巴利原文
Yathā yathāvuttā parisuddhatādayo na vigacchanti, evaṃ subhāvitaṃ cittaṃ tattha avaṭṭhitaṃ idha ‘‘ṭhitaṃ āneñjappatta’’nti ca vuttanti āha ‘‘etesu parisuddhabhāvādīsuṭhitattā ṭhite, ṭhitattāyeva āneñjappatte’’ti. Yathā mudukammaññatā vasībhāvappattiyā lakkhīyati, evaṃ vasībhāvappattipi mudukammaññatāhi lakkhīyatīti ‘‘mudukammaññabhāvena vā attano vase ṭhitattā ṭhite’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā hi kāraṇena phalaṃ niddhārīyati, evaṃ phalenapi kāraṇaṃ niddhārīyatīti niccalabhāvena avaṭṭhānaṃ āneñjappattiyā ca sampayuttadhammesu thirabhāvena paṭipakkhehi akammaniyatāya ca sambhavataṃ saddhādibalānaṃ ānubhāvena hotīti āha ‘‘saddhādīhi pariggahitattā āneñjappatte’’ti.
如今为展开略说之义,而说“由信摄持”等语。其中,“由信摄持”是指:如此善修习、达自在的心,必然能导向对那些应证知诸法之证知——由如此生起之信所摄持,即由如前所述的信力所撑持。“由无信”是指:以彼相反之无信为因。“不动”是指:不摇动、不震动,反而以能带来更上殊胜的状态而安住。“由精进摄持”等,亦当以同理领会其义。然而于此有如是差别:“由精进摄持”指由能成就自在、调伏烦恼的精进所撑持。“由念摄持”指由如前所述、于修习多作中不忘失且探寻善法之趣向的念所撑持。“由定摄持”指由即于彼处成就无散乱的定所撑持。“由慧摄持”指由对彼修习中辨别随顺与违逆法之相的慧所撑持。“达光明”指与智光明俱行。因为以光明为体、由前述定所增长的智,如实照见杂染分,由此对其生起惭、惧而克服之,不被所克服。故说“不为烦恼暗冥所动”。此即显示由智摄持之惭与愧的力量。“具足八支”指依第四禅定,心得等持、清净、洁白、无秽、离随烦恼、柔软、适业、住于不动。显示巴利原文
Idāni saṅkhepato vuttamevatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘saddhāpariggahitaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saddhāpariggahitanti evaṃ subhāvitaṃ vasībhāvappattaṃ cittaṃ ekaṃsena abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhiññāsacchikiriyāya saṃvattatīti evaṃ pavattāya saddhāya pariggahitaṃ yathāvuttasaddhābalena upatthambhitaṃ. Assaddhiyenāti tappaṭipakkhena assaddhiyena hetunā. Na iñjatīti na calati na kampati, aññadatthu uparivisesāvahabhāveneva tiṭṭhati. Vīriyapariggahitantiādīsupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – vīriyapariggahitanti vasībhāvāpādanaparidamanasādhanena vīriyena upatthambhitaṃ. Satipariggahitanti yathāvutte bhāvanābahulīkāre asammosādikāya kusalānañca dhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesamānāya satiyā upatthambhitaṃ. Samādhipariggahitanti tattheva avikkhepasādhanena samādhānena upatthambhitaṃ. Paññāpariggahitanti tassā eva bhāvanāya upakārānupakāradhammānaṃ pajānanalakkhaṇāya paññāya upatthambhitaṃ. Obhāsagatanti ñāṇobhāsasahagataṃ. Obhāsabhūtena hi yathāvuttasamādhānasaṃvaddhitena ñāṇena saṃkilesapakkhaṃ yāthāvato passanto tato utrāsanto ottappanto taṃ abhibhavati, na tena abhibhuyyati. Tenāha ‘‘kilesandhakārena na iñjatī’’ti. Etena ñāṇapariggahitaṃ hirottappabalaṃ dasseti. Aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatanti catutthajjhānasamādhinā samāhitatā parisuddhatā pariyodātatā anaṅgaṇatā vigatupakkilesatā mudubhāvo kammaniyatā āneñjappattiyā ṭhitatāti imehi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ. Atha vā samāhitassa cittassa imāni aṅgānīti ‘‘samāhite’’ti imaṃ aṅgabhāvena aggahetvā ṭhitiāneñjappattiyo visuṃ gahetvā yathāvuttehi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgatanti attho daṭṭhabbo. Abhinīhārakkhamanti iddhividhādiatthaṃ abhinīhārakkhamaṃ tadabhimukhakaraṇayoggaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhiññāsacchikiriyāyā’’ti.
诚然,镇伏诸盖后方有初禅的证得;同样,寻等止息后方有第二禅等的证得。然而,它们并不像从第四禅那般如此远离或脱离那些(盖等)。因此,由于从能令心染污、扰动、踊跃的盖等中善得解脱,便说其心的清净与洁白。是故他说“从盖……洁白”。关于“证得禅那之敌对者”,在此,阿阇梨法护长老采用了“证得禅那之缘”的读法,而驳斥了“证得禅那之敌对者”这一读法。因为他说:显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhetvā eva paṭhamajjhānasamadhigamo, vitakkādivūpasamā eva ca dutiyajjhānādisamadhigamo, tathāpi na tathā te tehi dūrībhūtā, apetā vā yathā catutthajjhānato, tasmā cetaso malīnabhāvasaṅkhobhauppilābhāvakarehi nīvaraṇādīhi suṭṭhu vimuttiyā tassa parisuddhipariyodātatā ca vuttāti āha ‘‘nīvaraṇa…pe… pariyodāte’’ti. Jhānapaṭilābhapaccanīkānanti ettha ācariyadhammapālattherena ‘‘jhānapaṭilābhapaccayāna’’nti pāṭhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘jhānapaṭilābhapaccanīkāna’’nti ayaṃ pāṭho paṭikkhitto. Vuttañhi tena –
“证得禅那之缘”是指:以证得禅那为因、依止证得禅那而生起的。“诸恶”是指:低劣的。“欲行境”是指:以欲为行境、沉溺于欲的,即依“啊,但愿导师只问我之后,再为比丘们说法”等方式而生起的慢、谄、诳等。“贪欲等”:以“等”字即包含它们本身。在此,贪欲以及慢等,应视为与不被初禅所镇伏者同在一处者,因为“证得禅那之缘”是贯穿的。而可被镇伏的,则由“盖”一词所包含。然而,为何在此那些不能被初禅镇伏的烦恼会消失呢?因为“一切善法是一切不善法的对治”,这是依损减行而说,显示了禅那不被执取的状态。然而,有些人以“欲行境、贪欲等”这些词包含了忿、恼、欲贪、嗔恚等为意图,驳斥了“证得禅那之缘”的读法,而说“证得禅那之敌对者”才是正确的读法。那只是他们自己的见解,因为那样的读法根本不存在,而且证得禅那之敌对者即是盖以及与其同在一处者,在说明它们的远离之后,又再指责它们的不存在与消失,这是不合理的。难道在《无秽经》、《事经》中,不是获得了这个意义吗?因为那里只意指粗重的恶法。确实如此,但在此,因为是依已证得第四显示巴利原文
‘‘Jhānapaṭilābhapaccayānanti jhānapaṭilābhahetukānaṃ jhānapaṭilābhaṃ nissāya uppajjanakānaṃ. Pāpakānanti lāmakānaṃ. Icchāvacarānanti icchāya avacarānaṃ icchāvasena otiṇṇānaṃ ‘aho vata mameva satthā paṭipucchitvā bhikkhūnaṃ dhammaṃ deseyyā’tiādinayappavattānaṃ mānamāyāsāṭheyyādīnaṃ. Abhijjhādīnanti ādi-saddenapi tesaṃyeva saṅgaho. Abhijjhā cettha paṭhamajjhānena avikkhambhaneyyā mānādayo ca tadekaṭṭhā daṭṭhabbā jhānapaṭilābhapaccayānanti anuvattamānattā. Vikkhambhaneyyā pana nīvaraṇaggahaṇena gahitā. Kathaṃ pana paṭhamajjhānena avikkhambhaneyyā idha vigacchantīti? ‘Sabbe kusalā dhammā sabbākusalānaṃ paṭipakkhā’ti sallekhapaṭipattivasena evaṃ vuttaṃ jhānassa aparāmaṭṭhabhāvadassanato. Ye panettha ‘icchāvacarānaṃ abhijjhādīna’nti imehi padehi kopaappaccayakāmarāgabyāpādādayo gahitāti adhippāyena ‘jhānapaṭilābhapaccayāna’nti pāṭhaṃ paṭikkhipitvā ‘jhānapaṭilābhapaccanīkāna’nti pāṭhoti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ tathā pāṭhasseva abhāvato, jhānapaṭilābhapaccanīkā ca nīvaraṇā ceva tadekaṭṭhā ca, tesaṃ dūrībhāvaṃ vatvā puna tesaṃyeva abhāvavigamacodanāya ayujjamānattā. Nanu ca anaṅgaṇasuttavatthasuttesu ayamattho labbhati oḷārikānaṃyeva pāpadhammānaṃ tattha adhippetattāti. Saccametaṃ, idha pana adhigatacatutthajjhānassa vasena vuttattā sukhumāyeva te gahitā, aṅgaṇupakkilesatāsāmaññena panettha suttānaṃ apadisanaṃ. Tathā hi ‘suttānusārenā’ti vuttaṃ, na pana suttavasenā’’ti.
而且,必须如此承认:即使在已证得禅那的某些人之中,也有欲行境等生起的存在。正因如此,阿阇梨法护长老采用了“证得禅那之缘”的读法,而驳斥了“证得禅那之敌对者”这一读法。在《大结节》以及《清净道论》的锡兰结节中,都解释了“证得禅那之缘”这一读法的意义,因此应采纳此读法,其义也应依如前所述的方法来理解。由此,对于“欲行境是指:以欲为行境、沉溺于欲而生起的种种忿与恼等条件”这一读法,也应视为不正确的。而且,正因如此,在《清净道论》中,完全没有显示这一读法。显示巴利原文
Avassañcetamevaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ adhigatajjhānānampi kesañci icchāvacarānaṃ pavattisabbhāvatoti . Teneva ācariyadhammapālattherena ‘‘jhānapaṭilābhapaccayāna’’nti pāṭhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘jhānapaṭilābhapaccanīkāna’’nti ayaṃ pāṭho paṭikkhitto. Mahāgaṇṭhipade visuddhimaggassa sīhaḷagaṇṭhipadepi ca ‘‘jhānapaṭilābhapaccayāna’’nti imasseva pāṭhassa attho vutto, tasmā ayameva pāṭho gahetabbo, atthopi cettha yathāvuttanayeneva veditabbo. Tena ‘‘icchāvacarānanti icchāya avacarānaṃ icchāvasena otiṇṇānaṃ pavattānaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kopaappaccayānanti attho’’ti ayampi pāṭho ayuttoyevāti gahetabbaṃ, tatoyeva ca visuddhimagge ayaṃ pāṭho sabbena sabbaṃ na dassitoti.
“由于达到神足之基础状态”是指达到作为神足之近因的状态。“由于修习圆满”是指从此再无应修之事,故堪能引摄的修习已臻圆满。“由于达到殊胜状态”是指因此被提升到精勤之位,故以最上之义与不令人满足之义而达到殊胜状态。而那两句是为说明修习的安住之因,即:圆满的修习已安住于达到殊胜的状态。“达到不动”是安住的定语,因此说“如同达到不动那样地安住”。在此解释中,“安住”与“达到不动”二者合为一支,而“等持”则另是一支。因此,为指出其与第一种解释的差别,而说“如此也是具足八支”。显示巴利原文
Iddhipādakabhāvūpagamanenāti iddhiyā pādakabhāvassa padaṭṭhānabhāvassa upagamanena. Bhāvanāpāripūriyāti ito paraṃ kattabbassa abhāvavasena abhinīhārakkhamabhāvanāya paripuṇṇattā. Paṇītabhāvūpagamanenāti tato eva padhānabhāvaṃ nītatāya uttamaṭṭhena atittikaraṭṭhena ca paṇītabhāvassa upagamanena. Ubhayañcetaṃ bhāvanāya ṭhitiyā kāraṇavacanaṃ, paripuṇṇāya bhāvanāya paṇītabhāvappattiyā ṭhiteti. Āneñjappatteti idaṃ ṭhitiyā visesanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yathā āneñjappattaṃ hoti, evaṃ ṭhite’’ti. Imasmiṃ pakkhe ‘‘ṭhite āneñjappatte’’ti ubhayamekaṃ aṅgaṃ, ‘‘samāhite’’ti pana idampi ekamaṅgaṃ. Tenevassa paṭhamavikappato visesaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘evampi aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgata’’nti.
他忆念过去生,或者他的忆念即是宿住随念,因为它是依止于他们为所缘等之缘而生起的。为了开示简略所说的“对于宿住随念,那智即是为了彼”之义,先显示过去生,再显示其中的念与智,故说“过去生”等。其中,“过去”一词,如“一生”等语所示,在此是指以过去有为境,故说“在过去生中”。“住”字是业作义,而除了蕴之外并无所谓居住的法,故说“曾居住的诸蕴”。而此处的“曾居住性”是指在相续中流转,那些如此曾一一经历、生起、流转,在那里生起后又灭去,故说“曾居住,即曾经历、曾体验、在自己的相续中生起后灭去”。如此依属于自己相续的法解释了“住”字的意义后,现在为了不加简别地说,而说“或者曾居住的法为曾居住”,为了解释它而说“以境域之住”等。因为即使是作为境域的,由于对境域的惯习而被惯习、以作所缘的方式而被体验,也名为曾居住。然而那些由于有自己与他人之识的境域性而有两种,为了显示这两种而说“自己的”等。其中,说了“以自己的识所识知的”之后,又说“被区别的”,这是为了阐明这样的意义:那些以境域之住而曾居住的法,并非仅仅是以识识知而已,而是如同过去以名、姓、容貌、相、食物等差别而被能作区别的慧所区别而执取那样,此智也是如此区别而执取。或者,以他人之识所识知的也是曾居住,这是连接。不单是以自己的识,而是也以他人之识所识知的,这是意义。在此也应引来“被区别”一词而连接,即:或者也被他人之识所识知、所区别。而对其执取的作用,应依前述之理而说。显示巴利原文
Pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati, tassa vā anussaraṇaṃ pubbenivāsānussati taṃnissayādipaccayabhūtaṃ paṭicca uppajjanato. Pubbenivāsānussatimhi yaṃ ñāṇaṃtadatthāyāti saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ vivaranto pubbenivāsaṃ tāva dassetvā tattha satiñāṇāni dassetuṃ ‘‘pubbenivāso’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘pubbe’’ti idaṃ padaṃ ‘‘ekampi jāti’’ntiādivacanato atītabhavavisayaṃ idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘atītajātīsū’’ti. Nivāsasaddo kammasādhano, khandhavinimutto ca nivasitadhammo natthīti āha ‘‘nivutthakkhandhā’’ti. Nivutthatā cettha santāne pavattatā, tathābhūtā ca te anu anu bhūtā jātā pavattā, tattha uppajjitvā vigatā ca hontīti āha ‘‘nivutthāti ajjhāvutthā anubhūtā attano santāne uppajjitvā niruddhā’’ti. Evaṃ sasantatipariyāpannadhammavasena nivāsasaddassa atthaṃ vatvā idāni avisesena vattuṃ ‘‘nivutthadhammā vā nivutthā’’ti vatvā taṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘gocaranivāsenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Gocarabhūtāpi hi gocarāsevanāya āsevitā ārammaṇakaraṇavasena anubhūtā nivutthā nāma honti. Te pana duvidhā saparaviññāṇagocaratāyāti ubhayepi te dassetuṃ ‘‘attano’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘attano viññāṇena viññātā’’ti vatvā ‘‘paricchinnā’’ti vacanaṃ ye te gocaranivāsena nivutthadhammā, na te kevalaṃ viññāṇena viññātamattā, atha kho yathā pubbe nāmagottavaṇṇaliṅgāhārādīhi visesehi paricchedakārikāya paññāya paricchijja gahitā, tathevetaṃ ñāṇaṃ paricchijja gaṇhātīti imassa atthassa dīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Paraviññāṇaviññātāpi vā nivutthāti sambandho. Na kevalaṃ attanova viññāṇena, atha kho paresaṃ viññāṇena viññātāpīti attho. Idhāpi ‘‘paricchinnā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ, paresampi vā viññāṇena viññātā paricchinnāti. Tassa ca gahaṇe payojanaṃ vuttanayeneva vattabbaṃ.
而且,因为那些是在过去生中被他人所识知、所区别的,而他们即使已般涅槃,那些识知他们的人,依其当时现存的相续,也能了知他们于过去的流转,为了显示作为宿住随念智之境的、已达极点的过去生,故说“对断径者之随念等”。断径者即正等觉者,对他们的随念是断径者随念。“以‘等’字摄取了独觉与佛弟子的随念”,有些人这样说。然而,一切断径者都是于无余依涅槃界般涅槃、已断轮回之道者,对他们的随念,即是对他们修行的随念。而那个修行,简略而言,其特征是执取六境,这些在此以“他人之识所识知的执取”所摄。因此,应知:在过去生中,非以自己之识所识知的一切已般涅槃的佛、独觉、佛弟子之随念,即是断径者随念。而在此以“等”字,则摄取了在过去生中非以自己之识所识知、也未般涅槃者,不依现存诸蕴之次第,而以跳跃方式所作的随念。然而,这些如前所述的断径者随念等,唯诸佛能得。因为在过去,诸佛世尊曾如此观见、如此修习道、证得果与涅槃、如此调伏所化者,对此,他人之智无论如何皆无由通达。然而,那些在过去生中以自己之识所识知者,即使已般涅槃,由于系属于蕴,弟子们仍能随念。以何种念而忆念过去生,那即是宿住随念,应引来连接。我引摄,即令心从禅那的所缘移开,朝向过去生而派遣,使心倾向于过去生、趣向过去生、归向过去生,这是意义。显示巴利原文
Te ca kho yasmā atītāsu eva jātīsu aññehi viññātā paricchinnā, te ca parinibbutāpi honti, yehi te viññātā, tesaṃ tadā vattamānasantānānusārena tesampi atīte pavatti viññāyatīti sikhāppattaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇassa visayabhūtaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇādīsū’’ti vuttaṃ. Chinnavaṭumakā sammāsambuddhā, tesaṃ anussaraṇaṃ chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Ādisaddena paccekabuddhabuddhasāvakānussaraṇāni gayhantī’’ti keci vadanti. Chinnavaṭumakā pana sabbeva anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbutā chinnasaṃsāramaggattā, tesaṃ anussaraṇaṃ nāma tesaṃ paṭipattiyā anussaraṇaṃ. Sā pana paṭipatti saṅkhepato chaḷārammaṇaggahaṇalakkhaṇāti tāni idha paraviññāṇaviññātaggahaṇena gahitāni. Tasmā purimāsu jātīsu attano viññāṇena aviññātānaṃ parinibbutānaṃ sabbesampi buddhapaccekabuddhasāvakānaṃ anussaraṇaṃ chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇanti veditabbaṃ. Ādi-saddena panettha purimāsu jātīsu attano viññāṇena aviññātānaṃ aparinibbutānampi vattamānakkhandhapaṭipāṭiyā agantvā sīhokkantikavasena anussaraṇaṃ gahitaṃ, ime pana yathāvuttachinnavaṭumakānussaraṇādayo buddhānaṃyeva labbhanti. Na hi atīte buddhā bhagavanto evaṃ vipassiṃsu, evaṃ maggaṃ bhāvesuṃ, phalanibbānāni sacchākaṃsu, evaṃ veneyye vinesunti ettha sabbathā aññesaṃ ñāṇassa gati atthīti. Ye pana purimāsu jātīsu attanova viññāṇena viññātā, te parinibbutepi khandhapaṭibaddhattā sāvakā anussarantiyeva. Yāya satiyā pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati, sā pubbenivāsānussatīti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Abhinīharinti cittaṃ jhānārammaṇato apanetvā pubbenivāsābhimukhaṃ pesesiṃ, pubbenivāsaninnaṃ pubbenivāsapoṇaṃ pubbenivāsapabbhāraṃ akāsinti attho.
巴利文中“abhininnāmesi”一词,因其为最高人称的用法,所以此处将“so”结合“我”来解释,义便明了,故说“so ahaṃ(那是我)”。“Anekavidhaṃ”是指依种种有、生处、趣、识住、有情居等而有多类。“Pakārehīti”是指连同名称、种姓等形态一起。此处与“saha(一起)”连用,为具格。“已转起”即通过说法而转起。因此说“已赞叹”,意为已详细阐述。“Nivāsaṃ”是包含内部区分的总称;为了显示其差别,说“处处居住的相续”。“随行、随行”即以智随行、一再随行。“Anudevā”即是“anu”本身,“da”字母是随连声规则而加入的。说了“abhininnāmesi”之后,又说“anussarāmi”,这表明“anu”一词显示了心才转向便立即生起忆念,因此说“显示心一转向,立即便忆念”。应当说明其前行准备:“想要忆念宿住的初学比丘,在午后托钵返回,独处静居,依次证入四禅,从作为神通基础的第四禅出定后,应作意最后一座。”应以此方式作为宿住随念的前行。显示巴利原文
Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘abhininnāmesi’’nti uttamapurisappayogattā ‘‘so’’ti ettha ahaṃsaddo ānetvā vuccamāno tadattho pākaṭo hotīti ‘‘so aha’’nti vuttaṃ. Anekavidhanti nānābhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsādivasena bahuvidhaṃ. Pakārehīti nāmagottādiākārehi saddhiṃ. Sahayoge cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Pavattitanti desanāvasena pavattitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘saṃvaṇṇita’’nti, vitthāritanti attho. Nivāsanti antogadhabhedasāmaññavacanametanti te bhede byāpanicchāvasena saṅgahetvā dassento ‘‘tattha tattha nivutthasantāna’’nti āha. Anugantvā anugantvāti ñāṇagatiyā anugantvā anugantvā. Anudevāti anu eva, da-kāro padasandhivasena āgato. ‘‘Abhininnāmesi’’nti vatvā ‘‘anussarāmī’’ti vuttattā cittassa abhinīhārasamanantarabhāvasaraṇaṃ anusaddo dīpetīti āha ‘‘citte abhininnāmitamatte eva sarāmīti dassetī’’ti. Parikammaṃ vattabbaṃ siyāti ‘‘pubbenivāsaṃ anussaritukāmena ādikammikena bhikkhunā pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantena rahogatena paṭisallīnena paṭipāṭiyā cattāri jhānāni samāpajjitvā abhiññāpādakacatutthajjhānato vuṭṭhāya sabbapacchimā nisajjā āvajjitabbā’’ti evamādinā pubbenivāsañāṇassa parikammabhūtaṃ pubbakaraṇaṃ vattabbaṃ bhaveyya.
“Āraddhappakāradassanatthe”是指为了显示已开始忆念的宿住之种种差别。“Ekampi jātiṃ”是指即使一生、一有。因为那是由单一业所产生、以执取和舍弃为界限、包含内在法差别的蕴相续,在此处被理解为“生”,由“生起”故称为“生”。因此说“即使一生……蕴相续”。“Parihāyamāno”是指正在耗尽、正在灭去。“Kappo”是指无数劫。它实质上是时间,应知它是依当时转起的诸行之灭尽而说其灭。“Vaḍḍhamāno vivaṭṭakappo”在此处也是同样的道理。然而,在“时间消耗,时间吞噬众生,一切皆共”等语句中,时间也被称为灭尽,但此处并非此意,因为会导致非所愿的过失。“Saṃvaṭṭo”是灭尽、破坏,“saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī”是从灭尽之后如是安住者。因为是它的根本,即因为它是在前的。“Vivaṭṭo”是展开、生起,或增长。显示巴利原文
Āraddhappakāradassanattheti anussarituṃ āraddhassa pubbenivāsassa pabhedadassanatthe. Ekampi jātinti ekampi bhavaṃ. So hi ekakammanibbatto ādānanikkhepaparicchinno antogadhadhammappabhedo khandhappabandho idha ‘‘jātī’’ti adhippeto jāyatīti jātīti katvā. Tenāha ‘‘ekampi…pe… khandhasantāna’’nti. Parihāyamānoti khīyamāno vinassamāno. Kappoti asaṅkhyeyyakappo. So pana atthato kālo, tadā pavattamānasaṅkhāravasenassa parihāni veditabbā. Vaḍḍhamāno vivaṭṭakappoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Yo pana ‘‘kālaṃ khepeti, kālo ghasati bhūtāni, sabbāneva sahattanā’’ti (jā. 1.2.190) ādīsu kālassapi khayo vuccati, so idha nādhippeto aniṭṭhappasaṅgato. Saṃvaṭṭanaṃ vinassanaṃ saṃvaṭṭo, saṃvaṭṭato uddhaṃ tathāṭhāyī saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Tammūlakattāti taṃpubbakattā. Vivaṭṭanaṃ nibbattanaṃ, vaḍḍhanaṃ vā vivaṭṭo.
以火而灭,故为火灭。灭的界限,即灭的范围。正在灭,即正在破坏。总是,即一切时,指在三种灭劫之时。一个佛刹,此处为确定所说而显示,故说“佛刹有三种”等。在如来结生智等智之威力被福果所激发而自然展现的任何地方,那整个都是佛芽出生的刹土,因此说“生刹以一万轮围为界”。威力转起,此处是说,具有神通、心得自在者,在属于威令刹的任何轮围中站立,为自己作护,即使去到其他轮围,所作的护依然有效,故如此说。或者,在一轮围中站立,为一切众生作护时,在威令刹中,护的威力确实能遍及一切众生,那里的诸天接受护,因此说“威力转起”。所谓“或随其所欲”,是世尊在宣说于一个刹那中以声使知、并显示自身容貌时,针对所缘刹而说“或随其所欲”。在何处,即在无边际的所缘刹中。随其所欲而忆念,即由于佛智唯系于欲念而转,故欲忆念什么,即忆念什么。一个威令刹灭尽,这是说横向灭尽的界限。正在安立,即正在展开、正在生起。它的灭尽与安立,在《清净道论》中已说,我们也在前面“世间解”的释义处随缘说过,故此处不述。显示巴利原文
Tejena saṃvaṭṭo tejosaṃvaṭṭo. Saṃvaṭṭasīmāti saṃvaṭṭanamariyādā. Saṃvaṭṭatīti vinassati. Sadāti sabbakālaṃ, tīsupi saṃvaṭṭakālesūti attho. Ekaṃ buddhakkhettanti idha yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, taṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘buddhakkhettaṃ nāma tividha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Yattake ṭhāne tathāgatassa paṭisandhiñāṇādiñāṇānubhāvo puññaphalasamuttejito saraseneva parijambhati, taṃ sabbampi buddhaṅkurassa nibbattanakkhettaṃ nāmāti āha ‘‘jātikkhettaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷapariyanta’’nti. Ānubhāvo pavattatīti idha iddhimā cetovasippatto āṇākkhettapariyāpanne yattha katthaci cakkavāḷe ṭhatvā attano atthāya parittaṃ katvā tattheva aññaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ gatopi kataparitto eva hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Atha vā tattha ekasmiṃ cakkavāḷe ṭhatvā sabbasattānaṃ atthāya paritte kate āṇākkhette sabbasattānaṃ abhisambhuṇātveva parittānubhāvo tattha devatāhi parittānaṃ sampaṭicchitabbatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘ānubhāvo pavattatī’’ti. Yaṃ yāvatā vā pana ākaṅkheyyāti vuttanti yaṃ visayakkhettaṃ sandhāya ekasmiṃyeva khaṇe sarena abhiviññāpanaṃ attano rūpadassanañca paṭijānantena bhagavatā ‘‘yāvatā vā pana ākaṅkheyyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yatthāti yasmiṃ padese anantāparimāṇe visayakkhette. Yaṃ yaṃ ākaṅkhati, taṃ taṃ anussaratīti ākaṅkhamattapaṭibaddhavuttitāya buddhañāṇassa yaṃ yaṃ anussarituṃ icchati, taṃ taṃ anussarati. Ekaṃ āṇākkhettaṃ vinassatīti iminā tiriyato saṃvaṭṭamānaparicchedo vutto. Saṇṭhahantanti vivaṭṭamānaṃ jāyamānaṃ. Tassa vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca visuddhimagge vuttanti amhehipi heṭṭhā ‘‘lokavidū’’ti imassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanādhikāre pasaṅgato vuttattā idha na vuccati.
如此以连带方式阐明了成坏等之后,现在为显示他们依所证得而随念的方式,便说“然而,那些所说的灭与成等”。其中,“etesu”是处格表简别,因为从灭劫与成劫的集合中,简别出多种灭劫等。“amumhi saṃvaṭṭakappe”此处应知省略了“vā”字(或)。由此,以不确定之义,亦摄取了其他无量劫。或者,“amumhi saṃvaṭṭakappe”是因为在巴利文中从灭劫开始取用,故如此说。因为在其中,也能见到他在有等中轮回了一段时间。或者,当灭劫正在发生时,他在哪些有等处曾得往生,应视为对此的显示。在“bhave vā”等句中,是指在欲有等有中,或在卵生等生中,或在灭等趣中,或在异身异想等识住中,或在有情居处中,或在刹帝利等有情种类中。因为此宿住随念智是依世尊而来,所以为了通过名称等显示其义,而说“如是名,即Vessantaro或Jotipālo”等。或食米饭肉食,这是指在家时所说。或食落果,是指苦行者时所说。食落果,即食自己掉落的果实。在“有贪、无贪等差别”中,有贪是指依着于家而生起的喜等,无贪是指依着于出离而生起的喜等。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pasaṅgena saṃvaṭṭādike pakāsetvā idāni yathādhigataṃ tesaṃ anussaraṇākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye panete saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭā vuttā’’tiādimāha. Tattha etesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappasamudāyato anekesaṃ saṃvaṭṭakappādīnaṃ niddhāriyamānattā. Amumhi saṃvaṭṭakappeti ettha vā-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho daṭṭhabbo. Tena ca aniyamatthena itarāsaṃ asaṅkhyeyyānampi saṅgaho siddhoti. Atha vā amumhi saṃvaṭṭakappeti idaṃ saṃvaṭṭakappassa ādito pāḷiyaṃ gahitattā vuttaṃ. Tatthāpi hi imassa katipayakālaṃ bhavādīsu saṃsaraṇaṃ upalabbhatīti. Saṃvaṭṭakappe vā vattamāne yesu bhavādīsu imassa upapatti ahosi, taṃdassanametaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Bhave vātiādīsu kāmādibhave vā aṇḍajādiyoniyā vā devādigatiyā vā nānattakāyanānattasaññīādiviññāṇaṭṭhitiyā vā sattāvāse vā khattiyādisattanikāye vā. Yasmā idaṃ bhagavato vasena pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ āgataṃ, tasmā tasseva nāmādivasena atthaṃ yojetvā dassento āha ‘‘evaṃnāmoti vessantaro vā jotipālo vā’’tiādi. Sālimaṃsodanāhāro vāti gihikālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Pavattaphalabhojano vāti tāpasādikālaṃ sandhāya. Pavattaphalabhojanoti sayampatitaphalāhāro. Sāmisanirāmisādippabhedānanti ettha sāmisā gehassitasomanassādayo, nirāmisā nekkhammassitasomanassādayo. Ādi-saddena vivekajasamādhijasukhādīnaṃ saṅgaho.
为了将前面总说已述之义分别开示,而说“atha vā”等。其中,“amutrāsi”是总说,或省略了“byāpaniccha”之音,意为“amutra amutra āsi”(于此处、于彼处有)。对于以逆次第随念宿世而上升者,随其所欲而随念;在此,“上升者”指以逆观之智向上回溯宿世者。“回转者”指以随念宿世之力,随其所欲而行之后返回者。“观察”指对已随念、未随念之事的审察。“因此”是回顾所述之义而作为原因,意为“因为这是回转者的观察状态”。“idhūpapattiyā”指在此最后有的结生。“anantara”指紧接过去之后。“amutrā”意为“在某某有中”。“udapādi”意为“生起”。“tāhi devatāhi”指与那些兜率天众一起。“ekagotto”指与兜率天众同族姓。大菩萨相续的最后阶段,其令生于天界的业,确实不被不善业所侵扰,基于此意,说“然而苦仅是行苦而已”。然而,即使是大福德的天子,在预兆出现时等,也必定会有不可意所缘的交集,因此不能说“有时连苦苦也不可能存在”,应知诸法之生灭即是行。显示巴利原文
Heṭṭhā sāmaññato vuttamevatthaṃ vibhajitvā dassetukāmo ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha amutrāsinti sāmaññaniddesoyaṃ, byāpanicchālopo vā, amutra amutra āsinti vuttaṃ hoti. Anupubbena ārohantassa yāvadicchakaṃ anussaraṇanti ettha ārohantassāti paṭilomato ñāṇena pubbenivāsaṃ ārohantassa. Paṭinivattantassāti pubbenivāsaṃ anussaraṇavasena yāvadicchakaṃ gantvā paccāgacchantassa. Paccavekkhaṇanti anussaritānussaritassa paccavekkhaṇaṃ. Tasmāti vuttassevatthassa kāraṇabhāvena paccāmasanaṃ, paṭinivattantassa paccavekkhaṇabhāvatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Idhūpapattiyāti idha carimabhave upapattiyā. Anantaranti atītānantaramāha. Amutrāti amukasmiṃ bhaveti attho. Udapādinti uppajjiṃ. Tāhi devatāhīti tusitadevatāhi. Ekagottoti tusitagottena ekagotto. Mahābodhisattānaṃ santānassa pariyosānāvatthāyaṃ devalokūpapattijanakaṃ nāma akusalena kammunā anupaddutameva hotīti adhippāyena ‘‘dukkhaṃ pana saṅkhāradukkhamattamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahāpuññānampi pana devaputtānaṃ pubbanimittuppattikālādīsu aniṭṭhārammaṇasamāyogo hotiyevāti ‘‘kadāci dukkhadukkhassapi sambhavo natthī’’ti na sakkā vattuṃ, dhammānaṃ uppādanirodhasaṅkhāradukkhanti veditabbaṃ. Sattapaññāsa…pe… pariyantoti idaṃ manussavassagaṇanāvasena vuttaṃ. Tattha devānaṃ vassagaṇanāya pana catusahassameva.
“iti”这是对所述之义的例示,而且为显示“是如其所应,而非如其次第”,便说“依名与族姓”等。“uddisīyati”:因为仅凭看见不能了知,当被问“此人何名”时,便以名和族姓回答“Tissa Gotamo”,故称“被指示”。“vaṇṇādīhi”指以容貌、食物、感受、寿量等差别。“sāmo”中的“iti”声是“等”义,或“种类”义。由此显示“如是等、如是种种差别”。“nāmagottaṃ uddeso”:众生依此而被指示,故指示即是名与族姓。“itare ākārā”:仅凭看见,众生便依这些而被了知,故其余容貌等是相状。“并非无差别地”:为了详细开示略说之义,而说“外道们”等。其中,“titthiyā”指其他外道,他们主张业论、主张所作论,或是苦行者等。因为外道们仅在《梵网经》等中所说的四十劫的成坏中才有随念,故说“不能超越此”,并说明其原因:“因为智慧薄弱”等。由此显示:修习毗婆舍那是宿住随念智的殊胜之因。正因如此,由于智慧强,除了上首弟子和大弟子之外,其余普通弟子也能随念百劫、千劫。因显示巴利原文
Itīti vuttatthanidassanametaṃ, tañca kho yathārahato, na yathānupubbatoti dassento ‘‘nāmagottavasenā’’tiādimāha. Uddisīyatīti disvāva aviññeyyattā ‘‘ayaṃ ko nāmo’’ti pucchite ‘‘tisso gotamo’’ti nāmagottena uddisīyati. Vaṇṇādīhīti vaṇṇāhāravedayitāyuparicchedehi. Sāmotīti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā. Tena evamādievaṃpakāranānattatoti dassitaṃ hoti. Nāmagottaṃ uddesoti uddisīyati satto etenāti uddeso nāmagottaṃ. Itare ākārāti ākarīyati disvāva satto viññāyati etehīti itare vaṇṇādayo ākārā. ‘‘No ca kho avisesenā’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamevatthaṃ vitthārena dassento āha ‘‘titthiyā hī’’tiādi. Tattha titthiyāti aññatitthiyā. Te pana kammavādino kiriyavādino tāpasādayo. Yasmā titthiyānaṃ brahmajālādīsu cattālīsāya eva saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭānaṃ anussaraṇaṃ āgataṃ, tasmā ‘‘na tato para’’nti vatvā tattha kāraṇaṃ vadanto ‘‘dubbalapaññattā’’tiādimāha. Tena vipassanābhiyogo pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇassa visesakāraṇanti dasseti. Tatoyeva ca balavapaññattā ṭhapetvā aggasāvakamahāsāvake itare pakatisāvakā kappasatampi kappasahassampi anussarantiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Teneva vuttaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.402) ‘‘pakatisāvakā kappasatampi kappasahassampi anussarantiyeva balavapaññattā’’ti. Ettako hi tesaṃ abhinīhāroti kappānaṃ satasahassampi tadadhikaṃ ekaṃ dve ca asaṅkhyeyyānīti kālavasena evaṃparimāṇo yathākkamaṃ tesaṃ mahāsāvakaaggasāvakapaccekabuddhānaṃ puññañāṇābhinīhāro, sāvakapaccekabodhipāramitā siddhā. Yadi bodhisambhārasambharaṇakālaparicchinno tesaṃ tesaṃ ariyānaṃ abhiññāñāṇavibhavo, evaṃ sante buddhānampissa paricchedatā āpannāti āha ‘‘buddhānaṃ pana paricchedo natthī’’ti. ‘‘Yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 3.5) vacanato sabbaññutaññāṇassa viya buddhānaṃ abhiññāñāṇānampi savisaye paricchedo nāma natthīti tattha yaṃ yaṃ ñātuṃ icchanti, taṃ taṃ jānanti eva. Atha vā satipi kālaparicchede kāraṇūpāyakosallapariggahādinā sātisayattā mahābodhisambhārānaṃ paññāpāramitāya pavattiānubhāvassa paricchedo nāma natthi, kuto taṃnibbattānaṃ abhiññāñāṇānanti āha ‘‘buddhānaṃ pana paricchedo natthī’’ti. Atīte ‘‘ettakānaṃ kappānaṃ asaṅkhyeyyānī’’ti evaṃ kālaparicchedo natthi anāgate anāgataṃsañāṇassa viya. Tenāha ‘‘yāva icchanti tāva sarantī’’ti.
如此,从时间差别的角度说明了五种人的宿住随念之后,现在为显示依所缘取相而有的现行差别,他说“外道们”等。“仅随念蕴的次第”:在此,蕴的次第即诸蕴的顺序,且是从死殁开始,依生起的次第。然而,有人认为此处“威仪路的次第即是蕴的次第”。为了通过遮遣来阐明所述之义,才说“舍弃次第”等。其中,“依死与结生”:即对于自己或他人的一一生命体,见到死之后,中间不触及任何事物,唯取结生的方式。然而,正如盲人不放舍手杖而行,他们亦不舍离蕴的次第而随念,因此说:“因为他们如同盲人,不能随意到达所欲之处。”“弟子”一词总括普通弟子、大弟子与上首弟子。因为普通弟子也依蕴的次第随念,也依死与结生而跳跃——这是由于他们智慧强利;八十位大弟子也是如此。然而,两位上首弟子并无依蕴次第的必要。他们见到一个生命体的死,便见到其结生;又见到另一个的死,便见到其结生;如此,他们也依死与结生跳跃而行。正如秋季正午时分,在四肘深的屋内,有眼之人对色境极为明了,这是世间共许的。然而,更微细的隔墙等色境,对他而言或许非其境界;但对显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pañcannaṃ janānaṃ pubbenivāsānussaraṇaṃ kālavibhāgato dassetvā idāni ārammaṇaggahaṇavasenassa pavattivisesaṃ dassento ‘‘titthiyā cā’’tiādimāha. Khandhapaṭipāṭimeva sarantīti ettha khandhapaṭipāṭi khandhānaṃ anukkamo, sā ca kho cutito paṭṭhāya uppaṭipāṭivasena. Keci panettha ‘‘iriyāpathapaṭipāṭi khandhapaṭipāṭī’’ti vadanti. Vuttamevatthaṃ byatirekato vibhāvento āha ‘‘paṭipāṭiṃ muñcitvā’’tiādi. Tattha cutipaṭisandhivasenāti attano parassa vā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ attabhāve cutiṃ disvā antarā kiñci anāmasitvā paṭisandhiyā eva gahaṇavasena. Yathā pana andhā yaṭṭhiṃ amuñcitvā gacchanti, evaṃ te khandhapaṭipāṭiṃ amuñcitvāva sarantīti āha ‘‘tesañhi andhānaṃ viya icchitappadesokkamanaṃ natthī’’ti. Sāvakāti pakatisāvakāpi mahāsāvakāpi aggasāvakāpi sāmaññato vuttā. Pakatisāvakāpi hi khandhapaṭipāṭiyāpi anussaranti , cutipaṭisandhivasenapi saṅkamanti balavapaññattā, tathā asītimahāsāvakā. Dvinnaṃ pana aggasāvakānaṃ khandhapaṭipāṭikiccaṃ natthi. Ekassa attabhāvassa cutiṃ disvā paṭisandhiṃ passanti, puna aparassa cutiṃ disvā paṭisandhinti evaṃ cutipaṭisandhivasenapi saṅkamantā gacchanti. Yathā nāma saradasamaye ṭhitamajjhanhikavelāyaṃ caturatanike gehe cakkhumato purisassa rūpagataṃ supākaṭameva hotīti lokasiddhametaṃ. Siyā pana tassa sukhumataratirokuṭṭādibhedassa rūpagatassa agocaratā, na tveva buddhānaṃ ñātuṃ icchitassa ñeyyassa agocaratā, atha kho taṃ ñāṇālokena obhāsitaṃ hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya supākaṭaṃ suvibhūtameva hoti, tathā ñeyyāvaraṇassa suppahīnattāti āha ‘‘buddhā panā’’tiādi.
此处,“以狮子跃入之势”是指以狮子行走扑击的方式。“无论欲知何种境地”,即无论在哪一劫、哪一生中,所欲知的那一境地。“他们能忆念彼一切”,是说他们对所欲知者,皆能忆念,无有不能忆念。因为诸佛既无需依蕴次第而行,亦无需依死与结生而转。于无数百千万劫中,无论下方或上方,所欲知的任何境地,彼彼皆自然显现。因此,正如诵习《贝叶经》时,取“初禅……乃至第五禅”等统括始终而摄略持诵,并非逐句详诵;同样地,即使历经无数百千万劫,也像《贝叶经》那样摄略,于所欲知之处,以智跃入一一境地,以狮子跃入之势而行。当如此行时,其智犹如一位精于射穿毛发的、如萨拉邦伽般的弓箭手所放之箭,在途中不挂碍于树木藤蔓等,直中靶心,无滞无偏;同样,在中间的诸有生中,其智无滞无偏,直取所欲知的每一境地。显示巴利原文
Tattha sīhokkantavasenāti sīhagatipatanavasena. Yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ ākaṅkhantīti yasmiṃ kappe yasmiṃ bhave yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ jānituṃ icchanti. Taṃ sabbaṃ sarantiyevāti ñātuṃ icchitaṃ taṃ sabbaṃ sarantiyeva, na na saranti. Buddhānañhi neva khandhapaṭipāṭikiccaṃ, na ca cutipaṭisandhivasena saṅkamanakiccaṃ atthi. Tesañhi anekāsu kappakoṭīsu heṭṭhā vā upari vā yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ icchanti, taṃ taṃ pākaṭameva hoti. Tasmā yathā peyyālapāḷiṃ paṭhantā ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ…pe… pañcamaṃ jhāna’’ntiādipariyosānameva gaṇhantā saṅkhipitvā sajjhāyanti, na anupadaṃ, evaṃ anekāpi kappakoṭiyo peyyālapāḷiṃ viya saṅkhipitvā yaṃ yaṃ icchanti, tattha tattheva ñāṇena okkamantā sīhokkantavasena gacchanti. Evaṃ gacchantānañca tesaṃ ñāṇaṃ yathā nāma katavālavedhiparicayassa sarabhaṅgasadisassa dhanuggahassa khitto saro antarantarā rukkhalatādīsu asajjamāno lakkheyeva patati na sajjati na virajjhati, evaṃ antarantarāsu jātīsu na sajjati na virajjhati, asajjamānaṃ avirajjhamānaṃ icchiticchitaṭṭhānaṃyeva gaṇhāti.
过去世中的诸蕴,以及与之相关的名姓等一切,皆被统摄于「宿住」一词中,故说「令知什么?令知宿住」。愚痴以覆障之义,如黑暗般,故说「彼即愚痴」等。以光照为作之义故,应作即作,光照即是作,即光照之作,谓依自因缘而以光照之性令生起之义。其余为赞叹语,因阐明对治、摧破、转起之殊胜而说。无明已破——由此应知,以了知为义之明,此义亦被显示。何以故?因明已生起——由此显示,明之对治为无明,且此对治性,以应断之义,明为能断之义。此理亦适用于其余两句——以此指示「黑暗已破、已灭。何以故?因光明已生起」之义。以诸烦恼之热恼、遍烧之义,精进为热勤,故说「以精进热勤,为热勤者」,即具精进者之义。心已派遣者,即心已放舍于所欲义之成就者。如「不放逸、热勤、已派遣心者而住」,意谓「其他任何如我者亦然」。勤修断行者,即致力于正勤者。此处其余,因义显、依所说之理,易可了知。显示巴利原文
Atītabhave khandhā tappaṭibaddhanāmagottāni ca sabbaṃ pubbenivāsantveva saṅgahitānīti āha ‘‘kiṃ viditaṃ karoti? Pubbenivāsa’’nti. Moho paṭicchādakaṭṭhena tamo viya tamoti āha ‘‘sveva moho’’tiādi. Obhāsakaraṇaṭṭhenāti kātabbato karaṇaṃ, obhāsova karaṇaṃ obhāsakaraṇaṃ, attano paccayehi obhāsabhāvena nibbattetabbaṭṭhenāti attho. Sesaṃ pasaṃsāvacananti paṭipakkhavidhamanapavattivisesānaṃ bodhanato vuttaṃ. Avijjā vihatāti etena vijānanaṭṭhena vijjāti ayampi attho dīpitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā vijjā uppannāti etena vijjāpaṭipakkhā avijjā, paṭipakkhatā cassā pahātabbabhāvena vijjāya ca pahāyakabhāvenāti dasseti. Esa nayo itarasmimpi padadvayeti iminā tamo vihato vinaṭṭho. Kasmā? Yasmā āloko uppannoti imamatthaṃ atidisati. Kilesānaṃ ātāpanaparitāpanaṭṭhena vīriyaṃ ātāpoti āha ‘‘vīriyātāpena ātāpino’’ti, vīriyavatoti attho. Pesitacittassāti yathādhippetatthasiddhiṃ pativissaṭṭhacittassa. Yathā appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharatoti aññassapi kassaci mādisassāti adhippāyo. Padhānānuyogassāti sammappadhānamanuyuttassa. Sesamettha uttānattā vuttanayattā ca suviññeyyameva.
天眼智之论显示巴利原文
Dibbacakkhuñāṇakathā
13 「于死」者,即于死时;「于生」者,即于结生时。此处所用为近处的地格,意指死刹那附近、结生刹那附近。正如后文将说:「然他们近死者」等。以彼智,即以天眼智。正是以天眼智了知有情的死与生。应说明其遍作:「欲生起天眼智的初学善男子,应将作为神通基础的禅那——其以遍相为所缘——以一切行相令堪能引导;然后于火遍、白遍、光明遍这三遍中,取一近处,作为近行禅的所行境,令其增长、安立」等。如是当说天眼智的遍作。显示巴利原文
13.Cutiyāti cavane. Upapāteti upapajjane. Samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ, cutikkhaṇasāmantā upapattikkhaṇasāmantā cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘ye pana āsannacutikā’’tiādi. Yena ñāṇenāti yena dibbacakkhuñāṇena. Dibbacakkhuñāṇeneva hi sattānaṃ cuti ca upapatti ca ñāyati. Parikammaṃ vattabbaṃ siyāti ‘‘dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ uppādetukāmena ādikammikena kulaputtena kasiṇārammaṇaṃ abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ sabbākārena abhinīhārakkhamaṃ katvā tejokasiṇaṃ odātakasiṇaṃ ālokakasiṇanti imesu tīsu kasiṇesu aññataraṃ āsannaṃ kātabbaṃ, upacārajjhānagocaraṃ katvā vaḍḍhetvā ṭhapetabba’’ntiādinā dibbacakkhuñāṇassa parikammaṃ vattabbaṃ bhaveyya.
「彼我」者,即彼已作心引导之我。「以与天相似故」:于天而有者为天,指诸天的净色眼;因与彼天眼相似,故说。说「以与天相似故」,是为显示下劣譬喻,而此眼实比诸天的天眼更具大威力。今为阐明其与天相似,故说「诸天之」等。其中,善行业所生者:因信乐增上、见清净、见功德等成就,善行故,由能令生天的善业所生。黄痰、胆汁、血等——「等」字含摄风病等。无滞碍,即无恼害。由于无黄痰等恼害,且业殊胜,当知为离随烦恼。离随烦恼过失之业,犹如无草等过失的种子,果报殊胜而无杂染。且以因的转喻,其果亦如是称说,如「白业有白报」。于远处亦——「亦」字含摄能领受微细所缘的能力。净色眼,即以四大的净色为相之眼。精进修习力所生者:因唯以精进策励而成就,故一切善修习皆为精进修习;或具足勤行的神足修习,特为精进修习,依彼威力所生,是为精进修习力所生。智所成眼,即是智眼。即如彼者,因离随烦恼,且于远处亦能领受微细所缘,故与彼相似。显示巴利原文
So ahanti so katacittābhinīhāro ahaṃ. Dibbasadisattāti divi bhavanti dibbaṃ, devānaṃ pasādacakkhu, tena dibbena cakkhunā sadisattāti attho. Dibbasadisattāti ca hīnūpamādassanaṃ devatānaṃ dibbacakkhutopi imassa mahānubhāvattā. Idāni taṃ dibbasadisattaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘devatānañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sucaritakammanibbattanti saddhābahulatāvisuddhadiṭṭhitāānisaṃsadassāvitādisampattiyā suṭṭhu caritattā sucaritena devūpapattijanakena puññakammena nibbattaṃ. Pittasemharuhirādīhīti ādi-saddena vātarogādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Apalibuddhanti anupaddutaṃ. Pittādīhi anupaddutattā kammassa ca uḷāratāya upakkilesavimutti veditabbā. Upakkilesadosarahitañhi kammaṃ tiṇādidosarahitaṃ viya sassaṃ uḷāraphalaṃ anupakkiliṭṭhaṃ hoti. Kāraṇūpacārena cassa phalaṃ tathā voharīyati yathā ‘‘sukkaṃ sukkavipāka’’nti. Dūrepīti pi-saddena sukhumassapi ārammaṇassa sampaṭicchanasamatthataṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Pasādacakkhūti catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ pasādalakkhaṇaṃ cakkhu. Vīriyabhāvanābalanibbattanti vīriyārambhavaseneva ijjhanato sabbāpi kusalabhāvanā vīriyabhāvanā, padhānasaṅkhārasamannāgatā vā iddhipādabhāvanā visesato vīriyabhāvanā, tassā ānubhāvena nibbattaṃ vīriyabhāvanābalanibbattaṃ. Ñāṇamayaṃ cakkhu ñāṇacakkhu. Tādisamevāti upakkilesavimuttatāya dūrepi sukhumassapi ārammaṇassa sampaṭicchanasamatthatāya ca taṃsadisameva.
「以天住而得」者,即依称为天住的四禅之力而得,以此因由说其为天的状态。「以天住为所依」者,指依止具足八支、达到殊胜的、称为根本禅的天住而生起;或依止属于天住的、与自己相应的色界第四禅,以此为缘而依止——此处应如此理解其义。「以把握光明而有大光辉故,亦为天」者,即依遍光明的助力而得,且自身以智光遍照而有大光辉的状态,因此亦称为天。因为大光辉亦被称为天,如说「这天宫」等。「以大行故」者,即具有可敬的行程、令人惊叹的转起,此是含义。因其能见穿墙等事物,其转起实在令人惊叹。所谓「那一切」,他们说「是着眼于前文所说的五种含义而说」。然而有些人说:「通晓音声者,在光辉与行程等义中也认可divu音,故『以大光辉故、以大行故』正是针对此二者而说。因此『应依音声论而了知』这句话,是为了显示“照耀,故为天;运行而无碍地转起,故为天”这一含义。」但阿阇梨法护长老则说:显示巴利原文
Dibbavihāravasena paṭiladdhattāti dibbavihārasaṅkhātānaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena paṭiladdhattā. Iminā kāraṇavasenassa dibbabhāvamāha. Dibbavihārasannissitattāti aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgamena ukkaṃsagataṃ pādakajjhānasaṅkhātaṃ dibbavihāraṃ sannissāya pavattattā, dibbavihārapariyāpannaṃ vā attanā sampayuttaṃ rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānaṃ nissāya paccayabhūtaṃ sannissitattāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Ālokapariggahena mahājutikattāpi dibbanti kasiṇālokānuggahena pattabbattā sayaṃ ñāṇālokapharaṇabhāvena ca mahājutikabhāvatopi dibbanti attho. Mahājutikampi hi dibbanti vuccati ‘‘dibbamidaṃ byamha’’ntiādīsu. Mahāgatikattāti mahanīyagamanattā, vimhayanīyappavattikattāti attho. Vimhayanīyā hissa pavatti tirokuṭṭādigatarūpadassanato. Taṃ sabbanti ‘‘heṭṭhā vuttaṃ atthapañcakamapekkhitvā vutta’’nti vadanti. Keci pana ‘‘jutigatiatthesupi saddavidū divusaddaṃ icchantīti mahājutikattā mahāgatikattāti idameva dvayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, tasmā ‘saddasatthānusārena veditabba’nti idaṃ dibbati jotayatīti dibbaṃ, dibbati gacchati asajjamānaṃ pavattatīti dibbanti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ vutta’’nti vadanti. Ācariyadhammapālatthero pana –
为证得天眼,瑜伽行者修习遍作。从义理上说,此即克服其敌对法,故称为「胜利欲」。而证得天眼者具足神通,能如大目犍连长老等那样,堪能领受诸天言语并为其说法,从而在施与、领受的特征及言语运用中自在运作。因此,依住、胜利欲、言说、光辉、行程等义,成立此神通智的天眼性。通达音声者即于上述诸义中认取divu之音,故说「一切依音声论而了知」。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dibbacakkhulābhāya yogino parikammakaraṇaṃ tappaṭipakkhābhibhavassa atthato tassa vijayicchā nāma hoti, dibbacakkhulābhī ca iddhimā devatānaṃ vacanagahaṇakkhamanadhammadānavasena mahāmoggallānattherādayo viya dānaggahaṇalakkhaṇe vohāre ca pavatteyyāti evaṃ vihāravijayicchāvohārajutigatisaṅkhātānaṃ atthānaṃ vasena imassa abhiññāñāṇassa dibbacakkhubhāvasiddhito saddavidū ca tesu eva atthesu divusaddaṃ icchantīti ‘taṃ sabbaṃ saddasatthānusārena veditabba’nti vutta’’nti –
「以见之义」,即以色之见为义。因为众生以眼见色。如同肉眼有识依止,能似分辨平与不平般地转起,但此眼并非如此。此眼自身即能更殊胜地执行眼的作用,故说「由执行眼的作用而如同眼,故亦名眼」。「以见清净之因故」,为展开略说的含义,而说「因为此人」等。执取断见者,由于不见他世的转生,而执取断见:「此有情即于此处断灭,其余亦如此。」执取新有情出现见者,指获得禅那者,执取有情如无因而生。例如无想有情死后转生此处,后出家并获得神通,回忆宿世时,只见在此处的转生,不能忆念之后在无想有的转生,便执取新有情出现的见解:「我是无因而生,过去本不存在,今从无变为有情,其他有情也是如此。」同样,此人只见转生,不见死没,便执取新有情出现的见解。显示巴利原文
Dassanaṭṭhenāti rūpadassanabhāvena. Cakkhunā hi sattā rūpaṃ passanti. Yathā maṃsacakkhu viññāṇādhiṭṭhitaṃ samavisamaṃ ācikkhantaṃ viya pavattati, na tathā idaṃ. Idaṃ pana sayameva tato sātisayaṃ cakkhukiccakārīti āha ‘‘cakkhukiccakaraṇena cakkhumivātipi cakkhū’’ti. Diṭṭhivisuddhihetuttāti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhātīti parato uppattiyā adassanato ‘‘etthe vāyaṃ satto ucchinno, evamitarepī’’ti ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Navasattapātubhāvadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhātīti jhānalābhī adhiccasamuppanniko viya gaṇhāti. Yathā hi so asaññasattā cavitvā idhūpapanno pabbajito samāno abhiññālābhī hutvā pubbenivāsaṃ anussaranto idhūpapattimeva disvā tato paraṃ asaññabhave uppattiṃ anussaritumasakkonto ‘‘ahaṃ adhiccasamuppanno pubbe nāhosiṃ, somhi etarahi ahutvā sattatāya pariṇato, sesāpi sattā tādisāyevā’’ti abhinavasattapātubhāvadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, evamayampi upapātamattameva disvā cutiṃ apassanto navasattapātubhāvadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti.
现在,为以另一种方式说明清净的因,而说「或由远离十一种随烦恼」等。所谓「如所说」,即引《随烦恼经》中的圣典为证。在那里,世尊教导阿那律、难提、金毗罗这三位善男子时,开示道:「阿那律,你们是否不被这些所扰乱?我过去也曾被这些,以及依此而有的十一种随烦恼所扰乱。」显示巴利原文
Idāni aññathāpi visuddhikāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ekādasaupakkilesavirahato vā’’tiādi. Yathāhāti upakkilesasutte āgatapāḷiṃ nidasseti. Tattha hi anuruddho nandiyo kimiloti ime tayo kulaputte āmantetvā dhammaṃ dassentena ‘‘anuruddhā tumhe kiṃ imehi na āluḷissanti, ahampi imehi upādāya ekādasahi upakkilesehi āluḷitapubbo’’ti dassetuṃ –
「阿那律,我往昔未成正觉、还是菩萨时,也曾觉知光明,见到诸色。然而,那光明不久便消失,见色也消失。阿那律,当时我这样想:『是什么原因、什么缘,使我的光明消失,见色也消失?』阿那律,当时我这样想:『我生起了疑;以疑为因,我的定退失;定退失时,光明就消失,见色也消失。我当如此行,令疑不再生起。』显示巴利原文
‘‘Ahampi sudaṃ anuruddhā pubbeva sambodhā anabhisambuddho bodhisattova samāno obhāsañceva sañjānāmi dassanañca rūpānaṃ, so kho pana me obhāso na cirasseva antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṃ. Tassa mayhaṃ anuruddhā etadahosi ‘ko nu kho hetu, ko paccayo, yena me obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpāna’nti. Tassa mayhaṃ anuruddhā etadahosi ‘vicikicchā kho me udapādi, vicikicchādhikaraṇañca me samādhi cavi, samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṃ, sohaṃ tathā karissāmi, yathā me puna na vicikicchā uppajjissatī’ti.
「阿那律,我于是不放逸、具足热忱、精勤而住,觉知光明,见到诸色。然而,那光明不久便消失,见色也消失。阿那律,当时我这样想:『是什么原因、什么缘,使我的光明消失,见色也消失?』阿那律,当时我这样想:『我生起了不作意;以不作意为因,我的定退失;定退失时,光明就消失,见色也消失。我当如此行,令疑不再生起,令不作意不再生起。』显示巴利原文
‘‘So kho ahaṃ anuruddhā appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto obhāsañceva sañjānāmi dassanañca rūpānaṃ, so kho pana me obhāso na cirasseva antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṃ. Tassa mayhaṃ anuruddhā etadahosi ‘ko nu kho hetu, ko paccayo, yena me obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpāna’nti. Tassa mayhaṃ anuruddhā etadahosi ‘amanasikāro kho me udapādi, amanasikārādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi, samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṃ, sohaṃ tathā karissāmi, yathā me puna na vicikicchā uppajjissati na amanasikāro’’’ti –
从《中部》第三册第241经的教导开始,随后说出这样的话:“阿那律,我如此了知‘疑是心的随烦恼’后……”等等。显示巴利原文
Ādinā (ma. ni. 3.241) desanaṃ ārabhitvā idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘so kho ahaṃ anuruddhā vicikicchā cittassa upakkilesoti iti viditvā’’tiādi.
此处(《中部·注疏》第三册241页)所说的“疑”,是指大士增长光明、以天眼观察种种色法时,所生起的“这究竟是什么”的疑惑。然而,由于作意的方式,色法呈现于我;在观察色法时,疑便生起。因此,心想“现在我将不作意任何事物”而保持沉默。针对这种趋于沉默的状态,佛陀教示“不作意”。“昏沉睡眠”,是指对任何事物都不作意时所生起的昏沉睡眠。因为处于那种状态的人,缺少具有扩展力的作意,昏沉睡眠便会现起。“惊恐”,是指去除昏沉睡眠之后,依如理作意增长面向雪山的光明,看见达纳瓦、罗刹、蟒蛇等时生起的恐惧。“掉举”,是指为了去除恐惧而如此思惟:“我所见的这些恐惧,本是平常眼识所观照不到的;对于未见而假想出来的类似恐惧,又算是什么恐惧?”依此思惟,基于对自己省察的善巧而生起的兴奋状态。“粗重”,即身体的懈怠。当心想“我为了平息昏沉睡眠和惊恐,已策励了过强的精进,由此生起了名为掉举的、能染污心三昧的世间强喜”,从而放松精进时,身体的粗重、疲倦与懈怠便随之而生。显示巴利原文
Tattha (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.241) vicikicchāti mahāsattassa ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dibbacakkhunā nānāvidhāni rūpāni passantassa ‘‘idaṃ nu kho ki’’nti uppannā vicikicchā. Manasikāravasena pana me rūpāni upaṭṭhahiṃsu, rūpāni passato vicikicchā uppajjati, tasmā idāni kiñci na manasi karissāmīti tuṇhī bhavati, taṃ tuṇhībhāvappattiṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘amanasikāro’’ti. Thinamiddhanti kiñci amanasikarontassa uppannaṃ thinamiddhaṃ. Tathābhūtassa hi savipphārikamanasikārassa abhāvato thinamiddhaṃ uppajjati. Chambhitattanti thinamiddhaṃ vinodetvā yathāraddhamanasikāravasena himavantābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dānavarakkhasaajagarādayo passantassa uppannaṃ chambhitattaṃ. Uppilanti ‘‘mayā diṭṭhabhayaṃ pakatiyā cakkhuviññāṇena olokiyamānaṃ na passati, adiṭṭhe parikappitasadise kiṃnāma bhaya’’nti bhayassa vinodanavasena cintentassa attano paccavekkhaṇākosallaṃ nissāya uppannaṃ uppilāvitattaṃ. Duṭṭhullanti kāyālasiyaṃ. ‘‘Mayā thinamiddhaṃ chambhitattānaṃ vūpasamanatthaṃ gāḷhaṃ vīriyaṃ paggahitaṃ, tena me uppilasaṅkhātā cittasamādhidūsitā gehassitā balavapīti uppannā’’ti vīriyaṃ sithilaṃ karontassa hi kāyaduṭṭhullaṃ kāyadaratho kāyālasiyaṃ udapādi.
“过度策励的精进”,是指心想“我放松精进时,粗重生起了”,于是再次策励精进时所产生的过度精进。“过度松懈的精进”,是指心想“我策励精进时,竟成了这样”,于是又放松精进时所产生的过度松懈的精进。“贪求”,是指增长面向天界的光明、看见天众时生起的渴爱。由于以“愿我如此”的方式执取而渴求,故称“贪求”,也就是渴爱。“种种想”,是指心想“我作意单一类别的色法时,贪求生起了;我将作意种种不同的色法”,于是时而增长面向天界的光明,时而增长面向人间的光明,作意种种不同色法时所生起的种种想;即对于种种不同自性的想,故称“种种想”。“过度审察”,是指心想“我作意种种不同的色法时,种种想生起了;我将只作意单一类别的色法,无论是可意的还是不可意的”,如此作意时生起的对色法的过度审察;过度地、更进一步地审察与观察,称为“过度审察”。“光明”,是指由预备定所生的光明。“且不见色法”,是指由于心专注于预备定的光明作意,而以天眼不见色法。“然而,我见色法”,是指在那被预备定光明遍满而安住的处所,我见到成为天眼所缘范围的色法。显示巴利原文
Accāraddhavīriyanti ‘‘mama vīriyaṃ sithilaṃ karoto duṭṭhullaṃ uppanna’’nti puna vīriyaṃ paggaṇhato uppannaṃ accāraddhavīriyaṃ. Atilīnavīriyanti ‘‘mama vīriyaṃ paggaṇhato evaṃ jāta’’nti puna vīriyaṃ sithilayato uppannaṃ atilīnavīriyaṃ. Abhijappāti devalokābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā devasaṅghaṃ passato uppannā taṇhā. ‘‘Evaṃ me hotū’’ti hi abhinivisanavasena jappatīti abhijappā, taṇhā. Nānattasaññāti ‘‘mayhaṃ ekajātikaṃ rūpaṃ manasikarontassa abhijappā uppannā, nānāvidhaṃ rūpaṃ manasikāraṃ karissāmī’’ti kālena devalokābhimukhaṃ kālena manussalokābhimukhaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nānāvidhāni rūpāni manasikaroto uppannā nānattasaññā, nānatte nānāsabhāve saññāti nānattasaññā. Atinijjhāyitattanti ‘‘mayhaṃ nānāvidhāni rūpāni manasikarontassa nānattasaññā udapādi, iṭṭhaṃ vā aniṭṭhaṃ vā ekajātikameva rūpaṃ manasi karissāmī’’ti tathā manasikaroto uppannaṃ rūpānaṃ atinijjhāyitattaṃ, ativiya uttari katvā nijjhānaṃ pekkhanaṃ atinijjhāyitattaṃ. Obhāsanti parikammasamuṭṭhitaṃ obhāsaṃ. Na ca rūpāni passāmīti parikammobhāsamanasikārappasutatāya dibbacakkhunā rūpāni na passāmi. Rūpāni hi kho passāmīti tena parikammobhāsena pharitvā ṭhitaṭṭhāne dibbacakkhuno visayabhūtāni rūpagatāni passāmi.
“如是等”:其中的“等”字涵盖——显示巴利原文
Evamādīti ādi-saddena –
“阿那律,我那时心想:‘是何因何缘,令我有时觉知光明却不见色法,有时见色法却不觉知光明,如此持续整夜、整日、整日夜?’阿那律,我那时又想:‘当我不作意色相而作意光明相时,便觉知光明而不见色法。当我不作意光明相而作意色相时,便见色法而不觉知光明,如此持续整夜、整日、整日夜。’”(《中部》第三册243页)显示巴利原文
‘‘Kevalampi rattiṃ kevalampi divaṃ kevalampi rattindivaṃ tassa mayhaṃ anuruddhā etadahosi ‘ko nu kho hetu, ko paccayo, yvāhaṃ obhāsañhi kho sañjānāmi, na ca rūpāni passāmi, rūpāni kho passāmi, na ca obhāsaṃ sañjānāmi kevalampi rattiṃ kevalampi divaṃ kevalampi rattindiva’nti. Tassa mayhaṃ anuruddhā etadahosi ‘yasmiñhi kho ahaṃ samaye rūpanimittaṃ amanasikaritvā obhāsanimittaṃ manasi karomi. Obhāsañhi kho tasmiṃ samaye sañjānāmi, na ca rūpāni passāmi. Yasmiṃ panāhaṃ samaye obhāsanimittaṃ amanasikaritvā rūpanimittaṃ manasi karomi. Rūpāni hi kho tasmiṃ samaye passāmi, na ca obhāsaṃ sañjānāmi kevalampi rattiṃ kevalampi divaṃ kevalampi rattindiva’’nti (ma. ni. 3.243) –
这便是对以“等”字所略经文的总摄。显示巴利原文
Evamādipāḷiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“属于人类的”即人间的,指人类所缘的色所缘。然而,因能见到与此不同的、有天界、隔墙、微细等类别的色法,故说“超越人间的”。这样的色法也超越了人类的施设范围,因此说“以超越人类施设范围而见色法”。其中,“人类施设范围”指人类所施设行境的处所,即通常以眼门所能执取的所缘,此即意旨所在。如此以所缘门说明后,现在为以能缘门说明,而说“人间的或”等。这里,“超越肉眼”也应理解为超越其功能。即便以天眼智,由于刹那极为迅速、极为微细,某些色法也无法看见;再者,天眼智的所缘是现在的色法,且彼色法是前生缘,而大心(天眼智)若无转向与预备定则不能生起;正在生起的色法不能成为所缘缘,正在坏灭的色法也不能。因此,在死生刹那的色法,以天眼是无法看见的,此说甚为善巧。显示巴利原文
Manussānaṃ idanti mānusakaṃ, manussānaṃ gocarabhūtaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ. Tadaññassa pana dibbatirokuṭṭasukhumādibhedassa rūpassa dassanato atikkantamānusakaṃ. Evarūpaṃ tañca manussūpacāraṃ atikkantaṃ nāma hotīti āha ‘‘manussūpacāraṃ atikkamitvā rūpadassanenā’’ti. Tattha manussūpacāranti manussehi upacaritabbaṭṭhānaṃ, pakatiyā cakkhudvārena gahetabbaṃ visayanti adhippāyo. Evaṃ visayamukhena dassetvā idāni visayimukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘mānusakaṃ vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāpi maṃsacakkhātikkamo tassa kiccātikkameneva daṭṭhabbo. Dibbena cakkhunāti dibbacakkhuñāṇenapi daṭṭhuṃ na sakkā khaṇassa atiittaratāya atisukhumatāya kesañci rūpassa, apica dibbacakkhussa paccuppannaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ, tañca purejātapaccayabhūtaṃ, na ca āvajjanaparikammehi vinā mahaggatassa pavatti atthi, nāpi uppajjamānameva rūpaṃ ārammaṇapaccayo bhavituṃ sakkoti, bhijjamānaṃ vā, tasmā cutūpapātakkhaṇe rūpaṃ dibbacakkhunā daṭṭhuṃ na sakkāti suvuttametaṃ.
如果天眼智唯以色为所缘,那为何说‘我见有情’呢?因为大多是由见到有情相续中所摄的色而这样说。或者,由于色是执取有情的原因,所以依通俗的表达而说,也有论师作此说。‘那些正在死没的’是所意指的,应如是连接。‘像这样的’意指不是处于死生刹那者。名为以痴为依止的业是低劣的,有低劣之果,故说‘与痴的等流相应故’。而以痴为依止性,当知是因为善业的前分有痴的转起繁多。然而,由于那种痴的转起,被染污的善业只产生低劣的出生等,所以低劣的出生等是痴的等流果,因此说‘低劣的出生、家族、财富等’。Hīḷite指被轻蔑的,Ohīḷite指特别被轻蔑的,Uññāte指以低劣性被知晓的,Avaññāte指以特别低劣性被识别的。‘与无痴的等流相应故’中,此处所说的无痴是依相应和依前分而转起的,以此指示三因结生者。‘与此相反的’指与那种被轻蔑等状态相反的,即不被轻蔑、不被特别轻蔑、不被低知、不被特别低知、被尊重的意思。显示巴利原文
Yadi dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ rūpārammaṇameva, atha kasmā ‘‘satte passāmī’’ti vuttanti? Yebhuyyena sattasantānagatarūpadassanato evaṃ vuttaṃ. Sattagahaṇassa vā kāraṇabhāvato vohāravasena vuttantipi vadanti. Te cavamānāti adhippetāti sambandho. Evarūpeti na cutūpapātakkhaṇasamaṅginoti adhippāyo. Mohūpanissayaṃ nāma kammaṃ nihīnaṃ nihīnaphalaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘mohanissandayuttattā’’ti. Mohūpanissayatā ca kusalakammassa pubbabhāge mohappavattibahulatāya veditabbā. Tāya pana mohappavattiyā saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ kusalakammaṃ nihīnameva jātiādiṃ nipphādetīti nihīnajātiādayo mohassa nissandaphalānīti āha ‘‘hīnānaṃ jātikulabhogādīna’’ntiādi. Hīḷiteti garahite. Ohīḷiteti visesato garahite. Uññāteti lāmakabhāvena ñāte. Avaññāteti visesato lāmakabhāvena vidite. Amohanissandayuttattāti ettha amoho sampayuttavasena pubbabhāgavasena ca pavatto kathito, tena ca tihetukapaṭisandhike dasseti. Tabbiparīteti tassa hīḷitādibhāvassa viparīte, ahīḷite anohīḷite anuññāte anavaññāte cittīkateti attho.
Suvaṇṇa指色泽美丽的,Dubbaṇṇa指色泽丑恶的。此种色泽美丑,依次是业以无瞋为依止、以瞋为依止而生起的,故说‘与无瞋的等流相应故’等。而以无瞋为依止性,当知是由于业被慈等修习所成的相续转起。Abhirūpe(美丽)和Virūpe(丑陋)是依形态而说的。因为形态亦可用‘色’这个词,如在‘化作大像之色’等处。但最初所说的意义,是依色泽而言。去善趣者为善趣者,所以说‘在善趣的趣处’,意指已往生善趣。以无贪为志欲的有情是慷慨、已离悭吝的,由于以无贪为依止的业而成为善趣的、成功的,所以说‘或者与无贪的等流相应故,成为富有的、大财富的’。去苦趣者为恶趣者,故说‘在恶趣的趣处’。以贪为志欲的有情是贪婪、悭吝的,由于以贪为依止的业而成为恶趣的、丑恶的,所以说‘或者与贪的等流相应故,成为贫穷的、少饮食的’。Upacita指以能带来果报的方式所作。正如所作的业能给予果报那样,这样所作的即为已积集的。以‘那些正在死没的’等说明天眼的作用,这是由所缘门。显示巴利原文
Suvaṇṇeti sundaravaṇṇe. Dubbaṇṇeti asundaravaṇṇe. Sā panāyaṃ suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇatā yathākkamaṃ kammassa adosadosūpanissayatāya hotīti āha ‘‘adosanissandayuttattā’’tiādi. Adosūpanissayatā ca kammassa mettādīhi paribhāvitasantānappavattiyā veditabbā. Abhirūpe virūpeti idaṃ saṇṭhānavasena vuttaṃ. Saṇṭhānavacanopi hi vaṇṇasaddo hoti ‘‘mahantaṃ hatthivaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.138) viya. Paṭhamaṃ vutto pana attho vaṇṇavaseneva vutto. Sundaraṃ gatiṃ gatā sugatāti āha ‘‘sugatigate’’ti, sugatiṃ upapanneti attho. Alobhajjhāsayā sattā vadaññū vigatamaccherā alobhūpanissayena kammunā sugatā samiddhā hontīti āha ‘‘alobhanissandayuttattā vā aḍḍhe mahaddhane’’ti. Dukkhaṃ gatiṃ gatā duggatāti āha ‘‘duggatigate’’ti. Lobhajjhāsayā sattā luddhā maccharino lobhūpanissayena kammunā duggatā durūpā hontīti āha ‘‘lobhanissandayuttattā vā dalidde appannapāne’’ti. Upacitanti phalāvahabhāvena kataṃ. Yathā katañhi kammaṃ phaladānasamatthaṃ hoti, tathā kataṃ upacitaṃ. Cavamānetiādīhi dibbacakkhukiccaṃ vuttanti visayamukhena visayibyāpāramāha. Purimehīti ‘‘dibbena cakkhunā’’tiādīni padāni sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ādīhīti ettha ca-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho, tasmā ‘‘dibbena…pe… passāmī’’ti imehi ‘‘cavamāne’’tiādīhi ca dibbacakkhukiccaṃ vuttanti attho. Imināpana padenāti ‘‘yathākammūpage satte pajānāmī’’ti iminā vākyena. Pajjati ñāyati attho imināti hi padaṃ vākyaṃ.
于“正领受大苦”一句中,应如此理解:这是以天眼智见色身后,唯依欲界心了知他们有情在领受苦迫。“他”指亲见地狱有情后,安住于天眼智的获得者。“如此作意”,是说因为想要了知那些地狱有情能招感地狱的业,而进入安止定,从定中出已,再以遍作的方式作意。“是什么业呢”等语,是显示作意的方法。然而,在如此遍作之后,那进入安止定又出定的人,便以彼业为所缘而生起转向心;在那转向心灭尽之后,有四或五个速行心速行。其中,前三个或四个——即称为遍作、近行、随顺、种姓的心——是欲界心;第四个或第五个速行心则是安止心,属于色界第四禅心。与此安止心一同生起的智,当知即是随业往生智。“没有单独的遍作”,这是从意图上说:若没有天眼智,随业往生智便没有独立的遍作。而且应当如此认可,否则,随业往生智的大上心境界便不能成立。在观见天人的情形中,此理亦然。并且,这里取地狱与天人为例,亦应视为仅是举例说明。因为天眼获得者,若有意愿,对其他诸趣的有情,也能如此实行。正如接下来将要说到的:“以取恶趣来显示畜生趣”等,以及“以取善趣,人趣也因此被包含在内”。以彼能招感地狱的业为所缘,即是“以彼业为所缘”。“于粗涩林等处”,其中的“等”字,包含了心蔓林等地狱。显示巴利原文
Mahantaṃ dukkhamanubhavamāneti ettha dibbacakkhuñāṇena rūpaṃ disvā tesaṃ dukkhānubhavanaṃ kāmāvacaracitteneva jānātīti veditabbaṃ. Soti nerayikasatte paccakkhato disvā ṭhito dibbacakkhuñāṇalābhī. Evaṃ manasi karotīti tesaṃ nerayikānaṃ nirayasaṃvattanikassa kammassa ñātukāmatāvasena pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya parikammavasena manasi karoti. Kiṃ nu khotiādi manasikāravidhidassanaṃ. Evaṃ pana parikammaṃ katvā pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhitassa taṃ kammaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā āvajjanaṃ uppajjati, tasmiṃ niruddhe cattāri pañca vā javanāni javanti. Yesaṃ purimāni tīṇi cattāri vā parikammaupacārānulomagotrabhunāmakāni kāmāvacarāni, catutthaṃ pañcamaṃ vā appanācittaṃ rūpāvacaraṃ catutthajjhānikaṃ, tattha yaṃ tena appanācittena saddhiṃ uppannaṃ ñāṇaṃ, taṃ yathākammūpagañāṇanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Visuṃ parikammaṃ natthī’’ti idaṃ pana dibbacakkhuñāṇena vinā yathākammūpagañāṇassa visuṃ parikammaṃ natthīti adhippāyena vuttaṃ. Evañcetaṃ icchitabbaṃ, aññathā yathākammūpagañāṇassa mahaggatabhāvo eva na siyā. Devānaṃ dassanepi eseva nayo. Nerayikadevaggahaṇañcettha nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ākaṅkhamāno hi dibbacakkhulābhī aññagatikesupi evaṃ paṭipajjatiyeva. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘apāyaggahaṇena tiracchānayoniṃ dīpetī’’tiādi, ‘‘sugatiggahaṇena manussagatipi saṅgayhatī’’ti ca. Taṃ nirayasaṃvattaniyakammaṃ ārammaṇametassāti taṃkammārammaṇaṃ. Phārusakavanādīsūti ādi-saddena cittalatāvanādīnaṃ saṅgaho.
“如同此智”,意即:如同此随业往生智没有单独的遍作,未来分智同样也没有单独的遍作;以此表示未来分智亦无独立之遍作。于此,更说明了其原因:“因为这些智都是以天眼智为根本的。”其中所含的意趣是:正如天眼获得者,将光明扩展朝向地狱等处,见地狱等有情之后,依那样的等持与相应的作意,在已作遍作的心中,如实了知他们过去所累积的能招感地狱等果报的业;同样地,对于任何一位有情,若他希望了知那个有情紧接而来的未来自体,便针对那个有情扩展光明,以随业往生智洞见那能产生该自体的、过去或现在所累积的业后,若他进一步希望了知那将由彼业所产生的未来自体,便依那样的等持与相应的作意,在已作遍作的心中如实了知。对于那之后的自体,其道理也是同样的。此智名为“未来分智”。因为这两种智,唯有在天眼智存在时才得以成就,若天眼智不存在,则不能成就。因此说:“这些智与天眼智一同成就。”显示巴利原文
Yathācimassāti yathā ca imassa yathākammūpagañāṇassa visuṃ parikammaṃ natthi, evaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇassapīti visuṃ parikammābhāvañca nidasseti. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘dibbacakkhupādakāneva hi imānī’’ti. Tatrāyamadhippāyo – yathā dibbacakkhulābhī nirayādiabhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nerayikādike satte disvā tehi pubbe āyūhitaṃ nirayasaṃvattaniyādikaṃ kammaṃ tādisena samādānena tajjena ca manasikārena parikkhate citte yāthāvato jānāti, evaṃ yassa yassa sattassa samanantaraṃ anāgataṃ attabhāvaṃ ñātukāmo, taṃ taṃ odissa ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā tena tena atīte etarahi vā āyūhitaṃ tassa nibbattakaṃ kammaṃ yathākammūpagañāṇena disvā tena tena nibbattetabbaṃ anāgataṃ attabhāvaṃ ñātukāmo tādisena samādānena tajjena ca manasikārena parikkhate citte yāthāvato jānāti. Esa nayo tato paresupi attabhāvesu. Etaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇaṃ nāma. Yasmā etaṃ dvayaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇe sati eva sijjhati, nāsati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘imāni dibbacakkhunā saheva ijjhantī’’ti.
所谓身恶行,即以身所作的恶行,或从身生起的恶行。以身所作的恶行,或从身生起的、因烦恼染污而成为恶行的,称为身恶行——应如此依次结合理解。此处所说的“身”,是指能造作的身。依身表而生起的不善身业,即是身恶行。由于在某个相续中造作、累积了业,只要饮食未断,其堪能感果的性质便不会消失,因此可以说他与那业相连,故说“具备者即具有者”。说“成为不利己者”,以此显示:如同父母对子女、戒师与依止师对弟子那样,若是利己者,便不会成为呵责者、诽谤者。“以毁坏功德”的意思是,以破坏、毁灭现存的功德。难道以究竟事而作的诽谤不也是毁坏功德吗?确实如此,但这里所说的“功德”,是指禅那等殊胜的上人法,因此将毁坏戒行单独列出。所以他说“这些人没有沙门法”等。所谓“沙门法”,是就戒律与自制而言。“知而”是指,知道所诽谤对象的圣者状态而作诽谤;“不知而”是指,不知道而作诽谤。在此,知与不知并非衡量标准,圣者状态本身才是标准。因此他说“无论哪种情况,都是诽谤圣者”。有人说:“然而,若不知对方是圣者,且无嗔心,只是宣说其圣者功德之状态,则并非毁坏功德,因此对他而言不存在诽谤圣者。”这是重业,因其类似于无间业,故为重业,但尚可补救,通过忏悔可以治愈,不像无间业那样不可补救。显示巴利原文
Kāyena duccaritaṃ, kāyato vā uppannaṃ duccaritanti kāyena duṭṭhu caritaṃ, kāyato vā uppannaṃ kilesapūtikattā duṭṭhu caritaṃ kāyaduccaritanti evaṃ yathākkamaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Kāyoti cettha copanakāyo adhippeto. Kāyaviññattivasena pavattaṃ akusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ. Yasmiṃ santāne kammaṃ katupacitaṃ, asati āhārupacchede vipākārahasabhāvassa avigacchanato so tena sahitoyevāti vattabboti āha ‘‘samannāgatāti samaṅgībhūtā’’ti. Anatthakāmā hutvāti etena mātāpitaro viya puttānaṃ, ācariyupajjhāyā viya ca nissitakānaṃ atthakāmā hutvā garahakā upavādakā na hontīti dasseti. Guṇaparidhaṃsanenāti vijjamānānaṃ guṇānaṃ viddhaṃsanena, vināsanenāti attho. Nanu ca antimavatthunāpi upavādo guṇaparidhaṃsanamevāti? Saccametaṃ, guṇāti panettha jhānādivisesā uttarimanussadhammā adhippetāti sīlaparidhaṃsanaṃ visuṃ gahitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘natthi imesaṃ samaṇadhammo’’tiādi. Samaṇadhammoti ca sīlasaṃyamaṃ sandhāya vadati. Jānaṃ vāti yaṃ upavadati, tassa ariyabhāvaṃ jānanto vā. Ajānaṃ vāti ajānanto vā. Jānanājānanañcettha appamāṇaṃ, ariyabhāvo eva pamāṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ubhayathāpi ariyūpavādova hotī’’ti. ‘‘Ariyoti pana ajānato aduṭṭhacittasseva tattha ariyaguṇabhāvaṃ pavedentassa guṇaparidhaṃsanaṃ na hotīti tassa ariyūpavādo natthī’’ti vadanti. Bhāriyaṃ kammanti ānantariyasadisattā bhāriyaṃ kammaṃ, satekicchaṃ pana hoti khamāpanena, na ānantariyaṃ viya atekicchaṃ.
“为显明其义”,即为了阐明其重业等性质。“厌弃彼”,指厌弃那位长老,或厌弃那种行为。“极度饥饿”,指极度为饥饿所胜。“年长者”,因其以“不知沙门之适宜与不适宜,或仅不知世间惯例”的用意而说,故应知是以贬毁功德而加呵责。“他使我们蒙羞”,意思是“当有人说‘沙门竟做出这样的事’时,我们抬不起头来”。长老明知故问:“贤友,你在此教法中是否有立足处?”对方以通达真实为教法中的立足处,答道:“我是须陀洹。”长老出于悲悯,为他揭示自身:“你诽谤的是漏尽者。”因此,那业对他而言成了平常业,意思是那业并未成为道的障碍。然而,由于他先前已是须陀洹,已善断除堕恶趣之因,故那业只能成为他生天的障碍,而不能障碍道。“若对方比自己年长”,此处《清净道论》说:“应蹲坐而求忏悔。”须陀洹与斯陀含不会因嗔怒而不原谅;其余圣者或出于利他之心,为令其未来防护,可能不予原谅,故说“如果他不原谅”。“若对方比自己年长,则站立着”,此处《清净道论》也说“蹲坐”。如此,彼处说道:显示巴利原文
Tassaca āvibhāvatthanti bhāriyādisabhāvassa pakāsanatthaṃ. Taṃ jigucchīti taṃ theraṃ, taṃ vā kiriyaṃ jigucchi. Aticchātoti ativiya khudābhibhūto. Mahallakoti samaṇānaṃ sāruppamasāruppaṃ, lokasamudācāramattaṃ vā na jānātīti adhippāyena vuttattā guṇaparidhaṃsanena garahatīti veditabbaṃ. Amhākaṃ lajjitabbakaṃ akāsīti ‘‘samaṇena nāma evaṃ kata’’nti vutte mayaṃ sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na sakkomāti adhippāyo. Jānanto eva thero ‘‘atthi te āvuso imasmiṃ sāsane patiṭṭhā’’ti pucchi. Itaropi saccābhisamayo sāsane patiṭṭhāti āha ‘‘sotāpanno aha’’nti. Thero taṃ karuṇāyamāno ‘‘khīṇāsavo tayā upavadito’’ti attānaṃ āvi akāsi. Tenassa taṃ pākatikaṃ ahosīti tena assa taṃ kammaṃ maggāvaraṇaṃ nāhosīti adhippāyo. Pubbeva pana sotāpannattā apāyagāmīnaṃ suppahīnabhāvato saggāvaraṇamassa kātumasamatthameva taṃ kammaṃ. Attanā vuḍḍhataro hotīti ettha ‘‘ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā khamāpetabbo’’ti visuddhimagge vuttaṃ. Sotāpannasakadāgāmino dosenapi nakkhamanti, sesaariyā vā tassa atthakāmā hutvā āyatiṃ saṃvaraṇatthāya na khamāpeyyunti āha ‘‘sace so nakkhamatī’’ti. Attanā vuḍḍhataro hoti, ṭhitakenevāti etthāpi ‘‘ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā’’ti visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.411) vuttaṃ. Evañhi tattha vuttaṃ –
“如果他已离开该地区,则应亲自前往,或派遣共住弟子前去,请求原谅。如果既不能前往,也不能派人前去,则应前往住于该寺的比丘们那里。若他们比自己年少,则蹲坐;若比自己年长,则依对年长者所述的方法而行,说道:‘尊者,我对某位尊者说了如此这般的话,愿那位尊者原谅我。’如此请求原谅。纵使未能当面获得原谅,亦应如此行持。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Sace disāpakkanto hoti, sayaṃ vā gantvā saddhivihārike vā pesetvā khamāpetabbo. Sace nāpi gantuṃ, na pesetuṃ sakkā hoti, ye tasmiṃ vihāre bhikkhū vasanti, tesaṃ santikaṃ gantvā sace navakatarā honti, ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā, sace vuḍḍhatarā, vuḍḍhesu vuttanayeneva paṭipajjitvā ‘ahaṃ, bhante, asukaṃ nāma āyasmantaṃ idañcidañca avacaṃ, khamatu me so āyasmā’ti vatvā khamāpetabbaṃ. Sammukhā akhamantepi etadeva kātabba’’nti.
然而,此义于彼处(《清净道论》2.411)亦有进一步说明——显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pana parampi tattha (visuddhi. 2.411) vuttaṃ –
若是一位独行比丘,无人知其住处,亦不知其去向,则应前往一位聪慧比丘处,请问:‘尊者,我对某位尊者说了如此这般的话,反复思惟,心生懊悔,该当如何?’那位比丘会说:‘您不必挂碍,长老已经原谅了您,请安心。’然后,他应朝向那位圣者所去的方向,合掌作礼:‘请原谅我吧。’显示巴利原文
‘‘Sace ekacārikabhikkhu hoti, nevassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ, na gataṭṭhānaṃ paññāyati, ekassa paṇḍitassa bhikkhuno santikaṃ gantvā ‘ahaṃ, bhante, asukaṃ nāma āyasmantaṃ idañcidañca avacaṃ, taṃ me anussarato anussarato vippaṭisāro hoti, kiṃ karomī’ti vattabbaṃ. So vakkhati ‘tumhe mā cintayittha, thero tumhākaṃ khamati, cittaṃ vūpasamethā’ti. Tenapi ariyassa gatadisābhimukhena añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘khamatū’ti vattabba’’nti.
“般涅槃处”是指供养之处。“便成为平常业”,意思是这样做之后,自心得到清净信解,因此该业既不障碍生天,也不障碍证道——有人这样解释。在《行藏注》的摩登伽行注释中:显示巴利原文
Parinibbutamañcaṭṭhānanti pūjākaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāyāha. Pākatikameva hotīti evaṃ kate attano cittaṃ pasīdatīti taṃ kammaṃ saggāvaraṇaṃ maggāvaraṇañca na hotīti adhippāyoti keci vadanti. Cariyāpiṭake mātaṅgacaritasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (cariyā. aṭṭha. 2.64) –
由于波罗蜜修习圆满、具足种种等至住、戒与见成就、相续善为调伏、安住于大悲的大士,其自身即是殊胜福田;而与之相连的、称为诽谤圣者之业与诅咒的粗恶语,因大士的殊胜福田性与那人内心的粗暴,便成为现法受业。若他不向大士请求忏悔,则于第七日必成定业感果。然而,若向大士请求忏悔,因善行成就而阻碍果报,该业便成无果,成为无效之业。这便是诽谤圣者之恶与现法受业的性质。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pāramitāparibhāvanasamiddhāhi nānāsamāpattivihāraparipūritāhi sīladiṭṭhisampadāhi susaṅkhatasantāne mahākaruṇādhivāse mahāsatte ariyūpavādakammaabhisapasaṅkhātaṃ pharusavacanaṃ saṃyuttaṃ mahāsattassa khettavisesabhāvato tassa ca ajjhāsayapharusatāya diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ hutvā sace so mahāsattaṃ na khamāpeti, sattame divase vipaccanasabhāvaṃ jātaṃ. Khamāpite pana mahāsatte payogasampattiyā vipākassa paṭibāhitattā avipākadhammataṃ āpajji ahosikammabhāvato. Ayañhi ariyūpavādapāpassa diṭṭhadhammavedanīyassa ca dhammatā’’ti –
由于阿阇梨法护长老这样说,因此,如此求忏悔后,该业因善行成就而阻碍了果报,成为无效业,即成为不感果之法,故既不是生天的障碍,也不是解脱的障碍。此处之义应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttattā evaṃ khamāpite taṃ kammaṃ payogasampattiyā vipākassa paṭibāhitattā ahosikammabhāvena avipākadhammataṃ āpannanti neva saggāvaraṇaṃ na mokkhāvaraṇañca hotīti evamettha attho gahetabbo.
颠倒的见解,故为颠倒见者。应受持之义而称为受持,那些以业为受持者,即业受持者;以邪见为因而成为业受持者,即邪见业受持者;或者将因义包含在内,以邪见为因而令他人受持于诸业者,即邪见业受持者。为了显示此义,而说“以邪见为因”等。那些……令受持者,也应被连接为邪见业受持者。“具足戒”等,是依根已成熟、具足道者而说,至于住于最上道者,则无可说。或者,应知戒等正是最上道所摄。因为住于最上道者,于现法中决定成就阿罗汉,其余者则不定成就。“阿罗汉”即阿罗汉果。“如是具足成就”中,具足成就即圆满、完成,意为如是必定不失误的完成,即说“如此亦必定”。正如道无间不失误地生果,此亦显示此人死没无间不失误地结生于地狱。在整个佛语中,没有比此譬喻更严厉说出的譬喻。“不舍彼语”等中,针对诽谤圣者,说“我将不再说如此语”者,名为舍语;思惟“我将不再生如此心”者,名为舍心;舍弃“我将不再执如此见”者,名为舍见。若不如此做,则既不舍亦不放弃。如是被带来投入地狱者,即如被地狱狱卒带来而安置于地狱,如是即被安置于地狱,其地狱生起无任何障碍。此中道理是:将堕地狱的诽谤圣者,因不舍其执取,故如邪见者。在此,以“不舍彼语”等语,显示诽谤圣者唯因不舍其执取,方成障碍、带来无义;若舍之、发露罪过、请求原谅,则不成障碍、不带来无义,如已出罪、已发露的犯戒。以邪见为因,无不可作之恶,由此甚至成为轮回之桩,故说“诸比丘,邪见是诸罪中之最”。显示巴利原文
Viparītaṃ dassanametesanti viparītadassanā. Samādātabbaṭṭhena samādānāni, kammāni samādānāni yesaṃ te kammasamādānā, micchādiṭṭhivasena kammasamādānā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, hetuatthaṃ vā antogadhaṃ katvā micchādiṭṭhivasena pare kammesu samādāpakā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā. Tayimaṃ atthaṃ dassento ‘‘micchādiṭṭhivasenā’’tiādimāha. Ye ca…pe… samādapenti, tepi micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānāti yojetabbaṃ. Sīlasampannotiādi paripakkindriyassa maggasamaṅgino vasena vuttaṃ, aggamaggaṭṭhe pana vattabbameva natthi. Atha vā aggamaggapariyāpannā eva sīlādayo veditabbā. Aggamaggaṭṭhassa hi diṭṭheva dhamme ekaṃsikā aññārādhanā, itaresaṃ anekaṃsikā. Aññanti arahattaṃ. Evaṃsampadamidanti ettha sampajjanaṃ sampadā, nipphatti, evaṃ avirajjhanakanipphattikanti attho, yathā taṃ avassambhāvī, evamidampīti vuttaṃ hoti . Yathā hi maggānantaraṃ avirajjhitvāva phalaṃ nibbattaṃ, evametaṃ imassapi puggalassa cutianantaraṃ avirajjhitvāva niraye paṭisandhi hotīti dasseti. Sakalasmiñhi buddhavacane na imāya upamāya gāḷhataraṃ katvā vuttaupamā atthi. Taṃ vācaṃ appahāyātiādīsu (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.149) ariyūpavādaṃ sandhāya ‘‘puna evarūpiṃ vācaṃ na vakkhāmī’’ti vadanto vācaṃ pajahati nāma, ‘‘puna evarūpaṃ cittaṃ na uppādessāmī’’ti cintento cittaṃ pajahati nāma, ‘‘puna evarūpiṃ diṭṭhiṃ na gaṇhissāmī’’ti pajahanto diṭṭhiṃ pajahati nāma. Tathā akaronto neva pajahati na paṭinissajjati. Yathābhataṃ nikkhitto evaṃ nirayeti yathā nirayapālehi āharitvā niraye ṭhapito, evaṃ niraye ṭhapitoyeva, nāssa nirayūpapattiyā koci vibandho. Tatrāyaṃ yutti – nirayūpago ariyūpavādī tadādāyakassa avijahanato seyyathāpi micchādiṭṭhīti. Ettha ca ‘‘taṃ vācaṃ appahāyā’’ti evamādivacanena tadādāyakassa appahāneneva ariyūpavādo antarāyiko anatthāvahova, pahānena pana accayaṃ desetvā khamāpanena na antarāyiko anatthāvaho yathā taṃ vuṭṭhitā desitā ca āpattīti dasseti. Micchādiṭṭhivasena akattabbaṃ nāma pāpaṃ natthi, yato saṃsārakhāṇubhāvopi nāma hotīti āha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiparamāni, bhikkhave, vajjānī’’ti.
“诸比丘,如来之身住立而断除生有之纽带,此身及外名色”,如于这些中,此处“身”之声为五蕴所摄之境,故说“身坏”,即舍弃所执蕴。“无离贪者”死后,即执取他生之蕴,故说“死后”,即于其无间执取所生蕴。身依彼而住立,彼断灭故身坏,故说“身坏”,即命根断灭。从此中带来苦者为铁,福者,故说“被视为福的铁”。从此中带来乐者为铁,即福业等为乐之因。故说“或乐之铁的不存在”。无自在者,因随业力转,不能随自力转,故自在离于他们,即无自在者,意为不自主。铁被享受,故为铁,即乐味,故说“称为乐味的铁”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ucchinnabhavanettiko, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa kāyo tiṭṭhati (dī. ni. 1. 147), ayañceva kāyo bahiddhā ca nāmarūpa’’nti ca evamādīsu viya idha kāya-saddo khandhapañcakavisayoti āha ‘‘kāyassa bhedāti upādinnakkhandhapariccāgā’’ti. Avītarāgassa maraṇato paraṃ nāma bhavantarūpādānamevāti āha ‘‘paraṃ maraṇāti tadanantaraṃ abhinibbattakkhandhaggahaṇe’’ti. Yena tiṭṭhati, tassa upacchedeneva kāyo bhijjatīti āha ‘‘kāyassa bhedāti jīvitindriyassa upacchedā’’ti. Eti imasmā sukhanti ayo, puññanti āha ‘‘puññasammatā ayā’’ti. Āyanti etasmā sukhānīti āyo, puññakammādīnaṃ sukhasādhanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sukhānaṃ vā āyassa abhāvā’’ti. Vivasāti kammassa vase vattanato attano vase vattituṃ na sakkontīti vigato vaso etesanti vivasā, avasavattinoti attho. Iyati assādīyatīti ayo, assādoti āha ‘‘assādasaññito ayo’’ti.
“龙王等”中,以“等”字包含了金翅鸟等。似阿修罗,即类似饿鬼阿修罗。那即是阿修罗身。从一切积聚,即从一切成就积聚,也就是一切成就之聚的意思。以相反之义说,即如“善行、或美行,因无过失而为善行”等,这是从身恶行等的反义而说。“从此,贤者,往善趣”——由此语句,人趣也是善趣,所以说“以善趣之词,人趣也被包含在内”。其余部分,由于所说之理与义显明,故容易理解。显示巴利原文
Nāgarājādīnanti ādi-saddena supaṇṇādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Asurasadisanti petāsurasadisaṃ. So hīti so asurakāyo. Sabbasamussayehīti sabbehi sampattisamussayehi, sabbasampattirāsitoti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttavipariyāyenāti ‘‘suṭṭhu caritaṃ, sobhanaṃ vā caritaṃ anavajjattāti sucarita’’ntiādinā kāyaduccaritenātiādīnaṃ padānaṃ vuttassa atthassa vipariyāyena. ‘‘Ito bho sugatiṃ gacchā’’ti (itivu. 83) vacanato manussagatipi sugatiyevāti āha ‘‘sugatiggahaṇena manussagatipi saṅgayhatī’’ti. Sesamettha vuttanayattā uttānatthato ca suviññeyyameva.
漏尽智论显示巴利原文
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathā
14 观之基础,即作为观之近因者。观有三种,依观行者之人而差别。大菩提萨埵与独觉菩提萨埵,因思所成智增长,故为自然智;其余者因闻所成智增长,故依他教而生。彼观于《清净道论》中,以“除非想非非想处,从其余色无色禅之一出起”等,以多种无色门,依四界差别所说之彼彼界摄受门中任一门,以多种方式而广说。然大菩提萨埵之观智,以二千四百万门而分类,依多种理趣,摄持一切知智所依之圣道智之基础的前分智之胎藏,趋于圆满,极为甚深、微细、最微妙、不共他者。此于注释书中称为大金刚智。其转起之分类,以二千四百万分类为近因而入定时,称为世尊每日所受用之定,其数二千四百万。此诸佛之观行,于《最上义美妙》之《清净道论释》中,以略说而示,有意者应从彼处取学。显示巴利原文
14.Vipassanāpādakanti vipassanāya padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Vipassanā ca tividhā vipassakapuggalabhedena. Mahābodhisattānañhi paccekabodhisattānañca cintāmayañāṇasaṃvaddhitattā sayambhūñāṇabhūtā, itaresaṃ sutamayañāṇasaṃvaddhitattā paropadesasambhūtā. Sā ‘‘ṭhapetvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ avasesarūpārūpajjhānānaṃ aññatarato vuṭṭhāyā’’tiādinā anekadhā arūpamukhavasena catudhātuvavatthāne vuttānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ dhātupariggahamukhānaṃ aññataramukhavasena anekadhāva visuddhimagge nānānayato vibhāvitā. Mahābodhisattānaṃ pana catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassamukhena pabhedagamanato nānānayaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇasannissayassa ariyamaggañāṇassa adhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ pubbabhāgañāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpentaṃ paripākaṃ gacchantaṃ paramagambhīraṃ saṇhasukhumataraṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ hoti. Yaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu mahāvajiraññāṇanti vuccati. Yassa ca pavattivibhāgena catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassapabhedassa pādakabhāvena samāpajjiyamānā catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhyā devasikaṃ satthu vaḷañjanakasamāpattiyo vuccanti, svāyaṃ buddhānaṃ vipassanācāro paramatthamañjusāyaṃ visuddhimaggavaṇṇanāyaṃ uddesato dassito, atthikehi tato gahetabbo.
由于断除、根绝诸漏,故说漏尽为圣道;依胜说而言,即指阿罗汉道。为了说明‘漏尽之智即是漏尽智’,而说‘于此有此智’;又说‘尽’是依处的地格,而非对象,故说‘以其所属故’。‘此是苦’是显示当时对苦圣谛现量把握的状态。‘这些是苦’是显示对其加以限定而把握的状态。‘无过于此’是显示无余把握的状态。因此说‘一切苦谛’等。‘以自性相通达’是指对称为自性的相无迷惑地通达。而所谓‘无迷惑通达’,是指当那智生起后,对于苦的自性等的判别不再有迷惑,如此而生起。因此说‘如实了知’。‘能生起’即令产生。‘到达那处所’即依止那作为所缘缘之因的涅槃。因为具有彼两者的补特伽罗的证得,即说为彼两者的证得。或者‘到达’是到达之因。‘无转起’即无转起之相。或者,那些(烦恼)于此不再转起,故为无转起,即涅槃。‘其’指苦灭。‘能令到达’即通过作证而正确地令到达。显示巴利原文
Āsavānaṃ khepanato samucchindanato āsavakkhayo ariyamaggo, ukkaṭṭhaniddesavasena arahattamaggaggahaṇaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇanti dassento ‘‘tatra cetaṃ ñāṇa’’nti vatvā khayeti ca ādhāre bhummaṃ, na visayeti dassento ‘‘tappariyāpannattā’’ti āha. Idaṃ dukkhanti dukkhassa ariyasaccassa tadā paccakkhato gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Ettakaṃ dukkhanti tassa paricchijja gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Na ito bhiyyoti anavasesetvā gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbampi dukkhasacca’’ntiādi. Sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhenāti sabhāvasaṅkhātassa lakkhaṇassa asammohato paṭivijjhanena. Asammohapaṭivedhoti ca yathā tasmiṃ ñāṇe pavatte pacchā dukkhassa sarūpādiparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavatti. Tenāha ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsi’’nti. Nibbattikanti nipphādentaṃ. Yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvāti yaṃ nibbānaṃ maggassa ārammaṇapaccayaṭṭhena kāraṇabhūtaṃ āgamma. Tadubhayavato hi puggalassa patti tadubhayassa pattīti vuttaṃ. Patvāti vā pāpuṇanahetu. Appavattinti appavattinimittaṃ. Te vā na pavattanti etthāti appavatti, nibbānaṃ. Tassāti dukkhanirodhassa. Sampāpakanti sacchikiriyāvasena sammadeva pāpakaṃ.
“依烦恼故”,即依名为漏的烦恼故。因诸漏是苦谛的同义语,以其为苦谛所摄,而其余诸谛亦有与其集等相应的同义语,故说“依同义语”。“显示诸谛”是连接。此处唯取诸漏,因为是从“为漏尽智”开始的。同样,正是以漏解脱为首而说一切杂染解脱。“此是苦”等,以“如实了知”等,在此讲述了混合之道,故说“讲述与观一同达到顶点的道”。在此,由于谛通达当时是过去,故说“如实了知”;但依其在现观时为现在,便以现在时“如是知、如是见”作解说。而且,那虽从道刹那之后乃至今日都是过去,但其最初成为过去,唯依果刹那可知,故说“以‘心解脱’显示果刹那”。或者,“知者、见者”是对原因的解释,即以知为因、以见为因,心从欲漏解脱,如此连接。在此,以有漏为例,如同有贪一样,有见也被同等包含,故见漏的包含亦应被看到。显示巴利原文
Kilesavasenāti āsavasaṅkhātakilesavasena. Yasmā āsavānaṃ dukkhasaccapariyāyo, tappariyāpannattā, sesasaccānañca taṃsamudayādipariyāyo atthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyāyato’’ti. Dassento saccānīti yojanā. Āsavānaṃyeva cettha gahaṇaṃ ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyā’’ti āraddhattā. Tathā hi āsavavimuttisīseneva sabbasaṃkilesavimutti vuttā. Idaṃ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsintiādinā missakamaggo idha kathitoti ‘‘saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ kathetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca saccappaṭivedhassa tadā atītakālikattā ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsi’’nti vatvāpi abhisamayakāle tassa paccuppannataṃ upādāya ‘‘evaṃ jānato evaṃ passato’’ti vattamānakālena niddeso kato. So ca kāmaṃ maggakkhaṇato paraṃ yāvajjatanā atītakāliko eva, sabbapaṭhamaṃ panassa atītakālikattaṃ phalakkhaṇeneva veditabbanti āha ‘‘vimuccitthāti iminā phalakkhaṇaṃ dassetī’’ti. Jānato passatoti vā hetuniddesoyaṃ. Jānanahetu dassanahetu kāmāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccitthāti yojanā. Bhavāsavaggahaṇeneva cettha bhavarāgassa viya bhavadiṭṭhiyāpi samavarodhoti diṭṭhāsavassapi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
因为通过对已断烦恼的省察,即使有业存在,由于未来不结生,故知“生已尽”;又因通过对道的省察等,了知“梵行已立”等,故说“以‘生已尽’等为其地”。其中,“其”指省察智,“地”指生起之处。为了说明提出“然而何等”等质问的用意,并欲作答,故说“并非他的”等。“并非他的过去生已尽”,意指并非由道修习而尽,因为先前已尽故。“并非他的未来生已尽”是连接。而“非未来”是取未来性的共相,以诡辩而说。因此说“由于对未来无努力故”。因为努力只于存在者可能,于不存在者不可能,这是意图。但此处意指未来的某一特定部分,而对于其断除,努力亦可得。因此说“然而,道的”等。以“然而”等,说明由道修习,唯通过破坏未来生的因而显现尽相。“于有一、四、五蕴有”等,是取三有,依所说之理,为显示无余的“生已尽”相。“彼”指如前所说的生,“他”指世尊。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇena vijjamānassapi kammassa āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikabhāvato ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’ti jānāti, yasmā ca maggapaccavekkhaṇādīhi vusitaṃ brahmacariyantiādiṃ pajānāti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘khīṇā jātīti ādīhi tassa bhūmi’’nti. Tattha tassāti paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa. Bhūminti pavattiṭṭhānaṃ. Yenādhippāyena ‘‘katamā panā’’tiādinā codanā katā, taṃ pakāsetvā parihāraṃ vattukāmo āha ‘‘na tāvassā’’tiādi. Na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇāti maggabhāvanāya na khīṇāti adhippāyo. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘pubbeva khīṇattā’’ti. Na anāgatā assa jāti khīṇāti yojanā. Na anāgatāti ca anāgatattasāmaññaṃ gahetvā lesena vadati. Tenāha ‘‘anāgate vāyāmābhāvato’’ti. Vijjamāneyeva hi payogo sambhavati, nāvijjamāneti adhippāyo. Anāgataviseso panettha adhippeto, tassa ca khepane vāyāmopi labbhateva. Tenāha ‘‘yā pana maggassā’’tiādi. ‘‘Yā panā’’ti hi ādinā maggabhāvanāya anāgatajātiyā eva hetuvināsanadvārena khīṇabhāvo pakāsīyati. Ekacatupañcavokārabhavesūti bhavattayaggahaṇaṃ vuttanayena anavasesato jātiyā khīṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Tanti yathāvuttajātiṃ. Soti bhagavā.
所谓“梵行住”,在此即指道梵行的产生,故说“已完成”。正见在四谛中以遍知等作用而转起,正思惟等亦在苦谛中随顺于遍知现观而转起,于其余诸谛,它们以断现观等方式转起,这是明显的。因此说“以四道,依遍知、断、作证、修习现观”。“不再有如此状态”——这些种类为“如此”,其状态为“如此状态”,即是此义。而这些种类,在此意指作为圣道作用的遍知等,故说“以如此十六种作用的状态”。因为省察道时,它们由道力而显著现前;而在遍知等中,断是主要的,其余是为了达成彼目的,故说“或为烦恼灭尽”。或者,这是就省察已断烦恼而说的。“不再有如此状态——了知”此处另有如下理趣:“如此状态”是出格、为格。因此,其义为:从此状态、从此种类,即从现今存在的蕴相续,我无有未来的蕴相续;而这些被称为最后有的五蕴,已被遍知,无住立而住,犹如断根的树。因为未遍知为根者,即是住立。如说:“诸比丘,若于抟食有贪、有喜、有爱,则识住立、增长”等。而这些五蕴,随着最后识的灭,如无燃料之火,将熄灭——如是了知。显示巴利原文
Brahmacariyavāso nāma idha maggabrahmacariyassa nibbattanamevāti āha ‘‘niṭṭhita’’nti. Sammādiṭṭhiyā catūsu saccesu pariññādikiccasādhanavasena pavattamānāya sammāsaṅkappādīnampi dukkhasacce pariññābhisamayānuguṇā pavatti, itarasaccesu ca nesaṃ pahānābhisamayādivasena pavatti pākaṭā eva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayavasenā’’ti. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti ime pakārā itthaṃ, tabbhāvo itthattaṃ, tadatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Te pana pakārā ariyamaggabyāpārabhūtā pariññādayo idhādhippetāti āha ‘‘evaṃsoḷasakiccabhāvāyā’’ti. Te hi maggaṃ paccavekkhato maggānubhāvena pākaṭā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti , pariññādīsu ca pahānameva padhānaṃ, tadatthattāya itaresanti āha ‘‘kilesakkhayāya vā’’ti. Pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇavasena vā etaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti abbhaññāsi’’nti etthāyamaparo nayo – itthattāyāti nissakke sampadānavacanaṃ. Tenāyamattho – itthattāya itthambhāvato imasmā evaṃpakārā idāni vattamānakkhandhasantānā aparaṃ anāgatakkhandhasantānaṃ mayhaṃ natthi, ime pana carimattabhāvasaṅkhātā pañcakkhandhā pariññātā appatiṭṭhā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā rukkhā viya. Apariññātamūlakā hi patiṭṭhā. Yathāha ‘‘kabaḷīkāre ce, bhikkhave, āhāre atthi rāgo atthi nandī atthi taṇhā, patiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ viruḷha’’ntiādi (saṃ. ni. 2.64; kathā. 296; mahāni. 7). Te pana pañcakkhandhā carimakaviññāṇanirodhena anupādāno viya jātavedo nibbāyissantīti abbhaññāsinti.
“为省察智所摄持”是指并非如同证得前两种智那样只是部分的,而是完整的。“显示”是以总结的方式显示。因为就内容实质而言,前文已经显示过了。其余部分在此,因循前述方法而说,故易解了。显示巴利原文
Paccavekkhaṇañāṇapariggahitanti na paṭhamadutiyañāṇadvayādhigamaṃ viya kevalanti adhippāyo. Dassentoti nigamanavasena dassento. Sarūpato hi pubbe dassitamevāti. Sesamettha vuttanayattā suviññeyyameva.
“三次出生”:以此显示这样的意思——“婆罗门,我仅以第一种明就已出生,由于没有更早出生或同时出生者,故为一切众生中的最长者、最年长者,更何况以三明而三次出生呢?”应如此连接:以宿住随念智为过去分智,因为其以过去为所缘,且具有该过去分的性质,故以宿住随念智阐明过去分智。其中,“过去分智”是指于过去蕴、处、界所摄的过去部分无碍的智。由于天眼智以现在为所缘,而随业趣智与未来分智是依天眼之力而成就,且为他心智是依天眼而成就的,故说“以天眼见现在与未来分智”。其中,“以天眼”是指以附带诸智的天眼智。“现在分与未来分”合称现在未来分,于此之智即现在未来分智。由于证得漏尽智时,如同一切知智一样,其余不共智、十力智、不共佛法等不共的佛陀功德也都成就,故说“以漏尽成就一切世间与出世间功德”。因此说“显示一切一切知功德”。显示巴利原文
Tikkhattuṃ jātoti iminā pana idaṃ dasseti ‘‘ahaṃ, brāhmaṇa, paṭhamavijjāya jātoyeva purejātassa sahajātassa vā abhāvato sabbesaṃ vuḍḍho mahallako, kimaṅgaṃ pana tīhi vijjāhi tikkhattuṃ jātoti. Pubbenivāsañāṇena atītaṃsañāṇanti atītārammaṇasabhāgatāya tabbhāvībhāvato ca pubbenivāsañāṇena atītaṃsañāṇaṃ pakāsetvāti yojetabbaṃ. Tattha atītaṃsañāṇanti atītakkhandhāyatanadhātusaṅkhāte atītakoṭṭhāse appaṭihatañāṇaṃ. Dibbacakkhuñāṇassa paccuppannārammaṇattā yathākammūpagañāṇassa anāgataṃsañāṇassa ca dibbacakkhuvaseneva ijjhanato dibbacakkhuno paribhaṇḍañāṇattā dibbacakkhumhiyeva ca ṭhitassa cetopariyañāṇasiddhito vuttaṃ ‘‘dibbacakkhunā paccuppannānāgataṃsañāṇa’’nti. Tattha dibbacakkhunāti saparibhaṇḍena dibbacakkhuñāṇena. Paccuppannaṃso ca anāgataṃso ca paccuppannānāgataṃsaṃ, tattha ñāṇaṃ paccuppannānāgataṃsañāṇaṃ. Āsavakkhayañāṇādhigameneva sabbaññutaññāṇassa viya sesāsādhāraṇañāṇadasabalañāṇaāveṇikabuddhadhammādīnampi anaññasādhāraṇānaṃ buddhaguṇānaṃ ijjhanato vuttaṃ ‘‘āsavakkhayena sakalalokiyalokuttaraguṇa’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘sabbepi sabbaññuguṇe pakāsetvā’’ti.
说法随喜论显示巴利原文
Desanānumodanakathā
15 “喜遍满身具足身与心”:指因喜的遍满而身与心具足。“无知”:即无知的意思。此处于‘dhī’字结合,故这是属格意义的accusative(对格)用法。“超越”:此处指已超越、已离去,故说“于灭尽中见”。正是因此,才说“初夜分已出离”。“更超越”:即极其可爱、令心悦意,那样的即美妙、吉祥,故说“于美妙中见”。“谁”:指天、龙、夜叉、乾闼婆等中之某一位。“我”:我的。“足”:即双脚。“以神通”:以此种天神通。“以名声”:以此种随从与界定。“照耀”:正在闪耀。“以超越”:以极其可爱、令人向往、美丽。“以色”:以肤色、身色之光耀。“照亮一切方”:照亮十方,犹如月、犹如日,令一切光明一片,这是偈颂的意思。“于美丽”:指殊胜、具足之容貌。显示巴利原文
15.Pītivipphāraparipuṇṇagattacittoti pītipharaṇena paripuṇṇakāyacitto. Aññāṇanti aññāṇassāti attho. Dhīsaddassa yogato hi sāmiatthe etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Abhikkantāti ettha atikkantā, vigatāti atthoti āha ‘‘khaye dissatī’’ti. Teneva hi ‘‘nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo’’ti vuttaṃ. Abhikkantataro cāti ativiya kantataro manoramo, tādiso ca sundaro bhaddako nāma hotīti āha ‘‘sundare dissatī’’ti. Koti devanāgayakkhagandhabbādīsu ko katamo. Meti mama. Pādānīti pāde. Iddhiyāti imāya evarūpāya deviddhiyā. Yasasāti iminā edisena parivārena paricchedena. Jalanti vijjotamāno. Abhikkantenāti ativiya kantena kamanīyena abhirūpena. Vaṇṇenāti chavivaṇṇena sarīravaṇṇanibhāya. Sabbā obhāsayaṃ disāti dasapi disā pabhāsento cando viya sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekālokaṃ karontoti gāthāya attho. Abhirūpeti uḷārarūpe sampannarūpe.
“太殊胜了,乔达摩尊者!太殊胜了,乔达摩尊者!”——这两句话是以重复的形式,表达“善哉,善哉,乔达摩尊者!”之义。为了进一步确定它们在不同情境中的运用,而说“在恐惧时”、“在愤怒时”等。其中,如喊“贼!贼!”、“蛇!蛇!”等,是在恐惧时的重复;如喊“射!射!”、“打!打!”等,是在愤怒时;如说“善哉!善哉!”等,是在赞叹时;如说“去!去!”、“割!割!”等,是在急促时;如说“来!来!”等,是在好奇时;如“正觉者!正觉者!这样想着”等,是在惊叹时;如说“请前进,尊者!请前进,尊者!”等,是在欢喜时;如“独子在哪里?独子在哪里?”等,是在忧伤时;如“啊,快乐!啊,快乐!”等,是在明净信心时。‘ca’字是未提及之事的汇总义,由此应知也包括呵责、不敬等情境。其中,如“恶人!恶人!”等,是在呵责时;如“漂亮的人!漂亮的人!”等,应视为在不敬时。显示巴利原文
Abhikkantaṃ bho gotama, abhikkantaṃ bho gotamāti vacanadvayassa ‘‘sādhu sādhu bho gotamā’’ti āmeḍitavasena atthaṃ dassetvā tassa visayaṃ niddhārento āha ‘‘bhaye kodhe’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘coro coro, sappo sappo’’tiādīsu bhaye āmeḍitaṃ. ‘‘Vijjha vijjha, pahara paharā’’tiādīsu kodhe. ‘‘Sādhu sādhū’’tiādīsu pasaṃsāyaṃ. ‘‘Gaccha gaccha, lunāhi lunāhī’’tiādīsu turite. ‘‘Āgaccha āgacchā’’tiādīsu kotūhale. ‘‘Buddho buddhoti cintento’’tiādīsu (bu. vaṃ. 2.44) acchare. ‘‘Abhikkamathāyasmanto, abhikkamathāyasmanto’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.20; a. ni. 9.11) hāse. ‘‘Kahaṃ ekaputtaka, kahaṃ ekaputtakā’’tiādīsu soke. ‘‘Aho sukhaṃ, aho sukha’’ntiādīsu (udā. 20; cūḷava. 332) pasāde. Ca-saddo avuttasamuccayattho . Tena garahaasammānādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tattha ‘‘pāpo pāpo’’tiādīsu garahāyaṃ. ‘‘Abhirūpaka abhirūpakā’’tiādīsu asammāne daṭṭhabbaṃ.
此语并非为了重复而说两次,而是为了显示两种不同的义理,因此说“或者”等。针对“殊胜”一词,采取了中性词形。而世尊的这一言语即是说法,所以又说“也就是乔达摩尊者的说法”。或者,这只是单纯示义,因此应知词性与格位的变化皆随义理而作。第二句也同此理。“去除过患”是指去除贪等烦恼的破坏;“获得功德”是指成就戒等功德。为了阐明说法所成就的功德中的主要部分,首先说“由生信、由生慧”,因为世间功德以信为首,出世间功德以慧为首。在“有义”等方面:由于具足戒等义利而称为“有义”;由于具足词的本源与构造而称为“有文”;由于使用浅显易懂的言辞而称为“言辞明了”;由于义理幽微难解而称为“义理深奥”;由于用词柔和甜美而称为“悦耳”;由于义理广大清净、令人爱乐而称为“入心”;由于摧破我慢而不自赞,由于折伏顽固忿恨而不毁他;由于以利益心而说,能平息他人贪欲的热恼等,故为“悲悯清凉”;由于破除烦恼的黑暗,故为“智慧明净”;由于音声如迦陵频伽鸟般美妙,故为“入耳可爱”;由于前后不相违、义理极其清净,故为“堪忍推敲”。正因为入耳可爱,所以是“闻之安乐”;正显示巴利原文
Nayidaṃ āmeḍitavasena dvikkhattuṃ vuttaṃ, atha kho atthadvayavasenāti dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Abhikkantanti vacanaṃ apekkhitvā napuṃsakaliṅgavasena vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana bhagavato vacanaṃ dhammassa desanāti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘yadidaṃ bhoto gotamassa dhammadesanā’’ti. Atthamattadassanaṃ vā etaṃ, tasmā atthavasena liṅgavibhattivipariṇāmo veditabbo. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Dosanāsanatoti rāgādikilesaviddhaṃsanato. Guṇādhigamanatoti sīlādiguṇānaṃ sampāpanato. Ye guṇe desanā adhigameti, tesu padhānabhūtā guṇā dassetabbāti te padhānabhūte guṇe tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘saddhājananato paññājananato’’ti vuttaṃ. Saddhāpamukhā hi lokiyā guṇā, paññāpamukhā lokuttarā. Sātthatotiādīsu sīlādiatthasampattiyā sātthato, sabhāvaniruttisampattiyā sabyañjanato. Suviññeyyasaddappayogatāya uttānapadato, saṇhasukhumabhāvena duviññeyyatthatāya gambhīratthato. Siniddhamudumadhurasaddappayogatāya kaṇṇasukhato, vipulavisuddhapemanīyatthatāya hadayaṅgamato. Mānātimānavidhamanena anattukkaṃsanato, thambhasārambhanimmaddanena aparavambhanato. Hitādhippāyappavattiyā paresaṃ rāgapariḷāhādivūpasamanena karuṇāsītalato, kilesandhakāravidhamanena paññāvadātato. Karavīkarutamañjutāya āpātharamaṇīyato, pubbāparāviruddhasuvisuddhatthatāya vimaddakkhamato. Āpātharamaṇīyatāya eva suyyamānasukhato, vimaddakkhamatāya hitajjhāsayappavattitāya ca vīmaṃsiyamānahitatoti evamattho veditabbo. Evamādīhīti ādi-saddena saṃsāracakkanivattanato, saddhammacakkappavattanato, micchāvādavidhamanato, sammāvādapatiṭṭhāpanato, akusalamūlasamuddharaṇato, kusalamūlasaṃropanato, apāyadvārapidhānato, saggamaggadvāravivaraṇato, pariyuṭṭhānavūpasamanato, anusayasamugghātanatoti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
“向下放置”是指被某人以口朝下的方式放置。“下端生起”是指本性上就生起下端。“揭开”是指使之显露。“执手”是指不说“向东走”或“向北走”等,而是执着他的手指示说:“这条路没有疑问,应如此走。”“黑月十四”是指黑月中的第十四日。“将倒覆的翻正”,是指将本非盛物依处的器皿,翻转过来令它成为依处。由于“下端生起”而背离正法,由于“向下放置”而安住于非正法——应当这样将这两句依义理来配合,而不依顺序配合。虽然欲贪等也是遮蔽者,因为它们属于盖障,但邪见尤其能遮蔽众生,因为众生执取邪见,所以说“被邪见的密林所覆盖”。因此世尊说:“比丘们,我说邪见是最上的过恶。”一切通往恶趣之道皆是邪道、是恶道,而正见等的直接对立面——邪见等八种邪行,即是邪道。正因如此,针对这两者的对立,才说“开示天界与解脱道”。如同依于油的灯比依于酥油的灯更明亮,所以取“油灯”之说。“以这些方式”是指以这些翻覆与揭开、遮蔽与显露等譬喻所譬喻的方式,或者以这些如前所述,将无味、无相等在其自身中原本并非如此而显现的方式,以显示自己天住的方式,以显示三明而暗示自己一切知功德的方式。因此说显示巴利原文
Adhomukhaṭhapitanti kenaci adhomukhaṃ ṭhapitaṃ. Heṭṭhāmukhajātanti sabhāveneva heṭṭhāmukhaṃ jātaṃ. Ugghāṭeyyāti vivaṭaṃ kareyya. Hatthegahetvāti ‘‘puratthābhimukho uttarābhimukho vā gacchā’’tiādīni avatvā hatthe gahetvā ‘‘nissandehaṃ esa maggo, evaṃ gacchā’’ti dasseyya. Kāḷapakkhacātuddasīti kāḷapakkhe cātuddasī kāḷapakkhacātuddasī. Nikkujjitaṃ ukkujjeyyāti ādheyyassa anādhārabhūtaṃ bhājanaṃ ādhārabhāvāpādanavasena ukkujjeyya. Heṭṭhāmukhajātatāya saddhammavimukhaṃ adhomukhaṭhapitatāya asaddhamme patiṭṭhitanti evaṃ padadvayaṃ yathārahaṃ yojetabbaṃ, na yathāsaṅkhyaṃ. Kāmaṃ kāmacchandādayopi paṭicchādakā nīvaraṇabhāvato, micchādiṭṭhi pana savisesaṃ paṭicchādikā satte micchābhinivesanenāti āha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchanna’’nti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiparamāhaṃ, bhikkhave, vajjaṃ vadāmī’’ti. Sabbo apāyagāmimaggo kummaggo kucchito maggoti katvā, sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ ujupaṭipakkhatāya micchādiṭṭhiādayo aṭṭha micchattadhammā micchāmaggo. Teneva hi tadubhayapaṭipakkhataṃ sandhāya ‘‘saggamokkhamaggaṃ ācikkhantenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sappiādisannissayo padīpo na tathā, ujjalo yathā telasannissayoti telapajjotaggahaṇaṃ. Etehi pariyāyehīti etehi nikkujjitukkujjanapaṭicchannavivaraṇādiupamopamitabbappakārehi, etehi vā yathāvuttehi arasarūpatādīnaṃ attani aññathā paṭipādanapariyāyehi attano dibbavihāravibhāvanapariyāyehi vijjattayavibhāvanāpadesena attano sabbaññuguṇavibhāvanapariyāyehi ca. Tenāha ‘‘anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito’’ti.
净信相论显示巴利原文
Pasannākārakathā
“净信所作”是指由净信者所应作的恭敬供养。在“我皈依”一句中,此处省略了“iti”一词,故说“我皈依‘皈依’”。因为这里的“去”(gacchāmi)字不像“引导”(neti)等词那样可以带双宾语,因此,不能像说“将羊领到村”那样,说“我皈依乔达摩”,而应说“我皈依‘皈依’”,所以应知此处省略了“iti”一词。“皈依”即庇护所,因此称为“归宿”。而成为归宿,是通过遮止不利与成就利益来实现的,故说“为灾苦与利益的施与者”。“灾苦”即苦,但“恶”的含义更为恰当,此处作属格。在此,“皈依”的“去”,是指怀着某种意图去亲近,或依其意图去知解——为显示此义,故说“以此意图”等。其中,“我皈依”等句,以前句解释后句之义。或者,“亲近”是怀着皈依的意图而前往,“侍奉”是亲近承事,“恭敬侍奉”是履行义务而服侍——如此,在一切方面都显示了唯无他处可皈依。“我皈依”一词,如何能得“我觉悟”之义?因此说“因为那些”等。显示巴利原文
Pasannākāranti pasannehi kātabbaṃ sakkāraṃ. Saraṇaṃ gacchāmīti ettha iti-saddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti āha ‘‘saraṇanti gacchāmī’’ti. Ettha hi nāyaṃ gamisaddo nīsaddādayo viya dvikammako, tasmā yathā ajaṃ gāmaṃ netīti vuccati, evaṃ ‘‘gotamaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti vattuṃ na sakkā, ‘‘saraṇanti gacchāmī’’ti pana vattabbaṃ, tasmā ettha iti-saddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti veditabbaṃ. Saraṇanti paṭisaraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘parāyaṇa’’nti. Parāyaṇabhāvo ca anatthanisedhanena atthasampaṭipādanena ca hotīti āha ‘‘aghassa tātā hitassa ca vidhātā’’ti. Aghassāti dukkhatoti vadanti, pāpatoti pana attho yutto, nissakke cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Saraṇanti gamanañcettha tadadhippāyena bhajanaṃ tathā jānanaṃ vāti dassento ‘‘iti iminā adhippāyenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha gacchāmītiādīsu purimassa purimassa pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ atthavacanaṃ. Bhajanaṃ vā saraṇādhippāyena upasaṅkamanaṃ, sevanā santikāvacaratā, payirupāsanaṃ vattappaṭivattakaraṇena upaṭṭhānanti evaṃ sabbathāpi anaññasaraṇataṃyeva dīpeti. Gacchāmīti padassa kathaṃ bujjhāmīti ayamattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘yesaṃ hī’’tiādi.
“已证得道、已现证灭”这两句,所显示的也只是果位者,而非道位者。为了指明这一点,所以说“在依教奉行时”。难道善凡夫不也被称为依教奉行吗?虽然可以这样说,但严格来说,只有道位者才应如此称呼,其余人则不然,因为他们尚未进入正性决定。正如他们被称为“在堕恶趣中不令堕落而能保持者”,因为唯有通过进入正性决定,方有可能解脱恶趣。“被称为”中的“iti”一词,表示开头或方式。由此,它包含了“诸比丘,无论是有为法还是无为法,离贪于他们中被誉为最上”这句经文,或者以此表示“广说”。在此,由于圣道具有出离性,涅槃是成就其义之因,因此两者在严格意义上都被称为法。因为以涅槃为所缘缘,圣道才能成就其义;同样,圣果也因“由于那种信尚未止息”等说法,以及由道所断除的烦恼具有寂止断除的作用、随顺出离、是出离的究竟,而被称为法。至于教法,则因是证得出离法之因,依此方便所说的道理,也可获得法的名称。为了表明此义已载于圣典,所以说“不仅……”等。显示巴利原文
Adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodheti padadvayenapi phalaṭṭhā eva dassitā, na maggaṭṭhāti te dassento ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne cā’’ti āha. Nanu ca kalyāṇaputhujjanopi yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjatīti vuccatīti? Kiñcāpi vuccati, nippariyāyena pana maggaṭṭhā eva tathā vattabbā, na itare niyāmokkamanābhāvato. Tathā hi te eva ‘‘apāyesu apatamāne dhāretī’’ti vuttā. Sammattaniyāmokkamanena hi apāyavinimuttasambhavo. Akkhāyatīti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā. Tena ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (itivu. 90; a. ni. 4.34) suttapadaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, ‘‘vitthāro’’ti vā iminā. Ettha ca ariyamaggo niyyānikatāya, nibbānaṃ tassa tadatthasiddhihetutāyāti ubhayameva nippariyāyena dhammoti vutto. Nibbānañhi ārammaṇapaccayabhūtaṃ labhitvā ariyamaggassa tadatthasiddhi, tathāpi ariyaphalānaṃ ‘‘yasmā tāya saddhāya avūpasantāyā’’tiādivacanato maggena samucchinnānaṃ kilesānaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānakiccatāya niyyānānuguṇatāya niyyānapariyosānatāya ca. Pariyattidhammassa pana niyyānadhammasamadhigamahetutāyāti iminā pariyāyena vuttanayena dhammabhāvo labbhati eva, svāyamattho pāṭhāruḷho evāti dassento ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādimāha.
“离贪”即指道。因为一切贪——诸如欲贪、有贪等种种分类——皆依此而离染、被断除故,说“离贪”为道。“不动、无忧”指果。因为被称为“动”的渴爱与具有内在燃烧特征的忧,在果生起时已完全灭尽,故说“不动、无忧”为果。“无违逆”指无矛盾、不违逆,即合意、殊胜之义。“纯熟”是因为以熟练的形式生起,或因显示了殊胜的功德。如经中说:“婆罗门,我于人间善说纯熟、殊胜之法,具害想者不如此说。”“一切法蕴都已说”为连接句。“以见与戒的集合”指:依“凡此见是圣、能出离,能令奉行者正尽苦,具如是见者住于见同分”所说的见,与“凡他们戒无缺、无穿、无斑点、无杂色、自在、为智者所赞、无执取、能引生定,具如是戒者住于戒同分”所说的戒,二者集合之义,即见与戒的同分。“集合”即结合、和合之义。因为圣者无论身处多远,都以其功德之集合而和合。“八人、法见者”指:依四对人之分,或依个人之分,有八位圣者,因现见了圣法而称为“法见者”。“三事为皈依”指:通过皈依的行为及三次皈依,而有三种皈依。“宣说”指将自己内心所证者以语言表达出来。显示巴利原文
Rāgavirāgoti maggo kathitoti kāmarāgo bhavarāgoti evamādibhedo sabbopi rāgo virajjati pahīyati etenāti rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito. Anejamasokanti phalanti ejāsaṅkhātāya taṇhāya antonijjhānalakkhaṇassa sokassa ca taduppattiyaṃ sabbaso parikkhīṇattā anejamasokanti phalaṃ kathitaṃ. Appaṭikūlanti avirodhadīpanato kenaci aviruddhaṃ, iṭṭhaṃ paṇītanti vā attho. Paguṇarūpena pavattitattā, pakaṭṭhaguṇavibhāvanato vā paguṇaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘vihiṃsasaññī paguṇaṃ nabhāsiṃ, dhammaṃ paṇītaṃ manujesu brahme’’ti (ma. ni. 1.283; mahāva. 9). Sabbadhammakkhandhā kathitāti yojanā. Diṭṭhisīlasaṅghātenāti ‘‘yāyaṃ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54) evaṃ vuttāya diṭṭhiyā ‘‘yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññuppasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṃvattanikāni, tathārūpehi sīlehi sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54; a. ni. 6.12) evaṃ vuttānaṃ sīlānañca saṃhatabhāvena, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññenāti attho. Saṃhatoti ghaṭito, sametoti attho. Ariyapuggalā hi yattha katthaci dūre ṭhitāpi attano guṇasāmaggiyā saṃhatā eva. Aṭṭha ca puggalā dhammadasā teti purisayugaḷavasena cattāropi puggalavasena aṭṭheva ariyadhammassa paccakkhadassāvitāya dhammadasā. Tīṇi vatthūni saraṇanti gamanena tikkhattuṃ gamanena ca tīṇi saraṇagamanāni. Paṭivedesīti attano hadayaṅgataṃ vācāya pavedesi.
皈依论显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanakathā
为了于皈依事中得善巧,需阐明皈依的所缘、分类、果报、杂染等差别,以及皈依者,因此说“为于皈依善巧,应知皈依……”,因为离此则皈依本身即不能成立。其中,就词义而言,“皈依”意为杀害。应知此词依“杀害”义的词根“sara”而作解。因此,对已皈依者,正是以此皈依行为,杀害、灭尽轮回之怖畏、内心惊惧、身苦及一切恶趣之苦。此词唯指三宝。又或,佛为利益众生而说“诸比丘,应具戒而住”等,劝行诸善;为遮止不善而说“杀生实有恶报,来世得恶果”等,显示过患而令远离非义,由此杀害众生之怖畏,灭除因行非利、不行利而生的灾难。法——即道——以度脱有之荒漠而杀害众生之怖畏;另一种法(涅槃)则以给予安稳而杀害怖畏。僧伽因是无上应供,即使对微小供养、恭敬,亦能令获广大果报,从而杀害众生之怖畏。因此,依此分别所说,三宝即是皈依。以“世尊是正等觉者,法是善说,僧是善行道者”为缘,生起对三宝的净信与尊重,从而断除邪见、疑、痴、不信等烦恼,以此三宝为皈依、为归宿、为去处、为庇护、为避难所——如是,生起以彼为归宿的皈依。显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanassa visayappabhedaphalasaṃkilesabhedānaṃ viya kattu ca vibhāvanā tattha kosallāya hotīti ‘‘saraṇagamanesu kosallatthaṃ saraṇaṃ…pe… veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ tena vinā saraṇagamanasseva asambhavato. Tattha saraṇanti padatthato tāva hiṃsatīti saraṇaṃ. Hiṃsatthassa hi sarasaddassa vasenetaṃ padaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, tasmā saraṇagatānaṃ teneva saraṇagamanena vaṭṭabhayaṃ cittutrāsaṃ kāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ duggatipariyāpannaṃ sabbampi dukkhaṃ hanati, vināsetīti attho. Ratanattayassevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ . Atha vā hite pavattanena ‘‘sampannasīlā, bhikkhave, viharathā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.64) atthe niyojanena ahitā ca nivattanena ‘‘pāṇātipātassa kho pana pāpako vipāko, pāpakaṃ abhisamparāya’’ntiādinā ādīnavadassanādimukhena anatthato nivattanena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsati, hitāhitesu appavattipavattihetukaṃ byasanaṃ apavattikaraṇena vināseti buddho. Bhavakantārauttaraṇena maggasaṅkhāto dhammo sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsati, itaro assāsadānena. Appakānampi dānavasena pūjāvasena ca upanītānaṃ sakkārānaṃ vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsati saṅgho anuttaradakkhiṇeyyabhāvato, tasmā imināpi vibhajitvā vuttapariyāyena ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ. ‘‘Sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’’ti evaṃ pavattaratanattayapasaādataggarukatāhi vidhutadiṭṭhivicikicchāsammohaassaddhiyāditāya vihatakileso tadeva ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ parāyaṇaṃ gati tāṇaṃ leṇanti evaṃ pavattiyā tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ saraṇanti gacchati etenāti katvā. Tena yathāvuttacittuppādena samannāgato satto saraṇanti gacchati, vuttappakārena cittuppādena ‘‘etāni me tīṇi ratanāni saraṇaṃ, etāni parāyaṇa’’nti evaṃ upeti bhajati sevati payirupāsati, evaṃ vā jānāti, bujjhatīti attho. Evaṃ tāva saraṇaṃ, saraṇagamanaṃ, yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchati, idaṃ tayaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在皈依的区分中,有两种皈依:出世间皈依与世间皈依。其中,出世间皈依于见谛者之道刹那,由断除皈依随烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,而从作用上成就于整个三宝。若论其义,四圣谛之证得即是出世间皈依。于中,涅槃法以作证现观而得通达,道法以修习现观而得通达,通达之时即成就皈依之义;佛陀之功德作为声闻之行境,以遍知现观而得通达,圣僧之功德亦然。是故说“从作用上成就于整个三宝”。而且,此成就为一时俱成,非如世间皈依次第成就,以其由无痴通达而通故。然而,有说:“皈依非以涅槃为所缘而生起,但因道被证得,故皈依亦被证得,犹如某些三明者等之世间明等。”若依彼说,则唯有世间皈依而无出世间皈依。此说非理,以二种皈依皆应认可故。世间皈依则是凡夫由镇伏皈依随烦恼,以佛陀等功德为所缘而成就。若论其义,即对佛陀等对象生起“正自觉者世尊”等信心,及如前所述以信为先导之正见;于十种福业事中,此被称为见正直业。此处,“信心生起”应被理解为显示了如同被……显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanappabhede pana duvidhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ lokuttaraṃ lokiyañca. Tattha lokuttaraṃ diṭṭhasaccānaṃ maggakkhaṇe saraṇagamanupakkilesasamucchedanena ārammaṇato nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhati. Atthato catusaccādhigamo eva hi lokuttarasaraṇagamanaṃ. Tattha hi nibbānadhammo sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena, maggadhammo bhāvanābhisamayavasena paṭivijjhiyamānoyeva saraṇagamanatthaṃ sādheti, buddhaguṇā pana sāvakagocarabhūtā pariññābhisamayavasena, tathā ariyasaṅghaguṇā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhatī’’ti . Ijjhantañca saheva ijjhati, na lokiyaṃ viya paṭipāṭiyā asammohapaṭivedhena paṭividdhattā. Ye pana vadanti ‘‘na saraṇagamanaṃ nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā pavattati, maggassa adhigatattā pana adhigatameva hoti ekaccānaṃ tevijjādīnaṃ lokiyavijjādayo viyā’’ti, tesaṃ lokiyameva saraṇagamanaṃ siyā, na lokuttaraṃ. Tañca ayuttaṃ duvidhassapi icchitabbattā. Lokiyaṃ pana saraṇagamanaṃ puthujjanānaṃ saraṇagamanupakkilesavikkhambhanena ārammaṇato buddhādiguṇārammaṇaṃ hutvā ijjhati. Taṃ atthato buddhādīsu vatthūsu ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā’’tiādinā saddhāpaṭilābho yathāvuttasaddhāpubbaṅgamā ca sammādiṭṭhi, dasasu puññakiriyavatthūsu diṭṭhijukammanti vuccati. Ettha ca ‘‘saddhāpaṭilābho’’ti iminā mātādīhi ussāhitadārakādīnaṃ viya ñāṇavippayuttasaraṇagamanaṃ dassitanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhī’’ti iminā pana ñāṇasampayuttaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ dassitaṃ buddhasubuddhataṃ dhammasudhammataṃ saṅghasuppaṭipattiñca lokiyāvabodhavaseneva sammā ñāyena dassanato.
此世间皈依以四种方式生起:奉献自身、以彼为依归、入弟子位、行礼敬。其中,奉献自身者,谓:“从今日起,我将自身奉献于佛、奉献于法、奉献于僧”,如是,为度脱轮回之苦,舍弃自身而归属于佛等。以彼为依归者,谓:“从今日起,请忆念我以佛为依归、以法为依归、以僧为依归”,如是,生起以彼为依归之状态。入弟子位者,谓:“从今日起,请忆念我为佛之弟子、法之弟子、僧之弟子”,如是,进入弟子之位。行礼敬者,谓:“从今日起,请忆念我唯对此佛、法、僧三宝行问讯、起迎、合掌、恭敬之事”,如是,对佛等行最上恭敬。于此四种方式中,但行其一,皈依即得受持。显示巴利原文
Tayidaṃ lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ catudhā pavattati attasanniyyātanena tapparāyaṇatāya sissabhāvūpagamanena paṇipātenāti. Tattha attasanniyyātanaṃ nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ attānaṃ buddhassa niyyātemi, dhammassa, saṅghassā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīnaṃyeva saṃsāradukkhanittharaṇatthaṃ attano attabhāvassa pariccajanaṃ. Tapparāyaṇatā nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ buddhaparāyaṇo dhammaparāyaṇo saṅghaparāyaṇoti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ tapparāyaṇabhāvo. Sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ‘ahaṃ buddhassa antevāsiko, dhammassa, saṅghassā’ti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ sissabhāvūpagamo. Paṇipāto nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ‘ahaṃ abhivādanaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ añjalikammaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ buddhādīnaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ vatthūnaṃ karomī’ti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīsu paramanipaccakāro. Imesañhi catunnaṃ ākārānaṃ aññatarampi karontena gahitaṃyeva hoti saraṇagamanaṃ.
再者,也应当了知如此自我奉献:“我将自己奉献给世尊,将自己奉献给法、奉献给僧;我奉献生命。我的自我已奉献,我的生命已奉献。我以生命为限皈依佛,佛是我的皈依、庇护与救护。”以及:“我真实见到了导师,我见到了世尊;我真实见到了善逝,我见到了世尊;我真实见到了正自觉者,我见到了世尊。”如此,应知正如大迦叶长老的皈依一般,由此进入弟子之列。显示巴利原文
Apica ‘‘bhagavato attānaṃ pariccajāmi, dhammassa saṅghassa attānaṃ pariccajāmi, jīvitaṃ pariccajāmi, pariccattoyeva me attā, pariccattaṃyeva me jīvitaṃ, jīvitapariyantikaṃ buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi, buddho me saraṇaṃ leṇaṃ tāṇa’’nti evampi attasanniyyātanaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Satthārañca vatāhaṃ passāmi, bhagavantameva passāmi, sugatañca vatāhaṃ passāmi, bhagavantameva passāmi, sammāsambuddhañca vatāhaṃ passāmi, bhagavantameva passāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.154) evaṃ mahākassapattherassa saraṇagamanaṃ viya sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
我将巡行诸方,由村至村,由城至城;
礼敬正觉者,及法的善妙法性。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘So ahaṃ vicarissāmi, gāmā gāmaṃ purā puraṃ; Namassamāno sambuddhaṃ, dhammassa ca sudhammataṃ. (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 194); ‘‘Te mayaṃ vicarissāma, gāmā gāmaṃ nagā nagaṃ…pe… sudhammata’’nti. (su. ni. 182) –
同样地,如阿拉瓦卡、萨塔山、赫玛瓦塔等的皈依,应知是以彼为依归。难道这些阿拉瓦卡等不是由正道而得皈依的吗?为何说他们的皈依是以彼为依归的皈依呢?即使是由正道得皈依者,他们也以“我将游行,从村到村”等语,显示了以彼为依归之相,所以这样说。再者,婆罗门梵寿从座而起,上衣偏袒一肩,以头面伏于世尊足下,以口亲吻世尊双足,以双手抚摩,并自报姓名:“我是梵寿婆罗门,乔达摩尊者,我是梵寿婆罗门,乔达摩尊者。”如此亦应视作礼拜。显示巴利原文
Evampi āḷavakasātāgirahemavatādīnaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ viya tapparāyaṇatā veditabbā. Nanu cete āḷavakādayo maggeneva āgatasaraṇagamanā, kathaṃ tesaṃ tapparāyaṇatāsaraṇagamanaṃ vuttanti? Maggenāgatasaraṇagamanehipi ‘‘sohaṃ vicarissāmi gāmā gāma’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 194) tehi tapparāyaṇatākārassa paveditattā tathā vuttaṃ. Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatitvā bhagavato pādāni mukhena ca paricumbati, pāṇīhi ca parisambāhati, nāmañca sāveti ‘‘brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo, brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 2.394) evampi paṇipāto daṭṭhabbo.
然而,此礼拜因亲属、恐惧、师长、应供这四种原因而有四种。其中,以应供为因的礼拜成为皈依,而非其他三种因亲属、恐惧等而发生的礼拜。因为皈依是以最胜者为标准而被受持,也以最胜者为标准而毁坏。因此,若有释迦族人或拘利族人想‘佛陀是我们的亲属’而礼敬,其皈依并未被受持。或有人因恐惧而想‘沙门乔达摩为国王所尊崇,有大威力,若不礼敬,可能会作不利之事’而礼敬,其皈依也未被受持。即使在菩萨时期,有人忆念曾在世尊处所学,或在佛时期——显示巴利原文
So panesa ñātibhayācariyadakkhiṇeyyatāvasena catubbidho hoti. Tattha dakkhiṇeyyatāhetukena paṇipātena saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, na itarehi ñātibhayādivasappavattehi tīhi paṇipātehi. Seṭṭhavaseneva hi saraṇaṃ gayhati, seṭṭhavasena bhijjati, tasmā yo sākiyo vā koliyo vā ‘‘buddho amhākaṃ ñātako’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo vā ‘‘samaṇo gotamo rājapūjito mahānubhāvo avandiyamāno anatthampi kareyyā’’ti bhayena vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yopi bodhisattakāle bhagavato santike kiñci uggahitaṃ saramāno buddhakāle vā –
一份财物自受用,两份用以营生业,
第四份则应当储蓄,灾难来临时便有所用。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ekena bhogaṃ bhuñjeyya, dvīhi kammaṃ payojaye; Catutthañca nidhāpeyya, āpadāsu bhavissatī’’ti. (dī. ni. 3.265) –
学到了这类现世教诫之后,若心想“他是我的师长”而顶礼,此时并未受持皈依。但若期望来世或导向出离的教诫而顶礼,那只是对应供者的礼敬。唯有当他心想“此人是世间最殊胜的应供者”而顶礼时,这才真正受持了皈依。显示巴利原文
Evarūpiṃ diṭṭhadhammikaṃ anusāsaniṃ uggahetvā ‘‘ācariyo me’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ, samparāyikaṃ pana niyyānikaṃ vā anusāsaniṃ paccāsīsanto dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātameva karoti. Yo pana ‘‘ayaṃ loke aggadakkhiṇeyyo’’ti vandati, teneva gahitaṃ hoti saraṇaṃ.
如此已受皈依的优婆塞或优婆夷,即使对外道出家的亲属,心想“这是我的亲属”而行礼,皈依也不破,更何况对未出家者。同样,因畏惧而对国王行礼,皈依也不破,因为国王受国人尊崇,若不向他行礼,他可能会加害。同样,对任何教授技艺者,即使是外道,心想“这是我的老师”而行礼,皈依也不破。应如此了知皈依的破坏。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ gahitasaraṇassa ca upāsakassa vā upāsikāya vā aññatitthiyesu pabbajitampi ñātiṃ ‘‘ñātako me aya’’nti vandatopi saraṇagamanaṃ na bhijjati, pageva apabbajitaṃ. Tathā rājānaṃ bhayavasena vandato. So hi raṭṭhapūjitattā avandiyamāno anatthampi kareyyāti. Tathā yaṃ kiñci sippasikkhāpakaṃ titthiyampi ‘‘ācariyo me aya’’nti vandatopi na bhijjati. Evaṃ saraṇagamanassa pabhedo veditabbo.
皈依之果的说明显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanaphalakathā
在此,出世间皈依的异熟果是四种沙门果,因为出世间皈依即指圣道本身;而令一切轮回之苦不再生起、完全息灭,则是其利益果。此义曾如是说:显示巴利原文
Ettha ca lokuttarassa saraṇagamanassa cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphalaṃ ariyamaggasseva lokuttarasaraṇagamananti adhippetattā. Sakalassa pana vaṭṭadukkhassa anuppādanirodho ānisaṃsaphalaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“若有人皈依佛、法、僧,
他以正智彻见四圣谛,
彻知苦、苦的集起,以及超越苦,
彻知那导向苦灭的圣八支道。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yo ca buddhañca dhammañca, saṅghañca saraṇaṃ gato; Cattāri ariyasaccāni, sammappaññāya passati. ‘‘Dukkhaṃ dukkhasamuppādaṃ, dukkhassa ca atikkamaṃ; Ariyañcaṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ, dukkhūpasamagāminaṃ. ‘‘Etaṃ kho saraṇaṃ khemaṃ, etaṃ saraṇamuttamaṃ; Etaṃ saraṇamāgamma, sabbadukkhā pamuccatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 190-192);
又,应了知:'不执为常'等,即是此皈依所带来的利益果报。此义曾如是说——显示巴利原文
Apica niccato anupagamanādivasena petassa ānisaṃsaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
诸比丘,这是不可能的,绝无可能:一位见具足者会执著任何行法为常、为乐,或执著任何法为我;会夺取母亲的生命,夺取父亲的生命,夺取阿拉汉的生命;会以恶心出如来之血;会分裂僧团;会皈依其他导师。此事决无可能。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyya, sukhato upagaccheyya, kañci dhammaṃ attato upagaccheyya, mātaraṃ jīvitā voropeyya, pitaraṃ jīvitā voropeyya, arahantaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, paduṭṭhacitto tathāgatassa lohitaṃ uppādeyya, saṅghaṃ bhindeyya, aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.128; a. ni. 1.276).
然而,世间皈依的果报正是生存成就与财富成就。此义曾如是说:显示巴利原文
Lokiyassa pana saraṇagamanassa bhavasampadāpi bhogasampadāpi phalameva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
凡是皈依佛陀者,
他们将不堕恶趣之地;
舍弃人身已,
他们将充满天众之身。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ye keci buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse, Na te gamissanti apāyabhūmiṃ; Pahāya mānusaṃ dehaṃ, Devakāyaṃ paripūressantī’’ti.(dī. ni. 2.332; saṃ. ni. 1.37);
此外,还有这样的说法:显示巴利原文
Aparampi vuttaṃ –
那时,诸天之主帝释天率领八万天众,前往尊者大目犍连处。……帝释天站在一旁,尊者大目犍连对他这样说:“诸天之主,皈依佛确实是很好的。诸天之主,正是由于皈依佛的缘故,在此有些众生身坏命终后,投生善趣天界。他们以十种方式胜过其他诸天:天寿、天色、天乐、天誉、天主权,以及天界的色、声、香、味、触。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Atha kho sakko devānamindo asītiyā devatāsahassehi saddhiṃ yenāyasmā mahāmoggallāno tenupasaṅkami…pe… ekamantaṃ ṭhitaṃ kho sakkaṃ devānamindaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno etadavoca ‘sādhu kho, devānaminda, buddhasaraṇagamanaṃ hoti, buddhasaraṇagamanahetu kho, devānaminda, evamidhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjanti. Te aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhigaṇhanti dibbena āyunā dibbena vaṇṇena sukhena yasena ādhipateyyena dibbehi rūpehi saddehi gandhehi rasehi phoṭṭhabbehī’’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341).
对于法、僧,也是如此。显示巴利原文
Esa nayo dhamme saṅghe ca.
此外,还应依《毗罗摩经》等了知皈依的果报差别。正如《毗罗摩经》(增支部9.20)所说:婆罗门毗罗摩舍弃了容量为四分之一迦梨沙的八万四千金盆、银盆、铜盆,依次装满银、金与黄金;以及以一切饰物庄严的八万四千头象、八万四千匹马、八万四千辆车、八万四千头乳牛、八万四千名少女、八万四千张床座、八万四千件衣,更有不可计量的硬食、软食等,连续七年七月举行如此大布施。然而,供养一位须陀洹,其果报更为广大;供养一百位须陀洹,不如供养一位斯陀含;供养一位斯陀含,不如供养一位阿那含;供养一位阿那含,不如供养一位阿拉汉;供养一位阿拉汉,不如供养一位独觉佛;供养一位独觉佛,不如供养正自觉者;供养正自觉者,不如供养以佛为首之僧团;供养以佛为首之僧团,不如为四方僧团建造寺院;建造寺院,则不如皈依,其果报更为殊胜——此义曾如是说。显示巴利原文
Apica velāmasuttādivasenapi saraṇagamanassa phalaviseso veditabbo. Tathā hi velāmasutte (a. ni. 9.20) ‘‘karīsassa catutthabhāgappamāṇānaṃ caturāsītisahassasaṅkhyānaṃ suvaṇṇapātirūpiyapātikaṃsapātīnaṃ yathākkamaṃ rūpiyasuvaṇṇahiraññapūrānaṃ sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitānaṃ caturāsītiyā hatthisahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā assasahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā rathasahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā dhenusahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā kaññāsahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā pallaṅkasahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā vatthakoṭisahassānaṃ aparimāṇassa ca khajjabhojjādibhedassa āhārassa pariccajanavasena sattamāsādhikāni satta saṃvaccharāni nirantaraṃ pavattavelāmamahādānato ekassa sotāpannassa dinnaṃ mahapphalataraṃ, tato sataṃ sotāpannānaṃ dinnadānato ekassa sakadāgāmino, tato ekassa anāgāmino, tato ekassa arahato, tato ekassa paccekasambuddhassa, tato sammāsambuddhassa, tato buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa dinnadānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ, tato cātuddisaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissa vihārakaraṇaṃ, tato saraṇagamanaṃ mahapphalatara’’nti pakāsitaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“居士,婆罗门毗罗摩所行的大布施,与供养一位具见者相比,供养具见者的果报更为殊胜。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ, gahapati, velāmo brāhmaṇo dānaṃ adāsi mahādānaṃ, yo cekaṃ diṭṭhisampannaṃ bhojeyya, idaṃ tato mahapphalatara’’nti (a. ni. 9.20) –
应当如此了知皈依的果报。显示巴利原文
Ādi. Evaṃ saraṇagamanaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ.
皈依杂染分别论显示巴利原文
Saraṇagamanasaṃkilesabhedakathā
其中,世间皈依因对三所缘的无知、疑惑、邪见等而杂染,不具大光辉,不光明、不清净、不洁白,不具广大行,不殊胜。此处,所谓无知,即不了知三所缘的功德,对此迷惑。所谓疑惑,即“佛确实存在吗?还是不存在?”等犹豫。所谓邪见,当知是将功德构想为无功德而生起的颠倒执取。而出世间皈依则无杂染。世间皈依的破坏有两种:有过失的和无过失的。其中,有过失的破坏是由于皈依其他导师等,其果报不善。无过失的破坏则发生于命终之时。因为世间皈依如同受持学处,以未舍期间为限,仅以寿命为终点,故因蕴坏灭而破坏,这种破坏无有果报,故不视为有效。出世间皈依则绝无破坏,因为即使在来世,圣弟子也不会皈依其他导师。应如是了知皈依的杂染与破坏。显示巴利原文
Tattha ca lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ tīsu vatthūsu aññāṇasaṃsayamicchāñāṇādīhi saṃkilissati, na mahājutikaṃ, na ujjalaṃ aparisuddhaṃ apariyodātaṃ hoti, na mahāvipphāraṃ anuḷāraṃ. Ettha ca aññāṇaṃ nāma vatthuttayassa guṇānaṃ ajānanaṃ tattha sammoho. ‘‘Buddho nu kho, na nu kho’’tiādinā vicikicchā saṃsayo. Micchāñāṇaṃ nāma tassa guṇānaṃ aguṇabhāvaparikappanena viparītaggāhoti veditabbaṃ. Lokuttarassa pana saraṇagamanassa natthi saṃkileso. Lokiyassa ca saraṇagamanassa duvidho bhedo sāvajjo anavajjo ca. Tattha sāvajjo aññasatthārādīsu attaniyyātanādīhi hoti, so aniṭṭhaphalo. Anavajjo pana kālakiriyāya hoti. Lokiyañhi saraṇagamanaṃ sikkhāpadasamādānaṃ viya aggahitakālaparicchedakaṃ jīvitapariyantameva hoti, tasmā tassa khandhabhedena bhedo, so avipākattā aphalo. Lokuttarassa pana nevatthi bhedo. Bhavantarepi hi ariyasāvako aññaṃ satthāraṃ na uddisatīti. Evaṃ saraṇagamanassa saṃkileso ca bhedo ca veditabbo.
为何此处未提及清净?难道阐明清净不也是对这的善巧吗?的确如此,然而清净之义已由提及杂染而从义理上揭示,故未别立。因为对无明等杂染之因,令其完全不生起,并断除已生起者,即是清净。如是,于此应知“皈依、皈依之行”等的详细解说。然而,为了说明此处未作上述详细解说的原因,故说“但若在此说此”等。其中,“皈依解说”是指《沙门果经》中所说的皈依解说。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha vodānaṃ na gahitaṃ, nanu vodānavibhāvanāpi tattha kosallāya hotīti? Saccametaṃ, taṃ pana saṃkilesaggahaṇena atthato dīpitaṃ hotīti na gahitaṃ. Yāni hi tesaṃ saṃkilesakāraṇāni aññāṇādīni , tesaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ anuppādanena uppannānañca pahānena vodānaṃ hotīti. Evamettha ‘‘saraṇaṃ saraṇagamana’’ntiādīnaṃ papañco veditabbo. Imassa pana yathāvuttapapañcassa idha avacane kāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘so pana idha vuccamāno’’tiādi. Tattha saraṇavaṇṇanatoti sāmaññaphalasutte vuttasaraṇavaṇṇanato.
近事男身份告知论显示巴利原文
Upāsakattapaṭivedanākathā
“应如是持”意为“应如是知”。此处,“谁是近事男?”是询问体性,故是在问:“具有何种特征者为近事男?”“为何?”是询问原因,以此显示以何种现起之相,令“近事男”这一名称约定俗成地用于此人。故说“为何被称为近事男?”因名称的所表义现起之相,正是该义成为此状态的原因。“他的戒是什么?”意为:此近事男的戒是怎样的?以多少戒而名为具戒者?“他的正命是什么?”意为:此近事男的正命是什么。而正命是由远离邪命而成就,故也对此加以分别。“什么是失坏?”意为:什么戒或什么正命的失坏。因为随后所说的是规则或禁止。“什么是成就?”此处也是同样的道理。显示巴利原文
Evaṃdhāretūti evaṃ jānātūti attho. Ettha ko upāsakoti sarūpapucchā, tasmā kiṃlakkhaṇo upāsakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmāti hetupucchā. Tena kena pavattinimittena upāsakasaddo tasmiṃ puggale niruḷhoti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘kasmā upāsakoti vuccatī’’ti. Saddassa hi abhidheyyapavattinimittaṃ tadatthassa tabbhāvakāraṇaṃ. Kimassa sīlanti kīdisaṃ assa upāsakassa sīlaṃ, kittakena sīlenāyaṃ sīlasampanno nāma hotīti attho. Ko ājīvoti ko assa sammāājīvo. So pana micchājīvassa parivajjanena hotīti sopi vibhajīyati. Kā vipattīti kassa sīlassa ājīvassa vā vipatti. Anantarassa hi vidhi vā paṭisedho vā. Sampattīti etthāpi eseva nayo.
当如何了知此杂论?答曰:“谁是近事男?”——即刹帝利等种姓中,任何已皈依三宝的在家人。此处唯以皈依为因,并非以种姓等差别为依据。诚如所说:“大名!若人皈依佛、皈依法、皈依僧,大名,至此程度,便为近事男。”(《相应部》5.1033)显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbanti kathaṃ veditabbaṃ? Vuccate – ko upāsakoti khattiyādīsu yo koci tisaraṇaṃ gato gahaṭṭho. Saraṇagamanameva hettha kāraṇaṃ, na jātiādiviseso. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yato kho, mahānāma, buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, dhammaṃ, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti. Ettāvatā kho, mahānāma, upāsako hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).
为何称为近事男?因其亲近奉事三宝。正是以此皈依之行,及于三宝恭敬、尊重、崇敬等行持而亲近奉事,故有此说。因他亲近奉事佛,故为近事男;亲近奉事法,故为近事男;亲近奉事僧,故为近事男。显示巴利原文
Kasmā upāsakoti ratanattayaupāsanato. Teneva saraṇagamanena tattha ca sakkaccakiriyāya ādaragāravabahumānādiyogena payirupāsanatoti vuttaṃ hoti. So hi buddhaṃ upāsatīti upāsako. Dhammaṃ, saṅghaṃ upāsatīti upāsako.
“他的戒是什么?”——即五远离。此处所谓“离”:于杀生等中的恶戒,名为“怨敌”;由于对此怨敌的思量、杀害与破灭,故五种远离称为“离”,因为此戒以远离为根本。诚如所说:“大名!若近事男远离杀生、远离不与取、远离欲邪行、远离妄语、远离谷酒、果酒等放逸处,大名,至此程度,近事男便为具戒者。”(《相应部》5.1033)显示巴利原文
Kimassasīlanti pañca veramaṇiyo. Veramaṇiyoti cettha veraṃ vuccati pāṇātipātādīsu dussīlyaṃ, tassa mananato hananato vināsanato veramaṇiyo pañca viratiyo viratippadhānattā tassa sīlassa. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yato kho, mahānāma, upāsako pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā, kāmesumicchācārā, musāvādā, surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti. Ettāvatā kho, mahānāma, upāsako sīlavā hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).
什么是正命?即舍弃五种邪命贸易,以法、以公平而营生。诚如世尊所说:“诸比丘!有五种贸易,近事男不应作。哪五种?武器贸易、人口贸易、肉类贸易、酒类贸易、毒药贸易。诸比丘!这五种贸易,近事男不应作。”(《增支部》5.177)显示巴利原文
Ko ājīvoti pañca micchāvaṇijjā pahāya dhammena samena jīvitakappanaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘pañcimā, bhikkhave, vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā. Katamā pañca? Satthavaṇijjā sattavaṇijjā maṃsavaṇijjā majjavaṇijjā visavaṇijjā. Imā kho, bhikkhave, pañca vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā’’ti (a. ni. 5.177).
此中,武器贸易:指自己制造武器货物,或令人制造,或以任何方式取得后加以贩卖。人口贸易:指贩卖人口。肉类贸易:指如屠夫等,养殖鹿、猪等动物,制成肉后贩卖。酒类贸易:指调制任何酒类后加以贩卖。毒药贸易:指调制或收集毒药后加以贩卖。应如此了知:其中,武器贸易是伤害他人之因,故说不应作;人口贸易是令他人不自由之因;肉类与毒药贸易是杀生之因;酒类贸易是放逸之处。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca satthavaṇijjāti āvudhabhaṇḍaṃ katvā vā kāretvā vā yathākataṃ vā paṭilabhitvā tassa vikkayo. Sattavaṇijjāti manussavikkayo. Maṃsavaṇijjāti sūnakārādayo viya migasūkarādike posetvā maṃsaṃ sampādetvā vikkayo. Majjavaṇijjāti yaṃ kiñci majjaṃ yojetvā tassa vikkayo. Visavaṇijjāti visaṃ yojetvā saṅgahetvā vā tassa vikkayo. Tattha satthavaṇijjā paroparodhanimittatāya akaraṇīyā vuttā, sattavaṇijjā abhujissabhāvakaraṇato, maṃsavisavaṇijjā vadhahetuto, majjavaṇijjā pamādaṭṭhānatoti veditabbā.
什么是失坏?即彼戒与正命的失坏、破坏、毁坏与损毁,这就是他的失坏。再者,凡使他成为贱民、污垢与卑劣者的一切,也当知是他的失坏。这些从义理上来说,即是无信等五种法。如说:显示巴利原文
Kā vipattīti yā tasseva sīlassa ca ājīvassa ca vipatti bhedo kopo pakopo ca, ayamassa vipatti. Apica yāya esa caṇḍālo ceva hoti malañca paṭikuṭṭho ca, sāpissa vipattīti veditabbā. Te ca atthato assaddhiyādayo pañca dhammā honti. Yathāha –
诸比丘,具足五法的近事男,是近事男中的贱民、近事男中的污垢、近事男中的卑劣者。哪五种呢?无信、恶戒、迷信吉兆、信吉兆而不信业、于教法外寻求应供者且先于彼处作福。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakacaṇḍālo ca hoti upāsakamalañca upāsakapaṭikuṭṭho ca. Katamehi pañcahi? Assaddho hoti, dussīlo hoti, kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, maṅgalaṃ pacceti, no kammaṃ , ito ca bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesati, tattha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.175).
这里,“近事男中的卑劣者”是指低劣的近事男。对佛陀等以及业与业果的信仰的对立面,即是无信、邪胜解;具足如此所说的无信者,名为无信者。依如前所述的坏戒与坏正命而成为恶戒者。“以此所见等,此名为吉祥”——如此具足凡愚所计度的、称为迷信的所见、所闻、所觉的吉兆者,即是迷信吉兆者。“信吉兆”即相信所见吉兆等各种吉兆。“而非业”即不相信业本身。“从此教法之外”即在此一切知佛陀的教法之外的外道中。“寻求应供者”即执恶行者为应受供养者而寻求。“先行作福”即首先行布施、恭敬等善业。在此,将寻求应供者与先行作福合为一事,当知便是所说的五法。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca upāsakapaṭikuṭṭhoti upāsakanihīno. Buddhādīsu kammakammaphalesu ca saddhāvipariyāyo assaddhiyaṃ micchādhimokkho, yathāvuttena assaddhiyena samannāgato assaddho. Yathāvuttasīlavipattiājīvavipattivasena dussīlo. ‘‘Iminā diṭṭhādinā idaṃ nāma maṅgalaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ bālajanaparikappitakotūhalasaṅkhātena diṭṭhasutamutamaṅgalena samannāgato kotūhalamaṅgaliko. Maṅgalaṃ paccetīti diṭṭhamaṅgalādibhedaṃ maṅgalameva pattiyāyati. No kammanti kammassakataṃ no pattiyāyati. Itobahiddhāti ito sabbaññubuddhasāsanato bahiddhā bāhirakasamaye. Dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesatīti duppaṭipannaṃ dakkhiṇārahasaññī gavesati. Pubbakāraṃ karotīti dānamānanādikaṃ kusalakiriyaṃ paṭhamataraṃ karoti. Ettha ca dakkhiṇeyyapaayesanapubbakāre ekaṃ katvā pañca dhammā veditabbā.
‘什么是成就?’——即是戒的成就与正命的成就,也是那些能令他成为珍宝等的信等五法。如说:显示巴利原文
Kāsampattīti sāva tassa sīlasampadā ca ājīvasampadā ca sampatti, ye cassa ratanabhāvādikarā saddhādayo pañca dhammā. Yathāha –
比丘们,具足五法的优婆塞,既是优婆塞宝,也是优婆塞莲花,也是优婆塞白莲。哪五种法呢?他有信心,持守戒行,不依吉兆,唯信业果而不信吉兆,不在此教团之外寻求应供养者,并在此教团中先作布施。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakaratanañca hoti upāsakapadumañca upāsakapuṇḍarīko ca. Katamehi pañcahi? Saddho hoti, sīlavā hoti, na kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, kammaṃ pacceti, no maṅgalaṃ, na ito bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesati, idha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti.
此处,因能令四众弟子生起欢喜,优婆塞即是宝,故称为优婆塞宝;因功德庄严、名声远扬、戒香芬芳,优婆塞即是莲花,故称为优婆塞莲花;同样地,优婆塞白莲也应如此了知。其余未尽之义,当依前文所述缺失的反面而了知。如是‘谁是优婆塞’等杂集,应详细了知。然而,为说明此处未广说他们杂集之故,他说‘因为那会过于沉重’等。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca catunnampi parisānaṃ ratijananaṭṭhena upāsakova ratanaṃ upāsakaratanaṃ, guṇasobhākittisaddasugandhatāhi upāsakova padumaṃ upāsakapadumaṃ, tathā upāsakapuṇḍarīko ca veditabbo. Sesamettha vipattiyaṃ vuttavipariyāyena viññeyyaṃ. Evamidaṃ ‘‘ko upāsako’’tiādikaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ vitthārato veditabbaṃ. Imassa pana pakiṇṇakassa idha vitthāretvā avacane kāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘taṃ atibhāriyakaraṇato’’tiādi.
“Ādimhīti”意为“于初始”。“Koṭiyanti”意为“于最终边际”。“Vihāraggenāti”意为“以住处之部分”,即“住于此房室者获得此果报”等,依各各居住之处所部分为其义。“Ajjatanti”即“今日”之义。“Pāṇehi upetanti”以此显示其皈依乃是尽形寿的,在宣说“只要我生命延续”等之后,便以生命供养三宝并守护皈依。为了阐明那位婆罗门生起的意愿,他说“我”等。所谓“Pāṇehi upetanti”,意思是:只要我的生命继续存在,皈依就存在;皈依不是仅仅凭话语,也不是仅仅一次心生起,而是以舍命的姿态尽形寿皈依。此处之义应如此了知。显示巴利原文
Ādimhīti ādiatthe. Koṭiyanti pariyantakoṭiyaṃ. Vihāraggenāti ovarakakoṭṭhāsena, ‘‘imasmiṃ gabbhe vasantānaṃ idaṃ panasaphalaṃ pāpuṇātī’’tiādinā taṃtaṃvasanaṭṭhānakoṭṭhāsenāti attho. Ajjatanti ajja icceva attho. Pāṇehi upetanti iminā tassa saraṇagamanassa āpāṇakoṭikataṃ dassento ‘‘yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattatī’’tiādīni vatvā puna jīvitenapahaṃ vatthuttayaṃ paṭipūjento saraṇagamanañca rakkhāmīti uppannaṃ tassa brāhmaṇassa adhippāyaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘ahañhī’’tiādimāha. Pāṇehi upetanti hi yāva me pāṇā dharanti, tāva saraṇaṃ upetaṃ, upento na vācāmattena na ekavāraṃ cittuppādanamattena, atha kho pāṇānaṃ pariccajanavasena yāvajīvaṃ upetanti evamettha attho veditabbo.
“Adhivāsetūti”是“请接受”的意思,而这种接受乃是内心的纳受,故说“请纳受”。“Kāyaṅganti”:他们称身体本身就是肢,或身体的肢节如头等是身肢,即头等身体的部分。“Vācaṅganti”:即“好的”等言语的肢、部分。而言语的发动,应知即是言语的生起。“Abbhantareyevāti”:即在自己心相续的内部。“Khantiṃ cāretvāti”:即令忍辱生起,生起意乐。又有“Khantiṃ dhāretvā”的读法,意为将生起的意乐保持在内部,不通过言语表露出来。显示巴利原文
Adhivāsetūti sādiyatu, taṃ pana sādiyanaṃ manasā sampaṭiggaho hotīti āha ‘‘sampaṭicchatū’’ti. Kāyaṅganti kāyameva aṅganti vadanti, kāyassa vā aṅgaṃ sīsādi kāyaṅgaṃ, sīsādi sarīrāvayavanti vuttaṃ hoti. Vācaṅganti ‘‘hotu sādhū’’ti evamādivācāya aṅgaṃ avayavaṃ. Vācaṅgassa copanaṃ vācāya pavattanamevāti veditabbaṃ. Abbhantareyevāti attano cittasantāneyeva. Khantiṃ cāretvāti khantiṃ pavattetvā, ruciṃ uppādetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Khantiṃ dhāretvā’’tipi pāṭho, uppannaṃ ruciṃ abbhantareyeva dhāretvā vacībhedena apakāsetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
那么,韦兰若婆罗门是如何知道世尊默许的呢?他并不能直接了知世尊的心念,为何又说“了知世尊的默许后”呢?虽然不能直接了知心念,但由于他善于观察相状,通过随顺与相违的方式以推理而了知。为了显示这一点,他说了“如果沙门乔达摩对我……”等语。“善于观察相状”:即善于了知心念的相状,善于了知意图。“十指合拢而闪耀”:即双手十指合拢并闪耀。“合掌”:即双手合拢。“正面”:即面向,并非背对世尊的意思。“礼拜”:即以五体投地礼敬。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ pana verañjo brāhmaṇo bhagavato adhivāsanaṃ aññāsi. Na hi tena sakkā bhagavato cittappavatti paccakkhato viññātuṃ, tasmā ‘‘bhagavato adhivāsanaṃ viditvā’’ti kasmā vuttanti ce? Kiñcāpi tena na sakkā cittappavatti paccakkhato viññātuṃ, tathāpi ākārasallakkhaṇakusalatāya anvayabyatirekavasena anumānato aññāsīti dassento āha ‘‘sace me samaṇo gotamo’’tiādi. Ākārasallakkhaṇakusalatāyāti cittappavattiākāravijānane chekatāya, adhippāyavijānane kusalatāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalanti dvīsu hatthesu dasannaṃ nakhānaṃ samodhānena ekībhāvena samujjalantaṃ. Añjalinti hatthapuṭaṃ. Paṭimukhoyevāti abhimukhoyeva, na bhagavato piṭṭhiṃ dassetvāti attho. Vanditvāti pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā.
16 “在丰收时节”:即谷物丰熟的时节。“在谷物极贱时”:即价格极低时,那时只要给出少许便能获得大量早谷和晚谷,指那样的时节。稻米等谷物是早谷,绿豆、黄豆等是晚谷。有两种方式进行的努力,故称“二努力”。为了显示这是省略中间词的依主释复合词,说“以两种方式进行的努力”。“Īhanaṃ īhitaṃ”:Īhita是表示动作的名词,所以说“Īhita名为活动”。其中,活动就是行为。这是谁的行为呢?他说“心之行为”,即心的行为、心的作用。因此说“心之努力”。那么,这里的努力如何以两种方式进行呢?他说“我们能得到吗”等。其中,“我们能得到吗”是就贫困者而言。“我们能活命吗,还是不能”则是就富足者而言,应当这样理解。“Bhikkhamānāti”:即乞求者。也有读作“Duhitikā”的,其义也应依前述方式了知。因为“二”字是以“苦”字开头,故有此说。或者,这里的努力是苦的,任何努力都无法安乐地完成,故称“苦努力”,即生活艰难、谋生不易。显示巴利原文
16.Susassakālepīti sampannasassakālepi. Atisamagghepīti atisayena appagghepi, yadā kiñcideva datvā bahuṃ pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇaṃ gaṇhanti, tādise kālepīti attho. Sāliādi dhaññaṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ, muggamāsādi aparaṇṇaṃ. Dvidhā pavattaṃ īhitaṃ etthāti dvīhitikāti majjhapadalopībāhiratthasamāsoyamīti dassento āha ‘‘dvidhā pavattaīhitikā’’ti. Īhanaṃ īhitanti īhitasaddoyaṃ bhāvasādhanoti āha ‘‘īhitaṃ nāma iriyā’’ti. Tattha iriyāti kiriyā. Kassa panesā kiriyāti āha ‘‘cittairiyā’’ti, cittakiriyā cittappayogoti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘cittaīhā’’ti. Kathaṃ panettha īhitassa dvidhā pavattīti āha ‘‘lacchāma nu kho’’tiādi. Tattha lacchāma nu khoti idaṃ duggatānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Jīvituṃ vā sakkhissāma nu kho, noti idaṃ pana issarānaṃ vasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Bhikkhamānāti yācamānā. ‘‘Duhitikā’’tipi pāṭho. Tatthāpi vuttanayenevattho veditabbo. Dvi-saddassa hi du-saddādesenāyaṃ niddeso hoti. Dukkhaṃ vā īhitaṃ ettha na sakkā koci payogo sukhena kātunti duhitikā, dukkarajīvitappayogāti attho.
或者,是将“du”中的 u 转为 va,而成“dvīhitikā”,此为另一种解说,故说“或者”等。“byādhi”即疾病,这些是“āturatā”(患病)的同义词。由此显示“setaṭṭikā”(白条病)是一种疾病。然而,该病是由虫害引起的。据说,有一种虫会钻入茎秆中间的节,因被钻穿,即使长出的稻穗也无法吸取乳浆,因此他说“断乳”等。显示巴利原文
Du-sadde vā ukārassa vakāraṃ katvā dvīhitikāti ayaṃ niddesoti āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Byādhi rogoti etāni ‘‘āturatā’’ti imassa vevacanāni. Tena setaṭṭikā nāma ekā rogajātīti dasseti. So pana rogo pāṇakadosena sambhavati. Eko kira pāṇako nāḷamajjhagataṃ gaṇṭhiṃ vijjhati, yena viddhattā nikkhantampi sālisīsaṃ khīraṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti. Tenāha ‘‘pacchinnakhīra’’ntiādi.
“Vuttasassa”指已播种的谷物。“Tattha”指在毗兰若。所谓“仅得禾秆”,是以禾秆为量度,此处省略了前句的末分而作此表述,故说“仅得禾秆”。那里所播种的,只长成了禾秆,果实并未生起,这是其含义。而“sampajjati”(生成)一词,在此显示“salākāvuttā”(称为禾秆)中的“vutta”具有“成就、产生”之义。“以禾秆”是指用竹、藤、棕榈叶等制成的签条。“在谷物售卖者之处”指售卖谷物者,即在他们附近。“在买主之处”指购买谷物的人。“买后”即拿取之后。“在谷物处理处”指仓库附近,即量度谷物之处。“验色者”指检验迦诃波那钱币的人。“难以靠乞食钵维持生活”:“paggaha”指所执持之物,即钵。以此钵,即持钵行乞而无法维持生活,这是所说的意思,因此说“以钵而乞食”等。“nasukarā”(非易行)意为其中没有容易之性,即并非易行。“为团食而行乞后”指以行乞为因缘。对于“tvā”语尾,即使在表因缘的意义上,有些论师也认可这种用法。显示巴利原文
Vuttasassanti vapitasassaṃ. Tatthāti verañjāyaṃ. Salākāmattaṃ vuttaṃ etthāti salākāvuttā, purimapade uttarapadalopenāyaṃ niddeso. Tenāha ‘‘salākā eva sampajjatī’’ti. Yaṃ tattha vuttaṃ vāpitaṃ, taṃ salākāmattameva ahosi, phalaṃ na jāyatīti attho. Sampajjatīti ca iminā ‘‘salākāvuttā’’ti etthāyaṃ vuttasaddo nipphattiatthoti dasseti. Salākāyāti veḷuvilīvatālapaṇṇādīhi katasalākāya. Dhaññavikkayakānaṃ santikanti dhaññaṃ vikkiṇantīti dhaññavikkayakā, tesaṃ samīpanti attho. Kayakesūti dhaññagaṇhanakesu. Kiṇitvāti gahetvā. Dhaññakaraṇaṭṭhāneti koṭṭhāgārassa samīpaṭṭhāne, dhaññaminanaṭṭhāneti vuttaṃ hoti . Vaṇṇajjhakkhanti kahāpaṇaparikkhakaṃ. Nasukarā uñchena paggahena yāpetunti paggayhatīti paggaho, patto. Tena paggahena pattenāti attho, pattaṃ gahetvā bhikkhācariyāya yāpetuṃ na sakkāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘paggahena yo uñcho’’tiādi. Nasukarāti sukarabhāvo ettha natthīti nasukarā. Piṇḍāya caritvāti piṇḍāya caraṇahetu. Hetuatthepi hi tvāsaddameke icchanti.
从北道而来,或以北道为住处者,依语法规则应称为“uttarāpathakā”,却说为“uttarāhakā”,因此说“北道居民”等。或者,应知巴利原文本就是“uttarāpathakā”。然而,有些人以其他方式解释其义,如“带来殊胜物品者为uttarāhakā”,或“带来更高价值者为uttarāhakā”等。“在马匹起立之处”指产马的地方。“Verañjaṃ”指在毗兰若,此处是用于处格的业格形式。“Mandiraṃ”指马厩。“以圆形马厩而著称”意为因建成圆形而被认知为圆形马厩。由于如此建造的马厩众多,故用复数表述。也有人说,每十匹马所住的每一处所,各是一个圆形马厩。“不堪长途”指不能长时间维持,即不能长久持续。显示巴利原文
Uttarāpathato āgatā, uttarāpatho vā nivāso etesanti uttarāpathakāti vattabbe niruttinayena ‘‘uttarāhakā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘uttarāpathavāsikā’’tiādi. ‘‘Uttarāpathakā’’icceva vā pāḷipāṭho veditabbo. Keci pana ‘‘uttaraṃ visiṭṭhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ āharantīti uttarāhakā, uttaraṃ vā adhikaṃ agghaṃ nentīti uttarāhakā’’tiādinā aññena pakārena atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Assānaṃ uṭṭhānaṭṭhāneti assānaṃ ākaraṭṭhāne. Verañjanti verañjāyaṃ. Bhummatthe hetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Mandiranti assasālaṃ. Assamaṇḍalikāyoti paññāyiṃsūti parimaṇḍalākārena katattā assamaṇḍalikāyoti pākaṭā ahesuṃ. Evaṃ katānañca assasālānaṃ bahuttā bahuvacananiddeso kato. Dasannaṃ dasannaṃ assānaṃ vasanokāso ekekā assamaṇḍalikātipi vadanti. Addhānakkhamā na hontīti dīghakālaṃ pavattetuṃ khamā na honti, na cirakālappavattinoti vuttaṃ hoti.
“恒河以南为不适宜之地,以北为适宜之地”,依此意趣而说“因为他们不……”等。生于恒河南岸者,称为南道之人。“我们的佛陀”——如此将佛陀执为己有者,称为佛执属者。其余诸句亦如此。Paṭiyādetuṃ:意为准备、安排。“以常供食之概略”:指以常供食的形式。“清晨之时”——此处以处格用作业格,故说“意为在清晨之时”。或为显示持续关系的业格,而说明其持续义,故说“在清晨时分”等。Evaṃ:当依后述方式解释其义时。难道即使坐在寺院中,不是已经穿了下衣而坐吗?为何还说“穿好(下衣)”呢?释云:“为了更换在寺院所穿之衣”等。而“更换在寺院所穿之衣”应理解为:在寺院坐着时所穿的那件,于入村之时再加以抖动、各处整理、恭敬地重新穿着。因此说“因为他们在之前并非未穿着”。“拿了衣钵”:即拿了钵与衣。而此处的“拿取”不仅指用手,而是以任何方式执持,为显此义,而随宜作义理连结:“钵以手……”等。显示巴利原文
Gaṅgāya dakkhiṇā disā appatirūpadeso, uttarā disā patirūpadesoti adhippāyenāha ‘‘na hi te’’tiādi. Gaṅgāya dakkhiṇatīrajātā dakkhiṇāpathamanussā. ‘‘Amhākaṃ buddho’’ti evaṃ buddhaṃ mamāyantīti buddhamāmakā. Evaṃ sesesupi. Paṭiyādetunti sampādetuṃ. Niccabhattasaṅkhepenāti niccabhattākārena. Pubbaṇhasamayanti idaṃ bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘pubbaṇhasamayetiattho’’ti. Accantasaṃyoge vā idaṃ upayogavacananti dassetuṃ yathā accantasaṃyogattho sambhavati, tathā atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pubbaṇhe vā samaya’’ntiādi. Evanti evaṃ pacchā vuttanayena atthe vuccamāne. Nanu ca vihāre nisīdantāpi antaravāsakaṃ nivāsetvāva nisīdanti, tasmā ‘‘nivāsetvā’’ti idaṃ kasmā vuttanti āha ‘‘vihāranivāsanaparivattanavasenā’’tiādi. Vihāranivāsanaparivattanañca vihāre nisinnakāle nivatthampi puna gāmappavesanasamaye cāletvā ito cito ca saṇṭhapetvā sakkaccaṃ nivāsanamevāti veditabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘na hi te tato pubbe anivatthā ahesu’’nti. Pattacīvaramādāyāti pattañca cīvarañca gahetvā. Gahaṇañcettha na kevalaṃ hattheneva, atha kho yena kenaci ākārena dhāraṇamevāti dassento yathāsambhavamatthayojanaṃ karoti ‘‘pattaṃ hatthehī’’tiādinā.
“在所到之处”:指在各个圆形马厩中随处所至之处。“在臼中捣碎后食用”——为何那些比丘自己这样做来食用呢?难道得到之后,让净人煮好粥或饭,或自己煮来食用是不允许的吗?解释说:“长老们没有任何净人”等。在说明了比丘们不顾如法与否而这样做是不恰当的之后,又显示其不如法性而说“也是不许可的”。由于未携带锅碗等器具,即无繁多物品,故说“生活轻便”。“各自所得的一份”:指各自的那一份。“少欲务”:指除沙门法之外,不热衷于其他事务。Tadupiyaṃ:指与之相应、适合的。Pisati:意为磨碎。由于以福德与智慧之殊胜所应作之事令人愉悦,故说“有福德者”等。Naṃ:指那些谷粒。“从那时起不再”的说法,表明在此之前世尊也曾行乞,应知此义。显示巴利原文
Gatagataṭṭhāneti assamaṇḍalikāsu sampattasampattaṭṭhāne. Udukkhale koṭṭetvā koṭṭetvā paribhuñjantīti ettha kasmā pana te bhikkhū sayameva evaṃ katvā paribhuñjanti, kimevaṃ laddhaṃ kappiyakārakehi yāguṃ vā bhattaṃ vā pacāpetvā sayaṃ vā pacitvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘therānaṃ koci kappiyakārako natthī’’tiādi. Kappiyākappiyabhāvaṃ anapekkhitvā bhikkhūnaṃ evaṃ kātuṃ sāruppaṃ na hotīti vatvā puna akappiyabhāvampi dassento āha ‘‘na ca vaṭṭatī’’ti. Bhājanādipariharaṇavasena bahubhaṇḍikatāya abhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘sallahukavuttitā’’ti. Sakaṃ sakaṃ paṭivīsanti attano attano koṭṭhāsaṃ. Appossukkāti samaṇadhammato aññattha nirussāhā. Tadupiyanti tadanurūpaṃ. Pisatīti cuṇṇeti. Puññañāṇavisesehi kattabbakammassa manāpatā hotīti āha ‘‘puññavatā’’tiādi. Nanti naṃ patthapulakaṃ. ‘‘Na tato paṭṭhāyā’’ti vacanato tato pubbe bhagavato piṇḍāya caraṇampi dassitanti veditabbaṃ.
Laddhā:意为得到后。或读作“Laddho”,意为未曾得到侍者的地位。那么,长老何时得到了侍者的地位呢?答:据说有一次,世尊与那伽沙摩罗长老同行于旅途中,到达一处岔路口。长老偏离道路说:“世尊,我走这条路。”世尊便对他说:“来,比丘,我们一起走这条路。”长老说:“那么,世尊,请拿好您的衣钵,我走这条路。”说完便要将衣钵放在地上。世尊说:“拿来,比丘。”取过衣钵后便离开了。那位比丘走另一条路时,盗贼抢走了他的衣钵,并打破了他的头。他想:“如今世尊是我的皈依处,别无其他。”于是流着血来到世尊面前。世尊问:“比丘,这是怎么回事?”他便禀告了所发生的事。世尊便安慰他说:“比丘,莫忧虑,我们正是为了阻止此事才叫你这样走。”显示巴利原文
Laddhāti labhitvā. ‘‘Laddho’’ti vā pāṭho, upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ neva laddhoti attho. Kadā pana thero upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ laddhoti? Vuccate (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.11; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.219-223) – ekadā kira bhagavā nāgasamālattherena saddhiṃ addhānamaggappaṭipanno dvedhāpathaṃ patto. Thero maggā ukkamma ‘‘bhagavā ahaṃ iminā maggena gacchāmī’’ti āha. Atha naṃ bhagavā ‘‘ehi bhikkhu, iminā gacchāmā’’ti āha. So ‘‘handa bhagavā tumhākaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gaṇhatha, ahaṃ iminā gacchāmī’’ti vatvā pattacīvaraṃ chamāyaṃ ṭhapetuṃ āraddho. Atha bhagavā ‘‘āhara bhikkhū’’ti vatvā pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā gato. Tassapi bhikkhuno itarena maggena gacchato corā pattacīvarañceva hariṃsu, sīsañca bhindiṃsu. So ‘‘bhagavā dāni me paṭisaraṇaṃ, na añño’’ti cintetvā lohitena gaḷantena bhagavato santikaṃ āgami. ‘‘Kimidaṃ bhikkhū’’ti ca vutte taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesi. Atha naṃ bhagavā ‘‘mā cintayi bhikkhu, etaṃ kāraṇaṃyeva te nivārayimhā’’ti vatvā samassāsesi.
一时,世尊与尊者弥希耶一同前往东竹鹿苑的姜图村。在那里,弥希耶在姜图村乞食后,看到河边一座悦意的芒果园,便对世尊说:“世尊,请您拿着衣钵,我想在这芒果园中修行沙门法。”尽管被世尊再三阻止,他仍然前往,结果被不善寻思所缠缚,回来后将此事禀告世尊。世尊说:“正是考虑到这一点,我们才劝阻你。”随后渐次前往舍卫城。在那里,于香室精舍中,坐在敷设的殊胜佛座上,为比丘僧团所围绕,世尊对比丘们说:“比丘们,如今我已年迈,有些比丘当我说‘我们走这条路’时,却偏走另一条路;有些甚至把我的衣钵丢在地上。你们应当知道一位常随侍我的比丘。”比丘们心中生起了对法的悚惧感。这时,尊者舍利弗起立,礼敬世尊后说:“世尊,我正是因为渴望成为像您这样的人,才在无数亿劫中圆满众波罗蜜。像我这样的大智慧者,难道不配作侍者吗?让我来侍奉您。”世尊拒绝他说:“够了,舍利弗,你所在之处便不空虚,你的教诫与诸佛的教诫相近,我不需要你来承担侍者之职。”以此方式,以大目犍连尊者为首,八十位大弟子都站起身来。世尊全部拒绝了。显示巴利原文
Ekadā pana bhagavā meghiyattherena saddhiṃ pācīnavaṃsamigadāye jantugāmaṃ agamāsi. Tatrāpi meghiyo jantugāme piṇḍāya caritvā nadītīre pāsādikaṃ ambavanaṃ disvā ‘‘bhagavā tumhākaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gaṇhatha, ahaṃ etasmiṃ ambavane samaṇadhammaṃ karomī’’ti vatvā bhagavatā tikkhattuṃ nivāriyamānopi gantvā akusalavitakkehi anvāsatto paccāgantvā taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesi. Tampi bhagavā ‘‘idameva te kāraṇaṃ sallakkhayitvā nivārayimhā’’ti vatvā anupubbena sāvatthiṃ agamāsi. Tattha gandhakuṭipariveṇe paññattavarabuddhāsane nisinno bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘bhikkhave, idānimhi mahallako, ekacce bhikkhū ‘iminā maggena gacchāmā’ti vutte aññena gacchanti, ekacce mayhaṃ pattacīvaraṃ bhūmiyaṃ nikkhipanti, mayhaṃ nibaddhupaṭṭhākaṃ bhikkhuṃ jānāthā’’ti. Bhikkhūnaṃ dhammasaṃvego udapādi. Athāyasmā sāriputto uṭṭhāya bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, tumheyeva patthayamāno satasahassakappādhikaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ pāramiyo pūresiṃ, nanu mādiso mahāpañño upaṭṭhāko nāma vaṭṭati, ahaṃ upaṭṭhahissāmī’’ti āha. Taṃ bhagavā ‘‘alaṃ, sāriputta, yassaṃ disāyaṃ tvaṃ viharasi, asuññāyeva sā disā, tava ovādo buddhānaṃ ovādasadiso, na me tayā upaṭṭhākakiccaṃ atthī’’ti paṭikkhipi. Etenevupāyena mahāmoggallānaṃ ādiṃ katvā asītimahāsāvakā uṭṭhahiṃsu. Sabbe bhagavā paṭikkhipi.
而尊者阿难依然默然坐着。于是比丘们对他说:“贤友,僧团正在请求侍者之位,你也去请求吧。”阿难说:“贤友,请求而来的地位,有什么意义呢?难道导师看不见我吗?若他愿意,他会说‘阿难来侍奉我’。”随后世尊说:“比丘们,阿难无须他人鼓励,时机成熟,他自会来侍奉我。”比丘们便说:“起来吧,贤友阿难,起来吧,贤友阿难,向十力尊请求侍者之位吧。”尊者起身后,提出了四个拒绝的条件和四个接受的条件,共八项恩惠。显示巴利原文
Ānandatthero pana tuṇhīyeva nisīdi. Atha naṃ bhikkhū āhaṃsu ‘‘āvuso, bhikkhusaṅgho upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ yācati, tvampi yācāhī’’ti. Yācitvā laddhaṭṭhānaṃ nāma āvuso kīdisaṃ hoti, kiṃ maṃ satthā na passati, sace rocessati, ‘‘ānando maṃ upaṭṭhātū’’ti vakkhatīti. Atha bhagavā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, ānando aññena ussāhetabbo, sayameva jānitvā maṃ upaṭṭhahissatī’’ti āha. Tato bhikkhū ‘‘uṭṭhehi āvuso ānanda, uṭṭhehi, āvuso ānanda, dasabalaṃ upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ yācāhī’’ti āhaṃsu. Thero uṭṭhahitvā cattāro paṭikkhepe ca catasso ca āyācanāti aṭṭha vare yāci.
四个拒绝的条件是:他说:“尊者世尊,如果您不将您所得的殊胜衣服给我,不把您乞到的食物分与我,不许我与您同住一间香室,如果您受邀时也不带我同去——唯有这样,我才侍奉世尊。”世尊问:“阿难,你从中看到了什么过患?”他回答说:“世尊,如果我得到这些,就会有人说:‘阿难享用着十力尊所得的殊胜衣服、乞来的食物,与世尊同住香室,随从赴请。他是因为这些利益才侍奉如来,这样的侍奉又有什么值得称道的呢?’”他请求了这四个拒绝的条件。显示巴利原文
Cattāropaṭikkhepā nāma ‘‘sace me, bhante bhagavā, attanā laddhaṃ paṇītaṃ cīvaraṃ na dassati , piṇḍapātaṃ na dassati, ekagandhakuṭiyaṃ vasituṃ na dassati, nimantanaṃ gahetvā na gamissati, evāhaṃ bhagavantaṃ upaṭṭhahissāmī’’ti vatvā ‘‘kaṃ panettha, ānanda, ādīnavaṃ addasā’’ti vutte āha ‘‘sacāhaṃ, bhante, imāni vatthūni labhissāmi, bhavissanti vattāro ‘ānando dasabalena laddhaṃ paṇītaṃ cīvaraṃ paribhuñjati, piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjati, ekagandhakuṭiyaṃ vasati, ekanimantanaṃ gacchati, etaṃ lābhaṃ labhanto tathāgataṃ upaṭṭhāti, ko evaṃ upaṭṭhahato bhāro’’’ti. Ime cattāro paṭikkhepe yāci.
有四个请求,他说:“尊者世尊,如果我能代为领受邀请,而您愿意赴约;如果我能——当远方国土的人们前来谒见世尊时,在他们到达的当下便能引见世尊;如果每当我有疑惑生起时,那时就能让我前去亲近世尊;以及,如果世尊在我不在场时所宣说的法,事后能为我再讲一遍——这样我便侍候世尊。”世尊问:“阿难,你在这里见到了什么利益?”他回答:“尊者,这里有具信的善家子们没有机会见到世尊,便对我说:‘尊者阿难,请您明天和世尊一起来我们家中应供。’如果世尊不曾去那里,我便不能在他们期望的时刻引见大众、消除疑惑,就会有人说:‘阿难侍奉十力尊又有什么用呢?世尊连这点帮助都不给他。’又,当我不在场时,他们会问我:‘贤友阿难,这首偈颂、这部经、这个本生是在哪里说的?’如果我回答不出来,就会有人说:‘贤友,你连这些都不知道,为什么还像影子一样长久跟随在世尊身边而不离开呢?’因此,我希望世尊将我不在场时所宣说的法,再为我讲述。”他提出了这四个请求,世尊都答应了他。如此,他获得了这八项恩惠,成为常随侍者。显示巴利原文
Catasso āyācanā nāma ‘‘sace, bhante bhagavā, mayā gahitaṃ nimantanaṃ gamissati, sacāhaṃ tiroraṭṭhā tirojanapadā bhagavantaṃ daṭṭhuṃ āgataparisaṃ āgatakkhaṇe eva bhagavantaṃ dassetuṃ lacchāmi, yadā me kaṅkhā uppajjati, tasmiṃyeva khaṇe bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamituṃ lacchāmi, tathā yaṃ bhagavā mayhaṃ parammukhaṃ dhammaṃ deseti, taṃ āgantvā mayhaṃ kathessati, evāhaṃ bhagavantaṃ upaṭṭhahissāmī’’ti vatvā ‘‘kaṃ panettha, ānanda, ānisaṃsaṃ passasī’’ti vutte āha ‘‘idha, bhante, saddhā kulaputtā bhagavato okāsaṃ alabhantā maṃ evaṃ vadanti ‘sveva, bhante ānanda, bhagavatā saddhiṃ amhākaṃ ghare bhikkhaṃ gaṇheyyāthā’ti. Sace bhagavā tattha na gamissati, icchitakkhaṇeyeva parisaṃ dassetuṃ kaṅkhañca vinodetuṃ okāsaṃ na lacchāmi, bhavissanti vattāro ‘kiṃ ānando dasabalaṃ upaṭṭhāti, ettakampissa anuggahaṃ bhagavā na karotī’ti. Bhagavato ca parammukhā maṃ pucchissanti ‘ayaṃ, āvuso ānanda, gāthā idaṃ suttaṃ idaṃ jātakaṃ kattha desita’nti. Sacāhaṃ taṃ na sampāyissāmi, bhavissanti vattāro ‘ettakampi, āvuso, na jānāsi, kasmā tvaṃ chāyā viya bhagavantaṃ na vijahanto dīgharattaṃ ciraṃ vicarī’ti. Tenāhaṃ parammukhā desitassapi dhammassa puna kathanaṃ icchāmī’’ti. Imā catasso āyācanā yāci. Bhagavāpissa adāsi. Evaṃ ime aṭṭha vare gahetvā nibaddhupaṭṭhāko ahosi.
正是为了获此侍者之位,他圆满了百千劫所累积的波罗蜜果报;果报圆满后,成为侍者中的首位,承事世尊。长老自从获得侍者之位之日起,便以两种水、三种齿木、足部护理、背部护理,以及打扫香室与经行处等事务侍奉世尊。内心思惟:‘这时应为导师做这件事,那时应做那件事’,并一一完成诸事,手持大火炬,一夜之间绕行香室与经行处九次。他心想:‘我若昏沉睡去,世尊召唤时便无法应答。’因此,整夜手不离炬。正是因为他当时尚未获得常随侍者之位,所以说‘但尚未获得侍者职位’。所谓‘无有常随侍者’,即无固定的侍者。然而,世尊初成道时,不固定的侍者有很多,为说明此点,而说:‘有时是那伽沙摩罗长老’等。他既是亲戚,又因具足殊胜功德而最为殊胜,故称‘亲戚中最胜者’。在这些事务中,此人最堪胜任;意谓:危难之时,备办物资而行布施,由亲戚来做更为恰当。显示巴利原文
Tasseva ṭhānantarassa atthāya kappasatasahassaṃ pūritānaṃ pāramīnaṃ phalaṃ pāpuṇi, pāpuṇitvā ca upaṭṭhākānaṃ aggo hutvā bhagavantaṃ upaṭṭhahi. Thero hi upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ laddhakālato paṭṭhāya bhagavantaṃ duvidhena udakena tividhena dantakaṭṭhena pādaparikammena piṭṭhiparikammena gandhakuṭipariveṇasammajjanenāti evamādīhi kiccehi upaṭṭhahanto ‘‘imāya nāma velāya satthu idaṃ nāma laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, idaṃ nāma kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti cintetvā taṃ taṃ nipphādento mahatiṃ daṇḍadīpikaṃ gahetvā ekarattiṃ gandhakuṭipariveṇaṃ nava vāre anupariyāyati. Evañhissa ahosi ‘‘sace me thinamiddhaṃ okkameyya, bhagavati pakkosante paṭivacanaṃ dātuṃ nāhaṃ sakkuṇeyya’’nti. Tasmā sabbarattiṃ daṇḍadīpikaṃ hatthena na muñcati, evametassa nibaddhupaṭṭhākaṭṭhānassa aladdhabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘no ca kho upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ laddhā’’ti. Nibaddhupaṭṭhāko nāma natthīti niyatupaṭṭhāko nāma natthi. Aniyatupaṭṭhākā pana bhagavato paṭhamabodhiyaṃ bahū ahesuṃ, te dassento āha ‘‘kadāci nāgasamālatthero’’tiādi. Ñāti ca so pasatthatamaguṇayogato seṭṭho cāti ñātiseṭṭho. Evarūpesu ṭhānesu ayameva patirūpoti āpadāsu āmisassa abhisaṅkharitvā dānaṃ nāma ñātakeneva kātuṃ yuttataranti adhippāyo.
‘魔的转化’:即由魔所作的心意转变,意谓因魔的威神力而生起的心意迷乱。因此说‘转化后令其迷惑’等。‘即使……魔也能转化他们’:这是因为在弗沙佛的时代,所累积的不善业在当时得到了机会而现前。这在《本行》中曾说过:显示巴利原文
Mārāvaṭṭanāyāti mārena katacittāvaṭṭanāya, mārānubhāvena sañjātacittasammohenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘āvaṭṭetvā mohetvā’’tiādi. Tiṭṭhantu…pe… tampi māro āvaṭṭeyyāti phussassa bhagavato kāle katupacitassa akusalakammassa tadā laddhokāsavasena upaṭṭhitattā. Vuttañhetaṃ apadāne –
我曾在普沙佛的教法中,辱骂其声闻弟子:
“你们吃大麦吧,享用大麦吧,不要吃粳米饭。”
应婆罗门之请,我那时正住毗兰若。’(《本行》长老偈1.39.88-89)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Phussassāhaṃ pāvacane, sāvake paribhāsayiṃ; Yavaṃ khādatha bhuñjatha, mā ca bhuñjatha sālayo. ‘‘Tena kammavipākena, temāsaṃ khāditaṃ yavaṃ; Nimantito brāhmaṇena, verañjāyaṃ vasiṃ tadā’’ti. (apa. thera 1.39.88-89);
“心被缠缚者”:指心被覆盖、被压伏。“在魔的转变结束后才来”:意谓被魔转变而离去之后,他们才到来。“由于不能胜任”:即由于无能为力。“已送来的施食”:指烹调后被送来的施食。“定期施与”:即限定“在此期间我们将供养世尊”,依常食供养而设立的布施。“已奉献的物品”:指怀着“此物供佛陀受用四资具”的想法,送到寺院施与的物品。“不能”:即无力做到。“以已送来施食的方式”:即通过送来施食的方式。“一寻光明”:从佛身周围散发一寻量的光明。在此应知,诸随好相与一寻光明失去光辉,即是障碍。因此说:“即使是月神、日神、天、梵天……”等。由于随好相与一寻光明紧密相连,故说“到达随好相与一寻光明的区域”。所谓一切知智的障碍,即是对所知诸法的遮蔽。显示巴利原文
Pariyuṭṭhitacittoti pariyonaddhacitto, abhibhūtacittoti attho. Āvaṭṭitapariyosāne āgamiṃsūti mārena āvaṭṭetvā gate pacchā āgamiṃsu. Avisahatāyāti asakkuṇeyyatāya. Abhihaṭabhikkhāyāti pacitvā abhihariyamānabhikkhāya. Nibaddhadānassāti ‘‘ettakaṃ kālaṃ bhagavato dassāmā’’ti niccabhattavasena paricchinditvā ṭhapitadānassa. Appitavatthassāti ‘‘idaṃ buddhassa catupaccayaparibhogattha’’nti vihāraṃ netvā dinnavatthuno. Na visahatīti na sakkoti. Abhihaṭabhikkhāsaṅkhepenāti abhihaṭabhikkhānīhārena . Byāmappabhāyāti samantato byāmamattāya pabhāya. Ettha ca anubyañjanānaṃ byāmappabhāya ca nippabhākaraṇaṃ antarāyoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘candimasūriyadevabrahmānampi hī’’tiādi. Anubyañjanānaṃ byāmappabhāya ekābaddhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘anubyañjanabyāmappabhāppadesaṃ patvā’’ti. Sabbaññutaññāṇassa antarāyo nāma ñeyyadhammesu āvaraṇaṃ.
世尊闻臼杵声:是否他自己产生了臼杵声?故说:“正在捣谷粒的人们……”云云。“有利益的”:即能达成目的。“无利益的”:指依于无益的言语。“杀害的期望”是处格。在哪个对象、以何种手段完成杀害,那个对象便以该手段遭受杀害,因此说:“正是以此道,对那种言语的杀害即是断除”——这是所说的意思。或者,应知这是将“处格”理解为表示所有者而说的。而言语的断除,应知是通过断除其根本烦恼而实现的。显示巴利原文
Assosi kho bhagavā udukkhalasaddanti kiṃ sayameva uppannaṃ udukkhalasaddaṃ assosīti ceti āha ‘‘patthapatthapulakaṃ koṭṭentāna’’ntiādi. Atthasañhitanti payojanasādhakaṃ. Anatthasañhiteti anatthanissite vacane. Ghātāpekkhaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Yasmiñca yena ghāto nipphādīyati, tasseva tena ghāto kato nāma hotīti āha ‘‘maggeneva tādisassa vacanassa ghāto samucchedoti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Sāmiatthe vā bhummavacananti maññamāno evamāhāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vacanassa ca samugghāto tammūlakilesānaṃ samugghātenāti veditabbaṃ.
“ākāra”:以与自身相应之方式,成就有限定、有边际之果报,故“ākāra”即是原因。因此说:“以诸相状,即以诸原因”。“与事缘相应”者,即依当前之事而发。借由彼问将违犯公之于众,即通过“比丘,听说你确实……”等提问,揭露该比丘所行违犯;揭示此违犯目的为何?为授权制定此学处。显示巴利原文
Ākaroti attano anurūpatāya samariyādaṃ saparicchedaṃ phalaṃ nipphattetīti ākāro kāraṇanti āha ‘‘ākārehīti kāraṇehī’’ti. Aṭṭhuppattiyuttanti paccuppannavatthuṃ nissāya pavattaṃ. Tāya pucchāya vītikkamaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvāti ‘‘saccaṃ kira tvaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādipucchāya tena bhikkhunā katavītikkamaṃ pakāsetvā, vītikkamappakāsanañca kimatthamidaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetīti anujānanatthaṃ.
“无可再说”乃因前文已示其理,此处确无任何新义可陈,故作是显示。由此而言“如前已说”等语。“善哉善哉”为赞叹中的重叠声,故说“令具寿阿难随喜”。“于二种情况”指说法与制立学处这两种原因。“取其一”指选取“我等将说法”这一所说因。“如斯饥馑”谓此处食物如此难得,即于如是饥荒之时或之处。“乞食难得”是释此义。因无护持钵器等众多物具性,故说“以此轻安而住”。“仅此足维生”指由少希求故,而说“以此严节”。“已制伏饥荒”中,食物匮乏称为“饥荒”,如同“离蝇”等词用法。正因食物匮乏,以彼为缘之心忧恼便不存在,故称比丘已制伏、善控御此境。“已制伏贪”指以利养为缘而生起断夜、断安居之贪欲亦不存。显示巴利原文
Natthi kiñci vattabbanti pubbe vuttanayattā na kiñci ettha apubbaṃ vattabbamatthīti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘pubbe vuttameva hī’’tiādi. Sādhu sādhūti idaṃ pasaṃsāyaṃ āmeḍitavacananti āha ‘‘āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ sampahaṃsento’’ti. Dvīsu ākāresūti dhammadesanasikkhāpadapaññattisaṅkhātesu dvīsu kāraṇesu. Ekaṃ gahetvāti dhammaṃ vā desessāmāti evaṃ vuttakāraṇaṃ gahetvā. Evaṃdubbhikkheti evaṃ dukkhena labhitabbā bhikkhā etthāti evaṃdubbhikkhe kāle, dese vā. Dullabhapiṇḍeti etasseva atthadīpanaṃ. Bhājanādipariharaṇavasena bahubhaṇḍikatāya abhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘imāya sallahukavuttitāyā’’ti. Ettakameva alaṃ yāpetunti uttari patthanābhāvato pana ‘‘iminā ca sallekhenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dubbhikkhaṃ vijitanti ettha hi bhikkhānaṃ abhāvo dubbhikkhaṃ ‘‘nimmakkhika’’ntiādīsu viya. Bhikkhābhāvoyeva hi taṃnimittacittavighātānaṃ abhāvato bhikkhūhi vijito vase vattito. Lobho vijitoti āmisahetu ratticchedavassacchedasamuṭṭhāpako loluppādopi tesaṃ nāhosīti āmisalolatāsaṅkhāto lobho vijito. Icchācāro vijitoti ‘‘āmisahetu aññamaññassa uttarimanussadhammappakāsanavasena guṇavaṇijjaṃ katvā jīvikaṃ kappessāmā’’ti evaṃ pavattaicchācārassa abhāvato yathāvutto icchācāro vijito. Cittuppādamattassapi anuppannabhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘cintā vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Punappunānusocanavasena pana cittapīḷāpi nāhosīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘vighāto vā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“断夜”者:因七日出差事外出,于外令明相现而作断夜;或不作断夜,即纵有七日出差事亦未往他处故。以七日出差事别住而离,注疏中即称为“断夜”。故此《雨安居犍度释》云:“此乃是论藏外所判断夜”,复以“为闻法故,未受请者不得往”等,详辨七日出差事。《大注》亦说:“以七日出差事往,乃至一比丘亦无断夜。”如是当知,断夜唯依七日出差事而起,非由余法,此即说明断夜之相。此处,于有断雨安居缘缺之时,亦说断夜,故《小结文》与《中结文》云:凡得断雨安居因之处,以七日出差事前往,此理得成。此义于《雨安居犍度》断雨安居章已善说——显示巴利原文
Ratticchedo vāti sattāhakaraṇīyavasena gantvā bahi aruṇuṭṭhāpanavasena ratticchedo vā na kato sattāhakiccavasenapi katthaci agatattā. Sattāhakiccavasena vippavāsañhi sandhāya ratticchedoti aṭṭhakathāvohāro, tatoyeva ca vassūpanāyikakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 199) ‘‘ayaṃ panettha pāḷimuttakaratticchedavinicchayo’’ti vatvā ‘‘dhammassavanatthāya animantitena gantuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’tiādinā sattāhakaraṇīyameva vibhattaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyampi vuttaṃ ‘‘sattāhakiccena gantvā ekabhikkhunāpi ratticchedo vā na kato’’ti. Evañca katvā ratticchedo nāma sattāhakaraṇīyavasena hoti, na aññathāti ratticchedalakkhaṇañca kathitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ettha ca paccayavekallasaṅkhāte vassacchedakāraṇe sati ratticchedassapi vuttattā yattha vassacchedakāraṇaṃ labbhati, tattha sattāhakiccena gantumpi vaṭṭatīti siddhanti cūḷagaṇṭhipade majjhimagaṇṭhipade ca vuttaṃ, taṃ suvuttaṃ vassūpanāyikakkhandhake vassacchedādhikāre –
那时,在某处寺院入雨安居的比丘们,他们所依的村庄遭到贼寇洗劫。他们便将此事禀告世尊。世尊说:“诸比丘,允许前往那村庄。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena aññatarasmiṃ āvāse vassūpagatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ gāmo corehi vuṭṭhāsi. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yena gāmo tena gantu’’nti (mahāva. 201) –
此处,也与注疏的说法相符:“若村庄不远,应于该处乞食后回到寺院居住。若距离遥远,应以七日为限,令明相升起。若无法做到,便应就在那附近适当之处居住。”正如村庄遭劫、没有食物可得时,世尊说“诸比丘,允许前往那村庄”,对于中断雨安居,也说为无罪,因此无食物可得是中断雨安居的因由。其中,“若距离遥远,应以七日为限,令明相升起”这一注疏文句,成立了“当有中断雨安居之因时,也得以用七日出差事的方式前往”这一道理。显示巴利原文
Ettha ‘‘sace gāmo avidūragato hoti, tattha piṇḍāya caritvā vihārameva āgantvā vasitabbaṃ. Sace dūragato, sattāhavārena aruṇo uṭṭhāpetabbo. Na sakkā ce hoti, tattheva sabhāgaṭṭhāne vasitabba’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 201) iminā aṭṭhakathāvacanenapi saṃsandanato. Tathā hi gāme vuṭṭhite bhikkhāya abhāvato vassacchedepi anāpattiṃ vadantena bhagavatā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yena gāmo tena gantu’’nti (mahāva. 201) vuttattā bhikkhāya abhāvo vassacchedakāraṇaṃ. Tattha ‘‘sace dūragato, sattāhavārena aruṇo uṭṭhāpetabbo’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 201) idaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ vassacchedakāraṇe sati sattāhakiccena gantumpi vaṭṭatīti imamatthaṃ sādheti.
然而,有人这样说——显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ kenaci –
所谓“断夜”,是就七日出差事而说。据说《大注》中说:“以七日出差事外出,即使一位比丘,也未作断夜或断雨安居。”因此,有些人认为:在有断雨安居的因缘时,可以作七日出差事。但持律者不许,故应审察注疏的意趣。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ratticchedoti sattāhakiccaṃ sandhāya vutto, sattāhakaraṇīyena gantvā ratticchedo vā vassacchedo vā ekabhikkhunāpi na katoti vuttaṃ kira mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, tasmā vassacchedassa kāraṇe sati sattāhakiccaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti eke. Vinayadharā pana na icchanti, tasmā aṭṭhakathādhippāyo vīmaṃsitabbo’’ti.
然而,那只是自身迷惑者令他人产生愚痴而已。实在不见持律者不许的理由,因为这与注疏相违且不合理。哪有这样的道理:在能成立断雨安居也无罪的因缘存在时,却不可以不断雨安居而以七日出差事前往?“我们于后安居在那里入雨安居”这句话,是为了显示那些比丘的适当思惟,并非显示特殊义理。正如因饥馑而有断雨安居之事,于前安居中断雨安居也无罪。于后安居,因不愿入安居而前往也无过失,因为后安居的入安居之日尚未到来。显示巴利原文
Taṃ pana sayaṃ sammūḷhassa paresaṃ mohuppādanamattaṃ. Na hi vinayadharānaṃ anicchāya kāraṇaṃ dissati aṭṭhakathāya virujjhanato yuttiabhāvato ca. Yañhi kāraṇaṃ vassacchedepi anāpattiṃ sādheti, tasmiṃ sati vinā vassacchedaṃ sattāhakiccena gantuṃ na vaṭṭatīti kā nāma yutti. ‘‘Pacchimikāya tattha vassaṃ upagacchāmā’’ti idaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ anurūpaparivitakkanapaadīpanaṃ, na pana visesatthaparidīpanaṃ. Tathā hi dubbhikkhatāya vassacchedakaraṇasabbhāvato purimikāya tāva vassacchedepi anāpatti. Pacchimikāyaṃ anupagantukāmatāya gamanepi natthi doso pacchimikāya vassūpanāyikadivasassa asampattabhāvato.
“于任何处不认为”的意思是,不以推崇之心而对任何功德生起“认为”。“显示后”指以已得的禅那等功德而显示之后。“我们以后再确立戒”是说:若如所说那样有养护身体之事,那么他所行的恶欲行便不清净,且没有活命遍净,因此应当再精进而安住于防护,所以说“我们以后再确立戒”。显示巴利原文
Na kismiñci maññantīti kismiñci guṇe sambhāvanavasena na maññanti. Pakāsetvāti paṭiladdhajjhānādiguṇavasena pakāsetvā. ‘‘Pacchā sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhaheyyāmā’’ti vuttanayena kucchipaṭijaggane sati tathāpavattaicchācārassa aparisuddhabhāvato ājīvasuddhiyā ca abhāvato puna vāyamitvā saṃvare patiṭṭhātabbanti āha ‘‘pacchā sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhaheyyāmā’’ti.
“这是什么?”此句以责备的语气说出。用精米煮成、加上肉的饭,称为“精肉饭”。“会轻视”是指以轻蔑的方式,超越而认为,即认为低劣、卑下。因此说“会使之成为被轻贱、被蔑视的”。被置于下方、被当作卑下而认知的,称为“被轻贱”。“被蔑视”是其同义词。“那个”指这个地区。“以此行道”指在毘兰若所修习的极为难行的行道。“依止你们”指依止你们的这少欲行道。“被称为梵行同伴者”指六群比丘等。“坐于你们中间”指坐在你们当中,即与你们同坐的意思。“卑慢”指过度的慢心。在此,由于是低劣的,所以称为“卑慢”,并非指轻蔑地认为。阿难,后世之人将会轻视你们这些善士所征服的精肉饭——如此连接经文以解释其含义。这是说:得到什么便满足于什么,由于断除了对精肉饭的希求,后世之人因为无法断除对它的希求,将会轻视你们所征服、所制伏的精肉饭。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ idanti garahaṇavasena vuttaṃ. Sālitaṇḍulehi sampāditaṃ maṃsena upasittaṃ odanaṃ sālimaṃsodanaṃ. Atimaññissatīti avaññātakaraṇavasena atikkamitvā maññissati, lāmakaṃ nihīnaṃ katvā maññissatīti vuttaṃ hoti . Tenāha ‘‘oññātaṃ avaññātaṃ karissatī’’ti. Heṭṭhā katvā nihīnaṃ katvā ñātaṃ oññātaṃ. Avaññātanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Svāyanti so ayaṃ janapado. Imāya paṭipattiyāti verañjāyaṃ pūritāya sudukkarāya paṭipattiyā. Tumhe nissāyāti tumhākaṃ imaṃ appicchapaṭipadaṃ nissāya. Sabrahmacārīsaṅkhātāti chabbaggiyādayo vuttā. Tumhākaṃ antare nisīditvāti tumhākaṃ majjhe nisīditvā, tumhehi saddhiṃ nisīditvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Omānanti atimānaṃ. Atimānoyeva hettha nihīnatāya ‘‘omāna’’nti vutto, na pana hīḷetvā maññanaṃ. Tumhehi, ānanda, sappurisehi vijitaṃ sālimaṃsodanaṃ pacchimā janatā atimaññissatīti evamettha pāḷiṃ yojetvā atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yaṃ laddhaṃ, teneva tussitvā sālimaṃsodanapatthanāya chinnattā ca tumhehi vijitaṃ abhibhūtaṃ sālimaṃsodanaṃ pacchimā janatā tattha patthanaṃ chindituṃ asamatthatāya atimaññissatīti.
大摩嘎剌那狮子吼论显示巴利原文
Mahāmoggallānassa sīhanādakathā
17 “尊者”“天爱”“贤善者”,都是一种亲切的称呼方式,因此说“尊者是亲切的称呼”。因为智者们在以亲切的方式称呼他人时,会用“贤善者”“天爱”或“尊者”来称呼,所以面对面称呼时用“友”,背后称呼时用“尊者”,这也是一种称呼方式。这种亲切的话语是出于尊重、恭敬与顺从,因此说“这是尊重、恭敬、顺从的敬称”。由于功德广大而称为大目犍连,并非因为有小目犍连的存在,因此说“他既是大的,也是由于功德广大”。“地肤”是指支撑大地的水层之下方表面,在大地底层由水冲击而生,如同被水流淹没的地域所生的泥层般,是极为甘美的地味。对我来说,那是不合适的,意思是未经允许而做,对我来说是不恰当的。如果未经允许而做,就如同世尊随心所欲做任何事而不经允许一样,我也会如此,这样就会把自己与世尊等同起来,出于慢心而做,因此说“就会像与世尊并驾齐驱一样”。将自己与他人视为一对、一双、等同,并执取“我与他有何差别”,这称为并驾齐驱。显示巴利原文
17. Āyasmāti vā devānaṃpiyāti vā bhadrabhavanti vā piyasamudācāro esoti āha ‘‘āyasmātipiyavacanameta’’nti. Viññujātikā hi paraṃ piyena samudācarantā ‘‘bhava’’nti vā ‘‘devānaṃpiyā’’ti vā ‘‘āyasmā’’ti vā samudācaranti, tasmā sammukhā sambodhanavasena āvusoti, tirokkhaṃ āyasmāti ayampi samudācāro. Tayidaṃ piyavacanaṃ garugāravasappatissavasena vuccatīti āha ‘‘garugāravasappatissādhivacanameta’’nti. Guṇamahattatāya mahāmoggallāno, na cūḷamoggallānassa atthitāyāti āha ‘‘mahā ca so guṇamahantatāyā’’ti. Pappaṭakojanti pathavīsandhārakaṃ udakaṃ āhacca ṭhite mahāpathaviyā heṭṭhimatale samuṭṭhitaṃ udakoghena ajjhotthaṭe bhūmippadese sañjātakaddamapaṭalasadisaṃ atimadhurapathavīmaṇḍaṃ. Na me taṃ assa patirūpanti taṃ anāpucchā karaṇaṃ na me anucchavikaṃ bhaveyyāti attho. Anāpucchā karontena ca yathā bhagavā icchiticchitaṃ kiñci anāpucchā karoti, evamahampīti bhagavatā samānaṃ katvā attānaṃ mānena kataṃ viya bhavissatīti āha ‘‘yugaggāho viya bhagavatā saddhiṃ kato bhaveyyā’’ti. Parena hi saddhiṃ attānaṃ yugaṃ yugaḷaṃ samānaṃ katvā gāho, tassa mama vā ko visesoti gahaṇaṃ yugaggāho.
“具足”是指具备成就。在此,由于以总称来指示别义,所以特指味的成就。因此说“具足的意思是甘美、美味”。具足有三种:圆满具足、具备具足、甘美具足。其中——显示巴利原文
Sampannanti sampattiyuttaṃ. Sā panettha rasasampatti adhippetā sāmaññajotanāya visese avaṭṭhānato. Tenāha ‘‘sampannanti madhuraṃ sādurasanti attho’’ti. Tividhañhi sampannaṃ paripuṇṇasamaṅgīmadhuravasena. Tattha –
稻田丰美,鹦鹉啄食,拘希耶;
梵天,我告知你,我无法阻止它们。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sampannaṃ sālikedāraṃ, suvā bhuñjanti kosiya; Paṭivedemi te brahme, na ne vāretumussahe’’ti. (jā. 1.14.1) –
这是圆满具足。即便圆满,也是从各方面都达到、获得,因此称为具足。“以此巴帝摩卡律仪防护,已具足、已正具足、已近、已正近、已具足、已具备”(《分别论》511),这是具备具足。具备者也是正确地达到、已去、已近,所以称为具足。“在那里,树有具足果与近果”(《中部》2.48),这是甘美具足。这里所指的,应知是甘美具足。近果,指果实众多。它的,指大地的底层。为了以譬喻说明,即为了以譬喻来显示。无虫卵是指无过失。在这里,无过失是由于没有苍蝇等,因此说“无蝇”等。这里没有苍蝇,所以是无蝇。据说在这里,“蝇”这个词也通指蝇卵。因此在三处复合词注释中说:“为了阐明‘无蝇’的意思,说‘无蝇卵’,意思是远离苍蝇及其卵。”然而,在这里我们的理解是:“苍蝇的卵称为蝇卵,这里没有蝇卵,所以是无蝇卵。以此说明远离蝇卵,而‘无蝇’则说明根本没有苍蝇。”据说这是小苍蝇所造的蜜。所有蜜,是指大苍蝇、蜜蜂等所造的。最上,指最高。最胜,指最受称赞。美味,指味道美妙。有营养,指极具营养。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ paripuṇṇasampannaṃ nāma. Paripuṇṇampi hi samantato pannaṃ pattanti sampannanti vuccati. ‘‘Iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto upagato samupagato sampanno samannāgato’’ti (vibha. 511) idaṃ samaṅgīsampannaṃ nāma. Samaṅgīpi hi sammadeva panno gato upagatoti sampannoti vuccati. ‘‘Tatrassa rukkho sampannaphalo ca upapannaphalo cā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.48) idaṃ madhurasampannaṃ nāma. Tattha madhurasampannaṃ idhādhippetanti veditabbaṃ. Upapannaphaloti bahuphalo. Assāti pathaviyā heṭṭhimatalassa. Opammanidassanatthanti upamāya nidassanatthaṃ. Anīḷakanti niddosaṃ. Niddosatā cettha makkhikādirahitatāyāti āha ‘‘nimmakkhika’’ntiādi. Natthi ettha makkhikāti nimmakkhikaṃ. Makkhikāsaddena cettha makkhikaṇḍakampi sāmaññato gahitanti vadanti. Teneva tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ ‘‘nimmakkhikanti imassevatthaṃ pakāsetuṃ nimmakkhikaṇḍakanti vuttaṃ, makkhikāhi tāsaṃ aṇḍakehi ca virahitanti attho’’ti. Ayaṃ panettha amhākaṃ khanti ‘‘makkhikānaṃ aṇḍāni makkhikaṇḍāni, natthi ettha makkhikaṇḍānīti nimmakkhikaṇḍanti. Iminā makkhikānaṃ aṇḍehi rahitatā vuttā, ‘nimmakkhika’nti iminā pana makkhikānaṃyeva abhāvo vutto’’ti. Etaṃ kira madhūti khuddakamakkhikāhi katamadhu. Sabbamadhūhīti mahāmakkhikabhamaramakkhikādikatehi. Agganti uttamaṃ. Seṭṭhanti pasatthatamaṃ. Surasanti sobhanarasaṃ. Ojavantanti accantamojasampannaṃ.
“乞求语”这一句,意为排除接受与随喜等义。“一只手”指一个手掌。为了阐明“我将变化出来”所说的意思,而说“我将化作如大地一般”。此句“这到底是大地,还是不是大地?”显示了由于变化的大地与原本的大地看起来相似,而生起“这到底是我们的土地,还是别的?”这样的疑惑。“村落”指区域固定且广大的聚落,“大村”指有大量收益运转的聚落,这是所说之义。“或者这不是颠倒”显示了前分。为何说这不是颠倒呢?答:“因为具神通者的神通境界是不可思议的。”意思是,凭借神通力,那些众生将不会有那样的颠倒。现在,为了显示以其他方式获得颠倒,而说“然而这样……”等语。“当面指责者”指当面呵责的人。“背后诽谤者”指在背后辱骂的人。显示巴利原文
Āyācanavacanametanti iminā sampaṭicchanasampahaṃsanādiatthaṃ nivatteti. Ekaṃ hatthanti ekaṃ pāṇitalaṃ. ‘‘Abhinimminissāmī’’ti vuttamatthaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘pathavīsadisaṃ karissāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ nu kho pathavī, udāhu na ayanti iminā nimmitapathaviyā pakatipathaviyā ca sandissamānattā ‘‘esā nu kho amhākaṃ pathavī, udāhu aññā’’ti uppajjamānakukkuccaṃ dasseti. Nibaddhavipulāgamo gāmo nigamo, pavattitamahāāyo mahāgāmoti vuttaṃ hoti. Na vā esa vipallāsoti pubbapakkhaṃ nidasseti. Kasmā panesa vipallāso na hotīti āha ‘‘acinteyyo hi iddhimato iddhivisayo’’ti. Iddhibaleneva tesaṃ sattānaṃ tādiso vipallāso na bhavissatīti adhippāyo. Idāni aññathā vipallāsappaṭilābhaṃ dassento āha ‘‘evaṃ panā’’tiādi. Garahantāti sammukhā garahantā. Upavadantāti parammukhā akkosantā.
难道不是已经禁止了前往北俱卢洲乞食吗?那么,为何没有说明众生也会因此获得颠倒的原因呢?于是说“在那里,虽然……”等语。虽然没有明说,但由于前面已特别提到“众生也会获得颠倒”,因此可以理解,正是以这个原因,世尊也禁止了前往北俱卢洲乞食。所以,为了显示这里也应采纳那个原因,而说“应依前文所说的方法来理解”。意思是,“众生也会获得颠倒”这一句,虽然在此处未说,也应引用来建立关联,其含义也应知与前述相似。这是针对后来所说的“然而这样获得颠倒……”等义理分别而说的。至于那里所说的“他们成就了那些功德后,在饥荒时翻转大地,享用了地衣和苔藓”,应去掉这句,而理解为:他们成就了那些功德后,在饥荒时前往北俱卢洲,游行乞食而享用。如此,这里应作这样的连接。“以一步之距”中,“步之距”指举足、放足,因此是说以一步的放置。由于以一步之距应跨越的距离,以及两脚并拢时,两脚之间大约有一拃手的距离,因此。“决意仅如田埂大小”的意思是,决意仅如一拃手量的田埂大小。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca uttarakuruṃ piṇḍāya gamanaṃ paṭisedhetvā vipallāsampi sattā paṭilabheyyunti kāraṇaṃ na vuttaṃ, tasmā kimettha kāraṇanti āha ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Yadipi na vuttaṃ, tathāpi ‘‘vipallāsampi sattā paṭilabheyyu’’nti pubbe adhikatattā teneva kāraṇena piṇḍāya uttarakurugamanampi bhagavatā paṭisiddhanti viññāyati, tasmā tadeva kāraṇaṃ idhāpi gahetabbanti dassento āha ‘‘pubbe vuttanayeneva gahetabba’’nti. Vipallāsampi sattā paṭilabheyyunti idaṃ idha avuttampi ānetvā sambandhitabbanti adhippāyo. Atthopi cassa vuttasadisameva veditabboti. ‘‘Evaṃ pana vipallāsaṃ paṭilabheyyu’’ntiādinā pacchā vuttameva atthavikappaṃ sandhāya vadati. Yaṃ pana tattha vuttaṃ ‘‘te guṇe nibbattetvā dubbhikkhakāle pathaviṃ parivattetvā pappaṭakojaṃ paribhuñjiṃsū’’ti, taṃ apanetvā te guṇe nibbattetvā dubbhikkhakāle uttarakuruṃ gantvā piṇḍāya caritvā paribhuñjiṃsūti evamettha yojanā kātabbā. Ekena padavītihārenāti ettha padassa vītiharaṇaṃ nikkhipanaṃ padavītihāro, padanikkhepo, tasmā ekena padanikkhepenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ekena padavītihārena atikkamitabbaṭṭhānañca samagamanena dvinnaṃ padānaṃ antare muṭṭhiratanamattaṃ, tasmā. Mātikāmattaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvāti muṭṭhiratanappamāṇaṃ mātikāmattaṃ adhiṭṭhāyāti attho.
律制定请求论显示巴利原文
Vinayapaññattiyācanakathā
18 “律的制定”是针对先前未制的学处而说的。因为长老舍利弗是搁置已制学处不说,而针对现在应制的学处和诵巴帝摩卡说:“世尊,今正是时,善逝,今正是时,愿世尊为弟子们制定学处,诵巴帝摩卡。”世尊也说——显示巴利原文
18.Vinayapaññattiyāti pubbe apaññattasikkhāpadaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Thero hi paññattasikkhāpadāni ṭhapetvā idāni paññapetabbasikkhāpadāni pātimokkhuddesañca sandhāya ‘‘etassa bhagavā kālo, etassa sugata kālo, yaṃ bhagavā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeyya, uddiseyya pātimokkha’’nti (pārā. 21) āha. Bhagavatāpi –
“尊者,是何因缘,往昔学处较少,却有较多比丘以究竟智证悟?尊者,又是何因缘,如今学处较多,却有较少比丘以究竟智证悟?”“跋达利,正是如此。当众生衰微、正法隐没时,便有较多学处,而以究竟智证悟的比丘则较少。跋达利,只要某种有漏法尚未在僧团中出现,导师便不会为弟子制定学处。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ko nu kho, bhante, hetu, ko paccayo, yena pubbe appatarāni ceva sikkhāpadāni ahesuṃ, bahutarā ca bhikkhū aññāya saṇṭhahiṃsu. Ko pana, bhante, hetu, ko paccayo, yena etarahi bahutarāni ceva sikkhāpadāni honti, appatarā ca bhikkhū aññāya saṇṭhahantīti. Evametaṃ, bhaddāli, hoti, sattesu hāyamānesu saddhamme antaradhāyamāne bahutarāni ceva sikkhāpadāni honti, appatarā ca bhikkhū aññāya saṇṭhahantīti. Na tāva, bhaddāli, satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeti, yāva na idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavantī’’ti –
如同在这部《跋达利经》中,针对某些已制定的以及此后应制定的学处,而说“舍利弗,只要……导师便不会为弟子制定学处”。就在此注疏中,“自己煮食既不符合沙门身份,也不许可”一语,以及“未作隔夜或隔年”一语,应视为先前已制定学处的证据。由于其余学处及诵巴帝摩卡是因长老的请求而制定,故说“从根本开始显示因缘”。“独处”指前往无人、远离人群之处,以此说明长老因脱离群体杂处而获得身远离。“宴坐”指心从种种所缘的运转中回转,正确地安住其中,心不散乱,以此说明因无心的杂处,他获得了前分的心远离。“久”是就时间而言,在极相续中为对格;“久”指与长时间相应的持续,以无间断而言。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃ bhaddālisutte (ma. ni. 2.145) viya ekaccesu paññattesupi tato paraṃ paññapetabbāni sandhāya ‘‘na tāva, sāriputta, satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idheva ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sāmampi pacanaṃ samaṇasāruppaṃ na hoti, na ca vaṭṭatī’’ti vacanaṃ ‘‘ratticchedo vā vassacchedo vā na kato’’ti vacanañca pubbe paññattasikkhāpadānaṃ sabbhāve pamāṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sesasikkhāpadānañceva pātimokkhuddesassa ca therassa āyācanena paññattattā ‘‘mūlato pabhuti nidānaṃ dassetu’’nti āha. Rahogatassāti raho janavivittaṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatassa. Tena gaṇasaṅgaṇikābhāvena therassa kāyavivekamāha. Paṭisallīnassāti nānārammaṇacārato cittassa nivattiyā paṭi sammadeva nilīnassa tattha avisaṭacittassa. Tena cittasaṅgaṇikābhāvenassa pubbabhāgiyaṃ cittavivekamāha. Ciranti kālāpekkhaṃ accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Cirāti cirakālayuttā ṭhiti abhedena vuttā.
“不能”指无法决断此事。在显示了注疏中所说的方法后,现在为阐扬长老的主张,而说“然而大莲华长老……”等。即使在注疏中,也说“不能”,因为即使了知,也无法完全正确地予以判定,故如此说。“达到十六种智慧的顶点”是指在《中部·无随烦恼经》的教导中——显示巴利原文
Etaṃna sakkotīti etaṃ vinicchinituṃ na sakkoti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayaṃ dassetvā idāni theravādaṃ dassento āha ‘‘mahāpadumatthero panā’’tiādi. Aṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘na sakkotī’’ti idaṃ yasmā jānamānopi sammadeva paricchindituṃ na sakkoti, tasmā vuttanti vadanti. Soḷasavidhāya paññāya matthakaṃ pattassāti majjhimanikāye anupadasuttantadesanāya (ma. ni. 3.93) –
诸比丘,舍利弗有大智慧,诸比丘,舍利弗有广智慧,诸比丘,舍利弗有悦智慧,诸比丘,舍利弗有速疾智慧,诸比丘,舍利弗有锐利智慧,诸比丘,舍利弗有穿透智慧。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mahāpañño bhikkhave sāriputto, puthupañño bhikkhave sāriputto, hāsapañño bhikkhave sāriputto, javanapañño bhikkhave sāriputto, tikkhapañño bhikkhave sāriputto, nibbedhikapañño bhikkhave sāriputto’’ti –
如是大智慧等六种智慧,加上在同一经中所说的九种次第住定智慧及阿罗汉道智慧——这十六类智慧,乃于声闻境界中达到最极顶点的智慧。显示巴利原文
Evamāgatā mahāpaññādikā cha, tasmiṃyeva sutte āgatā navānupubbavihārasamāpattipaññā, arahattamaggapaññāti imāsaṃ soḷasappabhedānaṃ paññānaṃ sāvakavisaye ukkaṭṭhakoṭippattassa.
然而,世尊为何在此只宣说毗婆尸佛等七佛梵行久住与不久住的情形,而不像在《佛种姓经》的开示中那样,宣说二十五佛或更多呢?因为那些正自觉者的证悟教法,至今仍定无疑地存续、未曾隐没,世尊为了称扬他们,才在此讲述了毗婆尸佛等世尊梵行久住与不久住的情况。因为只有他们的声闻弟子当时与现在都安住于净居天,而其他佛陀的声闻弟子则已般涅槃。据说,悉达多佛、提舍佛、弗沙佛的声闻弟子虽也生于净居天,但出生后不久,便如同此教法中的优波迦等人一样证得阿罗汉,随即般涅槃,并未在那些天界住满寿量。然而,前后诸佛出世的次第法则,是依于在同一世界系统中辗转轮回的有情居处而安立的,因此并不与此相违。应当这样理解。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha bhagavā vipassīādīnaṃ sattannaṃyeva buddhānaṃ brahmacariyassa ciraṭṭhitikāciraṭṭhitikabhāvaṃ kathesi, na buddhavaṃsadesanāyaṃ viya pañcavīsatiyā buddhānaṃ, tato vā pana bhiyyoti? Yesaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ paṭivedhasāsanaṃ ekaṃsato nicchayena ajjāpi dharati, na antarahitaṃ, te eva kittento vipassīādīnaṃyeva bhagavantānaṃ brahmacariyassa ciraṭṭhitikāciraṭṭhitikabhāvaṃ idha kathesi. Tesaṃyeva hi sāvakā tadā ceva etarahi ca suddhāvāsabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitā, na aññesaṃ parinibbutattā. Siddhatthatissaphussānaṃ kira buddhānaṃ sāvakā suddhāvāsesu uppannā uppattisamanantarameva imasmiṃ sāsane upakādayo viya arahattaṃ adhigantvā na cirasseva parinibbāyiṃsu, na tattha tattha sāvakā yāvatāyukaṃ aṭṭhaṃsūti vadanti. Apubbācarimaniyamo pana aparāparaṃ saṃsaraṇakasattāvāsavasena ekissā lokadhātuyā icchitoti na tenetaṃ virujjhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
19 此处并非以“不共因、共缘”等分类作分析,而是为回答毗婆尸佛等梵行不久住与久住之原因的提问,故为回应诘问。因此说:“因与缘,这两者都是原因的异名。”因为“由此而有彼果,故称为因”,所以“因”一词在此作具格解释,因而说“由此而有彼果”等。若将“因”作主格解释,也并非不合理,因为它带来果报,成为果报之因,故称为因。缘于彼因而来、生起,意思是:缘于彼因,彼果来、生起、产生。显示巴利原文
19. Asādhāraṇo hetu, sādhāraṇo paccayoti evamādivibhāgena idha payojanaṃ natthi, vipassīādīnaṃ pana brahmacariyassa aciraṭṭhitikatāya ciraṭṭhitikatāya ca kāraṇapucchāparattā codanāyāti āha ‘‘hetu paccayoti ubhayametaṃ kāraṇādhivacana’’nti. Hinoti tena phalanti hetūti karaṇasādhanoyaṃ hetusaddoti āha ‘‘tena tassa phala’’ntiādi. Kattusādhanopi hetusaddo no na yujjati hinoti phalassa hetubhāvaṃ upagacchatīti hetūti. Taṃ paṭicca eti pavattatīti taṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca tassa phalaṃ eti pavattati nibbattatīti attho.
“Kilāsuno ahesuṃ”意为:他们成了少精进者、成了无精进者。然而,那种无精进并非出于懈怠,所以说“并非懈怠的疲倦者”,意思是:他们并非因懈怠而成为疲倦者。对此说明了原因:“因为并非……”等。“或懈怠”一句,说明没有以昏沉睡眠为因而生起的不善法。“或精进衰退”一句则表明:即便在无懈怠的情况下,乃至对仅靠乞食维生者,佛陀也以恭敬心说法,因此,对于任何人,说法上都无有懈怠,因为一切佛都以同等精进说法。所以说“因为诸佛……”等。“Osannavīriyā”即精进衰退,意思是少精进。“Ussannavīriyā”即精进增盛,意思是大精进。“Vegena”即快速。“Dhammagaruno”即于法尊重者。“Dhammagāravā”即于法有恭敬者。在毗婆尸世尊的时代,人寿为八万岁;在尸弃佛的时代,人寿为七万岁;在毗舍浮佛的时代,人寿为六万岁,因此说“据说在他们的时代,众生是长寿的”。“Abhisamenti”即证悟。显示巴利原文
Kilāsunoahesunti appossukkā ahesuṃ, nirussāhā ahesunti attho. Sā pana nirussāhatā na ālasiyavasenāti āha ‘‘na ālasiyakilāsuno’’ti, ālasiyavasena kilāsuno nāhesunti attho. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Ālasiyaṃ vāti iminā thinamiddhavasappavattānaṃ akusalānaṃ abhāvamāha. Osannavīriyatā vāti iminā pana ‘‘ālasiyābhāvepi antamaso annabhāranesādānampi sakkaccaṃyeva dhammaṃ desetī’’ti vacanato yassa kassacipi dhammadesanāya nirussāhatā natthīti dīpeti sabbesaṃ samakeneva ussāhena dhammadesanāya pavattanato. Tenāha ‘‘buddhā hī’’tiādi. Osannavīriyāti ohīnavīriyā, appossukkāti attho. Ussannavīriyāti adhikavīriyā, mahussāhāti attho. Vegenāti javena. Dhamme garu etesanti dhammagaruno. Dhamme gāravametesanti dhammagāravā. Vipassissa bhagavato kāle asīti vassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṃ sikhissa sattati vassasahassāni, vessabhussa saṭṭhivassasahassāni āyuppamāṇanti āha ‘‘tesaṃ kira kāle dīghāyukā sattā’’ti. Abhisamentīti paṭivijjhanti.
“由于无过失”,即没有违犯的过失。因为并非以犯戒的方式制定“在此违犯中名为某某的罪”,而是以说法的方式,如“舍离杀生,远离杀生”等,只制定了教诫学处,所以说“未以七罪聚的方式制定命令学处”。“每过六年”应视为省略之词。或者,考虑到每六年结束之日,而说“每次”,因此这里的属格是相对于此而言的。整个瞻部洲的所有比丘僧团都在同一处所举行布萨——这是句子的关联。问:“那是什么处所?”答:“在般度摩提的王都”等。那时,仙人堕处是一个名为安稳的园林,但因为是施设为鹿群安全居住之用,故称鹿野苑,因此说“在安稳的鹿野苑”。显示巴利原文
Niddosatāyāti vītikkamadosassa abhāvato. ‘‘Imasmiṃ vītikkame ayaṃ nāma āpattī’’ti evaṃ āpattivasena apaññapetvā ‘‘pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hotī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.8, 194) dhammadesanāvasena ovādasikkhāpadānaṃyeva paññattattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sattāpattikkhandhavasena āṇāsikkhāpadaṃ apaññatta’’nti. Channaṃ channaṃ vassānaṃ accayenāti pāṭhaseso daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā channaṃ channaṃ vassānaṃ osānadivasaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘sakiṃ saki’’nti vuttattā tadapekkhamidaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Sakalajambudīpe sabbopi bhikkhusaṅgho ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne uposathaṃ akāsīti sambandho. Katamaṃ taṃ ṭhānanti āha ‘‘bandhumatiyā rājadhāniyā’’tiādi. Isipatanaṃ tena samayena khemaṃ nāma uyyānaṃ hoti, migānaṃ pana abhayavāsatthāya dinnattā migadāyoti vuccati. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘kheme migadāye’’ti.
“Abbokiṇṇāni dasapi vīsatipi bhikkhusahassāni vasanti”意为:不与异类人混杂,一万或两万比丘共住。而《长部注》中说:“他们全都是能容纳一万二千比丘的大寺,如同无畏山寺、支提山寺、心山寺一般。”“Uposathārocikā”即宣告布萨者。据说,诸天人每过一年,便到各处宣告:“贤者,一年已过,现在还剩五年,五年过后,应前往般度摩提王都诵巴帝摩卡。”同样,过两年时宣告:“贤者,两年已过,还剩四年,四年过后,应前往般度摩提王都诵巴帝摩卡。”如此,过三年、四年、五年时,亦作宣告。因此说“贤者,一年已过”等。“Sānubhāvā”即具神通威力,指那些比丘是依靠天人威力而前往者,是就他们而言。“Pācīnasamuddante”即在东海附近的地方。“Gamiyavatta”即出行者应作的整理住处等义务。“Uposathagga”即举行布萨的场所。“Gatāva honti”即依靠天人威力已到达。“Te”即所有。显示巴利原文
Abbokiṇṇāni dasapi vīsatipi bhikkhusahassāni vasantīti visabhāgapuggalehi asaṃsaṭṭhāni dasapi vīsatipi bhikkhūnaṃ sahassāni vasanti. Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘te sabbepi dvādasasahassabhikkhugaṇhanakā mahāvihārā abhayagiricetiyapabbatacittalapabbatavihārasadisā ca ahesu’’nti vuttaṃ. Uposathārocikāti uposathārocanakā. Tā kira devatā ekamhi vasse nikkhante tattha tattha gantvā ārocenti ‘‘nikkhantaṃ kho, mārisā, ekaṃ vassaṃ, pañca dāni vassāni sesāni, pañcannaṃ vassānaṃ accayena bandhumatī rājadhānī upasaṅkamitabbā pātimokkhuddesāyā’’ti. Tathā dvīsu vassesu nikkhantesu ‘‘nikkhantāni kho, mārisā, dve vassāni , cattāri vassāni sesāni, catunnaṃ vassānaṃ accayena bandhumatī rājadhānī upasaṅkamitabbā pātimokkhuddesāyā’’ti ārocenti. Imināva nayena tīsu catūsu pañcasu vassesu atikkantesu ārocenti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mārisā ekaṃ vassaṃ atikkanta’’ntiādi. Sānubhāvāti iddhānubhāvena sānubhāvā. Te kira bhikkhūti ye devatānubhāvena gacchanti, te sandhāya vadati. Pācīnasamuddanteti pācīnasamuddassa samīpadese. Gamiyavattanti gamikehi kātabbaṃ senāsanapaṭijagganādivattaṃ. Uposathagganti uposathakaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. Gatāva hontīti devatānubhāvena gatā eva honti. Teti attano attano ānubhāvena devatānubhāvena ca gatā sabbepi.
在“忍辱是最高的”等语句中(长部注2.90;法句注2.185),能容忍、承受、安忍他人毁谤、他人加害以及冷热等损害功德之事,名为忍辱。而此忍辱能特别地烧毁、破除戒等之敌对法,故为最高、最上的苦行。忍受、忍耐即安忍,是忍辱的同义词。文法家将安忍解释为忍辱,故此处应如此理解其义:“称为安忍的安忍之忍,名为最高的苦行。”诸佛说涅槃为最高:以有联结后有,即由有爱之状态而结合;或者,由于有渴爱者未来有再生的性质,业与果共相结缚,故称为“缚”。从被称为“缚”的渴爱中出离,即涅槃,因渴爱于彼处全然不存。而诸佛以一切方式,如寂静、殊胜、微妙、吉祥、安稳等,说彼涅槃为最高。显示巴利原文
Khantī paramantiādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.90; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.185) parūpavādaṃ parāpakāraṃ sītuṇhādibhedañca guṇoparodhaṃ khamati sahati adhivāsetīti khanti. Sā pana sīlādīnaṃ paṭipakkhadhamme savisesaṃ tapati santapati vidhamatīti paramaṃ uttamaṃ tapo. Titikkhanaṃ khamanaṃ titikkhā. Khantiyāyevetaṃ vevacanaṃ. Akkharacintakā hi khamāyaṃ titikkhāsaddaṃ vaṇṇenti, tasmā evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo ‘‘titikkhāsaṅkhātā adhivāsanakhanti nāma uttamaṃ tapo’’ti. Nibbānaṃ paramaṃ vadanti buddhāti bhavena bhavantaraṃ vināti bhavanikantibhāvena saṃsibbati, sataṇhasseva vā āyatiṃ punabbhavabhāvato phalena saddhiṃ kammaṃ vināti saṃsibbatīti vānanti saṅkhyaṃ gatāya taṇhāya nikkhantaṃ nibbānaṃ tattha tassā sabbaso abhāvato. Taṃ nibbānaṃ pana santapaṇītanipuṇasivakhemādinā sabbākārena paramanti vadanti buddhā.
“出家者不害他人”:若因缺乏安忍之忍而伤害、压迫、恼害他人,则不得名为出家者,因其未出离应出离之法。第四句只是第三句的同义词,义无差别。“出家者不”是“非沙门”的同义词,“害他人”是“恼害他人”的同义词。或者,“害他人”指毁坏戒律,因为戒律以最上义而说为“他”,“他”一词有最胜义,如“知人我胜劣者”等用法。若沙门恼害任何有情而成为害他者、毁坏自己戒律者,则不名为出家者,此为义。或者,若因无安忍之忍而成为害他者,乃至夺取蚊虻等微小生命,则实非出家者。何以故?因未出离、未除去罪恶之垢故。所谓“出离自己之垢,故称为出家者”(法句388),此即出家者之特征。即使不杀害、不夺命,但以棍棒等恼害者,彼恼害他人,亦非沙门。何以故?因未止息恼害故。因已止息故称为沙门,此即沙门之特征。所谓“因已止息诸恶,故称为沙门”(法句265)。显示巴利原文
Na hi pabbajito parūpaghātīti yo adhivāsanakhantirahitattā paraṃ upaghāteti bādhati vihiṃsati, so pabbajito nāma na hoti pabbājetabbadhammassa apabbājanato. Catutthapādo pana tatiyapādasseva vevacanaṃ anatthantarattā. ‘‘Na hi pabbajito’’ti etassa hi ‘‘na samaṇo hotī’’ti vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Parūpaghātī’’ti etassa ‘‘paraṃ viheṭhayanto’’ti vevacanaṃ. Atha vā parūpaghātīti sīlūpaghātī. Sīlañhi uttamaṭṭhena ‘‘para’’nti vuccati parasaddassa seṭṭhavācakattā ‘‘puggalaparoparaññū’’tiādīsu viya. Yo ca samaṇo paraṃ yaṃ kañci sattaṃ viheṭhayanto parūpaghātī hoti attano sīlavināsako, so pabbajito nāma na hotīti attho. Atha vā yo adhivāsanakhantiyā abhāvā parūpaghātī hoti, paraṃ antamaso ḍaṃsamakasampi jīvitā voropeti, so na hi pabbajito. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Pāpamalassa apabbājitattā anīhaṭattā. ‘‘Pabbājayamattano malaṃ, tasmā pabbajitoti vuccatī’’ti (dha. pa. 388) idañhi pabbajitalakkhaṇaṃ . Yopi naheva kho upaghāteti na māreti, apica daṇḍādīhi viheṭheti, sopi paraṃ viheṭhayanto samaṇo na hoti. Kiṃkāraṇā? Vihesāya asamitattā. Samitattā samaṇoti vuccatīti idañhi samaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Samitattā hi pāpānaṃ, samaṇoti pavuccatī’’ti (dha. pa. 265) hi vuttaṃ.
再者,世尊为比丘诵说巴帝摩卡时,因巴帝摩卡之教以戒为根本,而戒的特对是嗔恚,为示降伏嗔恚之法,首说“忍辱是最高的苦行”。由此说明了对于不可意境的对治;而由“安忍”一词,则说明了对于可意境的对治。由此二者也显示了“克服已生的不乐与已生之乐而住”之义。因渴爱之缚的止息,诸佛说涅槃为最高。其中,“忍辱”显示无加行失坏,“安忍”显示无内心倾向失坏。同样,“忍辱”显示容忍他人过失,“安忍”显示不违犯他人。如此,以顺释方式依理显示巴帝摩卡后,今为以逆释方式显示,而说“不”等语。由此显示:正如夺取有情生命、以手、土块、棍棒等恼害他人,称为害他、恼害他人,同样,偷盗他人财物、邪淫、妄语、离间语、以粗恶语刺伤人心、无义绮语、贪图他人所有、思惟断灭、邪执等,亦是害他、恼害他人。因此,若人造作任何不善业道与业,他便不成为出家者与沙门。显示巴利原文
Apica bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkhaṃ uddisanto pātimokkhakathāya ca sīlappadhānattā sīlassa ca visesato doso paṭipakkhoti tassa niggaṇhanavidhiṃ dassetuṃ ādito ‘‘khantī paramaṃ tapo’’ti āha. Tena aniṭṭhassa paṭihananūpāyo vutto, titikkhāggahaṇena pana iṭṭhassa, tadubhayenapi uppannaṃ aratiṃ uppannaṃ ratiṃ abhibhuyya viharatīti ayamattho dassito. Taṇhāvānassa vūpasamanato nibbānaṃ paramaṃ vadanti buddhā. Tattha khantiggahaṇena payogavipattiyā abhāvo dassito, titikkhāggahaṇena āsayavipattiyā abhāvo. Tathā khantiggahaṇena parāparādhasahatā, titikkhāggahaṇena paresu anaparajjhanā dassitā. Evaṃ kāraṇamukhena anvayato pātimokkhaṃ dassetvā idāni byatirekato taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘na hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena yathā sattānaṃ jīvitā voropanaṃ paraṃ pāṇileḍḍudaṇḍādīhi viheṭhanañca ‘‘parūpaghāto paraṃ viheṭhana’’nti vuccati, evaṃ tesaṃ sāpateyyāvaharaṇaṃ parāmasanaṃ visaṃvādanaṃ aññamaññabhedanaṃ pharusavacanena mammaghaṭṭanaṃ niratthakavippalāpo parasantakābhijjhānaṃ ucchedacintanaṃ micchābhinivesanañca upaghāto paraviheṭhanañca hotīti yassa kassaci akusalassa kammapathassa kammassa ca karaṇena pabbajito samaṇo ca na hotīti dasseti.
第二偈中,“一切恶”指一切不善法,即所有十二种不善、摄一切心所生的有罪过法。“不作”即不令生起。所谓“作”,是在自己相续中令其生起,故遮止彼即是“不作”,不令生起。“善”指四地所摄之善。因下文将说“此乃诸佛之教”,故“善”一词指圣道法及作为其资粮的三地善法。“具足”即令具足,意为证得、获得此善。“自心清净”是令自己之心明净,令心达到光净之状态,彻底清净。此乃由阿罗汉道所成。此处,住于最上道者之心名为彻底清净,而在最上果之刹那,心已清净,不复更需清净,故就究竟清净而言说“此乃由阿罗汉所成”。如是,以戒防护断除一切恶,以世间与出世间止观成就善,以阿罗汉果令心清净——此即诸佛之教、教诫、教示。显示巴利原文
Dutiyagāthāya sabbapāpassāti sabbākusalassa sabbassapi dvādasākusalassa sabbacittuppādasaṅgahitassa sāvajjadhammassa. Akaraṇanti anuppādanaṃ. Karaṇañhi nāma tassa attano santāne uppādananti tappaṭikkhepato akaraṇaṃ anuppādanaṃ. Kusalassāti catubhūmikakusalassa. ‘‘Kusalassā’’ti hi idaṃ ‘‘etaṃ buddhāna sāsana’’nti vakkhamānattā ariyamaggadhamme tesañca sambhārabhūte tebhūmikakusale dhamme bodheti. Upasampadāti upasampādanaṃ. Taṃ pana atthato tassa kusalassa samadhigamo paṭilābho. Sacittapariyodapananti attano cittassa jotanaṃ cittassa pabhassarabhāvakaraṇaṃ sabbaso parisodhanaṃ. Taṃ pana arahattena hoti. Ettha ca yasmā aggamaggasamaṅgino cittaṃ sabbaso pariyodapīyati nāma, aggaphalakkhaṇe pana pariyodapitaṃ hoti puna pariyodapetabbatāya abhāvato, tasmā pariniṭṭhitapariyodapanataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ pana arahattena hotī’’ti. Iti sīlasaṃvarena sabbapāpaṃ pahāya lokiyalokuttarāhi samathavipassanāhi kusalaṃ sampādetvā arahattaphalena cittaṃ pariyodapetabbanti etaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ ovādo anusiṭṭhi.
第三偈:『不诽谤』即不以言语诽谤任何人。『不害』即不以身、心伤害任何人,因为即使以心念对他人作不利之想等伤害方式也应避免。『于巴提摩卡』:那巴提摩卡是超越一切、最上的戒,或能防护善趣之怖畏、解脱恶趣之怖畏,或凡防护它者,它便解脱彼,故称巴提摩卡;于彼巴提摩卡中。『防护』即具有不违犯七种犯聚之相的防护。『于食知量』即于饮食知量,依受用与取用而了知分量。『且于边远坐卧处』即远离人群喧杂、无人拥挤、独处的坐卧处。此处应知,仅以两种资具即阐明了四资具知足,因为以资具知足的通名,其余二者亦依征引之理而被阐明。『于增上心精勤』:作为毗婆舍那基础的八等至心是增上心,而道果心更是增上心;于彼所述增上心精勤,即数数修习之义。『此乃诸佛之教』:此不诽谤他人、不害他人、于巴提摩卡防护、于取用受用知量、修习独处坐卧处、及于增上心精勤,即是诸佛之教、教诫、训示。显示巴利原文
Tatiyagāthāya anupavādoti vācāya kassaci anupavadanaṃ. Anupaghātoti kāyena manasā ca kassaci upaghātākaraṇaṃ manasāpi paresaṃ anatthacintanādivasena upaghātakaraṇassa vajjetabbattā. Pātimokkheti yaṃ taṃ paatimokkhaṃ atipamokkhaṃ uttamaṃ sīlaṃ, pāti vā sugatibhayehi mokkheti duggatibhayehi, yo vā naṃ pāti, taṃ mokkhetīti pātimokkhanti vuccati, tasmiṃ pātimokkhe ca. Saṃvaroti sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ avītikkamalakkhaṇo saṃvaro. Mattaññutāti bhojane mattaññutā paṭiggahaṇaparibhogavasena pamāṇaññutā. Pantañca sayanāsananti janasaṅghaṭṭavirahitaṃ nijjanasambādhaṃ vivittaṃ senāsanañca. Ettha dvīhiyeva paccayehi catupaccayasantoso dīpitoti veditabbo paccayasantosasāmaññena itaradvayassapi lakkhaṇahāranayena jotitabhāvato. Adhicitte ca āyogoti vipassanāpādakaṃ aṭṭhasamāpatticittaṃ adhicittaṃ, tatopi ca maggaphalacittameva adhicittaṃ, tasmiṃ yathāvutte adhicitte āyogo ca, anuyogoti attho. Etaṃ buddhāna sāsananti etaṃ parassa anupavadanaṃ anupaghātanaṃ pātimokkhe saṃvaro paṭiggahaṇaparibhogesu mattaññutā vivittasenāsanasevanaṃ adhicittānuyogo ca buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ ovādo anusiṭṭhi.
然而应知,这些即是诸佛的巴帝摩卡教诫偈。因此说“以此方便”等。所谓“直至教法终尽”,是就住世诸佛的教诫终尽而言,意为只要诸佛住世,便应诵出。因为教诫巴帝摩卡唯佛诵出,非声闻弟子。其关联为:唯于初觉时方有诵出。此处初觉,据《大结集注》说,以二十年为限。而彼因注释书中已说“世尊于初觉二十年间无固定侍者”,故取“初觉即二十年”而说。然阿阇梨法护长老则说:“于四十五年中,最初十五年名初觉。”若如此,则中间十五年名中觉,最后十五年名后觉,三觉时限均等,此亦合理。以十五年为一期,恰满四十五年。然注释书中,因十五年之初觉亦含摄于二十年中,故说“于初觉二十年间”,此亦可理解。显示巴利原文
Imā pana sabbabuddhānaṃ pātimokkhuddesagāthā hontīti veditabbā. Tenāha ‘‘eteneva upāyenā’’tiādi. Yāva sāsanapariyantāti dharamānakabuddhānaṃ anusāsanapariyantaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, yāva buddhā dharanti, tāva uddisitabbataṃ āgacchantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ovādapātimokkhañhi buddhāyeva uddisanti, na sāvakā. Paṭhamabodhiyaṃyeva uddesamāgacchantīti sambandho. Paṭhamabodhi cettha vīsativassaparicchinnāti mahāgaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Tañca heṭṭhā aṭṭhakathāyameva ‘‘bhagavato hi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsativassantare nibaddhupaṭṭhāko nāma natthī’’ti kathitattā ‘‘paṭhamabodhi nāma vīsativassānī’’ti gahetvā vuttaṃ. Ācariyadhammapālattherena pana ‘‘pañcacattālīsāya vassesu ādito pannarasa vassāni paṭhamabodhī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evañca sati majjhe pannarasa vassāni majjhimabodhi, ante pannarasa vassāni pacchimabodhīti tiṇṇaṃ bodhīnaṃ samappamāṇatā siyāti tampi yuttaṃ. Pannarasattikena hi pañcacattālīsa vassāni pūrenti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana pannarasavassappamāṇāya paṭhamabodhiyā vīsativassesuyeva antogadhattā ‘‘paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsativassantare’’ti vuttanti evampi sakkā viññātuṃ.
难道不是即使制定了某些学处,当时也尚未允许教令巴帝摩卡,后来因长老请求才允许的吗?既然如此,为何说“然从学处制定之时起,即诵教令巴帝摩卡”?虽然制定了某些学处后,教令巴帝摩卡尚未被允许,但未制定学处时,教令巴帝摩卡不存在;唯有在已制定学处时方有。为显示此义,故说“然从学处制定之时起”。东园:因建于舍卫城东方而得此名的大寺。鹿母讲堂:鹿子居士之母、被称为鹿母的毘舍佉大优婆夷所建造的殿堂。无因:即遮止原因。无机会:即遮止条件。二者皆遮止原因。因:即以此原因。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca kānici sikkhāpadāni paññapetvāpi na tāva āṇāpātimokkhaṃ anuññātaṃ pacchā therassa āyācanena anuññātattā, tasmā kathametaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sikkhāpadapaññattikālato pana pabhuti āṇāpātimokkhameva uddisīyatī’’ti, yadipi kānici sikkhāpadāni paññapetvāva āṇāpātimokkhaṃ na anuññātaṃ, tathāpi apaññatte sikkhāpade āṇāpātimokkhaṃ natthi, kintu paññatteyevāti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sikkhāpadapaññattikālato pana pabhutī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pubbārāmeti sāvatthiyā pācīnadisābhāge katattā evaṃladdhavohāre mahāvihāre. Migāramātupāsādeti migāraseṭṭhino mātuṭṭhāniyattā migāramātāti saṅkhyaṃ gatāya visākhāmahāupāsikāya kārite pāsāde. Aṭṭhānanti hetupaṭikkhepo. Anavakāsoti paccayapaṭikkhepo. Ubhayenapi kāraṇameva paṭikkhipati. Yanti yena kāraṇena.
“他们”:即比丘们。“于现前声闻弟子处出家”:是就最末的如须跋陀般的现前声闻弟子处出家者而言。关联:种种家族,即依刹帝利族等而种种不同。或依高下家族、粗细财富等家族:即应结合为依高下家族,或依粗细财富等家族。其中,依刹帝利、婆罗门,或依刹帝利、婆罗门、居士,可知为高族;依其余者,为低族。依粗细财富等家族:即依拥有极粗细受用等家族。“粗”之再举,是为显示极胜,如“苦苦”等中。以“等”字,应知亦摄粗细等。显示巴利原文
Tesanti bhikkhūnaṃ. Sammukhasāvakānaṃ santike pabbajitāti sabbantimānaṃ subhaddasadisānaṃ sammukhasāvakānaṃ santike pabbajite sandhāya vadati. Khattiyakulādivaseneva vividhā kulāti sambandho. Uccanīcauḷāruḷārabhogādikulavasena vāti uccanīcakulavasena uḷāruḷārabhogādikulavasena vāti yojetabbaṃ. Tattha khattiyabrāhmaṇavasena vā khattiyabrāhmaṇagahapatikānaṃ vasena vā uccakulatā veditabbā, sesānaṃ vasena nīcakulatā. Uḷāruḷārabhogādikulavasena vāti uḷārataratamaupabhogavantādikulavasena. Uḷārātisayajotanatthañhi puna uḷāraggahaṇaṃ ‘‘dukkhadukkha’’ntiādīsu viya. Ādi-saddena uḷārānuḷārānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“守护梵行”:为阐明已述之义而开示,故说“长久护持所传之法”。纵使学处尚未制定,若他们属同族等,则如各族传持之典籍而不致坏灭。但因学处尚未制定,且这些比丘非同族等,故而坏灭。为显明此义,故说“因同一名……故相互恼害”等。既然如此,何以于久住之段亦说“种种名”等?虽然他们有种种姓等差异,然为显示唯由制定学处,教法乃得久住,故作是说。唯依学处之制定,教法乃得久住。当知:诸佛若于己般涅槃后仍有应调伏之众生,则制定学处;若无,则不制。譬如依身、语门所生起而转起之心,亦因随彼表业而转,故说“由身语门而转”;此亦应作如是观。于此,“如”仅为小品词。以品摄、五十摄等:即以戒蕴品、大品等品摄,以根本五十、中五十等五十摄。以“等”字,应知亦包括相应等摄法。显示巴利原文
Brahmacariyaṃ rakkhantīti vuttamevatthaṃ pakāsetvā dassento āha ‘‘ciraṃ pariyattidhammaṃ pariharantī’’ti. Apaññattepi sikkhāpade yadi samānajātiādikā siyuṃ, attano attano kulānugataganthaṃ viya na nāseyyuṃ. Yasmā pana sikkhāpadampi apaññattaṃ, ime ca bhikkhū na samānajātiādikā, tasmā vināsesunti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yasmā ekanāmā…pe… tasmā aññamaññaṃ viheṭhentā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kasmā ciraṭṭhitikavārepi ‘‘nānānāmā’’tiādi vuttanti? Satipi tesaṃ nānājaccādibhāve sikkhāpadapaññattiyā eva sāsanassa cirappavattīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Sikkhāpadapaññattivaseneva sāsanassa cirappavatti. Yasmā buddhā attano parinibbānato uddhampi vinetabbasattasambhave sati sikkhāpadaṃ paññapenti, asati na paññapenti, tasmāti veditabbo. Yathā kāyavacīdvārasaṅkhātaṃ viññattiṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā pavattamānampi cittaṃ tassāyeva viññattiyā vasena pavattanato ‘‘kāyavacīdvārehi pavatta’’nti vuccati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā tanti ettha tanti nipātamattaṃ. Vaggasaṅgahapaṇṇāsasaṅgahādīhīti sīlakkhandhavaggamahāvaggādivaggasaṅgahavasena mūlapaṇṇāsamaajhamapaṇṇāsādipaṇṇāsasaṅgahavasena. Ādi-saddena saṃyuttādisaṅgaho veditabbo.
“应如此思惟,不应如此思惟”:在此,“如此”是对所教导的教诫,以规则与遮止两种方式所行起的行相之把握;那是为了显示正思惟与邪思惟的行起行相,以阐明其利益与过患。因此说“应思惟出离思惟等三种思惟”等。于其中,由“等”字应知是摄取了无瞋思惟与无害思惟。其中,出离:因从贪欲出离,故为无贪;因从诸盖出离,故为初禅;因从一切不善法出离,故为一切善法;因从一切行出离,故为涅槃。依亲依止、相应、作所缘而与出离相应之思惟,是出离思惟,即正思惟。此思惟于不净禅之前分属欲界,于不净禅中属色界,于以彼禅为基而起的道果时属出世间。无瞋是对治瞋恚的,或因它而不对任何人起瞋恚,故为无瞋,即慈。与所说无瞋相应之思惟,是无瞋思惟。此思惟于慈禅之前分属欲界,于依慈修习而证得之初禅中属色界,于以彼禅为基而起的道果时属出世间。无害是对治害的,或因它而不害众生,故为无害,即悲。与彼相应之思惟,是无害思惟。此思惟于悲禅之前分属欲界,于依悲修习而证得之初禅中属色界,于以彼禅为基而起的道果时属出世间。显示巴利原文
Evaṃvitakketha, mā evaṃ vitakkayitthāti ettha evanti yathānusiṭṭhāya anusāsaniyā vidhivasena paṭisedhanavasena ca pavattitākāraparāmasanaṃ, sā ca sammāvitakkānaṃ micchāvitakkānañca pavattiākāradassanavasena pavattati atthaānisaṃsassa ādīnavassa ca vibhāvanatthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nekkhammavitakkādayo tayo vitakke vitakkethā’’tiādi. Ettha ādi-saddena abyāpādavitakkaavihiṃsāvitakkānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha nekkhammaṃ vuccati lobhato nikkhantattā alobho, nīvaraṇehi nikkhantattā paṭhamajjhānaṃ, sabbākusalehi nikkhantattā sabbo kusalo dhammo, sabbasaṅkhatehi nikkhantattā nibbānaṃ, upanissayato sampayogato ārammaṇakaraṇato ca nekkhammena paṭisaṃyutto vitakko nekkhammavitakko, sammāsaṅkappo. So asubhajjhānassa pubbabhāge kāmāvacaro hoti, asubhajjhāne rūpāvacaro, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttaro. Byāpādassa paṭipakkho abyāpādo, kañcipi na byāpādenti etenāti vā abyāpādo, mettā. Yathāvuttena abyāpādena paṭisaṃyutto vitakko abyāpādavitakko. So mettājhānassa pubbabhāge kāmāvacaro hoti, mettābhāvanāvasena adhigate paṭhamajjhāne rūpāvacaro, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttaro. Vihiṃsāya paṭipakkhā, na vihiṃsanti vā etāya satteti avihiṃsā, karuṇā. Tāya paṭisaṃyutto vitakko avihiṃsāvitakko. So karuṇājhānassa pubbabhāge kāmāvacaro, karuṇābhāvanāvasena adhigate paṭhamajjhāne rūpāvacaro, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttaro.
岂不是由于无贪、无瞋、无痴彼此不相离,依他们而生起的这些出离思惟等,因彼此不混杂而无法确定区分吗?并非不能。当无贪依决定、成熟、现行等方式而成为主时,其余二者则成为随从。例如,当以无贪为主、重出离之心生起时,获得机会的出离思惟便得以安立。而与彼相应、具无瞋特相的无瞋,依其力量,此思惟本身的无瞋思惟性可能生起;又,当有无瞋思惟性时,由于对任何众生无害的性质,无害思惟性也可能生起。其余二者成为该出离思惟的随行者,因其自相不可见,故于彼存在时它们存在,不存在时它们不存在,应如此推知。同样,当以慈为主之心生起时,其余二者成为随从。当以悲为主之心生起时,其余二者成为随从。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca alobhādosāmohānaṃ aññamaññāvirahato nesaṃ vasena uppajjanakānaṃ imesaṃ nekkhammavitakkādīnaṃ aññamaññaṃ asaṅkarato vavatthānaṃ na hotīti? No na hoti. Yadā hi alobho padhāno hoti niyamitapariṇatasamudācārādivasena, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā bhavanti. Tathā hi yadā alobhappadhāno nekkhammagaruko cittuppādo hoti, tadā laddhāvasaro nekkhammavitakko patiṭṭhahati. Taṃsampayuttassa pana adosalakkhaṇassa abyāpādassa vasena yo tasseva abyāpādavitakkabhāvo sambhaveyya, sati ca abyāpādavitakkabhāve kassacipi aviheṭhanajātikatāya avihiṃsāvitakkabhāvo ca sambhaveyya. Te itare dve tasseva nekkhammavitakkassa anugāmino sarūpato adissanato tasmiṃ sati honti, asati na hontīti anumāneyyā bhavanti. Evameva yadā mettāpadhāno cittuppādo hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā bhavanti. Yadā karuṇāpadhāno cittuppādo hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā bhavanti.
所谓“欲思惟等”,“等”字应知摄取了瞋思惟与害思惟。其中,与欲相应的思惟是欲思惟。这里,欲有二种:事欲与烦恼欲。在事欲方面,依所缘而与诸欲相应的思惟,为欲思惟;在烦恼欲方面,则是依相应而与欲相应的思惟。与瞋相应的思惟,即瞋思惟;与害相应的思惟,即害思惟。此中,前二种可于众生及诸行中生起:欲思惟,于思惟可爱、可意的众生或诸行时生起;瞋思惟,则于对不可爱、不可意的众生或诸行生起恼怒、观察,乃至欲令其坏灭时生起。害思惟不在诸行中生起,因为诸行并无所谓“应令受苦”之义;唯有在思惟“愿这些众生被杀、或被灭、或被毁、或不存在”时,害思惟才于众生中生起。若问:为何说“诸行并无所谓应令受苦者”?难道那些被视为应令受苦、名为众生的,于真实义上不也是诸行吗?确实如此,然而他们因具有根、有识而能领受苦受,故成为害思惟的所缘,被视为众生。至于那些不领受苦受、不具上述特征者,针对他们而说“害思惟不在诸行中生起”。显示巴利原文
Kāmavitakkādayoti ettha ādi-saddena byāpādavitakkavihiṃsāvitakkānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha kāmapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko kāmavitakko. Ettha hi dve kāmā vatthukāmo ca kilesakāmo ca. Tattha vatthukāmapakkhe ārammaṇavasena kāmehi paṭisaṃyutto vitakko kāmavitakko, kilesakāmapakkhe pana sampayogavasena kāmena paṭisaṃyuttoti yojetabbaṃ. Byāpādapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko byāpādavitakko. Vihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko vihiṃsāvitakko. Tesu dve sattesupi saṅkhāresupi uppajjanti. Kāmavitakko hi piye manāpe satte vā saṅkhāre vā vitakkentassa uppajjati, byāpādavitakko appiye amanāpe satte vā saṅkhāre vā kujjhitvā olokanakālato paṭṭhāya yāva vināsanā uppajjati, vihiṃsāvitakko saṅkhāresu nuppajjati. Saṅkhāro hi dukkhāpetabbo nāma natthi, ‘‘ime sattā haññantu vā ucchijjantu vā vinassantu vā mā vā ahesu’’nti cintanakāle pana sattesu uppajjati. Atha kasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅkhāro dukkhāpetabbo nāma natthī’’ti, nanu ye dukkhāpetabbāti icchitā sattasaññitā, tepi atthato saṅkhārā evāti? Saccametaṃ, te pana indriyabaddhā saviññāṇakatāya dukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedenti, tasmā te vihiṃsāvitakkassa visayā icchitā sattasaññitā. Ye pana na dukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedenti vuttalakkhaṇāyogato, te sandhāya ‘‘vihiṃsāvitakko saṅkhāresu nuppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“不执取而心从诸漏解脱”:此处,“以诸漏”是具格,表作者之义;“诸心”是复数主格;“解脱”是业格词。因此,应如此理解其义:以诸漏为作者,不执取——即不以所缘执取——诸心得解脱。故说“他们之心”等。“以诸漏”:此处亦是具格,表作者义。“解脱”是业格词。“非执取他们而解脱”:即那些漏不执取他们之心为所缘而解脱、令解脱。在此,“诸心”是复数对格,“解脱”是作者格词。“以无生灭而灭尽”:即通过未来不生的灭而灭尽的诸漏。“不执取而解脱”:即不以之为所缘而执取,令诸心得解脱。“心得开敷”:即因殊胜智光所触而开敷之心。“依前文”:即依“于某可怖畏的林丛”之文。故说“所谓‘于某可怖畏的林丛’,即于彼处”。“所作”:此词表状态,故说“即可怖畏所作,即可怖畏之业”。可怖畏之造作、业,为可怖畏所作,于彼可怖畏所作中。显示巴利原文
Anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṃsūti ettha āsavehīti katthuatthe karaṇaniddeso, cittānīti paccattabahuvacanaṃ, vimucciṃsūti kammasādhanaṃ, tasmā āsavehi kattubhūtehi anupādāya ārammaṇavasena aggahetvā cittāni vimuccitānīti evamettha attho gahetabboti āha ‘‘tesañhi cittānī’’tiādi. Yehi āsavehīti etthāpi kattuatthe eva karaṇaniddeso. Vimucciṃsūti kammasādhanaṃ. Na tetāni gahetvā vimucciṃsūti te āsavā tāni cittāni ārammaṇavasena na gahetvā vimucciṃsu vimocesuṃ. Ettha hi cittānīti upayogabahuvacanaṃ, vimucciṃsūti kattusādhanaṃ. Anuppādanirodhena nirujjhamānāti āyatiṃ anuppattisaṅkhātena nirodhena nirujjhamānā āsavā. Aggahetvā vimucciṃsūti ārammaṇakaraṇavasena aggahetvā cittāni vimocesuṃ. Vikasitacittā ahesunti sātisayañāṇarasmisamphassena samphullacittā ahesuṃ. Purimavacanāpekkhanti ‘‘aññatarasmiṃ bhiṃsanake vanasaṇḍe’’ti vuttavacanāpekkhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃ vuttaṃ aññatarasmiṃ bhiṃsanake vanasaṇḍeti, tatrā’’ti. Katanti bhāvasādhanavāci idaṃ padanti āha ‘‘bhiṃsanakatasmiṃhoti, bhiṃsanakakiriyāyā’’ti. Bhiṃsanassa karaṇaṃ kiriyā bhiṃsanakataṃ, tasmiṃ bhiṃsanakatasmiṃ.
现在,为了显示另一种义理连结而说“或者”等。在此义理分别中,“令惊恐故,为惊恐者”,惊恐者即是“令人惊恐的”,其状态为“令人惊恐的状态”——在应如此说时,省略了ta字母而说为“令人惊恐性”。为显示此义而说:“在‘令人惊恐性’中,意思是‘令人惊恐的状态’”等。“多数”一词,亦应依“有毛者”之义来连结,而非仅依“毛”之义,故说:“或者,对多数而言”等。显示巴利原文
Idāni aññathāpi atthayojanaṃ dassento āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Imasmiṃ atthavikappe bhiṃsayatīti bhiṃsano, bhiṃsano eva bhiṃsanako, tassa bhāvo bhiṃsanakattanti vattabbe ta-kārassa lopaṃ katvā ‘‘bhiṃsanakata’’nti vuttanti dassento āha ‘‘bhiṃsanakatasminti bhiṃsanakabhāveti attho’’tiādi. Yebhuyyaggahaṇaṃ lomavantavasenapi yojetabbaṃ, na lomavasenevāti āha ‘‘bahutarānaṃ vā’’tiādi.
「Purisayugavasena」(依人双的方式)者,即依人寿的时间方式,意谓依人的寿命量。三部《结文》中都说:「最后一位与须跋陀相似」。即完整地取当时存在的两人的寿命限量,而说:「十万……住立」。「Dveyeva purisayugāni」(只有两个人双)中,此处的「purisayugaṃ」(人双)是指人的一对所持续的时间。这仅是言说上的概念,从义理上说,人本身即是「人双」。世尊在世时,有一个人双;般涅槃后,有一个人双,故说:「只有两个人双」。然而,应知世尊般涅槃后,仅有一个人双,梵行仅住立了八万年。显示巴利原文
Purisayugavasenāti purisakālavasena, purisānaṃ āyuppamāṇavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Sabbapacchimako subhaddasadiso’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Tasmiṃ kāle vijjamānānaṃ dvinnaṃ purisānaṃ āyuparicchedaṃ sakalameva gahetvā ‘‘satasahassaṃ…pe… aṭṭhāsī’’ti vuttaṃ. Dveyeva purisayugānīti ettha purisānaṃ yugappavattikālo purisayugaṃ. Abhilāpamattameva cetaṃ, atthato pana purisova purisayugaṃ. Dharamāne bhagavati ekaṃ purisayugaṃ, parinibbute ekanti katvā ‘‘dveyeva purisayugānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Parinibbute pana bhagavati ekameva purisayugaṃ asītiyeva vassasahassāni brahmacariyaṃ aṭṭhāsīti veditabbaṃ.
20 20.「Sāvakayugāni」(弟子双)者,弟子们本身即是「弟子双」。「Asambhuṇantena」(不能胜任者)者,即不能达到者。「Gabbhaṃ gaṇhāpentassā」(使执取胎者)者,即为了生出一切知智,而令执持智胎者。显示巴利原文
20.Sāvakayugānīti sāvakā eva sāvakayugāni. Asambhuṇantenāti apāpuṇantena. Gabbhaṃ gaṇhāpentassāti sabbaññutaññāṇassa vijāyanatthaṃ ñāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpentassa.
21 21.「Ko anusandhī」(什么连结)者,意为前后文之间有何连结、有何关联。「Sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanāpekkhaṃ」(期望学处制定之请求的)者,由于被请求,故为「yācanā」(请求),学处的制定本身就是请求,即「学处制定之请求」;由于「taṃ apekkhati」(期望那个),故为「期望学处制定之请求的」,这是处格,意指「对于那个被请求的学处制定」,是处格。因为「tattha」(在那里)一词所指的,正是与请求相关的学处制定本身,所以后面说:「tattha tassā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā」(在那里,对于那个学处制定)。「Yaṃ vuttaṃ」(所说的)者,即通过「sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeyyā」(应制定学处)这句话所说的学处制定,意思是「已被请求」。「Tattha tassā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā」(在那里,对于那个学处制定)者,即对于那个被请求的学处制定。「Akālaṃ」(非时)者,即对于学处的制定而言,是非时。显示巴利原文
21.Koanusandhīti pubbāparakathānaṃ kiṃ anusandhānaṃ, ko sambandhoti attho. Sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanāpekkhanti yācīyatīti yācanā, sikkhāpadapaññattiyeva yācanā sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanā, taṃ apekkhatīti sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanāpekkhaṃ bhummavacanaṃ, yāciyamānasikkhāpadapaññattiapekkhaṃ bhummavacananti vuttaṃ hoti. Yācanavisiṭṭhā sikkhāpadapaññattiyeva hi ‘‘tatthā’’ti iminā parāmaṭṭhā, teneva vakkhati ‘‘tattha tassā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā’’ti. Yaṃ vuttanti ‘‘sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeyyā’’ti iminā yaṃ sikkhāpadapaññapanaṃ vuttaṃ, yācitanti attho. Tattha tassā sikkhāpadapaññattiyāti tassaṃ yāciyamānasikkhāpadapaññattiyanti attho. Akālanti sikkhāpadapaññattiyā akālaṃ.
“漏所依处”(Āsavaṭṭhānīyā)一词中,后缀“anīya”是处格之义,故说“诸漏住于这些之中”等。然而,哪些是那些漏?哪些法是那些漏的所依处?为此说:“于其中,有现世的与后世的”等。现世的,如被他人诽谤等;后世的,即堕恶趣、属于恶趣苦的种种。那些漏,依种种缘而转起,故称为“漏”。“Nesaṃ”(对这些),即对被他人诽谤等诸漏。“Te”(那些),即违犯之法。如果没有漏所依处的法,在学处制定中有什么过失,以至于这样说呢?为此说:“yadi hi paññapeyyā”(因为如果制定的话)等,意思是:如果没有看到违犯的过失就制定的话。背后骂詈是“他谤”(parūpavādo),在他人言语中找过失是“他难”(parūpārambho),当面指责是“讥毁过失”(garahadoso)。显示巴利原文
Āsavaṭṭhānīyāti ettha adhikaraṇe anīyasaddoti āha ‘‘āsavā tiṭṭhanti etesū’’tiādi . Ke pana te āsavā, ke ca dhammā tadadhikaraṇabhūtāti āha ‘‘yesu diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikā’’tiādi. Diṭṭhadhammikā parūpavādādayo, samparāyikā āpāyikā apāyadukkhavisesā. Te āsavanti tena tena paccayavasena pavattantīti āsavā. Nesanti parūpavādādiāsavānaṃ. Teti vītikkamadhammā. Asati āsavaṭṭhānīye dhamme sikkhāpadapaññattiyaṃ ko doso, yenevaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘yadi hi paññapeyyā’’tiādi, vītikkamadosaṃ adisvā yadi paññapeyyāti adhippāyo. Parammukhā akkosanaṃ parūpavādo, parehi vacanesu dosāropanaṃ parūpārambho, sammukhā garahanaṃ garahadoso.
“Kathañhi nāma paliveṭhessati”(怎么会缠绕呢)是连接句,与“kathaṃ”(如何)一词结合时,应视为未来时用法。“Anvāyiko”(随从者)指跟随者。“Bhogakkhandhaṃ”(财富蕴)指财富堆。因为“Amhākamete”(这些是我们的)而被知,故称“ñātī”(亲属);以祖父、父亲、儿子等轮转之义为“parivaṭṭo”(轮转),亲属本身就是轮转,即“ñātiparivaṭṭo”(亲属轮转)。“Ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭhā”(以衣食为最上而满足者),即于衣食中以最上、殊胜而满足;意思是,在寻求衣食时,以少欲的方式安住于最上、殊胜的状态。或者,衣食本身就是他们的最上、最高极限,他们不寻求、不希望任何比这更高的非物质的东西,因此称为“以衣食为最上者”;这种状态就是“以衣食为最上性”,他们在那种最上性中满足。“Tesu nāma ko”(在他们当中,谁呢),即在那具有如上所说功德的比丘们当中,谁呢。显示巴利原文
Kathañhi nāma paliveṭhessatīti sambandho, kathaṃ-saddayoge anāgatappayogo daṭṭhabbo. Anvāyikoti anuvattako. Bhogakkhandhanti bhogarāsiṃ. ‘‘Amhākamete’’ti ñāyantīti ñātī, pitāmahapituputtādivasena parivaṭṭanaṭṭhena parivaṭṭo, ñātīyeva parivaṭṭo ñātiparivaṭṭo. Ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭhāti ghāsacchādane paramatāya uttamatāya santuṭṭhā, ghāsacchādanapariyesane sallekhavasena paramatāya ukkaṭṭhabhāve saṇṭhitāti attho. Ghāsacchādanameva vā paramaṃ paramā koṭi etesaṃ na tato paraṃ kiñci asāmisajātaṃ pariyesanti paccāsīsanti cāti ghāsacchādanaparamā, tesaṃ bhāvo ghāsacchādanaparamatā, tassaṃ ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭhā. Tesu nāma koti yathāvuttaguṇavisiṭṭhesu tesu bhikkhūsu ko nāma. Lokāmisabhūtanti lokapariyāpannaṃ hutvā kilesehi āmasitabbattā lokāmisabhūtaṃ. Pabbajjāsaṅkhepenevāti ‘‘pāṇātipātā veramaṇī’’tiādinā pabbajjāmukheneva. Etanti methunādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ. Thāmanti sikkhāpadānaṃ paññāpanakiriyāya sāmatthiyaṃ. Balanti yāthāvato sabbadhammānaṃ paṭivedhasamatthaṃ ñāṇabalaṃ. Kuppeyyāti kuppaṃ bhaveyya. Etassevatthassa pākaṭakaraṇaṃ na yathāṭhāne tiṭṭheyyāti, paññattiṭṭhāne na tiṭṭheyyāti attho. Akusaloti tikicchituṃ yuttakālassa aparijānanato akusalo acheko. Avuddhi anayo, byasanaṃ dukkhaṃ. Paṭikaccevāti gaṇḍuppādanato paṭhamameva. Sañchaviṃ katvāti sobhanacchaviṃ katvā. Bālavejjoti apaṇḍitavejjo. Lohitakkhayañca maṃ pāpetīti vibhattivipariṇāmaṃ katvā yojetabbaṃ.
“非时示现”,指在戒条制定上的非时示现。“令病息愈”,指使身体得到安适。“己之师职”:“师职”指作为老师的身份,或老师的职责,即自身所处的老师地位,或所承担的教导之责。此处用方位格是表示目的。“威德昭著”,指威德已经显明于众人。显示巴利原文
Akālaṃ dassetvāti sikkhāpadapaññattiyā akālaṃ dassetvā. Rogaṃ vūpasametvāti phāsuṃ katvā. Sake ācariyaketi ācariyassa bhāvo, kammaṃ vā ācariyakaṃ, tasmiṃ attano ācariyabhāve, ācariyakamme vā. Nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Viditānubhāvoti pākaṭānubhāvo.
“由众多之故”,指出家众数量众多。“教法中某些足以成为漏缘之法不得生起”:由于住所充足,教法中那些因贪著居所等而生、堪为漏缘之法,便不得生起。“依此道理”,应知依此方式,摄录了“随法学戒条”等。显示巴利原文
Vipulabhāvenāti pabbajitānaṃ bahubhāvena. Sāsane ekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā na uppajjantīti yasmā senāsanāni pahonti, tasmā āvāsamacchariyādihetukā sāsane ekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā na uppajjanti. Iminā nayenāti etena padasodhammasikkhāpadādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
“利得之最上广大”:“利得”指应得的衣等资具,其“最上”、“广大”即意指殊胜或数量众多。“多闻之性”即博闻广学。“以非理方式沉入者”:以不善巧的方式执取,或以颠倒的方式理解之义。“以味与味相合”:以本质与本质相合——在所许可的敷具等中,因同属乐触之共性,于执取触味中亦生起无罪想,故以非执取触味与执取触味相合,即将二者等而视之。“彰显非法、非律、非师教者”:即以“我如此了知世尊所说之法……”等话语,将导师的教法说成非法、非律而加以彰显(参见巴吉帝亚第四一八条)。显示巴利原文
Lābhaggamahattanti cīvarādilabhitabbapaccayo lābho, tassa aggaṃ mahattaṃ paṇītatā bahubhāvo vā. Bahussutassa bhāvo bāhusaccaṃ. Ayoniso ummujjamānāti anupāyena abhinivisamānā, viparītato jānamānāti attho. Rasena rasaṃ saṃsanditvāti sabhāvena sabhāvaṃ saṃsanditvā, anuññātapaccattharaṇādīsu sukhasamphassasāmaññato upādinnaphassarasepi anavajjasaññitāya anupādinnaphassarasena upādinnaphassarasaṃ saṃsanditvā, samānabhāvaṃ upanetvāti attho. Uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃsatthusāsanaṃ dīpentīti ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’tiādinā (pāci. 418) satthusāsanaṃ uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ katvā dīpenti.
“于此义中”,指“舍利弗,比丘僧团确实无过患”(波罗夷第21条)所宣说的比丘僧团这一义。何以说恶戒者如盗贼呢?因而有“他们实非沙门……”等言。“黑法相应者”,因与名为恶戒的恶法相应。“光辉者”,指戒行光辉者。“被称为精髓”,因戒等功德是教法梵行的精髓,故称为精髓。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃ attheti ‘‘nirabbudo hi, sāriputta, bhikkhusaṅgho’’ti (pārā. 21) evaṃ vuttabhikkhusaṅghasaññite atthe. Kathaṃ pana dussīlānaṃ corabhāvoti āha ‘‘te hi assamaṇāva hutvā’’tiādi. Kāḷakadhammayogāti dussīlatāsaṅkhātapāpadhammayogato. Pabhassaroti pabhassarasīlo. Sāroti vuccantīti sāsanabrahmacariyassa sārabhūtattā sīlādayo guṇā ‘‘sāro’’ti vuccanti.
“一切卑劣功德”是指一切功德低劣,或功德微少。“他是入流者”是就阿难长老而言。“已入流”即已进入道流。因为对敌对法无余地听闻、驱除,故称道流为圣道,所以说“流是道的异名”。“入流者”指具足此道的人。以此说明具道者为入流者后,又以例证阐明此义,今为简别此处所指之人,故说“但此处”等。此处的“已入”一词,如“为证果而修行者”等(相应部5.488)那样,是现在时,故说“以道给予果名”。确实,道被冠以与之相似的八支或七支果的“流”之名,而在过去时中,则依自性得名。于道刹那,确实称为入道流;于果刹那,则称为已入。显示巴利原文
Sabbaparittaguṇoti sabbehi nihīnaguṇo, appaguṇo vā. So sotāpannoti ānandattheraṃ sandhāya vadati. Sotaṃ āpannoti maggasotaṃ āpanno. Paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ anavasesato savanato pellanato soto ariyamaggoti āha ‘‘sototi ca maggassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Sotāpannoti tena samannāgatassa puggalassāti iminā maggasamaṅgī sotāpannoti vatvā tamevatthaṃ udāharaṇena sādhetvā idāni idhādhippetapuggalaṃ niddhāretvā dassento āha ‘‘idha panā’’tiādi. Idha āpannasaddo ‘‘phalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.488) viya vattamānakālikoti āha ‘‘maggena phalassa nāmaṃ dinna’’nti. Maggena hi attanā sadisassa aṭṭhaṅgikassa vā sattaṅgikassa vā phalassa sototi nāmaṃ dinnaṃ, atītakālikatte pana sarasatova nāmalābho siyā. Maggakkhaṇe hi maggasotaṃ āpajjati nāma, phalakkhaṇe āpanno.
“令堕入”即令堕入丑恶、有苦、有忧恼之处,是将人掷入恶趣苦者。“法”指自性,故说“并非将自己掷入恶趣的自性”。或者,“法”指将人掷入恶趣的有身见等不善法。若此人因完全断除了不善法而不复存在,则因其没有将自己掷入恶趣的自性,故说“并非将自己掷入恶趣的自性”。为何?这是问无堕落法性的原因。“令堕入恶趣者”即能令堕入恶趣者。“堕落自性”即生起的自性。“以正决定道”即依正确决定有的道而证得的道。“决定者”指从最低限度第七有以上,因无生起的法性而决定。“正觉”指上三道之正觉。能正觉故为正觉,即圣道。此处因已证得初道,故应以应证得的状态希求其余诸道,因此说“必定令证得上三道者”。“必定令证得上三道者”即决定将证得上三道者,即入流者。显示巴利原文
Virūpaṃ sadukkhaṃ saupāyāsaṃ nipātetīti vinipāto, apāyadukkhe khipanako. Dhammoti sabhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘na attānaṃ apāyesu vinipātanasabhāvo’’ti. Atha vā dhammoti apāyesu khipanako sakkāyadiṭṭhiādiko akusaladhammo. Yassa pana so akusaladhammo natthi sabbaso pahīnattā, so yasmā apāyesu attānaṃ vinipātanasabhāvo na hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘na attānaṃ apāyesu vinipātanasabhāvoti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Kasmāti avinipātanadhammatāya kāraṇaṃ pucchati. Apāyaṃ gamentīti apāyagamanīyā. Vinipātanasabhāvoti uppajjanasabhāvo. Sammattaniyāmena maggenāti sammā bhavaniyāmakena paṭiladdhamaggena. Niyatoti vā heṭṭhimantato sattamabhavato upari anuppajjanadhammatāya niyato. Sambodhīti uparimaggattayasaṅkhātā sambodhi. Sambujjhatīti hi sambodhi, ariyamaggo. So ca idha paṭhamamaggassa adhigatattā avasiṭṭho eva adhigantabbabhāvena icchitabboti. Tenāha ‘‘uparimaggattayaṃ avassaṃ sampāpako’’ti. Uparimaggattayaṃ avassaṃ sampāpuṇātīti sampāpako, sotāpanno.
佛陀行仪论显示巴利原文
Buddhāciṇṇakathā
22 “随法”即随顺出世间法的法。“不告而”是“不询问而”的解释。“出发作国域游行”:此处虽可意会iti音而未曾说出,其他类似处也是如此。其中,“国域游行”即在国域中行走;行走即游行,此即是游行,在国域中的游行为国域游行。“出发作彼”即出发,意为前往国域旅行。“正出发时”以限定词显示非不出发。于“出发作国域游行”处,为显示世尊的游行出发方式,而说“作国域游行时”等。所谓游行,有二种:急行与不急行。其中,虽远亦见应度之人,为度彼而急速前往,名为急行,此应见于迎接大迦叶长老等事中。确实,世尊迎接大迦叶长老时,须臾间行三伽浮他;为阿罗婆迦故行三十由旬;为央掘摩罗亦如是;为补库萨提故行四十五由旬;为大劫宾那故行一百二十由旬;为达尼耶故行七百由旬;为法将的共住弟子林住帝沙沙弥故行一百二十三伽浮他,此为急行。若依村、镇、城次第,每日行一由旬或半由旬,以乞食等摄受世间而行,此名为不急行。世尊作此游行时,于大圈、中圈、末圈此三圈之一中行。其中,因说“国域游行”,故此处意指不急行。为分别显示彼而显示巴利原文
22.Anudhammatāti lokuttaradhammānugato dhammo. Anapaloketvāti padassa vivaraṇaṃ ‘‘anāpucchitvā’’ti. Janapadacārikaṃ pakkamantīti ettha iti-saddo gamyamānatāya na vutto, evaṃ aññatthāpi īdisesu ṭhānesu. Tattha janapadacārikanti janapadesu caraṇaṃ, caraṇaṃ vā cāro, so eva cārikā, janapadesu cārikā janapadacārikā. Taṃ pakkamanti, janapadagamanaṃ gacchantīti attho. Pakkamantiyevāti avadhāraṇena no na pakkamantīti dasseti. ‘‘Janapadacārikaṃ pakkamantī’’ti ettha ṭhatvā bhagavato cārikāpakkamanavidhiṃ dassento āha ‘‘janapadacārikaṃ carantā cā’’tiādi. Cārikā ca nāmesā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.254; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.254) duvidhā turitacārikā ceva aturitacārikā ca. Tattha dūrepi bodhaneyyapuggalaṃ disvā tassa bodhanatthāya sahasā gamanaṃ turitacārikā nāma, sā mahākassapattherapaccuggamanādīsu daṭṭhabbā. Bhagavā hi mahākassapattheraṃ paccuggacchanto muhuttena tigāvutamagamāsi, āḷavakassatthāya tiṃsayojanaṃ, tathā aṅgulimālassa, pukkusātissa pana pañcacattālīsayojanaṃ, mahākappinassa vīsayojanasataṃ, dhaniyassatthāya sattayojanasatāni agamāsi, dhammasenāpatino saddhivihārikassa vanavāsītissasāmaṇerassa tigāvutādhikaṃ vīsayojanasataṃ agamāsi, ayaṃ turitacārikā. Yaṃ pana gāmanigamanagarapaṭipāṭiyā devasikaṃ yojanaaḍḍhayojanavasena piṇḍapātacariyādīhi lokaṃ anuggaṇhantassa gamanaṃ, ayaṃ aturitacārikā nāma. Imaṃ pana cārikaṃ caranto bhagavā mahāmaṇḍalaṃ majjhimamaṇḍalaṃ antimamaṇḍalanti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ maṇḍalānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ carati. Tattha ‘‘janapadacārika’’nti vuttattā aturitacārikāva idhādhippetā. Tameva vibhajitvā dassento āha ‘‘mahāmaṇḍalaṃ majjhimamaṇḍala’’ntiādi.
其中,“最末圈”指小圈,或因其他圈皆包含于其中而称为最末圈,意即最内圈。那么,这些圈的体量如何?答:“其中大圈为九百由旬”等。九百由旬之地也仅属中土范围,超出此者便非所许,因为疾速游化时不会前往。自出发之时起,所到之处四方各一百由旬内便人声鼎沸,先到的比丘得以邀请;其余两圈中的供养会流向大圈。诸佛世尊在那些村落、集镇中,或住一日,或住二日,以接受衣、食等资具摄受大众,并以法施增长令导向解脱的善法,故说“在村落、集镇等处,以接受食物资具摄受大众”等。止与观尚稚嫩——其中,“观稚嫩”指名色分别智、度疑清净智、思惟智、道非道智这四种智的统称;“止的稚嫩”则应依近行定来理解。“若在雨安居期间比丘们的止观尚稚嫩”,这仅是举例说明。也因其他原因,例如中圈所化众生的智慧成熟等,若欲在中圈游化,则需住满四个月后方才出发。显示巴利原文
Tattha antimamaṇḍalanti khuddakamaṇḍalaṃ, itaresaṃ vā maṇḍalānaṃ antogadhattā antimamaṇḍalaṃ, abbhantarimamaṇḍalanti vuttaṃ hoti. Imesaṃ pana maṇḍalānaṃ kiṃ pamāṇanti āha ‘‘tattha mahāmaṇḍalaṃ navayojanasatika’’ntiādi. Navayojanasatikampi ṭhānaṃ majjhimadesapariyāpannameva, tato paraṃ nādhippetaṃ turitacārikāvasena agamanato. Yasmā nikkhantakālato paṭṭhāya gatagataṭṭhānassa catūsu passesu samantato yojanasataṃ ekakolāhalaṃ hoti, purimaṃ purimaṃ āgatā nimantetuṃ labhanti, itaresu dvīsu maṇḍalesu sakkāro mahāmaṇḍalaṃ osarati, tattha buddhā bhagavanto tesu tesu gāmanigamesu ekāhaṃ dvīhaṃ vasantā mahājanaṃ āmisapaṭiggahena anuggaṇhanti, dhammadānena ca vivaṭṭūpanissitaṃ kusalaṃ vaḍḍhenti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘gāmanigamādīsu mahājanaṃ āmisapaṭiggahena anuggaṇhantā’’tiādi. Samathavipassanā taruṇā hontīti ettha taruṇā vipassanāti saṅkhāraparicchedane ñāṇaṃ kaṅkhāvitaraṇe ñāṇaṃ sammasane ñāṇaṃ maggāmagge ñāṇanti catunnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Samathassa taruṇabhāvo pana upacārasamādhivasena veditabbo. ‘‘Sace pana antovasse bhikkhūnaṃ samathavipassanā taruṇā hontī’’ti idaṃ nidassanamattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññenapi majjhimamaṇḍale veneyyānaṃ ñāṇaparipākādikāraṇena majjhimamaṇḍale cārikaṃ caritukāmā cātumāsaṃ vasitvāva nikkhamanti.
给予自恣摄受,即以允许的方式给予。摩伽始罗月(九月)的第一天——这是依现今通行的说法,指迦提月(十月)下半月的初一日。他们——指那些佛陀。因应由他们调伏,故说“他们的所化众生”。“所化众生”即通过游化应调伏的众生。在摩伽始罗月也住于该处,至颇沙月(十二月)的第一天——这也应视为仅是举例。即使住满四个月,若佛陀的所化众生根器尚未成熟,则等待他们根器成熟,再住一个月、两个月或四个月,然后由大比丘僧团围绕而出,依前述方式摄受世间,以七个月、六个月、五个月或四个月完成游化。“唯依所化众生之需”——此决定语表示并非为衣等事而游化。确实,在这三圈中无论何处游化,都不是为了衣等事,而是出于对世间的悲悯:那些贫苦、愚痴、老病者心想“何时能来见如来?当我游化时,大众将得以见如来,其中有些人会心生净信,有些人会以花鬘等供养,有些人会施一匙之食,有些人会舍弃邪见而生起正见,这将为他们带来长久的利益与安乐”,佛陀如是出于悲悯而游化。显示巴利原文
Pavāraṇāsaṅgahaṃ datvāti anumatidānavasena datvā. Māgasirassa paṭhamadivaseti māgasiramāsassa paṭhamadivase. Idañcetarahi pavattavohāravasena kattikamāsassa aparapakkhapāṭipadadivasaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tesanti tesaṃ buddhānaṃ. Tehi vinetabbattā ‘‘tesaṃ vineyyasattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vineyyasattāti ca cārikāya vinetabbasattā. Māgasiramāsampi tattheva vasitvā phussamāsassa paṭhamadivaseti idampi nidassanamattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Catumāsavutthānampi buddhānaṃ vineyyasattā aparipakkindriyā honti, tesaṃ indriyaparipākaṃ āgamayamānā aparampi ekamāsaṃ vā dviticatumāsaṃ vā tatthevavasitvā mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivārā nikkhamitvā purimanayeneva lokaṃ anuggaṇhantā sattahi vā chahi vā pañcahi vā catūhi vā māsehi cārikaṃ pariyosāpenti. Veneyyavasenevāti avadhāraṇena na cīvarādihetu carantīti dasseti. Tathā hi imesu tīsu maṇḍalesu yattha katthaci cārikaṃ carantā na cīvarādihetu caranti, atha kho ye duggatabālajiṇṇabyādhikā, te ‘‘kadā tathāgataṃ āgantvā passissanti, mayi pana cārikaṃ carante mahājano tathāgatadassanaṃ labhissati, tattha keci cittāni pasādessanti, keci mālādīhi pūjessanti, keci kaṭacchubhikkhaṃ dassanti, keci micchādassanaṃ pahāya sammādiṭṭhikā bhavissanti, taṃ nesaṃ bhavissati dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’’ti evaṃ lokānukampāya cārikaṃ caranti.
再者,诸佛世尊因四种理由而游化:为以经行方式令身体轻安;为期待有事发生之时;为给比丘们制定学处;为觉悟各处根器成熟的应度众生。又因另外四种理由而游化:为令众生皈依佛、皈依法、皈依僧;为以广大法雨滋润四众。又因另外五种理由而游化:为令众生远离杀生、远离不与取、远离欲邪行、远离妄语、远离饮酒等放逸之因。又因另外八种理由而游化:为令众生证得初禅、第二禅……乃至证得非想非非想处定。又因另外八种理由而游化:为令众生证得入流道、须陀洹果……乃至证得阿罗汉果。显示巴利原文
Apica catūhi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto cārikaṃ caranti jaṅghavihāravasena sarīraphāsukatthāya, aṭṭhuppattikālābhikaṅkhanatthāya, bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadapaññāpanatthāya, tattha tattha paripākagatindriye bodhaneyyasatte bodhanatthāyāti. Aparehipi catūhi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto cārikaṃ caranti buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchissantīti vā, dhammaṃ, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchissantīti vā, mahatā dhammavassena catasso parisā santappessāmāti vā. Aparehipi pañcahi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto cārikaṃ caranti pāṇātipātā viramissantīti vā, adinnādānā, kāmesumicchācārā, musāvādā, surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā viramissantīti vā. Aparehipi aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto cārikaṃ caranti paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ paṭilabhissantīti vā, dutiyaṃ…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ paṭilabhissantīti vā. Aparehipi aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto cārikaṃ caranti sotāpattimaggaṃ adhigamissantīti vā, sotāpattiphalaṃ…pe… arahattaphalaṃ sacchikarissantīti vāti.
“犹如采花而行”——以此说明:犹如花匠见到繁花似锦之处,便在那里久久停留采花,见花采尽之处,便不滞留,舍离该处而前往他处采花游走;同样地,诸佛也是如此,在村庄、集镇等处,若所化众生众多,即使为调伏他们而久住之后,对于已无所化众生的村庄等处也不滞留,舍离该处而前往他处有所化众生众多的村庄等处居住游化。正因如此,即使在极小的最末圈中,由于具足亲依止缘者众多,他们也游化长达七个月之久。显示巴利原文
Pupphāni ocinantā viya carantīti iminā yathā mālākāro bahuṃ pupphagacchaṃ disvā tattha cirampi ṭhatvā pupphāni ocinitvā pupphasuññaṃ gacchaṃ disvā tattha papañcaṃ akatvā taṃ pahāya aññattha gantvā pupphāni ocinanto vicarati, evameva buddhāpi yattha gāmanigamādīsu vineyyasattā bahū honti, tattha cirampi vasantā te vinetvā vineyyasuññagāmādīsu papañcaṃ akatvā taṃ pahāya aññattha bahuvineyyakesu gāmādīsu vasantā vicarantīti dasseti. Tatoyeva ca atikhuddakepi antimamaṇḍale upanissayavantānaṃ bahubhāvato tāva bahumpi kālaṃ sattamāsapariyantaṃ cārikaṃ caranti.
由于具足寂静自性,或因是烦恼寂灭之因,故涅槃为寂静;又因是乐之因,故为乐。因此说“以寂静、乐的涅槃为所缘”。所谓一万轮围,即作为生起之田的一万世界。这是依天与梵天而说,但人类唯有在此同一轮围中方成为可觉悟者。“观察可觉悟众生”是指:先以大悲遍满,其后扩展一切知智之网,观察进入该网内的可觉悟众生。据说诸佛入大悲定,出定后决意:“凡有能力、智已成熟、今日即应由我调伏的众生,愿他们显现于我的智前”,而后作意。随着他们的作意,一个、两个或多个当时堪受调伏的应度者便进入一切知智的范围,此中即是佛的威力。对于如此进入范围的众生,佛观察他们的资粮、前行、前因以及现前所行的行道。因为为了摄受应度众生而作意时,他们首先以应度之性而显现。其后,为了考察“将会如何”,佛以皈依等观察某种成就,从而观察他们的前行资粮。显示巴利原文
Santasabhāvattā kilesasamaṇahetutāya vā santaṃ nibbānaṃ, sukhakāraṇatāya ca sukhanti āha ‘‘santaṃ sukhaṃ nibbānamārammaṇaṃ katvā’’ti. Dasasahassacakkavāḷeti jātikkhettabhūtāya dasasahassilokadhātuyā. Idañca devabrahmānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, manussā pana imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe bodhaneyyā honti. Bodhaneyyasattasamavalokananti paṭhamaṃ mahākaruṇāya pharitvā pacchā sabbaññutaññāṇajālaṃ pattharitvā tassa anto paviṭṭhānaṃ bodhaneyyasattānaṃ samolokanaṃ. Buddhā kira mahākaruṇāsamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘ye sattā bhabbā paripākañāṇā ajjayeva mayā vinetabbā, te mayhaṃ ñāṇassa upaṭṭhahantū’’ti cittaṃ adhiṭṭhāya samannāharanti. Tesaṃ saha samannāhārā eko vā dve vā bahū vā tadā vinayūpagā veneyyā sabbaññutaññāṇassa āpāthamāgacchanti, ayamettha buddhānubhāvo. Evaṃ āpāthamāgatānaṃ pana nesaṃ upanissayaṃ pubbacariyaṃ pubbahetuṃ sampativattamānañca paṭipattiṃ olokenti. Veneyyasattapariggaṇhanatthañhi samannāhāre kate paṭhamaṃ nesaṃ veneyyabhāveneva upaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Atha ‘‘kiṃ nu kho bhavissatī’’ti saraṇagamanādivasena kañci nipphattiṃ vīmaṃsamānā pubbupanissayāni olokenti.
“已进入”指已告知,或已进入众中。“两次”指一年中两次。据说在佛世时,比丘们每年聚集两次:在临近入雨安居时和自恣时。在临近入雨安居时,十位、二十位、三十位、四十位乃至五十位比丘分群结队,为求业处而来。世尊与他们共相慰勉后,问道:“比丘们,为何在临近入雨安居时游方?”他们便请求:“世尊,我们为求业处而来,请授予我们业处。”导师根据他们的行相,对贪行者授予不净业处,对嗔行者授予慈心业处,对痴行者则教示:“诵经、遍问、适时听法、适时论法,这对你是适合的。”虽然对痴行者而言,入出息念业处是适合的,但为了使其成为业处修习之器、去除迷惑,首先令其从事诵经、遍问、听法、论法。对寻行者授予入出息念业处。对信行者,前六随念特别适合,为了显示这些随念修习的前行分,以令人净信之经阐明佛之善觉、法之善法性、僧之善行道。对智行者,死随念、寂止随念、四界差别、食厌想特别适合,为了显示这些的助益法,而讲述与无常等相关的甚深经典。他们取得业处后,若适宜,便安住在导师身边;若不适宜,则询问适宜的住处后离去。他们安住于彼处,持守……显示巴利原文
Otiṇṇeti ārocite, parisamajjhaṃ vā otiṇṇe. Dvikkhattunti ekasmiṃ saṃvacchare dvikkhattuṃ. Buddhakāle kira ekekasmiṃ saṃvacchare dve vāre bhikkhū sannipatanti upakaṭṭhavassūpanāyikakāle ca pavāraṇākāle ca. Upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya dasapi vīsampi tiṃsampi cattālīsampi paññāsampi bhikkhū vaggavaggā hutvā kammaṭṭhānatthāya āgacchanti. Bhagavā tehi saddhiṃ sammoditvā ‘‘kasmā, bhikkhave, upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya vicarathā’’ti pucchati. Atha te ‘‘bhagavā kammaṭṭhānatthaṃ āgatamha, kammaṭṭhānaṃ no dethā’’ti yācanti. Satthā tesaṃ cariyavasena rāgacaritassa asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ deti, dosacaritassa mettākammaṭṭhānaṃ, mohacaritassa ‘‘uddeso paripucchā kālena dhammassavanaṃ kālena dhammasākacchā idaṃ tuyhaṃ sappāya’’nti ācikkhati. Kiñcāpi hi mohacaritassa ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ sappāyaṃ, kammaṭṭhānabhāvanāya pana bhājanabhūtaṃ kātuṃ sammohavigamāya paṭhamaṃ uddesaparipucchādhammassavanadhammasākacchāsu niyojeti. Vitakkacaritassa ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ deti. Saddhācaritassa visesato purimā cha anussatiyo sappāyā, tāsaṃ pana anuyuñjane ayaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipattīti dassetuṃ pasādanīyasuttantena buddhasubodhitaṃ dhammasudhammataṃ saṅghasuppaṭipattiñca pakāseti. Ñāṇacaritassa pana maraṇassati upasamānussati catudhātuvavatthānaṃ āhārepaṭikūlasaññā visesato sappāyā, tesaṃ upakāradhammadassanatthaṃ aniccatādipaṭisaṃyutte gambhīre suttante katheti. Te kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā sace sappāyaṃ hoti, satthu santike eva vasanti. No ce hoti, sappāyaṃ senāsanaṃ pucchantā gacchanti. Tepi tattha vasantā temāsikaṃ paṭipadaṃ gahetvā ghaṭentā vāyamantā sotāpannāpi honti sakadāgāminopi anāgāminopi arahantopi. Tato vutthavassā pavāretvā satthu santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘bhagavā ahaṃ tumhākaṃ santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā sotāpattiphalaṃ patto…pe… ahaṃ aggaphalaṃ arahatta’’nti paṭiladdhaguṇaṃ ārocenti, upari anadhigatassa adhigamāya kammaṭṭhānañca yācanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pure vassūpanāyikāya ca kammaṭṭhānaggahaṇatthaṃ…pe… upari kammaṭṭhānaggahaṇatthañcā’’ti.
“Āyāma”中的“ā”与“āgaccha”同义,故说“āyāma即āgaccha yāma”,意为“来,我们走吧”,也就是“来,我们去吧”。“Ānanda”——世尊因长老常随侍近而称呼他,并非因为当时没有比丘住在导师身边。事实上,当时导师身边的比丘僧团有五百人之多。然而长老告知比丘们:“贤友们,请拿起衣钵,世尊想去某处。”由于经中说“那时,世尊告诉尊者阿难”,此处“对世尊回应”中的“世尊”是属格,实际上关联于“告诉”一词,故以“回应了世尊的话”来表达此意。而“Bhagavato”在此是与“回应”相关的与格,犹如“对提婆达多回应”。“Paccassosi”中的“paṭi”字表示面向,故说“面向而听”,意思是:面向世尊,恭敬而听,而非漠然不理地听。显示巴利原文
Āyāmāti ettha ā-saddo ‘‘āgacchā’’ti iminā samānatthoti āha ‘‘āyāmāti āgaccha yāmā’’ti, ehi gacchāmāti attho. Ānandāti bhagavā santikāvacarattā theraṃ ālapati, na pana tadā satthu santike vasantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ abhāvato. Pañcasataparimāṇo hi tadā bhagavato santike bhikkhusaṅgho. Thero pana ‘‘gaṇhathāvuso pattacīvarāni, bhagavā asukaṭṭhānaṃ gantukāmo’’ti bhikkhūnaṃ āroceti. ‘‘Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ āmantesī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘bhagavato paccassosī’’ti idha bhagavatoti sāmivacanaṃ āmantanavacanameva sambandhīantaraṃ apekkhatīti iminā adhippāyena ‘‘bhagavato vacanaṃ paṭiassosī’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhagavatoti pana idaṃ patissavasambandhena sampadānavacanaṃ yathā ‘‘devadattassa paṭissuṇotī’’ti. Paccassosīti ettha paṭi-saddo abhimukhavacanoti āha ‘‘abhimukho hutvā suṇī’’ti. Bhagavato mukhābhimukho hutvā adhivāsetvā suṇi, na udāsino hutvāti adhippāyo.
由于此神通是以客比丘的身份而作,故说“从城门开始”。“以金色液网般的光芒”一句中,“rasa”是水的同义词,“piñjara”是金色的同义词,因此意为:如同金色水流般的金色光芒。“Samujjotayamāno”意为照亮。“Assa”指韦兰阇婆罗门。“欲近坐于世尊”意为想要走近世尊而坐,即坐在世尊附近。显示巴利原文
Tassa pāṭihāriyassa āgantukavasena katattā vuttaṃ ‘‘nagaradvārato paṭṭhāyā’’ti. Suvaṇṇarasapiñjarāhi rasmīhīti ettha rasa-saddo udakapariyāyo, piñjara-saddo hemavaṇṇapariyāyo, tasmā suvaṇṇajaladhārā viya suvaṇṇavaṇṇāhi rasmīhīti attho. Samujjotayamānoti obhāsayamāno. Assāti verañjassa brāhmaṇassa. Bhagavantaṃ upanisīditukāmoti bhagavantaṃ upagantvā nisīditukāmo, bhagavato samīpe nisīditukāmoti vuttaṃ hoti.
“婆罗门,我们受你邀请,已度过雨安居”这句话,应依经典来理解其关联。“应给”是祈使语气,意为“应当给予”。“并非没有”并非指不存在,而是强调确实存在。或者,此处应透过语尾变化来理解意义,因此说“或者”等。以此表明,由于是通称,此处是以中性词来表述。“没有”是指“我们没有”。“不”的说明即是“没有”。如同那些不愿布施的人一样,因此说“如同”等。“拥有众多财富资具”中,“财富”指喜悦,“财富资具”即喜悦之资具,意为喜悦之因。他们拥有众多财富、谷物、金银、各种装饰品、金器等各类财富资具,故称“拥有众多财富资具”。对于这些拥有众多财富资具却吝啬的人,如同他们不愿布施一样,我们也没有不愿布施之心,应如此关联。“那在此处从何可得”中,“那”指那个原因或那件事。“此处”指在家生活。在第二种意义解释中,“那”指所施之物。“此处”指在这三个月期间内。“以”指由于那个原因,或指行为。在第二种意义解释中,“以”指所施之物。显示巴利原文
Brāhmaṇa tayā nimantitā vassaṃvutthā amhāti pāḷiyaṃ sambandho veditabbo. Dātabbo assāti dātabbo bhaveyya. No asantoti neva avijjamāno, kintu vijjamānoyevāti dīpeti. Vinā vā liṅgavipallāsenettha attho daṭṭhabboti āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Iminā sāmaññavacanato ettha napuṃsakaliṅganiddesoti dasseti. No natthīti no amhākaṃ natthi. Noti vā etassa vivaraṇaṃ natthīti. Kesaṃ adātukāmatā viyāti āha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi. Pahūtavittūpakaraṇānanti ettha vittīti tuṭṭhi, vittiyā upakaraṇaṃ vittūpakaraṇaṃ, tuṭṭhikāraṇanti attho. Pahūtaṃ dhanadhaññajātarūparajatanānāvidhālaṅkārasuvaṇṇabhājanādibhedaṃ vittūpakaraṇametesanti pahūtavittūpakaraṇā, tesaṃ pahūtavittūpakaraṇānaṃ maccharīnaṃ yathā adātukāmatā, evaṃ no adātukāmatāpi natthīti sambandho. Taṃ kutettha labbhāti ettha tanti taṃ kāraṇaṃ, taṃ kiccaṃ vā. Etthāti gharāvāse. Dutiye pana atthavikappe tanti deyyadhammassa parāmasanaṃ. Etthāti imasmiṃ temāsabbhantareti attho. Yanti yena kāraṇena, kiriyāparāmasanaṃ vā. Dutiye pana atthavikappe yanti yaṃ deyyadhammanti attho.
“令婆罗门明白,不应再思虑在家生活的障碍”的意思是,使他了知:“婆罗门,这并非因为在家生活的障碍,而是魔的诱惑。”“随应当时之机”是指随顺他当时的内心倾向。由于他当时那种趋于出离的智慧尚未成熟,只开示了内在的意义,所以说“开示了现世与来世的利益”,即令他现量明了。“于善法”指三界善法;“于此”指在善法中如法劝勉之后。“令婆罗门振奋”是指正确地层层提携,使他在福行中变得敏锐明净,而这正是激发其热忱,因此说“令生热忱”。如此,由福行中生起的热忱必然具备这些功德并成就现世等利益,因此以这一热忱及其自身所具的功德来令他欢喜,正确地使他达到喜悦满足的状态。显示巴利原文
Alaṃ gharāvāsapalibodhacintāyāti saññāpetvāti brāhmaṇa netaṃ gharāvāsapalibodhena kataṃ, atha kho mārāvaṭṭanenāti brāhmaṇaṃ saññāpetvā. Taṅkhaṇānurūpāyāti yādisī tadā tassa ajjhāsayappavatti, tadanurūpāyāti attho. Tassa tadā tādisassa vivaṭṭasannissitassa ñāṇaparipākassa abhāvato kevalaṃ abbhantarasannissito eva attho dassitoti āha ‘‘diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaṃ atthaṃ sandassetvā’’ti, paccakkhato vibhāvetvāti attho. Kusale dhammeti tebhūmake kusale dhamme. Tatthāti kusaladhamme yathāsamādapite. Nanti brāhmaṇaṃ. Samuttejetvāti sammadeva uparūpari nivesetvā puññakiriyāya tikkhavisadabhāvaṃ āpādetvā. Taṃ pana atthato tassa ussāhajananaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘saussāhaṃ katvā’’ti. Evaṃ puññakiriyāya saussāhato evarūpaguṇasamaṅgitā ca niyamato diṭṭhadhammikādiatthasampādananti evaṃ saussāhatāya aññehi ca tasmiṃ vijjamānaguṇehi sampahaṃsetvā sammadeva haṭṭhatuṭṭhabhāvaṃ āpādetvā.
如果世尊降下法宝之雨,为何他未证得殊胜?因为不具备亲依止缘。既然如此,世尊为何还要对他如此降下法宝之雨?答:虽然他并未证得殊胜,然而为了未来证得涅槃,前后所说的法都成为习气分,因为世尊绝无徒劳的说法。“三个月的所施物”指应当布施长达三个月的物品。“哪一天”即是在哪一天。显示巴利原文
Yadi bhagavā dhammaratanavassaṃ vassi, atha kasmā so visesaṃ nādhigacchi? Upanissayasampattiyā abhāvato. Yadi evaṃ kasmā bhagavā tassa tathā dhammaratanavassaṃ vassīti? Vuccate – yadipi tassa visesādhigamo natthi, āyatiṃ pana nibbānādhigamatthāya vāsanābhāgiyā ca sabbā purimapacchimadhammakathā ahosīti daṭṭhabbā. Na hi bhagavato niratthakā dhammadesanā atthi. Temāsikopi deyyadhammoti temāsaṃ dātabbopi deyyadhammo. Yaṃ divasanti yasmiṃ divase.
23 “以佛为导首者”指以佛陀为导首的比丘僧团,其义为以佛陀为最上首。“尽其所需而作”即尽所需而以食物作了安排。拒绝接受递上的食物,可通过手势、面部表情或言语来表示,故说“以手势”等。“手已从钵移开者”中,“手已从钵移开”指手已离钵,是异句关系的外在意义复合词,因此说“手已从钵移开”等。另有读作“onittapattapāṇi”者,意为钵已洗净,即洗去食物等令钵清净,手与钵俱净,置钵一旁而坐。“于绢布与彩绢布”指绢布和彩绢布。其中,产于绢布之地者为绢布,也有人说是一种丝;彩绢布则是中国之布。“系带等”中,“系带”是系缚物,如肩带、钵袋等。“药油”指以药煎炼而成的油。“皮囊”指皮革制成的油容器。每位比丘各得价值千金的油,应作此关联。显示巴利原文
23.Buddhapariṇāyakanti buddho pariṇāyako etassāti buddhapariṇāyako, bhikkhusaṅgho. Taṃ buddhapariṇāyakaṃ, buddhajeṭṭhakanti attho. Yāvadatthaṃ katvāti yāva attho, tāva bhojanena tadā katanti adhippāyo. Dātuṃ upanītabhikkhāya paṭikkhepo nāma hatthasaññāya mukhavikārena vacībhedena vā hotīti āha ‘‘hatthasaññāyā’’tiādi. Onītapattapāṇinti ettha onīto pattato pāṇi etassāti onītapattapāṇīti bhinnādhikaraṇavisayoyaṃ saddo bāhiratthasamāsoti āha ‘‘pattato onītapāṇi’’ntiādi. ‘‘Onittapattapāṇi’’ntipi pāṭho, tassattho onittaṃ nānābhūtaṃ vinābhūtaṃ āmisāpanayanena vā sucikataṃ pattaṃ pāṇito assāti onittapattapāṇi , taṃ onittapattapāṇiṃ, hatthe ca pattañca dhovitvā ekamante pattaṃ nikkhipitvā nisinnanti attho. Pattuṇṇapaṭṭapaṭe cāti pattuṇṇapaṭe ca paṭṭapaṭe ca. Tattha pattuṇṇapadese bhavā pattuṇṇā, kosiyavisesātipi vadanti. Paṭṭāni pana cīnapaṭāni. Āyogādīsu āyogoti paṭiāyogo, aṃsabaddhakaṃ pattatthavikādīsu. Bhesajjatelānanti bhesajjasampākena sādhitatelānaṃ. Tumbānīti cammamayatelabhājanāni. Ekamekassa bhikkhuno sahassagghanakaṃ telamadāsīti sambandho.
“举行了大祭祀”指作了大布施。“与妻子儿女一同礼敬后坐下”意为与妻子儿女一起礼敬后坐下。“三个月”是表持续关系的业格。他坐下时心想:“我将在今天听闻这三个月应听的法。”为了圆满他的这一心愿而说法,故说“令其心愿圆满”。“跟随”即随行。显示巴利原文
Mahāyāgaṃ yajitvāti mahādānaṃ datvā. Saputtadāraṃ vanditvā nisinnanti puttadārehi saddhiṃ vanditvā nisinnaṃ. Temāsanti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. ‘‘Temāsaṃ sotabbadhammaṃ ajjeva suṇissāmī’’ti nisinnassa taṃ ajjhāsayaṃ pūretvā desitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘paripuṇṇasaṅkappaṃ kurumāno’’ti. Anubandhitvāti anugantvā.
诸佛没有不喜乐与不安,因此说“随心所欲、随其所乐而住”。因为“喜乐”与“喜爱”在意义上实为一个。这里的“喜乐”是“喜好”的同义词,不是“乐着”的同义词。若以乐着而住于某处,当所乐着的事物消失时,便可能对该处产生不喜乐;但漏尽者已没有这种情形,更何况诸佛。因此,诸佛并不是因喜乐而住于某处,之后喜乐消失才前往他处;而是为了教化应度者而住于某处,待此事成就后,为了教化其他应度者而前往他处,这就是这里所说的“随其所乐”。“未至索雷城等”指未进入大游行路线上的索雷城等城镇。“波耶伽城”既是村庄名,也是渡口名。“恒河”即名为恒河的河流。“他由此而下”中,“此”是表原因的业格,故说“他由此而下”。显示巴利原文
Buddhānaṃ anabhiratiparitassitā nāma natthīti āha ‘‘yathājjhāsayaṃ yathārucitaṃ vāsaṃ vasitvā’’ti. Abhirantaṃ abhiratīti hi atthato ekaṃ. Abhirantasaddo cāyaṃ abhirucipariyāyo, na assādapariyāyo. Assādavasena ca katthaci vasantassa assādavatthuvigamanena siyā tassa tattha anabhirati, tayidaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ natthi, pageva buddhānaṃ, tasmā abhirativasena katthaci vasitvā tadabhāvato aññattha gamanaṃ nāma buddhānaṃ natthi, vineyyavinayanatthaṃ pana katthaci vasitvā tasmiṃ siddhe vineyyavinayatthameva tato aññattha gacchanti, ayamettha yathāruci. Soreyyādīni anupagammāti mahāmaṇḍalacārikāya vīthibhūtāni soreyyanagarādīni anupagantvā. Payāgapatiṭṭhānanti gāmassapi adhivacanaṃ titthassapi. Gaṅgaṃ nadinti gaṅgaṃ nāma nadiṃ. Tadavasarīti ettha tanti karaṇatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘tena avasari tadavasarī’’ti.
“Samantapāsādikā(普皆令净)”者:从一切方面、完全地令人产生净信,故为普皆令净,即属于那普皆令净的。在此,“于普皆令净的……在普皆令净性中”这句中,“在此”(tatra)是指前文之词,“此”(idaṃ)是将说之理由的词。其连接如下:所谓“于普皆令净的律藏注释”中,所说的那个名为“普皆令净”的注释,对于那普皆令净的注释,在其普皆令净性中、在其普皆令净的状态中、在其完全令人产生净信的作用中,有这样一件事。是什么事呢?即说“从师师相承”等。显示巴利原文
Samantapāsādikāyāti samantato sabbaso pasādaṃ janetīti samantapāsādikā, tassā samantapāsādikāya. Tatridaṃ samantapāsādikāya samantapāsādikattasminti ettha tatrāti purimavacanāpekkhaṃ, idanti vakkhamānakāraṇavacanāpekkhaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāyā’’ti, tatra yā sā samantapāsādikāti saṃvaṇṇanā vuttā , tassā samantapāsādikāya saṃvaṇṇanāya samantapāsādikattasmiṃ samantapāsādikabhāve sabbaso pasādajanakatte idaṃ hoti. Kiṃ hotīti āha ‘‘ācariyaparamparato’’tiādi.
所谓“师师相承”,是指在“优波离、陀娑迦”等(见《附随》3)所述及的师师相承之义。所谓“阐明因缘与事由之分类”,即阐明因缘的分类与事由的分类。其中,应知通过开示外因缘、内因缘、学处因缘,而阐明因缘的分类;阐明上座之说,则是事由的分类。“远离外道”,即如“依其自认,应驱摈比丘尼梅谛耶”等处所示,通过驳斥那些邪行外道的邪见,确立自宗,从而令自宗清净。显示巴利原文
Ācariyaparamparatoti ‘‘upāli dāsako’’tiādinā (pari. 3). Vuttaācariyaparamparato. Nidānavatthuppabhedadīpanatoti nidānappabhedadīpanato vatthuppabhedadīpanato ca. Tattha bāhiranidānaabbhantaranidānasikkhāpadanidānadassanavasena nidānappabhedadīpanaṃ veditabbaṃ, theravādappakāsanaṃ pana vatthuppabhedadīpanaṃ. Parasamayavivajjanatoti ‘‘sakāya paṭiññāya mettiyaṃ bhikkhuniṃ nāsethā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 384) micchāpaṭipannānaṃ paresaṃ laddhinirākaraṇato, tatoyeva ca attano samayapatiṭṭhāpanena sakasamayavisuddhito.
所谓“文句之清净”,应知是通过校订文本令文句清净,或依循声明学之轨则,显示词源以说明词语的构成,这也是文句清净的意思。所谓“显示分别纲目之差别”,是指针对“三种女人”等词语分别,依其相应方式而显示纲目之差别。“正观者”,指以智慧之眼正确观察者,即审察者之义。“不净信者”,指能引生不净信者。“此处”,指在《普皆令净》中。此与“正观之智者”相关联。因此应如此连接:此注释正是以《普皆令净》之名而流传。为说明这是对谁而说、由谁所说的法之注释,故有“对于律……”等文。显示巴利原文
Byañjanaparisodhanatoti pāṭhasodhanena byañjanaparisodhanaṃ veditabbaṃ, saddasatthānusārena vā nibbacanaṃ dassetvā padanipphattidassanaṃ byañjanaparisodhanaṃ. Vibhaṅganayabhedadassanatoti ‘‘tisso itthiyo’’tiādipadabhājanassa anurūpavasena nayabhedadassanato. Sampassatanti ñāṇacakkhunā sammā passantānaṃ, upaparikkhantānanti attho. Apāsādikanti appasādāvahaṃ. Etthāti samantapāsādikāya. Sampassataṃ viññūnanti sambandho. Tasmā ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā samantapāsādikātveva pavattāti yojetabbaṃ. Kassa kena desitassa saṃvaṇṇanāti āha ‘‘vinayassā’’tiādi.
如是,于《普皆令净》律藏注释中,名为《显扬真义》的显示巴利原文
Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya sāratthadīpaniyaṃ